Month: September 2013

  • Performing Politics: (review)

    Phillip Novak (bio)
    Le Moyne College
    NovakPP@lemoyne.edu

    Jennifer Fay, Theaters of Occupation: Hollywood and the Reeducation of Postwar Germany. UP of Minnesota, 2008.
     
    The usual approach to writing about film culture in postwar Germany is to restrict the discussion to films made by Germans, in order, as Jennifer Fay puts it in the introduction to Theaters of Occupation, “to assess how they negotiate Germany’s complicated relationship to anti-Semitism and to the country’s National Socialist past” (xxvi).1 Fay, however, is more interested in the postwar Germans’ sense of the present than in their relation to the past; and she’s less interested in postwar German films per se than in the ways those films functioned, along with the American movies screened as part of the Allies’ efforts at reeducating the German public, in the staging of the encounter between a shattered Germany and a politically and culturally ascendant United States.2 Indeed, although much of the book’s time and space are devoted to the examination of individual films and their reception, with all but one of the chapters turning around the consideration of what Fay calls a “nodal film” (144), Theaters of Occupation is less concerned with film than with ideology, cultural politics, policy, and political theory.3 Fay’s main aims are to lay out a critique of American ideological commitments—especially, but not exclusively, those informing U.S. policy during the occupation; and to argue, in the course of laying out that critique,4 first, that the U.S. effort to reeducate the Germans, at least insofar as Hollywood fiction films and American-made documentaries figured in that effort, failed to produce the desired effects; and, second, that the German experience of America’s reeducation campaign nonetheless promoted—inadvertently and in quite ironic ways—the development within Germany of a more genuinely democratic sensibility than the one the Americans were self-consciously aiming at.
     
    This redefining of the discursive terrain is on the whole very productive. As Fay’s analysis consistently demonstrates, a consideration of U.S. occupation policy regarding the reeducation of the postwar German population brings American ideologies into stark relief—mainly because the process of promoting American cultural identity more or less forced the Americans into wearing their ideological positions, as it were, on their sleeve. Moreover, the interdisciplinary nature of Fay’s work—which masterfully weaves together elements from an array of disparate fields—produces treatments of individual films that are at once novel, compelling, and persuasive. Helmut Käutner’s Der apfel ist ab (The Apple Fell, 1948), for example, has previously been thought to be of interest mainly because of the objections it raised among the clergy both before and during its release. Fay mostly sidesteps discussion of both the blurred religious allegory the film suggests and the cultural controversy that that allegory engendered. Instead, she presents Der apfel ist ab as a parody of democratic origins and as a political allegory satirizing the paucity of choices being made available to Germans as tensions between East and West began to rise. Her reading of this film is set in the context of a broader discussion of American cold-war propaganda as represented by Ernst Lubitsch’s Ninotchka (1939), which the Americans put into heavy rotation in Germany in 1948, the same year Der apfel ist ab premiered, and by the Welt im Film (World in Film) newsreels that were a principal tool in the reeducation effort (and whose screening was, as Fay notes, “compulsory for all exhibitors in the U.S. and British zones until January 1950” [46]). As Europe generally and Germany particularly became staging grounds for the conflicts between the U.S. and the Soviet Union, both Lubitsch’s film and the newsreels, Fay argues, presented reductive images of the competing political systems and of the distinctions between them—and by so doing worked to make the political choices before the Germans seem clear and straightforward. In Ninotchka, the choice between capitalism and communism is simplified to “one between embodied enjoyment and the suppression of desire, affect, and appetite” (90-91); the newsreels, simplifying further, offer a decision “between pleasure and unpleasure, survival and starvation, freedom and unfreedom” (112). Der apfel ist ab highlights the absurdity of these sorts of impossible choices where there is really no choice to make. And in its depiction of a protagonist unable to choose between a pair of polar opposites, figured as potential mates, the film raises questions about the very possibilities of self-government. Theaters of Occupation‘s analysis of the films and their relations, and of the cultural situation in which their interplay occurred, is rich, informative, nuanced, and clever.
     
    Cagier still is Fay’s work on, and with, George Cukor’s female gothic film Gaslight (1944), which surveys revealed to be highly popular among German audiences when it was released in Germany in 1948 (152). Fay doesn’t offer a reading of the film. Rather, by way of explaining its popularity, she teases out what she takes to be the various ways it resonates with occupation experience. She then uses it to build a portrait of “democratic subjectivity” (169). Citing studies by several scholars doing work on gothic literature, Fay argues that, historically, the gothic as literary genre is tied to concerns about “democracy … foreign invasion, loss of sovereignty, and violent regime change” (147). These ties make the genre amenable to analysis in the context of military occupation. Female gothic fictions and films, moreover, which center around images of disempowered women victimized by men who, shortly after the women marry them, turn out to be exploitative and murderous, would have appealed, Fay suggests, to an audience that was comprised largely of women; that as a whole, including both men and women, had been feminized—and made critical of masculine authority—by the experiences of war and occupation; and that felt betrayed—regardless of whatever commitments to National Socialism there might have been before the war—by Hitler and the Nazis. As for Gaslight: on Fay’s account, it can be, and might well have been, seen as having an almost allegorical relation to occupation history: there’s the paranoia inducing experience of the main character Paula’s relation to her “mystifying East European husband” (161), onto whom “we could variously map the Hitlers and Stalins of Europe” (162); there’s the “demystifying American rescuer” (161-62); there’s the threat of loss of identity, with Paula’s psychic disintegration paralleling German cultural disintegration; there’s the general sense of anxiety generated by the possibility that the present will collapse into a repetition of the past (“that Paula is fated to end as her mother did: alone in an asylum” [163]; that “the injunction that Germans imitate Americans and reproduce their popular culture,” given the “racism, xenophobia, militarism, and anticommunism” encoded in that popular culture, “could be interpreted as a terrifying call to reenact the very kinds of violence that prompted the occupation in the first place” [142]). “We could say,” Fay notes, “that Gaslight offers its German spectators a national script of female victimization, authoritarian manipulation, and perhaps also liberation that could find wide historical application” (163).
     
    In addition to capturing postwar German concerns and resonating with occupation experience, Gaslight also serves, according to Fay, an educational function—mainly by endorsing Paula’s mistrust of the male authority figures in her life. In female gothic plots, that is, the sanity of the protagonist is typically put into question: shortly after marrying a mysterious and charismatic man she doesn’t know well enough, the heroine comes to believe that the man is trying to kill her; but circumstances are usually such that the legitimacy of the heroine’s suspicions remains in doubt. There is a history of insanity she may be repeating. She may simply be paranoid, her sense of victimization a delusion. And in some female gothic films—Alfred Hitchcock’s Suspicion (1941), for example—the heroine’s concerns do turn out to be a fantasy. Not so in the case of Gaslight: Paula is right to be suspicious of her husband; he is, in fact, trying to drive her mad and destroy her. Moreover, Paula’s mistrust—a “gothic skepticism” (172)—carries over into her relation to the man who helps save her—from whom she accepts, not a proposal of marriage, but of friendship. “Paula learns the folly of falling too quickly and too completely for the man who would rescue her from her dark past, and she learns that the only way to avoid history’s return is by knowing that history to the best of her ability” (171). The implications, in terms of political allegory, are clear: “where Ninotchka allows herself to be seduced by capitalism, the gothic heroine would be suspicious of the regime that lures her. She would be wary that this new government may harbor a violent history and may be just as untrustworthy as the regime it replaces” (171). The suffering the Germans endured as a consequence of their allegiances to Hitler and National Socialism has, in other words, predisposed the population toward a healthy skepticism concerning authority and an acute awareness of the violence necessarily associated with the institution of law. The American effort at reeducating the Germans—at least where the use of films is concerned—only served to reinforce the Germans’ wariness: the Welt im Film newsreels recalled Nazi propaganda; Hollywood movies, made ambiguous by their efforts to abide by censorship codes, often contained material that could be seen as signaling similarities between American history and the history of Nazi Germany (both of which are marked by genocidal violence) and between Nazi Germany’s and America’s ideological commitments (a shared faith in capitalism and fear of communism, shared anxieties about race that translate into the production and promotion of a white national identity, a shared veneration of military valor and the glories of war). “Rather than feeling propelled forward into a new political reality,” Fay writes, “there is a sense that Germans may have experienced the occupation as history’s uncanny return, or perhaps the return of uncanny history” (142)—a circumstance that produced in Germany, however, a productive paranoia, a suspiciousness about power and those who seek and wield it. Gaslight thus reflects German postwar dispositions and predispositions, but it can also be said to “foster,” Fay argues, “a democratic subjectivity” (169).
     
    What’s most striking about Fay’s analysis is the facility with which she organizes insights drawn from a diverse array of disciplines—literary criticism, literary theory, film studies, political theory and history—into a coherent whole. It’s a very rich tapestry that she weaves. But as smart as the analysis surely is, it does raise, for me a least, a few questions. The first has to do with the methodology Fay uses, not just here—in the chapter on the political implications for Germany of the reception of the female gothic film—but throughout the book.
     
    Much of Theaters of Occupation—most of the discussion of Hollywood films, parts of the chapters dealing mainly with films made in Germany—presents itself as a contribution to film reception history. That is, one of Fay’s chief concerns is to identify the ways Germans living under the American occupation were responding to particular films and to particular types of films. The persuasiveness of her claims on that score is an issue in its own right. But the force of what she has to say about U.S. foreign policy—that the reeducation effort failed to deliver the results the Americans desired but did produce a sort of inadvertent success when looked at from the standpoint of the Germans—depends at least in part on how convincing she is on the issue of reception: if the Germans aren’t seeing echoes of their disastrous National Socialist past in the American films they are watching, then they don’t acquire the “gothic skepticism” that is, for Fay, a key to the evolution of democracy in Germany after the war. And if the specifics involved in Fay’s account of Germany’s transformation into a democracy don’t hold up, either we’re left with a historical conundrum or we’re forced to return to a more conventional assessment of the historical situation (that, however flawed in details, U.S. occupation policies succeeded in laying the groundwork for the development of a democratic Germany).5
     
    The problem, of course, is that, in the absence of some sort of hard evidence—detailed surveys of audience reactions, collections of response cards filled out at the time of the viewing, broad cultural discussion (in the form, say, of editorials or letters to editors), or extensive review—it is difficult to make fully convincing claims about the ways actual viewers respond, or have responded, to films. In the case of films shown to German audiences during the occupation, as Fay herself admits, there is little hard evidence concerning audience attitudes to work with.6 Her chapter on Gaslight cites surveys and some contemporary reviews (both of Gaslight and of a few other films whose reception, according to Fay, bears on our understanding of the reception of Cukor’s film). While the survey results do tell us that Gaslight was the most popular film shown in Germany in 1948, they have nothing to say (going by Fay’s presentation of the material) about the reasons for its popularity. And the reviews Fay quotes don’t really speak to the issues at the core of her analysis. They do, in a sort of loose way, support her claim that “film reviewers in occupied Germany conspicuously engaged films … as ideological and even ethnographic texts that were meaningful within the wider discursive environment of occupation” (155), but the ideological and ethnographic concerns most on display in the passages she quotes have to do, not with worries about the possible reestablishment of a totalitarian regime in Germany (a gothic suspicion that history is repeating itself), but with German anxieties about the vulgarity or banality of an encroaching American culture.
     
    Given the lack of hard evidence and the vagueness of the evidence that does exist, Fay’s representation of postwar German responses to the films in circulation has to remain highly conjectural—a problem made more acute by the sometimes circular reasoning involved in Fay’s efforts at reconstructing the probable interplay between viewers and films. To return to the discussion of Gaslight and the female gothic: Fay asserts that for the Germans living under the occupation, the fear arose “that your Allied protector—this emissary of democracy—[was] in fact out to harm you, steal your property, commandeer (literally occupy) your body and house, and drive you mad” (150). She offers little in the way of support for the assertion.7 Rather, it’s the popularity of Cukor’s film that serves to justify the positing of this gothic occupation subjectivity. But then the existence of that subjectivity in turn serves to explain the popularity of the film. Given the number and the heterogeneity of the Hollywood films shown in Germany during the occupation, and given the almost willful indeterminacy of those films, one could probably use such a process of reasoning to justify just about any statements one might be inclined to make about the postwar German world. And there are aspects of Fay’s own analysis that raise questions about the conclusions she draws. Assuming that Fay is right that the Germans’ experience of occupation resonated with the experience of the heroines of female gothic films, and assuming that such resonance explains the popularity of Gaslight, it seems to stand to reason that gothic films generally would have enjoyed a marked popularity. Fay notes that several such films were shown in occupied Germany. But of the three she mentions by name (aside from Gaslight), only one—Alfred Hitchcock’s Suspicion (1941)—was well received. German critics, according to Fay, lambasted The Spiral Staircase (Robert Siodmak, 1945) and found Jane Eyre (Robert Stevenson, 1944) to be laughable. Thus in the context of an argument for the centrality of the female gothic film to postwar German experience, the author’s own research forces the reader to wrangle with the troubling fact that the Germans apparently liked only half of the female gothic movies the author discusses.
     
    This sort of tenuousness marks other moments of the analysis as well. I’ll mention just one. Fay contends, plausibly enough, that given their awareness of the aims of the Allied reeducation campaign, German audiences during the occupation would have been inclined to read the Hollywood films for their encoded political messages. She also contends, with equal plausibility, that Hollywood films, which, because of the pressures of the censorship codes, were forced to be highly ambiguous, encoded political messages quite at odds with the aims of reeducation. American films, Fay writes, produced an “unruly image world of America’s democratic unconscious” that “revealed in its fissures, obscurities, and curious asides a darker side of American politics to those audiences open to alternative readings, as indeed Germans were” (58). Fay unveils this “darker side of American politics” in the course of a series of brief readings of particular films, all of the readings focusing on some aspect of American racial politics or America’s racist past: the Sonja Henie star vehicle Sun Valley Serenade (H. Bruce Humberstone, 1941) exposes the exclusionary aspects of America’s assimilationist mythologies; John Huston’s The Maltese Falcon (1941) and Across the Pacific (1942) “are shot through with national and racial substitutions that were animated by America’s pernicious orientalism” (64); John Ford’s Drum’s along the Mohawk (1939) and Fritz Lang’s Western Union (1941) reveal (by seeking “to authorize”) “the genocide that made possible America’s democratic founding” and “implicitly question the costs of cultural conformity by working through the outsider’s relationship to America’s civilizing mission” (75). These readings are, while not especially original, surely tenable. They would have been available, that is, to German viewers. But, again, Fay has no real evidence to suggest that the Germans did in fact read these films as she reads them. Maybe they did. But, then again, maybe not.
     
    My second concern about Theaters of Occupation has to do with some of the juxtapositions in play throughout the work. Inasmuch as Fay’s thesis is that the Germans living under occupation came to experience American efforts at reeducation as an eerie re-imposition of their fascist past, the whole of the work serves as something of an extended meditation on the analogy to be drawn between the U.S. and Nazi Germany. A host of specific comparisons punctuate the text. In the first chapter, for example, in the course of a discussion of an American movie, Tomorrow—the World! (Leslie Fenton, 1944), that was released shortly before the end of the war and that was designed to show how the soon-to-be conquered German people could be rehabilitated, Fay remarks on the similarity of Fenton’s film to a Nazi-era propaganda piece entitled Hitlerjunge Quex (Hans Steinhoff, 1933), which concerns the political conversion of a young German boy to Nazism and his eventual murder by communists. Referring to the latter as “[a]lmost a prequel to” (27) the former, Fay notes: “the similarities between Hitlerjunge Quex and Tomorrow—the World! leave little doubt that American cinema is not Weimar or even Nazi cinema’s opposite but its shadow” (32). In the following chapter, Fay offers a comparable correlation between Across the Pacific and another Nazi propaganda film. “What is interesting about [Across the Pacific] in the German context is that its representation of Japanese otherness bears comparison to the stereotypes of Jewish culture in Veit Harlan’s Jud Süß (Jew Süss, 1940), a Nazi-era film that likewise dramatizes the danger of assimilating the ethnic minority” (74). Fay goes on to note that just as Jud Süß “enables a ‘consent to genocide’” (Fay is citing Katrin Sieg here [Sieg 85]), Across the Pacific “foments a consent to internment” (74). In the concluding paragraph of this same chapter, Fay states that the film program that was put together by the American Military Government (and that Fay has, in some sense, briefly reviewed) “suggests that even the American occupiers sensed a disturbing similarity between themselves and their Nazi-era German wards” (82). The end of Chapter 3 sounds the same refrain. After examining the propaganda purposes to which Ninotchka was put by the Americans as the cold war began, Fay writes: “[t]hat Goebbels also celebrated Ninotchka … raises the possibility that in choosing as Ninotchka does, Germans may in fact restore themselves to ideals of Nazi citizenship” (113). As I noted earlier, these sorts of comparisons are common in Theaters of Occupation; and many more examples could be adduced. My aim in drawing attention to them is not to question the legitimacy of any of the particulars but to suggest that in their totality—in their number and in their insistency—they work over the course of the book to insinuate that there isn’t finally much to distinguish the United States from Nazi Germany. Such a flattening of meaningful distinctions is a problem in its own right. But the distraction it produces also makes it difficult to attend fully to the moments in Fay’s book of more trenchant analysis.
     
    I want briefly to discuss one of those moments. In the introduction and first chapter of Theaters of Occupation, Fay lays out the logic of the American reeducation campaign in Germany. U.S. policy, Fay argues, was grounded in the ideas—promulgated by a number of academics working in the emergent field of psychoculturalism—that each country possesses “a unified ‘national character structure’” and that this structure is mutable (3): “[a] product of traditions passed on from one generation to the next, character structure was an evolving cultural construct that, while manifested and reinforced in all aspects of a national, social, and psychic life, could nonetheless be changed” (3). Germany’s national character, according to the psychoculturalists, was diseased, paranoid, primitive. America’s national character is democratic. Since, for the Americans, democracy was less a matter of institutions and political practices than “a type of behavior, a public attitude, and an affective relationship to the state” (xiv), reeducating the Germans would involve getting them to learn, by miming, these behaviors and attitudes. The “master trope” for the process of reeducation (58), Fay maintains, was immigrant assimilation. Germans living under the occupation could learn, just as Germans who immigrate to the States learn, to be good democratic citizens. In order to accomplish this transformation, the Germans in the old country, like those in the new, would be required to give up their ethnic and cultural distinctiveness. In effect, they would have to become Americans. “The logic of reeducation,” Fay writes, “is that ‘democracy’ depends on a mimesis that erases difference” (xvi): as the Americans conceive it, that is, “democracy is not an enlightened pluralistic philosophy so much as a homogenizing force” (xvi).
     
    This homogenizing aspect of American culture and of the reeducation policy the U.S. pursued, this intolerance of difference, is one of the central failings, according to Fay, of both the country’s political culture and of its policy in postwar Germany. It’s a chief preoccupation of Fay’s work. To be sure, the idea that American democracy—which, as Fay suggests, is majoritarian in principle and tends to reduce the idea of freedom to market choice—functions as a sort of machine for producing sameness is not original to Fay’s book. But the particular focus of her study, as I’ve said, brings the country’s ideological operations into the open. Fay’s concern with culture loss and with the elimination of difference, moreover, acquires considerable weight as a consequence of more recent historical developments. As Fay points out, the administration of George W. Bush presented America’s occupation of Germany as a context for its invasion and occupation of Iraq.
     
    The universalizing impulses that motivated the reeducation campaign in Germany, and the assumption of a universality of human being that made sense of the effort, were in play as well in the case of Iraq. Given the ways they worked and were worked to make possible that still ongoing catastrophe in the Middle East, these impulses and assumptions are not just troubling but dangerous. Theaters of Occupations provides a valuable service in drawing attention to them.
     
    The question of how—and to what extent—to accommodate difference is, however, vexed and vexing. And Theaters of Occupation doesn’t really acknowledge the problems the issue presents. There’s a point, for example, near the end of the book, where Fay, summarizing a critique of American liberalism presented by Eric Erikson in 1950, notes that American “majoritarianism” is not really interested in “universal justice or pluralism” (181).8 This easy yoking of those two terms suggests there is no tension between them. They aren’t, I think (and hope), antithetical, but the ideas (that we ought to aim at producing “universal justice”; that we need to value “pluralism”) don’t reconcile easily. If, in the face of the homogenizing force of a metastasizing American market empire, our central commitment needs to be, as Fay suggests, to foster different cultural modes of being, we will be hard pressed to promote universal justice. Local cultures generate local forms of justice—which are not infrequently at odds with one another. In certain cases, in relation to certain sets of issues, celebrating the local becomes problematic. The limit case, of course, is genocide. One of the features of the local culture Hitler governed was the belief that dispossessing and murdering Jews constituted a form of justice. And while it is true that preventing this distinctive cultural practice was not the reason the U.S. (or any other country) went to war with Germany, one of the lessons the world seemed to think it learned from its encounter with the camps (as measured most clearly by the United Nation’s adoption in 1948 of the Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide) was that interfering with the expression of cultural difference is, in this instance at any rate, a moral imperative.
     
    Arguments can be, indeed have been, made for seeing one culture’s interfering with another culture as always illegitimate, even in the case of genocide. Perhaps a really thoroughgoing commitment to the value of difference is our primary ethical obligation.9 But the counter-arguments (those critical of the notion of sovereignty, for example, or those in favor of the enforcement of international law) are also compelling—especially at a time when it is possible to imagine Bush administration officials being indicted for crimes against humanity. We are—at this moment when the forces of an inevitable globalization produce increasing cultural conflict—just at the beginning, I believe, of what will be a protracted international, multicultural, and multidimensional negotiation of just these tensions: between sameness and difference, between the belief, on the one hand in the principle of universal justice, and the desire, on the other, to embrace diversity. Although Theaters of Occupation doesn’t fully register the difficulties involved in that negotiation, it is a rich and engaging contribution to the discussion.
     
    Phillip Novak is an Associate Professor at Le Moyne College, with a joint appointment in the Department of English and the Department of Communication and Film Studies. His published work includes essays on William Faulkner, Toni Morrison, and Walter Mosley, on movie musicals, and on Roman Polanski’s Chinatown.
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. See, e.g., Robert Shandley, whose book is designed to respond to the New German Cinema’s “angry critique of the previous generation” (181). New German Cinema directors, that is, faulted German filmmakers of the postwar period for failing to confront Germany’s Nazi past. Shandley argues that the “rubble films” made in the immediate aftermath of the war did indeed engage that past. As his analysis of the films makes clear, however, they did so in sometimes very indirect or troubling ways—a point, which, to my mind, leaves the New German Cinema concerns pretty much in play. In any case, Rubble Films, like much of the discussion of postwar German cinema, focuses on the issue of German accountability. Fay is not especially engaged with that issue.

     

     
    2. I use the term staging above advisedly since, as the title of Fay’s study suggests, the book is much concerned with the issue of theatricality. On Fay’s account, that is, occupied Germany itself became something of a large theater, with both Americans and Germans putting on a show. The Americans, for their part, sought to show the Germans, by means of showing them movies, how best, by their lights, to live a democratic—by which, Fay argues, the American’s mostly meant a consumer capitalist—existence. And the Germans, by copying American manners and by appropriating American movie types, tropes, and conventions, put on a show for the Americans of learning their lessons. These performances were, all around, necessarily ambiguous and open to interpretation: imitation is not always a form of flattery; it may constitute a type of burlesque. And Hollywood films (designed, as Fay argues, to make their appeal to the masses by avoiding unpleasantries, that is, by eliminating or veiling controversial content) were almost willfully indeterminate, and thus open to readings at odds with the aims of the American Military Government. There was, in short, a good deal of fluidity in, and a certain slipperiness to, this cultural interplay mediated by the presentation and reception of performances. A primary purpose of Theaters of Occupation is to analyze the interplay, the cross-cultural encounter of the occupation as it got negotiated through film.

     

     
    3. In the introduction, Fay writes “[t]hough Germany is my example, the politics and culture of occupation is my subject. Where today Germany stands as a shadow paradigm for U.S. nation building in Afghanistan and Iraq, we should look to this historical example for what it tells us about an occupation more generally” (xxviii; italics in the original). Fay doesn’t finally press too hard on showing how the lessons learned from occupied Germany might apply to the occupation of Iraq. As I note later, marking that potential connection does give her analysis some added weight. But it’s not clear to me that there is such a thing as a “politics” or a “culture of occupation.” The occupation of Germany and the more recent military interventions in the Middle East are, it seems to me, incommensurable. The Allies’ decision to demand Germany’s unconditional surrender was a matter of heated debate at the time; and it remains a point of contention. But a very compelling case can be made for that decision. Very little can be said in defense of the invasion and occupation of Iraq. Then, too, the material conditions and the interaction between occupier and occupied differ wildly in these two cases. Surely some of the same ideological commitments that motivated the decision to occupy Germany and reeducate its population also motivated the neoconservative push to invade and occupy Iraq. That’s worth thinking about. But assuming some sort of analogy can be drawn between these two very different historical events risks reproducing the neoconservatives’ flawed reasoning.

     

     
    4. The relation of elements here might be better described by shifting the figure and the ground—that is, by thinking of the ideological critique as embedded in—and permeating—the book’s argument concerning the American attempt to use Hollywood films as tools in the reeducation campaign.

     

     
    5. See Merritt for an extended analysis of the U.S. occupation of Germany that makes a strong case for seeing U.S. policy as, on the whole, successful; esp. Chapter 14, “German Society Changed,” 387-411.

     

     
    6. At the outset of the chapter most devoted to tracking the kinds of readings German audiences would have been engaged in, Fay notes the following: “Film reviews and questionnaires can give us the most general sense of the film audience and the range of reading practices. But for the early years of the occupation, especially, this documentation is rather scarce and limited in detail. Thus I construct a horizon of reception that is attentive to the material conditions and ideational predispositions of German audiences” (41). Material conditions do, surely, inform reading practices. But responses to material conditions no doubt vary a good deal. Speculating generally, without evidentiary support, about the ways material conditions might affect reading practices can be suggestive but not, finally, very decisive. Then, too, tracking “ideational predispositions” is necessarily tricky business. Fay argues, for example, that German audiences would have been predisposed by the experience of occupation to “a critical rewriting” of the depictions “of the American West” that they were seeing in Hollywood westerns (81). To support that claim, Fay refers to the “popular phenomenon” of Indian impersonation that arose in Germany in the postwar period. “Rejecting Hollywood’s western formula,” Fay writes, “Germans refused identification with their occupiers and thus resisted both the Americanization of their culture during the occupation and the explicit assimilationist mandate of reeducation” (80). German audiences identified, rather, with the dispossessed Native Americans. But as Fay herself acknowledges, the German “fascination with American Indians” predates the occupation. From at least the early twentieth century, when Karl May was producing extremely popular novels about the American west—Hitler was, himself, a huge fan—Germans saw in romanticized images of Native Americans an idealized image of themselves: embattled but free, pure-blooded warriors.

     

     
    7. Fay notes that rape was common in postwar Germany, but she acknowledges that the rapes were for the most part committed by, and associated with, Soviet troops. She cites one historian, Robert G. Moeller, who argues that the Germans came to see themselves as being “victimized by the Western Allies, who were shortsighted, inefficient and incompetent at best and deliberately vengeful at worst” (Moeller 14; qtd. Fay 150). There’s a long way to travel, however, between seeing the Allies as incompetent and sometimes vengeful to seeing them as trying to drive the Germans “mad.”

     

     
    8. This particular phrase is Fay’s, not Erikson’s.

     

     
    9. For a compelling defense of the value of cultural particularity and critique of the notion of human rights as conventionally conceived, see Peterson.
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Merritt, Richard L. Democracy Imposed: U.S. Occupation Policy and the German Public, 1945-1949. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1995. Print.
    • Moeller, Robert G. Introduction. West Germany Under Construction: Politics, Society, and Culture in the Adenauer Era. Ed. Moeller. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1997. 1-30. Print.
    • Peterson, V. Spike. “Whose Rights? A Critique of the ‘Givens’ in Human Rights Discourse.” Alternatives 15.3 (1990): 303-344. Print.
    • Shandley, Robert R. Rubble Films: German Cinema in the Shadow of the Third Reich. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 2001. Print.
    • Sieg, Katrin. Ethnic Drag: Performing Race, Nation, and Sexuality in West Germany. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 2002. Print.

     

  • A Brief Reply to Kalindi Vora’s “Others’ Organs: South Asian Domestic Labor and the Kidney Trade”

    Neil Larsen (bio)
    University of California at Davis
    nalarsen@ucdavis.edu

     
    Basing itself largely on an emergent body of ethnography concerning the contemporary traffic in human organs, and especially on the buying and selling of human kidneys in South Asia, Kalindi Vora’s “Others’ Organs: South Asian Domestic Labor and the Kidney Trade” can certainly lay claim to a considerable degree of ethical and political urgency. It quite rightly insists as well on the need to view this horrific new form of globalized commerce as inseparable, from the standpoint of the logic of capital, from the no less desperate circumstances leading to the export of “whole” South Asian laboring bodies themselves, here the Sri Lankan women who make up a large proportion of the domestic “care” workers in wealthy enclaves such as the Gulf State of Dubai. To the extent that it draws the attention of its readers to this real and sinister index of the South Asian economic “miracle” even now still being touted in the pages of mainstream media and among the diehard apologists for neoliberal economics and development policies, its appearance in the pages of Postmodern Culture is a welcome occurrence.
     
    Less fortunately, however, “Others’ Organs” regards these “vital commodities” insofar as they are products of what Vora also terms “affective and biological labor from the Global South” as, when viewed from a “cultural studies framework and building upon feminist and postcolonialist theories of value and production,” arguments for “the need to rethink the terms of Marx’s labor theory of value” (par. 3). The bulk of the essay attempts to make good on this theoretical claim. The results are disappointing, and purport to engage in a debate with or somehow emend the theoretical axioms laid out in the first chapter of volume I of Capital in which the latter, for this reader at any rate, have become virtually unrecognizable. At one point Vora does offer the following reasonably approximate gloss on what she refers to only as the “labor theory of value”:
     

     

    For Marx, value in its multiple forms can be quantified through labor time, or time spent expending the energy of the body and mind in producing an object, which under capitalist production becomes a commodity. He argues that at the level of the commodity, value can exist as both exchange value and use-value, but these are ultimately different moments in the life of value produced by labor.
     

    (par. 6)

     

    One wonders what “multiple” can be referring to here, but otherwise fair enough. Yet with what is virtually this one exception, the word “value” itself undergoes a bizarre and, it would seem, symptomatic process of continuous ambiguation or conceptual slippage throughout the pages of “Others’ Organs.” So, for example, Vora’s opening anecdote concerning the tragic death of the Pakistanti/Afghani airborne stowaway Mohammed Ayaz, fallen from the undercarriage of a plane at Heathrow airport in 2001, becomes a “story [that] also forces us to think that … lives [such as Ayaz’s], their labor, and their value may circulate outside the logic of capital” (par.3; my emphasis). “Outside”? For anyone the least bit attuned to the argument of Capital I, this is a sheer oxymoron: value, or valorization, is the logic of capital: “buying in order to sell,” or, in Marx’s celebrated formula, M-C-M’, the conversion of money, or a quantum of value, via its conversion into its commodity form and sale, into more money (Marx 247-257). To be “outside” value in this sense—and Vora never specifies any other that connects in any way to the terms of Marx’s theory of value—surely, is eo ipso to be outside the other, capital. “Value” that circulated outside the logic of M-C-M’ would not be value any longer.

     
    But “Others’ Organs” proceeds as though some other, intermediate sort of “value,” neither the socially necessary abstract labor that, per Marx, constitutes the “substance” of value and whose duration constitutes the latter’s “magnitude” (Marx 125-130) nor the common sense cultural or ethical sense of the lexeme as, say, “norm” or subjectively-held judgment or belief were discoverable in the organ-trafficking and the “affective” labor of South Asian care workers. “I recognize,” writes Vora,
     

    the labor theory of value advanced in Marx’s Capital as the dominant logic of the way new forms of commodities and commodified labor forms behave under capital, but at the same time, as subaltern historiographies and feminist materialist scholarship have established, I suggest that other economies are made illegible within the dominant logic. These other articulations of value establish multiple meanings of commodities and labor, and therefore the lives and bodies entangled in systems of value.
     

    (par. 8)

     

    But to insist however stubbornly on the point in question here: if the “meanings” of these “other” economies are in fact articulable (and therefore, in the end, surely “legible”) within the dominant and contradictory logic of value (of capital)—and surely, on this precise point, Vora is right: other, non-capitalist relations of production may still persist in a subordinate position within the capitalist mode of production as a whole—then what sense does it make to refer to them as articulations of “value” at all? It is not that value has no other. It is that the other of value is something other than value. Value, like the Hebrew deity of the book of Exodus, “shall have no other gods before” it. That, as the great, systematic and unequalled concretion of Marx’s thought throughout his mature work makes clear over and over again, is precisely the historical specificity of “self-valorizing value,” i.e., of capital. By settling for what soon enough becomes the transparent and facile rhetorical sleight in which one speaks of “value” as at one and the same time the “dominant”—and consummately objective—”logic of capital” and as nevertheless a function of how people are represented (“valuable” or not?), of “value” as something “assigned to people as labor-commodities” (Vora par. 19) may alleviate some immediate multiculturalist anxiety lest one be suspected of failure to respect difference. But it does so at the cost of effacing what is precisely the historical difference of value, i.e., of the commodity-form, as, to use Moishe Postone’s invaluable phrase, a “form of social mediation.”

     
    The word matters here, because the concept, and the theory, and the critique towards which it beckons and refers, matter, and this not only for purposes of mere intellectual rigor but ultimately for the lives of the South Asian—as of all—victims of capital over whose plight Vora evinces her unquestionably sincere and deeply felt agony in this essay. In this sense it is worth considering (as Vora appears to do at one point; see par. 24)1 whether in fact the terrible, barbaric necessity that forces South Asian villagers to sell their kidneys in the vain attempt to escape from debt-peonage no longer obeys the logic of the labor theory of value at all but that of its historical crisis and breakdown—the fact that the de-valorized, in effect (to use Robert Kurz’s term) “unexploitable” labor-power of the vendor—and of an immense proportion of the globe’s pool of potential wage-laborers—makes of her organ (in Scheper-Hughes’s term, as cited by Vora) the “last commodity” precisely because the labor-power of its “owner” is itself no longer saleable as a commodity. Here the theoretical terms of Capital allow us to be quite precise:2 the kidney, we might reason, is sold not for its value—it has none in this case—but for its price. It takes the form of a commodity, but is not itself a commodity—here because it is literally all that remains to the seller when what is truly the “last commodity,” labor-power, now no longer commands any market whatsoever. Contra “Others’ Organs,” there can, in fact, be no “supplement” (par. 34) to the labor theory of value—no more than there can be a “supplement” to the history that produced it and that now seems well on its way to driving it, with what for now at least appear to be the immediate prospect of even more catastrophic social consequences, to its own self-abolition.
     

    Neil Larsen teaches in the Critical Theory and Comparative Literature Programs at UC Davis. He is the author of Modernism and Hegemony (University of Minnesota Press, 1990); Reading North by South (University of Minnesota Press, 1995); and Determinations (Verso, 2001). He lectures and publishes frequently in the areas of Marxian critical theory and Latin American studies.
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. “What is not accounted for in either this understanding of the laborer’s agency or in that of the kidney seller is the dehumanizing force of capitalist logic within the international division of labor. This force devalues these women’s labor and bodies as surplus, indicating the non-essential nature of this labor and of these parts to their lives. This becomes problematic when these situations are compared to others within the division of labor where these elements of life are understood and valued as essential” (Vora par. 24).

     

    2. See Marx, Capital I: “The price-form, however, is not only compatible with the possibility of a quantitative incongruity between magnitude of value and price … but it may also harbour a qualitative contradiction, with the result that the price ceases altogether to express value, despite the fact that money is nothing but the value-form of the commodity. Things which in and for themselves are not commodities, things such as conscience, honour, etc. [and human organs as well? N.L.] can be offered for sale by their holders and thus acquire the form of commodities through their price. Hence a thing can, formally speaking, have a price without having a value” (197).
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Kurz, Robert. Der Kollaps der Modernisierung. Leipzig: Reclam, 1994. Print.
    • Marx, Karl. Capital, Volume I. Trans. Ben Fowkes. London: Penguin, 1992. Print.
    • Postone, Moishe. Time, Labor and Social Domination. New York, London: Cambridge University Press, 1996. Print.

     

  • New Media Critical Homologies

    Brian Lennon (bio)
    Pennsylvania State University
    blennon@psu.edu

    Abstract
     
    New media studies, we might say, has discovered temporality. After fifteen years in which its cultural dominant was presentist prognostication, even a kind of bullying, the field has folded on itself with such new guiding concepts as the “residuality,” the “deep time” or “prehistory,” and the “forensic imagination” of a new media now understood as after all always already new. This essay rereads the legacy of hyperfiction pioneer and demiurge Michael Joyce through Fredric Jameson’s call, twenty years ago, for a “deeper comparison” than new media studies is yet ready to make, even today. It argues that new media studies, as a disturbance in both the practices and production regimes of humanistic discipline, is and always has been best thought less as an emergent field than as a site of such double vision. If we still want to consider Joyce’s work a founding moment in new media literary studies in the U.S., we will have to recognize the radical untimeliness of, and at, that foundation: the extent to which the negativity of Joyce’s secession from this emergent field must be understood not as the end of his influence in it, but in antinomian fashion, as its beginning again.
     

    Ideally perhaps one should, like the novelist, have one’s subject under control, never losing it from sight and constantly aware of its overpowering presence. Fortunately or unfortunately, the historian has not the novelist’s freedom.
     

    –Braudel, The Mediterranean

     

    I.

     
    The computer is one of those swerves in the history of built things that bring whole ways of life to an end–and seldom with the drama with which the first to sense a change often pronounce it. Real change is painfully slow, building to crisis well off the range of dailiness-numbed sense: a pattern of sun and shadow filtering into a room, here illuminating a particular object for no particular reason, there, with precisely the same absence of portent, shrouding another. There are regressions, and some habits and routines left precisely as they were or are, while others vanish or metastasize. Newness covers the old with a creeping patina, in which what will be and what no longer is exchange places and seem to intermingle, at the same time.
     
    New media studies, we might say, has discovered temporality. After fifteen years in which its cultural dominant was presentist prognostication, even–often enough–a kind of bullying, the field has folded on itself with such new guiding concepts as the “residuality,” the “deep time” or “prehistory,” and the “forensic imagination” of a new media now understood as after all always already new.1 This is a more absorbent fold, perhaps, than that embedded in one of the field’s originary figures, “remediation”–a determinedly modern progressive figure, though one whose conceptual plasticity always suggested the possibility, beyond linear reframings, of non-modern medial cycles or folds (see Bolter and Grusin). Without a doubt, it is that depth that sends us searching, now, for a reading of the temporal turn that seems all at once to discard and even undermine the prime rhetoric of a field of study settled in self-establishment. Read symptomatically, there is perhaps more to all of this than the usual need for professional distinction in the field itself, which like any mode of absorption of surplus, needs a manufactured boom and bust, on a regular cycle. To the shaming of the slow, the skeptical, and the selfrespecting who refuse the unfunded mandates of technocratic reactivity, in the New Economic home-classroom-office pod of unrelievedly public life online, new media studies now adds to its figural repertoire a synchronic complement, in the reflection of what the Jameson of the 1970s, writing Marxism and Form, calls the “commodity structure of academic intellectual life” (393).
     
    Were it not for the institutional dynamic of critical desire through which one is forced to embrace what one declines, in order to scale the heights from which to renounce it again, one might have begun there. But what is done is done. With the swap-file virtualities of an endless present suffering stain, again, we might suspect this anachronic return to time, in a new media studies that seems never to have known it at all, of being sensitive, registrative, or even merely, vulgarly reflective of the sociotemporal order-as-disorder of U.S. imperial and global capitalist crisis, as an apparent crisis of progress. To materialist critiques of the disembodiment of information, which corrected the intellective disposition of an early euphoria without doing much to blunt its complacent productivity, one can certainly imagine being attached, now, a materialist critique of the conditions of the critique of disembodiment, itself, in a resource-intensive field of inquiry into disproportionately resource-intensive social behaviors whose future is inseparable from the future of U.S. consumerism–above all, the consumption of energy. Our appetite for the materiality, as much as for the virtuality of new media, is also a form of systems maintenance. One might say that the specter haunting new media studies today is the late imperial “peak energy” spectacle of middle-class U.S. Americans in sweaters, riding their bicycles to work.2
     
    This is no merely elected sentiment. Rather, it marks a disposition that is hidden in plain sight, today, in so far as its material conditions of recognition burden it also with gratuitous blindness. To come to accept the long duration of intellectual history, without which episodic conurbations of research cannot thrive, is to accept the destiny of decline, compressed in Braudel’s formula “All conquests lead to exhaustion” (166). Necessarily, it is to come to permit the presentation of unavoidable, and unavoidably disturbing, questions.3 Let me air only one that comes to my own mind, without suggesting that I imagine my own way of life and work, in the field of new media studies, as in any way immune from its most damaging imputations. That question is this: is it possible that we may have lost literacy, all at once and already, without yet, or without ever, gaining “electracy”?–and that in some unimaginable future, we might be charged with simply getting it back–of retrieving literacy for sheer survival?
     
    I think we can say that we are, at last, officially of two minds on this issue–which is what one of our first leaders, and first seceders, insisted we be. I speak, of course, of hyperfiction pioneer and demiurge Michael Joyce, about whose legacy I will, in what follows, have something I believe is unprecedented to say. But first, we need to ask a second set of questions, comprising the frame for the first, in an inversion that carries with it all the abject cruelty of admission, at last, to the club that one would never want to belong to if it had one for a member, just as it is about to close. That in some ways, literary studies now appears prepared to absorb new media studies, as once upon a time it absorbed (and then purged itself of) cinema and cultural studies, certainly prompts some reflection.4 What can explain our radically untimely embrace, in English studies, of gaming, Second Life, and (naturally) “netlish,”5 along with (at last) the old hyperfiction and ergodic literature, just as global food, energy, and political and environmental security re-enter the second of two major postwar systemic cycles of scarcity–now canonically bound, in the immensely influential world-system historiography of Immanuel Wallerstein, Giovanni Arrighi, and others, to the historically decisive routine decline of empire?6
     
    In comparative literary studies, meanwhile, where something more than cinema is now definitively on the extraliterary agenda (see Andrew and Poster), one wonders why the comparative project, in its essayistic substitution of transitive (and translative) articulation for critical substantiation, should be so eager to seize what it already predicts must elude its (as any) grasp. Hasn’t comparative literature “won its battles,” in dissemination to fields once supremely confident of their objects (Saussy 3)? Isn’t it the unacknowledged legislator of our humanities disciplines today? Why would it go prospecting now, when anticolonial comparative methods and models are firmly entrenched even in departments of English, in the study of peoples without a phone? Hasn’t comparative literature always embraced its own amateurism, anyway, even at its philologically rigorous origin? (Picture once more Erich Auerbach, famously marooned, without a working library, in wartime Istanbul.) At their very best, we might say, all the innovative formations of the last thirty years of literary studies have demanded respect for the indiscipline with which they resisted and lamented the objects of their own disciplinarity: on their radical work of the imagination, finally closer to the mode of production of the literary object, itself, than anyone dared to dream.
     
    In response to the unanswerable question implicit in my opening gambit, here–that of how, and why, new media studies might all at once have “arrived,” and how its arrival takes the form of a temporal loop, cycle, or fold–let me, before proceeding any further, offer something of a frame for the frame. Always, in attempting to look through the reified critical object of a disciplinary research field, we are necessarily attempting to look at the technocratic procedures producing that object. Inasmuch as it can be said to have emerged as such, new media studies, as a disturbance in both the practices and production regimes of humanistic discipline, is and always has been best thought less as an emergent field than as a site of such double vision.7 For this question to be of any use to us, we must frame it critically, in the sense that that term has always carried in the history of Euro-Atlantic philosophical modernity, where it denotes the impossible secular task of structural self-understanding. To confront the question of how something eventally new, for going on at least a decade and a half, can only now have emerged, let us do what comparative criticism is supposed to do, and compare. Let us look, in this case, for new media critical homologies embedding new media literary-critical formations, in a non-selfevident temporal relation, in their historical antecedents. To honor the convention of providing an example, I suggest one such homology in a moment.
     

    II.

     
    During the New Economic 1990s, as new media invaded literary-critical workspace through the portals of the Web, the discrete and combined hazards of deconstruction and cultural studies for autonomous art as manipulable object reawakened in anxieties focused on the ephemerality of critical writing and publishing “on line,” in time and in motion. Such fear of the virtualization of the literary-critical took many forms, of course, from Gutenberg elegies, to new formalisms, to the ballyhooed returns of sincerity, nature, personal voice, affect, pleasure, and any number of other monads said to have been squashed by demoniac posthumanist theory. If the lessons of modernity and postmodernity had already been learned, that only means, perhaps, that routine vulgar dialectics provided the means to affirm what one salvaged, in such operations, without its preening innocence. And yet latent in this double reading of the standing present, we might say, was an entirely accurate sense that matters had already grown very complicated, indeed, in the interanimation of cultural time and critical history–and that it was that complication itself, if anything, that was going to have to be what post-modernization would come to mean. Already, then, what Benjamin, then read to excess, pictured as “an orchid in the land of technology” (“Work” 233)–an impossible palpability, within the impassable virtuality of the film set–at once described and militated against the quest for pre-virtual critical authenticity, not because such quests were hopelessly doomed, but because as the Jameson of the 1990s put it, they offered “the expressive raw material of a deeper comparison” (Postmodernism 301) that needed to be made.
     
    Many of us, in those days, conceived things straightforwardly. We proposed to consider the impact of electronic media–specifically, the document formats or “sites” of the so-called World Wide Web–on United States literature, just for example, at the turn of the twenty-first century: an inquest that took as its narrative flashpoints 1991, the year Jameson completed a provocative U.S.-centrist statement of ephemeralist postmodernism, and 1993, when the appearance of the Mosaic browser began to renegotiate some of the ground terms of publication in the literary arts.8 To the extent that such impact was presupposed and determined, by the question itself, to construct an object-pattern or trace of itself as legible, we might say that it hardly occurred to many involved in this enterprise that it might take the form of erasure before the archival fact. That the secession, not so many epochal years later, of Michael Joyce from the field he was now to set on its feet might in fact proceed from the very logic of that pursuit of the new, rather than obstructing or contravening it.
     
    The proximity of artifactual life to death, in this new field of critical awareness, was underscored by the panic over object stability that followed discovery forthwith, in a radical compression of the purview of antiquarian desire. Such efforts as the Electronic Literature Organization’s Preservation, Archiving, and Dissemination (PAD) project, which registered widespread alarm at the developmental precocity, velocity, and caprice of the new literary artists, were no better prepared to question the mandate for conservancy itself than to uphold it, on a U.S. scene yoked to the startup venture-capitalization of proprietary data file formats and dominated by freelance coders making Web art in their Gleitzeit. The running battle between an art culture producing faster and faster–indeed, living art online (see Breeze)–and a curator culture determined to find careers in it, nevertheless, offered a dramatic update of the antitheses on the avant-garde formulated by Paul Mann around (snail) mail art, earlier in the decade.9
     
    It is clear, in any case, that Jameson’s postmodernism was a vital branch of the storyspace charting the complex relation of the literary art practice of the time to its academic theory, and that it had specifically recursive effects on the relation of art practice to theory and criticism, in its wake. As a publishing medium, the WWW invited U.S. literature to a set of changes that would recursively alter the Web-as-medium without collapsing into it, or expiring within its limits. By 2001, for example, one could speak of an overlap zone populated on the one hand by print poetries radically animated by cybernetics, and on the other by “code poetries” importing and renovating the interpreted conservatism of a lyric tradition.10 Within such a new order of things, Monique Roelofs’s “Zwischenology” was a handy figure for the study of such paradox, overlap, or betweenness, which resisted the easier postures of apocalyptic and utopist futurism. And yet print literature was already being used to augur the ruin of post-print irreality. In the commentary on Bob Perelman’s poem “China” that formed such a controversial sideshow within Postmodernism, for Jameson’s readers working in literary studies, the figure of the poem’s absented referents or unities is used to illuminate what the Jameson of the 1990s calls “the crisis in historicity,” a temporal limit in, of, and to contemporary cultural criticism become a limit-site of postmodernist euphoria in dissolution.11 While for Jameson, the danger lies in the seductions of irreconcilability in situ, his dialectical critic’s characteristic ambivalence pursues a discussion of Perelman’s poem to its peremptory conclusion (or break), which finds Jameson now famously pitting the ephemeral video art of Nam June Paik against the nihilism of a “traditional” poetic poststructuralism enjoined to no longer dare utter its name.
     
    And yet all this is better re-read, in 2009, as a problem of research and temporality, posed by the critical life-span of a “reading” itself, than as a debate over the form (or content) of the curator’s object, now or then. Not least of the durable provocations of Jameson’s project, in Postmodernism as everywhere else, is the tropism of his dialectical prose, which has always invited, and received, many comically speculative and many more ploddingly positivist thetic refutations. Among the alignments in what Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, in a contemporaneous and complementary stylization, terms “the battle between marxism and deconstruction” (314), the Jameson of Postmodernism is illuminated, on one side, by the novel and generous use he found for the Baudrillardian chiasmus of the simulacrum, and on the other by his doggedly restricted Lukácsian insistence on cognitive mapping. It is from this conjuncture that the new media literalists of the 1990s, stalking auguries of the brave new office, drew their sanctions for reading Jameson, poorly, through a McLuhan read even more poorly, in a mode of reception remarkably alienated from the long intellectual history of a philosophical concept of mediation–and so unable to imagine “virtual reality” as a descriptor of unavoidably abstract critical thought itself. Looking back in counterpoint, it seems that Perelman’s poem suffers, in Jameson’s never less than withering estimation, not only as an artifact of print culture, but in its typicality as a vanguard expression of the avant-garde type, itself; in the Jamesonist typology, the materially practicing poet was the ephemeralist, fixing “joyous intensities” in the self-celebrating play of shallow disjunction (Postmodernism 29), while the video-tracer recovered a “positive concept of relationship” (31) in transient screen flicker.
     
    All along, it was a matter of the relationship between the time of the work and the temporality of criticism itself, in their mutual imbrication, from which no historical materialist can or must dare to retreat. Video, the Jameson of Postmodernism tells us, disembedded us from the fictive phenomenological-subjective time of film and television representation as always already destined for entertainment, re-embedding someone–or something–as dematerialized subject-in-relay with dematerialized object, in the flow of radically neutral (and deadly boring) social-machine time (Postmodernism 76). In the process, it bypassed altogether the blank parody of schizomorphic postmodernism, as a “virtual grab bag” of creatively pure and ahistoric selfpresence, and as a breakdown of temporality itself, in the infinite jest Jameson thinks he discerns, correctly or incorrectly, in Perelman’s “China.” But where that chaff promises enduring diversion, we must, Jameson suggests clearly, rather be prepared to be bored, in order to be critically stimulated at all. If to identify video as the most important and distinctive new artmedium of late capitalism was, then, to arrive on the scene an epoch too late, from the point of view of those needing to promote something new (the World Wide Web as re-remediation), Jameson’s demand for lassitude, in its all the hazard it poses to research productivity at an urgent moment of innovation (none of which, of course, blunted Jameson’s own prodigious output one whit), refused to apologize for that.
     
    From the beginning, Jameson had linked the resistance of Adornian prose style to the simple difficulty of temporality, in his exegesis of negative dialectics as the rescue of philosophy, as of all the object pursuits descended from it, from “a fetishization in time, from the optical illusion of stasis and permanency” (Marxism 58). Such “falling into time” (to reproduce a tropism Jameson extracts, for his purposes, from Barthes writing on Proust) mandates the production of dialectically comparative sentences, whose strength grows “proportionately as the realities linked are distant and distinct from each other” (54)–producing just that “massive failure” affirmed, in Adorno’s project, as a kind of success.
     
    It is here, perhaps, that we can mark a form of reserve in Jameson’s work, through which the more or less gentle criticism Adorno receives, at his hands, rebounds. “No doubt the emphasis on method and on the theory rather than the practice of negative dialectics,” Jameson observes, “risks giving an exaggerated and distorted importance to the moment of failure which is present in all modern thinking: and it is this overemphasis, more than anything else, which seems to me to account for that lack of political commitment with which radical students reproached Adorno at the end of his life” (59). The history of Marxist literary criticism is the history of an advocated interpenetration of (literary?) theory and (literary?) practice, which in Lukács and Jameson, no less than in Adorno, produced nothing more or less than another magisterial scholar-critic, who abandons the primary production of works of literature to that division of labor affirmed as the very price of Marxist modernity–though never without secretly protesting it, again. In an earlier critical review of Jameson’s The Political Unconscious: Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act (1981), Perelman himself toes this austere, if never ascetic line, observing that “in the arena Jameson is working in, ‘theory writing,’ writers, the producers of the raw material, are a bit dispensable” (175). And who can forget the outburst of Mike Featherstone, protesting in his contribution to the 1989 volume Postmodernism/ Jameson/ Critique that Jameson was “unwilling to become an advocate of the new methods and practice postmodernism in his writings” (129)? For every one of the terrifically prolific critics in Lukács’s direct or indirect line of descent, it is precisely that nonproductive boredom Jameson theorizes that, in so many ways, is really a nonstarter.
     
    Thus it is that Jameson throws into relief, in the nascent new media studies of the epoch of the postmodernism debates, the substantive reifications of the “commodity structure of academic intellectual life” (Marxism 393)–while not escaping from them himself, any more than Adorno might or could have. We might say it is this unbearable distance of cultural criticism from cultural practice that drives the trope of comparison, in Jameson’s work, as the maximal flex of critical discourse to–but never over–the brink of critical silence. To speak, again, of the impact of new media on literature, it might be imagined that cultural opacity or noise, in any such composition of influence, would necessarily grow alongside complex critical transparency or “silence”: indeed, a Jamesonist mind must posit “homologies” between them, structured affinities whose very dynamic consumes something of the tissue of resemblance itself. Here is this thought, as expressed late in Jameson’s “Conclusion: Secondary Elaborations”:
     

    There may also be structural parallels to be established between these new “informational” machineries that are neither basely physical nor “spiritual” in any nineteenth-century sense, and language itself, whose model has become predominant in the postmodern period. On this view it would not be the informationality of the new technology that inspires a meditation on language and spurs people on to the construction of new ideologies centered on it, but rather the structural parallels themselves between two equally material phenomena which equally elude physical representation of the older type.
     

    (Postmodernism 386)

     

    Is it through just such a negative dialectical construction that the disciplinary object of new media studies has to have come at once, now, to embrace disciplinary “information” and noise? For the transpositions, paradoxes and regressions of media to “replace” their remediative linear displacement and (and or) succession, in a kind of noctilucent disturbance that might be understood, now, always to have been underway, if only, suddenly, self-evident? If in 2009 scholarship in literary studies yet evinces precious little of the real possible impact, as one must think it, of new networked and programmable media, is it possible that that is because the structural-historical configurations of print culture and electronic publishing have been mingled–sometimes deliberately, often by chance, in a Babel of avant-garde, epochally middling, and “dead,” dying and spectral media, in a process that no one may regulate, and to which all are accountable?

     
    But one of the consequences of that might be that we would have to learn to learn in two drifts, moving contiguously both forward and backward in time, in that flexion the desire for objects impedes. Indeed, to do that, we will have to accept the unacceptable fortuity that tells us that new media studies might, for those of us most invested in it, always already have come to an end. To get back to where we went back to, then, we must skip forward to the near past.
     

    III.

     
    Last modified on March 3, 2004, the Vassar College faculty Web page of Michael Joyce offers little more than a telegraphic summary of Joyce’s work and teaching, prefaced by a small photograph image of a rock cairn and the statement: “Michael Joyce is no longer maintaining a public web presence.”12 One cannot exactly say that this end of events, and the order of things marked by it, is much of a secret, as by any measure Joyce has, in the years since he thus returned to writing books in print, made his absence as pivotal to new media studies as his presence had been. We might say that the power of such end-punctuation has always rested in its injunction not to exercise one’s hermeneutical training on it–to honor its apparent nihilism as both something more and something less than a simple, baffling “no.” And yet, that the undisputed leader of an emerging field might so decisively step back, on what might have been considered the verge of something like victory, is apparently something of a scandal for new media studies. The wrench that Joyce thus threw into the perpetual motion machine of bureaucratic culture–his implicit demand that we simply stop for a while–is not discussed at any length or in any depth in any peer-reviewed published scholarship on Joyce’s work currently on record.13 That is understandable, of course, given that when I say Joyce implicitly demanded we “stop,” I mean, of course, that he demanded we stop speaking (and writing) with such consensually unadulterable zeal on our topic of choice: an endeavor which, as most every reader of this essay will know–for reasons I will therefore not bother to detail–is structurally impossible.14
     
    All supervisory protestation aside, we scholars, who have been gifted with speech, know that we will always be haunted by those who cannot speak, whether or not we choose to regift or to yield them speech, and even if we do finally just choose to be quiet. The sources of Joyce’s enormously influential work lay in the sociality of a twenty-year career as a writing educator at Jackson Community College in Jackson, Michigan, on the one hand, and in the textuality of the essayist counter-tradition of poststructuralist French feminism, on the other. Joyce went out of his way, in his critical and personal essays, to advance these elective affinities, which describe two of the territories most evenly at odds with the bureaucratic research-intensive regime of the new object for whose sake new media studies, in its self-constitution through Joyce’s work, was embraced. For literary scholars eager at once to seize the object “hyperfiction” and to both subordinate and elevate themselves, in traditional fashion, in the critic’s relation to the writer, the institutionalized activism of writing pedagogy, at the intake valve of the educational system, represented an anonymous form of professional labor conveniently discarded with Joyce’s transition to the more rarefied environ of Vassar. And if a determinedly continental écriture féminine was never wholly marginal to the first-wave U.S. hypertext theory that hitched its critical wagon to Joyce’s writerly star, it was certainly never central, either, at least to the extent that the usual alchemies of Anglo-American import substitution, administered by both masculinist and feminist notaries, transformed its practices and procedures into works and theories. The red thread of Joyce’s life-work might thus be said to traverse a blind spot in the voluminous body of scholarship chronicling it, to the extent that the lesson it leaves for the curator’s habitus has always already, in a way, been unlearned.15 That lesson lies in the capacity of the literary artifact to make counter-claims on the method and form of the criticism literally regarding it: and not because what we call social and historical “context”–a wealth of found or imagined realia–impresses the work, in an emplacement the critic can demand from the research object while tactically bracketing it in her own effort. Rather, in the unavoidably sublimated and so inadmissible homology, or structural affinity, of critical with literary writing itself (which finds departments of English studies, for example, serving today as common homes for dedicated “creative writers,” who create literary objects, dedicated literary scholars, who analyze their creative colleagues’ published products, and dedicated rhetoric and composition scholars, to whom the theory-praxis of writing about writing itself now falls and belongs). To begin to discern the outline of the new media critical homology I am proposing, one would have to look to the theory of the essay as it lives, today, in U.S.-based rhetoric and composition studies, in its constructive intimacy with democratic statism. Simultaneously, and with tolerance for their conflict, one would have to look to its legacy in what Todd May has called “poststructuralist anarchism”–and its afterlife in the early hypertext theory of Joyce’s moment.
     
    To “see” both at once, one would need something like what the compositionist Douglas Hesse, combining concepts from Ricoeur and Heinrich Schenker, calls the Auskomponierung or “composing out” of the essay, as the diachronic prolongation, in sophistic narrative, of the synchronic chord of the scholastic proposition (“Essay Form and Auskomponierung” 292ff). Already, in the very first of the “theoretical narratives” of his book of densely tropological essays, Of Two Minds, Joyce writes in the collective first person of being “too late at the end of something and unable to speak” (1). To write, as Joyce writes, that the book’s “interstitial” documents were not composed from nomadic and iterative detachments, but rather were composed as such Bruchstücke,16 in a form that places them radically at odds with the generic professional self-reproduction constructing a field, is after all only to remind ourselves that fourteen years after the University of Michigan Press published Joyce’s radically essayist multigraph, traditionally peer-reviewed scholarship emerging from literary studies itself into the research field of new media studies, as such, remains scarce.17 That Of Two Minds is a book of critical fragments introduced by a parable reproduced from the author’s unpublished “twenty-some-year old” novel (1) invokes a homology on which I have elaborated elsewhere,18 between the productive activity contained and managed by the term “creative writing” and the act of invention, rather than discovery, constituting a new field of inquiry. That a few pages later Joyce goes on to invoke a “tradition of hypermedia studies” is in turn arguably something of a feint, in so far as the division of labor solicited here is metastasized to the point of failure as division:
     

    We had generally completed the underlying functionality of the [Storyspace] program before we heard the term hypertext or read Ted Nelson’s Literary Machines (1990). Yet from the earliest point in our collaboration we progressively found ourselves in contact with the tradition of hypermedia studies, beginning with Bush and Engelbart and continuing to Nelson. That tradition of scholarship and active collaboration existed as something of an iceberg–or, more aptly, like some huge octopus with only its eye above water but with submerged tentacles reaching almost everywhere around us, including pedagogy, linguistics, cognitive science, literature, physics, database theory, classics, media studies, medicine, and so on. Because it was a tradition concerned with links and interrelationships, it observed no intellectual boundaries.
     

    (32)

     
    A credulous reading of the first two sentences, here, will overlook their excavation by what follows them, the concealed inertia of the iceberg yielding to the life of the disciplinary octopus, itself exceeded and erased in its substantiality by an abstract conceptual image–of the genrecidal impossible possibility, as it were, of a tradition recognizing no bounded corpus or archive or division of labor. Here is the double writing of much of Joyce’s body of work, in its both critical and creative forms, which finds its reception, for the most part, in uncompounded readings: that of the eager scholar-entrepreneur who seizes on the historical trope of discrete continuity (a “tradition”) essential to the institution-building project of discipline, and that of his counterpart for whom that discretion itself, more (or less) than a pragmatically ineluctable, bureaucratic fiction, is the very trace of that disavowal without which such fictions may never come to be.
     
    It was the extrusion of the computer itself, Joyce explains, as a mediator of scholarship that epistemically reframed our “work” on, in, and of knowledge: an event whose meaning lay in the negative critical disturbance of discipline, rather than in the positivized fulfillment of “interdisciplinarity” that it certainly always suggested:
     

    As we appropriated computers to our uses and modeled complex understandings upon a foundation of low-level concerns, we found ourselves in dialogue with others who, though they proceeded from much different disciplines, shared a common process of tool building and intellection with us.
     
    I knew of, and for years had given lip service to, the interdisciplinary nature of my professional life. I had done my work at the Iowa Writers Workshop and so was in touch with a widespread and active artistic and learning community as well the scholarly and critical community that Sherman Paul had introduced me to. I had trained myself as a composition theorist in the line of fire, as chair of a community college English department, and knew that field through research, practice, conferences, and anxiety attacks. Not only did each of these domains interact with one another; they also actively espoused essentially interdisciplinary stances.
     
    Despite all this, the problem was that, if we talked at all, my colleagues and I more often than not spent more time talking among ourselves about interdisciplinary learning than we did putting it into practice.
     

    (32-33)

     

    Read attentively, in 2009, such meditation perhaps displays some of that patina of enigmatically recent age, so disturbing to the temporization of research, to which Nietzsche, writing of the utility and disadvantage of scholarly historiography for life, gave the not entirely translatable term unzeitgemäß. If the narrative through which Joyce appears to construct the fulfillment of interdisciplinary desire in computerization thus seems, in its presentist or futurist naïveté, like something from what Glenn Willmott calls the “junk pile of critical history” (207), that is because, ever the rhetorician, Joyce knows how to declare one thing while suggesting another or, what is another way to put it, how to use language to suggest the difference of language from code, without reducing that insight, itself, to transmission. It is in this respect that, then as now, many of Joyce’s more comfortably technocratic peers and promoters simply have not, and do not, read him.

     
    Through all the periods of the periodizations that followed, from a first generation of link-focused “verbal” hyperfictions received with inflated deconstructive claims, to the structural-functionalist restoration of Espen Aarseth’s Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature (1997), to a third wave as yet exposed to reification,19 Joyce’s legacy has perhaps too often turned on readings of his hyperfictions–above all, the inaugural Afternoon, a story–which reconstruct the work implicitly or explicitly as the work of a working artist or writer, demandedly distinct from that of the thinker, critic, theorist, or essayist Joyce always already also was (and is).20 To be sure, such readings have often made good use (if often in precritical fashion) of Joyce’s various declarations of authorial and other forms of procedural intention, as a mode of indulgence of such hyperprofessionalized ethnographic consultation. It is less often that the critic of Afternoon is committed to reading the thinker’s essays in Of Two Minds (just to start with) in determined counterpoint with the writer’s artifact. And never, as far as I can tell, has anyone pondered the modification of that counterpoint, itself, by the self-consciously Bartlebyesque resignation of the intention declared on that very strictly access-controlled and verified means of publication, Joyce’s personal “not at home” page.21 Let me suggest, by way of a kind of testimony, if not an accomplishment of compensation, that if we still want to consider Joyce’s work a founding moment in new media literary studies, in the United States, we have to recognize the radical untimeliness of, and at, that foundation. I mean the extent to which the negativity of Joyce’s secession from this emergent field must be understood not as the end of his influence in it, but in antinomian fashion, as its beginning again.
     
    For the reduction of Joyce to hyperfiction author, in the new media studies scholarship that more or less brackets Joyce’s critical project, is in fact nothing new as a disciplinary gesture; rather, it is a repetition of the founding ruse of literary-critical modernity, in what Clifford Siskin has called “novelism”: the generation, from a heterogenous and yet unified (or combined and uneven) field of writing, of the separate positions of the self-identified critic and her critical object, produced by the writer. In the subordination of writing, a discourse and an institution, to the (fabricated) research object “the novel,” modern disciplinarity in the literary sphere naturalizes writing as mimesis–that is, gives it a job to do, in determined opposition to the radical self-reflexivity of writing as mass professionalization itself, in its capacity simultaneously to expand and to contract the division of intellectual labor. Over and against this “novelism” of U.S. new media literary studies, I am suggesting, Joyce’s work must be read–must be reread–in context of the German and French counterconcretions of what R. Lane Kauffmann and Claire de Obaldia call “Continental essayism,” and which has to be seen as a legacy of the moment of “high theory” and its import substitution in the U.S academy. As a problem of form and of style in the temporizing of the knowledge-object, that legacy, as Jameson observes apropos of Adorno, is nothing if not the incitement to rereading, itself, as juxtapositional comparison, the generation of critical homology:
     

    Such essays are thus the fragments of or footnotes to a totality which never comes into being; and what unites them, I am tempted to say, is less their thematic content than it is on the one hand their style, as a perpetual present in time of the process of dialectical thinking itself, and on the other their basic intellectual coordinates. For what as fragments they share in spite of the dispersal of their raw material is the common historical situation itself … which serves as the framework within which we understand them. To this concrete situation itself the language makes fateful and monitory allusion: the administered world, the institutionalized society, the culture industry, the damaged subject–an image of our historical present which is Adorno’s principal sociological contribution and which yet … is never expressed directly in the form of a thesis. Rather, it intervenes as a series of references to a state of things with which our familiarity is already presupposed …. The mode is that characteristic German sarcasm which may be said to have been Nietzsche’s contribution to the language and in which a constant play of cynical, colloquial expressions holds the disgraced real world at arm’s length, while abstractions and buried conceptual rhymes compare it with the impossible ideal.
     

    (Marxism 52-53)

     

    IV.

     
    The capacious and considered retrospective treatment of Joyce’s Afternoon offered by Matthew G. Kirschenbaum in Mechanisms: New Media and the Forensic Imagination, an ambitious and successful recent attempt to bring U.S.-based new media studies to disciplinary self-consciousness, is a good place to start. Kirschenbaum’s reading, if he would want to call it that, begins with the dramatic historicizing, in a journalistic mode, of Joyce’s conversion from print novelist to hyperfiction writer, upon his seduction by the personal computer as writing tool:
     

    Storyspace was a product of the early 1980s personal computer boom. At the time, Joyce, whose first novel The War Outside of Ireland (1982) had just won a regional literary prize, was interested in exploring what he termed “multiple fictions,” the concept that would eventually be made manifest as “a story that changed with every reading,” the mandate with which Joyce wrote Afternoon. He had become a home computer hobbyist, acquiring first an Apple II and later a Macintosh. Early in January of 1982 (the same year “the computer” would be dubbed Time Magazine‘s “Man of the Year”) Joyce wrote to Howard Becker, a sociologist at Northwestern who had read and admired his first novel and whom Joyce has since characterized as his earliest hypertext supporter. Becker was a self-professed Apple evangelist.
     

    (168-69)

     

    Kirschenbaum’s account ends, meanwhile, not with Joyce’s own authorial closing parenthesis of 2004, under that sepulchral rock cairn, but with an equally moving first-person narrative of Kirschenbaum’s own archival work with the Michael Joyce Papers now housed at the University of Texas. This was singularly temporizing work, involving the emulation of obsolete software environments and other forms of “hacking” at the intersection of what Kirschenbaum distinguishes, in a conceit fundamental to his argument, as “forensic” and “formal” concepts of medial materiality. Fittingly, perhaps, it is the one moment in this industrious and exacting work of structural retrospection when its author yields to the melancholy of the digital archive’s unavoidable juxtaposition of immaterially presentist facilitations with the future anterior dilations of software and bit rot:

     

    The digital objects in the DSpace repository are what are known in the trade as BLOBs, Binary Large OBjects. DSpace knows how to manage both item-level metadata and access to these files, but it does not facilitate the use of them. To actually work with the Afternoons or with any other material it must first be downloaded to the desktop of the Ransom Center’s laptop, where I use what means and know-how I can to make cranky old binaries execute on the up-to-date operating system. Sometimes I am unsuccessful…. At the end of every work day I leave the Ransom Center and cross busy Guadalupe Street to a coffeehouse that offers public WiFi service. I log on and immediately copy and paste my notes into an e-mail message that I send to myself, the bits beamed into the late Austin afternoon to be sprayed across the surface of a hard disk spinning in the silo of a server farm I will never see.
     

    (207-8)

     
    Objects hidden in space and vanished in time are juxtaposed, here, in an analogy for the distinction between forensic and formal materiality (the bit as inscribed, yet only microscopically legible, vs. the bit as manipulable self-present symbol), itself designed to facilitate a procedural intervention in the wayward idealism of new media literary studies, without allowing it much of an answer. To the extent that that distinction informs Kirschenbaum’s approach to Afternoon as an archival object, it includes a pointed demonstration of critical distance from one of the fancies of so-called first-wave hypertext criticism, in a gambit that does more to emplace Kirschenbaum’s study in the dislocations of its own moment than anything else in the book. That fancy is the euphoric identification of electronic writing or textuality, in its play of absence and presence, with the theses of poststructuralist literary and cultural theory, as exemplified in George P. Landow’s landmark 1991 study Hypertext: The Convergence of Contemporary Critical Theory and Technology.
     
    Landow’s book, Kirschenbaum reminds us, was typical in placing Joyce’s Afternoon at its center, as a reunion of the mutually alienated cultures of the writer and critic, as well as a triumphally performative material enactment of antithetic poststructuralist “theories” whose thetically conceived credibility was under assault, then as now, from latter-day Johnsons willing to bruise their toes on the rock of positive common sense to score a point. This untimely “convergence,” which Landow more or less continues to defend in the updates producing Hypertext 2.0 (1997) and Hypertext 3.0 (2006), was right from the start, Kirschenbaum tells us, “oddly out of step with mainstream literary studies,” which had already sloughed off its poststructuralist torment for (a presumably less culpably faddish) cultural studies and the new historicisms (165). But it turns out that the impairment of Hypertext‘s critical modernity, as Kirschenbaum sees it, has another, deeper or wider source, in the “latent Romanticism” of literary studies of which poststructuralist criticism was merely a single convenient symptom, and which Kirschenbaum suggests infected “much of the writing about the experience of reading (or playing) Afternoon” (166).
     
    Aware, for all that, that the period under discussion was not simply a moment of addled hallucination, but a meaningfully different critical-historical conjuncture, Kirschenbaum makes a somewhat cursory nod, in Mechanisms‘ coda, to the simultaneously ethnographic and philosophically critical concept of media appropriate to cultures that still, so to speak, believe in ghosts–or modernities in revolt:
     

    The recovery of the past through objects in the present is our one recourse, besides spiritualism, to satisfying a desire to speak with the dead. Storage, which I have discussed throughout this book, is all about creating a systemized space in which this activity can unfold.
     

    (251)

     

    But Kirschenbaum does not seem all that interested in the negativity of the spectral that was integral to the French poststructuralist teratology of Nietzsche with Freud and Marx, through which we might say the subject of Euro-Atlantic techno-modernity, at a particular criticalhistorical conjuncture, pursued the ethical imagination of the unheard (or the violently silenced) speech in its “dead” peripheries. That, if anything, needs to be taken as the most charitable understanding of the impulse that drove what Kirschenbaum calls “high poststructuralism,” read not for its theses on the administered world of literary criticism, but for the indirection, both modal and stylistic, through which it operated as what the Jameson of the 1970s, himself barely tolerating its challenge to Lukácsian Marxism, calls a “problem of continuity” (Marxism 50).

     
    To be sure, Landow’s exponence of hypertext was characterized by an eagerness to make connections that were always, in his own eyes (and his own words), slightly embarrassing.22 But that is perhaps merely a way of pointing to its roots in a tradition (Jameson’s word) other than, and other to, the Anglo-American tradition in which Kirschenbaum’s own determinedly empiricist work appears to move–and which carries what Jameson calls an “anti-speculative bias,” in the emphasis placed “on the individual fact or item at the expense of the network of relationship in which that item may be embedded.” The liberal positivism of that tradition, Jameson tells us, is characteristically resistant to the forging of fanciful links (Marxism x)–among such ostensibly irreconcilable categories, for example, as a software program and a theory of reading. To this observation, one would perhaps have to add Adorno’s trenchant readings of that chorismos or “block” in the Kantian modernity to which he saw Euro-Atlantic thought as having regressed today–yet which he characterizes, with something more (or less) than uncomplicated hostility, as “what a Romantic artist once named the innermost life of the world” (Kant’s Critique 178). It is no pointlessly arcane disclamation to observe that Jameson’s dialectical thought shares with poststructuralist theory (or whatever we want to call it) a stance inimical to that disavowal of reflexive critical attention that is in some ways implicit in thirdwave new media criticism’s disavowal of its first-wave pro-theoretical naïveté–as it is explicit, perhaps, in a now vast corpus of restorationist work on literary studies “after theory.” Implicit and explicit, we might say, in the disavowal of poststructuralism, is a disavowal above all of the need to read that massive corpus of cultural criticism, grounded in Continental European philosophy and social theory, that was generated in its name–and to read it, so to speak, closely: a term marking not claims for the ontological primacy or exclusivity of texts, but simply the practice of not taking things literally, of thinking twice, looking before one leaps, and so on. All the uncomfortable pauses in textual practice, that is to say, that in truth do interfere in the regimented progress of a properly professional body of work (Joyce’s own irregular and finally negative path to his professional profile today is ample evidence of that). Counterposed with such ritual circumscription, Landow’s inadroit claim for hypertext as the embodiment of literary theory (and later, as the disembodiment of postcoloniality)23 might be described as sincerely enthusiastic.
     
    But Landow’s pronouncements were perhaps never as unreflectively thetic, in the first place, as Kirschenbaum, with others before him, makes them out to be. In the tropisms of those “shocks of recognition,” of those concepts that “cry out for hypertextuality” (Hypertext 3.0 1, 53), one finds not, in fact, the advancement of theses, but rather imagined comparisons between factical and fictional worlds–offered not to falsifiability tests, but to what Elizabeth Bruss, writing in 1982, calls the criterial, rather than evidential ground of argument (44). Indeed, one might say this was the very premise of the now justly famous opening gambit of Hypertext:
     

    When designers of computer software examine the pages of Glas or Of Grammatology, they encounter a digitalized, hypertextual Derrida; and when literary theorists examine Literary Machines, they encounter a deconstructionist or poststructuralist Nelson. These shocks of recognition can occur because over the past several decades literary theory and computer hypertext, apparently unconnected areas of inquiry, have increasingly converged…. A paradigm shift, I suggest, has begun to take place in the writings of Jacques Derrida and Theodor Nelson, Roland Barthes and Andries van Dam. I expect that one name in each pair will be unknown to most of my readers.
     

    (Hypertext 3.0 1)

     

    To be sure, Kirschenbaum’s extended argument for the diachronic remanence of data in inscribed storage, over its static ephemerality in the endless present of screen memory, is a successful corrective of some bad habits in the reception of new media literary artifacts–including what he would call the “medial ideology” of self-evident representation, as marked by the volatile enthusiasm Landow imputes, in this more or less famous passage, to the “encounter” between theory and machine. Quite plausibly, those bad habits were themselves built on bad habits in the Anglo-American literary reception of the endgame of continental European philosophy, as an import substitution scheme and editorial racket the legacies of which have yet to be sorted out coherently even today. Speaking as a literary scholar, writer and humanist partisan who for five years has used a Concurrent Versioning System repository for all of my text production, itself taking the form of document-records simply numbered in time, I was delighted to find in Kirschenbaum’s book a substantive meditation on a problem I had so far been unable to frame for myself with any degree of critical adequacy whatsoever. While checking into my personal CVS repository successive drafts of the essay you are now reading, on this page or screen, I realized why, for reasons Kirschenbaum’s book has helped me think through, that practice of self-archiving has displaced my own previously vigorous interest in “screening” individual new media literary artworks, as a primary mode of “doing” new media studies, in the sense that one “does” one’s work in one’s field.24 It is the cyclic or folded temporality and historicity in critical practice itself, we might say, that goes missing in the acquisitive pursuit of critical objects whose volatility our very profession forces us to undermeasure.

     
    I must admit I am haunted, on the other hand, by the confidence implied by Kirschenbaum’s emphasis on the persistence of data, in the legacies of the inscribing technologies of nineteenth-century Euro-Atlantic imperial modernity–and in the confidence it implies in that modernity as a civilization.25 Among other places, it was precisely in that firstwave hypertext theory, which Kirschenbaum (not without precedent) now proposes we discard, that what we might call poststructuralist essayism “survived,” in the sense of that term familiar to readers of Derrida’s readings of Benjamin’s altogether too famous essay on translation, where it marks the fragile founding twilight of “our” modernity as a guarantor of secular truth. Indeed, this emphasis on continuity seems to sit at some odds with the reaching for figures of cyclic or folded temporality, in some of the more imaginative new work emerging from the field into which the argument of Kirschenbaum’s book is crafted to intervene26–work one can read as embracing a newly self-conscious and justly sensitive form of temporizing attention to its own imperial Euro-Atlantic First Worldism. To its own dependence, that is to say, on wealthdependent (and as such, highly leveraged) habits and levels of energy consumption. If, among its many valuably singular insights, Mechanisms contains one potentially fatal intellectual infelicity, it lies in this emphasis on the remanence of data, deployed against the virtualities of the poststructuralist imagination, at precisely that cultural moment when the permanence of the progressive civilizational legacies of Euro-Atlantic modernity is a question, rather than an answer, for more core subjects of the United States empire than at any time since the 1970s.
     
    In postwar U.S. literary studies at its boldest, anyway, “literarity” has always been understood to include the undisciplined Nietzschean temporality of the event, as well as its Weberian secular avocation. Kirschenbaum glances in this direction, I think, when he concedes that “software is also ineluctably part of a proleptic now” (203), empirically affirming Joyce’s own assertion, in the lines echoing Marx and Engels that Kirschenbaum quotes from Of Two Minds, that “Electronic text appears as dissipate mist” (233). But that assertion, like others in Joyce’s essay into which it is woven, is rhetorical–by which I mean simply that we are forced to find in it the possibility, the certainty, even, that Joyce was and is saying something other than, or in addition to, what he actually wrote. What we call poststructuralist theory, which we would do better to call poststructuralist writing, was not a body of falsifiable propositions, least of all about the positive qualitative ephemerality of anything, including the object “writing.” What we call poststructuralist theory, in its particulate presence in U.S. literary culture, was an intensity of writing practice through which the works of Derrida, Deleuze, and all the other usual suspects served temporarily to reverse the programmatic suppression of rhetoricity in bureaucratic academic modernism. As a committedly literary user of the Concurrent Versioning System whose arborescent constraint Kirschenbaum delicately counterposes with the rhizomorphist euphoria of literary theory,27 let me insist that, all revisionist hopes and dreams notwithstanding, the disciplinary question of what we call “theory” is still very much unsettled. Because as an essayist I set out (with no illusions of freedom) to write rhetorical essays, rather than deliberatively structured text, the hierarchical tree that I cannot escape is something for which I nevertheless have no substantive use. And to speak of archiving, rather than writing, I find little need, in preserving my own work, for the disciplined programmer’s branch invoked by Kirschenbaum against early hypertext theory’s imagined comparisons, which he permits to be marked, in his text, as another form of humanist naïveté. That he claims, on one page of Mechanisms, that the appeal of poststructuralism for new media studies has been “abandoned, or at least … diluted” (43), and on the next that the “medial ideology” it promoted remains entirely intact (45), speaks to the weight that the CVS tree is being made to bear, in the strife of faculties marking Kirschenbaum’s clearing of space for himself in critical history:
     

    From this perspective the poststructuralism that has held sway over discussions of electronic writing since the late 1980s is a demonstrable medial artifact, one that had more to do with its moment (and marketing) than with the fundamental nature of electronic textuality. By contrast, an industrial-strength CVS environment is perhaps the ultimate realization of the kind of document science that has been practiced since the first stemma were printed in 1827 to display the relationships amongst a group of Swedish legal manuscripts.
     

    (201)

     
    To demand, as Kirschenbaum demands, that those who study books also study software, is to make claims on the modernity of literary studies itself, asserting priority for the mechanism and its technical administration (and administrators) at a level that exceeds the modesty, and indeed the genuine appeal, of Kirschenbaum’s proposals for those of his readers already with him in the letter, if in agreement or disagreement in spirit–and rather than not yet there. New media studies has always generated forward momentum through grandiose claims for renovation and threatened consequences for those left (or staying) behind, and while it seems only fair to grant Kirschenbaum’s own theses their own aspect of indirection, it needs to be said that since no “poststructuralist theorist” has ever asserted thetically the ideal rhizomorphism of anything, be that anything textual or nontextual, first-wave hypertext theory cannot credibly be accused of doing that, either, no matter how crudely and schematically some of its individual exponents may have (and have been) read. The critical clout of Kirschenbaum’s intervention pales where its foils are literally spectral, in this sense–a kind of ghost data, or intrasystemic ideal–and where “poststructuralist theory,” the thing he pursues to debunk, eludes him only because it was never there.
     
    Joyce’s sentence “Electronic text appears as dissipate mist” was written in the language of manifesto–which as Janet Lyon observes in her study of the form, “marks the point of impact where the idea of radical egalitarianism runs up against the entrenchment of an ancien régime” (1) and is difficult to read, in so far as “its apparent rhetorical straightforwardness obscures the degree to which the form is embedded in the contradictions of political representation” (2). In its “literally, inexorably, and grindingly absolute” linearity, the genetic CVS architecture that Kirschenbaum mobilizes against the misguidedly rhizomorphist theses of poststructuralist theory (and its hypertext-theoretic avatars) seems in some ways to serve to reproach Landow not only for his bureaucratic First-Worldist left anarchism, but for the still more irredeemable excess of a vision of hypertext as decolonization, as well.28 But it was Edward Said himself who, in the essay that places the anti-systemic form of the essay at the heart of what Said calls “secular criticism,” describes Euro-Atlantic imperial modernity as a product of the inexorably democratic displacement of the natal and vertical filiations of family and culture, by institutions such as the university, whose social character was best figured as agenealogically horizontal (17). To the extent that such “affiliation,” whether conservative (in, e.g., Eliot) or progressive (in Lukács), tends to recreate a “systematic totalizing world-view”–that is, to reinstate, in new form, the authority previously evacuated from genealogical filiation–Said argues that affiliative orders become cultural systems through which university-based intellectuals, for example, lose touch, in time, with “the resistance and the heterogeneity of civil society” (26). Despite the abdication of the genuinely insurrectionary literary theory of the 1960s (Said is no more sympathetic to “poststructuralism” than Jameson), this compensatory cultural system, Said suggests in 1983, is now feeling decisive pressure for the first time, as the dynamic legacy of decolonization replants the world-system’s peripheral regions squarely in front of (and even within) the campus gate. That one looks in vain, in the pages of Mechanisms, for any sense of that pressure, leaves one wondering what has replaced it–and what form its own criticism must take.
     
    An antipositivist might take a page, so to speak, from the double negation of a romantically ironic book on note-taking entitled “How to Make a Complete Map of Every Thought You Think.” That “book” is a freely available PDF document authored by software programmer Lion Kimbro, who advocates the deliberate creation, in note-taking practice, of what, with doomed aspiration to polysyntactic perversity, he calls “imaginary false links.”29 Here is a useful point of convergence–or opposition–between comparative literary-critical practice and new media studies. In the now strategically anachronistic first-wave ephemeralist concept of the differential hyperlink, a liminal interval traversing and demarcating at the same time, one might determine a homology with what Adorno (writing in 1958) calls the essay as form, in which our non-elective capitulation to modernity is balanced by a non-frivolous dream of freedom (“Der Essay”). Is it really too much to say, lending the word all the weight it deserves, that this matters?
     

    Brian Lennon is Assistant Professor of English and Comparative Literature at the Pennsylvania State University. He is the author of In Babel’s Shadow: Multilingual Literatures, Monolingual States, forthcoming in 2010 from the University of Minnesota Press.
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. See, for example, Acland, Funkhouser; Gitelman; Kirschenbaum; Zielinski. In what follows, when I speak of “new media studies,” I am referring to the emergent field defined mostly by scholars working, willingly or unwillingly, in English studies or other national literary studies departments in universities in the United States. That, of course, is a circumscribed referent, which some of the sources just named (Zielinski) may be argued to exceed — but just barely.

     

     
    2. One popular manifestation of this late imperial consciousness can be found in the journalistic fascination greeting Alex Wissner-Gross’s research on the environmental impact of computing infrastructure and activity. See, for example, “Revealed: The Environmental Impact of Google Searches,” The Sunday Times Online, January 11, 2009.

     

     
    3. See Mills: “Certain types of critics… judge work… according to whether or not its conclusions are gloomy or sunshiny, negative or constructive…. Personally, I happen to be a very optimistic type, but I must confess that I have never been able to make up my mind about whether something is so or not in terms of whether or not it leads to good cheer. First, one tries to get it straight, to make an adequate statement — if it is gloomy, too bad; if it leads to hope, fine. In the meantime, to cry for ‘the constructive program’ and ‘the hopeful note’ is often a sign of an incapacity to face facts as they are even when they are decidedly unpleasant — and it is irrelevant to truth or falsity” (78).

     

     
    4. For skeptical readings of the absorption of new media studies by literary studies (which are skeptical in different ways from one another, as well as from my own reading here), see Tabbi; Fitzpatrick.

     

     
    5. On gaming and Second Life, see Jones, The Meaning of Video Games and “Second Life, Video Games, and the Social Text,” PMLA 124.1 (January 2009): 264–272. On “netlish,” see Apter, 239ff.

     

     
    6. See Arrighi, The Long Twentieth Century; Arrighi, Adam Smith in Beijing; Arrighi, “The Winding Paths of Capital”; Wallerstein, The Modern World-System I; Wallerstein, The Decline of American Power. For a recent comprehensive summary of applications of Fernand Braudel’s historical models to literary studies, see Beecroft.

     

     
    7. Hayles’s “autocritography” Writing Machines is arguably one of the few influential recent works in U.S. new media literary studies to renew meaningful contact with this idea — working backward, as it were, from her position as an authority, in the conventional sense, in this field. In some ways, the autobiographical meditation and storytelling that frames the book as a personal critical retrospective — and a kind of “time out” — leads it closer to common cause with the ground impulse of Michael Joyce’s work, as I read it, than anything else recently published by the field’s leaders (with the possible additional exception of Alan Liu’s meditations on “destructive creation” and the negative dialectics of David Golumbia’s The Cultural Logic of Computation).

     

     
    8. Tim Berners-Lee had developed a hypertext GUI (Graphical Use Interface) browser for the NeXT computer in 1990. It wasn’t until 1993, however, that Mosaic (now Netscape) released a browser for Windows PC and Macintosh. In a recent assessment of a second wave (often termed “Web 2.0”) of this revolution, promising (once again) an unprecedented mass of authorship, Lev Manovich has argued that “the explosion of user-created media content on the web (dating from, say, 2005) has unleashed a new media universe” (319).

     

     
    9. Mann, Masocriticism: “Every manifesto, every exhibition, every review, every monograph, every attempt to take up or tear down the banner of the avant-gardes in the critical arena, every attempt to advance the avant-garde’s claims or to put them to rest: no matter what their ideological strategy or stakes, all end up serving the ‘white economy’ of cultural production. It is, finally, circulation alone that matters…. What if there were an avant-garde that was no longer committed to throwing itself on the spears of its enemies but operated in utter secrecy? What if the very history of cultural recuperation led us to imagine that some segment of what had once been the avant-garde must finally have learned from its mistakes and extended its trajectory into silence and invisibility? It might be necessary then to turn that silence and invisibility back against the critical project; it might be necessary to inflict that silence on one’s own discourse and suffer it as a kind of wound” (x, xii). See also Mann, The Theory-Death of the Avant-Garde: “If the death of the avant-garde is its complete representation within the white economy, then one must assume that other projects have realized this and decided to disappear. In the end it is the theoretical condition of this disappearance that poses the greatest challenge” (143).

     

     
    10. See Lennon, “Literature and the Transposition of Media.” On “code poetry,” see Raley.

     

     
    11. See Jameson, Postmodernism, 28ff. For an exhaustive reading of this episode, see Hartley, Textual Politics and the Language Poets.

     

     
    12. See http://faculty.vassar.edu/mijoyce/. Following completion of an abridged first draft of the present essay (in November, 2008), Joyce’s faculty Web page was modified once, on December 26, 2008. Before that date, the page had been unmodified since March 3, 2004, as stated here. As of the date of composition of this endnote (October 28, 2009), Joyce’s page has not been modified again since December 26, 2008. I can think of no better way to point to the epistemological gap produced by the publication-suppressive quality control of peer review and editorial mediation (even, as in the present case, on an unusually and gratifyingly rapid schedule) than to let the original date stand as a mark of the real present tense of this essay, modified by a kind of posthumous temporality: where Joyce could and can edit his personal Web page publication at any (and in real) time, this endnote must stand for the critical invisibility of the present essay during its composition, revision, review, editing, and production for publication. None of this is inevitable: proposals to reverse the order of the entire process, beginning with publication and concluding with peer review, are now part of the administrative mainstream, and collective work-flows approximating this reversed order of priority and labor already exist, in the form of the open access academic journal Philica and the Naboj “dynamical” peer review system for article preprints in physics, mathematics, computer science, and other science areas deposited in the arXiv.org repository hosted and operated by Cornell University.

     

     
    13. In one of a series of generous and thoughtful essays tracking Joyce’s work, Dave Ciccoricco devotes some discussion to what he charmingly terms Joyce’s “Not Home Page” – but (somewhat disingenuously, to judge by his tone) pronounces himself baffled by it, deferring its reception to the uncertified philosophical speculator of the realm of “theory” and the hidebound archivist who presumably defined literary studies (or perhaps history) in its salad days. “Whether he intends to return home,” Ciccoricco writes of Joyce’s withdrawal, “to ‘his storytelling roots’ (as the dust jacket of his recent print novel suggests) or just home for the day is a question best left to amateur prophets; probing his personal motivations, similarly, is best left to the ‘biographiles’.” With that question dispatched as more or less out of bounds, Ciccoricco moves on to discussing at length Joyce’s collaborative work with Mark Bernstein (whose career provides conveniently contrasting institutional-modernist continuity) and conducting an exhaustive dialectical analysis of the demi-concept Contour (capitalized in ironic reification) in hypertext theory. That Ciccoricco’s essay is perfectly, admirably successful at what it sets out to do, need not keep us from marking the detachment with which it begins — which in some ways recalls Kant’s observation, in the Preface to Prolegomena to Any Future Metaphysics That Will Be Able to Present Itself as Science, about liminal questions:
     
    To ask: whether a science is possible, presupposes that the actuality of the science is in doubt. But such a doubt offends everyone whose entire goods and chattels may perhaps consist in this supposed jewel; and hence the person who permits himself to utter this doubt should be prepared for resistance from all sides. Some, proudly conscious of their old and hence supposedly legitimate possession, with their metaphysical compendia in their hand, will look down on him and despise him; others, who nowhere see anything that is not the same as something they have already seen somewhere else, will not understand him; and everything will go on for a time as if nothing had occurred that might give occasion for fear or hope of an imminent change. (64)
     

    14. Anyone working in U.S. academe who is so isolated as to require clarification here might consult two documents: the Report of the MLA Task Force on Evaluating Scholarship for Tenure and Promotion, published in 2006, and Mark Bauerlein’s center-right response, in a report entitled “Professors on the Production Line, Students on Their Own,” produced in 2009 for the conservative American Enterprise Institute’s Future of American Education Project. Both reports attempt to address the structural function of the now entirely indigestible (if not, for that reason, unsustainable) quantity of scholarly publication in the humanities.

     
    15. Indeed, we would do well to read this Joyce’s embrace of silence, within the cultural Kraftfeld he created, in counterpoise with the noise of the other, historical Joyce, who, as Christine Brooke-Rose has put it, “was careful to leave… keys that initiated and continued to feed the immense Joyce industry” (3).

     

     
    16. On Bruchstücke (better translated “broken pieces,” Jacobs argued, than “fragments”), see Jacobs and De Man.

     

     
    17. One might say that new media studies scholars’ engagement of change in the material conditions of production for their own work virtually guarantees its fragmentation by multiple modes, streams, and media forms (both print and electronic journal articles and books, but also electronic resources, genres, and modes of distribution of various kinds — Web sites, blogs, wikis, and so on). This is not just because some of the historically most conservative, and therefore most prestigious print journals in literary studies, for example, have been slow to welcome work in the field. Rather, or also, it is because that dilation itself embodies a sedimented attachment to the artificial scarcity of a print economy and its control mechanisms. (We might say as well that a collective fixation on “quality control,” invoked to justify the competitive suppression of publication in literary and cultural studies — “mistakes” made in which never in fact endanger human life, or any other public resource — seems finally to be facing meaningful challenge, today.)

     

     
    18. See Lennon, “The Essay, in Theory.”

     

     
    19. This periodization follows that of N. Katherine Hayles; see Hayles, 27ff.

     

     
    20. “A self-avowed ‘postmodern classic’,” Kirschenbaum notes, “Afternoon is the single bestknown work of the nascent electronic literary canon. Nearly every serious critic in the field has found occasion to write about it at one time or another” (164).

     

     
    21. The phrase is Ciccoricco’s.

     

     
    22. “Hypertext,” Landow wrote in one of the sentences most often extracted from Hypertext, “creates an almost embarrassingly literal embodiment” of aspects of Barthes’s and Derrida’s theories of reading (Hypertext 3.0 52).

     

     
    23. See Hypertext 3.0, which finds Landow advancing the claim that “Hypertext in its most commonly encountered form, the World Wide Web, provides a particularly important way for the empire to write back” (345).

     

     
    24. See Lennon, “Screening a Digital Visual Poetics.”

     

     
    25. “We live in a time of the forensic imagination,” Kirschenbaum observes in the book’s subtitular passage, “as evidenced by the current vogue for forensic science in television drama and genre fiction. Forensics in this popular sense returns us to the scene of the crime; as a legal and scientific enterprise forensic investigation has its origins in the same nineteenth-century era that produced the great inscribing engines of modernity – the gramophone, film, and the typewriter all among them” (250).

     

     
    26. At this juncture, no one has done more than Alan Liu to articulate a negative dialectics for new media studies, as an emerging field, and to link it, as a form of thought and writing, to what I am calling “essayism.” Apropos of the negativity of critique (and drawing directly on the polemics of Arif Dirlik), Liu observes: “Put in the past tense, such questions concern what Jean-François Lyotard has called the ‘metanarratives’ of progressive humanity and speculative reason that academic historicism once sustained but that now, from the viewpoint of cultural critics, seem just so many empty postures. But it is the present tense of these questions – the sense that they bear on a gigantic ‘now’ inclusive of the Enlightenment and the nineteenth and twentieth centuries together – that cultural criticism has found most compelling. That now is modernity. In the broadest sense, the underlying historical concern of cultural criticism has been modernization, the centuries-long ‘progress’ of rationalization, routinization, institutionalization, organization building, and empire building (with their attendant political, market, and media effects) engineered by post-Enlightenment industrial societies. Cultural criticism is the critique by disjunction of such progress” (5). The temporality of what Liu calls “academic historicism,” here, needs supplementing or supplanting by the temporalities of an imagined or comparative historicity: “Where once the job of literature and the arts was creativity, now, in an age of total innovation, I think it must be history. That is to say, it must be a special, dark kind of history. The creative arts as cultural criticism (and vice versa) must be the history not of things created – the great, auratic artifacts treasured by a conservative or curatorial history – but of things destroyed in the name of creation” (8).
     
    To the extent that it builds on the critiques elaborated in such essays as “Dark Continents: Critique of Internet Metageographies” and “Of Bugs and Rats: Cyber-Cleanliness, Cyber-Squalor, and the Fantasy-Spaces of Informational Globalization,” caps a productive deviation from narrowly conceived new media studies as such, and evidences the complex long duration of a personal intellectual history, Terry Harpold’s recent Ex-foliations: Reading Machines and the Upgrade Path presents a meditation on Joyce’s Afternoon (pp. 175ff.), among other objects of the disciplinary temporality of new media studies, that is very much in the spirit of my own thinking, here. I thank an anonymous reader for Postmodern Culture for encouraging me to consult this last work, which reminded me of the influence Harpold’s polemical interventions, at the very end of the 1990s, had on my own formation at that altogether earlier stage.

     

     
    27. See Mechanisms: “The textual practices embodied by a CVS stand in marked contrast to the ‘version’ of electronic textuality that is perhaps better known in literary and artistic circles, largely as a result of first-wave hypertext theory. At no time is this more obvious than when comparing the figures of the tree – the basic data structure of any versioning system – and the rhizome, or network. That Storyspace embodied both from the start is no surprise, given that it was also intended to support a rudimentary versioning system for its authors…. The same story spaces that modeled evanescent postmodern theory, in other words, could also, at least in principle, be made to enforce just the kind of versioning protocols that were then emerging in the software development industry” (206).

     

     
    28. See Hypertext 3.0: “The chief value of placing these essays online is simply that Zimbabweans can speak – or rather, write – for themselves rather than having critics from the [sic] Europe, the United Kingdom, and the United States write for them” (346).

     

     
    29. See Kimbro, How to Make a Complete Map of Every Thought You Think: “TOLERATE ERRORS. If this is hard for you, start fucking things up by attaching imaginary false links in one place (I guess). Start making up links that go to creatively unrelated places” (PDF version, 84).
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Aarseth, Espen. Cybertext: Perspectives on Ergodic Literature. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1997. Print.
    • Acland, Charles, ed. Residual Media. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2007. Print.
    • Adorno, Theodor W. “Der Essay als Form.” Gesammelte Schriften II: Noten zur Literatur. Ed. Rolf Tiedemann. 1958; Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag, 1996. 9-33. Print.
    • —. Kant’s Critique of Pure Reason. Ed. Rolf Tiedemann. Trans. Rodney Livingstone. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2001. Print.
    • Andrew, Dudley. “The Core and the Flow of Film Studies.” Critical Inquiry 35 (Summer 2009): 879-915. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Apter, Emily. The Translation Zone: A New Comparative Literature. Princeton University Press, 2006. Print.
    • Arrighi, Giovanni. Adam Smith in Beijing: Lineages of the Twenty-First Century. New York: Verso, 2007. Print.
    • —. The Long Twentieth Century: Money, Power, and the Origins of Our Times. New York: Verso, 1994. Print.
    • —. “The Winding Paths of Capital: Interview by David Harvey.” New Left Review 56 (March-April 2009): 61-94. Print.
    • Beecroft, Alexander. “World Literature without a Hyphen: Towards a Typology of Literary Systems.” New Left Review 54 (November-December 2008): 87-100. Print.
    • Benjamin, Walter. “Die Aufgabe des Übersetzers.” Gesammelte Schriften IV. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag, 1972. 11-21. Print.
    • —. “The Task of the Translator.” Selected Writings Volume 1, 1913-1926. Ed. Michael W. Jennings & Marcus Bullock. Trans. Harry Zohn. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1996. 253-264. Print.
    • —. “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.” Illuminations. Trans. Harry Zohn. New York: Schocken Books, 1968. 217-251. Print.
    • Bolter, J. David, and Richard A. Grusin. Remediation: Understanding New Media. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2000. Print.
    • Braudel, Fernand. The Mediterranean and the Mediterranean World in the Age of Philip II, Volume I. Trans. Siân Reynolds. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1995. Print.
    • Breeze, Mez. “Inappropriate Format][ing][: Craft-Orientation vs. Networked Content[s].” Journal of Digital Information 3.3 (January 2003). Web.
    • Brooke-Rose, Christine. The Christine Brooke-Rose Omnibus. Manchester, UK and New York: Carcanet, 1986. Print.
    • Bruss, Elizabeth. Beautiful Theories: The Spectacle of Discourse in Contemporary Criticism. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982. Print.
    • Ciccoricco, Dave. “The Contour of a Contour.” electronic book review, June 13, 2003. Web.
    • De Man, Paul. “‘Conclusions’: Walter Benjamin’s ‘The Task of the Translator’.” Yale French Studies 69 (1985): 25-46. Print.
    • Featherstone, Mike. “Postmodernism, Cultural Change, and Social Practice.” Postmodernism, Jameson, Critique. Ed. Douglas Kellner. Washington, DC: Maisonneuve, 1989. 117-138. Print.
    • Fitzpatrick, Kathleen. “Media Studies and Literary Studies.” Planned Obsolescence, February 13, 2009. Web.
    • Funkhouser, Chris. Prehistoric Digital Poetry: An Archaeology of Forms, 1959-1995. Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press, 2007. Print.
    • Gitelman, Lisa. Always Already New: Media, History and the Data of Culture. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2006. Print.
    • Harpold, Terry. “Dark Continents: Critique of Internet Metageographies.” Postmodern Culture 9.2 (1999). Web.
    • . Ex-foliations: Reading Machines and the Upgrade Path. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2008. Print.
    • Hartley, George. Textual Politics and the Language Poets. Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana University Press, 1989. Print.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. Writing Machines. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2002. Print.
    • Hesse, Douglas. “Essay Form and Auskomponierung.” Essays on the Essay. Ed. Alexander Butrym. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1990. 289-306. Print.
    • Jacobs, Carol. “The Monstrosity of Translation.” Modern Language Notes 90 (1975): 755-766. Print.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Marxism and Form: Twentieth-Century Dialectical Theories of Literature. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1972. Print.
    • —. Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke University Press, 1991. Print.
    • Jones, Steven. The Meaning of Video Games: Gaming and Textual Strategies. New York: Routledge, 2008. Print.
    • —. “Second Life, Video Games, and the Social Text,” PMLA 124.1 (January 2009): 264-272. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Joyce, Michael. Afternoon, a story. Cambridge, MA: Eastgate Systems, 1990. CD-ROM.
    • —. Of Two Minds: Hypertext Pedagogy and Poetics. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1995. Print.
    • Kant, Immanuel. Prolegomena to Any Future Metaphysics. Ed. Günter Zöller. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2003. Print.
    • Kauffmann, R. Lane. “The Skewed Path: Essaying as Un-methodical Method.” Diogenes 143 (1988): 66-92. Print.
    • Kimbro, Lion. How to Make a Complete Map of Every Thought You Think. Lion’s Den. 2003. Web.
    • Kirschenbaum, Matthew G. Mechanisms: New Media and the Forensic Imagination. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2008. Print.
    • Landow, George P. Hypertext: The Convergence of Contemporary Critical Theory and Technology. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1992. Print.
    • —. Hypertext 2.0. Rev., amplified ed. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1997. Print.
    • —. Hypertext 3.0: Critical Theory and New Media in an Era of Globalization. 3rd ed. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2006. Print.
    • Lennon, Brian. “The Essay, in Theory.” Diacritics 38.3 (Fall 2008). Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • —. “Literature and the Transposition of Media.” American Letters & Commentary 12 (2000): 72-76. Print.
    • —. “Screening a Digital Visual Poetics.” Configurations 8.1 (Winter 2000): 63-85. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Liu, Alan. The Laws of Cool: Knowledge Work and the Culture of Information. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2004. Print.
    • Lyon, Janet. Manifestoes: Provocations of the Modern. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1999.
    • Mann, Paul. Masocriticism. Albany, NY: SUNY Press, 1999. Print.
    • —. The Theory-Death of the Avant-Garde. Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana University Press, 1991. Print.
    • Manovich, Lev. “The Practice of Everyday (Media) Life: From Mass Consumption to Mass Cultural Production?” Critical Inquiry 35.2 (2009): 319-331. Print.
    • May, Todd. The Political Philosophy of Poststructuralist Anarchism. University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press, 1994. Print.
    • Mills, C. Wright. “Types of Practicality.” The Sociological Imagination. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. 76-99. Print.
    • Obaldia, Claire de. The Essayistic Spirit: Literature, Modern Criticism, and the Essay. Oxford, New York: Clarendon Press, Oxford University Press, 1995. Print.
    • Perelman, Bob. “Exchangeable Frames.” Poetics Journal 5 (May 1985): 168-176. Print.
    • Poster, Mark. “Global Media and Culture.” New Literary History 39.3 (2009): 685-703. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Roelofs, Monique. “From Intervention to Zwischenology. With love to Wolfgang, Bey, and Lucille.” Nettime, February 6, 2000. Web.
    • Said, Edward. The World, the Text, and the Critic. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1983. Print.
    • Saussy, Haun. “Exquisite Cadavers Stitched from Fresh Nightmares: Of Memes, Hives, and Selfish Genes.” Comparative Literature in an Age of Globalization. Ed. Haun Saussy. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2006. Print.
    • Siskin, Clifford. “The Rise of Novelism.” Cultural Institutions of the Novel. Ed. Deidre Lynch & William B. Warner. Duke University Press, 1996. 423-440. Print.
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. A Critique of Postcolonial Reason: Toward a History of the Vanishing Present. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999. Print.
    • Tabbi, Joseph. “Locating the Literary in New Media.” Contemporary Literature 49.2 (2008): 311-331. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Wallerstein, Immanuel. The Decline of American Power: The U.S. in a Chaotic World. New York: New Press, 2003. Print.
    • —. The Modern World System, Vol. 1: Capitalist Agriculture and the Origins of the European World-Economy in the Sixteenth Century. New York: Academic Press, 1974. Print.
    • Willmott, Glenn. McLuhan, or Modernism in Reverse. Toronto, Buffalo, and London: University of Toronto Press, 1996. Print.
    • Zielinski, Siegfried. Deep Time of the Media: Toward an Archaeology of Hearing and Seeing by Technical Means. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2006. Print.

     

  • Irreducible Vagueness: Mixed Worlding in Diller & Scofidio’s Blur Building

    Ulrik Ekman (bio)
    University of Copenhagen
    ekman@hum.ku.dk

    Abstract
     
    This article argues that Blur Building, Diller & Scofidio’s architectural project for the Swiss Expo 2002, demonstrated performatively and interactively how contemporary worldmaking involves cultural and technological invention and construction both, implying our cultural co-evolution with ubiquitous computing and media such that “worlding” must today be approached and approximated as a question of realities that mix virtuality and actuality. This article not only touches upon the actual inventions produced in this project–with its atmospheric architecture of tensegrity structures, its vast artifactual mist-cloud, its bio-genetic pumping system, its smart weather system, and its complex systems for ubicomp surveillance and wearable computing–but also goes on to problematize the implications of mixed realities for existing notions of practical contextuality or the “life world.” Specifically, it is argued that mixed worlding in an epoch of calm ubiquitous computing necessarily confronts us with a lived experience (Erlebnis) of embodiment whose irreducible vagueness stems from a transduction of the imperceptible and the unimaginable, i.e., from a being-among in originary tactility as that which affects and animates us and remains structurally earlier than or ahead of any commonsensical hermeneutic horizon of conscious, linguistic, or discursive meaning.
     

    Before the End of the World

     
    American artist-architects Diller & Scofidio and Team Extasia presented their Blur Building as a media pavilion for the World Fair or Expo in 2002, on Lake Neuchatel in Yverdon-les-Bains, Switzerland. Its participation in this kind of event situates the Blur Building in the modern world, as belonging to the modern epoch. But after three and a half years of extensive preparations, constructions, and tests, this project managed to interrogate any environment–built, controlled, artifactual–including the climate, as well as the predominantly visual, cognitively mapped, and perceptually oriented culture that surrounds us today. The Blur Building produces different spacing and temporality from those of the modern world, hovering uncertainly at the limit or at the end of the world (as we know it). Doubtlessly, this renewed questioning of the limits of our world and time is intimately related to the fact that Diller & Scofidio were quick, among architects, to embrace the potential for alternative productions of presence found in 21st century information technology and new forms of electronic mediation. Notably, in opening a blurred, mixed world in the era of globalization, Diller & Scofidio both affirm and develop Fredric Jameson’s earlier diagnosis of postmodernism as predominantly synchronic and spatial. It is perhaps in the realm of architecture qua living space that modifications of cultural and aesthetic production make themselves felt most dramatically–not least by problematizing modernist distinctions between high and low culture, as well as by a more populist shaping and sharing of the multiplicitous surfaces of our milieu or world (Jameson 189, 200). As an open-ended becoming of mixed reality, the Blur Building takes on “the new machine” of a hyperspatial postmodernism of surfaces, along with the imperative from new architecture “to grow new organs, to expand our sensorium and our body to some new, as yet unimaginable, perhaps ultimately impossible, dimensions” (Jameson 219).
     
    However, the Blur Building also leaps forward to overtake more recent developments in architecture, as well as in IT and new media, including those pertaining to the thoroughly distributed, networked, and embedded multitudes of computational entities in ubiquitous computing. In this way, the installation project approaches a ubiquity of what I am calling mixed presencing (new modes of technological and mediatory production of our life form) as an informative principle of work that leads to a certain displacement and deferral of the existing demarcations of our world. The Blur Building embraces a virtual and computational architecture for ubiquity and seeks its actualization in various combinations or mixes, so that architecture, along with life itself, mediates and negotiates habitable spaces, each unfolding as very provisional “solutions” to the problem of how to inhabit space bodily with others. Diller & Scofidio’s architecture attempts to further negotiate the problem of spatialization that life poses to bodies, a negotiation that opens itself to “the movements of time and becoming” (see Grosz 148). The Blur Building thus places itself experimentally and virtuactually among current research and artistic productions involving IT and new media. If the Blur Building moves towards “the end of the world,” this is because it follows the strong interest in virtuality in the 1990s and the exploration of more radically actual modes of tele-presence beginning in the mid-90s. Diller & Scofidio’s project bespeaks a slow reontologizing of these fields today, which one might call an immanentizing physical turn or a movement towards the encounter of bits and atoms, as Hiroshi Ishii and Brygg Ullmer would have it.1 This project might well be described as a turn towards mixed worlding, understood as a dynamic ecotechnics liable to sense. Alternately, one might call it a turn towards technologized worlding qua a virtualization of the physical, but this would emphatically concern those whose actualization of technics facilitates embodied relations and interactions of the end of the world.
     

     
    BLUR, Yverdon-les-Bains. 4 Mar. 2002. Image © Yves André (www.yves-andre.ch). Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 1.

    BLUR, Yverdon-les-Bains. 4 Mar. 2002. Image © Yves André (www.yves-andre.ch). Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     

    1. Of the End of the World I – Mixed Reality and the Embeddedness of Ubiquitous Computing

     

    … we are not intending to make a volume of space covered with fog. We intend to make a building of fog with integrated media. –Diller and Scofidio, Blur: The Making of Nothing 39.

     
    Diller & Scofidio and their team oversaw years of projective planning and invention while working on the Blur Building, which had a nebulous impact on its visitor-inhabitants, – not least because of the complexity and dynamics of its vast, artifactual mist-cloud.2 Only after the initial design period were the architects confronted with the many obstacles involved in the actual construction and installation of this contribution to the Swiss Expo. In between inventive projection and actualization, several creative initiatives were abandoned. Unfortunately, then, the final building included neither an LED text forest of vertical panels with scrolling text (from Internet feeds or from artist Jenny Holzer), nor a Hole in the Water restaurant made of submerged twin glass cylinders with an aquarium layer in between, in which diners would sit at eye level with the lake and eat sushi. Nor did we get an open air Angel Bar on top of the building’s mist cloud (to be served: a great variety of water beverages, from glacial tappings to municipal waters from around the world) (Diller and Scofidio, Blur 100-111, 146-155, 163, 324). Nevertheless, the opening of the Blur Building in 2002 was provocative and transformative enough to present us with the end of the world, to put it pointedly. But why should one approach the Blur Building as a question of the end of the world?3
     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 2.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     
    Blur is of the end of the world because, as an exemplary artistic-architectural project, it involves new media and information technology in ways various and extensive enough so as to begin to problematize any strict distinction between a given sense of the world and what one might call contemporary ecotechnics. Ecotechnics here designates the almost sovereign capacity of current information technology to perform calculative operations by the quantifiable means that pervade globalized culture, cosmopolitan democratic values, a sociocultural sense of community, and embodied attempts to delineate the world as an already meaningful environment.4 For any one visitor-inhabitant of the Blur Building, then, the body as the spacing or sharing out of sense emerges as the place of that originary relation of technicity, at work both in the presencing of bodies and in the way we disclose a world. The relation of bodily sense to the ecotechnical apparatus informs the way the world of Blur may come to seem meaningful to us. It is pervasive and originary technicity, the manner in which you are connected, which delineates your mode of existence and your experience or constitution of world-hood. If Blur affirms this originary technicity at stake in the world-hood of the world, it is without positing technology as a substantial fixed origin or a projected finality. Rather, it is a matter of worlding in radical finitude, that is, the event of the emergence of the world in the absence of a solid ground or a determinable end.5 As Jean-Luc Nancy formulates it, “[e]cotechnics … substitutes projections of linear history and of final goals with local differences and multiple bifurcations. Ecotechnics deconstructs the system of ends, it renders them nonsystematizable and nonorganic” (Corpus 78; my translation). To experience Blur as an event of worlding, we depend upon that sharing out of embodied sense that takes place as a technical-mechanical relation between material bodies, partes extra partes, or as a delineation of material bodies in a contact-separation, a touching-letting go, of sense and matter. When inhabiting Blur one would have to concede, with Nancy, that our world is of the ecotechnical that marks out our bodies, lets them proliferate, and plugs us in a multitude of directions:
     

    Our world is the world of “technical,” the world whose cosmos, nature, gods, whose system, complete in its intimate jointure, are exposed as “technical”: the world of an ecotechnics. Ecotechnics functions with technical apparatus, with which it connects us in all directions. But what it makes is our bodies, which it puts into the world and connects to its system, our bodies, which in this way it creates as more visible, more proliferating, more polymorphous, more pressed together, more in “masses” and “zones” than they have ever been.
     

    (Corpus 77-78; my translation)

     
    Diller & Scofidio’s building project, its pursuit of ecotechnics, and its polymorphous zoning of bodies participate in a time when the third main wave of computing is emerging, a movement which both partly sidesteps and goes beyond the earlier developments of mainframes, desktops, laptops, and their stable networked infrastructure. Their work does not so much reflect what is currently happening on the large infrastructural scale (where the speed and data-capacity of grid computing promises to enhance and gradually replace the Internet),6 nor the scale of supercomputing (where quantum computing is still under development),7 nor the microscale of biomedia and nanotechnology.8 Rather, the Blur Building inserts itself in the middle, into a context marked by research in and the actual installation of pervasive or ubiquitous computing. This kind of computing–marked by the deployment of multitudes of relatively inexpensive, mobile, wireless, and relatively intelligent machines–is flexible, complex, and massive enough to warrant speaking of a technicity whose sensors and actants not only pervade the human life world, but become almost indistinguishable from the environment or the world as such (Umwelt).9 Whether in terms of spacing or of temporal unfolding, Diller & Scofidio’s project presents a mutual overlaying of the world and technics that arise from a transductive relation, that is, when both the world and technics appear in their co-implication on the basis of their more primary individuating relation.10
     
    Consequently, the Blur Building is of the end of the world to the extent that here “the world” does not have or display a pregiven sense. Rather, a sense of the world emerges as it undergoes a vague transformation via the movement of this project, whose overlaying and combination of ubiquitous computing and existential worlding paves the way for a mixed reality.11 For Diller & Scofidio, an augmented and mixed reality emerges as our problematic of temporalization and spacing in the first decade of a young millennium. Here ubiquitous computing poses as the concrete technical way to approach a decidedly mixed reality where virtuality and actuality are combined to such a degree that one is not readily separable or distinguishable from the other. It should be pointed out, then, that upon encountering the Blur Building we sense a complex set of relations between a real physical world and the potential generated via virtualizations, something that compels us to wonder whether their mutual overlays and interlacing interfaces constitute and transform our experiential reality. The world of the Blur Building does not display a given sense precisely because it comes into presence as a mixed worlding where actuality and virtuality (of phusis and techné both) are superimposed upon and mixed with each other. In Blur the physical and the virtual cannot immediately be distinguished or even made into objects of awareness. Thus we must consider the question of an invisible, vague, unnoticeable, and typically pre-conscious combinatoire of interminglings in real time and in a three-dimensional world space.
     
    This mixing of world and ubiquitous computing, actuality and virtuality, constitutes the enigma of Diller & Scofidio’s project insofar as virtuality is largely embedded before awareness and to the point of invisibility. A chief characteristic of ubiquitous computing is its efforts to proceed towards pure immanence or strict embeddedness in the world. Approached from that angle, one might say that the vagueness, apparent invisibility, enigma, or secrecy of Blur as mixed worlding increases alongside the inhabitants’ inability to become aware of these characteristics, to the degree that it pursues the ideal goal of embeddedness that Mark Weiser and others at the Palo Alto Research Center (PARC) set up for “calm computing”:
     

    We wanted to put computing back in its place, to reposition it into the environmental background, to concentrate on human-to-human interfaces and less on human-to-computer ones …. In the end, ubi-comp created a new field of computer science, one that speculated on a physical world richly and invisibly interwoven with sensors, actuators, displays, and computational elements, embedded seamlessly in the everyday objects of our lives and connected through a continuous network …. [We] have begun to speak of calm computing as the goal, describing the desired state of mind of the user, as opposed to the hardware configuration of the computer. Just as a good, well-balanced hammer “disappears” in the hands of a carpenter and allows him or her to concentrate on the big picture, we hope that computers can participate in a similar magic disappearing act.
     

    (Weiser, Gold, and Brown)

     
    The Blur Building, as a mix of the world involving calm, ubiquitous computing, performs a series of more or less complete disappearing acts, a whole flock of moves towards a more or less pure immanence which our modes of embodiment and sense encounter as so many variants of a vagueness that comes to seem irreducible.12
     

    2. Of the End of the World II – Blurring the Given Worldview

     

    The complete critique is perhaps not one that aims at totality (as does le regard surplombant) nor that which aims at intimacy (as does identifying intuition); it is the look that knows how to demand, in their turn, distance and intimacy, knowing in advance that the truth lies not in one or the other attempt, but in the movement that passes indefatigably from one to the other. One must desire that double excess where the look is always near to losing all its powers. –Starobinski 52 (my translation)
     
    … Diller & Scofidio have concentrated on the undefined. It is almost as if they are reacting against their own desire to control and produce recognizable images, places, and objects by creating works in which one is never quite certain what one is seeing. –Betsky, “Display Engineers” 35.

     
    Of the several immanentizing moves at stake in the mixed worlding of the Blur Building, perhaps the most noticeable one is the disturbance, blurring, or bringing down of world-vision. The mist-cloud, the biogenetic pumping system at the Expo site lakeshore, and the smart weather system embedded in the building are the most obvious generators of a new immanentism because they disrupt the obvious: they impinge on and disturb our cultural and bodily habits of privileging the obvious, most notably our continuous foregrounding of vision and its alleged clarity of sense. Extremely aware that their project found itself inserted in the context of a World Fair, information technology, and cosmopolitanism, Diller & Scofidio intended for their building to become a counter-strategy to the predominant access to the world via visual appropriation and an assured world-view.
     

     
    Image © 2002 Beat Widmer. (www.beatwidmer.ch). Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 3.

    Image © 2002 Beat Widmer. (www.beatwidmer.ch). Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     
    One might say that in its immanentizing problematization of an assured, meaningful Weltbild, the Blur Building engages in a wider exploration of the phenomenology of the senses, an exploration that circumvents what Hans Jonas has calls “the nobility of sight.” Therefore what is at stake here is not so much another hailing of vision as the most excellent sense, nor the pursuit of theoria as the noblest activity of the mind, which is also traditionally described primarily in visual metaphors. Rather, the building involves a certain experimentation with the supports or supplements of vision, i.e., with the other senses, sensation in general, as well as “the more vulgar modes of commerce with the importunity of things” (Jonas 136). To that extent, mixed worlding cannot but blur the three main characteristics of the image-performance unique to sight. The Blur Building resists having its presentation of a sensate manifold yield to simultaneity; the causality of sense-affection insists on its non-neutrality; and it will remain difficult, if not impossible, to achieve a proper, objectifying distance in the spatial and cognitive mental senses. In other words, Diller & Scofidio’s counter-strategy very much brings a different sort of attention to vision, while in the process making felt the otherwise forgotten or suppressed, but all the more originary, need for complementation from the other senses and from the motility of our bodies (Jonas 152). Thus, blurring here implies a movement towards an embodiment of the forces at play within differentiated and distributed sensation.13
     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 4.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     
    More specifically, the Blur Building is of the end of the world on any general, grand scale of viewing, because of its trans-immanent resistance to becoming part of a tourism dominated by spectacular sights and attractions, an official set of scenic views, image expectations as “good” photo opportunities, and a certain scopic control granted to the “sightseer” (Diller and Scofidio, “SuitCase Studies” 42-44). This artifactual architectural installation refuses to be primarily a visual cultural object for consumption in the experience-economy of today, just as it problematizes in quite ironic ways any God’s- or eagle-eye view of the world from above. As the architects themselves state in an interview:
     

    We knew right away that we wanted to use the touristic setting as a foil. We realized we could use the lake water to problematize vision, to get in the way of the lake view. We also wanted to produce an anti-heroic architecture in the form of a special effect, an atmosphere. It was a reaction to the new orthodoxy of high-definition and simulation technologies. We wanted to create a low-definition space, a blur.
     

    (Anderson 147)

     

    If there is any view of the world involved in this lo-fi world-spacing, or that participates in a clear vision of the sense of the world, this view is minimized place-wise and remains a delayed and deferred epiphenomenon, such as the one that takes place on the Angel Deck, which hovers uncertainly above the more primary, extensive, and chaotically dynamic mistclouds down here, and which all inhabitants of this fuzzy mixed world must traverse first and last. Diller & Scofidio’s alternative engagement with the commodification of vision by globalized tourism might well lead one to suspect that the Blur Building concretizes a version of that “profound suspicion of vision and its hegemonic role in the modern era” which Martin Jay traces, with a certain disapproval, in recent French thought, only to counter such antiocularcentrism with an unrepentant enlightened clarity.14 From this perspective, the Blur Building would be of the end of the world to the extent that it simply and strictly refuses any certain, stable, and visual domestication of world space as both inherently meaningful and as clarifiable to the point of having light or enlightenment eradicate all remnants of its obscure metaphorical texture. However, identifying in this project only a pure “suspicion of vision” remains too reductive, as does an inverse movement towards an altogether live metaphor of the sun, i.e., what Jacques Derrida retraces as the circle of the heliotrope whose pervasive, dazzling light (whether ideal or a question of lumen naturale) allegedly illuminates everything (“White Mythology” 266-267). Here the blurring of Weltbild and vision is a matter of neither a fall into strict blindness, nor an unwarranted celebration of an accidental obscurity that will be removed by the return of or to radiant enlightenment. Rather, Diller & Scofidio’s project pursues what moves differently within vision and its illuminating image-performance–what makes presencing disappear in its own radiance, or the indefinite selferasure of light that permits it to come as light. Blur is after another self-erasure or withdrawal of the visible, one whose different and deferred textures of light touch its worldinhabitants in practice.15 Perhaps in this way it approximates an archi-texture within an architectural project, drawing on supplementary haptic practices so as to transform a visible building into an unfolding of the inhabitants’ critical debate of and interactive engagement with vision. Diller & Scofidio’s Blur Building is thus a gentle and affirmative critique of tourism from within.16 It makes itself felt as an ongoing questioning of the very fabrication of the aura and authenticity of tourist sites, the gaze, and the meaningful imaging of memorial or memorable places in the world of today (Zavatta 12-14).

     

    3. Before an Announced or Desired World-Construction: Practicing Haptic World-Vision

     

    The media event is integrated with the enveloping fog. Our objective is to weave together architecture and electronic technologies, yet exchange the properties of each for the other. Thus, architecture would dematerialize and electronic media, normally ephemeral, would become palpable in space. Both would require sophisticated technologies that would be entirely invisible, leaving only their effects. –Diller and Scofidio, Blur: The Making of Nothing 44.

     
    The Blur Building questions built, controlled, and artifactual environments, including climate, alongside the hegemony of visual culture in the western tradition. By leaping through more recent developments in architecture as well as in IT and new media, it approaches an open-ended becoming of mixed reality. As such, this large-scale installation project takes up mixed presencing qua new modes of technological and mediatory production of our life form so as to displace at least two architectural trends. First, it displaces the more traditional view of digital technology and electronic mediation as inherently foreign to any architecture of durability, utility, and beauty. Second, it counters the tendency over the last 10 years for a contemporary generation of architects who do embrace virtual architecture to remain stuck with fascinatingly innovative, but very abstract computer models that seldom become actual buildings.17 The blobs of Greg Lynn and others, Marcos Novak’s liquid architectures, the work of NOX and Lars Spuybroek, Neil Leach’s swarm tectonics, Asymptote’s NYSE trading floor, and Peter Eisenman’s rethinking of his notion of the interiority of architecture via the diagram would perhaps serve as a first set of indices tracing the development of virtual hypersurface architecture.18 Although Diller & Scofidio make a different move towards actualization, there is no small echo here–in their obsession with the fluid flock, the cloud, and the movement in time of water–of the virtual architects’ efforts to embrace the computer as an instrument for viewing form as generated in time in order to stop modeling from the outside and to undertake a shift, as Lars Spuybroek writes, “from Euclidian geometry to topology, from tectonics to textile, from object to process, from crystalline space to the undulating field or medium” (20).
     
    The Blur Building thus embraces a virtual architecture for ubiquity and goes on seeking its actualizations so that architecture, and life itself, develop in a mediatory negotiation of habitable spaces, each unfolding as very provisional “solutions” to the problem of how to inhabit space bodily with others and the other. Diller & Scofidio’s architecture negotiates certain experiments with spatialization as a question life poses to bodies, opening them to what Elizabeth Grosz calls “the movements of time and becoming” (148). In this way, the Blur Building presents itself as a matter of a slow re-ontologizing of mediatory architectures and life forms. It involves virtuality, tele-presence, and the mixed realities of ubiquitous computing. Its immanentizing, physical turn moves towards a mixed worlding, understood as a dynamic ecotechnics liable to sense, as Jean-Luc Nancy puts it.
     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 5.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     
    As part of such a turn, the Blur Building relinquishes the earlier emphasis on first generation virtual reality, head-mounted displays, immersion in perfect simulations of 3-D scenery, and a long line of formal, abstract, or metaphysical idealizations, perhaps best recognized in William Gibson’s literary evocation of cyberspace and the engagement with virtuality in the Wachowski brothers’ Matrix movies. Accordingly, the Blur Building turns physical in order to newly emphasize corporeality and actualization of the virtual. This turn situates its architecture in a context of developments that we also see in today’s art world. Broadly speaking, the current coupling of artistic cultural production, IT, and new media leads to the emergence of a multiplicity of large, complex, intermedial, and interactive installations, sometimes spanning the planet network-wise. This context has made the installation something like a paradigmatic art form–momentarily parenthesizing traditional mass-media frames for visual information-culture (images, advertising, mainstream movies, TV). Blur relates to the world of installation art found in museums and art institutions, but also to the installation art found in all the public spaces of globalized culture. Via networks, computers, cell phones, and a host of new types of interfaces, actants, and sensors, these installations find their way across traditional distinctions between bodily intimacy and distance, the private and the public, interiority and exteriority, making them extraordinarily porous. In “The Poetics of Augmented Space,” Lev Manovich historicizes this physical turn and concisely articulates its media-specific and technological tendencies:
     

    The 1990s were about the virtual. We were fascinated by new virtual spaces made possible by computer technologies. The images of an escape into a virtual space that leaves the physical space useless and of cyberspace–a virtual world that exists in parallel to our world–dominated the decade. It started with the media obsession with Virtual Reality (VR) …. At the beginning of the 21st century, the research agendas, media attention, and practical applications have come to focus on a new agenda–the physical–that is, physical space filled with electronic and visual information …. While the technologies imagined by [current] research paradigms accomplish this in a number of different ways, the end result is the same: overlaying layers of data over the physical space.
     

    (220-223)

     
    The Blur Building is a singular fragment of the installed world that does not have a pre-existing sense. It takes place as an intersection of contemporary architecture, art, and cybernetics. It installs mixed worlding to the extent that it opens not only an augmented space, with physical and information dimensions overlaid, but also an augmented temporality insofar as the temporal object is layered with digital eventualization of experience. This project towards mixed worlding may not have a sense. However, the ingenuity and the innovations involved on artistic, architectural, and cybernetic planes may well lead one to claim that the Blur Building is all about an already announced or desired construction or creation of the sense of the mixed world, relying on what goes on in practice or in performance. Such a claim would then be in alignment with a number of efforts in more or less radical versions of socio-cultural constructivism and with certain implications of ideas of unfolding parallel worlds (possible and/or actual).19 On this score, Diller & Scofidio’s work and our involvement with this work supposedly demonstrate that contemporary worldmaking makes sense of the mixed world through cultural and technological inventions that mix virtuality and actuality functionally, given various contextual constraints for us and the architects. The Blur Building would thus be of interest because it makes a double enactive and constructive effort: not only towards virtualizing an otherwise stable architecture to the point of “losing the building” in any traditional (visual) sense (see Wolfe), but also an effort towards actualizing an otherwise transcendentally inclined technology so as to affect embodiment and the inhabitants’ relation to sense and to the sensible. This double effort will lead away from a transcendent worldview and an image of Blur as having a pregiven sense to be revealed or disclosed. It will likewise dispel notions of an external, pre-existing, independent world, and attendant ideas of resemblance and representation. It should lead one past thinking that this project is meaningful by way of an adequate resemblance to the world that we as visitor-inhabitants may uncover. Rather, as a mixed world it becomes meaningful through a more difficult or complex practice of worldmaking that occurs through the architects’ ingenious creation and construction, as well as through our experiences in Blur that surely construct the sense of this world in many ways. It engages in an adaptive, functional symbolism of the world that we might come to share, through a long, perhaps infinite pragmatic conversation concerned with a worlding blurred in various ways.20
     
    Certainly, constructive worldmaking accounts for much of what is at stake in Blur as inventive mixing. The relevance of this approach makes critics consider the possibility of characterizing Diller & Scofidio as “engineers of experience,”21 and it seemingly allows a treatment of their work as part and parcel of constructing a “technological sublime” for a mixed world–one that makes landscape, climate, and technology intersect with its inhabitants.22 From this perspective, Blur is essentially a manufactured cloud with an embedded viewing deck, the Angel Deck, hovering over Lake Neuchatel in Switzerland. Significantly, the exterior “skin” of the building is based on reactualizing the tensegrity concept developed by Buckminster Fuller in the 1950s. The entire building (100 meters wide, 65 meters deep, and 25 meters in height), including all the decks, can thus be seen as a structure that is, in principle, omnidirectional, non-linear, and yet able to distribute all the local loads because the combinations of tension and integrity allow for coupling a number of continuous cables (in tension) and discontinuous members (in compression) so as to enclose a volume (Schafer 93). Access to the building is secured by tunnels and bridges across the water, along with walkways and stairs that start and end at the surface of the lake, so as to allow passages through the Blur Building as a made environment.
     
    A constructivist approach also informs us that the artifactual mist-cloud is generated from the lake through a hidden, complex system that pumps and filters the water. Visitorinhabitants meet this system primarily at the end-interface, in the form of more than 31,000 small, high-pressure fog nozzles passing through the building, a design invented by Japanese artist Fujiko Nakaya for the Pepsi Pavilion at the 1970 World Fair in Osaka.
     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 6.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     

    The pumps are operated via a computerized climate control. This smart weather system reads temperature, humidity, as well as the speed and direction of the wind in order to regulate water pressure and continuously adjust to changing climate conditions. This weather system keeps the spread of the mist-cloud largely within range (a 300 meter radius from the lakeshore entry) and also controls the intensity of the fog, while limiting the amount of chlorine, bacteria, and toxins in the water and fog, in accordance with the values decreed by the Swiss authorities (Diller and Scofidio, Blur 362-363). One might observe that this weather system is the aspect of the Blur Building that goes furthest in stressing the porosity of the distinction between architecture and the environment, and in commenting, somewhat silently, on the remarkable development of environmentally sustainable architecture.23

     
    However, although both the mist-cloud itself and the smart weather system controlling it can be said to make good constructive sense of this world, they are also hinges around which turn all practically constructive strategies for redeeming a clear vision of and insight into this world. For they simultaneously introduce a perpetual blurring of any horizon and imprint registers of sensation other than those open to the clear and appropriative sense of sight. In fact, the delimiting exploration in the Blur Building of visual modalities of sense and sensation might well lead one to rather strong statements regarding epistemological and ontological aspects of the mixed world in play. To be sure, in this project there is very little world in the visual sense of an exterior, transcendent mundus, that is, the cosmos as a well composed, complete order in which one might find a place, a dwelling, and identifiable elements of orientation. Thus, this is not of a world down here that one could pass through to a télos outside this world, just as there is no longer any spirit of the world, nor a History before whose tribunal one could stand. The blur as “the vague open” of the building, as the fuzzy sense of a mixed world, suggests that there is no longer any assignable signification of “world.” Alternatively, that the “world” is withdrawing, bit by bit, from the entire order of clear signification available to us as its living, traversing, desiring inhabitants. Except, perhaps, the non-assured cosmic signification of world as universe–announced or called up as an infinite, misty expansion. A mixed world, the Blur Building is not a matter of meaning that is either revealed or disclosed, announced or desired.
     

    Consideration of the Blur Building as mixed world has led Mark B. Hansen to claim, rather pointedly, that Diller & Scofidio’s project is a consequence of today’s “historically unprecedented interpenetration of body and media,” following up on the necessity to develop “a post-visual, affective phenomenology”: “what is at stake in the Blur Building is not simply a ‘seeing that can no longer interpret,’ but a wholesale short-circuiting of the role of vision, such that the affective body is literally compelled to ‘space the void’” (“Wearable Space” 369-370). The strongest confirmation of such a claim for the Blur Building qua “a wholesale short-circuiting of the role of vision,” whose literal forces operate before or beyond insight, is perhaps found rather deeply embedded within the constructions mentioned above: the system of wearable computing as yet another cluster of computers and an extensive wireless network with tracking capacity, distributed across the building. Visitor-inhabitants meet this system at the lakeshore in a two-fold manner. First, there is a personal preferences questionnaire that is filled out at the log-in station. This is scanned and sent to a (hidden) central computer that interprets the information supplied and creates a social profile. These profiles are then downloaded into wireless devices in waterproof “braincoats,” wearable computing raincoats that are handed out to all visitors-inhabitants and that constitute the second component of the wireless system. Once inside the wet mist-cloud of the Blur Building, the wireless network functions as an embedded surveillance system which is, both as a back-end system and as a front-end multitude of micro-scale device-components, largely on the order of the invisible as far as visitor-inhabitants or wearers of its mixed spacing are concerned.

     
    Nevertheless, one would want to move at a slower pace here and relinquish, at least for a moment, the emphasis on the historically unprecedented, the strictly post-visual, as well as the literally compelling, non-hermeneutic, and extra-significatory force of the Blur Building qua mixed worlding. To begin, the dematerialization of architecture takes place alongside and inside a revitalization of existing, concrete architectural traditions (e.g., Buckminster Fuller). There is, moreover, no shortage of visual presencing when approaching the Blur Building from a distance, just as a certain modicum of visibility is retained when one can see from the more or less foggy decks, when the numerous LED posts and their colored displays installed as part of the system of wearables send off their blinking signals, and when the braincoats operate their visual interface in red and green colors. Finally, the experiential passage through linguistic or discursive signification towards the literal force of mixing with alterity seems continually complex, to the point of being infinitely extendable. Generally speaking, then, the “post-visuality” at stake, if there is any, seems to solicit a different internal working-through of image-performance and the visible by way of the various immanent modes of blurring vision encountered in this project. Moving carefully along this path, one could begin to approach blurring both by means of the visible and of the auditory spheres of haptics so as to trace how the Blur Building is perhaps not immediately of a literal force beyond sense, but rather remains liable to sense. It touches us both via haptic vision and via an auditory ambience or atmosphere (Stimmung) before or beyond a worldview qua definite cognitive map (Leitbild).
     
    Insofar as it touches us from the outside inside global visual culture and its image-world, the Blur Building is not forcing us outside sense without further ado but remains liable to sense as it exposes us to worlding as (our) infinite finitude, letting us ex-ist on the contours, at the sensate limit of the world of sense. It keeps leading us to this limit. By integrating a set of originally or surprisingly inventive cultural-technological experiments in interactive practice, it attracts us towards that which draws the contours of the world as sense. These experiments undertake an immanent transformation of visuality, displacing clarity of sight and sense–here towards a haptic vision in the first place. The LED displays in the mist-cloud and the vaguely graded spectrum of red and green emissions from the braincoats worn in Blur give rise to a kind of new Egypt in Diller & Scofidio’s project: haptic spaces composed in unique ways, of color and by color, juxtapose so many pure tones on flat surfaces (see Deleuze, Francis Bacon 107-113). These haptic spaces solicit a properly haptic functioning of the eye capable of dealing with the “sense” of colors, not primarily in the representational manner related to depth, contour, or relief in an ideal tactile-optical space, nor in a purely manual space where touch is strictly superordinate to the eye. Rather, the sense of the Blur Building qua haptic space implies an in-between seeing, a non-optical close-up rhythm of viewing whose sense of sight behaves just like the sense of touch and generates an inventive experience where figure and ground are perceived to be on the same plane.
     
    Thus, Diller & Scofidio’s experiments link cultural conventions and contemporary technics so as to facilitate and even necessitate a haptic exploration of ways to transform the sense of the world. This exploration involves haptic vision but also comprises, sometimes alongside and at other times internal to, several more planes and events in what one would call the multisensory dimension and process of the Blur Building. To the extent that even haptic vision blurs, converting the haptic in the direction of manual space, the sense of this mixed world draws increasingly on other modes of sensation, notably the hearing involved in delineating minimal rhythms and refrains, not only within the large scale ambience of the environment as such, but also, and perhaps especially, within the more intimate data space laid out via the auditory sonar pulsing interface integrated into the braincoats (Diller and Scofidio, Blur 209-223). This pulse undergoes continuous variation, but never ceases to indicate whether other visitor-inhabitants are far away (a decelerated or steady sonar pinging pulse) or close by (an accelerated sonar pinging pulse) and so touches one aurally, providing pressures that are vaguely dispersed but retain a certain regularity that makes possible an outline of semi-distinct dot-lines or sensible navigational horizons in the auditory atmosphere, in the soundscape that forms a rather indeterminate ambient socio-cultural environment.24
     

    4. Blurred to Blindness: From Haptic World-Spacing to Originary Tactility

     

    salut, obscurity! Salut to this erasure of figures and schemas! And salut to the blind whom we become … salut to the vision that did not cling to forms and ideas but that let itself be touched by forces. –Nancy, “Salut” 313.

     
    Constructivist paths, even ones of haptic vision and hearing, provide us with a sensible image of the Blur Building as a world that mixes virtuality and actuality, just as they facilitate an interpretation of the building as a functionalist symbol of the world at large. Such approaches may vary considerably, may be open to dispute, meet constraints, and go on to reconstruct themselves in the face of a complex environment like this one. Nonetheless, precisely by being too sensible, by making too much sense constructively, and by providing too much of a world-image, be it only one of lo-fi ambient tones, they may be missing the point. They do not address what remains the most difficult question: how is it that Diller & Scofidio’s mixed worlding never ceases to elude the desire for clear sight and its productive, efficient, making and announcement of sense? We cannot answer this question if we presumes that we operate primarily, or even just largely, as demiurges, semi-transcendent creators of the sense of the world.25 We can hardly consider mixed worlding as what touches us, in a blur radical enough to blind, if we hold to the notion that we, or Diller & Scofidio, are the creative enactors at the genesis of the sense of the world, if not of the world as such. Rather, this project shows that the architect is not a traditional manager, bringing order to social space by designing and fashioning the world. Perhaps this argument parenthesizes form, style, and signature in favor of the processual opening of a situation, relinquishes control in favor of a lived experience of indefiniteness and chance, and downplays order and the permanence of inclusion in favor of a more flexible, plastic, and fragmentary potential for transductive individuation. Along these lines, the Blur Building is less a demiurgic, semisublime construction of a meaningful world than an opening formation felt through the ongoing arrangements and modular elements that it proposes in reciprocal cooperation with its visitor-inhabitants. It moves as a uniquely mediating ecotechnical assemblage (of landscape, air, water, steel, and a host of actual architectural vectors alongside networks, computers, databases, sensors and actants, and software code) that proposes to reweave a strong affective bond with and between people, liable in its mixes to unfold towards yet another territory without being constructed as one.26 The charge that a kind of collaborative appropriation of the situation is at stake here should perhaps be tempered by an awareness of the degree to which the Blur Building remains variable, presents possibilities for meaning that cannot be foreseen, and offers an architectural spacing of the moment that involves timeeffects and installs a movement rather like a developing organism.27
     
    The Blur Building is, as Hansen has observed, an installation involving wearable space, understood as our experience of phenomenalizing embodiment (our mediatory relation to a now highly technologized life world).28 However, it is perhaps not primarily as an experience of wearable space that it touches us. The Blur Building is also, as Cary Wolfe has argued, an artful system of social communication that uses a perceptual blur to perturb the normativity of mass-mediated global communication. Diller & Scofidio’s project is clearly both, and Hansen and Wolfe respond to important traits: embodiment, wearable computing, and media intimacy in Hansen’s case; perception, communication, and artistic perturbation of massmedia constructions of reality in Wolfe’s. Nevertheless, they are also too eager to enact semantic sense, via strict foci on embodied experience (although this is open to affective sensation) and on social communication (although this is undergoing perturbations of perception). They tend to marginalize or leave out the fact that the Blur Building is not just of a world on meaningful display: it is a problematization of making clear, visual, imaged, productive, consumptive sense of the world.
     
    As the subtitle of the artist-architects’ book indicates, the Blur Building attests to a certain care for “the making of nothing.” They, along with the Blur Building, can problematize making sense because the remnants of transcendence in an announced or desired sense, inherent in constructivist making, have already been abandoned in favor of affirming haptic worldspacing as the transimmanence of the world.29 In favor of a practico-tactile sense as existence and techné (Nancy, Sense 45). The world is not the sense we make of it, but rather what we transform transimmanently during our approach to it as a presencing liable to sense. The Blur Building comes into presence not only as a dynamic set of informational affordances liable to sense, but also, and earlier on, as flows of matter and energy affecting us, letting us feel anew that architectural mediation qua territorial spacing was always already intimately connected with providing a protected set of food sources, and that it is the flow of energy that creates stabilizations of worlding in the first place.30 Using this approach, we would be towards the Blur Building when we touch it; touching it is an eventual process of mixed worlding that comes before and surprises current versions of experiencing the life world. It is, then, of an a-visual architexture, a matter of tactile relations opening onto a different existential contact and reaching out energetically at the blurred limit of sight and hearing.31 As Diller & Scofidio have it, Blur is “decidedly low definition: there is nothing to see but our dependence on vision itself” (Blur 162). Blurring world-vision and imaging, beyond, or rather inside-below, haptic vision and Stimmung, to the point of contacting what affects and animates us, is structurally earlier than or ahead of any commonsensical hermeneutic horizon of meaning, as Husserl’s thought of the life world would have it. When the tactile interface of your braincoat, located at the lower and rather intimate bodily region, is activated during the encounter with another world-inhabitant whose scanned profile matches yours with 100% affinity, its tactile vibrancy is hardly a matter of sensible interpretation of an experience.32 Rather, this coming to presence of the touch of the other’s life form, and of other forces and energeia, takes you to the limit of Erlebnis qua a sensation of originary tactility. The ongoing specific differentiation of the Blur Building offers up to us a mixed medium, that is, a dynamic environment for a life in transduction between technology and live culture or, in other words, a mixed medium qua an epiphylogenetic processing of culture, biology, and technics that also lets us live on through means other than life.33
     

    5. At Our Discretion: Among the Almost Immanent … and Untouchable Embeddedness

     

    … the there is nothing other than the Wittgensteinian “That” of the world, while at the same time being the world’s original “how”…. It is not a place of places, or a sensorium Dei, or an a priori form. More likely, it would be a priori matter–but here the a priori, in its act of birth, would be the sensible entelechy itself: the unity, opened within itself, of the touched/touching … the worldliness of the world, qua absolute existential condition, exhausts its finite sense–exhausts it, that is, opens it infinitely. Mundus patet. –Nancy, The Sense of the World 159-160.

     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 7.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

     
    As mixed worlding, the Blur Building directly engages the way in which information and communication technologies today move towards becoming indiscernible from any ontological exterior inside (nature, the environment, the milieu, embodiment, organs, bodies, the body). Participating in the emergent movement of pervasive computing, Diller & Scofidio’s project pursues both the disappearance of the computer and the pervasive embedding of computing, and so places us among the invisibly integrated world-spacings of ubicomp, as described by the Intel Corporation around 2001:
     

    Computing, not computers will characterize the next era of the computer age. The critical focus in the very near future will be on ubiquitous access to pervasive and largely invisible computing resources. A continuum of information processing devices ranging from microscopic embedded devices to giant server farms will be woven together with a communication fabric that integrates all of today’s networks with networks of the future. Adaptive software will be self-organizing, self-configuring, robust, and renewable. At every level and in every conceivable environment, computing will be fully integrated with our daily lives. (qtd. in McCullough 7)34

     

    Here and now, the Blur world and its events are not that of which we make sense. Rather, blurred worlding invisibly overlaid with the pervasively embedded and calm computing of mixed reality (in the widest “sense”) is ecotechnics as how we exist. The world is not what we make or manipulate, but how we exist with a cultural and technological sentiment or affect.35 The sensible entelechy of the Blur Building, its originary opening of the touching/touched in uniquely vague artifactual dynamics and movements, calls for and allows transformation of the sense of our existence in an interactive and performative practice at the edge of the world. It attracts and leads us most when and where it approaches an infinitely finite world delimiting sense, sentiments, and affect. An impersonal, inoperative, disorganized, scattered, and discrete world of tactility prior to rhythmic pulse, image, and clear vision. Structurally earlier than or evading haptic vision, hearing, and manual spacing. Withdrawing even from the distinction between self- and other-reference, which it allows. A world of relational existential tangens which remains fuzzily vague, because liable to sense, whether originally or as a world to come. One whose traits are perhaps not just being-in-theworld or being-towards, but just as much being-with, being-between, being-among … other existents and things. An irreducibly vague world of ecotechnics, because discretely different. One whose touches are delightful or terrifying, beautiful or technologically sublime, depending on the character of the exposition to becoming other elsewhere, in singularly plural contact-among. Perhaps the tangens of this mixed worlding in a place and an era of ubiquitous computing is at its most difficult when its demand is exorbitant, when the embeddedness of the pervasive altogether smoothes space and time and thus demands an impossible tact. At this level of tactful giving/withdrawal, the mixing of the world, which may be all, cannot be struck, grasped, stroked, caressed, kissed, licked, or tasted on any one plane. Of necessity, it can only be mourned, with a certain respect for what exceeds the smallest fragment of erotic light or Eros qua texture, at the limit where touch cannot remain within the confines of the tactile but learns and is learning anew what it feels like to touch without touching. Blur with its blurring goes and comes as it invents the world as an affinity of disjunction and conjunction (do not touch, but touch). As an inventive building of the world, it brings into contiguity, partes extra partes, contact and non-contact where all it touches is the other.36

     

     
    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 8.

    Photo courtesy of Diller Scofidio + Renfro. Used by permission.

     
     

     

    Ulrik Ekman is Assistant Professor in Digital Aesthetics and Communication at the Department of Arts and Cultural Studies, University of Copenhagen. He is the coordinator of more than 150 researchers in the Nordic and internationally oriented research network, “The Culture of Ubiquitous Information,” and is currently involved in two book projects directly related to the problematics dealt with in this network. Ekman is the editor of Throughout: Art and Culture Emerging with Ubiquitous Computing (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, forthcoming), a comprehensive anthology of more than 40 research articles from scholars across the world at work on the cultural and technical implications of the third wave of computing. He is also writing a book on the aesthetics of contemporary media art and culture focusing on the increasing import for our life form of haptic technics and spatio-temporality.
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. I am alluding to Ishii not only as head of the Tangible Media Group at MIT, or as a motivating force behind the exploration of “Things That Think,” but also as a researcher deeply involved in conceiving interactivity at the limit of tangible interfaces as a matter of the movement of bits and atoms.

     

     
    2. For further visual representation or graphic illustration of Diller & Scofidio’s project, see Rubin; “Diller & Scofidio,” Designboom, “Diller & Scofidio,” Arcspace; Leerberg; and “Diller & Scofidio,” Hipercroquis. For a brief video, see Schm1822.

     

     
    3. In my treatment of the sense of the world I draw in particular on Nancy, The Sense of the World.

     

     
    4. The term “ecotechnics” is coined by Jean-Luc Nancy, and I endorse both his careful delineation of the ways in which “technology” tends to conceal our inability to grapple with the infinite finitude of our existence, and his insistence that we speak of technologies in the singular plural so as to avoid the assumption that, both generally and now specifically in the case of pervasive computing, we are dealing with an omnipresent techno-conspiracy qua an absolute nexus of a vast machinic or combinatorial apparatus embracing all particular technologies. It is better to stay with the difficult task of deconstructing globalized ecotechnics so as to meet again the finitude of sense, taking note along the way of the multiple ways in which technologies both shatter the notion of such a nexus and disseminate potential relations for a human culture and world to come–even when transforming and partly destroying nature, even when approaching a technicization of existence itself so as to exhaust human life and seemingly withdraw or efface the sense of the world (Being Singular Plural 185). See also Hutchens and Nancy, “Interview” 165.

     

     
    5. Ian James offers an interesting exposition of Nancy’s concept of ecotechnics (143-151).

     

     
    6. For a more detailed account, see Foster and Kesselman.

     

     
    7. For a short introduction to recent advances in quantum computing, see Daley, Cirac, and Zoller.

     

     
    8. See also Thacker’sBiomedia and The Global Genome; Hayles and Foushee.

     

     
    9. See Michael Beigl’s thought-provoking introduction on the status of ubiquitous computing. For more detailed book-length studies, see Steventon and Wright; Philip Robinson, Vogt, and Wagealla; Loke; Cook and Das.

     

     
    10. I am referring to the notion of transduction as thought by Gilbert Simondon.

     

     
    11. Throughout this article, I consider the Blur Building as constituting a very extensive and interesting reopening of the question of the relation between information and its embodiment. My insistence on living also with the latter emphasizes the way in which this project brings virtuality into the physical world so as to entertain a mixed reality. In this, I am in keeping with Mark Weiser’s notion of an “embodied virtuality” as that which is centrally at stake in ubiquitous computing as it draws computation out of its electronic shells so that the “virtuality” of computer-readable data–all the different ways in which it can be altered, processed and analyzed–is brought into the physical world.” Cf. “The computer for the 21st Century.” I provide a more extensive treatment of this problematic in the introductory remarks to Ekman, ed., Throughout: Art and Culture Emerging with Ubiquitous Computing. This is in any case part of what I consider in this article as “mixed reality” (MR), being the wider notion, encompassing “augmented reality” (AR) among others. Any approach via “augmentation” will therefore, to my mind, remain restricted to a subset of what is involved in the notion of MR – in computer science, cultural theory, and elsewhere. Mediations specifically within augmented reality will tend to leave aside “augmented virtuality” and will also not refer to a merging of real and virtual worlds so as to produce new environments and relations where physical and digital objects co-exist and interact in real time. In other words, I assume the Blur Building project to be explicitly unfolding a mix of reality, augmented reality, augmented virtuality and virtual reality. To appreciate this, it may well be useful to engage in a finely differentiated manner with what Paul Milgram and Fumio Kishino defined in the mid-1990s as a mixed reality that would unfold anywhere between the extrema of the virtuality continuum. In contrast, please consider Ronald Azuma’s influential definition of AR, which addresses a strict subset of AR’s original goal, but has come to be understood as representative: “Augmented reality” is an environment that includes both virtual reality and real-world elements, and an augmented reality system is one that combines real and virtual, is interactive in real time, and is registered in 3D. Typical examples, in a concrete sense, would comprise what Lev Manovich describes in “The Poetics of Augmented Space” as the new but already broadly distributed technologies of augmented space, such as surveillance technologies (translating physical space and its inhabitants to data), cellspace technologies (continuously presenting data in and as mobile inhabitants’ changing surroundings or milieu), and not least dynamic electronic planes (surfaces and interfaces, typically in the form of displays or screens). See also Bimber and Raskar.

     

     
    12. I refer, indirectly, to “the body” and “embodiment” with a view to the distinction between these that Katherine Hayles employs. That is, “the body” refers to an abstract, generalizing, and normative concept which grasps the body as a cultural construct, while “embodiment” indicates an individual’s unique experiences of embodiment as an experience lived from the inside – including the entire span from one’s own sensations and affects to “textures of life” on different biological and physical planes. See Hayles, “Flesh and Metal.” I remain interested in the investigation of distinctions today among (1) our experience (Erfahrung) of a generalizing and normatively trendsetting design of the body, (2) our lived experiences (Erlebnis) of embodiment, and (3) singularly living embodiment and its contingently possible interlacing with (in)human complexity and otherness, specifically respecting implications and ramifications that make themselves felt along with Diller & Scofidio’s project towards a worlding of mixed realities.

     

     
    13. Note Edward Dimendberg’s characterization of Diller & Scofidio, stressing as key in their installations their status as embodied conceptual art “in which visitors ‘perform’ the installation through their bodily negotiation of its space and their varying intellectual and emotional responses to it” (71).

     

     
    14. I am thinking here not least of Jay’s statement: “… I remain unrepentantly beholden to the ideal of illumination that suggests an Enlightenment faith in clarifying indistinct ideas …. I will employ a method that unapologetically embraces one of the anti-ocularcentric discourse’s other major targets, a synoptic survey of an intellectual field at some remove from it” (17).

     

     
    15. Compare Jacques Derrida “White Mythology,” 268-271. Responding to Jay’s reading on this score, one would want to emphasize that Derrida traces two courses open to a heliotrope constructing its destruction. One course would remain close to Jay’s call for enlightenment, never ceasing to follow a line of resistance to the dissemination of the metaphorical in syntactics and meaning. The other, however, while resembling the first to the point of being taken for it, will traverse and double it as its supplement without limit, thus disrupting the oppositions of the semantic and the syntactic, the metaphoric and the proper – along with the traditional privileging of the latter above the former. In this context, the Blur Building remains with vision and illumination, but is perhaps more enticing in its affirmation of the haptic textures of light that move as immanent, sensate supplements to clear sight and Weltbild. I am alluding also to the attractions of Cathryn Vasseleu’s reading of Luce Irigaray’s thought of erotic light as texture. Here texture would be both the language and material of visual practices, an invisible interweaving of differences which form the fabric of the visible. One interesting aspect of the texture of light is that it “implicates touch in vision in ways that challenge the traditional differentiation of these senses within the sensible/intelligible binarism of photology” (Vasseleu 12).

     

     
    16. Compare Diller & Scofidio’s statement that they operate “with an understanding that the target and the weapon can be the same: a ‘gentle’ critique of tourism from within, for the installation accepts its own role as tourist attraction” (“SuitCase Studies” 22).

     

     
    17. The general theoretical and computer scientific context for virtual architecture has been treated by Bertol and Foell. A rich set of exchanges among practicing architects, cultural critics, and theoreticians appeared shortly after the millennial turn. See Leach, Turnbull, and Williams. Around the same time, Malcolm McCoullough provided an in-depth theoretical study of architecture and computation.

     

     
    18. For two influential and very interesting volumes cutting across the issues of the theory and practice of hypersurface architecture, see Perrella, Hypersurface Architecture, and Hypersurface Architecture II.

     

     
    19. See Goodman; von Glasersfeld, et al., Konstruktivismus Statt Erkenntnistheorie; von Glasersfeld, Radical Constructivism; Ryan.

     

     
    20. In approaching the Blur Building we are, most often, beyond the strictly epistemological frame of cognitivesymbolic mental worldmaking proper to the work of Goodman or Glaserfeld. Here worldmaking is obviously extended far into practice, aesthetics, technics, and the physical–into delimitations of the existential–just as we cannot but encounter the virtual which Goodman (but not Ryan) explicitly brackets by considering only the actual world.

     

     
    21. Cf. Aaron Betsky’s argument that Diller & Scofidio make us aware of the seductions of visual sense-making in contemporary consumer culture by “displaying display,” “by heightening, questioning, or frustrating the act of display, and by doing this within display itself” (“Display Engineers” 23).

     

     
    22. I am referring to David Nye’s coinage of this term in American Technological Sublime. When reactualizing this term, I am at one with Wolfe (pars. 4-5) in resisting the temptation to set a tone of Romantic sublimity of the kind sought by Ned Cramer in his article on the Blur Building. Rather, Diller & Scofidio approach a notion of the technological sublime that bespeaks an mutually implicating interlacing of human culture and technology, where technology is sought for its generative potential to be more and other than conventional, productive, and efficient. Here, technology would be approached neither in technophobic, nor in technophilic terms, but for its open-endedness and uncertain or artistically inventive in-operation. Cf. Schafer 93-94. Compare Wolfe’s remark that Diller & Scofidio “understand the relationship between art, the subject, and world in resolutely posthumanist terms … the human and the non- or anti- or a-human do not exist in fundamentally discrete ontological registers but–quite the contrary–inhabit the same space in mutual relations of co-implication and instability. This boundary-breakdown tends to be thematized in their work in the interlacing of the human and the technological” (par. 8).

     

     
    23. I am thinking broadly here of the off-the-grid buildings which now demonstrate complete energetic self-sufficiency, recent “zero energy buildings” that reduce net annual energy consumption while producing excess energy and selling it back to the power company, as well as passive solar building designs that reduce energy consumption by 70% to 90%. More specifically, I have in mind the statement from the American Institute of Architects that immediate action by the building sector is essential to avoid hazardous man-made climate change, since half of the global warming greenhouse gas emissions today come from buildings – more than transportation or industry. See also the “The 2030 Challenge Stimulus Plan” for reducing new building energy consumption by 90% over the next two decades, submitted to the Obama administration.

     

     
    24. Cf. Diller & Scofidio’s strategy of embedding mixing qua blurring/navigational ambience: “We propose to replace the focused attention of a visual spectacle with the attenuated attention of an immersive acoustic encounter. As disorientation is structured into the Blur experience, navigation is put to the test.… However, in this space of disorientation and unregulated movement, a very precisely spatial logic is invisibly mapped: space is acoustically digitized and can only be comprehended through physical movement” (Blur 195-198).

     

     
    25. This is, in other words, where one would want to consider departing from a number of the implicit shortcomings of versions of social and cultural constructivism that remain on quasi-transcendental planes of active, functional discourse and significant, semantic sense-making. Not only because these will consistently and reductively circle back from any contact with the complex risks pertaining to a transimmanent and existential practice with and as techné (rather than semiotic mediation), but also because their principled ontological silence will reduce questions concerning the dynamis and energeia of a multiplicitous chaosmos to mere perturbations and irritations by the “other” of “our” positively constructive processing of sense.

     

     
    26. By indicating the Blur Building as a singularly mediating assemblage involving ecotechnics, I am signaling a certain agreement with a call for a media-specific approach to this artistic-architectural project, as structurally earlier than any (digital) convergence. This would perhaps not belong too easily to any modernist notions of moving towards medium-specificity via technical and material supports or conceptual-situational constellations. It would rather take for granted the problematization after postmodernism of the work of art and of aesthetic autonomy and would thus be responding to the multiplicitous dissemination of the aesthetic and aesthetic experience throughout the socio-cultural field. This response would, generally speaking, unfold as a pursuit of differential specificity in which the medium as such will have to be reinvented, which is also to say that media must be approached as differential or self-differing. Compare also Krauss 53-56. More precisely, the mediumspecificity of installation projects of ubicomp and mixed reality, such as this architectural one, would have to become sensitive to both sides of the mixing oscillation between the actual and the virtual, and to the transductive oscillation itself. One would, for instance, wish to cross social constructivist discourses with the somewhat more robust notion of materiality that Katherine Hayles calls for in order to entwine instantiation and signification from the outset by conceiving of materiality as the interplay of physical characteristics and signifying strategies. This would open onto media-specific analysis by making materiality an emergent property open to debate and interpretation, while also allowing the consideration of concrete projects as embodied entities to be interpreted. Cf.,”Print Is Flat, Code Is Deep.” But one would also, for instance, wish to cross the valuable and materially aware but decidedly technicist analyses of (new) media (e.g., the early Friedrich Kittler), with a different sensitivity to software studies in an age of post-media aesthetics. In a manner of speaking, this is also what is currently taking place; see the developments in Marino; Fuller; Manovich, Software Takes Command; and Wardrip-Fruin. In short, I am moving towards a sensation and affect of the differential mediaspecificity of a mixed ecotechnics which emerges transductively between phenomenology and materiality, where media-specifics invent displacements and deferrals of our traditional sense of the empirical-transcedental divide.

     

     
    27. For a brief delineation of architectural problems in a globalized network economy of flows, see Simonot.

     

     
    28. Hansen’s text was published in revised form in his more recent book Bodies in Code: Interfaces with Digital Media, 175-220.

     

     
    29. Architecture affects us in and as a haptic space. It is embodied in felt sensation and experienced perceptually as a sense of place, location, and orientation in haptic or smooth space. Such a sense of place emerges from haptically embodied signals and affective traces of exterior forces such as light, sounds, smells, tastes, temperatures, resistances, weights, contours, and textures. Architecture may likewise have a certain hapticoaffective impact on the senses when a given place momentarily returns a symbolic or semantic weight to perception. Using this approach, the Blur Building presents a haptic medium closely related to kinesthesis, proprioception, and interoception, and to the fact that human embodiment processes (its own) haptic information as it moves through (sensible) space. Briefly, I am here interested in the multiple ways in which one exists with a culturally and technically informed sentiment in the Blur Building, just as one is moved by the indefinite number of live and machinic intensities at play in its smooth space. Cf. Nancy, The Sense of the World, and Deleuze and Guattari 310-350, 474-500.

     

     
    30. Compare Manuel De Landa, Homes: Meshwork or Hierarchy?.

     

     
    31. I embrace J. Pallasmaa’s notion of the skin as the primordial architecture (of the senses), including his displacement of the bias for vision and the suppression of the other senses in favor of approaching the heart of lived experience as molded by hapticity, and thus by an irreducibly peripheral, unfocused, and blurred vision. I approach all the senses as extensions of the tactile, as specializations of skin tissue, and all sensations as modalities of touching. If touch is the mode that (dis)integrates our experience of the world with that of ourselves, the Blur Building is perhaps best approached as a “life-(in)formative” architecture addressing all the senses simultaneously to articulate the edge of a lived experience of being in the world while permitting our sense of reality and self. Cf. Pallasmaa 10-11.

     

     
    32. Cf. Diller and Scofidio, Blur 217: “There is also a tactile response. Occasionally, visitors in Blur will have a 100% affinity. To register this rare occurrence, a third response system may be integrated into the coat. A small vibrating pad, modeled after the vibrating motor of a pager … would send a vibration through the coat, mimicking the tingle of excitement that comes with physical attraction.”

     

     
    33. I refer to Hansen’s notion of “medium” as “an environment for life,” where the medium is implicated in technical life, naming that transduction between the organism and the environment which constitutes life as essentially technical. “Medium” concerns the exteriorization of the living along with the selective actualization of the (architectural) environment, the demarcation of a world, or the differential delineation of an existential domain. Cf. “Media Theory” 299-300. I am also indicating the relevance, for approaching our life form in mixed realities today, of Bernard Stiegler’s rethinking of André Leroi-Gourhan and Gilbert Simodon’s important work so as to offer contemporary notions of “ephiphylogenesis” and “technics.” Our co-evolution with technics in mixed realities can perhaps best be approached in its interlacing hybridizations of life forms by drawing on a notion of technics qua a third ontic domain of “organized inorganic beings,” and on a notion of “epiphylogenesis” qua that co-originarity of the human and technics which lets us evolve specifically via the invention of technics, i.e., via living on through means other than life. Cf. Stiegler 17. For a further treatment of Stiegler’s work and its indebtedness to the thought of Simondon, see Ekman, “Of Transductive Speed–Stiegler.”

     

     
    34. See also the more recent statement from the research program “Future and Emerging Technologies” launched by DG Information Society and Media, the European Commission: “‘the-computer-as-we-know-it’ will soon have no role in our future everyday lives and environments. It will be replaced by a new generation of technologies, which will move the computing power off the desktop and ultimately integrate it with real world objects and everyday environments. Computing becomes thus an inseparable part of our everyday activities, while simultaneously disappearing into the background. It becomes a ubiquitous utility taking on a role similar to electricity–an enabling but invisible and pervasive medium revealing its functionality on request in an unobtrusive way and supporting people in their everyday lives” (Streitz, Kameas, and Mavrommati).

     

     
    35. “Sense” here suggests the greatest semantic generality as sensing, affective directionality and orientation.

     

     
    36. I remain inventively indebted to the other places Jacques Derrida will have gone with the untouchable. Hence I will not even thank. See “The Untouchable, or the Vow of Abstinence” 66-68.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • The 2030 Challenge Stimulus Plan.” Architecture2030.org. Achitecture2030, 2008. Web. 1 Oct. 2009. <http://www.architecture2030.org/2030_challenge/index.html>.
    • Anderson, Laurie. “Interview with Elizabeth Diller and Ricardo Scofidio.” Scanning: The Aberrant Architectures of Diller + Scofidio. Ed. Aaron Betsky. New York: Whitney Museum of American Art, 2003. 147-160. Print.
    • Azuma, Ronald T. “A Survey of Augmented Reality.” Presence: Teleoperators and Virtual Environments 6.4 (1997): 355-385. Print.
    • Beigl, Michael. “Ubiquitous Computing – Computation Embedded in the World.” Disappearing Architecture: From Real to Virtual to Quantum. Eds. Michael Beigl and Peter Weibel. Berlin: Birkhäuser, 2005. 52-61. Print.
    • Bertol, Daniela, and David Foell. Designing Digital Space. New York: Wiley, 1997. Print.
    • Betsky, Aaron. “Display Engineers.” Scanning: The Aberrant Architectures of Diller + Scofidio. Ed. Aaron Betsky. New York: Whitney Museum of American Art, 2003. 23-36. print.
    • Bimber, Oliver, and Ramesh Raskar. Spatial Augmented Reality. Wellesley, Mass.: A K Peters, 2005. Print.
    • Cook, Diane, and Sajal K. Das. Smart Environments. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley, 2005. Print.
    • Cramer, Ned. “All Natural.” Architecture 91.7 (2002): 51-59. Print.
    • Daley, Andrew, Ignacio Cirac, and Peter Zoller. “The Development of Quantum Hardware for Quantum Computing.” Disappearing Architecture: From Real to Virtual to Quantum. Eds. Michael Beigl and Peter Weibel. Berlin: Birkhäuser, 2005. 62-76. Print.
    • De Landa, Manuel. “Homes: Meshwork or Hierarchy?” Mediamatic. Netherlands Design Institute,16 Feb. 1995. Web. 1 Oct. 2009.<http://www.mediamatic.nl/Doors/Doors2/DeLanda/DeLanda-Doors2-E1.html>.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Francis Bacon: The Logic of Sensation. New York: Continuum, 2003. Print.
    • — and Félix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1987. Print.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “The Untouchable, or the Vow of Abstinence.” On Touching, Jean-Luc Nancy. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2005. 66-91. Print.
    • —. “White Mythology: Metaphor in the Text of Philosophy.” Margins of Philosophy. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1982. 207-272. Print.
    • “Diller & Scofidio.” Arcspace.com. Arcspace, n.d. Web. 15 Sept. 2007. <http://www.arcspace.com/architects/DillerScofidio/blur_building/index.htm>.
    • “Diller + Scofidio: How They Obtained the Blur Effect.” Hipercroquis.net. Hipercroquis, 26 Oct. 2006. Web. 8 Nov. 2009. <http://hipercroquis.net/2006/10/25/diller-scofidio-how-they-obtained-the-blur-effect/>.
    • “Diller & Scofidio: The Blur Building.” Designboom.com. Designboom, n.d. Web. 15 Sept. 2007. <http://www.designboom.com/eng/funclub/dillerscofidio.html>.
    • Diller, Elizabeth, and Ricardo Scofidio. Blur: The Making of Nothing. New York: Harry N. Abrams, 2002. Print.
    • —. “SuitCase Studies: The Production of a National Past.” Back to the Front: Tourisms of War. Eds. Elizabeth Diller and Ricardo Scofidio. New York: Princeton Architectural Press, 1994. 32-107. Print.
    • Dimendberg, Edward. “Blurring Genres.” Scanning: The Aberrant Architectures of Diller + Scofidio. Ed. Aaron Betsky. New York: Whitney Museum of American Art, 2003. 67-80. Print.
    • Ekman, Ulrik. “Of Transductive Speed – Stiegler.” Parallax 13.4 (2007): 46-63. Print.
    • —, ed. Throughout: Art and Culture Emerging with Ubiquitous Computing. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, forthcoming 2009.
    • Foster, Ian, and Carl Kesselman. The Grid. 2nd ed. Amsterdam: Elsevier, 2004. Print.
    • Fuller, Matthew. Software Studies: A Lexicon. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2008. Print.
    • Gibson, William. Neuromancer. New York: Ace Books, 1984. Print.
    • Glasersfeld, Ernst von. Radical Constructivism: A Way of Knowing and Learning. Studies in Mathematics Education Series. London: Falmer Press, 1995. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • —, et al. Konstruktivismus Statt Erkenntnistheorie. Edition Tri. Klagenfurt: Drava, 1998. Print.
    • Goodman, Nelson. Ways of Worldmaking. Indianapolis: Hackett Publishing Co., 1978. Print.
    • Grosz, Elizabeth. Architecture from the Outside: Essays on Virtual and Real Space. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2001. Print.
    • Hansen, Mark B.N. Bodies in Code: Interfaces with Digital Media. New York: Routledge, 2006. Print.
    • —. “Media Theory.” Theory Culture & Society 23.2-3 (2006): 297-306. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • —. “Wearable Space.” Configurations 10.2 (2003): 321-370. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. “Flesh and Metal: Reconfiguring the Mindbody in Virtual Environments.” Configurations 10 (2002): 297-320. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • —. “Print Is Flat, Code Is Deep: The Importance of Media-Specific Analysis.” Poetics Today 25.1 (2004): 67-90. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • —, and Danielle Foushee, eds. Nanoculture: Implications of the New Technoscience. Bristol: Intellect Books, 2004. Print.
    • Hutchens, B.C., and Jean-Luc Nancy. “Interview: The Future of Philosophy.” Jean-Luc Nancy and the Future of Philosophy. Ed. B. C. Hutchens. Chesham: Acumen, 2005. 161-166. Print.
    • Ishii, Hiroshi and Brygg Ullmer. “Tangible Bits: Towards Seamless Interfaces between People, Bits and Atoms.” Tangible Media Group. MIT Media Laboratory, 1997. Web. 15 Sept. 2009. <http://tmgorchard.media.mit.edu:8020/SuperContainer/RawData/Papers/331-Tangible%20Bits%20Towards%20Seamless/Published/PDF>.
    • James, Ian. The Fragmentary Demand: An Introduction to the Philosophy of Jean-Luc Nancy. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2006. Print.
    • Jameson, Fredric. “Postmodernism, or The Cultural Logic of Late Capital.” The Jameson Reader. Eds. Michael Hardt and Kathi Weeks. Oxford: Blackwell, 2000. 188-232. Print.
    • Jay, Martin. Downcast Eyes. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1993. Print.
    • Jonas, Hans. “The Nobility of Sight: A Study in the Phenomenology of the Senses.” The Phenomenon of Life: Toward a Philosophical Biology. Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 2001. 135-156. Print.
    • Krauss, Rosalind E. “A Voyage on the North Sea”: Art in the Age of the Post-Medium Condition. The Walter Neurath Memorial Lectures, 31. London: Thames & Hudson, 2000. Print.
    • Leach, Neil, David Turnbull, and Chris William, eds. Digital Tectonics. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley-Academy, 2004. Print
    • Leerberg, Thomas. “Blur by Diller & Scofidio.” Leerberg.com. Designskolen Kolding, 25 Apr. 2006. Web. 15 Sept. 2007. <http://thl.dskd.dk/view.php/page/BLUR>.
    • Loke, Seng. Context-Aware Pervasive Systems. Boca Raton, FL: Auerbach Publications, 2006. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Manovich, Lev. “The Poetics of Augmented Space.” Visual Communication 5 (2006): 219-240. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • —. “Software Takes Command.” Software Studies. Software Studies, 2008. Web. 20 Nov. 2008. <http://lab.softwarestudies.com/2008/11/softbook.html>.
    • Marino, Mark C. “Critical Code Studies.” Electronic Book Review. Electropoetics, 4 Dec. 2006. Web. 11 Jan 2009. <http://www.electronicbookreview.com/thread/electropoetics/codology>.
    • McCullough, Malcolm. Digital Ground : Architecture, Pervasive Computing, and Environmental Knowing. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2004. Print.
    • Milgram, Paul, and Fumio Kishino. “Taxonomy of Mixed Reality Visual Displays.” IEICE Transactions on Information and Systems E77-D.12 (1994): 1321-1329. Print.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. Being Singular Plural. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 2000. Print.
    • —. Corpus. Berlin: Diaphanes, 2003. Print.
    • —. “Salut to You, Salut to the Blind We Become.” On Touching, Jean-Luc Nancy. Ed. Jacques Derrida. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2005. 313-314. Print.
    • —. The Sense of the World. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1997. Print.
    • Nye, David E. American Technological Sublime. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1994. Print.
    • Pallasmaa, Juhani. The Eyes of the Skin: Architecture and the Senses. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, 2005. Print.
    • Perrella, Stephen, ed. Hypersurface Architecture. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1998. Print.
    • —, ed. Hypersurface Architecture II. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1999. Print.
    • Robinson, Philip, Harald Valt, and Waleed Wagealla, eds. Privacy, Security, and Trust within the Context of Pervasive Computing. New York: Springer, 2005. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Rubin, Ben. “Diller + Scofidio: The Blur Building, National Expo 2002, Yverdon-les-Bains, Switzerland.” ProHosting, n.d. Web. 15 Sept. 2007. <http://hammer.prohosting.com/~soa/diller/>.
    • Ryan, Marie-Laure. Possible Worlds, Artificial Intelligence, and Narrative Theory. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1991. Print.
    • Schafer, Ashley. “Designing Inefficiencies.” Scanning: The Aberrant Architectures of Diller + Scofidio. Ed. Aaron Betsky. New York: Whitney Museum of American Art, 2003. 93-102. Print.
    • Simondon, Gilbert. Du Mode D’existence Des Objets Techniques. Paris: Aubier, 1989.
    • —. L’individuation Psychique Et Collective. Paris: Aubier, 1989. Print.
    • Simonot, Béatrice. “Strategies and Tactics.” Archilab’s Future House: Radical Experiments in Living Space. Eds. Marie-Ange Brayer and Béatrice Simonot. London: Thames & Hudson, 2002. 10-13. Print.
    • Spuybroek, Lars. “The Motorization of Reality.” Archis 11 (1998): 18-21. Print.
    • Starobinski, Jean. L’oeil Vivant, Essai. Paris: Gallimard, 1961. Print.
    • Steventon, Alan, and Steve Wright. Intelligent Spaces. London: Springer, 2006. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Stiegler, Bernard. Technics and Time. Vol. 1: The Fault of Epimetheus. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1998. Print.
    • Streitz, Norbert A., Achilles Kameas, and Irene Mavrommati, eds. The Disappearing Computer. Berlin: Springer, 2007. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Thacker, Eugene. Biomedia. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2004. Print.
    • —. The Global Genome: Biotechnology, Politics, and Culture. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2005. Print.
    • Vasseleu, Cathryn. Textures of Light: Vision and Touch in Irigaray, Levinas, and Merleau-Ponty. New York: Routledge, 1998. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Wachowski, Andy and Larry Wachoski, dirs. The Matrix. Warner Brothers, 1999. DVD.
    • Wardrip-Fruin, Noah. Expressive Processing. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, forthcoming 2009.
    • Weiser, Mark. “The Computer for the 21st Century.” Xerox.com. n.p., 1991. Web. 1 Sept. 2009. <http://nano.xerox.com/hypertext/weiser/SciAmDraft3.html>.
    • —, R. Gold, and J. S. Brown. “The Origins of Ubiquitous Computing Research at PARC in the Late 1980s.” Pervasive Computing 38.4 (1999): n. pag. Web..
    • Wolfe, Cary. “Lose the Building: Systems Theory, Architecture, and Diller+Scofidio’s Blur.” Postmodern Culture 16.3 (2006): n. pag. Web.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Schm1822. “The Blur Building by Diller & Scofidio.” YouTube. YouTube, 16 Feb. 2009. Web. 15 Sept. 2009. <http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0WT5Lu1MKYs>.
    • Zavatta, Sylvie. “Preface.” Back to the Front: Tourisms of War. Eds. Elizabeth Diller and Ricardo Scofidio. New York: Princeton Architectural Press, 1994. 8-17. Print.

     

  • Unknowing Susan Sontag’s Regarding: Recutting with Georges Bataille

    Louis Kaplan (bio)
    University of Toronto
    louis.kaplan@utoronto.ca

    Abstract
     
    This essay reviews and challenges Susan Sontag’s use and abuse of Georges Bataille in her last book, Regarding the Pain of Others. Sontag takes up Bataille’s understanding of and fascination with a group of Chinese torture (or lingchi) photographs from the beginning of the twentieth century. Her somber reading glosses over Bataille’s “anguished gaiety” in the face of these images and his post-Nietzschean tendency to laugh in the face of the impossible. Sontag overlooks Bataille’s atheological and iconoclastic approach to these images steeped in transgression and non-knowledge in an attempt to frame his thinking as somehow full of religious meaning and allied to the Christian transmutation of suffering into sacrifice. Bound to a restricted (or Hegeilian) economy that remains servile to knowledge, Sontag’s encounter with these images misses the opportunity to acknowledge the sovereign (and comic) operation as “absolute rending” inscribed in an excessive economy without reserve. Unlike Sontag in Regarding, Bataille looks to these deathly images in terms of an ethics of the impossible and risks bringing together non-knowledge, laughter, and tears. The essay concludes with a look at the limits of Sontag’s analysis of Jeff Wall’s Dead Troops Talk to underscore the profound practical joke that non-knowledge plays on those who would seek to turn death into a pedagogical exercise. The essay also suggests the relevance of Jean-Luc Nancy’s thinking about such images (and photography in general) beyond the logic of representation and in terms of exposure (or of being posed in exteriority).

     

     

     

    Real reading goes forward unknowing, it always opens a book like an unjustifiable cut in the supposed continuum of meaning. It must go astray at this break.
     

    –Jean-Luc Nancy, “Exscription”

     
    In confronting the visual representation of pain and suffering as its object of study and the role that the medium of photography plays in this global enterprise, Susan Sontag’s final book Regarding the Pain of Others (2003) has served as a touchstone for post-9/11 political and ethical debates, especially in connection with the amorphous “war on terror” that has been waged during the Bush administration, when the state of emergency became standard in American foreign policy.1 The book took on an even greater resonance in the spring of 2004 with the release of the Abu Ghraib torture photographs in Iraq and against the backdrop of revelations of the harsh treatment of prisoners (or so-called “enemy combatants”) in Guantanamo Bay.2Regarding the Pain of Others contains Sontag’s conscientious reflections and objections to the images of death and destruction that constitute the genres of war and torture photography (see cover art). Her account traces the venerable history of war photography from Roger Fenton’s propagandistic images in the Crimean War that served the nationalist agenda of the British sovereign in 1855 through the Golden Age of photojournalism featuring the auteurship of such celebrated figures as Robert Capa and W. Eugene Smith in the Spanish Civil War and World War II to more recent examples of the horrors and disasters of war in places like Rwanda, Somalia, and Sarajevo. Completely lacking in photographic illustrations, Sontag’s survey carefully avoids visual spectacle. Instead, the book features an onslaught of horrific photographs that flash up and pass away in the minds’ eyes of her readers. Eduardo Cadava theorizes the reading and regarding of photographic images as a way we learn about death—as a way of “learning to die.”3 As Cadava and others argue, this lesson relies in large part on the relationship of the photographic image to time—as it exposes finitude and mortality as markers of our being-in-common.4 While one is tempted to generalize this as the property of every photograph, it is the unfortunate characteristic of war photography that it puts the corpse (of the dead soldier or civilian) and the ruin (of the destroyed building) at the center of its action. As Sontag writes quite early in her book and in a manner that articulates her view that the photograph is an indexical trace of the referent and therefore cannot but tell the truth: “Look, the photographs say, this is what it’s like. This is what war does. And that, that is what it does, too. War tears, rends. War rips open, eviscerates. War scorches. War dismembers. War ruins” (Regarding 8). Sontag’s description of what war photography does foregrounds a litany of destruction–of violent actions that rip open and break apart the body politic and the soldiers who serve its commands (tearing, rending, dismembering, ruining, etc.). But rather than envisioning these images as indexical traces to be comprehended in terms of a transparent logic of appearance (“this is what it’s like”), it would be more to the point in the face of the destruction and the havoc wreaked by and in these images to view these photographs as deadly exposures that occur at the limits of meaning and understanding. Here I am recalling the etymological root of exposure as “being posed in exteriority.”5 Such deadly exposures and scorched illuminations put both photography and the reading of photographs on a perpetual war footing.
     
    It is interesting to note that the violent imagery that is conjured here—of tearing and rending, of ripping open and eviscerating—returns later in the book with Sontag’s close reading of a photograph that depicts the infamous Chinese torture of a hundred cuts (lingchi). This leads Sontag to the ideas and desires of Georges Bataille and to a group of lingchi photographs derived from the beginning of the twentieth century, from before this practice was outlawed in China in 1905. The images were taken by French troops stationed in cities like Beijing and Tianjin and were first published by Louis Carpeaux just a few years later in France. These photographs were to become a crucial site for philosophical reflection (as well as Buddhist meditation) throughout Bataille’s life, especially after he was given one of these images as a present by his psychoanalyst, Dr. Adrien Borel, in 1925. While Sontag seeks to enlist Bataille’s support for her own arguments, the question remains whether this post-Nietzschean philosopher of laughter and unknowing can be made to serve the somber rhetoric of Sontag’s Regarding. For when Bataille introduces us to something like absolute dismemberment or rending in one of his subversive readings of Hegel and the master/slave dialectic, it is framed in terms of the complicated (or even tortuous) concept of anguished gaiety. In contrast to Sontag, Bataille writes in “Hegel, Death, and Sacrifice” with the blackest of humors: “On the contrary, gaiety, connected with the work of death, causes me anguish, is accentuated by anguish, and in return exacerbates that anguish: ultimately, gay anguish, anguished gaiety cause me, in a feverish chill, ‘absolute dismemberment,’ where it is my joy that finally tears me apart, but where dejection would follow joy were I not torn all the way to the end, immeasurably” (25). What happens to the anguished gaiety of Bataille’s gaze upon the work of death and dismemberment and/as the (immeasurable) loss of meaning, which he associates with a practice of sovereignty, that could only take place at the limits or the interruption of discourse—what happens to that gaiety when it becomes appropriated by Sontag’s Regarding, enmeshed as it is in a discourse that seeks to give a sense and a meaning to the pain of others and that thereby practices a form of Hegelian mastery that would claim to avoid the loss of meaning? In this regard, Sontag’s confident and transparent assertions about the photography of war and its horrors (with statements like “this is what it’s like”) mirror Hegel’s The Phenomenology of Spirit and a practice of lordship and mastery (Herrschaft) wherein, as Bataille states, “[d]ismemberment is, on the contrary, full of meaning” (27).6
     
    It is important to stress that Sontag’s discussion of the lingchi photographs never invokes Bataille’s practice of sovereignty and its impossible (or even laughable) relationship with death. According to Arkady Plotnitsky, the sovereign operation marks for Bataille the “irreducible loss of meaning which is also always excessive, in particular with respect to any possibility of containing it by presence, consciousness, or meaning.”7 The sovereign operation would disenable Sontag from making sense of the pain of others through the medium of photography and to enlist these images as a type of moral knowledge that is therefore full of meaning. In addition to ignoring the sovereign operation, Sontag overlooks Bataille’s engagement with general economy as the science or the theory of such sovereign practice that manifests at the level of political economy. Finally, rather than acknowledging Bataille’s (non)concept of nonknowledge (nonsavoir) in relationship to the lingchi photograph, Sontag insists that the contemplation of this image offers “a liberation of tabooed erotic knowledge” (Regarding 98). In these ways, Sontag’s writing on Bataille remains embroiled in a practice of mastery and in a restricted economy that excludes the practice of sovereignty. However, this is not to overlook that Bataille’s sovereign operation also involves mastery within certain reconfigured limits.8 This recalls one of the crucial points that Jacques Derrida makes in his groundbreaking essay on Bataille, “From Restricted to General Economy: A Hegelianism Without Reserve.” Derrida insists that the sovereign operation reconfigures meaning by marking its limits within an excessive field of chance, nonsense, play, and non-knowledge. This is exactly how Bataille practices a “Hegelianism without reserve” and why Derrida writes that unreserved play or chance includes the work of meaning not in terms of any regime of knowledge but in terms of the force of inscription. In the sovereign operation, meaning becomes a function of play and non-knowledge through a process of reinscription or what Jean-Luc Nancy calls “exscription.” Derrida’s review of Hegel’s blindspots would also apply to Sontag’s Regarding the Pain of Others in terms of its “conscientious suspension of play” in the face of the disasters of war. Derrida writes that
     

    Hegel has bet against play, against chance. He has blinded himself to the possibility of his own bet, to the fact that the conscientious suspension of play (for example, the passage through the certitude of oneself and through lordship as the independence of self-consciousness) was itself a phase of play; and to the fact that play includes the work of meaning or the meaning of work, and includes them not in terms of knowledge, but in terms of inscription: meaning is a function of play, is inscribed in a certain place in the configuration of a meaningless play.
     

    (260)

     
    We also need to ask what happens to Sontag’s Regarding and the insistence that “the moral capacity of the photograph is repeatedly defined by its relative ability to confer knowledge and understanding on the viewer” (Beckman 119) if and when one applies Bataille’s radical and unconditional unknowing to it. What is to be done in the face of Bataille’s sovereign insistence upon the “exscription” of meaning? How does one regard that which seeks to expose what Jean-Luc Nancy has called the “infinite discharge of meaning” or that which “withdraws from all signification” (“Exscription” 64)?9 This essay addresses such questions by comparing the ways Sontag and Bataille analyze and interpret—as well as fail to analyze and interpret—these infamous and painful lingchi photographs poised at the limits of the sayable and the knowable. In contrast to Sontag’s mastery, Bataille’s (non)concepts (e.g., sovereignty, unknowledge) and the specialized ways in which he deploys them seek to make meaning slide—or even to go beyond meaning—as they laugh in the face of death and the impossible. Following Nancy, the goal of unknowing Sontag’s regarding would be “to read in every line the work or the play of writing against meaning” (62). For a long time, scholars believed that the images that were in Bataille’s possession illustrated the torture of the political prisoner Fu-Zhu-Li, who had been found guilty of the murder of Prince Ao-Han-Oun and who was executed by lingchi on April 10, 1905. However, recent research by Jérôme Bourgon at the East Asian Institute at the University of Lyon has clarified that the victim in Bataille’s photographs was not actually Fu-Zhu-Li but another, unknown criminal from the same period.10 There are eight extant images from this execution, and four of them were published by Bataille in the final section of The Tears of Eros, his magisterial survey that examines the history of art at the intersection of eroticism and death.11 The confusion stems from the addition of a caption in the book that accompanies one of the photographs and that recites Carpeaux’s summary of the execution of Fu-Zhu-Li. Offering readers a date for one of these images that turns out to be five years later than the abolition of lingchi in the Chinese penal code, Sontag introduces the image in the following way:
     

    One of the great theorists of the erotic, Georges Bataille, kept a photograph taken in China in 1910 of a prisoner undergoing ‘the death of a hundred cuts’ on his desk, where he could look at it every day. (Since become legendary, it is reproduced in the last of Bataille’s books published during his lifetime, in 1961, The Tears of Eros.) ‘This photograph,’ Bataille wrote, ‘had a decisive role in my life. I have never stopped being obsessed by this image of pain, at the same time ecstatic and intolerable.’”
     

    (Regarding 98)

     

    Before delving further into this passage, one notes that an extra cut has taken place in Sontag’s transcription of the citation from The Tears of Eros. While the original quotation has a question mark after the word “ecstatic”—”ecstatic(?)”—this has been cut out of Sontag’s version, making for a world of difference. While Sontag calls Bataille the philosopher of Eros, she does not mention here that he is the philosopher for whom Eros is always bound to Thanatos, the promiscuous coupling of sexuality and death that is not that far from Bataille’s Surrealist nemesis Andre Breton’s concept of “convulsive beauty” to which Sontag also refers elsewhere in the book (Regarding 23). This contrasts with an earlier essay, “The Pornographic Imagination,” in which Sontag writes that what “Bataille exposes in extreme erotic experience is its subterranean connection with death” (61). In this context, one also recalls the title of one of Bataille’s books that binds Eros and Thanatos via the violent acts of the sensual body—Erotism: Death and Sensuality. In the “Introduction,” Bataille states the following formula: “Eroticism, it may be said, is assenting to life up to the point of death” (11). The paradoxical formula structures erotism as an exuberance of life that strives for death as its limit experience. Bataille sees death as the continuity of being that discontinuous beings strive for in the passionate embrace of erotic activity. In light of Bataille’s formulation, it is not surprising that the orgasmic climax of sexual release is called the petit mort. The domain of eroticism is marked by violation and the transgression of discontinuous bodies. Bataille writes about this in a way that again invokes the limit. “What does physical eroticism signify if not a violation of the very being of its practitioners?—a violation bordering on death, bordering on murder?” (17). While ignoring the consequences of nonknowledge, this background about erotic violation unto death helps to flesh out and elucidate Sontag’s assertion in Regarding the Pain of Others that the contemplation of this harrowing and tortuous image and its violent depiction of death involves the “liberation of tabooed erotic knowledge” (Regarding 98).

     

     
    Anonymous, The Chinese Torture of One Hundred Cuts, ca. 1905.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 1.

    Anonymous, The Chinese Torture of One Hundred Cuts, ca. 1905.

     

     

    For Sontag, Bataille clearly had an obsessive and intimate relationship with these photographs, and his regard for them (and upon them) took on the aspect of a daily ritual. In turning and returning to these images, from which others would want to turn away, it seems clear that Bataille wanted to remind himself of something. Sontag comes up with three reasons Bataille would have wanted to gaze upon these gruesome images. These involve taking courage, numbing down, and attesting to injustices. She writes, “As objects of contemplation, images of the atrocious can answer to several different needs. To steel oneself against weakness. To make oneself more numb. To acknowledge the existence of the incorrigible” (Regarding 98). But Sontag does not consider another reason why images of the atrocious can become objects of contemplation, one that was very close to Bataille’s heart: to laugh in the face of death and the impossible. Steeped in solemnity, Sontag’s Regarding does not tap into the resources of the Nietzschean gay science (fröhliche Wissenschaft) that were pivotal to Bataille’s thinking and his laughter.12 Time and again in his writings, Bataille turns to “Nietzsche’s Laughter.” He quotes the following as a laudable model: “To see tragic characters founder and to be able to laugh, despite the profound understanding, emotion and sympathy that we feel: this is divine” (The Unfinished System 22). Bataille’s compulsive return to these images stages an encounter with the impossible that goes far beyond an acknowledgment of the existence of the incorrigible and that remains open to the effects of nonknowledge. But this divine laughter derived from excess and full of anguish cannot be read simply as sadistic pleasure or mere maliciousness, for it acknowledges its own foundering and ruin in the same mortal breath. In meditating on his fascination with this Chinese torture victim in The Inner Experience, Bataille considers laughter in the face of ruin without any hope of salvation: “The young and seductive Chinese man of whom I have spoken, left to the work of the executioner—I loved him with a love in which the sadistic instinct played no part: he communicated his pain to me or perhaps the excessive nature of his pain, and it was precisely that which I was seeking, not so as to take pleasure in it, but in order to ruin in me that which is opposed to ruin” (120). This inclusive view of the photographic exposure of suffering as both shared communication and as anguished gaiety is very different from Sontag’s perspective in an earlier essay, “The Image World” in On Photography, which argues that the “feeling of being exempt from calamity stimulates interest in looking at painful pictures, and looking at them suggests and strengthens the feeling that one is exempt” (168). Sontag’s disregard for this vital strand of anguished gaiety that marks the Bataillian corpus seems peculiar because she began her intellectual career in close connection with the renegades of French Surrealism and their transgressions. First of all, one thinks of her edition of Antonin Artaud: Selected Writings (1976), which includes a considered and affirmative introduction to his work. Even more relevant to this discussion, one recalls her rigorous analysis of the transgressive eroticism of Bataille’s The Story of the Eye in “The Pornographic Imagination,” published in Styles of Radical Will (1969). Sontag pinpoints here the interlocking of death and eroticism that makes Bataille’s work so distinctive. “One reason that Histoire de l’Oeil and Madame Edwarda make such a strong and upsetting impression is that Bataille understood more clearly than any other writer I know of that what pornography is really about, ultimately, isn’t sex but death” (60). However, Sontag does not explore either here or in her last book the comic aspects that arise from Bataille’s investigations of death and the laughable attempt to simulate “absolute risk” in view of the fact that death always remains at the limit of the possible and the knowable.13 Refusing to let go of the gravity of the situation, “The Pornographic Imagination” avoids an encounter with Bataille’s profound levity and the divinity of laughter. Reviewing the philosopher as pornographer, Sontag insists that Bataille’s “more effective method is to invest each action with a weight, a disturbing gravity, that feels authentically ‘mortal’” (61). While there is no argument regarding the importance of mortality as a critical concern in all of Bataille’s thought, the emphasis on its gravity alone is quite disturbing. The rhetoric of authenticity weighs heavily around the laughing philosopher’s neck in this formulation of being as “being-toward-death.” Indeed, Sontag’s analysis has a much too stuffy existentialist air about it that thoroughly represses what Mikkel Borch-Jacobsen has termed the “laughter of being” in a brilliant essay of the same name. For Borch-Jakobsen, Bataille’s engagement with mortality means to “die[] of laughter and laugh[] at dying, bent convulsively over the impossible abyss of his own finitude” (752).

     
    One of the limits of Sontag’s interpretation involves her reading of Bataille’s “high regard” for lingchi in terms of the rhetoric of transfiguration. Sontag’s move aligns Bataille’s obsession with this image with “religious thinking” in general and with the Christian transmutation of suffering into sacrifice in particular. “Bataille is not saying that he takes pleasure at the sight of this excruciation. But he is saying that he can imagine extreme suffering as something more than just suffering, as a kind of transfiguration. It is a view of suffering, of the pain of others, that is rooted in religious thinking, which links pain to sacrifice, sacrifice to exaltation” (Regarding 98-99). This is an odd conclusion for a self-professed atheological and iconoclastic thinker like Bataille who rebels against the pieties and sanctities of Christianity, who refuses the mystification of the afterlife, and who resists sublimation, sublation (Aufhebung), and transfiguration in all forms whether in its Hegelian or in its Christian martyr varieties. Indeed, Bataille follows Nietzsche in understanding salvation as a Christian mode of escape, as “the most odious of evasions” (The Inner Experience 12). This lapsed Catholic refuses to transfigure pain and suffering into a passion of the Christ. Instead, his project is to contaminate binary oppositions like divine ecstasy and extreme horror. Rather than using the Christian figure of “transfiguration” and its transcendental overtones, it would be more to the atheological point to speak of a radical reversal when referring, as here, to the site of excess and surplus where extreme suffering and joy meet and exchange places. In this way, the “something more” that Sontag invokes would remain on the side of the remainder (restance). After all, Bataille speaks in The Tears of Eros of the “infinite capacity for reversal” (renversement14) and not in terms of transfiguration. Similarly, the figure and the strategy of glissement (what makes meaning slide) is more akin to Bataille’s atheological practice than is the glorification (and the raising on high) of a Christian concept like transfiguration. In staking out an atheological resistance to transfiguration, it is important to mobilize the counterthrust of transgression as that which is vital to Bataille’s pornographic sensibility. Early on Sontag senses this in “The Pornographic Imagination” when she expresses great admiration for Bataille and his “profound sense of transgression” (60) and when she even intimates that Bataille outstrips Marquis de Sade in this respect. In her transformation of transgression into transfiguration, one is left wondering whether the late Sontag did not experience a kind of religious conversion experience herself.
     
    However, it is by no means correct to say that Bataille necessarily makes a connection between sacrifice and a state of exaltation. This glosses over the important distinction that must be made between sovereignty and lordship or mastery (Herrschaft), which offer different approaches to sacrifice and its “meaning.” Sontag’s inattention to this nuance returns us to Bataille’s confrontation with Hegel in the essay “Hegel, Death and Sacrifice.” In Bataille’s reading, Hegel sees the institution of sacrifice as a profoundly human activity that exposes one to death and that allows one to contemplate the work of the negative face to face so that the individual “dwells with it” (18). But Bataille also insists that the Hegelian model of sacrifice is built on a ruse and a subterfuge because the one who sacrifices and who tarries with the negative in this way must stay alive in order to attain mastery. This leads to the following comedic paradox as outlined by Derrida: “To stay alive, to maintain oneself in life, to work, to defer pleasure, to limit the stakes, to have respect for death at the very moment when one looks directly at it—such is the servile condition of mastery and of the entire history it makes possible” (255). Hegel’s conception of sacrifice and of “the servile condition of mastery” therefore always holds something back, in contrast to Bataille’s insistence that “sovereignty is NOTHING” (The Accursed Share Vol. 3 430).15 Bataille exposes the comedy at the heart of Hegel’s theory of sacrifice and the mastery or lordship that it pretends to maintain as sovereignty laughs at the recognition that it needs to stay alive.16 “In the sacrifice, the sacrificer identifies himself with the animal that is struck down dead …. But it is a comedy!” (“Hegel, Death and Sacrifice” 19). Bataille concludes the essay by suggesting that sacrifice remains servile when it is tied to the production of meaning and that it can only become sovereign and approach the state of exaltation when it sacrifices or lets go of meaning and the desire to make a meaning out of death. This is when it becomes, in Derrida’s words, the “heedless sacrifice of presence and meaning” (257). Bataille concludes: “Sacrifice, consequently, is a sovereign, autonomous manner of being only to the extent that it is uninformed by meaningful discourse. To the extent that discourse informs it, what is sovereign is given in terms of servitude. Indeed by definition what is sovereign does not serve” (25-26). Returning to Sontag, this close reading helps to qualify her statement that the state of exaltation necessarily follows from sacrifice while foregrounding that her own relationship to (the representation of) pain and sacrifice remains servile because she earnestly wants to figure out “What to do with such knowledge as photographs bring of faraway suffering” (99) rather than opening up to the burst of sovereign laughter that arises out of these photographic exposures of and to nonknowledge. In this context, it is well to recall a pithy statement from Bataille in the lecture “Nonknowledge, Laughter and Tears,” where he underscores that “the unknown makes us laugh(The Unfinished System 135).
     
    One can also take issue with Sontag’s assurance that “Bataille is not saying that he takes pleasure at the sight of this excruciation” (98-99). Sontag is careful here not to make Bataille into a sexual pervert or sadist who would derive pleasure from the witnessing of violent torture. Nevertheless, the attempt to shield Bataille completely from the pleasure principle and from any enjoyment of this image can only be done at the expense of overlooking those transgressive aspects of his work. In “The Tears of Photography,” Herta Wolf accurately pinpoints such ambivalent combinations as “agony and laughter” (74) and “laughter and mourning” (77) that are crucial to The Tears of Eros as a whole and that Sontag does not articulate in her analysis of Bataille. Given Bataille’s complex ideas about laughter and tears, pleasure and pain are intertwined in an impossible knot that cannot be so easily disentangled when it comes to his experience of the lingchi photographs. Derrida is also fascinated by the anguished burst of Bataillian laughter that breaks out when confronted with the comedy of Hegelian philosophy, with its notion of sublation (Aufhebung) that works to preserve meaning, and with the idealist conceit that “nothing must be definitely lost in death” (256-257). Derrida continues, “Absolute comicalness is the anguish experienced when confronted by expenditure on lost funds, by the absolute sacrifice of meaning: a sacrifice without return and without reserves” (257). It is this unsavory mixture of anguish spiked with laughter that Bataille experiences when casting his eyes upon the excruciating losses suffered by the lingchi victims, by these sacrifices without return and without reserves. Indeed, Bataille’s horrifying laughter affirms the absolute rending that cannot be contained by the Hegelian (or Sontagian) work of the negative. One encounters the same type of laughter in Bataille’s erotic classic The Story of the Eye, but here the tone becomes more mocking, shocking, and scandalous. It should be recalled that the pseudonymous and excremental author of this book is Lord Auch, a shortened form of aux chiottes (to the shithouse). In light of this discussion, Lord Auch should be viewed in the context of the passage from lordship to sovereignty. Bataille’s biographer Michael Surya believes that “[o]f all the books he wrote it is certainly the one in which laughter is the most perceptible” and that it marks the “obscene laugh of an apostate” (102). The sexual and criminal adventures of the narrator, Simone, and of Sir Edmond as they carouse their way through Spain and that climax in their murder and rape of a Catholic priest laughs in the face of Christian pieties and organized religious institutions and elucidates another facet of Bataille’s atheological deployment of a derisive and obscene laughter that functions as a mode of transgression.
     
    Returning to Sontag’s review of the Chinese torture victim, one notices that she conflates him with the Christian martyr by bridging the religious symbolism of Eastern and Western visual cultures. While Bataille’s original publication contains an illustration of Aztec human sacrifice (ca. 1500) to serve as a visual comparison with the Chinese torture victim, Sontag fixes on the figure of Saint Sebastian. Rather than attributing the comfortably numbed expression on the victim’s face to the administration of a dose of opium (which both Bataille and his biographer Michael Surya mention17), Sontag refers to “a look on his upturned face as ecstatic as that of any Italian Renaissance Saint Sebastian” (Regarding 98). Sontag invokes a comparison with this Christian saint and martyr whom the Roman emperor Diocletian in the third century A.D. had tied to a post and shot through with arrows. Saint Sebastian would become a favorite subject of many paintings of the Renaissance such as those by the Paduan artist Andrea Mantegna in the late 1400s. The ecstatic again becomes an unmarked term for Sontag as it is placed in the redemptive light of both Christian salvation and Renaissance art. However, it is important to reiterate that Bataille introduces the term “ecstatic” at the beginning of the section “Chinese Torture” in The Tears of Eros with a question mark.18 There is a mark of uncertainty as to whether Bataille feels comfortable in invoking this term in reference to the Chinese torture victim. Even when Bataille refers to ecstasy without question or mark further on in this same text, it is not to be taken uncategorically as something that is revelatory or that offers salvation. The ambivalence and the capacity for radical reversal continue here as “religious ecstasy” is coupled with that perverse mode of eroticism known as “sadism” (206), and is then followed by the unnatural pairing of “divine ecstasy and its opposite, extreme horror” (207). In these ways, the ecstatic in The Tears of Eros inscribes a contaminating movement of transgression rather than a state of redemptive transfiguration. It also should be recalled that the ecstatic is inextricably linked for Bataille to the pursuit of sovereignty. Bataille’s atheological pursuit of ecstasy at the limits of knowledge leaves one with that same empty-headed feeling from which laughter bursts–anguished gaiety. As he says, “I would gladly define ecstasy: feeling gay but anguished—from my immeasurable stupidity.”19 In contrast to any knowledge of the ecstatic that could be derived from Sontag’s comparative investigations of art historical discourse along with its gallery of tortured figures of Christian piety, Bataille’s transgressive unknowing empties out onto a logical abyss in an aporetic structure that confronts the “identity of these perfect contraries” (Tears of Eros 207).
     
    In resisting Sontag’s theological recuperation of the lingchi photographs, it is also important to remember that according to Bataille’s atheological investigations of the religious life and the spiritual domain, “God is an effect of nonknowledge” (The Unfinished System 146). Atheology—as the study of the effects of nonknowledge—can take many forms, but for Bataille it always places us in relation to something impossible. As Bataille writes in (and with) “Nietzsche’s Laughter,” “Fundamentally, the spiritual domain is that of the impossible. I will say that ecstasy, sacrifice, tragedy, poetry, laughter are forms whereby life situates itself in proportion to the impossible” (The Unfinished System 21). The impossible—where knowledge ends and where sovereign laughter breaks out—must have its place when Regarding the Pain of Others, when reading these war photographic exposures of pain, suffering, and death. However, such sovereign laughter has been repressed in Sontag’s account of the pain of others, where for her, the only morally sanctioned sentiments appear to be mourning and memorializing and where any other response is viewed as disrespectful or morally suspect. Faced with such images, Sontag writes: “No one after a certain age has the right to this kind of innocence, of superficiality, to this degree of ignorance, or amnesia. There now exists a vast repository of images that make it harder to maintain this kind of moral defectiveness” (Regarding 114-115). But from Bataille’s perspective, an account that takes these images as deadly serious and that seeks to learn from them leads only to mental servitude. One sees again how Sontag’s Regarding cannot extricate herself from Hegelian dialectics as she disregards Bataille’s sovereign insistence that “[t]aking death seriously tends one toward servitude” (The Unfinished System 254).
     
    In contrast, Bataille reinscribes the concept of ignorance in terms of the (non)concept of nonknowledge. Bataille addresses this point at the conclusion of “Nonknowledge, Laughter, and Tears” in his discussion of Ernest Hemingway’s writings. “In any case, it seems to me that if what is seductive about Hemingway, which is connected to ignorance, might be attained by us, it can only be attained on one condition, that of having first been to the end of the possibilities of knowing. It is only beyond knowledge, perhaps in the nonknowledge that I have presented, that we could conquer the right to ignorance” (The Unfinished System 150). While Sontag’s ignorance bespeaks of an innocence to which no one has a right anymore, Bataille’s is a second naivete that we must earn the right to have once again. Bataille’s ignorance is not constituted by the gaps within knowledge that are waiting to be filled. Instead, ignorance comes from “having first been to the end of the possibilities of knowing” (150). It is something derived from coming up against the limits of knowledge (as a limit experience), and it can in no way be considered as a moral defect. In contrast to Sontag’s version, ignorance of the type that goes beyond knowledge inhabits this photographic discourse of death and the sovereign loss of its meaning by necessity, and it is in a state of such ignorance that an anguished laughter bursts out. For the consequences of nonknowledge lead to the reversal of any grim apprehension of these images. In “The Consequences of Nonknowledge,” Bataille babbles: “Faced with nonknowledge, I experienced the feeling of performing in a comedy, of having a kind of weakness in my position. At the same time, I am in front of you as a babbler, offering all the reasons I would have for keeping my mouth shut” (The Unfinished System 115). Unlike Sontag’s Regarding, Bataille looks to these deathly images in terms of an ethics of the impossible and risks bringing together nonknowledge, laughter, and tears.20
     
    The comically repressed returns with a vengeance, however, at the end of Regarding the Pain of Others. For the photographic encounter with nonknowledge and the question of sovereign laughter (laughing at nothing) invades Sontag’s final analysis of Jeff Wall’s theatrical tableau, Dead Troops Talk (A vision after an ambush of a Red Army patrol, near Moqor, Afghanistan, winter 1986), 1992. Interestingly enough, Dead Troops Talk is the only avowedly fictional and staged photograph that is analyzed in the book, and perhaps this is what gives Sontag the license to speculate and to imagine at the limits and to move beyond the “truth-telling” approach to photography that guides her reading of the lingchi images and of the numerous photojournalistic images that depict the horrors of war. But before turning to a closer analysis of Wall’s image, it is necessary to review (and to question) Sontag’s theorization of the photograph and her arguments as to why and how the photograph offers a privileged mode of representation. Sontag emphasizes here that Bataille’s object of contemplation is a photograph rather than a painting, an indexical trace of the real rather than an iconic likeness governed by mimesis, and she consciously differentiates it from Titian’s mythological painting of The Flaying of Marsyas (ca. 1575). It is “a photograph, not a painting; a real Marsyas, not a mythic one—and still alive in the picture” (Regarding 98). It could be argued that the sobriety of Sontag’s account is derived in large part from her assumptions about photographs as bearers and witnesses of the truth of the world and in providing documentary evidence of its atrocities. It also should be noted that Sontag asserts this point of view in spite of the fact that she recounts a few well-known historical examples of manipulated war photographs in the book. But Sontag’s discussion of Alexander Gardner’s Home of a Rebel Sharpshooter, Gettysburg (1863) and of other staged images is still predicated on the assumption that the photograph is indexical of truth. So while we may be “surprised to learn [that] they were staged, and always disappointed” (Regarding 55), the existence of such images in no way challenges the view that even these photographs are tied to the (falsified) real. Sontag asserts that the superiority of photography over painting and other earlier modes of representation is derived from its status as a physical trace and that this is particularly important when dealing with the remembrance of things past and in respect to the dead. “Ever since cameras were invented in 1839, photography has kept company with death. Because an image produced with a camera is, literally, a trace of something brought before the lens, photographs were superior to any painting as a memento of the vanished past and the dear departed” (Regarding 24).
     
    In keeping company with death in this way, photography forges our being-in-common and utters the truth of community. This recalls Jean-Luc Nancy’s definition of community in (and of) The Inoperative Community. Nancy writes, “A community is the presentation to its members of their mortal truth” (15). In recalling death as the (groundless) ground of community, photographic theory that is responsive to such “community exposed photography” affords another approach. This is a point of view that is less concerned with Sontag’s emphasis on indexical reference and much more interested in photography as that which exposes the limits of our knowing. An expository approach to photography, with its emphasis on exposure (as being posed in exteriority), provides being-in-common with both the medium of its sharing and the incompleteness of its sharing. In The Tears of Eros, Bataille moves away from indexical concerns (e.g., the acknowledgement of the veracity of photographic representation) toward the way in which these images of torture touch him in a visceral way and expose him to the anguish and intoxication of the mortal truth of community. Such an exposure is accompanied by a distribution of the sensible that fails to make sense. Confronted by this state of unknowing, Bataille comments that “this straightforward image of a tortured man” opens up “the most anguishing of worlds accessible to us through images captured on film” (Tears 205). These Chinese torture photographs foreground for Bataille the experience of limits situated at the precipice of non-knowledge, laughter, and tears. They leave us with question marks and lay bare the disquieting magnitude of a horror at the heart of being human that remains very difficult to accept or comprehend fully. Contemplating the same torture photographs in Guilty, Bataille asks rhetorically: “Who can accept that a horror of this magnitude would express ‘what you are’ and lay bare your nature?” (39).21 While Sontag’s book certainly does review how images of war and torture induce a range of emotions from horror to numbness to compassion, such considerations move analysis away from the concrete moral knowledge obtained from the contemplation of these images as photographic indices. In contrast to Bataille’s naked exposures of a loss or surplus of meaning, Sontag’s focus on (and regarding of) the pain of others seeks to make sense of suffering and loss and to ask “What to do with such knowledge as photographs bring of faraway suffering” (Regarding 99).
     
    In reviewing Sontag’s writings on photography, one notices that Regarding the Pain of Others is just one of a number of occasions when Sontag relies on a medium-specific binary opposition between painting and photography and in a way that privileges photography and its relationship to truth or reality. In “The Heroism of Vision,” Sontag offers the conventional wisdom that the photograph represents the truth that painterly mimesis cannot hope to capture, locating the basis for this position in nineteenth-century discourses and aligning this belief with the ethics of realism found in both “literary models” and “independent journalism.” Sontag writes:
     

    The consequences of lying have to be more central for photography than they ever can be for painting, because the flat, usually rectangular images which are photographs make a claim to be true that paintings can never make. A fake painting (one whose attribution is false) falsifies the history of art. A fake photograph (one which has been retouched or tampered with, or whose caption is false) falsifies reality. The history of photography could be recapitulated as the struggle between two different imperatives: beautification, which comes from the fine arts, and truth-telling, which is measured not only by a notion of value-free truth, a legacy from the sciences, but by a moralized ideal of truth-telling, adapted from nineteenth-century literary models and from the (then) new profession of independent journalism.”
     

    (On Photography 86)

     

    Here Sontag opens up photography to the larger discursive spaces of the nineteenth century and argues that it shares the space of “truth telling” with the empirical sciences, investigative reporting, literary realism, and the disciplinary practice of history itself. All of these discourses share a belief in the transparency of their signifiers (whether using language, laboratory equipment, or images) to access the truth of the real. In delivering the physical trace of the referent in its images, photographic realism again grounds its claims to truth telling in its indexical status. By insisting upon the further dichotomy between “beautification” (derived from the fine arts) and “truth-telling” (derived from the sciences), Sontag finds yet another way to contrast photography and painting and to reinforce the binary opposition between the photographic index and the painterly icon.

     
    This semiotic distinction between photographs and paintings as two distinct types of signs has its source and fullest expression in the writings of Charles Saunders Peirce at the end of the nineteenth century. Peirce differentiates photographs from mimetic likenesses or icons because photos are direct emanations and/or physical traces of the referent. Peirce writes, “this resemblance is due to the photographs having been produced under such circumstances that they were physically forced to correspond point by point to nature. In that aspect, then, they belong to the second class of signs, those by physical connection” (106). As smoke is to fire or as a footprint is to the foot that deposited it, so is the photograph to its reference. In “The Image World,” Sontag alludes directly to one of Peirce’s examples and adds another of her own (in a way that furthers the relationship of photography and death) as she again privileges the photograph over painting on account of the material structure of the trace.
     

    [A] photograph is not only an image (as a painting is an image), an interpretation of the real; it is also a trace, something directly stenciled off the real, like a footprint or a death mask. While a painting, even one that meets photographic standards of resemblance, is never more than the stating of an interpretation, a photograph is never less than the registering of an emanation (light waves reflected by objects)—a material vestige of its subject in a way that no painting can be.
     

    (On Photography 154)

     

    From a postmodern perspective, this is a bold and dangerous claim because it would keep photography immune from Nietzsche’s famous dictum that there are “no facts, only interpretations” by granting it a sacred space of registration and emanation that is somehow exempt from either a logic of mediation or an ideological contest of positions. Nietzsche’s dictum is useful for challenging any dogmatic acceptance of photographic facts because it insists that the facticity ascribed to photography by Sontag on account of its indexical status is virtually meaningless without its immediate immersion into a field of interpretative contexts and possibilities. One can apply Nietzsche’s query in The Genealogy of Morals to Sontag as follows: “What does that mean? For this fact has to be interpreted: in itself it just stands there, stupid to all eternity, like every ‘thing-in-itself’” (107). The invocation of Nietzsche here is also particularly apt for a critique of the author of Regarding the Pain of Others in that Nietzsche does not believe that even pain is immune from the work (and play) of interpretation and the specificity of context. To recite The Genealogy of Morals, “I consider even ‘psychological pain’ to be not a fact but only an interpretation” (129). With an absolute insistence on the photograph as the material trace of the absent referent, Sontag uses the medium of photography to make a claim about knowledge (and certainty) that is a far cry from Nietzsche’s ongoing suspicion of the claim to the noumenon (and the numinous) or from Bataille’s incessant and insistent practice of unknowing. The aforementioned quotation from Sontag, with its privileging of photography over painting on the grounds of indexical registration and emanation, would also be rather troubling to Bataille in light of his views on sovereignty and loss. It is as if Sontag wants to use this presumption about the certainty of the index as a means to catapult discussion about photography beyond troubling questions that come with representation and the opening of a necessary gap between the referent and the indexical trace. But there always has to be an excess of or loss in photographic representation, and one can argue that this is exactly the type of irreducible loss that defines the sovereignty that is championed by Bataille. As Uziel Awret puts it, “For Batailles [sic], ‘sovereignty’ denotes a form of theoretical thinking that accounts for the irreducible loss in representation and meaning that any representation entails” (28-29). The fact that Sontag remains immune to the possibility of such a contamination of the real and its transparency by the apparatus of representation points to the ultimately modernist presuppositions of her photo-critical project in Regarding the Pain of Others.

     
    Another pressure on the truth claims that Sontag attributes to the photographic index has come with the rise of digital photography. Digital media are closely connected to a painterly and iconic mode of rendering even if they visually simulate the indexical signs of photographic media. This relation has been widely theorized by writers on digital photography such as Florian Rötzer, Lev Manovich, and Peter Lunenfeld. Lunenfeld’s essay “Art Post-History: Digital Photography and Electronic Semiotics” is particularly relevant for this discussion because he specifically takes up this rupture with the Peircean legacy in the section “Semiotics, Photography & Truth Value of the Electronic Image.” Lunenfeld argues, “The inherent mutability of the digital image poses a challenge to those who have striven to create a semiotic of the photographic” (94). Taking his cue from Hollis Frampton and putting pressure on indexical truth, Lunenfeld invokes the phrase “dubitative” (or inclined to doubt) to characterize the digital image and its reinsertion of the painterly icon into photography. “What has happened to this class of signs, and to the semiotics of the image in general, with the advent of digital photography? With electronic imaging, the digital photographic apparatus approaches what Hollis Frampton refers to as painting’s ‘dubitative’ processes: like the painter, the digital photographer ‘fiddles around with the picture till it looks right’” (95). The rhetoric of the dubitatively digital and the doubt it tends to produce would appear to be more in line with Bataille’s affirmation of nonknowledge and his suspicion of “a certain stability of things known” (The Unfinished System 133).
     

     
    Jeff Wall, Dead Troops Talk (a vision after an ambush of a Red Army patrol, near Moqor, Afghanistan, winter 1986). 1992. Silver dye bleach transparency in aluminum lightbox, 229 x 417 cm. © Jeff Wall. Courtesy of the artist.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 2.

    Jeff Wall, Dead Troops Talk (a vision after an ambush of a Red Army patrol, near Moqor, Afghanistan, winter 1986). 1992. Silver dye bleach transparency in aluminum lightbox, 229 x 417 cm. © Jeff Wall. Courtesy of the artist.

     

     

    Returning to Jeff Wall’s Dead Troops Talk, it is important to point out that the artist has used digital photography for many years and that this particular image evinces its dubitative quality and iconic characteristics. The digital aspect of Dead Troops Talk must be stressed over and above the overt staging and theatricality of this famous 7 ½ × 13 feet photograph, displayed in a light box, that resonates with the genre of grand history paintings. Breaking with the rhetoric of the index, Wall discusses the “hallucinatory image that [he] wanted to make” in a recent interview. He confesses that “this was one of the first or second things that I ever did with a computer” and that it was “photographing things that could never have happened” so that it became a “kind of a release of all the constraints of the actual photography.”22Dead Troops Talk is also described in the recent Tate Modern retrospective on Wall’s photography as follows: “The figures were photographed separately or in small groups and the final image was assembled as a digital montage.”23 While Sontag refers to Dead Troops Talk as “the antithesis of a document” (123) in Regarding the Pain of Others, she does not mention that digital manipulation is part and parcel of its fabrication. This oversight further illustrates that while Sontag can acknowledge the constructed nature of this photograph (because this does not challenge the index, only suggesting that some photographers do lie), she does not acknowledge that Dead Troops Talk is actually a digital photograph because of the risks that the dubitatively iconic image brings to the truth claims of the indexical photograph.

     
    Jeff Wall’s photograph stages a ghastly scenario where Soviet soldiers killed in an ambush in the war in Afghanistan in the mid-eighties seem to rise up from the dead to speak of the horrors of war. In looking at Wall’s image, one is reminded of Bataille’s “The Practice of Joy Before Death” and its affirmation of an explosive laughter that cannot recuperate violence, destruction, and general havoc. One overhears a divine laughter capable of affirming its own demise and ruin when Bataille writes the following: “There are explosives everywhere that perhaps will soon blind me. I laugh when I think that my eyes persist in demanding objects that do not destroy them” (Visions of Excess 239).24 In this hallucinatory vision, one sees the dead soldiers talking, joking, and laughing with each other. One of these ghoulish characters even holds up a rat to the face of his companion as if to underscore that one must laugh in the face of death. But Sontag’s review of Dead Troops Talk avoids the mention of any such prankster antics on the part of the dead troops and offers a more somber reading that is devoid of Bataille’s anguished gaiety. While touching on the impossible and on the limits of saying, Sontag imagines for us what Wall’s “stupor troopers” would say about the horrors of war if they were to return to the land of the living. She does this by staging an archetypical scene that founds community around the death of others, which recalls Maurice Blanchot’s idea that “[i]f the community is revealed by the death of the other person, it is because death is itself the true community of mortal beings: their impossible communion” (11). But in stark contrast to Jean-Luc Nancy’s “inoperative community” and its resistance to the communal fusion of the mass subject, Sontag assumes the voice of being-in-common such that she becomes the medium that channels these dead talkers. (This is a doubly ironic scene when one considers that an image has been asked to do the talking.) Paradoxically, Sontag intervenes to speak their silence and to speak for all of us in this rather totalizing and presumptuous gesture: “What would they have to say to us? ‘We’—this ‘we’ is everyone who has never experienced anything like what they went through—don’t understand. We don’t get it. We truly can’t imagine what it was like. We can’t imagine how dreadful, how terrifying war is; and how normal it becomes” (Regarding 125-126). Finally, the communication cuts off so that Sontag’s transmissions from the dead break down and lose their subjects: “Can’t understand. Can’t imagine” (126). From Bataille’s perspective, Sontag’s gesture is a classic pedagogical ruse that plays at imagining what cannot be imagined (what comes from the dead), and that feigns and simulates the teaching of death from the land of the living. To recall Bataille’s remarks on this impossible subject: “We often imagine ourselves in the position of those who we see dying, but we can only justifiably do this on the condition of living” (The Unfinished System 119). Sontag turns from the dead to those lucky enough to be alive as she concludes: “Can’t understand. Can’t imagine. That’s what every soldier, and every journalist and aid worker and independent observer who has put in time under fire, and had the luck to elude the death that struck down others nearby, stubbornly feels. And they are right” (Regarding 126). Following Bataille and his laughter, the last sentence of Sontag’s book offers her final recuperation of the unimaginable (and its sovereignty) into the service of righteous knowledge (and its mastery).
     
    In these ravings from beyond the grave that signal the incommensurability between the living and the dead, between the photographic witness and the war victim, as well as between lordship/mastery and sovereignty, the death sentences of Dead Troops Talk on their loss of subjectivity recall another line from Bataille’s impossible text “The Teaching of Death” (1952). “Of course,” Bataille intones, “talking about death is the most profound practical joke” (119). One can only wonder what a different text Regarding the Pain of Others would have been if Sontag had incorporated here and elsewhere in her book the morbidly witty lesson of Dead Troops Talk as they touch upon the impossible and as they expose themselves and their viewers to Bataille’s triple threat of unknowing, laughter, and tears. What if a more self-ironic Susan Sontag had taken Georges Bataille’s and Jeff Wall’s profound lesson of nonknowledge to heart when writing about this image and about all the other images in the book classified as documentary photographs that cloak themselves in the “reality effect” of the index and, in this way, hold themselves sacrosanct? But these horrific images—for all their ethical demands and their calls for decisive action—cannot defend themselves against the debilitating effects of unknowledge and the surge of derision (and indecision) that they bring in their wake and in their unworking. Thus Bataille’s unknowing and his anguished gaiety ponder the profound practical joke that has been played on Sontag’s Regarding. “Reflection on death is much more seriously derisive than living, it is always scattering our attention, and we speak in vain about exerting ourselves, when death is at stake” (119).
     

    Louis Kaplan is Associate Professor of history and theory of photography and new media at the University of Toronto and Director of the Institute of Communication and Culture at the University of Toronto Mississauga. His books include Laszlo Moholy-Nagy: Biographical Writings (1995), American Exposures: Photography and Community (2005), and The Strange Case of William Mumler, Spirit Photographer (2008). He is co-editing (with John Paul Ricco) “Regarding Jean-Luc Nancy” as a special issue of the Journal of Visual Culture (April 2010). Another essay, on “Bataille’s Laughter,” is forthcoming in John Welchman, ed., Black Sphinx: On the Comedic in Modern Art (J.R.P./Ringier).
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. While one might see the criticism of a popular intellectual like Susan Sontag as too easy a target for the postmodern and poststructuralist arsenal deployed here, it is important not to underestimate Sontag’s influence in contemporary debates in post 9/11 visual culture regarding images of war and terror. This essay joins a number of recent texts by important voices that have encountered (and countered) Sontag in scholarly journals. These include Judith Butler (2005), Karen Beckman (2009), Manisha Basu (2006), and Herta Wolf (2007). Of these accounts, it should be noted that only Herta Wolf’s “The Tears of Photography” takes up Sontag’s reading of Bataille and the lingchi images. Wolf takes Sontag to task for “ignoring the sequential nature of this portrayal of torture” as well as ignoring “her own postulated obligation to critically assess her reception of images of torture” (75). More importantly, Wolf emphasizes the “horrifying laughter” (77) provoked by these images for Bataille in the section of her essay entitled “Agony and Laughter.” The ambivalent combination “of laughter and mourning” (77) as opposites that do not contradict each other drops out of Sontag’s reading completely; this is one of the prime movers of the present essay.

     

     
    2. Sontag addresses the Abu Ghraib photographs in her 2004 essay “Regarding the Torture of Others.”

     

     
    3. Eduardo Cadava’s keynote address, “Palm Reading: Fazal Sheikh’s Handbook of Death,” was delivered at The Photograph Conference in Winnipeg, Canada on March 11, 2004. I return to death’s problematic pedagogy—for both teaching and learning—at the conclusion of this essay.

     

     
    4. This linkage is at the basis of such key photo-theoretical texts as Barthes’s Camera Lucida: Reflections on Photography and Cadava’s Words of Light: Theses on the Photography of History.

     

     
    5. Influenced by the thinking of Jean-Luc Nancy, I have explored photography as a discourse of exposure that exposes our being-in-common and in relation to death and finitude, thereby opening a Bataillian space of nonknowledge, in American Exposures: Photography and Community in the Twentieth Century (2005). I refer to this expository approach to photography at various points in order to contrast it with Sontag’s emphasis on the index. For a further analysis of the challenge to the index offered to theorists like Bazin and Sontag by Nancy’s thinking, see my forthcoming essay “Photograph/Death Mask: Jean-Luc Nancy’s Recasting of the Photographic Image.”

     

     
    6. The source of the reference to “absolute dismemberment” comes from Hegel’s The Phenomenology of Spirit. Bataille quotes the master: “Spirit attains its truth only by finding itself in absolute dismemberment” (18).

     

     
    7. I have benefited greatly from Arkady Plotnitsky’s essay, “Effects of the Unknowable: Materialism, Epistemology, and the General Economy of the Body in Bataille” (2001). This includes his nuanced delineation of Bataille’s non-concepts (e.g., sovereignty, general economy, and unknowledge) as well as a rigorous attention to Bataille’s writings as an “encounter with the impossible” (17).

     

     
    8. Plotnitsky also points out that Bataille’s “general economy entails a deployment of restricted economy” (21) because there is no such thing as “purely unproductive expenditure” (22). See Bataille, The Accursed Share (Vol. 1) 12. In this way, one avoids the misunderstanding that Bataille’s thought is “uncritically idealizing expenditure, loss, and so forth” (22).

     

     
    9. Nancy concludes with the insistence that rather than merely scoff at the meaninglessness of Bataille’s project of unknowing, one should read and savor the words of Bataille’s exscripted text for “the absolute meaning of their nonsignification” (65).

     

     
    10. See the comprehensive website devoted to “Chinese Torture/Supplice chinois: Iconographic, Historical, and Literary Approaches to an Exotic Representation at http://turandot.ish-lyon.cnrs.fr/ [accessed January 11, 2009]. In addition to the reproduction of the infamous images that are under consideration here, two of Jérôme Bourgon’s essays discuss Bataille in particular. See “Bataille et le supplicié chinois: erreurs sur la personne” and “Photographing ‘Chinese Torture.’”

     

     
    11. Bataille’s Les Larmes d’Eros was originally published by Editions J-J. Pauvert in Paris in 1961.

     

     
    12. I address the question of “Bataille’s Laughter” extensively in an essay in Black Sphinx: On the Comedic in Modern Art. Ed. John Welchman.

     

     
    13. Here I follow Derrida’s analysis of Bataille’s sovereign operation in “From Restricted to General Economy: A Hegelianism Without Reserve.” Derrida ponders, “Thus it must simulate, after a fashion, the absolute risk, and it must laugh at this simulacrum” (256). Laughter in the face of death and the impossible is crucial to Derrida’s analysis of Bataille’s (non)concept of sovereignty and of the way it exceeds lordship/mastery. I will return to this point in greater detail below.

     

     
    14. In the section of Les Larmes d’Eros entitled “Supplice Chinois,” Bataille writes in the original French: “Ce fut à cette occasion que je discernai, dans la violence de cette image, une valeur infinie de renversement” (Oeuvres completes X 627).

     

     
    15. This is the famous formulation that concludes the third volume of The Accursed Share and that sets sovereignty on the path of the impossible. “The main thing is always the same: sovereignty is NOTHING.”

     

     
    16. Derrida situates the laughable situation in which sovereignty finds itself. To fill in the passage previously cited, “Laughter, which constitutes sovereignty in its relation to death, is not a negativity, as has been said. And it laughs at itself, a ‘major’ laughter laughs at a ‘minor’ laughter, for the sovereign operation also needs life—the life that welds the two lives together—in order to be in relation to itself in the pleasurable consumption of itself. Thus, it must simulate, after a fashion, the absolute risk, and it must laugh at this simulacrum” (256).

     

     
    17. “The hallucinatory appearance of these photographs … is due—perhaps because of the injection of doses of opium—to the fact that the victim looks ‘ravished’ and ecstatic” (Surya 94).

     

     
    18. In an e-mail to the author on November 12, 2004, James Elkins writes that his own research “traces the origin of that ‘(?)’ in [Georges] Dumas’s text.” Elkins is referring here to the French psychologist George Dumas’s discussion and publication of two of the lingchi images in his Traité de psychologie. Bataille notes in The Tears of Eros that “one of these shots was reproduced in Georges Dumas’s Traité de psychologie” and that “Dumas insists upon the ecstatic appearance of the victim’s expression” (205). Elkins depicts and discusses another set of lingchi photographs in The Object Stares Back, 108-115.

     

     
    19. Bataille, “Method of Meditation,” in The Unfinished System of Knowledge, 83. This definition coincides with Jacques Derrida’s reading of the ecstatic in Bataille as the eruption “of sovereign speech” which is not to be understood as the attainment of another discourse but rather an acknowledgment of the necessary blindspots that open up every discourse to the loss of its own meaning to the extent that Bataille’s writing becomes the commentary on its own absence of meaning. For Derrida, “The poetic or the ecstatic is that in every discourse which can open itself up to the absolute loss of its sense, to the (non-)base of the sacred, of nonmeaning, of un-knowledge or of play” (261). One notes here Bataille’s insistence that the sacred is also located at the limit (or the beyond) of knowledge. If the sacred is linked to ecstasy (or to Sontag’s “sacrifice to exaltation”), this is not to be conflated in any way with the attainment of any knowledge of the sacred, for these are dependent upon extreme acts of transgression that entail the loss of meaning. If this were not the case, then such a move would threaten to collapse Bataille’s sovereignty into Hegel’s lordship yet again.

     

     
    20. Bataille’s important lecture was delivered on February 9, 1953 at the Collège Philosophique in Paris.

     

     
    21. This passage begins with a description of the torture images from the subject position of the executioner (i.e., from the sadistic point of view) and it marks the intertwining of photography and haunting. “The Chinese executioner of my photo haunts me: there he is busily cutting off his victim’s leg at the knee. The victim is bound to a stake, eyes turned up, head thrown back, and through a grimacing mouth you see teeth. The blade’s entering the flesh at the knee” (Guilty 38-39).

     

     
    22. Wall is quoted in Peter Darbyshire. For the on-line version of the part of the interview that deals with Dead Troops Talk, see http://cancult.ca/2008/05/27/the-globe-talks-to-jeff-wall/ [accessed January 11, 2009].

     

     
    23. This text and image is found on the website for the retrospective exhibition at the Tate Modern in London entitled Jeff Wall Photographs 1978-2004. See www.tate.org.uk/modern/exhibitions/jeffwall/rooms/room8.shtm [accessed January 11, 2009].

     

     
    24. This was originally published in Acéphale V (June 1939): 1-8. Bataille makes a similar point in “Nonknowledge, Laughter, and Tears.” “The strangest mystery to be found in laughter is attached to the fact that we rejoice in something that puts the equilibrium of life in danger. We even rejoice in the strongest way” (144).
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Awret, Uziel. “Las Meninas and the Search for Self-Representation.” Journal of Consciousness Studies 15. 9 (2008): 7-34. <http://www.imprint.co.uk/pdf/Awret.pdf> Web. 15 Aug. 2009.
    • Barthes, Roland. Camera Lucida: Reflections on Photography. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Hill and Wang, 1981. Print.
    • Basu, Manisha. “The Hamartia of Light and Shadow: Susan Sontag in the Digital Age.” Postmodern Culture 16. 3 (2006). Web.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Bataille, Georges. The Accursed Share: An Essay on General Economy. Vol. 1. Consumption. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Zone Books, 1988. Print.
    • —. The Accursed Share. Volumes II & III. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Zone Books, 1993. Print.
    • —. Erotism: Death and Sensuality. Trans. Mary Dalwood. San Francisco: City Lights Books, 1986. Print.
    • —. Guilty. Trans. Bruce Boone. Venice: Lapis Press, 1988. Print.
    • —. “Hegel, Death and Sacrifice.” Yale French Studies 78 (1990): 9-28. Web.
    • —. The Inner Experience. Trans. Leslie Anne Boldt. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1988. Print.
    • —. Les Larmes d’Eros. Paris: Jean-Jacques Pauvert, 1961. Print.
    • —. Oeuvres complètes, Vol. X. L’érotisme – Le procès de Gilles de Rais – Les larmes d’Eros. Paris: Gallimard, 1987. Print.
    • —. The Tears of Eros. Trans. Peter Connor. San Francisco: City Lights Books, 1989. Print.
    • —. The Unfinished System of Nonknowledge. Trans. Michelle Kendall and Stuart Kendall. Minneapolis: The University of Minnesota Press, 2001.Print.
    • Beckman, Karen. “Nothing to Say: The War on Terror and the Mad Photography of Roland Barthes.” Grey Room 34 (2009): 104-134. Web.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Blanchot, Maurice. The Unavowable Community. Trans. Pierre Joris. Barrytown: Station Hill Press, 1988. Print.
    • Borch-Jacobsen, Mikkel. “The Laughter of Being.” MLN 102. 4 (1987): 737-760. Web.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Bourgon, Jérôme. “Chinese Torture/Supplice chinois: Iconographic, Historical, and Literary Approaches of an Exotic Representation.” <http://turandot.ish-lyon.cnrs.fr/> Web. 11 Jan. 2009.
    • Butler, Judith. “Photography, War, Outrage.” PMLA 120. 3 (2005): 822-827. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Cadava, Eduardo. Words of Light: Theses on the Photography of History. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1998. Print.
    • Carpeaux, Louis. Pékin qui s’en va. Paris: Maloine, 1913. Print.
    • Darbyshire, Peter. “Vancouver artist Jeff Wall Discusses Five of His Better Known Works.” The Toronto Globe and Mail, 27 May 2008. <http://cancult.ca/2008/05/27/the-globe-talks-to-jeff-wall/> Web. 11 Jan. 2009.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1978. Print.
    • Dumas, Georges. Traité de psychologie. Paris: Félix Alcan, 1923-4. Print.
    • Elkins, James. The Object Stares Back: On the Nature of Seeing. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1996. Print.
    • Kaplan, Louis. American Exposures: Photography and Community in the Twentieth Century. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2005. Print.
    • —. “Bataille’s Laughter.” Black Sphinx: On the Comedic in Modern Art. Ed. John Welchman. Zurich: J.R.P/Ringier, forthcoming 2010. Print.
    • —. “Photograph/Death Mask: Jean-Luc Nancy’s Recasting of the Photographic Image.” Journal of Visual Culture (forthcoming April 2010). Web.
    • Lunenfeld, Peter. “Art Post-History: Digital Photography and Electronic Semiotics.” Photography after Photography: Memory and Representation in the Digital Age. Ed. Hubertus v. Amelunxen. Amsterdam: G+B Arts, 1996. 92-98. Print.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. “Exscription.” Yale French Studies 78 (1990): 47-65. Web.
    • —. The Inoperative Community. Ed. and Trans. Peter Connor. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1991. Print.
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. On the Genealogy of Morals. Trans. Walter Kauffman. New York: Vintage Books, 1989. Print.
    • Peirce, Charles Sanders. “Logic as Semiotic: The Theory of Signs.” Philosophic Writings of C.S. Peirce. New York: Dover Publications, 1955. <http://www.iupui.edu/~peirce/ep/ep2/ep2book/ch02/ch02.htm> Web. Jan. 11, 2009.
    • Plotnitsky, Arkady. “Effects of the Unknowable: Materialism, Epistemology, and the General Economy of the Body in Bataille.” Parallax 7.1 (2001): 16-28. Web.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Sontag, Susan. On Photography. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1977. Print.
    • —. Regarding the Pain of Others. New York: Farrar, Straus, and Giroux, 2003. Print.
    • —. “Regarding the Torture of Others.” New York Times Magazine 23 May 2004: 24-29, 42. Print.
    • —. Styles of Radical Will. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1969. Print.
    • —. Ed. Antonin Artaud: Selected Writings. New York: The Noonday Press, 1976. Print.
    • Surya, Michel. Georges Bataille: An Intellectual Biography. Trans. Krzysztof Fijalkowski and Michael Richardson. London: Verso, 2002. Print.
    • Tate Modern. Jeff Wall Photographs 1978-2004. 21 October 2005 – 8 January 2006. <http://www.tate.org.uk/modern/exhibitions/jeffwall/rooms/room8.shtm> Web. 11 Jan. 2009.
    • Wolf, Herta. “The Tears of Photography.” Grey Room 29 (Fall 2007): 66-89. Web.
    • [CrossRef]

     

    Illustrations

       

     

    • Figure 1. Anonymous, The Chinese Torture of One Hundred Cuts, ca. 1905.
    • Figure 2. Jeff Wall, Dead Troops Talk, 1991-1992. Silver dye bleach transparency in aluminum lightbox, 229 × 417 cm.

     

  • The Well and the Web: Phantoms of Community and the Mediatic Public Sphere

    John Culbert (bio)
    University of California at Irvine
    johnculbert@lycos.com

    Abstract
     
    “The Well and the Web” examines a number of media watershed events in which the sense of community in crisis, threatened by new technologies of communication, is expressed in sensationalistic dramas of young lives in mortal danger. From the advent of live TV news to the rise of web-based interactivity, the figure insistently invoked in such scenes of crisis is that of a girl fallen into a well. This theme is echoed in the recent films Ringu and The Ring, whose horror premise makes explicit the necropolitics (Mbembe) underpinning the conventional discourse of community and televisual spectatorship. Drawing on The Phantom Public Sphere (Robbins) and new media theory (Doane, Latham, Poster), I argue that the discourse of community and morality betrays a haunted logic that must engage with contemporary theories of virtuality and spectrality (Derrida). The horror genre’s tropes of the viral and the ghost provide the means to articulate a postmodern ethics of spectatorship that, attuned to trauma and the duplicity of discourse, can challenge necropolitics and extend hospitality to the phantoms that haunt the mediatic public sphere.
     

    I.

     

    What monstrous new being appears in the gaze of a person watching another at a computer that is connected to unknown, unseen, untold others?
     

    –Mark Poster

     
    San Marino, California, 1949. A little girl falls down a well. Rescue crews are soon on the scene, and for a grueling 52 hours, working night and day, they try to save the girl. News media cover the story as it unfolds, unaware, however, that they are covering not a rescue but an exhumation: the girl had in fact died before the cameras, crews and spectators arrived.
     
    The death of Kathy Fiscus is considered a watershed in media history, as this story was the first to be broadcast live, with uninterrupted coverage, for a full 27 hours, by television news. Transfixed viewers stayed up all night to follow the story, and the news sensation is credited with single-handedly boosting sales of TV sets, still a novelty to households in 1949. Hopes dimmed as the night wore on, and viewers began to fear the worst. The race against time, covered live and shared by viewers around the world, masked a bitter irony. The first live TV coverage was not live but belated; viewers were held in suspense not by the present, or even by a future revelation, but by the uncanny and retrospective temporality of what will have been. Live TV news is born in this Orphic turn that captures not the present instant but only a belated moment and a spectral presence. One can speak in this case of a paradoxically belated horror; the future anterior haunts the spectacle, and the moment of the girl’s death returns to haunt those who unknowingly participated in her wake. If we have inherited this haunted legacy of TV, we have not yet settled accounts with the ghost that was broadcast from San Marino.
     
    Today we see in the Kathy Fiscus story the first rehearsal of now-familiar staples of television: prurient coverage of “human interest” topics, exploitative violence, permanent distraction from politics, and passive consumption. It is indeed tempting to see this media-event as the origin of our sensationalistic mediascape. Looking back this way, however, we may only repeat the Orphic turn that haunted viewers in 1949. When did media come to saturate the public sphere? How to heal the breach that makes the live moment always doubled by its alienating spectacle? How to rescue the singular life broadcast from San Marino across the world? The race against time, the struggle of life against death turned out to be unfortunately “too late” for Kathy Fiscus. But a more unsettling belatedness haunts this story. This belated horror resembles that described by Roland Barthes in Camera Lucida as he pores over the photograph of a man condemned to death. Barthes is gripped by the convergence in the image of two disparate times: the man will die, and yet he has already died (96).1 Jacques Derrida refines this insight to claim that the poignancy of the photographic image lies in its status as impossible referent and evanescent presence. Speaking of Barthes’s punctum and its haunting temporality, Derrida asks, “is not Time the ultimate resource for the substitution of one absolute instant by another, for the replacement of the irreplaceable, the replacement of this unique referent by another that is yet another instant, completely other and yet still the same? Is not time the punctual form and force of all metonymy – its instant recourse?” (Mourning 60).2 Every moment, even “live,” Derrida suggests, is made spectral by this “resource” and “instant recourse”: whatever appears appears “as” itself, yet masking the instant duplication that haunts the image. There is no source, in this light, that is not a re-source. The well in San Marino is such a haunted source; what the viewers saw as the “tragedy” of Kathy’s death–thus fully narratable, if only by an abuse of genre–covers over the poignant and punctual re-source that always and already replaced her, as live television spectacle. As such, the Kathy Fiscus “story” is an allegory of television. Viewers were drawn into a spectacle that evoked primal fears and elementary struggles, but also the consolations of community reduced to the bare essentials of myth. Here at the well we seem to see the very source of community. The re-source of the well, however, escapes from view, making the viewer the haunted carrier of a visual secret, the poignant belatedness of the live image.
     
    The aim of this essay is to bring out ghosts that haunt community in such mediatic spectacles. In so doing, I articulate a notion of community that is expanded to a global scale. I explore the figure of the viral in tandem with that of the ghost to advance a theory of the ethics of spectatorship. The ghost, I argue, emerges as the figure of community’s impossibility, indexing a confrontation with what it both banishes and aims to manage, contain, and lay to rest. The death of Kathy Fiscus is an instructive example here; it brought together a community of viewers in a spectacle of death, a redemptive, if painful, experience of common loss. As we will see, this scenario, including its haunted well, is compulsively repeated in narratives of mediatic communities. This would seem to echo René Girard’s claim that social collectivities ground themselves in the sacrifice of one of their number. And yet behind the single victim of the spectacle there looms a vast number; it is worth noting that Kathy Fiscus was born August 21, 1945, a mere twelve days after the Nagasaki strike. The race to save the little girl’s life is shadowed in this way by a global necropolitical force that relegates other people’s lives to the category of collateral damage. It may seem ungenerous to ascribe such an anti-morality of survival to the well-meaning spectators of Kathy Fiscus’s story. And yet a necropolitical logic binds together the spectators of the events in San Marino. To defend life at home is not merely to hold death at bay, but to enforce the distinction between valuable and disposable lives. Moreover, as Dina Al-Kassim argues, the figure of the innocent girl victim provides a frequent and reliable “link between social consensus and repressive force” (52), by means of which the “cultural production of innocence” both infantilizes the public sphere and legitimates the state’s discriminatory policing of minorities (53). An illusion of community, a phantom public, is conjured in this blind act of necropolitical enforcement. This illusion of community is alternately a phantom public of mass mediatic spectacle, and the phantom of a global context, the untold millions who never amount to a story, but only haunt the edges of the scene as its blindly excluded.
     
    The TV reporter on the scene in San Marino, Stan Chambers, seems haunted by the events he covers. A young man at the time, this cheerful and popular reporter has never stopped paying his respects and giving credit to the little girl who made his name, indeed his “celebrity” (KTLA 31). His unfinished mourning indicates the burden of an unpaid debt. There is indeed an awkward, though fitting, irony in the fact that television would profitably extend its “news hole” into the night by continuing to cover the fatal story of a dark well. Sixty years later Chambers revisits the story in his autobiography. “The evolution of extended television news coverage happened overnight in that open field in San Marino,” the veteran reporter says (23); one newspaper credited his coverage as “one of the greatest reporting jobs in the history of television” (28). Chambers quotes from a letter he received following his reporting of the story:
     

    Until that night, the television was no more a threat to serenity than any other bit of furniture in the living room. Now you have utterly destroyed this safety forever …you and the epic which you have been part of this weekend have made us know what television is for. You have made many of us know that we belong to the world. Through your own dignity and your recognition of the dignity of others, you have given us a flash of people at their best, as we remember them in the battle, or as I’ve seen them at Negev outposts in Israel.
     

    (27–8)

     

    This letter, the only one Chambers cites from his files, is oddly ambiguous, thanking the reporter precisely for destroying the viewer’s safety and invading his home. Television, it would seem, is the gift of the Unheimlich. And while the letter proffers the lofty moral that “we belong to the world,” it concludes, awkwardly, with an heroic evocation of Zionist war. A fleeting insight into shared precariousness–accidents happen, we are all mortal, like Kathy Fiscus–inflates into an “epic,” and ultimately inverts into a valorization of armed conquest and colonization. The spectacle of community, of people gathered together around the well and around the TV set, morphs into that of a band of fighters facing a common enemy. While it was a common feature of the news of the time that the costs of the 1948 war went virtually unreported, what is less clear is how a book published in 2008 could skirt so casually over what many now understand to have been the ethnic cleansing of Palestine.3 We can only speculate that the author sees the Israeli context as somehow still “relevant” today–though surely not in the way he intends.

     
    A postwar necropolitics of American television news is sketched out here. Between the story of the girl in the well and the larger global scene there is a striking disparity in the valuing of human lives. In this, the news media support and broadcast the state’s management of what Talal Asad calls “the distribution of pain” (508). One might add that it is local media–here, the provincial Los Angeles media–that best performs this unequal distribution in its focus on stories of local “human interest.” But this local focus only exacerbates the contradiction opened up by the extended reach of television, its widening news hole, and the global scene. This other scene haunts the spectacle of the girl in the well, for while a common accord binds together the spectators in hoping to save the girl, the very definitions of the “local” and of “community” are implicitly thrown into crisis. What rises to the level of a television “story”? Who deserves saving? And can community cohere where the audience expands beyond the local? It would seem that only the figure of an innocent white girl can suspend these contradictions, if only for a moment.4 But in so doing, the televisual public sphere reveals itself, in Alexander Kluge’s words, as a “universal provincialism,” claiming to encompass all voices yet blind to its constitutive exclusions (Liebman 44).
     
    These exclusions are subtly perpetuated even in what seem the most humane expressions of cosmopolitan fraternity. As one editorial of the time has it, “A little girl falls down a well in California and the news sweeps across oceans, waking untold millions to eager, anxious sympathy” (Chambers 29). We may recognize here the postwar American discourse of “The Great Family of Man” ironized by Barthes’s critique of media and consumer culture, Mythologies (100). Barthes shows how hypocritical sentimentality and gross abstractions of shared humanity serve to elide more concrete issues of history and politics. Barthes’s diagnoses still resonate with a broad range of arguments, most notably those of Jürgen Habermas, that media, merchandising and ideology have corrupted the public sphere. As critics of Habermas have pointed out, however, the notion of the death of the public, or a “phantom public sphere,” often grounds its critique in the nostalgic premise of an ideal state of communication that is questionable if not unfounded (Robbins viii). On the other hand, as these authors have argued, the idea of a “phantom public,” to be taken seriously, may help account for the elusive promise and phantasmatic potential of public discourse as a field of subversion, emancipation and desire. Beyond the discourse of communicative norms and nostalgia for community, such a notion of a phantom public lays bare the contradictions and exclusions that sustain the public as a vital illusion. These two versions of the phantom public reflect the main schism in leftist cultural studies: the Adornian indictment of mass culture as thoroughly complicit in the economics of exploitation, and the search for dissident and emancipatory forces within the society of the spectacle. This argument is potentially endless, given that the two sides tend not toward a dialectical synthesis but to the stalemate of a liberal politics exemplified by the collection edited by Bruce Robbins, The Phantom Public Sphere.
     
    Other ghosts, however, haunt the phantom public, and the catastrophic legacy of the Kathy Fiscus story is carried on even by media’s sharpest critics. Mary Ann Doane, for instance, argues that live TV coverage is intimately linked to the spectacle of catastrophe. “The lure of the real” sustains TV’s claim to “urgency” and “liveness,” but in so doing exposes its own failings as a medium devoted to “forgetting” and “decontextualization.” As Doane says, “the ultimate drama of the instantaneous–catastrophe–constitutes the very limit of its discourse” (“Information,” 222). Doane invokes Tom Brokaw’s coverage of the Challenger disaster, a live report complete with unscripted moments that fall in the lineage of Stan Chambers’s original broadcast.5 “It is not that we have a ghoulish curiosity,” Brokaw lamely apologizes, as he reruns the disaster footage (232). Live TV, Doane argues, is drawn to events that defy representation, which in turn reinforces the medium’s occlusion of deeper causes and political contexts that remain unrepresented. In this sense, then, the spectacle of catastrophe is a turning away from politics and the systemic causes of disaster. Doane thus contributes to an understanding of how capitalism exploits crisis as opportunity, indeed thrives on sheer catastrophe: a condition that has more recently been dubbed the “shock doctrine” (Klein). Interestingly, however, Doane’s essay betrays a similar turning away, as if TV’s fascinating “catastrophe machine” draws the critic into its own specular economy (234). “The Challenger coverage,” Doane says, “demonstrates just how nationalistic the apprehension of catastrophe is–our own catastrophes are always more important, more eligible for extended reporting than those of other nations. But perhaps even more crucial here was the fact that television itself was on the scene–witness to the catastrophe” (231). For Doane, the crucial issue lies in TV’s participation as mediatic witness of the disaster; live TV thus reveals its problematic entanglement in a general state of political-economic crisis it fails to account for. However, Doane’s claim that the presence of cameras on the scene is “even more crucial” than the show’s nationalistic bent is almost tautological, since it inadvertently reinforces the “always more important” choices critiqued in the foregoing sentence. Doane clearly does not condone those editorial choices, but she makes her own dubious decision as to what is most “important” in the scene, and in so doing, skirts the vital function of the spectacle in supporting the “distribution of pain.” As a result, Doane enacts the very “slippage” she indexes in her definition of the catastrophic media event: “There is often a certain slippage between the notion that television covers important events in order to validate itself as a medium and the idea that because an event is covered by television–because it is, in effect, deemed televisual–it is important” (222). The slippage on the critic’s part seems to follow the fateful lure of TV’s supposedly self-reflexive nature, and demonstrates how media criticism can reinforce the closed loop of TV’s self-interested perspective: “television,” Doane says, “incessantly takes as its subject the documentation and revalidation of its own discursive problematic” (226).
     
    In contrast to Doane, we might assert that the catastrophic spectacle is not a postmodern exemplum of the media-event, but rather the symptom of a technological monopoly that turns eyes inward and away from the global scene. Further, that global scene is not an additional scene that cannot fit into the broadcast slot or the critic’s commentary, but its haunting double, always present if only as lapses and asides. Doane’s own lapse may seem minor, but it is symptomatic; it may be seen as well in her reference to economic crisis: “Catastrophe makes concrete and immediate, and therefore deflects attention from, the more abstract horror of potential economic crisis” (237). Her reference to a deflected “potential economic crisis” itself deflects from catastrophe on the other scene, where crisis is not “abstract,” “intermittent,” or “potential,” but the actual realm of predatory capital; not the scene of the occasional NASA mishap, but the economic proving ground of the military-industrial complex. Doane goes so far as to say that “economic crisis does not appear to meet any of the criteria of the true catastrophe. It is not punctual but of some duration, it does not kill (at least not immediately)” (236). This last qualification is especially telling, as it betrays the limitations of the critic’s temporal emphasis which, much as it critiques the sham liveness of TV coverage, envisions economic crisis either as one of long duration (and thus unspectacular) or as temporally deferred. We can, however, restate her formula instead in spatial terms: economic crisis, in other words, does not kill (at least not here). Indeed, we might say that space haunts the critic’s analysis as its disavowed category; in this way, the argument subtly reinforces the presentness of the here even as it contests the liveness of the now. The space of the not-here, spectral and non-present, haunts both the critic and televisual catastrophe. This disparity in the coverage of disaster reflects Achille Mbembe’s trenchant formula for necropolitics as the division between “those who must live and those who must die” (17).
     
    Mbembe’s “necropolitics” draws on Foucault’s theory of biopower as “that domain of life over which power has taken control” (12). Mbembe argues, however, that modern disciplinary power over subjects is always accompanied by its necropolitical other. This entails a challenge to the normative liberal theory of a public sphere grounded in freedom, reason, and autonomy, and expressing itself in the common exercise of sovereignty (13). Mbembe argues instead that this sovereign power is always also a force negating the life of others. The double injunction that some must live while others must die reflects the twin but disparate exercises of sovereign power over populations at home and populations abroad. Race provides the persistent rationale for this distribution of the power of life and death, whose history extends from early modernity into the present.6 Plantations, colonies, occupied territories and targets of neo-imperial wars are the sites of “death worlds” that relegate other populations to the status of “the living dead” (40). “If power still depends on tight control over bodies,” Mbembe says, “the new technologies of destruction are less concerned with inscribing bodies within disciplinary apparatuses as inscribing them, when the time comes, within the maximal economy now represented by the ‘massacre’” (34). A sinister anti-morality results even for those who survive death, Mbembe says; survival becomes another means for the perpetuation of necropolitics. As Mbembe says, “in the logic of survival one’s horror at the sight of death turns into satisfaction that it is someone else who is dead” (36).
     
    For Mbembe, the necropolitics of survival are realized in their most complete form in occupied Palestine, where the first world and an advance guard of settlers abut a population in enforced destitution. The invasion of Gaza in 2008–9 seems to confirm Mbembe’s diagnoses by both ratcheting up the violence and underscoring the failed response of the media and the international community. Occupied Palestine, strangely invoked in the Kathy Fiscus story, reflects the logic of haunted community I pursue in what follows. In each case, community casts itself in the lurid terms of a battle of life against death. At the center of this struggle is the figure of the settler and the frontier, narrowing down to the figure of the frontier well. As we will see, the figure of the well supports a dubious mythology of autonomy and self-sufficiency. The autonomy of the frontier homestead allows the community to identify itself as similarly bounded, sovereign and independent. Gathered at the well as if in the forum of a town square, the community tries to save a threatened life, and thereby reaffirms its communal bonds. However, such scenes are haunted by a necropolitics they disavow; as a result, community takes shape as a phantasm haunted by ghosts of which it is only dimly aware.
     
    We have said that the Kathy Fiscus story ushered in a new era of television news. Forty years later, in October 1987, another mediatic era began with cable television’s coverage of a similar story. The Jessica McClure story seemed to replay the events of San Marino, though on a much larger, indeed hyperbolic scale. In a milestone in sensationalistic TV coverage, CNN chose to run the story around the clock, with the result that the upstart cable channel claimed its highest ratings ever, joining overnight the ranks of established television news channels. CNN’s famous scoop of Operation Desert Storm is often seen as signaling the shift toward cable news and the 24-hour news cycle, but the decisive turn in fact happened earlier, in the backyard of the McClure house in Midland, Texas. Iraq and Midland are linked, however, in more uncanny ways; Midland, Texas, after all, is George W. Bush’s “home town,” and at the time of the Jessica McClure story he had only recently left town to help in his father’s election campaign and to embark on his own political career. A boomtown of millionaires, Midland’s politics and fortunes are linked not only to its local wells and derricks but to the global geopolitics of oil and empire. As in the Kathy Fiscus story, a larger global scene haunts the phantom public’s spectacle of life and death in Midland. What emerges from the well in Midland is not only a girl miraculously saved from death, but a new force in media news, a channel whose sensationalistic bent will prove its worth in the coming years with the rise of neo-liberal empire and the security state. And while the young girl in Midland was finally rescued from the well, her story seems to have left a curse, as Lisa Belkin suggests: her rescuer committed suicide some years later, and one of the police officers on duty was convicted of sexual exploitation of a child. The curse of the Jessica McClure story does not, of course, derive from anything occult, but rather from the toxic saturation of exploitative infotainment. Moreover, the victims of this story are far more numerous. The phantom public conjured by CNN in Midland is bound together in a shared drama of intimate danger and survival, yet blind to its necropolitical participation in a broader mediatic state of emergency.
     
    As covered by CNN, Midland was not the geopolitical center of neo-liberal empire, but a middle America where political issues give way to a story of mere human interest: an ordinary white working class family confronting a private tragedy. In this way media coverage of the Jessica McClure story conveys a drama with which everyone can presumably identify, converting a “personal accident” into a “national catastrophe,” as Patricia Mellencamp puts it (252). Here lies also the characteristic ruse of the televisual spectacle of catastrophe: “TV administers and cushions shocks,” Mellencamp says, in a duplicitous “mastery and discharge” of trauma (254, 246). Not only did Jessica become “everybody’s baby,” as the film devoted to her story had it, but Midland was cast as a typical American small town, a microcosm of the country as a whole. This very restriction of focus lends a mythic political dimension to the drama, evoking fantasms and fears of the frontier, the homestead, and the embattled settler family.7 The well itself, focal point of the drama, suggests a frontier well, symbol of autonomy and belonging, gathering place of family and friends. Gathered in turn around the televisual well, viewers share in the intimate circle of this frontier myth. The well becomes a televisual agora, a collective forum embodying the nostalgic promise of the traditional public sphere. As a point of televisual gathering, this frontier well is deeply ironic, however. Its potent symbolism of self-sufficiency is, of course, a mere anachronism in a time of public water agencies and complex networks of water distribution; in suburbs across the United States, ersatz wells are planted in front yards to produce a similarly vain illusion. The spectacle of the well holds firm to this anachronism, however, in its appeal to a community of shared grief and hope. But that larger mediatic community is in contradiction with the intimate scale of the spectacle it wants to observe. Television viewers are thus viewers of the very obsolescence of community; their pious concern and fear are the ambivalent affects of a desire for community and the unknowing recognition of their impossible participation. This is not to discount, moreover, a pervasive ambivalence of the spectatorship of death and disaster: the spectacle appeals to the viewer’s sympathies, but as spectacle, it is enjoyed at a distance. Mediation thus allows both for sympathy and dissociation, though purveyors of disaster stories rigorously disavow the latter. It seems that the mediatic power of such stories lies in their ability to channel the trauma of the viewer’s ambivalence in the spectacle of another’s trauma. As Michael Warner argues, the mediatic spectator is necessarily abstracted from any corporeal, face-to-face community exchange, and in a compensatory reflex, it gloms onto the body of another in pain. Mediatic scenes of horror thus do not so much forge common bonds of sympathy as express “the mass subject’s impossible relation to a body.” As Warner argues, “the mass subject cannot have a body except the body it witnesses. But in order to become a mass subject it has left that body behind…. It returns in the spectacle of big-time injury” (Warner 250).
     
    The latent political significance of the Midland well as symbol of American imperial politics has been harnessed by the right-wing website, “Jessica’s Well,” which, headquartered in Midland itself, sports the patriotic logo-image of a frontier homestead. A toxic swill of hate-mongering ethnocentrism, militarism and religious fundamentalism, “Jessica’s Well” exemplifies the politics of George W. Bush’s political base. As discussion forum and gateway to like-minded extremist sites, the website exploits the connectivity of the internet while defending the mythic autonomy of the frontier home. The website epitomizes a radical failure of the American public sphere: knowledge is strictly partisan, and community (white, Christian and Zionist) is bound together in a war of defamation against all other ideologies, countries, religions, and races. “Jessica’s Well” is perhaps only a fringe element in a larger American public sphere, and yet it underscores the tacit politics of CNN’s nominally centrist position and that of the other dominant media outlets that manage the mediatic public sphere.
     
    There are, of course, venues that hold to a different model of civil discourse on the web. The most influential of these is none other than the WELL, “The Whole Earth ‘Lectronic Link,” founded in 1985 in Sausalito, California, and the first internet community on the web. After 25 years, the WELL still stands as a model of literate, cosmopolitan, informed discussion and debate; its image of the well supports a left-leaning ethos of community, creativity, and mutual sustenance. But even on the left, one finds echoes of the frontier mythology of Midland’s well. These are suggested by the WELL’s name and logo, but are explicitly advertised in Howard Rheingold’s history of the WELL, The Virtual Community: Homesteading on the Electronic Frontier. If Rheingold seems unconcerned about the unfortunate implications of his frontier metaphor, he might be excused for employing a well-worn figure. And yet no-one today brandishes the figure of the “plantation” with such political insouciance. The difference, of course, is that while contemporary American free enterprise seeks its profits in outsourcing, in sweatshops and call centers abroad, it takes as its favored metaphor not the plantation but the more heroic figure of the frontier. For the metaphor to “work” in leftist discourse, it must harness the adventurous spirit of the settler while at the same time denying its genocidal implications. And indeed, in Rheingold’s history of the WELL, the spirit of the entrepreneur vies constantly with a political world it implies and yet disavows. This conflict makes his “virtual community” another version of the “phantom public” we have explored so far.8 And as in those media turning points, this community centers on the figure of a young girl in mortal danger: a girl fighting for her life in the WELL.
     
    The Virtual Community offers a history of the rise of our new mediatic world of internet connectivity, and its opening pages rehearse a familiar claim to community haunted by a world it would exclude. The first chapter, titled “The Heart of the WELL,” tells how the author sought medical advice for his ailing two-year old daughter from the online “Parenting conference,” which quickly provided him vital information before his own doctor could call him back. This forum, “a small but warmly human corner of cyberspace,” has a particularly intimate and social character, Rheingold says; there is “a magic protective circle” around this part of the WELL. “We’re talking about our sons and daughters in this forum, not about our computers or our opinions about philosophy, and many of us feel that this tacit understanding sanctifies the virtual space” (1). The “magic protective circle” of the forum is defined, then, by numerous exclusions: politics, philosophy, computing–in fact the core of the WELL’s larger conversations–are all staved off. Community, imagined here as all-embracing and far-flung, narrows down to shared concerns about the nuclear family. Rheingold invokes a virtual consensus in which the liberal and leftist ethos of the WELL merges with the mentality of the security mom.
     
    Rheingold cites at length from the post of a member of the Parenting conference watching over his ailing 14-month old daughter. The father, Jay, appeals to the online community from the darkness of this quiet room in Woods Hole. “Woods Hole. Midnight. I am sitting in the dark of my daughter’s room. Her monitor lights blink at me. The lights used to blink too brightly so I covered them with bits of bandage adhesive and now they flash faintly underneath, a persistent red and green, Lillie’s heart and lungs” (3). Interestingly, even as he connects to the outside world, the scene he describes contains technical prostheses of connectedness, here more ambiguous and unsettling: “Above the monitor is her portable suction unit. In the glow of the flashlight I’m writing by, it looks like the plastic guts of a science-class human model, the tubes coiled around the power supply, the reservoir, the pump.” Jay continues, “Tina is upstairs trying to get some sleep. A baby monitor links our bedroom to Lillie’s. It links our sleep to Lillie’s too, and because our souls are linked too, we do not sleep well.”
     
    The line “we do not sleep well” echoes strangely with Jay’s observation that, unlike other friends and communities, “The WELL was always awake” (4). To connect to the forum is to bring others into the circle of a vigil where no-one sleeps well. Here, at the heart of the virtual community, its metaphoric well is incarnated in the “power supply, the reservoir, the pump” connected to a young body in crisis. Like his daughter connected to the tubes, pumps and monitors, Jay’s online connectedness is vital, and that connectedness is felt most keenly in a state of emergency and a time of need. In this way, the Parenting conference proves its worth as more than a mere venue for conversation. Its stakes are higher: the Parenting conference is a lifeline, connecting a community in a struggle to preserve life. But if the vigil of connectedness is a fight for life and survival, Lillie’s connectedness is more ambiguous. Even as her connections sustain her life, they subtly replace it as well. In the sentence that describes the lights that monitor her vital signs, two clauses are apposed, linked only by a comma that suspends the vital connection: “a persistent red and green, Lillie’s heart and lungs.” Likewise, the “science-class human model” is a prosthetic double that suggests Lillie’s replacement by her life support. As emblematic example of the virtual community, the story of Lillie and her family conveys more than a moral of friendship and support, suggesting as well a disquieting dislocation of subjects in technological life-support. Moreover, the natural family reduced to its mere essentials is at the same time a fully mediated technological interface. These tensions provide of course the pathos of Jay’s posting and Rheingold’s use of it as moral allegory of the virtual community. Cyberspace may alter the space, time and media of communication, Rheingold tells us, but contact on an intimate and emotional level is still very much possible. And yet, if connection and communication are the keys to Jay’s post, those terms are strikingly ambiguous. Community is forged precisely in the frail bonds that are alternately connecting and disconnecting, and in the substitution of electronic monitors with the “souls” of the family. Connectedness, for Lillie, carries the ambivalent meanings of both remedy and curse. Suspended between life and death, Lillie is a prosthetic survivor, a haunting figure of the virtual community’s contradictions.
     
    As such, the girl in the WELL expresses a pervasive tension, indeed an “ethical contradiction,” as Rob Latham puts it, that congeals in monstrous pop-cultural icons of youthful cyborgs and vampires (14). The figures of the vampire and of the cyborg reflect twin facets of the economic conscription of youth, Latham argues, conveyed in the double meaning of his book’s title, Consuming Youth. On the one hand, youthful bodies are vital to the economics of production, “consumed” by the imperatives of labor and production, as Marx portrays it. “The worker,” Latham says, “essentially becomes a cybernetic organism–a cyborg–prosthetically linked to a despotic, ravening apparatus” (3). On the other hand, in the post-Fordist era of increasing consumption, the “mass-market fetishization of youth” (16) encourages the insatiable appetites of youthful consumers. These two facets of “consuming youth” reflect not only an historical distinction, but a continuing conflict between labor and leisure, consumption and production. Moreover, while deriving from an earlier time of factory production, the vision of a “prosthetic and predatory” world of automation clearly remains with us today, as fantasy, sci-fi and horror films amply indicate.9 Rheingold’s parable can only address these concerns symptomatically, but in Lillie’s state of suspended animation we can discern the latent figure of the “vampire-cyborg as a twinned metaphor for youth consumption” (20). The prosthetic Lillie seems, then, to signal a problem endemic to the contemporary mediasphere: the media market strives increasingly to target children, prying little consumers from the control of their parents. Lillie’s frail body stands implicitly as symbol of online children threatened by predators, identity thieves, marketers and manipulators of public opinion.
     
    It is striking that fears of this kind can accompany a technophilic text such as Rheingold’s, but as Mark Poster shows, this is a pervasive feature of commentary on the internet. The advent of the web was accompanied by a panicked discourse in the media that focused on the figure of the online child, alternately monster and victim of the web. Poster shows that such technological fears follow a script typical of previous media innovations (106). Fearful commentary on the internet revolution thus repeats fears of mediation as such; as a result, the discourse of crime and perversion is marred by its unexamined presumptions of innocent and unmediated communication outside of the technological sphere. Rheingold’s text copes with such threats and fears by composing a moral tale of the online community as extension of family and forum of connectedness. Lillie survives her illness, we learn, but in what seems a substitutive narrative sacrifice on Rheingold’s part, another member, less innocent than Lillie, dies by the end of the chapter. “You aren’t a real community,” Rheingold pointedly concludes, “until you have a funeral” (24). What the author narrates in this way, however, passes over–and passes on–a more haunting death-work that defies his narrative choices and moral fables. Lillie’s suspended life and Jay’s lonely postings speak to a disturbing mediation that links death and deferral to the messenger’s vital signs. Life in crisis is the very mode of survival, but this ambiguous survival is only intimated in the inarticulate gaps and disjunctions of the message. To respond to such a haunted message is to pass it on, since the reader cannot realize the author’s intent without betraying it or making choices. The posting from Wood’s Hole calls for witness and response; it appeals to the support of the community. But its haunting message is not settled in narrative morals or in funeral rites. As I will argue, the responsibility for such a message is passed on precisely by means of its own inadequacy and, indeed, failure.
     
    In this sense, then, the story of Lillie’s near-death is an allegory, a parable of the origin of community, the WELL’s very source. As allegory, moreover, it organizes nagging doubts and questions that make each community member, like young Lillie, the transmitter of primal enigmas of life, death, community and identity. The WELL as forum is a gathering around the dark center of those unanswered questions. Such primal scenes tend to resolve themselves in pious claims to sacrifice and losses redeemed, and this is the moral message that irresistibly concludes Rheingold’s chapter. As in all allegories, such answers lend a consoling order to something that fails to maintain a coherent structure. Allegory attempts to cover over discrepancies that lie at the origin, and in so doing, its answers fall short of responsibility to those motivating gaps. Jay’s posting is rife with inarticulate moments in which vital questions of death, mediation and community are at stake. What is conveyed in such inarticulate relays is the non-point source of allegory, a poison or pollution that, outside the economy of sin, grounds communication in an inescapably viral mode. How, then, to respond to such relays without falling in with the pieties of community morals and their inevitable symptoms, the violent disavowal of “sin”? Responsibility should be sought less in moral choices than in the relays of deferral and failed responses that pass on like a virus the lack of structure at the heart of community. Paradoxically, then, responsibility must remain inarticulate, to the extent that it passes on the lack of structure to which it answers.10 To respond is not to put a question to rest, but to be haunted by that question and to ensure its survival.
     
    In the life and death struggles we have examined, survival inevitably bears the marks of community morality. Moreover, this morality of survival can easily accommodate even the amorality of necropolitics. And yet another notion of survival can avoid the tragic dimension of the life and death struggle. Derrida advances the notion of survival in such terms, as a feature of life that escapes the fateful binary couple of life and death. Survival, like deferral, is an originary dimension of existence, in which whatever exists is bound to negation. That negation is not simply opposed to life, but intertwined with it, to the point of calling life itself into question. Survival, then, is “a complication of the opposition life/death,” a spectral prosthesis of life, its inevitable deferral or mediation (Learning 51). This mediation of life entails for Derrida an ethics of hospitality to the ghost, in which the ghost is not the fearsome figment of moral tales, but the spectral manifestation of the subject’s paradoxically vital finitude. In what follows, I pursue the implications of this radical ethics in readings of media communities. The ethics and responsibility of mediated life require that we listen to a different ghost haunting our stories of death and survival: the spectral trace of community in the deferrals and disjunctions of the moral fable.
     

    II.

     

    I might be alive in the place of another, at the expense of another. I might have usurped, that is, in fact killed.
     

    Primo Levi

     
    The stakes of a postmodern ethics of survival are dramatically staged in a set of recent horror films that echo in an uncanny way the mediatic theme of the haunted well. Among the most terrifying and haunting films of our time, Hideo Nakata’s Ringu (1998) and its American remakes The Ring (2002) and The Ring Two (2005) deliver a new kind of ghost: a vengeful presence whose means of persecution are television and videotape. A young girl who has died at the bottom of a well sends a cryptic video message whose viewers are condemned to die seven days after seeing it. The terrifying effect of the films is compounded by the duplication of the means of haunting by the viewing experience itself; in front of the TV set, the viewer of The Ring occupies the place of the victim stricken with death. In this way, the viewer’s own television becomes a haunted medium. This shared horror, moreover, relays what is perhaps the most disturbing feature of the narrative: the delegation of killing by one viewer to another. As we learn by the film’s end, only those who duplicate and spread the fatal message are spared its punishment. The fatal videotape thus spawns a viral logic of death.11
     
    The last word in cinematic terror, Ringu and its sequels suggest a postmodern allegory of the viewership of death. The viewer of the films is not merely in a position of metaphoric or analogical substitution with the fictional viewer of the fatal message; rather, he or she repeats, in allegorical fashion, a fatal error of viewing, and this error is what is passed on by the survivor in the viral duplication of the message. The survivor does not solve the riddle of the enigmatic message but merely repeats it; to delegate death is to survive one’s own incomprehension and pass it on to another. In this way, The Ring‘s horror narrative captures graphically a necropolitical logic of televisual viewership in the age of interactive communications, file sharing, and viral video. Like Pulse, One Missed Call and Shutter, among other films, The Ring taps into technological fears that have accompanied the internet revolution, channeling the dark side of Facebook and YouTube, and making its viewer the receiver of unknown online threats and the broadcaster of the curse he or she would ward off. The Ring‘s haunted message is emblematic of viral video in the age of web-based interactivity.
     
    This new media environment and its haunting features are the implicit context of The Ring, which however conveys its televisual haunting through a wide array of media. The film features not only TV and videotape, but also telephone, photography, microfilm, drawings, and rayographs. The primary medium of the haunting message is videotape, rather than the more contemporary DVD; in this way, the film reinforces the idea that there is an uncanny materiality to the medium of the haunting message. Likewise, the first photos we see in the film are anachronistic Polaroids. This materiality is crucial to the film’s motifs of the embodiment of the specter and the passage from an intangible to a tangible realm. Moreover, these recently outdated media reinforce The Ring‘s effective use of early film as conveyor of the ghost. The haunting video message is silent and largely in black and white, its images seeming to derive from a fairly distant past. Montage, jump cuts, and static camera positions evoke the early pioneers of the moving image, while disturbing shots of animated objects suggest Surrealist film. Further, the closing shot of the haunted well can be taken for a still photograph; it is only late in The Ring that this image discloses its horrifying truth, as the ghost of the dead girl emerges from the lip of the well. The horrifying appearance of the girl confirms the narrative’s building suspense; uncanny premonitions and mounting clues foretell her murderous intent. The image of the well, however, speaks to a primal visual uncanny. In breaking with the static photographic image, the girl’s emergence seemingly recapitulates the birth of cinema. The static image becomes one of movement, and the viewer’s horror at this emerging specter is grafted onto the visual delusion, shared by all film viewers, that still images are animated, and animated images are alive. In the film’s most terrifying moment, the girl’s emergence from the TV set itself confirms this delusion, but only in the mode of horror: what reveals itself is neither alive nor dead, but a spectral entity that defies either state. The TV screen becomes the equivalent of the edge of the well; what emerges from the screen is the truth of the viewer’s delusion. And yet, as we will see, this emergence bears the marks of a different encounter between viewer and image; as Ariella Azoulay puts it, “One needs to stop looking at the photograph and instead start watching it” (14).
     
    This passage across the screen seems to place the viewer in a position akin to that of early cinema viewers, confronted with the astonishing modern spectacle of animated images. In one of the Lumières’s first films, a train approaching the screen was seen as bearing down on the viewers’ space itself. Accounts of these early screenings lead us to believe that the spectators mistook the image for reality, that they actually feared a collision with the cinematic train. However, as Akira Lippit points out, there is reason to doubt this account of naïve belief and misperception, which may in fact serve to disavow one’s own delusions and the uncanny “shadow optics” we share with those viewers. Lippit argues that it is not so much the emerging train that was feared as the illusion of deep space that seems to lie beyond the screen: “what awaits the spectator at the projected point of collision is an imaginary depth, a volume that opens onto the spectator from the other side of the screen” (65). In this light, one might say that the fear of an emerging specter in The Ring masks a more unsettling fear, that of one’s absorption by the deep space of the image. “The spectator is swallowed by the image, as if it were an oral cavity, as if the image, in this instant, revealed an interiority, vast and terrible” (65). For Lippit, this deep space is a figure of the unconscious, of the self’s interiority dimly sensed as invisible and bottomless. “Cinema generates a spectacle of the unconscious,” Lippit says, “rendering its viewers unconscious spectators” (63).
     
    This invocation of a space that swallows the viewer is strikingly apt in the case of The Ring; the cursed message turns the TV set into a well, and the viewer is doomed to fall, like the girl herself, into its gruesome space. The Ring thus reawakens primal terrors of early cinema, and turns the TV set–the familiar domestic “tube”–into a threatening well, opening an uncanny portal in the heart of the home. Freud’s essay “The ‘Uncanny’” reminds us that the home (heim) is always haunted by the monstrous and unfamiliar; indeed, at the point of deepest privacy, the home inverts into its other, heimlich into unheimlich. As Freud shows, this ambiguity lies within the term “uncanny” itself which, at a certain point, becomes indistinguishable from its opposite. In a strange semantic slippage, privacy and intimacy tend to converge with secrecy and mystery; the most intimate is also the most alien. Welling up from the depths, the unheimlich is “like a buried spring or a dried-up pond. One cannot walk over it without always having the feeling that water might come up there again” (198). The image of a “buried spring” reprises Freud’s favored metaphors for the unconscious and the return of the repressed: what is cast into the unconscious is buried alive, and always insists on returning from below. The image of a buried spring resonates with that of a well, which is, after all, an artificial spring buried underground. In The Ring, we discover that the well lies directly beneath the cabin floor. It is this hole that threatens to swallow each viewer, once the haunting video is played at home on a private TV set.12
     
    For Freud, the uncanny and its monstrous effects ultimately call for therapeutic cure; the patient is called on to recognize that what appears as alien and frightening is only the product of an alienating repression. This psychoanalytic insight agrees with a moral dimension common to ghost stories, and which derive from the folklore of many cultural traditions. People wrongly killed return to haunt not only their killers, but a larger complicit community. To exorcise the vengeful spirit requires a labor of sleuthing and a confrontation with a buried past. Like such narratives, The Ring seems to conclude with exorcism once the girl’s murder is fully brought to light. We learn that the girl was killed by her mother who dropped her into the well, though she survived for seven days in her premature grave. Accordingly, seven days of life are allotted to the viewers of her message. It is at this point, however, that the narrative defies the logic of redemption, cure, and exorcism. The dead girl is never avenged, but insists instead that her haunting be perpetuated. The videotape is more than a message from the dead, it is a viral agent of killing that spares no innocents. The narrative of exorcism and redemption thus gives way to that of the curse.
     
    This mixture of the logic of redemption with that of the curse is a feature of some of the most haunting ghost stories, and what results is a complication that defies both psychoanalytic cure and moral resolution. The passing on of the ghost story becomes a modality of the curse, reinforcing the impression that as readers caught in an abyssal structure, attempting to interpret a series of passed-on messages, we may ourselves inherit it. Such haunting seriality opens Henry James’s The Turn of the Screw, with its initial scene of assembled guests, an exchange of tales, and the relating of the ghost story passed from the governess to a pair of narrators, one framing the other. In a masterful reading of The Turn of the Screw, Shoshana Felman tracks the infectious “ghost-effect” of James’s story in the critical literature soon after its publication. Two camps dominate this body of writing: those who subscribe to the occult happenings in the tale, and those who ascribe to the narrating governess some form of hysteria or madness. These camps reflect two inextricable facets of the ambiguous narrative, and in this way the text perpetuates itself in the symptoms of its readers. Of particular interest to Felman is how suspicious readers, those who doubt the occult version of the story’s events, inadvertently find themselves “duplicating and repeating the governess’s gesture” (“Henry James” 219). If such readers, the supposedly enlightened “non-dupes,” would blame the governess herself, rather than the ghosts, for the killing of young Miles at the end of the story, duplicating her gesture would amount to a repeating, or at least seconding, of that murder. “We are forced to participate in the scandal,” Felman claims (199). This fatal participation is noted by one of the story’s first critics, who complains that “one has been assisting in an outrage upon the holiest and sweetest fountain of human innocence, and helping to debauch–at least by helplessly standing by–the pure and trusting nature of children” (198). Tellingly, the critic’s plaint invokes the image of a pure source that has been sullied; the innocent children, metaphorized by that source, are debauched by the author and his guilty readers. An odd equivocation mars this righteous diatribe, however, since the reader is cast as both “helping” and “helpless.” Here, at the very source of goodness, and confronted with “the most hopelessly evil story that we have ever read in any literature,” the reader’s implication in the story’s evil doings is curiously ambivalent, and virtually hysterical. However, a pathologizing diagnosis–whether of the governess or of the story’s critics–skirts too quickly over the story’s contaminating ambivalence. This ambivalence may instead converge in the lure and promise of a singular source of evil, one that the text defies, defers, and denies at every step. The quest for this source ends only in the repeated confrontation with a divided point of origin. Dupe of the text, the reader can only repeat its dizzying duplicities. The unparalleled atmosphere of haunting in The Turn of the Screw lies, then, not so much in its imagery, psychological conflict, or narrative drama as it does in its textual ghost-effects, whereby any statement or act is accompanied by its alternate meaning, its immediate self-duplication as other than itself. For Felman, this makes the text eminently allegorical, understood as the mirroring, in the act of reading, of the narrative’s inadequation with what it claims to relate.
     
    In James’s story, as in The Ring, seriality, duplication and repetition are at the heart of the narrative. Both stories pass on a curse that condemns the reader or viewer to “duplicating and repeating,” as Felman says, the guilty acts at the heart of the story, and each defies the reader’s attempt to sleuth out the crime and its causes. Felman is not, of course, content to merely assent to the text’s contaminating force. However, unlike readers who are bent on solving the mystery and closing the book on the scandal, she resists the desire to assign a single meaning or cause to the governess’s story. In this way she avoids the moralizing plaints of the offended readers, as well as the pathologizing judgments of vulgar Freudians. The discourse of sin and morality give way in her analysis to the recognition of a common and shared error. Attuned to the haunting duplicity of narrative, this practice of reading informs an ethical practice of interpretation Felman has developed in her more recent Testimony. Testimonies of crime, torture and suffering are seen as orienting the reader toward a truth that is not a mere referential datum, but a discourse that is inherently duplicitous, and which must be repeated, duplicated and disseminated by the reader. Responsibility thus lies not simply in faithful recording but in bearing witness to a truth that is never simply referential. Indeed, as she argues, it is the very duplicity of the “truth” that allows for its duplication, and thus its communication to others.
     
    Ross Chambers draws on Felman’s Testimony in his reading of Laurie Lynd’s R.S.V.P. (1991), a short film dealing with a death from AIDS. Before his death, Andy makes a request to a radio show to broadcast a song of Berlioz, “Le spectre de la rose,” which, based on a poem by Gautier, is itself about death and survival. The song is broadcast after Andy’s passing and thus becomes a message from beyond the grave to his lover Sid who, hearing it on the radio, records it on his stereo. This leads Sid to contact Andy’s sister by phone, who tells Andy’s parents to listen to the radio broadcast as it plays later that day, in their time zone. Chambers insists on the mediatic relays, delays and repetitions that mark the transmission of the haunting message: answering machines, telephones, and radio assure the afterlife of Andy’s message, and allow for a final reconciliation between Sid and Andy’s homophobic parents. Chambers reads this process of delay and relay as the death-work that sanctions any discursive act. Deferral passes on the message, but at the cost of its author’s singular énoncé; the énonciation that survives its author does so at the cost of its author’s singular intent and control. “A message survives,” Chambers says, “but subject to an effect of deferral that prevents it from becoming ‘the’ message that remains forever potential” (17). From this results an ethics of “responsiveness,” as Chambers says, which is aware both of the loss of the original message and of the inadequacy of the response, and is caught up in “a relay of inadequacy” (18). “Our inadequate responses thus take the form of deferral, as the passing on of the message, relay-fashion, and each time in a modified form. Each retransmitted message will be in some sense continuous with the message to which it responds but also, and inescapably, discontinuous with it” (23–4).
     
    R.S.V.P., like The Ring, concerns a message from the dead, one that is broadcast and retransmitted through multiple media. But Chambers’s model of ethical responsiveness is hard to square with The Ring‘s horror narrative. The moral dilemma The Ring‘s protagonist confronts is whether, in order to save her son, she should have him duplicate the videotape as well. In choosing to do so, she makes the boy into yet another source of the tape’s murderous intent. This moral dilemma is heightened by the implication of the protagonist’s own latent violence in the transmission of the message, a plot element in The Ring that departs from the original Ringu; her first victim is her own ex-husband, against whom she manifestly harbors resentment, and possibly an unconscious urge to kill. In this way the mother herself, not unlike the dead girl, is a femme fatale.13The Ring does not fully resolve this contamination of the heroine, though two versions of feminine power separate off into the monstrous and the (more or less) respectable. The young boy, for his part, has telepathic qualities that not only channel the dead girl’s thoughts but seem to identify him with her dangerous powers.
     
    In this way, the duplicators of the message do not merely reproduce a source, but disseminate it. Indeed, that dissemination calls into question the well as source and origin. Fittingly enough, a well is precisely an artificial source, tapping a natural one. The Ring‘s terrors and its moral dilemmas plunge the viewer into an abyssal field of dangers without simple origin; even as it insists on the haunting source of our fears, The Ring haunts us with the idea of a viral message beyond the logic of duplication and representation. We might then speak, using the vocabulary of pollution, of a non-point source of the virus. The viral video belongs to a regime of simulation and virtuality according to which reproduction occurs in the absence of any original source.14 This is not to dispense with the moral dimension of the story, which graphically confronts the viewer with her or his tainted responsibility. At the same time, by tampering with the source, the viral logic of The Ring takes us beyond the comfortable distinctions of pollution and innocence, betrayal and fidelity, and even life and death. The Ring is a postmodern allegory of ethics in an age of simulation and virtuality.
     
    The “RSVP” of The Ring is not an appeal for recognition and response, but rather a demand that the viewer pass on the curse on pain of death. Moreover, one cannot decide whether this demand is motivated or not by a righteous cause; the girl may have been cruelly murdered, and even abused by the scientists studying her telepathic abilities, but her insatiable vengeance points as well to some irredeemable evil. It would seem, then, that there are few points of comparison between R.S.V.P.‘s message of tolerance and The Ring‘s sensationalistic horror. But I would argue that The Ring raises the stakes of R.S.V.P. by making its passed-on messages not only communicative relays but a contaminating force; an ethics of responsiveness is to be sought not merely in inadequacy but in an inherited curse. In this way, an ethics of viewing, rendered nearly moot by The Ring‘s terrifying premise, is made to confront a necropolitics of viewership in the age of the internet and globalization. This may help shed light on a persistent problem of moral discourse on the passive spectatorship of catastrophe. Writing on the televised spectacle of death in Sarajevo, Tom Keenan argues that to assume that the image of suffering speaks for itself is paradoxically to condemn it to silence. As Keenan shows, a common belief holds that the image of another’s suffering is enough to spur viewers to action; and yet, the viewer is insistently paralyzed by such scenes, as if by the evil eye (“Publicity” 110).15 What constrains moral discourse here, as in Felman’s Testimony, is the premise of an unmediated truth that can inform the public sphere. The binary correlative of the self-evident image is the equally pervasive notion of the deceptive image, inheritor of a long tradition of the image as mere illusion. Jacques Rancière has submitted the latter to an extensive critique, arguing that the image is always a “sentence-image,” object of a creative work of interpretation. In each case, ethical and political critique allows for interpretation by opening up room for error. In the horror film, this error is terror; the unconscious viewer is the viral agent of something “crucial enough to pass along,” as Carol Clover says (95).16 Clover shows that horror compulsively displays the phantasmatic lability of desire and gender; what is “uninterruptible” and “crucial enough to pass along” in the infectious thrill of horror is the persistent misreading of a violence both feared and desired in the obscure theater of primal fantasy. This viral and compulsive feature of horror is undeniably popular, and The Ring has established itself as a successful franchise in the genre. Indeed, I would argue, it is popular to the extent that it taps into a common error and shared enigma. Here viral, like infectious, carries a double meaning, as has emerged in colloquial parlance; what is viral is both popular and threatening to the community. Similarly, Rancière points to “the disruptive power of community” contained in the violence of the dialectical image (57). To promote an ethical viewership would not be to dispel the curse of the viral, but instead to follow the trace of its popular contagion, and to infect the public sphere with another death-work, one that contests the necropolitical.
     
    To pursue this ambiguous virality is to read against the grain of The Ring‘s overt message that compels its viewer to assume the position of a sociopathic survivor. It is this seemingly inescapable compulsion that defines the necropolitical force of the viral video. The spectator is and must remain a survivor; accordingly, others must be eliminated. Moreover, the evil viral force mitigates the moral crime of passing on the curse, since one cannot be guilty of the curse itself, but only of circulating it. Further, the film locks the work of sleuthing and interpretation into this vicious cycle. To solve the mystery of the video is not to lay the ghost to rest or to settle scores, but only to submit inevitably to the logic of survival. According to the logic of the video, there is no other interpretation; one has no choice but to survive, killing in good conscience, or at most with a nagging sense of responsibility for a crime that, nonetheless, is never one’s own. The viewer is pressed into service by a terrorizing dictate, whose self-evidence is akin to the tautological force of ideology, one that conveys no other message than the necropolitics of survival. It is significant that the protagonist’s choice to survive is bound to the survival of her child. This allows for a saving alibi in the film, for if it is selfish and amoral to choose one’s life over another’s, to condemn another to save one’s child is less so. But the mother-bond, an arbitrary narrative choice of the film, is merely the film’s ultimate alibi, serving to naturalize the protagonist’s sociopathological acts as inevitable. A family morality is grounded in the film in a natural imperative, but not without conflating, at a certain point, the contrary options of killing and saving.
     
    In our earlier examples, we have seen that the imperative of survival perpetuates economic imperatives by negating the possibility of self-sacrifice and disavowing murder. Similarly, what is strictly foreclosed by The Ring is the option of self-sacrifice. It is true that both of the girl’s parents commit suicide; on the other hand, it may be that in doing so they merely submit to the girl’s sinister force. Either way, the family relationship seems to have no bearing on the video itself, which is addressed to unknown innocent others. In this way, The Ring compels us to deny the option of self-sacrifice, which is cast unambiguously as the (impossible) choice of suicide. However, one may read suicide here as an exorbitant and paranoid denial of more ordinary political and ecological sacrifices, sacrifices invoked yet dispelled as impossible. Within the horror film’s paranoid economy, The Ring conflates “survival” with abundance and profit; to live within one’s means would amount to dying. The Ring thus confirms the theory of necropolitics, but only by grounding itself in a hyperbolic supernatural premise. If this premise seems to occlude the properly political implications of the story, it sheds light on the paranoid and fantasmatic order of the necropolitical itself. The Ring‘s necropolitical double injunction comes not from a sovereign power with which one identifies, but from an ineffable otherness that invades the home, and to which one submits. In this, the monstrous otherness would seem to be the double of the threatening others that contest one’s privilege to life and security. As a threat to one’s life, in other words, the evil figure of the girl is the alibi of the threatening others, out there and everywhere, on whose death one’s life depends. Paradoxically, then, she demands death, and her own first of all. Her inexplicable evil dictates death because she is herself the spectral manifestation of what we have relegated to the world’s zones of death. This phantasmatic misrecognition of the monster resembles that which enables the racist to see in the other someone less than human or marked for death; these misrecognized others are put to death in all innocence by people who, as Hannah Arendt says of murdering colonists, “somehow were not aware that they had committed murder” (qtd. Mbembe 24).17
     
    The Ring captures the phantasmatic features of our modern mediascape, and speaks eloquently of the fears and repressions that define the phantom public sphere. Might we say, then, that by confronting the viewer with the price of his own survival, the film implicitly calls that survival into question? Would this be the moral message of the film, one we should heed in spite of our reflexes of terror? I have suggested as much, but would argue further that the claim the film has over its viewer, its monstrous appeal, defies a simple reversal of values and indeed challenges the notions of both morality and message. The most potent features of The Ring are not only the images of the cursed video itself, but also the inhuman, enigmatic insect-like sounds that accompany them. At the heart of The Ring is a message that haunts us, not simply because of its implicit threat, but rather because it remains enigmatic and opaque. And though we are interpellated by horror, we remain unconscious spectators in the face of the message from the well, misreading the film, passing over its enigma and passing it on as a curse. The disturbing sounds that accompany the cursed images–a repeated faint squeaking or muted screech–are most suggestive of this enigmatic dimension of the film.18 Here the film does not deliver a message or a clue, but only a sound that disturbs. Moreover, the sound may not even derive from the ghost herself, since it resembles the kind of faint “noise” passed on in the process of re-recording and duplication–what in French are called parasites. This sound also lends a horrifying quality to the scrambled white noise that precedes and ends the video transmission; in a moment of horror, the mother realizes her son is condemned to die when she comes upon him staring at the white noise of the video he has just finished watching. The most terrifying aspect of the film does not, then, derive from the other world, but only from the process of passing on the video. This “ghost in the machine” is and remains perfectly opaque, a signifier without a content, the zero degree of symbolic exchange.19
     
    It is tempting to see this aspect of the film as conveying what Jean Laplanche calls the “enigmatic signifier.” To explore the unconscious dimension of an artwork, clinical case, or social pathology is, in Laplanchian terms, to uncover the trace of the subject’s primary encounter with the unconscious of the other. This encounter is that of a child with an adult and his or her compromised signals; the seduction of the child by the adult is the fundamental given of this primal scene of traumatic encounter (Otherness 93). Laplanchian theory allows us to refine the psychological dimension of the stories we are examining here, and to bring out their shared compulsive features: an oneiric world symbolized by the underworld; childhood innocence betrayed by sin, evil and death; and a message that defies reason and is passed on from one person to another. And while this psychological framework may not seem to illuminate the necropolitics of globalism, our horror stories show us that community is persistently figured in lurid terms richly evocative of primal seduction. Here we find the wellspring of the ambivalence expressed in the contraries of killing and saving, in the governess’s terrorizing inquisition, and in the mediatic community’s dubious fascination with children in danger. Every girl in a well seems to revive Alice’s marvelous and disturbing fall down the rabbit-hole, a journey into a netherworld of illicit desires, extravagant fears, and latent pedophilia.
     
    Laplanche’s “enigmatic signifier,” deriving from the unconscious of the other, is not the index of a deep meaning the subject can ever hope to recover. At best, the subject can only interpret a signifier that was itself received in translation. Passed on as a mystery, and received as a translation of that mystery, the enigmatic signifier holds out no promise of a return to the source. This surely does not defeat the purpose of interpretation, though it does set a limit to the passionate quest for the source of one’s fears, fantasies, and suspect desires. As Laplanche argues, the quest for the origin of a fantasy always risks repeating a fantasy of origins (“Fantasy” 24–25). We have seen how some readers of The Turn of the Screw fall into a similar vicious circle by opting either for a narrative of sin or for a supernatural premise. An ethics of reading, however, works with a non-point source of sin and evil, which one translates as best as one can, passing on a contaminated message. Responsibility to the other must bend, then, to the necessity of betrayal and infidelity in a shared error that provides the basis for an ethics beyond morality. We have read The Ring as an allegory of such contaminated messages; the narrative of horror and death, as well as its necropolitical implications, spring from an insight, however compromised, into a viral error of viewing.
     
    The Ring dramatizes the stakes of a postmodern ethics of viewing, in which responsibility is figured not as the choice of a moral subject but as the response to the enigmatic call of the other, a response, as Emmanuel Levinas has it, that turns the respondent into the “hostage” of the other, compelled to answer against his will. Drawing on Levinas, Tom Keenan argues that ethics is incomplete to the extent that it does not call into question the will and autonomy of the self, purported agent of moral acts directed at a separate other, object of knowledge and compassion. “Our responsibilities, somehow in excess of our knowledge if not simply opposed to it, are to the other, to the undetermined other, and our vigilance consists in the care with which we attend to the noise that precedes our question, the mark or trace to which we respond at the beginning” (Fables, 11). Keenan emphasizes that this other is not simply someone else, but also “something else,” an “undetermined other,” often a “ghost.” In this reframing of ethics, the self responds to the call of the other in terms evocative of the horror film: accused, persecuted, implicated in an other who calls one’s own existence into question. Keenan quotes from Levinas: “I have not done anything and I have always been under accusation: persecuted. The ipseity … is a hostage. The word I means here I am, answering for everything and everyone” (20). Indeed, the self who is called on is in a sense called up by a question that precedes it. Further, that self is not a singular entity but a mere placeholder for an open address. “The call,” Keenan says, “exposes me, as anyone, to an unincorporable alterity that has no interest in me as anything other than as a placeholder, as a singular substitute” (23). This post-idealist ethics radicalizes the commitment to the other by enmeshing self and other in absolute “proximity,” but at the cost, precisely, of the moral compass that habitually orients our sense of responsibility.
     
    Such comparisons between Levinas’s traumatizing other and the ghost of The Ring may seem perverse, given that the horror film encourages not responsibility but murderous self-interest. Levinas, moreover, states clearly that self-preservation is no justification for murder. Judith Butler points to this aspect of Levinas as an admirable pacifism, but she also subjects his ethics to a thoughtful critique that brings out a certain violence that serves as the ground of Levinas’s own ethical imperative. Further, Butler points out that politics interferes with ethics in a public sphere that manages and exploits the face of the other. Reading with and against Levinas, Butler insists that the ethical cannot be divorced from politics; Levinas’s “face” of the other, index of sheer alterity, is made to confront those broadcast by the dominant media. As Butler says, “We cannot, under contemporary conditions of representation, hear the agonized cry or be compelled or commanded by the face. We have been turned away from the face, sometimes through the very image of the face, one that is meant to convey the inhuman, the already dead, that which is not precariousness and cannot, therefore, be killed; this is the face that we are nevertheless asked to kill” (Precarious 150). Butler’s point is to oppose an ethics to the necropolitics of these conditions of representation. By the same token, however, ethics must confront the political conditions of its agency.20 This political-ethical conjuncture is one that troubles Levinas’s own positions, notably his Zionism, but it also seems to infect his more abstract formulations of ethical non-violence, which pose the stubborn dilemma of a non-violence predicated on a primary urge to kill. As Butler says, “the non-violence that Levinas seems to promote does not come from a peaceful place, but rather from a constant tension between the fear of undergoing violence and the fear of inflicting violence” (137). Though this tension seems to vitiate the prospects of ethics, it avoids the abstract claims of moral purity and innocence. Indeed, ethics gains by claiming violence as its own motive force: “The struggle against violence,” Butler says, “accepts that violence is one’s own possibility” (Frames 171). This tension within radical ethics lies at the heart of The Ring as well. The Ring answers to two aspects of the media-image that Butler hopes to turn in an ethical direction. One is the dimension of sound, cast in terms of an address that is bound to fail; the second is that of the “critical image,” which “must not only fail to capture its referent, but show this failing” (Precarious 146). The critical image captures nothing, yet captivates the viewer, who is exposed in her or his precariousness to an alterity that defies representation. I would suggest that The Ring, and especially its cursed video, contains both aspects of Butler’s sound-image. Inevitably, we turn away from or are terrified by the video, but this is itself the ground on which we meet the specter: “chasing it away only so as to chase after it,” as Derrida says, in a duplicitous act of conjuration and an always failed encounter with its enigmatic trace (Specters 140).21
     
    A haunting message, then, is viral because enigmatic; to pass it on is a symbolic act that, however, exposes the tenuousness of community and of symbolic exchange itself. We have followed the traces of this virality in our stories of haunted wells and in The Ring‘s infectious premise. A final example here will refine what is at stake in this haunting virality. In his late work, Derrida advances a theory of immunity and auto-immunity, which emerges in the course of a discussion of religion, conceived as a practice oriented toward the holy, or heilig, which Derrida glosses as meaning unscathed, immune, safe and sound. Community at its most metaphysical is forged in a shared faith in transcendent immunity. At a certain level of analysis, this metaphysical bid is merely a compensatory illusion, which goes some way toward explaining religion’s sacred terrors, but also the terrorism and “radical evil” that concern Derrida in his essay. Derrida, however, displaces the metaphysical gambit of the afterlife to advance a theory of survival, one that implicates the life of community in an inevitable death-work. Community thus combines the contradictory features of immunity and auto-immunity, its self-preservation always simultaneously self-destructive. “There is no opposition, fundamentally, between ‘social bond’ and ‘social unravelling’. A certain interruptive unraveling is the condition of the ‘social bond’, the very respiration of all ‘community’” (“Faith” 64).22 Derrida’s deconstruction of this opposition is not, of course, a complacent acquiescence to society’s failings or to the sociopathology of The Ring; nor is it an accommodation to the notion of a phantom public sphere. Rather, the phantom is linked to one’s prosthetic survival–exemplarily in writing, as Derrida has often argued, but here in terms of automation and teletechnoscientific machines–a survival that is claimed for the purpose of immunity, but whose technical means are usually denied, repressed, and disavowed. Immunity is thus paired with auto-immunity, in the ambiguous pact of an “enemy of life in the service of life” (48).
     
    An insistent motif in Derrida’s essay is that of the source, here defined as always split and divided, “two sources in one”: a source haunted by its double, indeed by its duplication and dissemination. “The same unique source divides itself mechanically, automatically, and sets itself reactively in opposition to itself” (28). Against this reactive logic, Derrida asserts that the two sources do not oppose but rather “contaminate” each other (29). Here, at the wellspring of community, its very re-source, there can be no immunity from contamination. The viral and the ghost derive from this haunted place, where self is bound to otherness, identity to mediation, community to teletechnological dislocation. While the sense of a contaminated source often spurs technophobia, fears of contagion, necropolitics, and wars of religion, it also attests to an “auto-co-immunity” that defies the vain claims to immunity, self-defense, and aggression. A secret tradition derives from this source, a “spectral tradition,” Derrida says, always haunted by its uncanny other (51). This tradition provides another means to ground community, to reckon with the phantom, and to accommodate viral contagion. “Community as com-mon auto-immunity: no community <is possible> that would not cultivate its own auto-immunity, a principle of sacrificial self-destruction ruining the principle of self-protection (that of maintaining its self-integrity intact), and in this view of some sort of invisible and spectral sur-vival” (51). We have traced a similar spectral tradition in our history of media communities and their haunted sources; what is “crucial enough to pass along” from each instance of the well is a haunting auto-immunity that defies the script of terror and the necropolitical imperative.
     

    III.

     

    I do not know how long I sat peering down that well.
     

    H.G. Wells

     
    On December 30, 2006, three years after he was pulled from the “spider hole” where he had been hiding, Saddam Hussein was put to death. The execution was recorded on a cell phone and quickly went viral on the web; for weeks it was one of the most popular videos on YouTube. “Welcome to the sordid world of the execution chamber, brought to you by the YouTube generation,” said Amnesty International (Huggler). While Amnesty’s response to the flawed trial and execution of Hussein was morally principled, its righteous and sarcastic targeting of YouTube is somewhat less so. Indeed, Amnesty’s indignation scarcely hides its scapegoating reflex, which would blame social networking and file-sharing youngsters for the events they merely witness. And in a familiar turn, fears of internet crime, perversion and indecency are attributed to a generation of seemingly monstrous youths. These lapses on the part of the world’s preeminent moral watchdog signal a crisis, not only of the morality of online spectatorship, but also of the discourse of morality itself.
     
    The YouTube execution video seems to realize the terrible premise of The Ring. A horrifying message of death is transmitted virally by seemingly amoral subjects, infecting the larger world, if not with death itself, then with the off-limits world of capital punishment. In so doing, it also makes explicit The Ring‘s necropolitical implications. The privilege of wired youths is brutally manifested as the corollary of a vengeful and opportunistic neocolonial massacre in Iraq. It is no doubt chilling to imagine that some of the video’s viewers may have enjoyed the spectacle. If so, one may assume that those who did were the hapless consumers of media manipulation that equated Hussein with Bin Laden, and thereby with evil itself. In these terms, such morally crippled viewers would be not so much guilty parties as unwitting victims of a demonizing media, agent of the state, that forges a national community with the fictional resources of terror, horror, and delusion. As children, they may submit more readily, yet surely less accountably, than as adults who accede to that ideology. The YouTube execution video is the late progeny of CNN, the monster from Midland, and the phantom public is repeatedly conjured to rally in wonder and horror at the spectacle of its secret necropolitics.
     
    Amnesty’s moral lapse betrays a desire to assign blame to a particular party, even one as amorphous as a “generation.” In so doing, it passes over the complexity of the file-sharing site as venue for multiple and contradictory political interests. It is notable, for instance, that internet file-sharing allowed for massive dissemination of the controversial images from Abu Ghraib. Similarly, during the demonstrations that followed the Iranian elections in 2009, video clips of a young woman’s dying moments went viral on the web, promoted by CNN in many links and stories.23 YouTube constitutes less a forum than the switchboard of a global public sphere, a multitude that is centripetal and centrifugal, its popularity variously pulled into the orbit of corporate power and escaping the dictates of the market, morality, and law. Here again, virality is highly ambiguous, connoting both the subversive promise of popular agency and the cynicism of marketing, which cheerfully adopts the language of disease to hawk its wares. Inevitably, then, even viral popularity is the object of manipulation. One programmer, selling his services to companies avid to monopolize the site, gloats at the host of techniques he employs to orchestrate artificial virality; in a technique called “strategic tagging,” he succeeds in “leading viewers down the rabbit hole” (Greenberg).” Cynical as it is, the hacker’s metaphor is strikingly apt: every viewer becomes a young Alice accidentally fallen into a world of primal fears and fantasies. From the live telecast from the San Marino well, to Midland, Wood’s Hole, and YouTube, media communities converge in the insistent figure of a young girl in danger. The cynicism of the YouTube hacker is a fitting rejoinder to the hypocrisy of its television and cable precedents. Despite corporate inroads on the site, YouTube, unlike television and cable, remains a broadcast site without a center. Its videos derive not from a single source or well but from global non-point sources of virality. And it is precisely this non-point source of internet “pollution” that seems to exasperate Amnesty and drive its moral accusation.
     
    World-wide wells? In 1895, the futurist H.G. Wells offers such a vision in The Time Machine, a moral fable of the dangers of technology and of cultural decline. The fears and monstrosities evoked by YouTube’s excesses seem anticipated in Wells’s wells. Having voyaged far into a degenerate human future, Wells’s Time Traveler notices that the landscape of England is studded with mysterious wells that lead to a monstrous underworld. He learns to his horror that a devolved race of humans lives underground, climbing at night from the innumerable wells to prey on the happy race of the Eloi. The monstrous Morlocks, whom he at first mistakes for ghosts, are the victims of a necropolitical division of man into laborers and capitalists, and though they devolve underground, they retain a physical and mechanical advantage over their former masters. Wells’s story is a cautionary tale of political oppression, evoking as well the haunting psychic terms of Freud’s “The ‘Uncanny.‘” Futurist, moralist, and fictional inventor of the atomic bomb, Wells chose to sign with his own name the dark passage to the haunting world of the necropolitical other. Ironically, however, today Wells’s vision serves instead to rally a panicked world against that enemy. In Stephen Spielberg’s War of the Worlds (2005), the battle against the alien species is made to echo with colonial war in the Arab and Muslim world, and in this way, the hysterical tone of the Cold War is updated to evoke the polarizing fears of the “clash of civilizations.”24 The beginning of the film invokes a familiar image: in the city square, a Norman Rockwell small-town community, the townfolk gather around a hole opened up in the earth. A phantom public, conjured by Hollywood, they are spectators of an imaginary other. Out of that hole, a monstrous machine emerges, and before it proceeds to vaporize the public, it blinks a giant eye at the fascinated onlookers.
     

    John Culbert is Research Associate at the Critical Theory Institute, UC Irvine. He is the author of Paralyses: Literature, Travel and Ethnography in French Modernity (University of Nebraska Press, forthcoming 2010). This essay derives from his current research project on space, spectrality, and modern memory.
     

    Acknowledgement

     
    My thanks to Dina Al-Kassim, Jonathan Hall, Daniel Katz, Targol Mesbah, Kavita Philip, and Ward Smith, who commented on earlier drafts of this essay.
     

    Endnotes

     
    1. Speaking of the photograph of the would-be assassin Lewis Payne by Alexander Gardner, Barthes says, “This will be and this has been; I observe with horror an anterior future of which death is the stake…. I shudder, like Winnicott’s psychotic patient, over a catastrophe which has already occurred. Whether or not the subject is already dead, every photograph is this catastrophe” (Camera Lucida 96).

     

     
    2. The more recent English version of this essay translates “instant recourse” as “last recourse.” See Derrida, Psyche 291. Neither translation, however, fully captures the resonance of Derrida’s “dernière instance,” which combines the finality of the “last” with the iterability of the “latest.” Further, Derrida’s “instance” plays on the notion of an appeal, as to a judge, over a death sentence, and suggests that Barthes’ punctum confronts the viewer with a specter that cannot be put to rest.

     

     
    3. For the authoritative account of this history, see Ilan Pappe, The Ethnic Cleansing of Palestine.

     

     
    4. The memorial plaque to Kathy Fiscus at the San Marino Public Library reads, “A little girl who brought the world ‘together’ for a ‘moment.’” The scare quotes are eloquent in their very incoherence.

     

     
    5. Brokaw pays his respects to Chambers, his former colleague, on the opening page of KTLA’s News at Ten.

     

     
    6. Roberto Esposito’s Bíos devotes a chapter to what he sees as a theoretical slippage in Foucault between sovereignty as death-dealing power and the more modern governmentality devoted to “health, longevity, and wealth” (36). Mbembe’s postcolonial perspective allows him to solve what Esposito calls an “aporetic knot” (40) in Foucault’s theory of modern power by insisting that sovereign power continues to exert its force in colonial and neo-colonial rule. Esposito’s book advances its own “thanatopolitics” but makes no mention of Mbembe.

     

     
    7. Mellencamp highlights the “myth of the frontier” in the Challenger disaster, thus bringing out an uncanny resonance between the story of Baby Jessica and the ill-fated flight of would-be “Teacher in Space” Christa McAuliffe (256).

     

     
    8. Rheingold’s other favored figure of community, modeled after sociologist Ray Oldenburg’s “Third Place,” is similarly dubious. Oldenburg’s Third Place–a forum for community between the poles of home and work–was famously taken up as a predatory corporate business model by Starbucks Coffee. Curiously, Oldenburg advances the notion of the Third Place in his The Great Good Place, the title of which echoes that of a Henry James tale. Oldenburg thus inadvertently pairs his nostalgic appeal for a lost public sphere with a supernatural ghost story.

     

     
    9. Andy and Larry Wachowski’s Matrix trilogy provides a compelling version of this narrative. Alex Rivera’s more recent Sleep Dealer (2008) cleverly updates The Matrix by giving its premise a neo-colonial and necropolitical spin.

     

     
    10. My argument here is indebted to Judith Butler, who argues that “enigmatic articulations” and the “failure to narrate” provide the grounds for ethics, conceived as “the risk, if not the certainty, of a certain kind of death, the death of the subject who cannot, who can never, fully recuperate the conditions of its own emergence.” See Butler, Giving an Account of Oneself, 64–5.

     

     
    11. Based on Koji Suzuki’s 1991 novel Ringu, the story’s sequels and adaptations seem themselves to follow a viral logic; Suzuki would compose a trilogy of novels on the theme, which also inspired a manga series before Nakata adapted Ringu for the screen. Several film remakes, sequels, and prequels followed, both in Japan and abroad; the Korean version of the film is titled The Ring Virus. For a fuller account of the Ring franchise and its inter-mediatic and cross-cultural adaptations, see Julian Stringer, “The Original and the Copy.” As the American scene is my focus here, in what follows I draw largely on Gore Verbinski’s The Ring, which is mainly faithful to the original Ringu, while indicating significant differences between the two films.

     

     
    12. To create an “uncanny” impression of stilted, even mechanical movement, Ringu employs a simple technique to great effect, adopted as well in The Ring: the girl’s dreadful emergence from the well is played backwards. The scene of her emergence, in other words, is actually based on a shot of her descending into the well, recalling in a striking way Freud’s claim that what comes out of the unconscious derives from a prior repression.

     

     
    13. Mary Ann Doane has shown that the figure of the femme fatale in film mobilizes contradictory emotions about feminine agency and power, alternately desired and repelled. Significantly, Doane invokes the language of disease in speaking of the feminine agent; the femme fatale “is an ambivalent figure because she is not the subject of power but its carrier” (Femmes Fatales 2).

     

     
    14. Julian Stringer’s “The Original and the Copy” makes a similar case about The Ring, arguing from an adaptation studies standpoint that the notions of “originality” and “fidelity” are called into question by the franchise’s complex borrowings and rewritings across many media and cultures. But in an essay that deliberately excludes any concern with “content,” “style” or “‘meaning’” (the latter in scare quotes), Stringer passes over the ethical implications of the film’s missing source, and in this way makes adaptation studies itself a medium for passing on the film’s curse (305). “The Ring virus itself resembles the very processes of textual translation it so gleefully spawns. Ring, The Ring, and all the rest, provide a paradigmatic example of the kinds of cultural ‘retellings’ [that] have by now completely infiltrated contemporary media culture” (304). Our approach here is different; if Ringu is indeed the “paradigmatic example” of our media culture, as Stringer puts it, we must certainly ask what its haunting and sociopathic message shares with those larger networks of viral communications and entertainment media.

     

     
    15. Keenan’s essay critiques the notion of a public sphere composed of citizens who, supplied with raw information, might be trusted to take rationally-informed decisions. “The conceit or fantasy of this kind of public sphere must, after Bosnia if nowhere else, contend with what we could call the rule of silence–no image speaks for itself, let alone speaks directly to our capacity for reason. Images always demand interpretation, even or especially emotional images” (“Publicity and Indifference” 113).

     

     
    16. “Horror is the least interruptible of all film genres,” Clover claims. “That uninterruptibility itself bears witness to the compulsive nature of the stories it tells” (“Her Body” 95).

     

     
    17. Such “misrecognition” takes on an additional twist in the process of translating Ringu into an American version. If, as Akira Lippit argues in Shadow Optics, all postwar Japanese film is marked by the history of the atomic strikes, Ringu‘s haunting would carry a quite different legacy of victimhood and survival than The Ring (images of crawling stricken bodies in Ringu‘s cursed video are evocative here). A foreclosed history thus returns to the United States in The Ring‘s cursed video, haunting the very process of translation.

     

     
    18. Verbinski’s The Ring, in other respects more conventionally narrative than Ringu, conveys a more haunting noise than the original film, in which the sound-effects invoke familiar codes of cinematic dread and suspense. Here, Verbinski may have drawn on Kiyoshi Kurosawa’s Séance (1999), which features a similar enigmatic sound as in The Ring whenever a spirit is about to appear. The motif of the enigmatic sound in Séance is linked to an insistent theme of recording and playback; one of the film’s protagonists, the husband of the spirit-medium, is a sound engineer.

     

     
    19. This echoes a scene from Tobe Hooper’s film Poltergeist (1982), in which the young Carol Anne sits rapt in front of a scrambled screen, listening to the faintly audible whisperings of the ghosts haunting her family’s home. This scene, and the opening sequence that shows in extreme close-up a late-night TV sign-off message (patriotic monuments and the national anthem), are perhaps the only “uncanny” moments in the film’s formulaic moral spectacle of terror. The Poltergeist series anticipates The Ring‘s premise of a haunted video: the actress who played Carol Anne, among other actors in the series, died a premature death, leading to the popular theory of a “Poltergeist curse.” Both Suzuki and Nakata have credited Poltergeist as influence on their work.

     

     
    20. Butler returns even more pointedly to this critique of Levinas in Frames of War, insisting on the political and mediatic framings that constrain the scope of ethical responsiveness. “It is not enough to say, in a Levinasian way, that the claim is made upon me prior to my knowing and as an inaugurating instance of my coming into being. That may be formally true, but its truth is of no use to me if I lack the conditions for responsiveness that allow me to apprehend it in the midst of this social and political life” (Frames of War 179).

     

     
    21. “In the occult society of those who have sworn together [des conjurés], certain subjects, either individual or collective, represent forces and ally themselves together in the name of common interests to combat a dreaded political adversary, that is, also to conjure it away. For to conjure means also to exorcise: to attempt to destroy and to disavow a malignant, demonized, diabolized force, most often an evil-doing spirit, a specter, a kind of ghost” (Derrida, Specters of Marx 47–8).

     

     
    22. In the wake of 9/11, Derrida applied the model of an “autoimmune crisis” to an analysis of terrorism and the security state. See Giovanna Borradori, Philosophy in a Time of Terror: Dialogues with Jürgen Habermas and Jacques Derrida. On a similar “paradigm of immunization,” see also Roberto Esposito, Bíos, 45–77.

     

     
    23. Neda Agha-Soltan, the girl in the graphic video clips, rolls her eyes toward the camera at the moment of losing consciousness. An early comment posted to an online discussion thread was evocative of The Ring‘s haunting curse: “While viewing it, I wished I could turn back and had never clicked the play button.” Craig Stoltz, “#Neda and the Power of the Viral Image.”

     

     
    24. At the beginning of the alien attack, the protagonist’s daughter is working on a homework assignment dealing with the Algerian War of Independence. The father reacts with disgust to the Arab food she offers him, a small gesture rich in necropolitical implications.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Al-Kassim, Dina. On Pain of Speech: Fantasies of the First Order and the Literary Rant. Berkeley: University of California Press, 2010. Print.
    • Asad, Talal. “Trying to Understand French Secularism.” Political Theologies. Eds. Hent de Vries and Lawrence E. Sullivan. New York: Fordham University Press, 2006. 494–526. Print.
    • Azoulay, Ariella. The Civil Contract of Photography. Trans. Rela Mazali and Ruvik Danieli. New York: Zone Books, 2008. Print.
    • Barthes, Roland. Camera Lucida. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Hill and Wang, 1981. Print.
    • —. “The Great Family of Man.” Mythologies. Trans. Annette Lavers. New York: Hill and Wang, 1972. 100–102. Print.
    • Belkin, Lisa. “Death on the CNN Curve.” The New York Times Magazine, July 23, 1995. Print.
    • Borradori, Giovanna. Philosophy in a Time of Terror: Dialogues with Jürgen Habermas and Jacques Derrida. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2003. Print.
    • Butler, Judith. Frames of War. London and New York: Verso, 2009. Print.
    • —. Giving an Account of Oneself. New York: Fordham University Press, 2005. Print.
    • —. Precarious Life: The Powers of Mourning and Violence. London: Verso, 2004.
    • Chambers, Ross. “The Responsibility of Responsiveness: Criticism in an Age of Witness.” Paroles Gelées 14:2 (1996): 9–27. Print.
    • Chambers, Stan, and Lynn Price. KTLA’s News at Ten: Sixty Years with Stan Chambers. Lake Forest, California: Behler Publications, 2008. Print.
    • Clover, Carol J. “Her Body, Himself: Gender in the Slasher Film.” Fantasy and the Cinema. Ed. James Donald. London: British Film Institute, 1989. 91–133. Print.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Faith and Knowledge.” Religion. Eds. Jacques Derrida and Gianni Vattimo. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1998. 1–78. Print.
    • —. Learning to Live Finally: An Interview with Jean Birnbaum. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Hoboken, N.J.: Melville House Publishing, 2007. Print.
    • —. Specters of Marx: The State of the Debt, The Work of Mourning, and the New International. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. London: Routledge, 1994. Print.
    • —. The Work of Mourning. Eds. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2001. Print.
    • —. Psyche: Inventions of the Other. Vol. 1. Eds. Peggy Kamuf and Elizabeth Rottenberg. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2007. Print.
    • Doane, Mary Ann. Femmes Fatales: Feminism, Film Theory, Psychoanalysis. London: Routledge, 1991. Print.
    • —. “Information, Crisis, Catastrophe.” Logics of Television: Essays in Cultural Criticism. Ed. Patricia Mellencamp. Bloomington: University of Indiana Press, 1990. 222–239. Print.
    • Esposito, Roberto. Bíos: Biopolitics and Philosophy. Trans. Timothy Campbell. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2008. Print.
    • Felman, Shoshana. “Henry James: Madness and the Risks of Practice (Turning the Screw of Interpretation).” The Turn of the Screw: Authoritative Text, Contexts, Criticism. By Henry James. Eds. Deborah Esch and Jonathan Warren. New York: Norton, 1999. 196–228. Print.
    • Felman, Shoshana, and Dori Laub, eds. Testimony: Crises of Witnessing in Literature, Psychoanalysis and History. London and New York: Routledge, 1992. Print.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “The ‘Uncanny.’” Writings on Art and Literature. Ed. James Strachey. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1997. 193–233. Print.
    • Girard, René. Violence and the Sacred. Trans. Patrick Gregory. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1977. Print.
    • Greenberg, Dan. “The Secret Strategies Behind Many ‘Viral’ Videos.” TechCrunch. Np. 22 Nov. 2007. Web. 11 Nov. 2008.
    • Huggler, Justin. “After the YouTube execution, what now for death penalty?” The Independent. 4 Jan. 2007. Web. 15 Feb. 2007.
    • Jessica’s Well. n.d. Web. 7 Apr. 2009.
    • Keenan, Thomas. Fables of Responsibility: Aberrations and Predicaments in Ethics and Politics. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1997. Print.
    • —. “Publicity and Indifference (Sarajevo on Television).” PMLA 117:1 (January 2002): 104–116. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Klein, Naomi. The Shock Doctrine: The Rise of Disaster Capitalism. New York: Metropolitan Books, 2007. Print.
    • Laplanche, Jean. Essays on Otherness. Ed. John Fletcher. London: Routledge, 1999. Print.
    • Laplanche, Jean, and Jean-Bertrand Pontalis. “Fantasy and the Origins of Sexuality.” Formations of Fantasy. Eds. Victor Burgin, James Donald, Cora Kaplan. London: Methuen: 1986. Print.
    • Latham, Rob. Consuming Youth: Vampires, Cyborgs, and the Culture of Consumption. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2002. Print.
    • Liebman, Stuart. “On New German Cinema, Art, Enlightenment, and the Public Sphere: An Interview with Alexander Kluge.” October 46 (Fall 1988): 23–59. Print.
    • [CrossRef]
    • Lippit, Akira Mizuta. Atomic Light (Shadow Optics). Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2005. Print.
    • Mbembe, Achille. “Necropolitics.” Trans. Libby Meintjes. Public Culture 15:1 (2003): 11–40. Print.
    • [Project MUSE]
    • Mellencamp, Patricia. “TV Time and Catastrophe, or Beyond the Pleasure Principle of Television.” Logics of Television: Essays in Cultural Criticism. Ed. Patricia Mellencamp. Bloomington: University of Indiana Press, 1990. 240–266. Print.
    • Oldenburg, Ray. The Great Good Place: Cafés, Coffee Shops, Bookstores, Bars, Hair Salons and Other Hangouts at the Heart of a Community. New York: Paragon House, 1989. Print.
    • Pappe, Ilan. The Ethnic Cleansing of Palestine. Oxford: Oneworld Publications, 2006. Print.
    • Poster, Mark. “Nations, Identities, and Global Technologies.” What’s the Matter with the Internet? Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 2001. 101–128. Print.
    • Rancière, Jacques. The Future of the Image. Trans. Gregory Elliot. London: Verso, 2007. Print.
    • Rheingold, Howard. The Virtual Community: Homesteading on the Electronic Frontier. Boston: MIT Press, 2000. Print.
    • The Ring. Dir. Gore Verbinski. Dreamworks, 2002. Film.
    • Ringu. Dir. Hideo Nakata. Omega Project, 1998. Film.
    • Robbins, Bruce. “The Public as Phantom.” Introduction. The Phantom Public Sphere. Ed. Bruce Robbins. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1993. vii-xxvi. Print.
    • Stoltz, Craig. “#Neda and the Power of the Viral Image,” The Huffington Post. 22 Jun. 2009. Web. 22 Jun. 2009.
    • Stringer, Julian. “The Original and the Copy: Nakata Hideo’s Ring (1998).” Japanese Cinema: Texts and Contexts. Eds. Alastair Phillips and Julian Stringer. Abingdon: Routledge, 2007. 296–307. Print.
    • Warner, Michael. “The Mass Public and the Mass Subject.” The Phantom Public Sphere. Ed. Bruce Robbins. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1993. 234–256. Print.

     

  • Notes on Contributors

    Stephanie Boluk is a Ph.D. student in English Literature at the University of Florida. She is currently writing her dissertation on seriality while working as an editor for the open access journal Imagetext. She has written essays and reviews for The Journal of Visual Culture, New Media and Society, and the proceedings of the 2009 Digital Arts and Culture Conference (forthcoming December 2009).

    John Culbert is Research Associate at the Critical Theory Institute, UC Irvine. He is the author of Paralyses: Literature, Travel and Ethnography in French Modernity (University of Nebraska Press, forthcoming 2010). This essay derives from his current research project on space, spectrality, and modern memory.

    Bernard Duyfhuizen is Professor of English and Associate Dean of Arts & Sciences at the University of Wisconsin-Eau Claire. He is the editor of the journal Pynchon Notes. He is the author of Narratives of Transmission (Fairleigh Dickinson, 1992) and his articles have appeared in such journals as Postmodern Culture, College English, ELH, Comparative Literature, Novel, Modern Fiction Studies, and Studies in the Novel. A member of the musical group Eggplant Heroes, he has a CD, After This Time, forthcoming in 2010.

    Ulrik Ekman is Assistant Professor in Digital Aesthetics and Communication at the Department of Arts and Cultural Studies, University of Copenhagen. He is the coordinator of more than 150 researchers in the Nordic and internationally oriented research network, “The Culture of Ubiquitous Information,” and is currently involved in two book projects directly related to the problematics dealt with in this network. Ekman is the editor of Throughout: Art and Culture Emerging with Ubiquitous Computing (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, forthcoming), a comprehensive anthology of more than 40 research articles from scholars across the world at work on the cultural and technical implications of the third wave of computing. He is also writing a book on the aesthetics of contemporary media art and culture focusing on the increasing import for our life form of haptic technics and spatio-temporality.

    Louis Kaplan is Associate Professor of history and theory of photography and new media at the University of Toronto and Director of the Institute of Communication and Culture at the University of Toronto Mississauga. His books include Laszlo Moholy-Nagy: Biographical Writings (1995), American Exposures: Photography and Community (2005), and The Strange Case of William Mumler, Spirit Photographer (2008). He is co-editing (with John Paul Ricco) “Regarding Jean-Luc Nancy” as a special issue of the Journal of Visual Culture (April 2010). Another essay, on “Bataille’s Laughter,” is forthcoming in John Welchman, ed., Black Sphinx: On the Comedic in Modern Art (J.R.P./Ringier).

    Neil Larsen teaches in the Critical Theory and Comparative Literature Programs at UC Davis. He is the author of Modernism and Hegemony (University of Minnesota Press, 1990); Reading North by South (University of Minnesota Press, 1995); and Determinations (Verso, 2001). He lectures and publishes frequently in the areas of Marxian critical theory and Latin American studies.

    Brian Lennon is Assistant Professor of English and Comparative Literature at the Pennsylvania State University. He is the author of In Babel’s Shadow: Multilingual Literatures, Monolingual States, forthcoming in 2010 from the University of Minnesota Press.

    Phillip Novak is an Associate Professor at Le Moyne College, with a joint appointment in the Department of English and the Department of Communication and Film Studies. His published work includes essays on William Faulkner, Toni Morrison, and Walter Mosley, on movie musicals, and on Roman Polanski’s Chinatown.

    Richard Rushton is Lecturer in the Department of Media, Film and Cultural Studies, Lancaster University, UK. He has published articles on film and cultural theory, and has two books forthcoming: What is Film Theory? (Open University Press) and The Reality of Film (Manchester University Press).

    Peter Schwenger is Resident Fellow at the Centre for the Study of Theory and Criticism, University of Western Ontario. He has published Phallic Critiques (1984), Letter Bomb (1991), Fantasm and Fiction (1999) and The Tears of Things (2006). His current project is titled “Liminal: Literature between Waking and Dreaming.”

  • Notes on Contributors

    Vicki Callahan is an Associate Professor in the Peck School of the Arts at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee and a Visiting Scholar at the University of Southern California’s Institute for Multimedia Literacy. She is the editor of the recent collection, Reclaiming the Archive: Feminism and Film History (Wayne State University Press, 2010), and with Lina Srivastava co-authors <http://transmediaactivism.wordpress.com>, a resource site for implementing cross platform media strategies for social change.

    Patrick F. Durgin teaches cultural studies, literature, and writing at the School of the Art Institute of Chicago. His latest publications include a hybrid genre collaboration with Jen Hofer, The Route (Atelos, 2008), and essays on “post-ableist” poetics in Contemporary Women’s Writing and the Journal of Modern Literature. He is concluding work on a critical monograph entitled Indeterminacies and Intentionalities: Toward a Poetics of Critical Values, as well as a play on the subject of failed bilingualism entitled PQRS: A Drama. As series editor and publisher, he has just finished work on The Kenning Anthology of Poets Theater: 1945-1985, edited by Kevin Killian and David Brazil, recently published by Kenning Editions (2010).

    Orit Halpern is an Assistant Professor of History and Media Studies at the New School for Social Research and Eugene Lang College. She works on histories of temporality, archiving, and representation in digital systems. Her manuscript The Eye of Time: Histories of Representation, Perception, and Archiving in Cybernetic Thought is currently under review. Her research has appeared or will be appearing in C-theory, Configurations, and the Journal of Visual Culture. She has also produced multi-media installations and web-based works at the intersection of art and science that have appeared in venues such as ZKM and Rhizome. Currently, she is working to develop new lab-based research spaces integrating art, design, and the social sciences at the New School and Parsons School of Design. She is the co-founder of The Visual Culture Lab, a group bringing historians and theorists of media, art, design, and politics together to rethink the relationship between politics and aesthetics, and she is also a member of the Center for Transformative Media at Parsons. All her work and material can be accessed at: www.orithalpern.net.

    Michael Harrison is Assistant Professor of Spanish at Monmouth College. He is currently working on a book project exploring the development of queer culture in Spain through an analysis of Spanish comics and graphic novels.  

    Ken Hillis is Professor Media and Technology Studies, Department of Communication Studies, The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. His research interests focus on the intersection of the forms that media technologies take and the techniques, practices and desires such technologies promote, enable, and constrain. Publications include Digital Sensations: Space, Identity and Embodiment (1999, Minnesota), Everyday eBay: Culture, Collecting and Desire (2006, Routledge), Online A Lot Of The Time: Ritual, Fetish, Sign (2009, Duke). He is currently co-authoring Google and The Culture of Search (Routledge).

    Lili Hsieh is Assistant Professor in the English Department at the National Central University, Taiwan. She teaches on transnational modernisms, theory and practice of translation, and feminist theory. She works on poststructuralist theories of affect and its role in transnational politics and has published a few journal articles on related issues in Virginia Woolf’s Three Guineas, the Buddhist parable Tu Zicun, the empire of English language in Taiwan, and Brian Massumi’s Parables for the Virtual and Eve Sedgwick’s Touching Feeling. She is completing a book manuscript on the worlding of the politics of affect in Deleuze, Lacan, and transnational feminisms.  

    Agnieszka Pokojska is a freelance translator and editor, tutor in literary translation at the Jagiellonian University in Krakow, and author of a number of articles on translation. Her translations into Polish include poems by Seamus Heaney, Robert Pinsky, and Derek Walcott. Her translations of Grzegorz Wróblewski’s poetry appeared in the anthology Carnivorous Boy Carnivorous Bird, in Lyric Poetry Review, West Wind Review, Eclectica, Jacket Magazine, The Journal, Cambridge Literary Review, The Delinquent and Poetry Wales and most recently in the chapbook A Rarity, to be published by Cervena Barva Press.  

    Alessandro Porco is a Ph.D. student in English Literature at the State University of New York at Buffalo. He is currently completing a dissertation on hip-hop poetics and American poetry. He is the editor of Population Me: Essays on David McGimpsey (Palimpsest Press, 2010) and writes an online hip-hop column for Maisonneuve, Montreal’s city magazine.  

    Paul Stephens is a postdoctoral fellow at the Fox Center for Humanistic Inquiry at Emory University. From 2005 to 2009 he taught in the literature department at Bard College. His recent articles have appeared in Social Text, Rethinking Marxism, and Don’t Ever Get Famous: New York Writing Beyond the New York School. He is currently completing a book-length project titled The Poetics of Information Overload: From Gertrude Stein to Conceptual Writing.  

    Grzegorz Wróblewski, born in 1962 in Gdansk and raised in Warsaw, has been living in Copenhagen since 1985. He has published nine volumes of poetry and two collections of short prose pieces in Poland; three books of poetry, a book of poetic prose and an experimental novel (translations) in Denmark; and a book of selected poems in Bosnia-Herzegovina, as well as a selection of plays. His work has been translated into eight languages.

    The English translations of his poems and/or plays have appeared in London Magazine, Poetry London, Magma Poetry, Parameter Magazine, Poetry Wales, The Delinquent, Chicago Review, 3rd bed, Eclectica, Mississippi Review, Absinthe: New European Writing, Common Knowledge, Word Riot, Practice: New Writing + Art, The Mercurian – A Theatrical Translation Review, Lyric, CounterPunch, Exquisite Corpse, Guernica, Jacket Magazine, Otoliths, Cambridge Literary Review, West Wind Review and in the following anthologies: Altered State: The New Polish Poetry (Arc Publications, Todmorden, UK 2003), Carnivorous Boy Carnivorous Bird (Zephyr Press, Brookline, USA 2004), A Generation Defining Itself – In Our Own Words (MW Enterprises, USA 2007). Selected poems are available in Our Flying Objects (Equipage Press, Cambridge, UK 2007), and new and selected poems are forthcoming in A Marzipan Factory (Otoliths, Rockhampton, Australia 2010). His chapbooks to date are: These Extraordinary People (erbacce-press, Liverpool, UK 2008) and Mercury Project (Toad Press, Claremont, USA 2008), and A Rarity (Cervena BarvaPress, W. Somerville, USA, 2009).

  • Liu’s Ethics of the Database

    Vicki Callahan (bio)
    University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee and University of Southern California
    vacall@uwm.edu

    Review of: Alan Liu. Local Transcendence: Essays on Postmodern Historicism and the Database. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2008. Print.

     

     

    In many ways, one might see Alan Liu’s collection, Local Transcendence: Essays on Postmodern Historicism and the Database, as a kind of retrospective or career long response to the issues raised by Katherine Hayles and Johanna Drucker’s individual reviews in the journal Criticism of his earlier book, The Laws of Cool: Knowledge Work and the Culture of Information. While Liu directly responds in the same issue with “Understanding Knowledge Work” to Hayles’s and Drucker’s queries regarding the definition and function of history and aesthetics–indeed regarding the very “future of the humanities”–in the information age, his Local Transcendence takes the discussion much further and into the world of methodology. In Local Transcendence, Liu not only maps out a critical approach that will draw together the diverse terrains of the humanities, arts, information, and technology, but also argues that this very interdisciplinarity is the crux of the method. Interdisciplinarity as method is vital not so much due to the breadth of data revealed, that is as additional content in itself, but rather because it produces a “line of flight” away from established and rigid knowledge systems to an “unclosed otherness” (Local 185).
     
    The question for Liu is: can there be an open method for history that can tell us anything politically instructive or ethically useful, especially in an age that has seen the so-called “death of theory,” “death of history,” “death of the author,” “death of the subject,” “death of cinema,” etc.? What, for Liu, is left in the absence of essential meanings except as Liu notes a sense of the “cool?” The “cool” as Liu defines it is basically whatever brand we have decided to take on from our corporate and media-saturated culture. Our larger fascination with endless flows of information and with perpetual innovation, a world-view of “creative destruction,” leaves us awash in data but strips the world of past knowledge that can anchor the present (Local 2-4). In such an environment, we do not have history but rather historicism–that is, only the signs or the effect(s) of a history (4). Moreover, for Liu our path of resistance comes from within our “cool culture” as a strategy of reversal or “destructive creation” and also from within postmodern historicism by turning its symptomatic “contingency” into a method (Local 11; “Understanding” 250). Ultimately, Liu maps out both the logic and critical method for our era of “remix culture,” a phrase perhaps more apt than “information age” at capturing the blurred worlds of creation/consumption, art/culture, data/media, form/content, persona/person, public/private of the current epoch.
     
    To understand the feasibility and value of Liu’s method as detailed in Local Transcendence–as well as to situate his work in relation to a range of current remix practices from the archive to the arts to rhetorical strategies–it is useful to turn to the Hayles and Drucker essays. Both Hayles and Drucker take issue with Liu’s “destructive creativity” as a value either for the arts or for the humanities. On the one hand, Hayles notes that this assumes a ubiquity of corporate culture in which we are trapped and can act only as borderline terrorists, albeit “critically” destructive ones. As Hayles quite rightly points out, the presumed corporate cultural “trap” and attendant critical subversion confirm the status quo via the negation or erasure of history since they effectively eliminate the possibility of imagining a counter-history or alternative positive possible pathways of resistance (236-239). Drucker is equally troubled by Liu’s vision for the arts as “destructive,” since it replays what she believes are tired oppositions from aesthetic discourses regarding the “resistance” of art (and specifically of the avant-garde) to dominant social/popular cultural order. Rather than a didactic or utopian purpose for the arts, Drucker says she prefers “embodied examples of a practice that has no purpose whatsoever except to be” (246-47).
     
    Of course, the discussion of the shape, objective, indeed possibility of history and the arts haunts these essays and Liu’s books, that is, what should teaching and scholarship look like given that the objects of study are themselves in question? Drucker argues for no less than an “overhaul” of academics from the object of study (“static artifacts”) to its purpose (“self-improvement” “moral uplift”) (“Games”). While “cultural preservation,” “critical thought,” and “artful expression” are core values retained in Drucker’s educational re-tooling, the revolution in digital media is not insignificant in shaping the new practice. The tools of digital media are not in themselves the core, but rather what one learns from the engagement or more specifically the practice of these tools–that is, a diverse and flexible set of skills across a range of informational, expressive, reflective and critical tasks (Drucker 246).
     
    Liu’s direct response to Drucker (and to Hayles) in his Criticism essay follows closely on Drucker’s (new) media literacy/fluency model, and indeed, he points to their collective work in assorted digital humanities initiatives that reflect the core values noted above. But a fault line appears towards the end of the essay when Liu draws a parallel between the objectives of formalist “close readings” and his own postmodernist approach in line with “deeply felt human ‘experience,’” which he claims shares an affinity with Drucker’s and Hayles’s attention in their work to “experience” and “embodiment,” respectively (“Understanding” 257). Setting aside whether or not these multiple uses and related terms share precisely the same meaning, it is more useful here that Liu’s comment seem to confirm that we are now forever in a culture of remix (and may very well always have been) from which nothing “new” or outside can emerge. While Drucker and Hayles may not give up all hope of the “new,” Liu implicitly exchanges this for the larger goal of education: “humanity” (252).
     
    Is the “humanity” that Liu pursues from within “postmodern historicism” any different qualitatively from the formalist, romanticist, or indeed enlightenment individualized notions of the self, something from which our postmodern “cool” must surely diverge? In Local Transcendence Liu both draws important connections between seemingly disparate forms–especially between romanticism and postmodernism–and shows how such linkages provide an insight into his method of “contingency” and have implications for our contemporary “humanity.”
     
    Both romanticism and postmodernism offer an important counter-movement to the singular rational historical line followed by the Enlightenment and to the current techno-instrumentalist teleology of “innovation” (Local 7). Moreover, both romanticism and postmodernism offer an aesthetic or style that can set out the principles to an historicist, i.e., non-unitary, method. Liu’s discussion of Wordsworth’s The Prelude (1805) points to the crucial romantic component–and key historicist principle–of immersion, and connects that quality to the “localism” and attention to contextual detail found in historicism. Further, Liu notes that Wordsworth seems to dislocate description from historical time as he blurs past and present temporality into a “now” (13). Thus within this aesthetic/critical frame, we are “in” or “immersed” in history and yet “free from history”–another key principle–that is, set loose from contextual and temporal blind spots and able to see “alternative pathways between past and future” (20).
     
    Liu’s third chapter meticulously explores the nuances and workings of “context” within cultural criticism. He notes that while it is necessary to provide detail for cultural criticism, it is not a sufficient basis for his critical approach and is at times a hindrance to what he believes should be the postmodern historicist objectives. Too often detail and cultural context are set up in stark opposition to theory and method, but in fact the rigidity of this resistance to theory, not to mention the reification of anti-method, turns into a deterministic method in and of itself (116). Here we are at the heart of his critique from within postmodern historicism, which is that detail and especially the mechanics of historicist detail conceived as a densely layered repetitive loop of struggle and resistance lead to a totalizing, detached, and far too comfortable observation of culture (137). More specifically, the sheer volume of detail, as well as its reiterative nature, makes this a “faceless” enterprise that turns away from the needed “emancipation seeded within, but not without ethical choice [that is] able to emerge from, the complexity of the past” (136, 21).
     
    If the ethical turn brings us back to the question of “humanity,” Liu’s situating of our “choice” as both within and without history shifts the ground from the unique and highly individualized romantic self, but not to one completely in the domain of the “cool” postmodern “subjectivity.” That said, the model for ethical choice and thus our method of contingent postmodern historicism is derived for Liu from the intersection of–or perhaps rather the related rhetoric found within–romanticism and postmodernism, which we might label as assemblage, montage, or remix depending upon the context and media forms we might implement. Time and again, Liu references Wordsworth and the romantics for their nonlinear pathways, a skipping between, zigzagging around time and objects as illustrative of the contingent method. Perhaps more significantly, he likens the contingent “method” to a chain of modernist and postmodern “reverie,” encompassing cubism, Eisensteinian montage, and ultimately, less directly but logically, the database form.
     
    Like Drucker, Liu invokes digital media as important historicist tools not for any utopian qualities they have themselves, nor primarily for the media fluency required in our digital age (which Drucker promotes), but precisely for the rhetorical opportunities they present towards a method. Ethical choice, without moral determinism or relativism -that is to say, “humanity” without singularity, universals, or moral anarchy–comes from a strategic engagement with information (117). Here, Liu’s commentary on the “pragmatics” of interdisciplinarity is instructive about his idea that rhetoric and diverse media forms are central to his method. An interdisciplinary approach is not important because it transcends traditional boundaries (since it often only establishes other larger ones) but because it can help us rethink the assumptions and boundaries within our own “home” disciplines. It accomplishes this through the movement or translation of information from one discipline (or format) to another. As Liu notes, the “relation between the home discipline and the other or exotic discipline is really the relation between what might be termed a convention and a figure for knowledge”–in effect, a tropology–whose goal is “the very art of doing an end run around epistemological closure in order to say the impossible” (181). Visual media, images, extend that gap between convention and figure, or rather open up more possible pathways against closure (183).
     
    The digital and networked world transforms the translation of information exponentially but also qualitatively. For Liu, that is, digital data’s immaterial “base” facilitates exchange from one format to another, one receiver to another, thereby erasing form/content distinctions (234-35). Importantly, however, data translation occurs as the result of a highly structured consistent logic, meaning that this “open-ended” movement occurs within a “closed” system, and thus potentially ensnares us within the ethos of the endless circulation of meaningless signs. How then does the digital fit within Liu’s paradigm–can it maintain the ethical turn and “humanity” within this structure? Here it is important to remember that Liu’s strategy is not simply one of movement and displacement; it is a contingent, not random methodology. Liu closes the eighth chapter, “Transcendental Data: Towards a Cultural History and Aesthetics of the New Encoded Discourse,” by asking, “what experience of the structurally unknowable can still be conveyed in the structured media of knowledge (databases, XML, and so on)? Perhaps the arts–if they can just crack the code of ordinary cool and make it flower–know” (236).
     
    While Liu prioritizes the arts, especially the romantics and 20th century avant-garde, both here and throughout the book, his title for chapter eight and his emphasis on “contingency”–what lies next to–are particularly instructive. That is, the chapter title situates “cultural history and aesthetics” in proximity, or in conversation, not in dialectical opposition or hierarchical form. Here we might well return to Liu’s attention to the kind of movement he values early in his discussion of Wordsworth’s The Prelude, which allies the poetic and montage (13). The move is nonlinear but relational, or to put this another way, both within and outside of a history. In many ways, Liu’s discussion is reminiscent of assorted proponents of montage as a new form of language–or particularly, as in the case of the filmmaker Jean-Luc Godard, a new model for writing history.1 As James Williams notes, Godard sees montage (in cinematic and video form) as offering “a return to a moment before the order of linguistic and cinematic syntax has taken over and words and images have lost their immediacy, freedom, and innocence” (313). Godard’s epic series Histoire(s) du Cinéma (1988-1998) explicitly reasserts the “promise” of cinema and more specifically, of montage, to envision a more ethical world. This failed mission or “promise” is then reconfigured by Godard for video and digital media contexts with an intricately layered, collage like form that flows effortlessly between historical and cinematic epochs with a dazzling interweaving of text, image, sound, music, and spoken word collected from across a diverse spectrum of the arts and culture. Alifeleti Brown suggests in the journal Senses of Cinema that Godard’s Histoire(s) can be seen as pioneering model of remix/sampling culture as the work is driven exclusively by quotation, certainly testing the limits of copyright, while at the same time making no claims for rights for Histoire(s). A rich array of related experimental creative and critical efforts might then be sketched, which share and/or exceed the terrain mapped out by Godard’s montage: for example, Gregory Ulmer’s extensive work on electronic/digital fluency or “electracy“; Critical Art Ensemble’s assorted activism/artistic interventions and especially their “Utopian Plagiarism” in The Electronic Disturbance; Eduardo Navas’s history of “Remix“; and McKenzie Wark’s “Hacker Manifesto,” to note but a few.2 All of these works situate their effort in a dynamic interplay between the clearly “contingent” areas of aesthetics and history, and all have ethical/political objectives.
     
    I would like to close by noting that, in my experience, montage can play a strategic part when students use it to learn to make compelling and coherent arguments by editing together materials that often skip or zigzag across disciplinary terrains. Interdisciplinary translation, as we have seen through Liu’s investigations, forces reconsideration of received knowledge, but the rhetoric of “montage” can helps us to envision connections, to discern what is random and what is “contingent” (i.e., to see a field of relationships), and finally allows us to make ethical choices. Montage may at different times be called the “poetic” or a “remix”; it is a powerful method that may lead us out of the “cool” as Liu defines it and back to the “human” in its most open-ended sense of the term.
     

    Vicki Callahan is an Associate Professor in the Peck School of the Arts at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee and a Visiting Scholar at the University of Southern California’s Institute for Multimedia Literacy. She is the editor of the recent collection, Reclaiming the Archive: Feminism and Film History (Wayne State University Press, 2010), and with Lina Srivastava co-authors <http://transmediaactivism.wordpress.com>, a resource site for implementing cross platform media strategies for social change.

     

    Footnotes


    1. Godard’s video series, Histoire(s) du Cinéma (1988-1998), contains both the argument and the illustration of cinema as a tool for historical method.

     

     
    2. See also Wark’s “A Hacker Manifesto” Version 4.0.
     

    Works Cited

       

      • Brown, Alifeleti. “Histoire(s) du cinéma.” Annotations for January through March 2008 Melbourne Cinémathèque Screenings. Senses of Cinema. 2008. Web. 29 Apr.2010.
      • Critical Art Ensemble. The Electronic Disturbance. Autonomedia, 1994. 2009. Web. 29 Apr. 2010. [End Page 9]
      • Drucker, Johanna. “Games and the Market in Digital Futures.” Criticism 47.2 (Spring 2005): 241-247. Print.
      • Godard, Jean-Luc, dir. Histoire(s) du Cinéma, 1988-1998. Film.
      • Hayles, N. Katherine. “Attacking the Borg of Corporate Knowledge Work: The Achievement of Alan Liu’s The Laws of the Cool.” Criticism 47.2 (Spring 2005): 235-239. Print.
      • Liu, Alan. Local Transcendence: Essays on Postmodern Historicism and the Database. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2008. Print.
      • —. The Laws of the Cool: Knowledge Work and the Culture of Information. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2004. Print.
      • —. “Understanding Knowledge Work.” Criticism 47.2 (Spring 2005): 249-260. Web. 29 Apr. 2010.
      • Navas, Eduardo. Remix Theory. Word Press. 13 May 2010 Web. 29 Apr. 2010.
      • Ulmer, Gregory. Electronic Monuments, Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2005. Print.
      • Wark, McKenzie. A Hacker Manifesto. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2004. Print.
      • —. “A Hacker Manifesto.” Version 4.0. Ed. Joanne Richardson. n.d. Web. 29 Apr. 2010.
      • Williams, James. “The Signs amongst us: Jean-Luc Godard’s Histoire(s) du Cinema.” Screen 40.3 (September 1, 1999): 306-315. Print.

       

       
    • From Capital to Karma: James Cameron’s Avatar

      Ken Hillis (bio)
      University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill
      khillis@email.unc.edu

       

       

      James Cameron’s Avatar (2009) participates in an underacknowledged yet widespread contemporary resuscitation of Neoplatonism. In the Timaeus (c. 360 BCE), Plato introduces the concept of the demiurge: “Therefore, we may consequently state that: this world is indeed a living being endowed with a soul and intelligence . . . a single visible living entity containing all other living entities, which by their nature are all related” (29-30). Pandora, the distant, color-saturated moon on which most of Avatar‘s action takes place, is precisely such a world. The Egyptian-Roman philosopher Plotinus (c. 204-270 CE), influenced by Plato, identifies the demiurge as the nous, the divine mind–a universal One containing neither division nor distinction. Unlike the orthodox Christian belief expressed in the concept of ex nihilo, that a deliberative and thoughtful God created the universe out of nothing, Plotinus understands the cosmos as emanating ex deo (out of God), and, therefore, that the unfolding of the cosmos is a consequence of the existence of the One and a confirmation of its absolute transcendence. Plotinus’s concept of World Soul synthesizes these beliefs. While Avatar does not reference Neoplatonism directly, for Pandora’s humanoid inhabitants, the Na’vi, all Pandoran life, their own included, is organized through the power of Eywa. Eywa is, as the film’s narrative makes explicit, the indivisible “mother” who emanates from and is the crystallization of Pandora itself. She safeguards that world’s “balance of life.”
       
      We might expect critics on the right to denounce the film’s “soft-headed environmentalism” and identify Avatar as a product of “Hollywood’s long history of anti-military sloganeering”, as well as scorning the film as pagan, emblematic of a “Godless Hollywood” that “ignores, laughs at or disrespects religion” (Goldstein). Vatican Radio pronounced the film “a wink towards the pseudo-doctrines which have made ecology the religion of the millennium” (Squires). Patrick Goldstein suggests that “moviegoers are far more comfortable with a fuzzy, inspirational form of pantheism like ‘Avatar’ than they are with an openly biblical message” (Goldstein). While moviegoers cannot be so conveniently lumped together, the ideas depicted in the film that contribute to its “fuzzy . . . pantheism” help explain Avatar‘s enormous appeal.
       
      Now, to write within the academy about any contemporary influence of the Neoplatonic beliefs expressed in the concept of World Soul outside of philosophy or religious studies is not a common undertaking. The concept’s explicit metaphysical orientation, its inherent forms of magical thinking, are traditionally seen as largely opposing the foundations of empiricism, rationalism, dualism and materiality that inform Western academic thought. To examine Avatar as indicative of a wider popular resurgence of such metaphysical beliefs, however, does not mean that one must hold such beliefs.1 Nevertheless, Avatar‘s core politics are animated by its depiction of an idealized future society predicated on a carbon-based, biological network of networks operationalized through the metaphysical logic of World Soul. Avatar‘s future world, where the precepts of World Soul appear to have materialized through a fusion of a religious calling with those of networked sentience, appeals to contemporary U.S. society, which is both increasingly networked and professes a high degree of religious faith. Moreover, the film operates within a culture whose political economy is in part based on the technology that feeds into building the networked world that, in a virtuous circle, we are told as users we ought to desire. The fetishization of new digital technologies, and of the new more generally, plays a role here, yet in complementary or accretive fashion, so too do the immersive 3D techniques that Cameron applies to Hollywood filmmaking. 3D allows audiences greater experientially-induced identification with the onscreen spectacle, and the film’s coupling of technological affectivity with its genre hybridity of fantasy and science fiction works synergistically to propose to audiences that the fantastical “magical empiricism” on offer might actually come to pass. In short, the affect of the visual technology itself helps validate the potential that the Neoplatonic ideals on display can be actualized.
       
      Writing for Salon, Scott Mendelson calls the film “a staggering achievement in visual effects and 3D technology” (Mendelson). Technology is also the star of Andrew Leonard’s Salon review: “‘Avatar’ is a film that people want to see, because, quite simply, the 3D special effects used to create the astonishingly beautiful alien world of Pandora are, ahem, out of this world.” For the New York Times‘s Manohla Dargis, “‘Avatar’ shows us a future in which movies will invite us further into them and perhaps even allow us to choose not just the hero’s journey through the story, but also our own” (Dargis). “Amateur” reviewers on sites such as imdb.com variously assert that the film’s 3D effects work to include spectators in the cinematic experience in ways not before experienced. Computer generated (CG) animation allows Cameron to create what many consider a new cinematic spectacle. For many commentators, technology is Avatar‘s implicit hero.
       
      While Avatar has become the poster child for the much anticipated onslaught of 3D entertainment devices, I nonetheless find it odd but telling, given the culture’s ongoing fascination with networks and the information technologies upon which they rely, that the issue of the connections between networks and the world of spirit explicitly raised in the film’s narrative has been all but ignored by reviewers. In a Facebook review, science fiction author Samuel Delany does acknowledge that “the rhysomatic [sic] wholeness of the alien world is suggested several times,” but he is more concerned to argue that the film fails ethically due to its aesthetic incoherence. Chasm-wide plot holes, Delaney suggests, inhibit viewers from connecting the dots in ways that Cameron might have wished. What viewers are left with are the haptic sensations delivered through CG and 3D effects (Delany). Yet the “rhysomatic wholeness” noted by Delaney–a wholeness manifesting through a wetware- or carbon-based future world network–lies at the core of the film’s oddly nostalgic appeal: for two hours and forty-two minutes, spectators experience fluttering on the edges of a collective post-Hive Mind fantasy: an inverted prelapsarian vision of the individual as a networked empath who is also already part of the tree of knowledge. Experientially, then, the film’s outstanding special effects work synergistically with its depiction of the Na’vi as a pre-Cartesian society, a 3D global village literally in touch and connected with the wider sentient world they inhabit.
       
      As the film’s narrative unfolds, the Na’vi’s long queues of braided hair are revealed as neural links able to mesh with other Na’vi as well as with Pandora’s other sentient creatures, trees included, which also possess similar biologically-constituted, USB-like connective links. The Na’vi are more than “noble savages”: while conducting field experiments on the root system of one of Pandora’s giant trees, scientist Grace Augustine (Signourney Weaver), head of the corporate research unit responsible for developing avatar bodies that replicate the Na’vi, explains to her associates the power of the rhizomatic system that undergirds the “sacred” Hometree around which the Na’vi organize their existence. In Cameron’s screenplay, copyrighted in 2007 following a decade’s work, Augustine’s announcement occurs more than halfway through the film as part of an argument inside the corporation’s base of operations. In the film release, however, the revelation is depicted at the tree itself and occurs much earlier. This suggests a heightened comprehension by the filmmakers that Avatar‘s plot would cohere better if the idea that the Na’vi constitute a biological networked society were communicated earlier on. The key parts of Augustine’s dialog are as follows:
       

      I’m not talking about pagan voodoo here–I’m talking about something real and measureable in the biology of the forest. . . . What we think we know–is that there’s some kind of electrochemical communication between the roots of the trees. Like the synapses between neurons. Each tree has ten to the fourth connections to the trees around it, and there are ten to the twelfth trees on Pandora . . . That’s more connections than the human brain. You get it? It’s a network–a global network. And the Na’vi can access it–they can upload and download data-memories . . . . The wealth of this world isn’t in the ground–it’s all around us. The Na’vi know that, and they’re fighting to defend it.2

       

      The scene makes clear that the Na’vi form part of a sentient planetary whole–a network linked not through wires or Wi-Fi but through carbon-based forms of wetware. The entire network constitutes a biological life form. It is here that the film most directly reveals itself as participating in a resurgence of Neoplatonic thought reformulated to concord with what Manuel Castells terms “the rise of the network society” and the concomitant rise of real virtuality. The utopian suggestion is that the Na’vi have evolved biologically in ways that humans have not. Their network, while vulnerable to Earthly fire power, is vastly superior as a form of planetary intelligence to anything conceived by the human intelligence of Pandora’s marauding colonialists. Those humans in the film with whom the narrative asks us to identify are open to understanding the Na’vi as part of a global network within which each component constitutes a biological interface. As such, the Na’vi are allegorical, a figural device that serves to simulate the possible (and therefore, the desirable). By depicting the Na’vi in this way, the film hints at the seductive powers potentially available to beings of all kinds able to move beyond ideologies of overly atomistic individualism so as to see the world as One.

       
      The genealogy of Neoplatonic influence on Idealist expectations for transcendence through electronic and, more recently, digital technologies is lengthy. The Web and services such as Google offer a contemporary vision of the world’s intelligence as a single, organized network. Earlier Neoplatonically-inflected networked visions include H.G. Wells’s 1938 prophesy of a World Brain, Teilhard de Chardin’s 1950s utopian proposal for an electronic noosphere (1964), Kevin Kelly’s aforementioned Hive Mind that reduces each individual human to a “dumb terminal” until connected to electronic networks (1994), and Pierre Lévy’s concept of the electronic hyperbody (1997). What distinguishes Avatar‘s future vision of a Neoplatonic World Soul from these earlier proposals is that it can depict the actualization of a networked intelligence through an evolved collectivity of embodied agents, humanoid and otherwise, who retain individuality yet are always collectively conjoined to Eywa, the earth Mother. In this way, Pandora’s world of empathetic networked individualism is a hybrid of Neoplatonism’s World Soul and of Cartesianism’s mind-body dualism. This is one strong reason why the film resonates so powerfully with contemporary audiences increasingly directed to understand themselves primarily as individuals yet also as monads networked through information technologies.

       
      Given the metaphysics on display in Avatar, the film, it is useful to recall the original Hindu meaning of the avatar. In Hindu theology, an avatar is the manifestation, incarnation, or embodiment of a deity, especially Vishnu (the Preserver), in human, superhuman, or animal form. A Sanskrit term, “avatar” means “he passes or crosses down.” In taking various animal and other hybrid forms of animals and humans, avatars carry the idea that a variety of life forms considered inferior to human beings also have divine intimations. If ignorance or evil are ascendant on earth, the Supreme Being incarnates itself in an avatar form appropriate for fighting these blights. An avatar might also manifest as a warning against hubris, as a way to convey ideas to humankind, or even as a ritualized form of divine playfulness.
       
      Some critics have accused Avatar of being “a racial fantasy par excellence” that celebrates the “white Messiah fable” (Brooks) through the character of marine amputee Jake Sully (Sam Worthington). If one interprets Sully’s avatar solely (or even principally) as the Supreme manifestation of a generalized white embodiment, and as “passing or crossing down” from the plane of Supreme Being to assist the Na’vi in their quest for a restoration of the good, then an argument can be advanced that the film applies aspects of the Hindu myth to a reification of white subjectivity in ways that might support reactionary cultural work this side of the screen. However, something rather more complex is going on with avatars in Avatar than a one-way passing over or down in order to rescue. While Sully’s early forays into Na’vi territory in avatar form are, indeed, efforts to gain corporate intelligence that will be applied to convincing the Na’vi to abandon their Hometree, under which enormous mineral wealth is located, Sully undergoes a conversion of intent. In a key scene, his voiceover lets audiences know that whereas he had initially understood his human body and the corporation’s base of operations to be “reality,” and the world of the Na’vi a “dream,” his continual passing between these states has been central to his inversion of the binary. Sully’s consciousness changes. His move from capital to karma is in direct proportion to the ever greater lengths of time he experiences consciousness through his avatar form.
       
      As I argue elsewhere, digital avatars in web-based formats such as Second Life allegorize the Gnostic belief that the essence of humanity is disembodied awareness (Hillis). Emily Apter, complementarily, sees digital avatars “as a kind of ‘puppet-homunculus’ or totem.” Both dynamics are at play in Avatar. While inhabiting his avatar form, Sully experiences a profound resolution of “lack”–in this case less a psychoanalytic or subject-related lack than the restoration of an experience of a mobility he lacks as a paraplegic amputee. Sully’s avatar makes him whole, and as he comes to understand the complex psychic, physical and therefore political ramifications of this making whole, he change sides–he does indeed “pass over or down” to the Na’vi world, but in ways that repurpose the Hindu myth, with its focus on rescue through bodily transformation of divine spirit, so that he also passes over or down from the Na’vi world back to the corrupt world of purportedly Supreme Beings from which his consciousness first transmitted. The longer he experiences being present in his avatar form, the more his “return” to human status on the base comes to equal the avatar’s function of passing over: When Sully returns to the corporation’s base, it is his human form that increasingly brings messages of salvation from the Na’vi back to the crazed military-industrial complex intent on ruining yet another Eden. In this Sully-as-avatar also conforms to the Hindu myth’s instruction that, when necessary, the avatar manifests a warning against human hubris.
       
      The sign/body of Sully’s avatar, then, indicates the compromise between the unitary goodness of World Soul depicted via the Na’vi’s Pandoran world and an alienated, liberal consciousness negotiating its way through networks as a disincorporated monad somehow in possession of a body yet not actually of that body. In so doing, Avatar‘s avatars also ironically embody the inter-orientation between the reality of silicon-based IT and the dream of realizing the Neoplatonically-inflected fantasy of carbon-based IT to which many corporate and academic subjectivities would, if it existed today, accord the status of Hive Mind liveliness. Avatar positions the avatar as a form of biotechnology, one more “natural” than the colonialists and their disenchanted scientists interpellated into capital’s deadly bottom line.
       
      How definitions of the human get repurposed is a crucial indicator of the ways that modernity produces subjectivity. In its own Hegelian fashion the film suggests that these definitions should be expanded to reincorporate that (the Na’vi) which has long been expunged from the definition–expanded, however, less to acknowledge future forms of posthumanism than to acknowledge, through forms of 3D reenchantment of the world, that “other” Ancient and Ideal side of human being, that side which has, in Neoplatonic fashion, been running alongside “modern” consciousness all along. This is Jake Sully’s “happy fate”: at the film’s end he becomes part of Pandora’s World Soul. As an allegory, Avatar embodies belief. It provides seemingly direct contact with its idea of a transcendental world, a way by which disenchanted audience members–destabilized by endless wars on terror, buffeted globally by crony capitalism’s financial chicaneries that have left many bankrupt and with reduced hope–can momentarily access a Platonic ideal by contemplating the film’s networked imagery of the divine. Perhaps audiences, many of whom collectively applaud at the film’s end, are indicating that the worship of technologies that support the belief that representations are equivalent to what they represent has become a new civil religion. If so, I, for one, would not wish to identify them as cultural dupes or as suffering from false consciousness. In any case, Avatar embodies a resurgent and digital-dependent political economy of metaphysics if ever there was one.
       
      Ken Hillis is Professor Media and Technology Studies, Department of Communication Studies, The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. His research interests focus on the intersection of the forms that media technologies take and the techniques, practices and desires such technologies promote, enable, and constrain. Publications include Digital Sensations: Space, Identity and Embodiment (1999, Minnesota), Everyday eBay: Culture, Collecting and Desire (2006, Routledge), Online A Lot Of The Time: Ritual, Fetish, Sign (2009, Duke). He is currently co-authoring Google and The Culture of Search (Routledge).
       

      Footnotes

       
      1. Until recently such work has been located at the “fringes” of academic thought. See, for example, Victoria Nelson’s The Secret Life of Puppets, her comprehensive account of why Neoplatonism continues as a cultural force and the ways that new digital and media technologies such as online games exemplify a resurgence of this kind of magical thinking and a collective desire to reenchant a disenchanted modern world. See also Erik Davis’s TechGnosis: Myth, Magic, and Mysticism in the Age of Information; Davis dissects such concepts as Gaia or collective intelligence as sterile because disembodied, but also assesses the ongoing desire for a Godhead as the collective manifestation of the human achieved entirely through networked information machines.
       

      2. 2007 version of screenplay downloaded 8 Jan. 2010 from Twentieth Century Fox Film Corporation.http://www.foxscreenings.com/media/pdf/JamesCameronAVATAR.pdf
       

      Works Cited

         

       

      • Apter, Emily. “Technics of the Subject: The Avatar-Drive.” Postmodern Culture 18.2 (Jan.2008). Project Muse. Web. 22 Dec. 2009.
      • Brooks, David. “The Messiah Complex.” New York Times 8 Jan. 2010. Web. 9 Jan. 2010.
      • Castells, Manuel. The Rise of the Network Society. London: Blackwell, 2000. Print.
      • Dargis, Manohla. “Floating in the Digital Experience.” New York Times 3 Jan. 2010. Web. 3 Jan.2010.
      • Davis, Erik. TechGnosis: Myth, Magic and Mysticism in the Age of Information. New York: Harmony Press, 1998. Print.
      • Delany, Samuel. “Avatar Review.” Facebook 19 Dec. 2009. Web. 8 Jan. 2010.
      • Goldstein, Patrick. “Conservatives’ Attack on ‘Avatar’ Falls Short.” Chicago Tribune 6 Jan.2010. Web. 7 Jan. 2010.
      • Hillis, Ken. Online a Lot of the Time: Ritual, Fetish, Sign. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2009. Print.
      • Kelly, Kevin. Out of Control: The Rise of Neo-Biological Civilization. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1994. Print.
      • Leonard, Andrew. “What the News Biz Can Learn from ‘Avatar’.” Salon 4 Jan. 2010. Web. 5 Jan. 2010.
      • Lévy, Pierre. Collective Intelligence: Mankind’s Emerging World in Cyberspace. Trans. Robert Bononno. Boston: Perseus, 1997. Print.
      • Mendelson, Scott. “Avatar: The 3D IMAX Experience.” Salon 16 Dec. 2009. Web. 22 Dec.2009.
      • Nelson, Victoria. The Secret Life of Puppets. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2001. Print.
      • Plato. Timaeus. Trans H.D.P. Lee. Baltimore: Penguin Books, 1965. Print.
      • Squires, Nick. “Vatican calls ‘Avatar’ Bland.” The Telegraph 11 Jan. 2010. Web. 11 Jan. 2010.
      • Teilhard de Chardin, Pierre. The Future of Man. Trans. Norman Denny. New York: Harper and Row, 1964. Print.
      • Wells, H.G. World Brain. London: Metheun and Co., 1938. Print.

       

    • “Time is Illmatic”: A Critical Retrospective on Nas’s Groundbreaking Debut

      Alessandro Porco (bio)
      SUNY Buffalo
      asporco@buffalo.edu

      Review of: Michael Eric Dyson and Sohail Daulatzai, eds. Born to Use Mics: Reading Nas’s Illmatic. New York: Basic Civitas Books, 2009. Print.

       

       

      There are indisputable watershed years in hip-hop history. 1979, of course, is the year Fatback Band and The Sugarhill Gang released rap’s first singles. In 1984, Rick Rubin and Russell Simmons found Def Jam in an NYU dorm; the label would define the sound of hip-hop throughout the 1980s. In 1986, Run DMC signed a million-dollar endorsement deal with Adidas, an early instance of the relationship between hip-hop, fashion, and branding. Yo! MTV Raps debuted in 1988, prompting a more sophisticated approach to the video format; meanwhile, at Harvard, juniors David Mays and Jon Shecter “pooled two hundred dollars to put together a one-page hip-hop music tipsheet which they grandly named The Source” (Chang 410). By the 1990s, that small zine would become the “the bible of hip-hop music, culture, & politics.”1
       
      1994 is another watershed year–arguably the most important of all. By then, the gangsta rap genre had started to exhaust itself, inadvertently descending into cliché-ridden self-parody. (Tamra Davis’s 1993 film CB4, starring Chris Rock, captures this decline perfectly.) The dominance of the West Coast’s musical aesthetic, known as “G-Funk,” began to dim in the smoky afterglow of Dr. Dre’s The Chronic. In February and May of that year, the Subcommittee on Commerce, Consumer Protection, and Competitiveness held two congressional hearings on “Music, Lyrics, and Commerce,” focusing on gangsta rap’s violent imagery, misogyny, and homophobia.2 That year, Wesleyan University Press published the first academic monograph on rap and hip-hop, Tricia Rose’s canonical Black Noise: Rap Music and Black Culture in Contemporary America.
       
      Many fans view 1994 as the last gasp of creative breath before media-conglomerates put hip-hop aesthetics on life support. In part, this view is nothing more than hip-hop pastoralism; but 1994 was, in fact, an especially fecund moment in terms of musical production, with the release of several landmark albums: The Notorious B.I.G.’s Ready to Die, Common’s Resurrection, Outkast’s Southernplayalisticadillacmuzik, Scarface’s The Diary, Organized Konfusion’s Stress: Extinction Agenda, Method Man’s Tical, The Roots’s From the Ground Up EP, and Wu-Tang Clan’s Enter the Wu-Tang.3 But no album from that year has received as much attention, then or now, as Nas’s Illmatic. It transformed the twenty-one-year-old MC from Queensbridge, New York–who once famously declared that he “went to hell for snuffin’ Jesus” (Main Source, “Live at the Barbeque”)–into a savior figure.4 Today, the aura that surrounds both him and the album persists.
       
      Born to Use Mics: Reading Nas’s Illmatic, edited by Michael Eric Dyson and Sohail Daulatzai, is a collection of scholarly essays and historical documents. Given the high volume of books published every year on hip-hop music and culture, it’s surprising that Born to Use Mics is the first book of its kind, one dedicated to a single epoch-defining record. In his introduction, Daulatzai explains that the book’s primary aim is to demonstrate why and how Illmatic is still “relevant” fifteen years after its release (3)–that is, relevant both to hip-hop’s past and future as well as to race relations in America. There are other similarly worthy albums, explains Daulatzai, such as Boogie Down Production’s Criminal Minded and Ice Cube’s Amerikkka’s Most Wanted (3). But he writes that there’s “something” ineffable about Illmatic that makes it different (3).
       
      The table of contents is divided into two “sides,” “40th Side North” and “41st Side South.” (The street names refer to the location of the Queensbridge House Projects.) The paratextual conceit reproduces the A-side/ B-side format of the album’s 12-inch pressing. Each contributor is assigned a single track to analyze. Some essayists use the assigned recordings as a jumping-off point for extended riffs on race, power, gender, and politics. Others insist on more localized readings–for example, Adilifu Nama’s “It Was Signified: ‘The Genesis’” posits that samples from the early hip-hop film Wildstyle (1983) provide the interpretive key to the album. The contributors cast Nas in a variety of roles: he’s a “black public intellectual” (97), a “lyrical ethnograph[er]” (181), a metaphysician (40, 251), and a “poet” (196).
       
      Born to Use Mics concludes with a wonderfully edited section titled “Remixes.” It includes interviews, reviews, and personal reminiscences that historicize the album. (It’s comparable to the “Contexts” section one finds in Norton Critical Editions.) For example, “Remixes” reprints the infamous “5 Mic” review from The Source magazine, which is notoriously difficult to come by. Ultimately, the “Remixes” section situates Illmatic in what Pierre Bourdieu calls “the mood of the age” (Bourdieu 32), while also introducing a decidedly less academic tone into the overall discussion.
       
      The strongest essays in the collection make a concerted effort to attend to the album’s historical and formal particulars. Marc Lamont Hill’s “Critical Pedagogy at Halftime” argues that Nas’s “Halftime,” the first song recorded for the album, signifies the MC’s “first full-fledged foray into the world of black public intellectuals . . . Nas performs the most critical function of the public intellectual: linking a rigorous engagement with the life of the mind to an equally rigorous engagement with the public and its problems” (98). As a black public intellectual, Nas relocates “previously overlooked stories from the margins to the center of public consciousness,” and thus has as much in common with thinkers like Michael Eric Dyson, Marc Anthony Neal, and Cornel West as he does with rappers like Kool G. Rap, Mobb Deep, and Foxy Brown (108). In addition, Nas’s dialectical performance as a black public intellectual allows him to bind “two allegedly irreconcilable camps within the hip-hop community” (98): the conscious and commercial, or underground and popular. The former is associated with original hip-hop values and formal innovation; the latter is associated with cultural industry imperatives and aesthetic compromise. Nas traverses these market-driven designations and throws into relief the values symbolically attached to each. In other words, for Hill, one lesson to be gleaned from Illmatic is that we must rethink the “division of labor” in rap (98), a division that has stunted the music’s progress.
       
      Ironically enough, Hill’s essay is also important because it’s one of the few to uphold the black public intellectual tradition insofar as it dares to introduce a dissenting opinion about Nas into the book. Hill offers two critiques: first, that Nas paints “romantic, or at least uncritical, portraits of Africa,” which suggest a lack of knowledge about the continent (111); second, that Nas reproduces the “male-centered political agendas” that have historically dominated hip-hop discourse (112).
       
      Michael Eric Dyson’s “‘One Love,’ Two Brothers, Three Verses” considers how Nas’s “One Love” flips hip-hop’s carceral canon on its head. Rather than rapping about time in prison, Nas instead pens three missives to incarcerated friends, “offering them not a way out but at least a view outside the prison walls that confine them” (133), a view that includes “shifting allegiances, shattered affections, and sustaining alliances” (135). As is typical of the epistolary tradition, Nas’s lyrics are infused with a colloquial ease and emotional intimacy only possible between close friends. According to Dyson, the epistle enables Nas to articulate a theme of brotherhood: “By acting as his brothers’ keeper, their eyes and ears, their scribe and conscience, Nas generates a holistic vision of black brotherhood that reflects the goodness and potential of one man reflected in the eyes of the other, despite the prevalence of negative circumstances” (138). Stylistically, Dyson’s essay pulls off a delicate but important balancing act, moving between personal narrative (“When I first heard Nas’s ‘One Love’ . . . I thought immediately of my brother Everett, who is serving a life sentence for a murder” [129]), analysis of the prison industry (“During the 1980s and 1990s, state spending for corrections grew at six times the rate of state spending on higher education” [130]), and a close reading of Nas’s lyrics, which “[marry] vernacular and formal poetic devices” (133). By moving between subjective and objective modes of analysis, the essay re-enacts the central formal dynamic at work in Nas’s “One Love.”
       
      Throughout Born to Use Mics, the public housing development of Queensbridge is repeatedly alluded to in passing, but only Eddie S. Glaude Jr. maps the place and its meanings. In “‘Represent,’ Queensbridge, and the Art of Living,” Glaude Jr. reads Nas against the Queensbridge Housing Projects, “the largest low-income housing development in [New York City], with 3,142 apartments” (180). Glaude argues that the everyday violence Nas witnessed in the Queensbridge Housing Projects as a young man shaped, at least in part, a creative disposition that tends toward “lyrical ethnography.” As such, Nas’s language is a window into a place that’s ignored or willfully deserted by institutions like the New York Housing Authority.5 On the other hand, Glaude also emphasizes that Nas’s lyrics offer more than just faithful mimesis. Rather, Nas’s lyrics are instances of political “self-fashioning” and “making oneself present” (192). Nas depends on aesthetic approach to everyday life in order to survive, transcend, and transform Queensbridge’s horrors.
       
      Not all the essays are as compelling as those by Hill, Dyson, and Glaude Jr. One persistent problem is that several contributors want to confer upon Nas the status of rap’s premier MC, the charismatic genius who stands head and shoulders above the rest. This uncritical desire is manifest in especially purple passages of praise and oddball evaluative analogies. Imani Perry writes that Nas’s “rhymes hit you like heroin, and they freeze listeners like the crystals in the nostril of the user” (“‘It Ain’t Hard to Tell’: A Story of Lyrical Transcendence,” 197); Daulatzai compares Illmatic to The Battle of Algiers and later describes Nas’s imagery as “black dadaist” (“A Rebel to America: ‘N.Y. State of Mind’ After the Towers Fell,” 57); Guthrie P. Ramsey Jr. describes the album’s music as “immaculately, eclectically, even delicately produced, and rich in layered textures and colors: a hip-hop version of Miles Davis’s signatures work, Kind of Blue (1959), if there ever was one” (“Time is Illmatic: A Song for My Father, A Letter to My Son,” 62); and Gregory Tate says that “Nas’s work exudes the ephemeral, fugitive resonance of trace memory-conjuring hardened lozenges of a ritual-habitual space time and chaos already vanished into thin air” (“An Elegy for Illmatic,” 237). This type of language is counterproductive; it works to further mystify rather than clarify what’s going on with Illmatic.
       
      Some essayists implicitly reject the book’s conceit–that is, they fail to address the assigned track. In “‘Memory Lane’: On Jazz, Hip-Hop, and Fathers,” Mark Anthony Neal, an otherwise excellent cultural critic, only ostensibly writes about Nas’s “Memory Lane.” His essay, however, is a personal reflection on how the archive of black music audibly mediates father-son relationships that are otherwise marked by silence. As Neal puts it, “via sampling hip-hop has long occasioned opportunities for intergenerational conversation and intervention” (124). Kyra D. Gaunt’s “‘One Time 4 Your Mind’: Embedding Nas and Hip-Hop into a Gendered State of Mind” argues that Nas “is a perfect candidate for exploring gender issues within hip-hop” because “he has performed different manifestations of black masculinity and patriarchal dominance” (154). In each case, Nas’s songs are instrumentalized in service of persuasive arguments–but arguments that, to be frank, have little to do with Nas or Illmatic specifically. They could be made about any number of artists or albums.
       
      If Born to Use Mics occasionally drifts away from Illmatic, its final section of reviews, interviews, and personal reminiscences redresses the situation, swinging the focus back to questions of production, consumption, and distribution. Especially useful is Jon Shecter’s “The Second Coming” (from the April 1994 issue of The Source). It presents interview excerpts from the rappers, producers, and executive producers involved in the recording process: Large Professor, MC Serch, DJ Premier, Q-Tip, L.E.S., Faith Newman, and, of course, Nas. It includes Nas’s description of his first attempts at being an MC: “The first time I grabbed the mic was at my man Will’s house–bless the dead. He lived right upstairs from me on the sixth floor. . . . We used to rhyme on ‘White Lines’ and that old shit. Then later on, he bought equipment, like turntables, fader, we was makin’ tapes like that” (214). Other excellent moments in the piece include one in which Larger Professor and DJ Premier say how excited they were by Nas’s first recorded appearance on Main Source’s 1991 recording “Live at the Barbeque.” And Illmatic‘s executive producer MC Serch explains the difficulty he encounters finding a label home for Nas: “I took [the demo] to Russell [Simmons] first, Russell said it sounded like G Rap, he wasn’t wit’ it” (216). These tidbits of information are instructive: they demystify the eschatological aura around Illmatic and ground the album in a series of strategic actions by various agents in the field of hip-hop.
       
      “Remixes” also includes “Born Alone, Die Alone,” an illuminating personal essay by writer and filmmaker Dream Hampton. Hampton’s essay posits Nas’s Illmatic as an artistic common ground between otherwise aggressively antagonistic West Coast / East Coast factions embodied by Tupac Shakur and the Notorious B.I.G., respectively.
       
      In 1994, Hampton was working as a journalist for The Source. For six months, she covered three court cases involving Tupac. During that period Hampton became friendly with Shakur. While staying in Los Angeles, where one of Shakur’s trials was taking place, Hampton got an advance-copy of Illmatic. She immediately dubs a cassette version for Tupac, who “was an instant convert” (243). The next day Tupac “arrived in his assigned courtroom blasting Illmatic so loudly that the bailiff yelled at him to turn it off before the judge took his seat on the bench” (243). Hampton subtly proposes that Nas’s lyrics on Illmatic inspired Tupac’s “first important album,” Me Against the World, recorded in 1994 (243).
       
      Hampton tells another story, this one related to the Notorious B.I.G. Prior to relocating to L.A. for the Tupac trials, Hampton lived in New York. There, she got a copy of an Illmatic bootleg: “[I] seem to remember,” says Hampton, “passing dubs back and forth to my neighbor Biggie” (242; the two lived near each other in Bed-Stuy.) This would have been sometime in 1993, as Biggie recorded his debut album Ready to Die. This fact about the bootleg tape sheds new light on the call-and-response relationship between the two MCs. For example, in “Represent,” Nas says: “Somehow the rap game reminds me of the crack game, / Used to sport Bally’s and Gazelle’s with black frames . . .” The references to “Gazelle” sunglasses and the “rap game” / “crack game” equivalence are reiterated a year later in the Notorious B.I.G.’s “Things Done Changed”:
       

      Remember back in the days, when niggaz had waves
      Gazelle shades, and corn braids
      . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
      If I wasn’t in the rap game,
      I’d probably have a key knee deep in the crack game . . .

       

      Nas via Hampton is a key agent who alters the making of seminal albums by both Tupac and Biggie.

       
      Hampton’s recollections shed light on how hip-hop is produced and consumed. First, Hampton’s narrative turns on an empowering use of technology: she “dubs” cassette copies of Illmatic. The circulation of cassette dubs is analogous to today’s digital file-sharing and mix-tape culture. Hampton’s story demonstrates how hip-hop culture has always transformed technology, putting it to creative use.6 Second, Hampton is one of three women integral to Illmatic‘s history. She joins Faith Newman, one of the album’s executive producers, and “Shortie,” the writer who awarded Illmatic the “5 Mic” review. They demonstrate the active roles women play in hip-hop and offer a useful counter-argument to Kyra Gaunt’s aforementioned feminist critique of Illmatic. That Hampton, Newman, and Shortie are only present in the book’s final section is indicative of the kinds of material knowledge absent, at times, from the book’s first half. A more material approach to hip-hop would enrich the solid scholarship.
       
      At times, Born to Use Mics seems overeager in its attempt to make Illmatic “relevant,” in the process ironically rendering the album, or rather the experience of listening to the album, irrelevant. However, on the whole, the book demonstrates how a single record can yield and absorb richly diverse readings from across the disciplines. In his introduction, Daulatzai indicates that Born to Use Mics is the first in a proposed series of books dedicated to examining individual rap albums. This means that the next few years may be an exciting time for hip-hop scholarship, as other deserving albums from hip-hop’s near past may soon be reintroduced into our historical consciousness.
       

      Alessandro Porco is a Ph.D. student in English Literature at the State University of New York at Buffalo. He is currently completing a dissertation on hip-hop poetics and American poetry. He is the editor of Population Me: Essays on David McGimpsey (Palimpsest Press, 2010) and writes an online hip-hop column for Maisonneuve, Montreal’s city magazine.

       

       

      Footnotes

       
      1. “The bible of hip-hop music, culture, and politics” is The Source’s official slogan.

       

       
      2. The rhetoric of moral panic is especially prevalent during the hearings. For example, Washington, D.C. based syndicated talk show host Joseph Madison suggests that the “dehumanization” present in gangsta rap is one step away from the dehumanization experienced by Jews in Germany with the rise of the National Socialist Party:
       

       

      Sixty years ago in another country the Jewish people had their character attacked through the use of cartoons and other methods of mass media. The process of dehumanization often began with seemingly innocent expressions of free speech, only to gather strength and become part of the fabric of the country’s culture.
       

       
      3. Unlike the other albums listed, The Wu-Tang Clan’s Enter the Wu-Tang was actually released in 1993. However, it was released near the end of that year, in early November. The album’s aesthetic and cultural impact really happened throughout the following year, culminating in the November 1994 release of group member Method Man’s hit album Tical.

       

       
      4. Main Source’s “Live at the Barbeque” is the first recording on which Nas performed. At that point, Nas’s performance name included the epithet “Nasty.” The track caused a lot of buzz because of Nas’s introductory verse, which included the lines: “When I was twelve, I went to hell for snuffin’ Jesus / Nasty Nas is a rebel to America / Police murderer, I’m causin’ hysteria.”

       

       
      5. Glaude Jr. writes:
       

       

      Residents complained of random shootings and worried about their safety. Given the widely shared belief that the state had abandoned them to rogue forces, residents even asked the New York Housing Authority in 1992 to hire the Fruit of Islam to patrol the project. The agency refused citing that of the 324 public house projects, Queensbridge ranked forty-third in the rate of crime; it was not the worst place in New York after all. But the violence and overall environment of crime remained palpable.
       

      (180)
       
      6. In Black Noise, Tricia Rose argues that female participation in rap music has been mostly delimited to graffiti and breaking, in part because “women in general are not encouraged in and often actively discouraged from learning about and using mechanical equipment. This takes place informally in socialization and formally in gender-segregatedvocational tracking in public school curriculum” (57). Hampton’s essays, however, highlights a woman’s productive use of technology. Hampton uses dubbing as a means of creating socio-aesthetic connections.
       

      Works Cited

       

      • Bourdieu, Pierre. The Field of Cultural Production. Trans. Randal Johnson. New York: Columbia UP, 1993. Print.
      • Chang, Jeff and D.J. Kool Herc. Can’t Stop Won’t Stop: A History of the Hip-Hop Generation. New York: Picador, 2005. Print.
      • Coleman, Brian. Check the Technique: Liner Notes for Hip-Hop Junkies. New York: Villard, 2007. Print.
      • Main Source. “Live at the Barbeque.” Breaking Atoms. Wild Pitch, 1991. CD.
      • Nas. Illmatic. Columbia, 1994. CD.
      • Notorious B.I.G. “Things Done Changed.” Ready to Die. Bad Boy, 1994. CD.
      • Rose, Tricia. Black Noise: Rap Music and Black Culture in Contemporary America. Middleton: Wesleyan UP, 1994. Print.
      • United States. Cong. Senate. Subcommittee on Commerce, Consumer Protection, and Competitiveness. Music, Lyrics, and Commerce. Hearing. 11 February and 5 May, 1994. 103rd Cong., 2nd sess. Washington: GPO, 1994. Print.

       

       
    • Matches, in Our Time

      Patrick F. Durgin (bio)
      School of the Art Institute of Chicago
      pdurgin@saic.edu

      Review of: Carla Harryman, Adorno’s Noise. Ithaca, NY: Essay Press, 2008.
       

       

       

      The first of two major new works collected in Carla Harryman’s new book of “literary nonfiction,” Adorno’s Noise, begins by eliding two otherwise remote passages from Minima Moralia: “If normality is death then regard for the object rather than communication is suspect” (Harryman 21). Equally spirited by Adorno’s negative dialectics–a Hegelian counter-pointillism meant to ameliorate the devaluation of subjective experience in Marxist and Freudian categories–and the aphoristic, indeed noisily lyric, style of Adorno’s prose, Harryman entertains the most dissolute promise of the opposite in “Regard for the Object Rather Than Communication Is Suspect”:
       

      I wonder if it would be the case that if normality were not death, regard for the object would be purely an entailment of belief and communication would in turn become the object of thought. This may seem a bit mad as well as inappropriate content for a meaty essay. Bear with me for a little while. You and I will go on an excursion together and discover something along the way if we’re lucky. If we are not lucky, neither you nor I will be worse off than when we started. I can’t guarantee this but it is something I believe with enough confidence to proceed to the next sentence. The next sentence is not a death sentence.
       

      (Adorno’s Noise 21)

       

      The kind of improvisatory churning of antitheses that Adorno’s most radical utopian dictates–in particular his initially liberatory extension of Fourier’s critique of the commodification of gender norms–and the syllogistic force of dialectical thought are pitched as an aesthetic problem unresolved and yet still legible in the language of critical theory, the same problem that famously worried the question of writing poetry “after Auschwitz.” Modernity’s most rank expressions of positivist enlightenment genius pose the historical problem of “normality” in the wake of “defeated Germany,” to which, in Adorno’s assessment, only “a thoroughly unsatisfactory, contradictory answer, one that makes a mockery of both principle and practice” is available; is it not then barbarism to entertain the thought that “the fault lies in the question and not only in me” (56)?

       
      With her alternative formulation, Harryman provides amply the “rigor and purity” of which Adorno speaks in his section on “Morality and style”:
       

      A writer will find that the more precisely, conscientiously, appropriately he expresses himself, the more obscure the literary result . . . . people know what they want because they know what other people want. Regard for the object, rather than for communication, is suspect in any expression: anything specific, not taken from pre-existent patterns, appears inconsiderate, a symptom of eccentricity, almost of confusion. . . . Few things contribute so much to the demoralization of intellectuals. Those who would escape it must recognize the advocates of communicability as traitors to what they communicate.
       

       

      Quite literally appropriating the question of what remains an appropriate response to modernity’s twilight produces an “essay” form that matches, in our time, the beleaguered “rigor” Adorno’s friend Thomas Mann spoke of when he wrote, “in order to read you, one should not be tired” (qtd in Jäger 128). It’s not enough to say that Adorno’s Noise is citational, and not exactly accurate to say Harryman writes like Adorno. While these observations may be “true,” it’s only because they are tautological, logical coincidences that define normative forms of exposition and “rigor.” Harryman’s writing is full of wry humor and critical attentiveness, by turns lapidary and bombastic, sometimes maddeningly self-conscious, but in a thoroughly motivated, astonishingly informed manner. When Harryman cites Adorno, it is transformative. She renders him elliptical. Adorno himself worried about this nascent quality which, in postmodern American poetics, becomes a virtue; the apology that forms a substantial amount of his dedicatory preface to Minima Moralia posits the aphoristic texture of what follows as a revision of Hegel’s proto-Fascistic denial of the “for-itself,” the defining trait of the aphorism’s pithy concision. Harryman’s book begins with a tiny treatise on the “cell of meaning,” the “in-itself” of language: “A might be an abbreviation for something inside itself, inside A,” which, “[o]nce exposed, [grows] out of proportion to the language that [has] ushered it into the brain of someone else and now it is mushrooming” (Adorno’s Noise 5).

       
      How this disproportion takes shape makes Adorno’s Noise an important object lesson in literary form. That the poet’s primary skill or duty should be the imitation of life–of human action, perception, and emotion emulsified and expressed–is a notion that has only recently been challenged with sufficient seriousness. The same notion justified the expulsion of the poets from the good society in Book X of the Republic. Even in light of the Aristotelian correctives of catharsis and irony in the Poetics, the Platonic theory of imitation concerns dramatic representation, a context fully pertinent to Harryman’s oeuvre (she co-founded the San Francisco Poets Theater in 1979, an important venue for the development of West Coast language writing). Harryman has long written within and about the contamination of mimesis by capitalist ideology; it is both the leitmotif and the textual condition of her estimable body of writings, which duly violates the values of such market categories as genre, topic, and plot. Ostensibly a book of essays, Adorno’s Noise is distinctly imitative, not so much a sustained reflection of (or on) Adorno, but rather an example of poetic imitation that honors the distinction between influence and appropriation. This sort of imitation counts as something more than homage and just short of collaboration. Among signal works such as Robert Duncan’s Writing Writing: Stein Imitations and Benjamin Friedlander’s Simulcast, Adorno’s Noise points to a new imitative mode. In the latter, this point is rather obvious, because it is both discussed and itself imitated (being self-referential in the sense that the best essays are expository and demonstrative). Harryman’s book ponders how we acknowledge an author or text as a resource that is alive to us–as a catalytic agent and not an inert inheritance. The poetics of imitation arises with the fact that what sets such writing in motion also inhabits it; the writer suffers and celebrates an observer’s paradox, is “tinged with its prior potent identity” (Harryman, Adorno’s Noise 22).
       
      At least since the Romantics’ recycling of etiological narratives and the high modernist “poem including history,” there have been two primary reactions to the ethical failure of mimetic impulses: taking refuge in a prosthetic voice, and denying the veracity of such idealized adequation. In either case, imitation has been out of favor in all but a few creative writing classrooms. Amazingly, Harryman shows no trace of such deadlock, borrowing freely and creating beyond the bland aspiration to originality. For her, and especially for this book, imitation might signify more than the fact of intertextuality. It seems to be a historical principle. Of course, history is a textual affair, a matter of record (the book’s epigraph is from Barrett Watten’s Bad History: “Fill the measurable time with indeterminate noise to show we are not happy about being figured in advance”). But where Schoenberg signified to Adorno the denouement of history’s grand march, Harryman reads Sun Ra. The “noise” she attributes to Adorno implies the contingencies of “being figured” between contemporary events and the mythos that would explain them. “Adorno was attracted to, in fact relied upon, mimesis,” Harryman writes in the last piece collected here; “Did I desire him even after he forgave me for faking the orgasm?” His hypothetical forgiveness would have stemmed, one gathers, from the “eleg[iac]” character of the orgasm, “an escape hatch in the negative dialectic” (Adorno’s Noise 179-180). Here, Harryman translates the disjunctive but wholly appropriate utterances of ecstasy homophonically–“low light lit little tick flea migrant sip pissy wit twill twill low will piano”–as if language itself were coming (Adorno’s Noise 178). At the same time she injects herself into the student protests of 1969 that radically upended Adorno’s status as a guru of leftist critique, even and especially his efforts to adjoin sexual liberation and the struggle to stop the oppression of women in the capitalist matrix:
       

      If I had been among the students in Frankfurt, would I have opened up my leather jacket and showed him my breasts in a parodic manner, in solidarity with a leaflet that proclaimed “Adorno as an institution is dead?”
       
      Direct socialization is structurally determined by the patriarchal or Oedipal family, so the gender politics of parody is hopeless if you want meaningful social change. In this story however the people live and Adorno dies. Yet I am convinced that I would have refused to think of Adorno or any individual as an institution and instead would have removed myself from the scene . . . I would have underscored my subject position as a mirror of the fragile component of the social sexual contract.
       

      (Adorno’s Noise 179)

       

      In this passage and in an earlier piece in the collection, “Just Noise,” we see a response to Adorno, who wrote in Minima Moralia, “Imagination is inflamed by women who lack, precisely, imagination . . . Their lives are construed as illustrations” (169). Doing history might entail a dizzying sonic representation of “Orgasms” under a heading culled, again from Minima Moralia, which, in context, reads, “Happiness is obsolete: uneconomic. For its idea, sexual union, is the opposite of slackness, a blessed straining, just as that of all subjected labor is cursed” (Adorno 217). If Adorno as a hypothetical object of imitation comprises a character in her story, it’s difficult not to see the subject of imitation to be Harryman herself, the same character of her notorious send-up of the solipsistic seductions of artistic and entrepreneurial techne, “In the Mode of.” Masturbating in front of the modernist nude or making an exhibition of oneself, Harryman’s animation of the ostensible history of modernism’s caddy wake is exhilarating to read, even if it’s now somewhat familiar.

       
      Adorno’s Noise sustains the humorous and nuanced gender-play of Harryman’s earlier work, though to sometimes disquieting extremes. For example, “Beware of Seeking out the Mighty” plays the syntactic template, “in writing a poem she is not writing a novel in writing a novel she is not writing an essay” and so on, far past the initial wit of the genitive negation (89); “Just Noise” is reprised with a tribute to Jackson Mac Low and linked to a quasi-concrete poem, “Inverse / Mirror,” and together they perhaps sacrifice too much in the recombinatory procedure, especially when what’s in question is the corruption of “the imagination” in the gendering of class politics (57-61). The cacophonous tone achieved in “Just Noise” is pursued elsewhere in the book with deft responsibility.
       
      What’s more, the “noise” subverts the hierarchical distinction between form and genre–to the point of folding her own texts into the structure, including a passage from her unpublished play Performing Objects–and the table of contents alone is so intricate as to make terms like “chapter,” “section,” and “essay” redundant. One wants to fall back on that most inclusive category: poetry. The once reputed antithesis of noise, poetry recommends the figure of musicality that defines the ostensive lyricism of all we tend to hold under that rubric. Without rehearsing Adorno’s formidable theoretical investment in atonality, worrying his prudishness where jazz is concerned, nor collapsing into a similitude, there is something uncanny in that the lyricism of Adorno’s Noise serves as the basic thrust of many of the book’s arguments. Rob Halpern’s back-cover blurb claims that the book “reinvents ‘the essay as form.’” His point is not as tendentious as your typical blurb, as it illuminates the way the structural and generic contrivances of this book collude atonally. Writing of a very different kind of book by a similar, younger poet–Taylor Brady’s Yesterday’s News, a book whose reinvention of lyric’s means and materials he claims points “toward a radically different kind of negation,” perhaps toward a revision of Adorno’s dialectical schema, the tenets of which render lyric a form of barbarism–Halpern recuperates the notion that the lyric’s “fundamental is address to a world from a place within the world.” Barbaric or not, this is necessary “because neither of these [worlds] can be known or given in advance” (50). Hence the brand of and motivation for lyricism in Harryman’s book–one must qualify the observation that it is not a collection of lyric poems by sounding off the infinitely ostensible status of the essay, a word which means “try” and is more about drives and motives than about accomplishment and structure.
       
      The “worlds” of Harryman and Adorno are mutually constitutive, so to address one from the other is to denude them with the very force of the language, to construct and deconstruct them –and this is the problem that gives the book thematic consistency. A truly breathtaking example is the long chapter, “It Lives in the Mimetic,” which takes up the work of Robert Smithson, Kenzaburo Oe, and William Blake. Smithson’s notion of “waning space” is first used to describe the structural peculiarities of Oe’s novel Rouse Up O Young Men of the New Age! What emerges from the aphoristic mini-essays that comprise it is an imitative cultivation of the claim Harryman made of her own work in one of her first books, Animal Instincts: “I prefer to distribute narrative rather than deny it” (107). Eventually, what “lives in the mimetic,” the subject and its stories, lives not in a space dwindling under the weight of its denial, but in a “transitional space,” and marks the turning point of the chapter:
       

      … even if writing is reading, to parrot another writer and word copiest, Kathy Acker. But the reader who writes may be a reader of things other than text. She locates her resources, which may also include a window and soft air. She abandons herself to a project and her projections. She conflates the potential legibility of a person with the potential legibility of written description.
       
      I enter you here–as you and a fiction.
       

       

      This sort of conflation is introduced in the aforementioned “regard for the object,” marking the etiological opportunities and existential vulnerabilities that the poetic, the lyric, mimetic, and dramatic construct, in the right hands, derive. Harryman’s “resources” come by way of echolocation, or imitation reconceived as a fictional cosmos. “[S]trange planets beyond those orbiting our own are now available to ascription.” And since “the world is bigger than it was before,” those mild honorifics we ascribe to the worlds available as such, words, enter our purview (Adorno’s Noise 21).

       
      The prose of “Regard for the Object” has such agility that the momentum eases the many discursive flights, such that an otherwise discontinuous set of asides exudes something somber, ethically fraught, and perfectly germane to the violence of globalization’s latest implosions. Here is where Harryman parts ways with Adorno; in Harryman’s hands, the negative dialectic reads as a series of virtual connections rather than the staid resolve its various articulations exude. The objects in question morph from starlight to a hand basket to a corpse, each being “reassigned by the action” of the writing, and also, of course, by the intimations imitated from a meshwork of sources, including the mind of the reader–one’s own regard. Just as Pluto’s identity as a planet was “eradicated by edicts,” so the “wishes” that transpire between the subject, subjects, and objects “glue up that which we are not” in as much as their communicative “resona[nce]” hides, in fact reverses, our physical contiguity beneath their discretions (Adorno’s Noise 22, 24-5). With allusions to Katrina and Iraq, Harryman discloses the finally cosmological ambition of the neoliberal idealist: “Extremists believe my heartbeat exists because the doctor has put her ear to the heart and your freedom exists because I have been profiled” (Adorno’s Noise 25). And in “Lesson,” a title even more cloying than any in Adorno’s book, neoconservative ambition is lampooned in a global battle royal that reads, though tongue in cheek, like The Rape of Lucretia in a cover version by Wolf Eyes. The noise is all that survives that or any analogy, for the mimes can be taken literally: “I give up you are going to be on top forever” in “the protective armor we now both share” (Adorno’s Noise 47-8).
       

      Patrick F. Durgin teaches cultural studies, literature, and writing at the School of the Art Institute of Chicago. His latest publications include a hybrid genre collaboration with Jen Hofer, The Route (Atelos, 2008), and essays on “post-ableist” poetics in Contemporary Women’s Writing and the Journal of Modern Literature. He is concluding work on a critical monograph entitled Indeterminacies and Intentionalities: Toward a Poetics of Critical Values, as well as a play on the subject of failed bilingualism entitled PQRS: A Drama. As series editor and publisher, he has just finished work on The Kenning Anthology of Poets Theater: 1945-1985, edited by Kevin Killian and David Brazil, recently published by Kenning Editions (2010).
       

      Works Cited

         
      • Adorno, Theodor. Minima Moralia: Reflections on a Damaged Life. 1951. Trans. E.F.N. Jephcott. London: Verso, 1974. Print.
      • Brady, Taylor. Yesterday’s News. Ithaca, NY: Factory School, 2005. Print.
      • Duncan, Robert. Writing Writing: a Composition Book: Stein Imitations. Portland: Trask House, 1971. Print.
      • Friedlander, Benjamin. Simulcast: Four Experiments in Criticism. Tuscaloosa: U of Alabama P, 2004. Print.
      • Halpern, Rob. “Sensing the Common Place: Taylor Brady’s Dialectical Lyric.” ON: Contemporary Practice 1 (2008): 43-54. Web. 8 Jul. 2010.
      • Harryman, Carla. Adorno’s Noise. Ithaca, NY: Essay Press, 2008. Print.
      • —. “In the Mode of.” There Never Was a Rose Without a Thorn. San Francisco: City Lights, 1995. 7-12. Print.
      • —. “Toy Boats.” Animal Instincts: Prose Plays Essays. Oakland: This Press, 1989. 107-110. Print.
      • Jäger, Lorenz. Adorno: A Political Biography. Trans. Stewart Spenser. New Haven: Yale UP, 2004. Print.
      • Watten, Barrett. Bad History. Berkeley: Atelos, 1998. Print.

       

    • Three Poems

      Grzegorz Wróblewski (bio)
      Translated by Agnieszka Pokojska (bio)

       

       

      In A Christianshavn Pub, Larsen Talks About His Undeservedly Settled Life

       

       

      I know what you mean, Larsen. Just like me,
      you are now a big fat pig stuffing yourself
      with salted peanuts and reading gossip columns
      about the Austrian Nazis who dominate
      the Internet with impunity.
      Don’t worry, Larsen! This could happen
      to anybody! Fucking hell… Just look at the sad-faced
      boys in orange jumpsuits, trimming shrubs
      on the moat since morning. Would you like to have
      anything to do with them again?

       

      Rhododendrons

       

      Rhododendrons absorb
      the fumes of the roasting pig:

       

      Do I remember the Vietnam war?
      No, I don’t.

       

      Would I like some meat?
      No, thanks. No meat for me.

       

      What I am doing here, then?
      Watering the rhododendrons.

       

      Dreaming Of Dragons (Mixed Media On Canvas)

       

       

      1.

      Francis would add more water.

       

      2.

      Treacherous pewter, Germanic symbols… The climate changes
      slowly bring about hallucinations.

       

      3.

      The second-hand stuff seller noticed a juggler in the left-hand corner.
      The juggler then challenged Arnaut Daniel.
       
      (Feeling silly now? That’s not how you work your way up to gold teeth and a villa in Tuscany.)

       

      4.

      Nature painters hang themselves too.

       

      5.

      What we need is resistance poetry.
      Guts!

       

      6.

      Are known to be local parts of the priest and the rhinoceros.

       

      7.

      I had no idea (the male lover dressed up as an intellectual).
      Leaving grayness, you enter an even greater lack of contrast.
      You’ll walk through a wall, remaining underground.

       

      8.

      A prisoner will be despised.

       

      9.

      And you’ll open one eye in the baths innkeeper’s room.

       

      10.

      Love manoeuvres?

       

      11.

      In the baths’ owner’s room.

       

       

       

      Grzegorz Wróblewski, born in 1962 in Gdansk and raised in Warsaw, has been living in Copenhagen since 1985. He has published nine volumes of poetry and two collections of short prose pieces in Poland; three books of poetry, a book of poetic prose and an experimental novel (translations) in Denmark; and a book of selected poems in Bosnia-Herzegovina, as well as a selection of plays. His work has been translated into eight languages.
       
      The English translations of his poems and/or plays have appeared in London Magazine, Poetry London, Magma Poetry, Parameter Magazine, Poetry Wales, The Delinquent, Chicago Review, 3rd bed, Eclectica, Mississippi Review, Absinthe: New European Writing, Common Knowledge, Word Riot, Practice: New Writing + Art, The Mercurian – A Theatrical Translation Review, Lyric, CounterPunch, Exquisite Corpse, Guernica, Jacket Magazine, Otoliths, Cambridge Literary Review, West Wind Review and in the following anthologies: Altered State: The New Polish Poetry (Arc Publications, Todmorden, UK 2003), Carnivorous Boy Carnivorous Bird (Zephyr Press, Brookline, USA 2004), A Generation Defining Itself – In Our Own Words (MW Enterprises, USA 2007). Selected poems are available in Our Flying Objects (Equipage Press, Cambridge, UK 2007), and new and selected poems are forthcoming in A Marzipan Factory (Otoliths, Rockhampton, Australia 2010). His chapbooks to date are: These Extraordinary People (erbacce-press, Liverpool, UK 2008) and Mercury Project (Toad Press, Claremont, USA 2008), and A Rarity (Cervena BarvaPress, W. Somerville, USA, 2009).
       

      Agnieszka Pokojska is a freelance translator and editor, tutor in literary translation at the Jagiellonian University in Krakow, and author of a number of articles on translation. Her translations into Polish include poems by Seamus Heaney, Robert Pinsky, and Derek Walcott. Her translations of Grzegorz Wróblewski’s poetry appeared in the anthology Carnivorous Boy Carnivorous Bird, in Lyric Poetry Review, West Wind Review, Eclectica, Jacket Magazine, The Journal, Cambridge Literary Review, The Delinquent and Poetry Wales and most recently in the chapbook A Rarity, to be published by Cervena Barva Press.
       

    • The Queer Spaces and Fluid Bodies of Nazario’s Anarcoma

      Michael Harrison (bio)
      Monmouth College
      mharrison@monm.edu

      Abstract
       
      At a time when Spanish culture was attempting to emerge from the shadow of an oppressive dictatorship, a generation of queer artists used comics to comment on the time’s significant cultural changes. This essay examines the original queer sensibility of the comic Anarcoma, by Nazario, as a symbol of the changes that were happening all over post-Franco Spain. Centering on the exploits of the titular transsexual detective, Anarcoma takes the cultural and sexual expectations inherited from franquismo and queers them, resulting in a new set of images which can be associated with democratic Spain.
       
      With its distinct visual representations, Anarcoma refigures gendered and sexual bodies while navigating real Barcelona spaces. This use of urban space rhetorically ties the boundary crossing of Anarcoma as a fictional individual with the developments and changes in the gay community of Barcelona and in Spain at large. An analysis of the specific spaces and how they are refigured and linked to the body of Anarcoma serves to reflect the development of gay identity in Spain. The fluid body of the detective, visually tied to masculinity and femininity, sometimes simultaneously, elucidates the way gender is presented in comics and shows how questions of gender and gender norms figure prominently in the nascent gay movement of Spain. A further analysis of the comic’s secondary characters also highlights this queering of the norms through the further abstraction of coded images of gender.
       

       

      There’s a ladder in her nylons
      Where we can climb up to the stars
      Join a queue of Borsalinos
      As you bend over the bar
      Tattoo on her muscle says
      ‘Beware, Behave, be mine’
      She’ll eat them up for breakfast
      One at a time

      Anarcoma, Anarcoma, Anarcoma -Lyrics to “Anarcoma” by Marc Almond

       
      During the 1970s in Spain, the comic series Anarcoma stands out as emblematic not only of the social and political reality of the day, but also of the openness and freedom that accompanied the end of the dictatorship of Francisco Franco. It is a series that openly discusses taboo subjects such as homosexuality and gender identity, while at the same time questioning the myriad of issues tied to Spain’s transition to democracy, and especially the normative forces that had forced Spain into compliance with a rigid set of social expectations for so long. Anarcoma, created by the artist Nazario (Nazario Luque Vera), first appeared in serial form in El Víbora magazine in 1979, and later as a compilation, in 1981.1
       
      Born in Castilleja del Campo, Sevilla, Nazario grew up in an environment of Spanish traditionalism that soon made him realize that his creative destiny lay elsewhere, and so he made Barcelona his home in the early 1970s. The Catalan capital that welcomed the young artist was a city with a flourishing youth culture that was growing increasingly uneasy with the aging dictatorship.2 Along with this culture came an active drive to break, bend, and refigure the norms that had oppressed Nazario and his contemporaries for so long. Nazario, in fact, calls himself a “militant homosexual,” and “militant” activists like Nazario were pushing to contribute to the rapid progress that Spain was attempting to make after years of oppression (“Disección” 55). Anarcoma emerges from this environment of radical change in Barcelona and in the rest of Spain. While various artists of this period fostered strong ties with the emergent gay political movement, Nazario viewed his artistic work itself as his contribution to militant activism. In an interview with the artist in Armand de Fluvià’s El movement gai a la clandestinitat del franquisme, Nazario says, “Jo en aquella època ja feia les meves històries d’Anarcoma, les meves històries de mariconeo. I pensava que amb això ja hi havia prou militància com perquè no em fes falta entrar en cap grup” ‘During that period I had already written my stories about Anarcoma, my queer stories. And I thought that with this there already was quite a lot of militancy so I felt it was unnecessary for me to join any group’ (76).3 The militant queerness of Anarcoma is precisely what distinguishes it and makes it such an important cultural text from this time period.
       
      Anarcoma revolves around the life and adventures of the detective, Anarcoma. Dopico describes Nazario’s heroine as “un famoso travesti que pulula por las Ramblas barcelonesas, cuyas características físicas saltan a la vista y que se autodefine como ‘una maricona con tetas’” ‘a famous transvestite who mills around the Barcelona Ramblas, whose physical characteristics are obvious and who defines herself as ‘a faggot with tits” (393). Her actions and visual presentation can be interpreted as the ultimate symbol of the changes that were happening all over Spain.4
       
      More than just a representation of the blurring of gender presentation or the reversal of established gender norms, however, Anarcoma is also a product of the Spanish comics traditions of the period in which it appears.5Anarcoma recalls the tradition of Spanish police-drama comics, like the Doctor Niebla series (see Fig. 1 below), populated with square jawed men and curvy women, which appeared beginning in the 1940s (Coma 425).6 Nazario describes Anarcoma in the introduction thus: “Es una mezcla, tanto en el físico como en su comportamiento, entre Lauren Bacall y Humfrey Bogart” ‘She is a mixture, as much in her appearance as in her behavior, between Lauren Bacall and Humphrey Bogart,’ a description that also connects the comic to a tradition of film noir detectives (Anarcoma 10). Still, despite the noir-inspired scenes and characters and themes of deception and intrigue, Anarcoma is far from a traditional comic (see Fig. 2 below).7Anarcoma simultaneously draws from these traditions and questions them, replicating in this sense the country’s attempt to reconcile its centuries-old culture with the need to transition into modernity. In effect, the comic queers the heteronorms which had, until this point, unwaveringly guided the nation. Juan Vicente Aliaga describes this process of questioning and queering: “Nazario ha recuperado, para el texto y la imagen, desde un punto de vista combativo y burlón, en un terreno imaginario preñado de realidad, los valores positivos de la feminización del varón y de la sexualidad despendolada, dándoles un toque queer avant la lettre” ‘Nazario has recovered, for the text and the image, from a combative and mocking point of view, in an imaginary land pregnant with reality, the positive values of the feminization of the male and of sexuality gone wild, giving them an avant la lettre queer touch’ (Aliaga and Cortes 68).
       

       
      Doctor Niebla (1952)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 1.

      Doctor Niebla (1952)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       
       
      Anarcoma (17)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 2.

      Anarcoma (17)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       
      Anarcoma and its original queer sensibility appear at a time when Spanish culture was attempting to emerge from the shadow of an oppressive dictatorship. A number of cultural texts of the time move specifically to forget the Franco period, and to re-create a sense of national cultural identity, in many cases by moving toward a kind of postmodern aesthetic that relies heavily on the primacy of images and eschews deep political discourse. Cristina Moreiras Menor highlights this trend:
       

      Salir del ostracismo y el aislamiento que el antiguo régimen de Franco había impuesto, dejar de ser una comunidad ‘premoderna’, se convierte en prioridad fundamental y, a partir de ella, la construcción de una nueva imagen y de unas nuevas señas de identidad pasan por la destrucción, reconstrucción o incluso el desinterés aniquilador (como si no hubieran existido) de todos aquellos símbolos que se asocian con la vieja España.”
       

      (65)

       

      (Escaping from the ostracism and isolation that the former regime had imposed, ceasing to be a “pre-modern” community, became the fundamental priority and, from this, the construction of a new image and of new signs of identity go through the destruction of, reconstruction of or even an annihilating lack of interest in (as if it had never existed) all those symbols associated with old Spain.)

       

      Anarcoma, we will see, takes the cultural and sexual expectations inherited from franquismo and queers them, resulting in a new set of images that can be associated with a democratic Spain.8

       
      With its distinct visual representations, Anarcoma refigures gendered and sexual bodies while navigating real Barcelona spaces. This use of urban space rhetorically links the boundary crossing of Anarcoma as a fictional individual with the developments and changes within the gay community of Barcelona and of Spain at large, because the boundaries crossed by Anarcoma’s gender transgressions and those of supporting characters are linked to the real Barcelona spaces they inhabit. An analysis of the specific spaces and how they are refigured and tied to the fluid body of Anarcoma serves to reflect the development of gay identity in Spain.
       
      Under the right-wing dictatorship of Francisco Franco, a large portion of the Spanish population had to remain “closeted,” in some sense of the word. Spaniards with more progressive or left leaning political views had to meet in secret; women who did not desire to be limited only to the domestic sphere had to carefully curtail any open expression of dissent, and Spanish gays and lesbians had to meet clandestinely, encode their correspondence to one another, and often endure life in a double closet.9 As the dictatorship of Franco entered its final years, Spanish people began to push back against the boundaries that had confined them for forty years. Beginning at first as a gradual transgression of these guiding norms, upon the death of Franco, as a nation, Spaniards began to emerge from the many closets where they had hidden themselves. This emergence on a number of fronts (political, social, cultural) was the beginning of what is widely known as the transición. During this period, Spain experienced an explosion of new production and thought that appeared as an attempt to reconcile its dark recent history with the promise of a new democratic country. With the increasing visibility of non-normative sexualities in Spain, and as a manifestation of this cultural and political transition, the figure of the transsexual became a popular, though controversial, metaphor for this period of Spanish history. A number of social and political thinkers who have examined the transición have pointed out that the figure of the transsexual can be rhetorically linked to it as a means of understanding social transformation in the period.10 “Such celebratory displays of cultural transvestism . . . were directly related to the euphoric sense of unlimited possibilities that came with ‘not having Franco’” (Vernon and Morris 7). The transsexual’s freedom from rigid sexual/gender models emblematizes the freedom of the country from a variety of rigid roles imposed earlier by Francoism. Cristina Moreiras Menor makes the connection between the presence of the transsexual in texts from this period and a move toward a more superficial, image based culture. She says, “En este sentido, ponen en escena una política de la transexualidad o travestismo donde lo que domina no es tanto la sexualidad como placer (jouissance) como la sexualidad como artificio y el juego de los signos sexuales” ‘In this sense, they stage a politics of transsexuality or travestism where what dominates is not as much sexuality as pleasure (jouissance) as sexuality as artifice and the game of sexual signs’ (78). The metaphor of the transsexual is not necessarily one that should be wielded universally, though. Many critics, including Garlinger and Pérez-Sánchez, have expressed “concern about uncritical endorsements of the drag metaphor of national identity” (Garlinger 367-68, Pérez-Sánchez 94). I argue, however, that the specific modes of queering of expectations of masculinity and femininity in Anarcoma themselves open up a space from which a new gay identity can emerge.11 Built on this troubling of expectations, the freedom gained by this generation of Spanish gays and lesbians becomes less one tied to the specific political freedoms granted under democracy and more about the individual freedoms to more authentically express their sexuality.
       
      The movement of transsexual and transvestite bodies through the evolving spaces of its cities, such as Barcelona, also highlights their role as focal points for the development of new identities. Barcelona during the transition was, in many ways, the birthplace of the gay community in Spain, as it was home to the first gatherings of gay and lesbian Spaniards, with a large number of transsexuals among them, who marched for the recognition of their rights.12 While these now vocal groups disrupted the expected norms by taking to the public spaces of Barcelona, their openness resulted in a disruption of those discursive spaces. Public spaces had only recently been opened up to more freedom of expression, and in this specific expression (that of self-identification as gay) the concept of a gay community, both in more abstract cultural terms and very physical corporeal terms, began to form.
       
      Other cultural and spatial factors figure into the development of gay identity. Barcelona is a city with strong ties to its traditional Catalan heritage, but this background was simultaneously rooted in the stricter traditions that had kept gay Spaniards in the closet, as well as a cultural tradition that allowed for the transition out of this closet. Barcelona and Cataluña as a whole had struggled with a desire for more cultural autonomy under the Franco regime, and with the end of the dictatorship, a more authentic expression of Catalan identity was possible. This revitalization of Catalan identity is reflected in the prized Catalan virtues of seny and arrauxment.13 The combination of common sense and tolerance of seny with the violent upheaval of arrauxment arguably provided Catalan cultural support for what would become the gay rights movement in Spain. The closeting forces that silenced Spanish gays and lesbians can be rhetorically linked to the oppression of Catalan cultural identity under the one-nation, one-culture rhetoric of the dictatorship, and so when free of these restraints, the resulting upheaval and demonstration of gays on the streets of Barcelona can be viewed as tied to a more open expression of Catalan cultural values.
       
      In examining the city of Barcelona as a type of birthplace for gay identity in Spain, however, one must consider that the residents of the city are not necessarily Catalan, and that Catalan identity is not the only national/regional formation at play, and in fact many authors have thematized the migration of Andalusians and Murcians, known in Cataluña as Xarnegos, to the region. As one of the two largest cities in Spain, Barcelona would also have been a preferred destination for many closeted gay and lesbian Spaniards during and after the dictatorship. Often facing a greater degree of religious and social pressure due to their avowed or possibly closeted homosexuality, these men and women fled their home towns for more accepting environs. Before the death of Franco, their migration could have been couched in terms of artistic expression, as Barcelona had an active art scene, but the important point is that they came from all over, and they often brought their own distinct cultural heritages and expressions with them.14 This diverse mixture of backgrounds and experiences contributes not only to the types of cultural expression that came out of the transition in Barcelona, of which Anarcoma is one clear example, but also to the overall sense that the gay cultural identity that began to grow out of the demonstrations and marches was not entirely Catalan.
       
      The development of queer identity both intersects with the city and changes it, just as it is itself changed by the city. It is important, then, to discuss Anarcoma, not only in the context of Spanish and Catalan cultures during the Franco and post-Franco periods, but also in relation to those concepts of gay and queer space developed by theorists such as Jon Binnie, David Bell, and others. Binnie has discussed the spatial element of sexual citizenship in the city,15 noting that “we put a lot of emphasis on the city as the prime site for the materialization of sexual identity, community and politics” (167). He distinguishes the work of Henning Bech, who argues that because of their “anonymity, publicity, and visibility . . . cities enable the performance of dissident sexualities” (Binnie 167). In other words, the city allows gays to be anonymous, but also to be visible. This combination makes identification of one another easier, for romantic encounters, for example, while also providing the anonymity and freedom to begin to understand one’s own identity. “(D)issident sexualities,” then, are clearly an “urban phenomenon, with cities as the centers of innovation and transgression” (Kaur Puar, Rushbrook and Schein 384).
       
      Along with the ways that migration has impacted Catalan identity, particularly as it intersects with gay identity, it is also necessary to consider how the concept of migration affects more general theories of sexual citizenship and space. The flows from one place to another are not only interactions between spaces, but also forces that alter the spaces themselves. The forces that would drive a person to leave one place and migrate to another change the destination as well as the place left behind. As Bell and Binnie put it, “these flows interact with pre-existing urban forms and urban lives-these are not erased, but reworked” (1808). Migration contributes to the continual sense of becoming that is inherent in the development of an identity; it is a process that is not unidirectional or static, but continuous, as Larry Knopp and Michael Brown explain: “this continual process very often entails obvious material manifestations of diffusion, such as residential relocation, migration, communication via mass media, and the spread of resources such as money and cultural capital” (413).
       
      These movements between places and the effects that they have on the development of queer sexual citizenship are not limited only to the spaces left behind and the spaces toward which the migrant moves in search of him or herself. The “in-between” is significant as well. Again Knopp and Brown provide relevant insights:
       

      Furthermore, such spatially fractured subjectivities are constituted within as well as between scales and localities (for example, in movement between home, work, bars, clubs, coffee houses, tearooms or cottages, etc.). And, contrary to the experiences of many non-queer people, it appears that such searches lead us to subjectivities that are self-consciously multiply rooted…or rooted in movement itself, rather than in efforts to fix our subjectivities in only one key place.
       

      (420)

       

      The city, then, is a space that receives migrant sexual citizens and is changed by them while it aids them in their identity formation as individuals and as a community, and one where the movement between places is significant.16

       
      Anarcoma represents precisely these connections between city spaces and the expression of queer identity in post-Franco Barcelona. Pablo Dopico describes Anarcoma as,
       

      [u]n personaje emblemático que no dejó a ningún lector indiferente mientras paseaba con sus zapatos de tacón alto por las páginas de El Víbora en los primeros años de la década de los ochenta, reflejando y retratando el lado más canalla de las gentes y las calles de Barcelona. Reflejos de una subcultura urbana que mostraban un costumbrismo alternativo de la vida callejera.
       

      (393)

       

      ([a]n emblematic character who left no reader indifferent while she walked with her high heeled shoes through the pages of El Víbora in the early years of the decade of the eighties, reflecting and depicting the more miserable side of the people and the streets of Barcelona. Reflections of an urban subculture that showed an alternative local culture of street life.)

       

      Here Dopico links the character and body of Anarcoma not only to the streets of Barcelona, but also to the movement between places, and along those streets. The “alternative local culture of street life” mentioned here represents the city as rooted in past traditions, but also as changed by the nascent gay community and by the presence of Anarcoma as she moves through its streets.

      The spaces that Anarcoma inhabits are not only general, anonymous spaces of sexual encounter between gays (clubs, bathhouses, cruising areas), but are also identifiable Barcelona spaces where Spanish gays could congregate openly and begin to develop a sense of connection and community identity. Dopico says, in discussing Anarcoma’s world, that:
       

      Todos ellos conviven en una historia en la que la homosexualidad, lejos de presentarse como un gueto marginal, se convierte en la protagonista de la trama, en lo lógico y natural, con todas sus grandezas y miserias, reflejando sus gustos y costumbres cotidianas. Tras años de oprobio y condena, los homosexuales se sacudían la vergüenza de salir a la calle y buscaban un nuevo camino de libertad y normalidad rodeados de glamour y elegancia.
       

      (395)

       

      (They all coexist in a story where homosexuality, far from presenting itself as a marginal ghetto, is converted into the protagonist of the plot in the logical and natural way, with all of its grandeur and miseries, reflecting its everyday tastes and customs. After years of shame and condemnation, the homosexuals brushed away their embarrassment to go out into the streets and looked for a new path of liberty and normality surrounded by glamour and elegance.)

       

      On those streets that Dopico links to the “new path of liberty and normality,” Anarcoma and her friends move from one iconic space to another, which they thereby mark as gay spaces or locations tied to the new sense of gay identity, although the comic also provides visual reminders of the resistances to these developments.

       
      We see an example in one sequence in which Anarcoma and her friend Mimi are enjoying a social visit in a Barcelona bar/restaurant. The panel presents a fairly typical Barcelona scene (see Fig. 3 below). There are, however, certain elements that visually code the space as gay, or at least as a space welcoming to the newly visible gay community. To the left of Anarcoma and Mimi, one man has his arm around another muscular man, and to the right of them, a man flirts with the short order cook behind the bar. These ancillary characters in the panel are gays inhabiting a space coded as neutral or as a straight space, rather than gays who inhabit a space clearly marked as gay.17 Still, another part of the panel portrays their presence as part of a broader matrix of supportive spaces that would have contributed to the growth of gay identity. On the wall behind the group, a poster clearly advertises the “Día del Orgullo Gay” (“Gay Pride Day”).
       

       
      Anarcoma (29)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 3.

      Anarcoma (29)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       
      In this world, created by presenting a series of distinct spaces on the page, Nazario chooses to set the scenes in historic bars that were frequented by the author and his contemporaries. This focus on the streets and the common gathering places of Barcelona’s gay community places primacy not only on the act of gathering itself, but also on the places in which they could and would gather. Panels depicting these spaces are often wide and show a number of people conversing with each other at once. From this frenetic display of activity, the reader gains a sense not only of social interactions in a bar setting, which are often associated with Spanish nightlife in general, but also of interactions that are queered by the people in the bar (gays, transsexuals, punks). The specific types of conversations they are having in the panel (discussing sex acts, conquests, etc.) also help to queer the space. The realistic representations of specific, named spaces of the Barcelona nightlife accompany the more generic spaces that Anarcoma visits, and which could be anywhere in the city (public bathrooms, drag cabarets, dark waterfront docks), thus creating an image both of the specific gay spaces of the city and of those anonymous ones which served a specific purpose for individuals in the developing community (cruising, nightlife, etc.).
       
      In a text that sets its action in the changing world of the Catalan capital in the 1970s and early 1980s, the specific choice of referents to code the city as specifically Barcelona represents an inversion of what is ordinarily thought of as “monumental.” There are no landmark buildings or skylines, no “tourist” representations of the city. Instead, Nazario focuses on the streets. In fact, the only image of Barcelona that can be considered “iconic” is the Miró mosaic imbedded in the center of the Rambla, and it is a literal “landmark,” at street level to be looked down at instead of gazed up at, further underscoring the “life on the street” nature of Nazario’s adopted home town.
       
      The ties between Barcelona in the text and the real city of the post-Franco period are not limited to its public social spaces. At times, Nazario also chooses to include historical people from his world who interact on the page with the fictional Anarcoma and her associates. Nazario’s friend Onliyú appears as the inventor of the mysterious machine that everyone in the story is searching for. Nazario’s boyfriend Alejandro attempts to seduce Anarcoma’s friend Jamfry, and Nazario himself appears in another panel, arm in arm with his friend Ocaña (see Fig. 4 below).18 These people link the text to the city and to the gay community that was in its developmental stages, due in large part to their involvement with the burgeoning gay community through their artistic and creative work. This inclusion further ties the freedoms of expression and congregation that Anarcoma and her fictional associates enjoy with the developing community of Barcelona and Spain.
       

       
      Anarcoma (42)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 4.

      Anarcoma (42)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       
      While it is important to examine the specific spaces which Anarcoma and her fellow Barcelonans, both fictional and real, inhabit, “people on the move across spaces may also be key contributors to the sexual characterization of places” (Kaur Puar, Rushbrook and Schein 385-386). This movement between and across spaces is important in this context because of the emphasis Nazario puts on the streets and on street life in the text. Here the streets are a significant space of their own. Just as the text features life inside these bars and social hotspots, it also places significance on the life outside and in between them by showing activity going on through the window of panels set in the interior of a place, or by beginning a sequence from the street and looking through the front display window into the restaurant or bar. These are not mere establishing shots, as the specific activity going on outside the spaces (other transsexuals talking, gay couples walking hand in hand, etc.) contribute to the sense that this entire network of space is somehow new and different.
       
      On the streets, Anarcoma and her fellow citizens move from place to place, but not free from interactions, glances, and conversations. In navigating the city, Anarcoma seeks out clues to the mystery as well as pleasure and sexual company. In this movement, she can be seen as what Dianne Chisholm calls a “cruising flâneur,” a refiguring of Benjamin’s city dweller, who in this modern, queer context, gravitates to erotic hotspots in her movement through urban spaces (46-47). She moves between these spaces, at times seemingly for the mere sake of moving, and while doing so, she frequently participates in cruising for a fleeting sexual encounter. This more seedy element of the street experience, done in the open and visible to all, is yet another hallmark of the new sexual freedom in Barcelona and in Spain.
       
      This openness and freedom are not complete, however. The newfound freedoms of Spain after Franco were not suddenly widespread and easily accepted overnight, and in Anarcoma, there is a sense of uneasiness and uncertainty that pervades the text. This could be attributed to the film noir feel of the detective stories that inform it, but there are moments that textually tie Anarcoma to its historical moment and to the widespread uncertainty as to the future of the country. One such instance occurs in a panel chronicling Anarcoma and Mimi’s movement from one bar to the next. The friends are discussing part of the mystery she is trying to solve, and Mimi says, “Después de las cosas que han pasado…A mí me da mucho miedo” ‘After everything that has happened…It really scares me’ (Anarcoma 29). This statement would only be one of a number of plot-driving statements except for the way the panel is presented. As Anarcoma and Mimi walk toward the Bar Ramblas, foregrounded in ominous green shadows are what appear to be members of the Spanish secret police, complete with the requisite, threatening dark glasses and scowls. Their presence in this panel allows for a secondary reading of Mimi’s statement, now connected with the fear and uncertainty that faced the community at this historical moment.19 It is, in fact, this sense of fear that marked this period. Moreiras Menor points out that the period of the desencanto during which Anarcoma appears is characterized by “un sentimiento generalizado de miedo surgido por el estado de incertidumbre social, económica y política” ‘a generalized feeling of fear which arises from the state of social, economic, and political uncertainty’ (61). In this, and in many other ways, the comic is an historical text documenting the testing of the boundaries amidst a fear of a return to the rigidity of dictatorship, as in Fig. 5:20
       

       
      Anarcoma (29)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 5.

      Anarcoma (29)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       
      The meeting spots and streets of Barcelona in the pages of the comic provide the rhetorical space for the development of a sense of sexual citizenship on the part of gay and lesbian Spaniards in general, and are also directly linked to the figure of Anarcoma as she inhabits these spaces. Teresa Vilarós agrees that, despite the “rareza” or “strangeness” of Anarcoma, it is representative of the reality and the aesthetics of the period. She says
       

      Y aunque no se puede extender al total de la población–ni siquiera a su mayoría–sí puede afirmarse sin embargo que fue este cuerpo ’emplumado’ y fluido,21 compuesto sobre todo de heroína, sangre y semen, el que dio voz, estilo y marca a un momento específico de la historia española reciente

       

      (And although one cannot extend it to the total population–nor even to a majority of it–one can nevertheless assert that it was this ‘queer’ and fluid body, composed above all of heroine, blood, and semen, the one that gave voice, style, and a brand to a specific moment of recent Spanish history).
       

      (183)

       

      The spaces which Anarcoma inhabits are themselves significant in the ways they help question established norms. Anarcoma’s is a subculture of explicit, often violent sex, and within these spaces, a constant examination and reconstruction of gender norms occurs, not relying on the heteronormative model of gender expression, but instead creating a new one which foregrounds freedom of expression and sexuality as the most important forces in identity formation.22

       
      Anarcoma’s subjectivity is centered on her bodily presence, and the forces which cause the refiguring and recreating of Barcelona in the comic are also at work on the body of Anarcoma herself. Knopp and Brown tie agency to spatiality, saying: “A more queer way of conceptualizing these issues, we believe, involves thinking of ‘agency’ and ‘subjectivity’ . . . as inextricably intertwined and inherently spatial” (412). This results in a new idea of the role of the body and of the visual presentation of gender as a foundational force for the establishment of gay identity. In Anarcoma, Nazario utilizes the visual medium of comics to question, refigure and ultimately queer the expected cultural gender norms through the character of Anarcoma herself. Anarcoma is a liminal figure who occupies simultaneously two different, gendered roles. An examination of the way Nazario presents the transsexual detective in the comic elucidates much about the way gender is presented in comics and how questions of gender and gender norms figure prominently in the nascent gay movement of Spain in the late 1970s and early 1980s. A further analysis of the secondary characters with whom Anarcoma interacts also highlights this queering of the norms through the abstraction of coded images of gender.
       
      Peter Brooks writes that “modern narratives appear to produce a semioticization of the body which is matched by a somatization of story: a claim that the body must be a source and a locus of meanings, and that stories cannot be told without making the body a prime vehicle of narrative significations” (xii). Anarcoma’s body is represented as loaded with meaning, a mixture between masculine and feminine without favoring one or the other. Nazario draws her in feminine clothing at all times, often in hypersexual tight skirts and fishnet stockings, but she is also coded masculine in the aggression with which she sets out to solve crime. While the traditional mainstream image of the transsexual is one of outward femininity that hides bodily maleness, Anarcoma does not attempt to hide her maleness, nor does she exclusively express exterior femininity. As the introduction says, she is “orgullosa de su respetable polla,” ‘proud of her sizeable cock,’ and in her sexual encounters is frequently the active partner (Anarcoma 10). In this way, Anarcoma not only presents a queer image, refusing to conform to one model of gender (masculinity or femininity), but she also queers what would have been the ubiquitous image of the transsexual in post Franco Spanish society. Nazario himself has described her, saying: “no es una Bibi Andersen que está ahí tratando de disimular, que todo el mundo sabe que fue hombre y que nadie sabe realmente si está operada o no está operada, funciona como mujer pero hay este misterio. En cambio en Anarcoma no había este misterio en absoluto nunca” ‘she is not a Bibi Andersen who is there trying to hide, who everyone knows was a man and that no one really knows if she is pre-operative or post-operative, functioning as a woman but with that mystery. Instead, in Anarcoma there was never this mystery’ (qtd. in Pérez del Solar 534).23 She is neither completely male nor female, nor even traditionally transsexual. Anarcoma is truly queer, questioning identity and sexuality at a new level.24 Anarcoma, then, exists as a kind of postmodern subject for whom exterior appearance and behavior are much more important than a deeper sense of self or identity.25
       
      The presence of Anarcoma and her role in establishing a new sense of queer cultural expression participates in a long tradition of narratives that deal with non-normative sexuality as it relates to Spanish identity. Gema Pérez-Sánchez has pointed out, for example, that in a number of texts that on one level attempt to recover queer expression, “the characterization of the male protagonists as victims is informed by the fear of being symbolically feminized, castrated, and possibly sodomized by fascism” (75). Coming out of the immediate post-Franco period, I would argue, Anarcoma wields a number of these fears as weapons, not in an exorcism of the “fear of feminization” that Pérez-Sánchez notes is present in related texts, but rather as useful tools in the recovery of agency over them: Anarcoma makes the choice to remain in a middle place between masculinity an femininity, she is an active and passive participant in sodomy, again choosing not to favor one over the other, exhibiting agency over the choice rather than fear, and, in a particularly graphic scene, she literally castrates one of her captors in an attempt to escape their clutches. With these active choices, Anarcoma exhibits control over her environment, and establishes a new model for the freedom of personal expression under democracy.
       
      Anarcoma is a transsexual with an outwardly feminine appearance, but as Alberto Mira discusses, “Anarcoma sería un ejemplo de transgresión precisamente porque, a pesar de tener cierta apariencia femenina se comporta de manera viril” ‘Anarcoma would be an example of transgression precisely because, in spite of having a certain feminine appearance, she behaves in a manly way’ (438). It is this masculine behavior that most often marks Anarcoma’s masculinity. What cannot be ignored in the numerous panels showing our heroine engaging in a sex act, however, is the presence of her “sizeable cock.” It is, after all, her penis which distinguishes her from other, biological females in the comic. Her liminality as a character is due in large part to her insistence on remaining “no operada” ‘un-operated.’ Unlike many real-world transsexuals who are at varying points on a journey toward full transition, Nazario has Anarcoma choose to keep her penis, due in large part to the power it allows her to wield in a phallocentric society.26
       
      As Butler and others have well established, gender is a type of performance, and visuality is an important part of the process of the performance of gender. Butler writes, “Such acts, gestures, enactments, generally construed, are performative in the sense that the essence or identity that they otherwise purport to express are fabrications manufactured and sustained through corporeal signs and other discursive means” (173). The fact that Anarcoma is shown displaying her penis at various times makes her penis part of Anarcoma’s gender performance. Hers is a fluctuating performance, however, changing depending on her needs and desires at that moment. While her breasts and women’s clothing represent one manifestation of gender, her display of her penis represents another, and at times both appear simultaneously, emphasizing the performativity of gender.27 Her clothing too, although predominantly feminine in style, is occasionally coded visually as masculine. One particular item of clothing, the trench coat that appears to be the heroine’s favorite piece of outerwear, does this most successfully. In that it covers the outward displays of Anarcoma’s femininity and is a common clothing item for many men, this trench coat marks her as masculine, but it also helps produce the aura of the film noir detective to which Anarcoma owes much inspiration. That detective is exclusively male, so when our detective wears a trench coat, not only does it cover up her femaleness (she also tends to wear her hair up in a beret to further this outward performance of masculinity), but it also imbues her with the masculinity that is associated with the film noir detective.
       
      Another way in which Anarcoma displays her gender performance of masculinity can be seen in a panel in which her sex robot, XM2, is first put under her control. He springs to attention, saying “¡A sus órdenes, mi jefe!” ‘At your command, sir!,’ thereby putting Anarcoma in the position of the male military officer waiting for the compliance of his soldiers. This masculinity is subverted by the visual representation of Anarcoma, with exposed breasts and high heeled boots, her hidden (for the time being) penis covered with undergarments. She can also be read here as a dominatrix who, although traditionally feminine, wields masculine power and control over her sexual partner; indeed the inversion of traditional gender and power roles forms a major part of the allure of this type of activity, as in Fig. 6:
       

       
      Anarcoma (44)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 6.

      Anarcoma (44)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       

      It may well be that Anarcoma’s masculinity is the most dramatic of the two presentations, due in large part to her outward, feminine appearance, but that feminine appearance balances out the equation, holding Anarcoma firmly in the liminal space between masculinity and femininity.

       
      Anarcoma is often visually coded as feminine. Just as her maleness is displayed openly, her femaleness is similarly made visible in the frequent times she appears topless in the comic. Anarcoma’s breasts do not take the form of stuffed bras or other fabricated illusions, but are bodily markers of her femaleness, and so in seeing them (and we do see them often) the reader is constantly reminded of this aspect of Anarcoma’s gender identity. This bodily marker of her femaleness serves not only to keep the visual representation of her gender identity fluid, but also to feature her breasts as a bodily site of social transgression. Mary Douglas discusses bodily boundaries and their ties to social boundaries:

      The relation of head to feet, of brain and sexual organs, of mouth and anus are commonly treated so that they express the relevant patterns of hierarchy. Consequently I now advance the hypothesis that bodily control is an expression of social control–abandonment of bodily control in ritual responds to the requirements of a social experience which is being expressed. Furthermore, there is little prospect of successfully imposing bodily control without the corresponding social forms.
       

      (70-71)

       

      So the bodily control that Anarcoma exerts through the hormone injections she uses to gain her breasts is not only a crossing of her own personal boundaries but also a symbolic subversion of societal controls over her body.28

      Even when wearing that favorite, masculine trench coat of hers, Anarcoma is often topless underneath, ready to shed the outward marker of masculinity and display her femaleness proudly. Most frequently, though, it is her style of dress that is the primary component of her performance of femininity, since she is often drawn in skimpy skirts, knee-high, high-heeled boots and fishnet stockings. Out with her (also transsexual) friend, the two window-shop for high heels and look at dress displays in a store window (the act of window shopping in itself can be considered feminine). They are, in a sense, looking at the articles of their artifice, seeking out the tools that will help them succeed in their gender performance. At the end of their day of shopping, they stop in a salon, a locus for bodily control: Anarcoma’s friend gets her legs waxed. All of these events taking place in the space of three panels convey the two characters’ quest for femininity. As Butler would no doubt remind us, though, if transsexuals search for femininity, it does not mean that gender construction and performance are exclusive to them. All women (like all men) perform their gender in part through outward displays of clothing and bodily control, as in Fig. 7 below:
       

       
      Anarcoma (55)  © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 7.

      Anarcoma (55)

      © 1988 Nazario & Ediciones La Cúpula, SL. Used by permission.
       

       
      In another sequence, Anarcoma tries to get information out of a female associate of her nemesis, La Deisy. She takes advantage of the drunkenness of the woman to ply her for details regarding the location of a missing machine, and ultimately resorts to seducing the woman to further her quest. The scene is distinguished by the way it is presented visually. Despite the fact that the reader is well aware of Anarcoma’s sexual prowess and her “sizeable cock,” the sex between the two is visually coded as lesbian sex. They are first shown sitting fully clothed on the couch, conversing and flirting, and then in the following panel, La Deisy is shown lying down bare breasted while Anarcoma performs oral sex on her, while herself fully clothed. After the nakedness and the sex coded as either heterosexual or as sex between men that abounds in the comic, it is significant that Anarcoma is coded here as exclusively feminine, as lesbian. Perhaps it is an effort to resist traditional gender/sexual roles and avoid the expected sexual coupling of a male and a female, which might be the case if the detective were coded as more masculine here. Anarcoma does, after all, have no problem playing a more active, male coded sexual role when having sex with men. By resisting the more traditional expectations, and instead creating a panel that is coded as lesbian, Nazario maintains the tension that exists bodily in the character of Anarcoma and is reflected in her behavior.
       
      Anarcoma ties the transgressive body to the changing culture and spaces of Spain. Her body is a “corporeal . . . mapping of the subject into a cultural system”; as a metaphor, Anarcoma’s fluid body comments on the norms that had constricted Spanish culture under Franco and on the forces that sought to move Spain away from its rigid past (Bukatman 49). In a nation that wanted to leave its troubled past behind, Nazario creates Anarcoma. She is an uncommon, unexpected heroine who refuses to leave the “past” of her body behind, and instead forges her own way, a new way created from within spaces that facilitate this act of creation and re-creation. The negotiations she makes throughout the text emblematize the transition which was occurring around her and her readers. The city she moves through, Barcelona, provides her with the freedom to create her own path and to carve out her own identity. Her life and adventures highlight the negotiations (of space, of regional and national identities, etc.) that the country as a whole was grappling with. However, just as Spain’s future was uncertain when Anarcoma first appeared, so the text leaves many of the questions it raises intentionally unanswered. The result of the continual negotiations, back and forth migrations, and incomplete formations in Anarcoma is a text that centers on a detective who, by the end of the story, rather than solve a mystery outright, instead leaves the reader questioning, among other things, such ideas as the visual markers of gender, gender roles, and the constructedness of gender itself.
       

      Michael Harrison is Assistant Professor of Spanish at Monmouth College. He is currently working on a book project exploring the development of queer culture in Spain through an analysis of Spanish comics and graphic novels.

       

      Notes

       
      1. El Víbora was born out of the underground comics movement of the early 1970s in Spain, whose readers made up a wide swath of progressive minded Spaniards. Although not an exclusively gay magazine, El Víbora served an important role during the transition as the creative voice of a generation, gay or straight. Dopico notes this, saying “Marcada por su carácter alternativo, transgresor y provocador, su militancia y voluntarismo . . . la revista se convirtió en un soporte sólido y rentable para toda una generación de dibujantes españoles, que, con sus obras, llegaron a todas las capas culturales de la sociedad . . . En general, su temática insistía en el triángulo contracultural formado por el sexo, las drogas, y la violencia” ‘Marked by its alternative, transgressive and provocative character, its militancy and its volunteerism . . . the magazine became a solid and profitable support for an entire generation of Spanish artists, which, with whose works, reached all cultural levels of society . . . In general, its themes revolved around the countercultural triangle formed by sex, drugs and violence’ (320). El Víbora was definitely a successful comics magazine, and only a year after its first issue, had become the highest selling magazine sold in Spanish kiosks. Between 1982 and 1983, sales of the magazine were between 40,000 and 50,000 issues per month, and the estimated readership of the magazine was around 400,000 readers (which is likely much higher due to the frequent sharing of issues after being read), including university students, military battalions, prisoners, and local collectives (Dopico 333).

       

       
      2. For a detailed and vivid account of the underground culture of this period, including a wealth of collected images, documents and ephemera, see Nazario’s La Barcelona de los años 70 vista por Nazario y sus amigos.

       

       
      3. All translations of citations are mine. I have chosen “queer” as the translation of mariconeo, based on Nazario’s point, in the same interview, that the word queer in English means the same as maricón in Spanish (80).

       

       
      4. I use the feminine article and other feminine nouns when referring to Anarcoma throughout because Anarcoma chooses a feminine exterior presentation when out in public in the text, and that it is the standard pronoun used by other critics of the text.

       

       
      5. Comics, as a medium, is used with a singular verb. This has become standard practice with most current comics scholars. Scott McCloud’s definition of comics says it is “plural in form, used with a singular verb” (9).

       

       
      6. Doctor Niebla was a character from a comics series that first appeared in 1948, based on a series of crime novels by Rafael González, with images by Francisco Hidalgo. Hidalgo’s visual style is described as, “una asimilación del estilo estadunidense de la época clásica, y revestida de una atmósfera irreal, con oníricas viñetas en las que los personajes parecen congelados entre luces y sugestivas planificaciones, aunque sin abandonar el terreno realista de la serie negra” ‘an assimilation of the American style of the classic period, and covered with an unreal atmosphere, with dreamlike panels in which the characters seem to be frozen between lights and suggestive planning, although without abandoning the realistic territory of the noir series’ (Cuadrado 390). Doctor Niebla is considered by many to be one of the masterpieces of Spanish comics. A number of parallels can be made between Anarcoma and Doctor Niebla beyond the visual similarity of the covers below. Doctor Niebla is a mysterious figure whose identity is unknown and unfixed. Like Anarcoma, he is not a member of the established police force, but does work on the side of justice. The comic was also one of only a few that made specific references to current popular culture (Dashiell Hammett, the Andrews Sisters). “Las connotaciones . . . que se encuentran a lo largo de los guiones, confieren…a esta serie una calidad muy superior a lo que era habitual en la época” ‘The connotations . . . that are found throughout the scripts, confer . . . on this series a much superior quality than that which was habitual during the period’ (Vazquez de Parga 164).

       

       
      7. Gema Pérez-Sánchez has, however, questioned the subversive nature of Anarcoma. In examining a number of comics from this period in her study of gay representation, she ties the subversive power of specific comics magazines during the 1980s to their financing, and argues that capitalistic forces that privileged certain texts economically over others actually diminished the ability of those same texts to question systemic heteronorms precisely because many of the qualities of the comics made them more popular with (largely heterosexual, male) readers. She draws a comparison between the comics found in the government-funded magazine Madriz, including those by Ana Juan and Ana Miralles, and the private, more widely read El Víbora (which included Anarcoma), indicating in part that capitalistic forces at play in the popularity of publications like El Víbora required that “subversive rough edges be filed down,” resulting in a less significant criticism of normative forces (177). Pérez-Sánchez argues that El Víbora lacked a true subversive quality and that it often “appealed to a mainstream, conservative, middle-aged, heterosexual male readership” (178). Therefore, she indicates, Anarcoma is far from radical in its portrayal women or femininity, indicating that there is no “sense of feminist vindication” to be found in the pages of the comic (181). She sees Nazario’s presentation of hypervirility as continuing the traditional practices of previous periods, rather than breaking with them. While I do not disagree with her argument in a broader sense (the lack of positive female characters and the extreme violence are impossible to deny, and Nazario’s subversive representations of masculinity are much more concrete and complex than his treatment of femininity), the specific ways which the body of Anarcoma is presented, privileging the image over subject identity, and the ways which the detective moves through and interacts with her environment to construct new gay spaces are, in my estimation, significant to an understanding of the development of gay identity in Spain in the 1970s.

       

       
      8. Moreiras Menor explains, at length, the cultural shift that privileged spectacle and consumerism in cultural production as part of this move to a more postmodern aesthetic, while avoiding treatment of the political and social reality of the transition. She focuses on the 1980s as the period during which this trend was most pronounced, and analyzes texts from the 1980s to support her argument. I would contend that, as a text which appears just prior to the “boom” of the culture of spectacle linked to consumerism and superficiality, Anarcoma exhibits a few of the hallmarks of this trend (it is a mystery story, contains some over the top imagery, etc.), but does not fall squarely within this trend.

       

       
      9. Even within secret enclaves of progressive Spaniards such as the underground Spanish Communist Party, homosexuality was not acceptable. This required gays and lesbians to be both closeted in their political beliefs and closeted in their sexuality in their underground political groups. Eloy de la Iglesia’s 1978 film El diputado is a good example of the fact that homosexuality was not automatically accepted even by the most progressive political groups.

       

       
      10. This link between the image of the transsexual and the politico-social reality of Post-Franco Spain appears frequently in studies of this period. These ties appear both in a more direct correlation (see Perriam 157, Guasch 100-01), and as tied to a camp aesthetic (see Garlinger and Song 8, Valis 67-68, and Lev 240).

       

       
      11. Garlinger, for example, has said that there is a danger in using metaphors “to reify national identity,” because they are too specific-the complexity of a nation cannot be expressed in one body, and a gendered one at that. The “binary approach to transvestism is insufficient” and the point of drag is its ambiguous nature (367). This ambiguity has been discussed at length in the figure of Anarcoma, and perhaps it is the fact that Anarcoma does not conform to expected gender norms, and represents the fluidity of the two, that she makes a better metaphor than many of the more traditionally gendered ones that are prevalent during the transición.

       

       
      12. The foundation and development of the gay movement in Spain, which began in earnest in Barcelona, is well documented by Armand de Fluvià, one of the key figures in the movement, in his El movement gai a la clandestinitat del franquisme (1970-1975). In his testimonial, de Fluvià tracks the historical, political and cultural representations of homosexuality leading up to the 1970s, and highlights the importance of Barcelona to the movement by detailing the foundation of gay political organizations in the city such as MELH (Movimiento Español de Liberación Homosexual / Spanish Gay Liberation Movement). His detailed account clearly places Barcelona as ground zero for the nascent gay political movement, even before the end of the Franco dictatorship. These early gay political movements lay the groundwork for the demonstrations that were made possible during the transition to democracy. Óscar Guasch gives a sense of the climate that produced these demonstrations from a non-fictionalstandpoint (79-82); for a fictionalized account, see Fernàndez’s El anarquista desnudo.

       

       
      13. John Hooper discusses seny and arrauxment, saying, “There is no exact translation of seny. Perhaps the nearest equivalent is the northern English term ‘nous’ – good old common sense. Respect for seny makes the Catalans realistic, earnest, tolerant and at times a bit censorious.” He continues, quoting Victor Alba: “The opposite of seny is arrauxment: an ecstasy of violence” (406-07).

       

       
      14. Two examples directly related to this study illustrate this type of migration. Nazario himself migrated from Sevilla, as documented in San Nazario y Las Pirañas Incorruptas: Obra completa de Nazario de 1970 a 1980,(93-95), and Nazario’s good friend Ocaña describes a similar migration from Andalucía in Ventura Pons’s 1978 documentary film, Ocaña, Un retrato intermitente.

       

       
      15. I use “sexual citizenship” here to refer to the ways in which gays and lesbians participate in both the physical and discursive spaces of their communities, as has been explained by Binnie and Bell, among others. Their study The Sexual Citizen (2000) examines the many facets of sexual citizenship as it relates to the gay community.

       

       
      16. By “migrant sexual citizens” I mean the physical migrations of gay and lesbians away from the more intolerant villages and small towns to the cities mapped onto the concept of sexual citizenship. The physical migrations of these people resulted in a change of physical space and fostered the development of discursive queer spaces.

       

       
      17. By discussing spaces coded as gay, the non-gay spaces would be coded as such by contrast. A neutral space, for example, might be a bar frequented by a wide range of people who are, in general, open-minded (groups of artists, musicians, etc.), while a straight space would, in general, be one where expressions of homosexuality might be looked upon unfavorably. The sheer presence of Anarcoma in the bar, however, makes it unlikely that it would be coded as straight.

       

       
      18. The appearance of these fellow artists from the Barcelona scene of the day demonstrates the collaborative work that went on between artists such as Nazario, Onliyú, Ocaña, and others. Their work done for El Víbora often relied on their inspiring each other to push yet another creative envelope, and their cultural production, as seen here, is intertwined. In another example, Nazario is shown participating with Ocaña in one of his famous happenings in the Rambla of Barcelona in Ventura Pons’s film. The relation between these artists and the Barcelona scene is well documented in both Onliyú’s memoire, Memorias del underground barcelonés, which documents the early days of the collaboration of artists such as Nazario, Onliyú, Makoki, Mariscal, and Ceesepe, and Nazario’s La Barcelona de los años 70 vista por Nazario y sus amigos, which makes connections between the artist’s collaboration and the changes happening in Barcelona during the time, and takes the form of an album of sorts which collects, chronologically, the artistic events occurring during the 1970s and early 1980s in Barcelona.

       

       
      19. The religious order that is also present in the text as a foil to Anarcoma’s efforts, called “Los Caballeros de la Santa Orden de San Reprimonio” (“The Knights of the Holy Order of Saint Reprimonio”) is a slightly more abstract representation of this type of rigid societal control. The knights represent the church which, in concert with the military dictatorship, was the major force in the marginalizing of non-normative sexuality. The name of the order highlights the repression which abounded in Spain at the time.

       

       
      20. Eduardo Mendicutti’s Una mala noche la tiene cualquiera also makes similar connections between a transsexual protagonist and the very real fears of a return to dictatorship during the coups of 23 February, 1981.

       

       
      21. The Spanish adjective “emplumado” does not have a literal translation in this context. The phrase “tener pluma” to which this adjective refers means an inversion of traditionally accepted gender identity, such as femininity in men or masculinity in women. “Queer” comes close to approximating the meaning in that the presentation of unexpected masculinity or femininity is an outward sign of being different, or queer.

       

       
      22. This breaking of established norms in favor of newer, queer models is reflected in Anne Magnussen’s essay, “Spanish Comics and Family,” which examines the ways that Anarcoma reverses expectations of representations of family, marginalizing the heterosexual family unit and placing the transsexual community at the center. She describes the community as, “attractive or desirable to the people outside it. At the same time, it is represented as a social system in its own right defined according to norms, values, and power relations involving the same type of problems concerning work, love, sex, and friendship as conventional family life” (75). Once again, Magnussen helps underscore that Anarcoma queers the oppressive systems which had subjugated Spain under dictatorship, simultaneously questioning all norms (family, church) while vindicating previously marginalized groups.

       

       
      23. Bibi Andersen was a transsexual performer made famous by starring in a number of early films by Pedro Almodóvar.

       

       
      24. Pedro Pérez del Solar notes that Anarcoma’s name could be seen as similar to anarquía, or anarchy, connecting this concept to her own mode of gender expression (535).

       

       
      25. Moreiras Menor quotes Guy Debord to say that a society of spectacle is constructed under the sphere of “la afirmación de la apariencia y la afirmación de toda la vida social humana como mera apariencia” (“the affirmation of appearance and the affirmation of all human social life as mere appearance”) (72).

       

       
      26. The presence of transsexuals in other Spanish texts (both filmic and otherwise) supports this generalization of the transsexual on the road to full transition, beginning with Vicente Aranda’s 1977 film Cambio de sexo staring transsexual actress Bibi Andersen. A more modern example that shares some similarity with Anarcoma is the 2005 Ramón Salazar film 20 centímetros, in which a pre-operative transsexual prostitute is sought out by clients and romantic partners for her large endowment. However, unlike Anarcoma, she too is on the path to full transition.

       

       
      27. Here, when referring to the visual, bodily representation in the comic of sex organs (Anarcoma’s penis, breasts) I use the term maleness/femaleness. At certain points in the comic, the femaleness and maleness presented reinforce the performance of masculinity or femininity and at others it may contradict it. This interplay is crucial to my analysis of Anarcoma’s masculine and feminine performance and the constructedness of both gender and “sex.” The presentation of Anarcoma’s troubling of the “sex” binary contributes directly to the ways the reader is to understand the masculine/feminine performances she also enacts. As Butler explains, “The presuppositions that we make about sexed bodies, about them being one or the other, about the meanings that are said to inhere in them or to follow from being sexed in such a way are suddenly and significantly upset by those examples that fail to comply with the categories that naturalize and stabilize that field of bodies for us within the terms of cultural conventions. Hence, the strange, the incoherent, that which falls ‘outside,’ gives us a way of understanding the taken-for-granted world of sexual categorization as a constructed one, indeed, as one that might well be constructed differently” (140). Anarcoma falls “outside” these binaries, and so allows for this analysis.

       

       
      28. Additionally, the hormones that Anarcoma uses are themselves a product of science, and can be seen as an instrument of patriarchal bodily control over the female in traditional societal constructs. These hormones are typically prescribed to women to balance and control their biological femininity. Anarcoma, and countless other transsexuals, appropriate this instrument of bodily control for their own use, in effect removing the established agent of bodily control and appropriating agency in this process for themselves. Therefore, this act becomes not only one of bodily transgression, but one of transgression of broader societal norms of patriarchal control.
       

      Works Cited

         

       

      • Aliaga, Juan Vicente, and José Miguel G. Cortes. Identidad y diferencia: sobre la cultura gay en España. Barcelona: Editorial Gay y Lesbiana, 1997. Print.
      • Bell, David, and Jon Binnie. “Authenticating Queer Space: Citizenship, Urbanism and Governance.” Urban Studies 41.9 (August 2004): 1807-20. Print.
      • Binnie, Jon. “Quartering Sexualities: Gay Villages and Sexual Citizenship.” City of Quarters:Urban Villages in the Contemporary City. Eds. Bell, David and Mark Jayne. Hants, England: Ashgate, 2004. 163-72. Print.
      • Brooks, Peter. Body Work: Objects of Desire in Modern Narrative. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1993. Print.
      • Bukatman, Scott. “X-Bodies: The Torment of the Mutant Superhero (1994).” Matters of Gravity: Special Effects and Supermen in the 20th Century. Durham: Duke UP, 2003. 48-78. Print.
      • Butler, Judith. Gender Trouble. New York: Routledge, 1999. Print.
      • Chisholm, Dianne. Queer Constellations: Subcultural Space in the Wake of the City. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2005. Print.
      • Coma, Javier. Historia de los comics. Vol. 2: La Expansión Internacional. Barcelona: Toutain, 1982. Print.
      • Cuadrado, Jesús. De la historieta y su uso, 1873-2000. Madrid: Sinsentido, 2000. Print.
      • De Fluvià, Armand. El moviment gai a la clandestinitat del franquisme (1970-1975). Barcelona: Laertes, 2003. Print.
      • Dopico, Pablo. El cómic underground español, 1970-1980. Madrid: Cátedra, 2005. Print.
      • Douglas, Mary. Natural Symbols, Explorations in Cosmology. New York: Pantheon, 1982. Print.
      • Fernàndez, Lluís. El anarquista desnudo. Barcelona: Anagrama, 1979. Print.
      • Garlinger, Patrick Paul. “Dragging Spain into the ‘Post-Franco’ Era: Transvestism and National Identity in Una mala noche la tiene cualquiera.” Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos 24.2 (2000): 363-82. Print.
      • Garlinger, Patrick Paul, and H. Rosi Song. “Camp: What’s Spain Got To Do With It?” Journal of Spanish Cultural Studies 5.1 (2004): 3-12. Print.
      • Guasch, Oscar. La sociedad rosa. Barcelona: Anagrama, 1991. Print.
      • Hooper, John. The New Spaniards. London: Penguin Books, 1995. Print.
      • Kaur Puar, Jasbir, Dereka Rushbrook, and Louisa Schein. “Sexuality and Space: Queering Geographies of Globalization.” Environment and Planning D: Society and Space 21 (2003): 383-87. Print.
      • Knopp, Larry, and Michael Brown. “Queer Diffusions.” Environment and Planning D: Society and Space 21 (2003): 409-24. Print.
      • Lev, Leora. “Refractions of Queer Iberia: Post-Francoist Peninsular Camp.” Corónica: A Journal of Medieval Spanish Language and Literature 30.1 (2001): 239-43. Print.
      • Magnussen, Anne. “Spanish Comics and Family.” International Journal of Comic Art 5.2 (2003): 66-84. Print.
      • McCloud, Scott. Understanding Comics: The Invisible Art. New York: HarperCollins, 1993. Print.
      • Mendicutti, Eduardo. Una mala noche la tiene cualquiera. Barcelona: Tusquets, 1988. Print.
      • Mira, Alberto. De Sodoma a Chueca: Una historia cultural de la homosexualidad en España en el siglo XX. Barcelona: Egales, 2004. Print.
      • Moreiras Menor, Cristina. Cultura herida: Literatura y cine en la España democrática. Madrid: Ediciones Libertarias, 2002. Print.
      • Nazario. Anarcoma. Barcelona: Ediciones La Cúpula, 1983. Print.
      • —. La Barcelona de los años 70 vista por Nazario y sus amigos. Barcelona: Ellago Ediciones, 2004. Print.
      • —. “Disección del suicidio cotidiano de un santo gay que quería ser mártir.” Del fanzine al manga yaoi: lesbianes, gais i transsexuals al còmic. Eds. Acebrón, Julián and Ana Merino. Lleida: Ajuntament de Lleida, 2005. 55-57. Print.
      • —. San Nazario y Las Pirañas Incorruptas: Obra completa de Nazario de 1970 a 1980. Barcelona: Ediciones La Cúpula, 2001. Print.
      • Pérez del Solar, Pedro. “Images of the Desencanto: Spanish Comics, 1979-1986.” Dissertation. Princeton U, 2000. Print.
      • Pérez-Sánchez, Gema. Queer Transitions in Contemporary Spanish Culture: From Franco to la Movida. Albany, NY: SUNY Press, 2007. Print.
      • Perriam, Chris. “Not Writing Straight, but Not Writing Queer: Popular Castilian ‘Gay’ Fiction.” Constructing Identity in Contemporary Spain: Theoretical Debates and Cultural Practices. Ed. Labanyi, Jo. New York: Oxford UP, 2002. 154-69. Print.
      • Valis, Noël M. “The Cursilería of Camp in Ana Rossetti’s Plumas de España.” Journal of Spanish Cultural Studies 5.1 (2004): 67-81. Print.
      • Vazquez de Parga, Salvador. Los cómics del franquismo. Barcelona: Planeta, 1980. Print.
      • Vernon, Kathleen M., and Barbara Morris, eds. Post-Franco, Postmodern: The Films of Pedro Almodóvar. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood P, 1995. Print.
      • Vilarós, Teresa M. El mono del desencanto: Una crítica cultural de la transición española (1973-1993). Madrid: Siglo XXI, 1998. Print.

       

    • Self-Portrait in a Context Mirror: Pain and Quotation in the Conceptual Writing of Craig Dworkin

      Paul Stephens (bio)
      Emory University
      ps249@columbia.edu

      Abstract
       
      This essay explores the role of quotation in the writing of the poet-critic Craig Dworkin. Dworkin’s “Dure,” an ekphrastic prose poem concerning a Dürer self-portrait, is a complex meditation on selfhood, the representation of pain, and the nature of linguistic appropriation. “Dure” demonstrates that an appropriative, heavily quotational poetics can enact a process of therapeutic self-critique. To the postauthorial (and posthistorical) malaise of Barthes’s “the text is a tissue of quotations,” Dworkin responds with a self-portrait in a tissue of quotations, enacting a writing cure, or a writing-through cure. Extensively quotational works are often associated with parody and satire—but such works, this essay suggests, can also be sincere in intent, and can mourn, as well as heal, by thematizing intersubjectivity. Although Dworkin elsewhere advocates a poetics “of intellect rather than emotion,” this essay claims that “Dure” enacts something along the lines of a return to expressive autobiography, somewhat paradoxically by way of a poetics of citationality.

       

       

       

      Quotation marks ticked through the body of the text like sutures arched in stitches that will scar.
       
      But if a scar is always a citation, are citations, themselves, always scars?
       

      –Craig Dworkin, “Dure,” Strand (79)

       

      A picture is a tissue of quotations drawn from the innumerable centers of culture.
       

      –Sherrie Levine, “Statement” (1039)

       

      “I have given a name to my pain and call it ‘dog,’” announces Nietzsche in a brilliantly magisterial pretense of having at last gained the upper hand . . . . In the isolation of pain, even the most uncompromising advocate of individualism might suddenly prefer a realm populated by companions.
       

      –Elaine Scarry, The Body in Pain (11)

       
      “All minds quote,” as the supremely quotable Ralph Waldo Emerson would have it–and yet not all minds quote alike at all times (“Quotation” 178). Pastiche, quotation, montage, and sampling have been taken as paradigmatic gestures of the contemporary period: of the postmodern, of the information age, or of the belated era of “the end of art.”1 This essay explores quotation and citationality in the writing of poet-critic Craig Dworkin. Dworkin’s “Dure,” I argue, demonstrates that an appropriative, heavily quotational poetics can enact a process of therapeutic self-critique.2 An ekphrastic prose poem about a Dürer self-portrait, “Dure” is a complex meditation on selfhood, the representation of pain, and the nature of linguistic appropriation. “Dure” operates by continually drawing attention to the discursive parameters by which we articulate pain. Roughly a third of “Dure” consists of direct quotation. In response to the postauthorial (and posthistorical) malaise of Barthes’s the “text is a tissue of quotations” (104), Dworkin offers a self-portrait in a tissue of quotations, enacting a writing cure, or a writing-through cure. Extensively quotational works are often associated with parody and satire–but such works, this essay suggests, can also mourn, as well as heal, by thematizing intersubjectivity, or in Scarry’s terms, by creating “a realm populated by companions” (11). Although Dworkin elsewhere advocates a poetics “of intellect rather than emotion” (“Introduction”), I suggest that “Dure” enacts something along the lines of a return to expressive autobiography, somewhat paradoxically by way of a poetics of citationality.
       
      The term citationality, in the sense that I am using it here, is taken from Judith Butler’s Bodies that Matter (Butler derives it from Derrida’s critique of Searle). In updating the theory of performativity outlined in Gender Trouble, Butler argues that
       

      The forming, crafting, bearing, circulation, signification of [the] sexed body will not be a set of actions performed in compliance with the law; on the contrary, they will be a set of actions mobilized by the law, the citational accumulation and dissimulation of the law. . . .
       
      Performativity is thus not a singular “act,” for it is always a reiteration of a norm or set of norms, and to the extent that it acquires an act-like status in the present, it conceals or dissimulates the conventions of which it is a repetition. Moreover, this act is not primarily theatrical.
       

      (12)

       

      For Butler, to think of performativity as citational is “directly counter to any notion of a voluntarist subject who exists quite apart from the regulatory norms which she/he opposes” (15). Adapting Butler’s notion of citationality, I suggest that in “Dure” Dworkin blends citation and direct expression in order to negotiate “the lyrical interference of the individual as ego” (in Charles Olson’s influential formulation) (247). That subjectivity is citational is not necessarily a state of affairs to be lamented–rather, any informed self-analysis must take into account a subject who is both a product and a producer of a citational performativity. A scar, in other words, is not only the site of a wound, it is also a site (or a citation) of healing.

       

      For over a decade, in books, articles, and edited collections, Dworkin has undertaken an extensive critical and poetic project which investigates the limits of representation in language. Dworkin’s dissertation, “Reading the Illegible,” includes an unusual table of contents that was later removed from the Northwestern University Press book version. The page is centrally indicative of Dworkin’s larger ongoing critical project, and of his call for a “radical formalism”:
       

      Table of Contents
       
      Introduction iii-xix
       
      Chapter One 1-35
       
      In which a great deal of drinking precedes a long sleepless night and our hero’s rather rude awakening among vandals, pirates, and a number of penguins.
       
      Chapter Two 36-55
       
      Wherein our hero becomes lost in the woods and narrowly survives a whole host of parasites only to discover that betrayal is the very precondition of love.
       
      Chapter Three 56-93
       
      In the course of which a great many secrets are revealed concerning things human and inhuman, and during which our hero, finding himself up against the wall, sees red.
       
      Chapter Four 94-148
       
      Wherein our hero’s wanderings are cut short when gambling debts are unexpectedly called in, and he returns home only to find all of the letters torn open and read (confirming the cogency of his paranoia).
       
      Chapter Five 149-166
       
      In which articles of history and autumn greet the dawn and we conclude by looking back on the future looking toward its past.
       
      Appendices:
       
      Notes 167-208
       
      Bibliography 209-221 (ii)

       

      At first glance, one might dismiss this table of contents as an academic joke that plays on the oxymoronic title of the work in question. Strictly speaking, it should be impossible to read the illegible, unless we redefine our criteria for legibility–which is what the dissertation asks us to do with regard to modernist and avant-garde texts that defy traditional literary critical methods. The table of contents, although legible, is inscrutable in its presentation of an evasive pseudo-biography. Consider some complicating factors in our reading of this (auto?) biography: Why should it be about “our hero”? To what extent is an academic dissertation a form that specifically precludes biography, and yet selectively encourages certain biographical paratexts like acknowledgements and dedications? A dissertation is framed by the protocols of an institution, in this case the University of California, Berkeley, and as such, a dissertation is a formal document confirming the attainment of a certain degree of learning. But there can be an uneasy relation between valid research and the merely personal interests of a given dissertant. Dworkin’s table of contents can be said to offer a reader more information than a more conventional contents page. Yet the biographical dimension of Dworkin’s contents page is deceptive: The protagonist of the table of contents is not in fact an “I,” but is instead referred to as “our hero.” This immediately begs the question: Who are we?–those who read dissertations?3 Perhaps the implication is that literary history is an elaborate form of hero worship.

       
      I propose we read the contents page as a test case for the limits of literary and scholarly representation, as an instance of “conceptual writing,” a movement in which Dworkin is a leading avatar. Within the prescribed form of the academic dissertation, Dworkin’s contents page aspires as an initial gesture to make method (literary historical scholarship) conform more closely to subject matter (avant-garde writing). Like much of the art produced under the rubric of Conceptualism since the late 1960s, Dworkin’s writing exposes the institutional conditions that make art and literature possible, or in Dworkin’s terms, legible. Conceptual writing attempts to counter the excesses of a romantic “lyric ego” by reformulating our notions of the autobiographical and the personal. In his introduction to The UbuWeb: Anthology of Conceptual Writing, Dworkin asks, “what would a non-expressive poetry look like? A poetry of intellect rather than emotion? One in which the substitutions at the heart of metaphor and image were replaced by the direct presentation of language itself.” The “direct presentation of language itself” might be an impossible goal of conceptual writing–but self-reflexively pointing to the positionality of the writer might be a step toward the “direct presentation” of criticism itself. Perhaps the table of contents is asking: What would a more expressive criticism look like?
       
      In his book, Reading the Illegible, Dworkin does not mention his dissertation’s table of contents, but he does discuss the restrictive parameters of the dissertation as a form, and suggests that an academic monograph has a different set of constraints, which are likewise antithetical to the spirit of his critical project. Dworkin claims that “this present work, written beyond the strictures of a graduate division, is nevertheless–and necessarily–at heart a betrayal of the very values for which it argues” (xvii-iii). If this claim sounds hyperbolic, consider what Dworkin claims the book’s overall argument to be:
       

      In short, the basic thesis of this book is INSERT DESCRIPTION - inline graphic.
       

      (xviii)

       

      To paraphrase liberally, this “basic thesis” presents a complex conundrum for literary criticism: How does one produce secondary criticism that resists assigning reductive meanings to polyvalent primary texts whose meanings cannot easily be paraphrased or instrumentalized–texts whose meanings might literally be not just overdetermined, but overwritten? Dworkin’s answer is to make criticism play a part in preserving the complexity of the texts it analyzes, and to some extent, retroactively fashions and endorses. “I have written this book with a firm belief that even critical writing can be a productive experiment,” he maintains (Reading xix). In the introduction to Reading the Illegible, Dworkin describes his project as a “confession,” but he does so (as he does in “Dure”) by means of a quotation from Robert Smithson: “And so what follows is also a confession of sorts. ‘[Art] Critics are generally poets who have betrayed their art, and instead have tried to turn art into a matter of reasoned discourse, and, occasionally, when their ‘truth’ breaks down, they resort to a [poetic] quote’” (xviii). The irony would be that Dworkin–as a poet writing criticism resorting to quotation in order to bolster a “reasoned discourse”–is undertaking precisely the kind of betrayal about which Smithson complains in the quote to which Dworkin resorts. An added irony is that Smithson places “truth” in quotations, making “truth” a quotation within a quotation. If this is “a confession of sorts,” it takes a strange form: not a first-person utterance, but rather something like an interruption of the self undertaken by an absent authority. Smithson, in this context, could be an offstage “hero” haunting the book. A repressed expressivity would seem to be surfacing in order to make the case for a criticism more up to the task of responding to poetries which question the underlying conditions of literary expression altogether.

       
      If a “non-expressive” poetry were possible, Dworkin’s recent book Parse might be about as close as one could get to the mark. Parse, its author tells us in a postscriptorial “Note,” is a “translation of Edwin A. Abbot’s [1874] How to Parse: An Attempt to Apply the Principles of Scholarship to English Grammar” (289).4 Rather than translating from one language to another, Dworkin translates every word into its part of speech and every mark of punctuation into its verbal form. Thus the opening:
       

      ADVERB PREPOSITION OF THE
       
      INFINITIVE ACTIVE INDEFINITE PRESENT
       
      TENSE TRANSITIVE VERB INFINITIVE
       
      MOOD OBJECT AND SUBJECT IMPLIED
       
      USED AS A NOUN PERIOD Plural Noun
       
      copulative conjunction Plural Noun preposition
       

      (Parse 12)

       

      This kind of writing poses a number of problems related to philosophy of language: How does one choose how to translate a word into its categorical description? Why isn’t “OF,” for instance, translated as “PREPOSITION”? Why shouldn’t a period be represented by its mark rather than by its word? Can one “write through” (in the John Cage sense) a book which itself attempts to schematize language? Is Parse simply a grammar book turned inside out, or is it an original poem? Dworkin offers a bodily metaphor for his undertaking, describing Parse as an attempt “to get inside the skeleton of language” (“Interview”). One message of this kind of writing, according to an interview with the author, is that “the most seemingly sterile procedural, coldly conceptual work shows people that you never get away from a writing subject’s embeddedness in history, which is to say you never get away from politics” (Dworkin, “Interview”). Another message is that the “writing subject” also never gets away from embodiment. To think of language as a body politic, or rather a body linguistic or a body poetic, is to recognize that the “writing subject” is marked at every turn by quotation. Parse would presume to be a complete translation, and yet the text is full of clinamen, as for instance in this passage:

       

      adverb semicolon marks of quotation but in “I say his body, thrown on one side and frightfully mangled,” the meaning might be, either “when it was being thrown,” or “after it had thrown,” or “after it had been thrown,” and you cannot tell which is meant without carefully looking at the whole of the passage.
       
      In other words, a Passive Participle, e.g. “shot,” may stand for “being shot,” or, “having been shot.”
       

      (149)

       

      One must indeed look carefully “at the whole of the passage.” The quotation marks allow Dworkin to depart from his method and introduce a “frightfully mangled” body? Why weren’t “I,” “say,” “his,” and “body” replaced by their appropriate parts of speech? Dworkin’s “translation” takes an expressive turn. With very little tinkering, he interjects a kind of verbal violence into Parse. Perhaps the book’s epigraph from Stendhal gives us a clue as to the source of this violence:

       

      Le comte Altamira me racontait que, la veille de sa mort, Danton disait avec sa grosse voix: “C’est singulier, le verbe guillotiner ne peut pas se conjuguer dans tous ses temps, on peut bien dire: je serai guillotiné, tu seras guillotiné, mais on ne dit pas: J’ai été guillotiné.”
       

      (9)5

       

      The guillotine represents absolute death, but absolute death cannot be described by Danton, or by anyone else–especially after the fact. Grammar is a logical system for the organization of language, in which certain formations cannot be tolerated. To adapt Wittgenstein’s famous phrase, the limits of my language are the limits of my pain.

       
      Parse is replete with slippages which suggest that the book is not a mechanistic exercise that would altogether deny referential meaning or creative agency. Once a set of procedures has been put in place, the book would seemingly translate itself, but this is not the case. The book plays upon a notion of self-translation: “[T]his newly parsed chapter has panoptically analyzed itself” (199). But this is (of course) an impossibility: this moment of self-analysis can only be produced by a deviation from the protocols of the translation, and a panopticon requires both a viewer and a viewed. Toward the end of Parse, Dworkin seems to push harder against something like a fourth wall of representation, suggesting that perhaps the text has begun to control him:
       

      Preparatory Subject Already Intimating The Exhausted Author Be Exempted From The Task Of Further Arduous Labor model auxiliary of further exculpatory transitive verb of a hedging distance now so far slipped from the true subject that the alibied author cannot help but be excused for be being too enervated to carry out yet another full analysis of straw of adverbial vertebral catastrophic dromedarian failure preposition of the infinitive infinitive verb of half-heartedly wrist-flicked broad-brushed partial exposition em dash.
       

      (216)

       

      The paragraph is framed by what seem like procedural translations of punctuation or parts of speech–“Preparatory Subject” and “em dash”–and yet the passage can only be read as a confessional deviation from the project of translation. After several hundred pages of parts of speech, the inattentive reader (or skimmer) would likely pass over this description of the author’s exhaustion. Pain might be too strong a word for the authorial exhaustion described here; nonetheless, we have an “alibied author” who seems to have been betrayed by the enervating project he has undertaken. The project itself has perhaps been betrayed by the “alibied author” who has had to emerge from his “hedging distance.” Dworkin’s metaphors for language are again bodily: “an adverbial vertebral catastrophic dromedarian failure” seems to indicate that the camel’s back of language has been broken. The attempt to translate has resulted in a subjective catachresis in the carrying across of meaning.

       
      Parse has recently been described by Vanessa Place and Robert Fitterman as “an example of neo-constructivist sobjectivity” (39). By their neologism “sobjectivity,” Place and Fitterman mean to suggest that “Objectivity is old-fashioned, subjectivity idem” and that “The Sobject exists in a perpetual substantive eclipse: more s/object by turns and degrees” (38). Place and Fitterman’s discussion bears the influence of Lyn Hejinian in particular, who writes in My Life: “Both subjectivity and objectivity are outdated filling systems” (141). Dworkin preserves the filing system of How to Parse, but he empties it of its original content, removing Abbott’s original filling. Place, Fitterman, and Hejinian all describe an embodied subject that both fills spaces and files memories, merging form and content, and yet this “sobject” remains discontented. For Place and Fitterman, “The Sobject is the properly melancholic contemporary entity” (38). The term “sobject” cleverly both highlights and elides subject/object relations, and as such is well suited to describing Parse–although “sobject” is perhaps too flippant a term to describe the more directly self-referential “Dure.”
       
      Another of Dworkin’s poems, “Legion,” draws upon the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory of 1942, and in so doing, I suggest, presents a critique of institutionalized measures of pain. The text of the poem is derived from the true/false questions of the test. “Legion” begins:
       

      Once in a while I think of things too bad to talk about. Bad words, often terrible words, come into my mind and I cannot get rid of them. I am bothered by acid stomach several times a week. I am likely not to speak to people until they speak to me. Often I cross the street in order not to meet someone else. I am often sorry because I am so cross and grouchy.
       

      (Strand 46)

       

      The poem goes on in this manner for fourteen pages. In its proceduralism, the poem presents a paradox. It is entirely a found text, and yet it is almost entirely a found text of personal statements, none of which can be specifically attributed to the first-person feelings of Dworkin-as-author. The title of “Legion” also suggests a critique of a singular “I.” Dworkin’s “Legion (II)” responds to the argument of “Legion.” In a brief note, Dworkin tells the story of the poem’s origin:

       

      “Legion (II)” is a response to my poem, which formerly appeared on this site [UbuWeb]. That original poem was composed by rearranging and recontextualizing the true/false questions of the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory as if they were declarative confessional statements from a lyric subject–part of a poetic monologue rather than a forensic instrument. Although the 1942 Inventory has been widely discredited and is no longer published, distributed or supported, the corporation that licenses the exam feels that “Legion” violates copyright. On the contrary, “Legion” is almost certainly a “fair use” of its source text … however, it has been removed from this site as a courtesy.
       

      (“Legion (II)”)

       

      In place of the original “Legion” on UbuWeb, Dworkin published “Legion (II),” which consists of the answers to the “original” questions. The corresponding opening to the follow-up begins: “True. True, yes: buoy, aureole, eutrapalia. No. Probably not. No” (“Legion (II)” 3). While the original Legion advertises itself as being “composed by rearranging and recontextualizing,” “Legion (II)” is not composed of quotations, but (seemingly) of the author’s literal responses to the questions posed by the Personal Inventory. Which poem can we say is more original, “Legion (I)” or “(II)”? Or more personal? Or more sincere? Arguably the project of “Legion” places in doubt what we mean by “declarative confessional statements” (“Legion (II)”).

       

      If Parse and “Legion” obliquely, but perhaps centrally, address the unrepresentability of pain, “Dure” goes further to represent the relation of the pain of others to the author’s own pain. “Dure,” like John Ashbery’s “Self-Portrait in a Convex Mirror,” is a self-portrait within a self-portrait. Whereas Ashbery chooses to reflect upon a well-known Parmigianino portrait, Dworkin chooses a Dürer portrait that is not only obscure, but lost. Like Klee’s Angelus Novus (owned by Walter Benjamin and made famous in “Theses on the Philosophy of History”), the Dürer portrait was lost in the Second World War, and can now only be viewed as a grainy black and white photograph (see Fig. 1 below).6 The picture itself is, in a sense, a subject of traumatic experience. It cannot say for itself, “J’ai été perdu.” More importantly for Dworkin’s purposes, the back story of the picture has been lost. The intended audience (a physician?) of the portrait will never be known, nor will it ever be known what the figure in the portrait is pointing at (the spleen?).
       

       
      Albrecht Dürer, "Self-Portrait" ca. 1519.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 1.

      Albrecht Dürer, “Self-Portrait” ca. 1519.

       

       
      “Dure” consists of 28 interconnected paragraph sections from which it is difficult to quote selectively. Each section is peppered with quotations which are cited in the “Sources” apparatus that follows the body of the text. As I am centrally interested in the poem’s structure and in its documentary apparatus, it is best to quote in full both the first section and the notes that correspond to it:
       

      “–sb1 1. A crag, [now] obs.” A fragment (of course); a cinder (of slag). Or “shy, afraid.” This ender day. Rendered as: do to, admit them, to dare. Curative, tackle, tined. This remains, and bears, in India ink, under watercolor wash, over stains on unlaid paper: Do der gelb fleck ist und mit dem finger drawff dewt do ist mir we. Why write this? “Where the yellow spot is and where I am pointing with my finger, that is where it hurts.” Dead letter, tour, a dearth. Unsigned, accessioned with a circle stamped shield and key to the Bremen Kunstverein, the drawing has not been seen since the end of the second world war. As if it were the emblem of another legend: ubi manus, ibi dolor.
       

      (Strand 75)

       

      This passage presents a considerable array of critical puzzles. But before addressing those problems, here are the corresponding “Sources”:

       

      “Crag” and “shy, afraid.” The Oxford English Dictionary, Second Edition, prepared by J.A. Simpson and E.S.C. Weiner (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1989), Volume XIV, 584. On fear as the subject of self portraiture, see Jacques Derrida, Mémoires d’aveugle: l’autoportrait et autres ruines (Paris: Éditions de la Rèunion des musèes nationaux, 1990), Translated by Pascale-Anne Brault and Micahel [sic] Naas as Memoirs of the Blind: The Self-Portrait and Other Ruins (Chicago: U. of Chicago Press, 1993): 70.
       
      “Do der gelb fleck [where the yellow spot]….” Albrecht Dürer, drawing, 11.8 x 10.8 cm, 1519 [?]. Catalogued as Winkler 482. Formerly Kunsthalle Bremen.
       
      Ubi manus ibi dolor. Inscription on bronze table-fountain statue of Venus, anonymous sculptor, 1520s. Formerly Nürnberg, now Museo Nazional, Florence. Compare with the proverbs ubi amor, ibi dolor, and ubi dolor, ibi digitus.
       

      (Strand 103)

       

      While these notes provide crucial information about the poem’s sources, they are far from conventional scholarly notes, and they may pose as many questions as they solve. To go back to the beginning: What does an obsolete meaning of the word “crag” have to do with this Dürer self-portrait? “Crag” is only one letter shy of the author’s first name: is he thus alerting us to his own shyness as a way of opening on to the scene of writing? Is the author himself a “fragment”? But why “[a] fragment (of course)”? This phrase is supposedly derived from the OED; consulting the OED, however, raises more questions. “Crag” did once have the variant spelling “Craig.” But among the many definitions of the noun form–including the expected “[a] steep of precipitous rock” as well as the perhaps not so expected “neck” or “lean scraggy person”–there is no “A fragment,” much less “A fragment (of course).” If that weren’t enough, the formulation “[now] obs.” would seem to be something of a redundancy or pleonasm, which I cannot find in the OED. Nor can I find a link between “a cinder (of slag)” and the word “crag.” And how can “shy, afraid” be conflated into a single definition? “This ender day,” which follows these fanciful dictionary definitions, at least can be traced to a source, John Gower’s Confessio Amantis from 1390. But “This ender day” is not in quotations.

       
      Dworkin in fact reveals the source of most of his quotations: page 584 of volume XIV of the OED, on which we find the word “scar.” Dworkin conceals his meaning (or the source of his meaning) in plain sight. Like the Dürer portrait, the poem points to a scar whose origin has been obscured. In the poem’s first few lines, the reader is confronted with a range of overdetermined textual possibilities. Definition and etymology only seem to complicate matters. Is the subject of the poem its author’s scar or the scar of the Dürer self-portrait? It is (of course) both and neither. Consider the title of the poem (for which a note would be most helpful!): the OED records “dure” as an archaic noun meaning “hard” and as an archaic verb meaning “1. intr. To last, continue in existence. arch. 2. To persist, ‘hold out’ in action; to continue in a certain state, condition, or place. Obs. 3. To continue or extend onward in space. Obs. 4. trans. To sustain, undergo, bear (pain, opposition, etc); to endure. Obs.” Perhaps we are getting closer to the subject, or at least the titular subject, of the poem: this is a poem about the hardness of locating, enduring, and communicating pain.
       
      The poem, moreover, “undertakes to represent itself” (17) in Foucault’s terms–the poem is the scar, at the same time that the poem acknowledges that it can never represent Dürer’s or the poet’s “actual” scar. Like Velazquez’s Las Meninas, “Dure” is an exploration of a subject that recedes from view. The poem can thus be read as a disavowal of itself. Foucault maintains that Las Meninas presents “an essential void” of the subject who has disappeared along with the canons of classical representation (18). Dworkin, I think, has a slightly different end in mind: something like a return of the subject through history and lived experience. This return of the subject can be read as a response to the postwar avant-garde’s most severe prohibitions on “the lyrical ego”–but this return of the subject can be interpreted in other ways as well: as a response to the high modernist use (and abuse) of quotation; as a new hybrid poetic mode; or (as I am primarily reading the poem here) as an investigation of conditions for the articulation of pain. Dworkin gets to the crux of the problem when he interjects “Why write this?” between the German and English renderings of the text of the self-portrait (Strand 75). The italicized this is a kind of tear in the referential system through which the author points his finger.
       
      Immediately following the dubious citations from the OED, Dworkin’s first reference is to Derrida’s Memoirs of the Blind, from which he has not in fact quoted. Memoirs nonetheless contains striking parallels to “Dure,” and one can describe “Dure” as haunted by specters of Derrida (although the poem was published prior to Derrida’s death). Memoirs begins with a mock self-interview, the opening line of which is: “Do you believe this?” There is no italicization to this, but the parallel to “Dure” is clear. The mock interviewer or analyst of Memoirs probes further, and it is revealed that what he [Derrida] most “fear[s] is the monocular vision of things” (1). Derrida equates self-portraiture with blindness, and dialogue with sight–suggesting that we cannot see ourselves other than for a fleeting instant, and that in this we see our own ruin, as well as the ruin of all that we know. Only through loving the other can we overcome “the monocular vision of things”:
       

      Ruin is the self-portrait, this face looked at in the face as the memory of itself, what remains or returns as a specter from the moment one first looks at oneself and a figuration is eclipsed. The figure, the face, then sees its visibility being eaten away; it loses its integrity without disintegrating. . . .
       
      Whence the love of ruins. And the fact that the scopic pulsion, voyeurism itself, is always on the lookout for the originary ruin. A narcissistic melancholy, a memory–in mourning–of love itself. How to love anything other than the possibility of ruin?
       

       

      The fearful moment is one of gazing upon ourselves narcissistically. But it is also, in Freudian terms, a moment in which we might shift from the limitlessness of melancholy toward a more manageable state of mourning. Derrida describes the self-portrait as the very image of

       

      mourning and melancholy, the specter of the instant [stigme] and of the stylus, whose very point would like to touch the blind point of the gaze that looks itself in the eyes and is not far from sinking into those eyes, right up to the point of losing its sight through an excess of lucidity. An Augenblick without duration, “during” which, however, the draftsman feigns to stare at the center of the blind spot. Even if nothing happens, if no event takes place, the signatory blinds himself to the rest of the world.
       

      (69)

       

      It is here that Derrida and Dworkin seem most closely to cross paths. One might even go so far as to suggest that this moment “without duration, ‘during’” which the artist purports to represent himself, is the subject of Dworkin’s reflection on pain. (That Derrida places “during” in scare quotes would seem to heighten the appropriative resonance.) “The blind spot” which Derrida evokes is eerily similar to the “yellow spot” pointed at by the figure in the self-portrait. The object of “Dure” then would be to create an index of pain–to make us literally feel (through the index finger) and see (through language) the absent pain of the blind subject who presumably cannot sign his own name -which in Derridean terms would suggest that the blind self-portraitist cannot be fixed as a proper name within a system of signification. The self-portraitist’s pain cannot, so to speak, dure in the sense of remaining lastingly present to himself or to a viewer. The self-portraitist cannot en-dure this unrepresentability of pain; like Milton’s semi-autobiographical Samson, he is self-blinded.

       
      Throughout “Dure,” Dworkin intersperses strictly factual paraphrase with densely gnomic poetic utterances, as in the second section:
       

      The assumption is that Dürer drew it for a consultation with a foreign physician: the page examined, and passed, through the post. Aphetic, fr. Port. “A mark or trace indicating a point of attachment, of some structure that has been rem—.” Oval, ascher, chalk, a nerre. Embers, as cendres, rose, and caught her eyes. “All under the influence of the verb. Meaning a letting go, and via the home.
       

      (Strand 76)

       

      Beginning straightforwardly, this section seems to disintegrate. Once again, the source notes refer us to the OED, and again the definition quoted proves elusive. Dworkin seems to define “Aphetic,” but the OED defines it as “Pertaining to, or resulting from, aphesis,” which is “The gradual and unintentional loss of a short unaccented vowel at the beginning of a word; as in squire for esquire.” Etymologically, “aphetic” does not derive from Portuguese but from the Greek apheta, “the giver of life in a nativity.” When we consult page 584 of the OED we find as another definition of scar: “A mark or trace indicating the point of attachment of some structure that has been removed.” For this reader at least, “rem–“immediately calls to mind “remembered.” Removed, indeed. Rather than word preceding definition, in “Dure” definition seems to precede word. If Dworkin’s raiding of the dictionary is a characteristically Oulipian procedure, it should be noted that Dworkin’s constraints are less programmatic, and that he seems ready to relinquish constraints in order to convey indirect meaning–or perhaps to mirror meaning. As an example of this mirroring of meaning: According to the OED, there was in fact an aphetic version of “scar,” “escara,” which was used in Spanish and Portuguese. Aphesis is also uncannily close to its opposite, “apocope,” in meaning–apocope being the “cutting off or omission of the last letter or syllable of a word.” The word “escara” is aphectically amputated to become “scar”; likewise the proper name “Dürer” is apocopically amputated to become “Dure.” Dworkin’s rendering elides much of this information in a performative erasure. The descriptive act becomes figured not only as reductive, but as amputating and violent.

       
      The exact cause of the wound or “lapse” which causes the scar of “Dure” is never revealed, although critics have suggested the sources both of Dürer’s and Dworkin’s scars. Marjorie Perloff suggests that the closest we get to “the poet’s own ‘scar,’ finally com[ing] out into the open” (268) is in Section 22 (which, like so much of the poem, is difficult to quote selectively):
       

      “Writing is a strange shadow whose sole purpose is to mark the destruction of the body that once stood between its light and its earth.” Skiagraphy, touch-type, and method. A run of his finger feels nothing now that the surface has smoothed, but can still make out the thin ellipse floating on his forearm like a shadow under shallow skin, and can trace its curve, left from the time she pushed him into the stove, and know that this is his proof: whatever else, she felt that strongly, she really did care this much that once. He who forgets that love lasts will not recognize its fist. Carp, suspended, mottle and kern. The entire text is an attempt to ask: “how can something be the shadow of a fact which does not exist?” The problem is not finding a solution, but simply posing the proper question. “Don’t you know then, what I mean, when I say the stove is in pain?”
       

       

      The first quotation is from Paul Mann’s Masocriticism, the last two from Wittgenstein. The joke is that the poet-critic is poking at his own wound, in what can only be taken as a masocritical gesture. The poet’s finger feels nothing, but his memory recalls being pushed into a stove, presumably by a lover. Is this a “declarative confessional statement”? Throughout the poem, Dworkin intersperses extracts from philosophers and literary critics with extracts from medical texts, offering few explicit transitions. The effect of this is to conflate multiple specialized discourses. Skiagraphy, for instance, can refer either to shadow-painting or to radiography. In operating on the body of language, the critic is like a surgeon. In operating on his own writing, the critic is like a surgeon operating on himself. As in the other sections of the sequence, Dworkin includes triadic (sometimes quadratic) sentences without active verbs. “Skiagraphy” precedes “touch-typing”–the activity in which the writer must presumably engage to write this. The multiple frames of reference–medical, art historical, philosophical–seem always to point back to the author. But this is perhaps a trick of perspective: the only “I” in this passage is in quotations. Perloff notes that “Dworkin’s language game oddly becomes most personal when it interweaves the Dürer materials with the ‘impersonal’ propositions of Wittgenstein on pain” (267). When Dworkin ends the passage with a passage from Wittgenstein, he ingeniously inverts cause and effect in the scarring process. “Don’t you know then, what I mean, when I say the stove is in pain?” (Philosophical 350) asks Wittgenstein, granting agency and feeling to an inanimate (and in this context presumably painful) object. Conventional subject-object relations are reversed in this formulation to the degree that, although we assume it is Dworkin speaking and enduring the painful memory, we don’t in fact know who is speaking for whom when Wittgenstein says “the stove is in pain.” The suggestion is that we are best able to identify with something or someone when the gaze is reversed, enabling us not only to see the stove’s pain, but also Wittgenstein’s pain–and by extension Dworkin’s (and our own) pain. Although Dworkin figures the quotation (or the citation) as a painful mark on the body, he sees a healing, suturing aspect to the quotation as well: “With healing he’ll worry the tissues in a morose delectation, the fingertip testing its sensation, and that lack, with an unreciprocated pressure: the nerves failing to complete their narcissistic circuit, so back and fore to get at figuring this fascination of a flesh that is no longer ours” (78). The patient-self cultivates his pain, which can only be felt through indirect means. The pain caused by the pointing finger is a pleasure of narcissism, as well as a pleasure of detachment. “Dure” can be said to attempt to overcome the classic double bind of melancholy, wherein the melancholic begins to enjoy his own suffering.

       
      In trying to find a way to point selectively to pain in a world of sensory overload–or in a pain-full world, so to speak–“Dure” ends up doubling back on itself, and acknowledging the “bittersweetness” of separation from a lover.7 Characteristically, Dworkin points in many directions, as when he introduces a Kandinsky title and integrates it into the associative rhythms of his own prose:
       

      Point and Line to Plane. The scar, in essence, is simply the deformation of any particular breaking the surface of its abstraction. I am; we are; to love. A mar on the undifferentiated expanse of language, writing is the scar left from its abrasion with the world (with use, with us, without). From paint to point to pain. A ridge of bristled locks impinged upon the singed and cotton stock. But if a scar is always a citation, are citations, themselves, always scars?
       

      (86)

       

      If the point is the specific place of the wound, then perhaps the plane is the more generalized axis of the representative afterlife of the pain symbolized by the scar. Learned citation might be the form of therapy appropriate to the scholar, as for instance in the compulsive citationality of Robert Burton’s Anatomy of Melancholy. Burton’s famous claim–“I write of melancholy, by being busy to avoid melancholy” (20)–resonates well with conceptual writing’s concern with meta-writing and with performativity. The Anatomy is also instructive in that, like “Dure,” it borrows unapologetically from multiple discourses–medical, philosophical, psychological, and literary. Yet despite the pervasive citationalism of “Dure,” no proper names–other than Dürer–are ever mentioned in the body of the poem. This, I suggest, pre-emptively undoes one of the scarring aspects of quotation–namely that every quotation that is attached to a proper name is paleonymic, and carries with it something like a transaction record in terms of the circulation of cultural capital.8 Dworkin seems to note the importance of this omission of proper names in the poem’s conclusion, when he quotes Charles Sanders Peirce in the context of a discussion of Augustine’s Confessions:

       

      “A proper name without signification, a pointing finger, is a degenerate index.” The taste of this pear lingered, on the edge of ferment. This sees me, or merely fits. O fado, of ado, adieu. “The last, construed as sing.” And this, in its seizure: apprehensive, rested, blue. “I marked this place with my finger or by some other sign and closed the book.” This is who we are (this), and (this) this is what we do to one another: by chance, by the hour, by ourselves.
       

      (Strand 102)

       

      Perhaps a quotation out of context is also a degenerate index if it becomes impossible to tell who was originally pointing at what. By referring to Augustine, Dworkin suggests that there is an element of chance in our linguistic appropriations. As soon as Augustine converts, he picks up Paul’s Epistles in order to perform a variation on the practice of Sortes Vergilianae–except that whereas a pagan Roman would have put down his finger randomly in the Aeneid, Augustine randomly places his finger on a passage from Paul fervently condemning the sins of the flesh. Even with a foreknowledge of his eventual salvation, the (involuntary) memory of the famous (voluntary) peach-theft will never leave him. Augustine’s finger has apparently touched upon an invisible textual scar.

      In closing “Dure” with this instance of aleatory intertextuality, Dworkin brings to bear still more receding perspectives and voices, and alludes to Augustine’s position as (arguably) the writer of the first autobiography. In this context, the reference cannot help but also bring to mind John Ashbery’s poem “Sortes Vergilianae.” “Dure” seems to be haunted not only by Derrida’s Memoirs of the Blind, but also by Ashbery’s “Self-Portrait in a Convex Mirror.” Like “Dure,” “Self-Portrait” is quotational in ways that undermine a traditional notion of a lyric ego or of a formal verse line:
       

      Sydney Freedberg in his
      Parmigianino says of it: “Realism in this portrait
      No longer produces an objective truth, but a bizarria . . . .
      However its distortion does not create
      A feeling of disharmony . . . . The forms retain
      A strong measure of ideal beauty,” because
      Fed by our dreams, so inconsequential until one day
      We notice the hole they left.
       

      (73)

       

      Ashbery’s verse, in comparison with Dworkin’s prose, is laconic and dreamy in its fluid interweaving of scholarly background material. Ashbery marks an absence, a hole in the pattern of meaning. A sense of an Ashberyan “you,” or an Ashberyan “we,” is missing from “Dure”–or perhaps the “we” of Ashbery’s “we notice the hole they left” has been replaced by a kind of lost thisness. “This is who we are (this), and (this) this is what we do to one another: by chance, by the hour, by ourselves.” The this is doubled, or rather tripled or quadrupled, in this one sentence. But there is no plural form of this. Dworkin is interested in the problem of how “we” can even describe objects, much less relate to other subject positions. “This is who we are (this)” is nearly tautological, except that the second “this” is in parentheses (in much the same manner that “Why write this” is italicized).

       
      Dworkin suggests that every this is marked–or scarred. We can only get at shadow thises marked by quotations or by italics. In the end, Dworkin comes to see the second-order articulation problem of thisness as not only a hurtful condition, but also as a condition which must be recognized in order to effect a healing process. Section 20 is among the sequence’s most direct:
       

      Proof of an irreconcilable event, the drawing may itself be a scar. Or is it merely emblematic of the fact that pain cannot be shown, but that the showing of pain can be shown? I can’t, in any meaningful sense, express my pain, but I can show you myself in the act of making that expression-however empty it may ultimately be. To point without the I makes a bridge. Empathetic deixis cedes to a rigid linguistic proxemics. ‘If, in saying I, I point to my own body, I model the use of the word “I” on that of the demonstrative. But in I have pain, “I” is not a demonstrative pronoun.’ The drawing was, perhaps, a philosophical grammar.
       

      (96)

       

      If the drawing is a scar, then “Dure” itself is a scar within a scar–and yet Dworkin casts doubt on this doubling and tripling of remove from actual experience. There may be no stable, unitary “I” to speak of: “to point without the I” would seem to be the best way to communicate pain. And yet this too is an unsatisfactory formulation. The lexicon of words for pain, like the lexicon of words for beauty, is limited. As important as articulating pain is an articulation of the conditions for articulating pain. The redoubling of language, or the quotation of the quotation, leaves behind a scar that is both the trace of an injury and the trace of a healing process. Perhaps an “empathetic deixis” is possible, although not easy. One could do far worse than the sentiments found in the get-well card’s programmatic expression of sympathetic identification. “A philosophical grammar” here, far from being cold and clinical, constitutes a kind of bridge between Is–for which, like this, there is no plural form. When Dworkin asks chiastically–“But if a scar is always a citation, are citations, themselves, always scars?”–his true/false answer has to be “false.” The citation is scarred, and carries with it a history of domination, exclusion, and violence–but the citation is not always scarring. Persons who cite complicate their own “I” every time they acknowledge an other. The citation also reconciles an “I” with a community. If these sound like platitudes, I would counter that “Dure” forces us to recognize that such platitudes are part of the difficulty of finding adequate forms of “empathetic deixis.”

       
      Quotation is often framed pejoratively as a diminution of subjectivity, or as a violent repudiation of originality. “Dure” complicates this view. Thomas Keenan explains quotation in terms that borrow from Marx’s phantasmagoric descriptions of capitalism:
       

      The quotation itself functions as a monster or a ghost, an uncanny visitor accumulated from another text. And it depends on a structural condition of words–they can be reproduced, mindlessly and mechanically reproduced-which acts as if they were nothing but commodities: to be accumulated, moved and removed to and from contexts, delayed and relayed between texts only to be grafted or inserted into some other text, transferred like (als) property or the mechanical limb (a forearm, let’s say; after all, forewarned is forearmed) on a monster.
       

      (104-105)

       

      In such a formulation, quotations are like commodities that embody false cultural values. Quotations are near-meaningless manufactured statements that in the aggregate constitute a Frankensteinian body of severed meaning. In this account of the quotation, the ghost haunting textual production might in fact be creativity. All quotes potentially become scare quotes. The Leviathan of language seems to tolerate no new quotations–or at least no new quotations that are not in the interests of monster-capital’s continuing growth. Keenan is not alone in formulating the quotation as monstrous and violent. In her discussion of “Dure,” Perloff quotes Antoine Compagnon’s study La Seconde main, in which Compagnon argues: “When I cite, I excise, I mutilate, I extract. . . . The chosen fragment converts itself into a text, no longer a bit of text, a part of a sentence or of discourse, but a chosen bit, an amputated limb, not yet as a transplant, but already an organ, cut off and placed in reserve” (qtd. in Perloff 264). Like Keenan, Compagnon sees quotation primarily as a lack rather than as a supplement. Quotation can also be understood–as it has so often been for literary writers before the twentieth century–as a central component of any authoritative text (as in Burton). A pretentious practice perhaps, but not necessarily a severing or a theft–dead authors, after all, can hardly preserve their own body parts.

       
      A particularly strong influence (though she is quoted only once) on “Dure” is Lyn Hejinian. In an essay on Hejinian, Dworkin describes “the largely citational mode” of My Life as a quiltwork, suggesting that the poem “emphasizes its citationality by incorporating apparently quoted material without quotation marks and, conversely (so quoted, coded), framing some phrases in marks of quotation without apparent significance and without citing a speaker or source” (“Penelope” 62). Rather than a violent severing of tradition, the quotations of My Life are constitutive fragments of a new feminist subjectivity, grounded in quiltmaking as an autobiographical process. Whereas My Life, for the most part, unweaves its own paleonymy by erasing its quotations’ sources, “Dure” reweaves its quotations into its source apparatus. Perhaps to cite as well as to quote is to come closer to revealing a source code. “So quoted, coded” (137) Dworkin quotes Hejinian parenthetically without quotation marks. Like many works considered under the rubric of Language writing in the 1970s and 80s, My Life is replete with détourned clichés, fragments of speech, and appropriated phrases–few of which are cited. Another example in this mode is Bob Perelman’s 1978 “An Autobiography,” a poem constructed entirely of uncited quotations. Later scholarly works by LANGUAGE writers often follow standard academic protocols for citation–but LANGUAGE poetry in its earlier phases typically does not cite sources, at least not in the exhaustive manner of “Dure.” Dworkin has written extensively about Susan Howe, whose hybrid combination of literary scholarship and personal reflection in works such as My Emily Dickinson and The Birth-mark is also relevant to his work.
       
      What if the “I” is always a misquotation borrowed from a collectively-authored work-in-progress? If academic literary criticism effaces the “I” in its reliance on citation, Dworkin re-introduces the “I” by means of communications that contain their own critique. To re-appropriate Wittgenstein again, perhaps the limits of my language are the limits of my I. The “I” in itself (or the I-in-itself) is necessarily appropriated from a cultural grammar. If there is no privileged position outside of the system of cultural production from which to stage a disinterested critique, then literature, in order to construct a viable politics of resistance, must come to terms with itself as a system that preserves privileged forms of cultural authority. The quotation is analogous to the cell form of literary production. Like the commodity, it is the smallest recognizable unit in a system of proprietary exchange. A quotation “appears at first sight an extremely obvious, trivial thing. But its analysis brings out that it is a very strange thing, abounding in metaphysical subtleties and theological niceties” (Marx 163). I is not only an other–it is many others who participate in a system of recognizable protocols for expression.
       
      My first epigraph embodies the notion that quotations take on a life of their own in Dworkin’s writing: “Quotation marks ticked through the body of the text like sutures arched in stitches that will scar” (“Dure” 79). Note the twists and turns of this sentence: as well as scarring, the quotation marks “tick”; they “suture”; they “stitch.” The scar may never heal, but it also may hurt less over time the better its causes and effects are understood. Perhaps the most famous instance in twentieth-century literature of quotations taking on a life of their own is in Walter Benjamin’s One-Way Street, a work that helps define Benjamin’s own heavily quotational style: “Quotations in my work are like wayside robbers who leap out, armed, and relieve the idle stroller of his conviction” (481). The “idle stroller” to whom Benjamin refers sounds much a like a flâneur. In Benjamin’s elaborate conceit, the reader is a lazy passerby confronted by too much textual information–too many advertisements and too many books. Rather than being scarred by the quotation, the strolling reader is relieved of a presumably false conviction. Similarly, Giorgio Agamben suggests that the quotation is not merely passive but able to take on an agency of its own: “the word enclosed within quotation marks is only waiting its moment of revenge. . . . He who puts a word in quotation marks can no longer rid himself of it: suspended in mid-air in its signifying élan, the word becomes unsubstitutable” (103-4). As Benjamin and Agamben show, it is possible for tradition to work against tradition, and for the quotation not only to be the bearer of violence, but also for the quotation to resist–and to articulate–suffering, even if that suffering is represented secondhand.
       
      “But what sort of doctor would diagnose a sketch?” Dworkin asks in medias res, hypothesizing that the Dürer portrait may have been sent by mail to a distant doctor (Strand 84). “What sort of a doctor,” indeed, Dr. Dworkin? Perhaps a doctor who is not a medical doctor, but rather a scholar and a poet–a doctor who, when in doubt, “resorts to a quote.”
       

      Paul Stephens is a postdoctoral fellow at the Fox Center for Humanistic Inquiry at Emory University. From 2005 to 2009 he taught in the literature department at Bard College. His recent articles have appeared in Social Text, Rethinking Marxism, and Don’t Ever Get Famous: New York Writing Beyond the New York School. He is currently completing a book-length project titled The Poetics of Information Overload: From Gertrude Stein to Conceptual Writing.
       

      Notes

       
      1. Quotation, originality and plagiarism have spawned an enormous body of criticism. For the purposes of this essay, I note in particular Elizabeth Gregory’s Quotation and Modern American Poetry, in which she makes the case that the practice of exact poetic quotation only came into vogue in American poetry with the advent of high modernism. Ming-Qian Ma’s “A ‘No Man’s Land’: Postmodern Citationality in Zukosky’s ‘Poem beginning “The”‘” argues that Zukofsky’s poetry indicates a shift from a modernist poetics of quotation to a more radically intertextual (and dehierarchized) postmodern poetics of citationality. See also Leonard Diepeveen, Changing Voices: The Modern Quoting Poem. Much that has been produced under the rubric of conceptual writing (the work of Kenneth Goldsmith, Caroline Bergvall, and Robert Fitterman, for instance) features extensive use of found texts. This tradition can be traced to Duchamp’s readymades and to Warhol’s a: A Novel, but such a tradition has innumerable filmic, musical, and visual analogues. David Evans’s recent collection Appropriation provides a useful overview, as does Paul D. Miller’s collection Sound Unbound: Sampling Digital Music and Culture. Notes on Conceptualisms by Robert Fitterman and Vanessa Place theorizes conceptual writing’s use of quotation, as does Kenneth Goldsmith’s introduction to the “Flarf & Conceptual Writing” section of Poetry Magazine, July/August 2009.

       

       
      2. I would like to acknowledge Michael Golston for first drawing my attention to the critical complexities of “Dure.” Cyrus Moussavi (at Columbia) and Jacob Braff (at Bard) further demonstrated to me that “Dure” is worthy of extensive critical consideration. Benjamin Kahan and Jenelle Troxell kindly offered comments on drafts. Credit is also due to the students who studied the poem with me in the class “Twentieth-CenturyAmerican Literature and the Visual Arts,” Bard College, Spring 2009.

       

       
      3. The dissertation—incidentally or not—was advised by Charles Altieri, who expresses skepticism about “confessional criticism” in his essay “What is at Stake in Confessional Criticism.”

       

       
      4. The works of Edwin Abbott have proven surprisingly generative for experimental writers. Sharon Kirsch has recently argued that Gertrude Stein’s 1930 How to Write should be considered a parody of Abbott’s 1876 How to Write Clearly, a popular text that Stein likely encountered as an undergraduate at Radcliffe. Remarkably, Kirsch’s article was published in the same year as Parse, and I can find no evidence that Dworkin was aware of the connection between Stein and Abbott. For contemporary works indebted to Abbott, see also Derek Beaulieu’s 2007 adaptation of Abbott, Flatland: A Romance in Many Dimensions, featuring an afterword by Marjorie Perloff, as well as Steve Tomasula and Stephen Farrell’s VAS: An Opera in Flatland.

       

       
      5. “Count Altamira told me that, on the eve of his death, Danton said in his loud voice: ‘It’s odd, the verb to guillotine cannot be conjugated in all its tenses; one can very well say: I will be guillotined, you will be guillotined, but one does not say: I have been guillotined’” (translation my own).

       

       
      6. For an interesting speculative discussion of Dürer’s Melancholia and Klee’s Angelus Novus (and by extension Benjamin’s “Theses”), see Giorgio Agamben’s “The Melancholy Angel,” in The Man Without Content, 104-115.

       

       
      7. Here I am thinking of Ann Carson’s discussion of Sappho’s use of the term glukupikron in Eros the Bittersweet, 3-9.

       

       
      8. Jacques Derrida defines paleonymy as “the question of the preservation of names … Why should an old name, for a determinate time, be retained? Why should the effects of a new meaning, concept, or object be damped by memory?” (Dissemination 3).
       

      Works Cited

         

       

      • Agamben, Giorgio. The Idea of Prose. Trans. Michael Sullivan and Sam Whitsitt. Albany: SUNY P, 1995. Print.
      • ———. The Man Without Content. Trans. Georgia Albert. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999. Print.
      • Altieri, Charles. “What is at Stake in Confessional Criticism.” Confessions of the Critics. Ed. H. Aram Veeser. New York: Routledge, 1996. 55-67. Print.
      • Ashbery, John. Self-Portrait in a Convex Mirror. New York: Penguin, 1975. Print.
      • Barthes, Roland. “The Death of the Author.” Academic Discourse: Readings for Argument and Analysis. Ed. Gail Stygall. Mason: Thomson Learning Custom Publishing, 2002. 101-106. Print.
      • Beaulieu, Derek. Flatland: A Romance in Many Dimensions. Afterword by Marjorie Perloff. York: Information as Material, 2007. Print.
      • Benjamin, Walter. “One-Way Street.” Selected Writings, Vol. 1 1913-1926. Ed. Marcus Bullock and Michael W. Jennings. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1996. Print.
      • Burton, Robert. The Anatomy of Melancholy. Ed. Holbrook Jackson. 3 vols. New York: Dutton, 1932. Print.
      • Butler, Judith. Bodies that Matter: On the Discursive Limits of “Sex.” New York: Routledge, 1993. Print.
      • Carson, Anne. Eros the Bittersweet. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1986. Print.
      • Derrida, Jacques. Dissemination. Trans. Barbara Johnson. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1991. Print.
      • ———. Memoirs of the Blind: The Self-Portrait and Other Ruins. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993. Print.
      • Diepeveen, Leonard. Changing Voices: The Modern Quoting Poem. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1993. Print.
      • Dworkin, Craig. “Interview.” Ceptuetics Radio Program. Hosted by Kareem Estefan. WNYU, October 15, 2008. <http://media.sas.upenn.edu/pennsound/groups/Ceptuetics/26-32/Ceptuetics_32_Craig-Dworkin_WNYU_10-15-08.mp3>. MP3.
      • ———. “Introduction: Delay in Verse.” Language to Cover a Page: The Early Writings of Vito Acconci. Ed. Dworkin. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2006. x-xviii. Print.
      • ———. “Introduction.” The UBUweb: Anthology of Conceptual Writing. Web. 17 Nov. 2009.
      • ———. “Legion (II).” Ubuweb.com. Ubuweb, n.d. Web. 17 Nov. 2009.
      • ———. Parse. Berkeley: Atelos Press, 2008. Print.
      • ———. “Penelope Reworking the Twill: Patchwork, Writing, and Lyn Hejinian’s My Life.” Contemporary Literature. 36.1 (1995): 58-81. JSTOR. Web. 17 Nov. 2009.
      • ———. “Reading the Illegible.” Diss. University of California, Berkeley, 1999. Print.
      • ———. Reading the Illegible. Evanston: Northwestern UP, 2003. Print.
      • ———. Ed. The Consequence of Innovation: 21st Century Poetics. New York: Roof Books, 2008. 7-25. Print.
      • ———. Strand. New York: Roof Books, 2005. Print.
      • Emerson, Ralph Waldo. “Quotation and Originality.” Works of Emerson, Volume 8, Letters and Social Aims. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1904. Print.
      • Evans, David, ed. Appropriation. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2008. Print.
      • Fitterman, Robert and Vanessa Place. Notes on Conceptualisms. New York: Ugly Duckling Presse, 2009. Print.
      • Foucault, Michel. The Order of Things: An Archaeology of the Human Sciences. New York: Random House, 1970. Print.
      • Goldsmith, Kenneth, ed. “Flarf & Conceptual Writing: A Special Section.” Poetry Magazine July/August 2009 (194.4): 315-342. Print.
      • Gregory, Elizabeth. Quotation and Modern American Poetry. College Station: Texas A&M UP, 1996. Print.
      • Hejinian, Lyn. My Life. Los Angeles: Green Integer, 2002. Print.
      • Keenan, Thomas. Fables of Responsibility: Aberrations and Predicaments in Ethics and Politics. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1997. Print.
      • Kirsch, Sharon. “‘Suppose a grammar uses invention’: Gertrude Stein’s Theory of Rhetorical Grammar.” Rhetoric Society Quarterly 38. 3 (2008): 283-310. Informaworld. Web. 15 Nov. 2009.
      • Levine, Sherrie. “Statement.” Art in Theory 1900-1990. Ed. Charles Harrison and Paul Wood. London: Blackwell, 1992. 1066-1067. Print.
      • Ma, Ming-Qian. “A ‘No Man’s Land’: Postmodern Citationality in Zukosky’s ‘Poem beginning ‘The.’” Upper Limit Music: The Writings of Louis Zukofsky. Ed. Mark Scroggins. Tuscaloosa: U of Alabama P, 1997. 129-153. Print.
      • Marx, Karl. Capital, Volume I. Trans. Ben Fowkes. London: Penguin, 1976. Print.
      • Miller, Paul D. Sound Unbound: Sampling Digital Music and Culture. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2008. Print.
      • Olson, Charles. “Projective Verse.” Collected Prose, eds. Donald Allen and Benjamin Friedlander. Berkeley: UC Press, 1997. 239-249. Print.
      • Perelman, Bob. “An Autobiography.” Ten to One: Selected Poems. Middletown: Wesleyan UP, 1999. 4-6. Print.
      • Perloff, Marjorie. “The Pleasures of Déjà Dit: Citation, Intertext, and Ekphrasis in Recent Experimental Poetry.” The Consequence of Innovation: 21st Century Poetics. Ed. Craig Dworkin. New York: Roof Books, 2008. 255-279. Print.
      • Scarry, Elaine. The Body in Pain: The Making and Unmaking of the World. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1987. Print.
      • Tomasula, Steve, and Stephen Farrell. VAS: An Opera in Flatland. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2004. Print.
      • Wittgenstein, Ludwig. Philosophical Investigations. Ed. Rush Rees and Trans. Anthony Kenny. Oxford: Blackwell, 1974. Print.

       

    • Anagram, Gestalt, Game in Maya Deren: Reconfiguring the Image in Post-war Cinema

      Orit Halpern (bio)
      New School for Social Research
      HalpernO@newschool.edu

      Abstract
       
      This article examines the relationship between the film work of American Avant-garde filmmaker Maya Deren and Cold-war science, particularly the sciences of Gestalt psychology, cybernetics, game theory, and anthropology. The central concern is to link Deren’s investment in time and in transforming the cinematic image with contemporaneous developments in science, technology, and politics. Using her engagement with the cybernetician and anthropologist Gregory Bateson as a frame, the essay demonstrates that Deren’s attitude to temporality and representation is both similar to and radically different from that emerging in psychology, anthropology, communication science and game theory after the war. This cinema excavates the probabilistic and reflexive nature of time, as understood in both art and science during this period, to create new associations between subjects, screens, and life. However, Deren’s work produces associations and potentials that the game theories and technologies with which she is concerned do not. Her work utilizes the discourse of temporality and representation taken from these sciences, while refusing to repeat without difference, and so blocking a return to older discourses of objectivity, authority, and knowledge.
       

       

       
      Choreography for Camera (1945)Anagram of Film Form (1946)Ritual in Transfigured Time (1946)

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 1.

      Choreography for Camera (1945)

      Anagram of Film Form (1946)

      Ritual in Transfigured Time (1946)

       

       
      “Man is distinguished [from machines] for consciousness, time perspective, and original energy. So is anything that lasts.” When the New York avant-garde film maker Maya Deren writes these words in her diary in 1947 in response to a lecture at the New School by Gregory Bateson, in which Bateson discusses the application of game theory to the study of culture and psychology, she expresses an idea, often repeated since, that time is of central concern to the cinematic art (“Notebook” 45). At first, her quote seems an unlikely response to the mathematical logic of games. Game theory, nested as it is within the rubric of war-time operations research and computing, appears distant from any 18th century romantic ideals of the human Deren may harbor. The filmmaker does, however, intuitively identify a major historical point: that any such technical revision of time and representation would indelibly mark the subject and transform perception.
       
      Deren poses two questions in her notebook that reveal her logic. Game theory is a technique to model, simulate, and predict the behavior of systems when there is incomplete information (for example, when one encounters an unknown enemy force). It is, and continues to be, a technology for control of the unknown. Her first concern, therefore, is about how to engage with an indeterminate Other through logic. In her notebook, Deren questions the universal applicability of such game theoretical models. Implicitly, she interrogates the universalist assumptions of these models about the behavior of both individuals and societies. I argue that intuitively she identifies a homogenizing force within the technical logic of the game.
       
      Second, Deren expresses a concern about the relationship between prediction and control. She asks whether “linear analysis” is an appropriate model for thinking cultural systems and predicting or controlling their future actions (“Notebook” 25). Linear systems, in Bateson’s mathematical logic, are predictable, non-chaotic systems. That is, linearity is a mathematical term used to define systems that do not advance teleologically in time. Linear models assume that the past and the future are the same, and that reactions can be reversed. Control in Bateson’s discourse, and in game theory, however, is not supposed to be linear but probabilistic. Games are theoretically supposed to generate a number of possible futures. Control is understood by the anthropologist, therefore, as the ability to take action and to plan under probabilistic, not deterministic conditions. Deren sub-consciously notices a tension here; arguing that while spoken in terms of change and feedback, Bateson’s models may have imbedded within them an older historical concept of control as deterministic, understood as the perfect prediction of future action from past data. Arguably, then, Deren and Bateson share a concern about the relationship between the image, or the model, and the world to come (“Notebook” 43-46).
       
      As a filmmaker whose writings and cinematic practices are pervaded by discourses of a predictive and probabilistic temporality, Deren identifies in her work a particular concern with time, one that integrates chance, control, and memory. For example, in her classic 1946 methodological treatise, “An Anagram of Ideas on Art, Form, and Film,” she argues that art must become an experiment, like science, and embrace its true potential–a break from realism in order to produce an even greater reality:
       

      should the artist, like the scientist, exercize [sic] his imaginative intelligence–the command and control of memory–to consciously try, test, modify, destroy, estimate probabilities, and try again . . . always in terms of the instrument by which the fusion will be realized.
       

      (“Anagram” 13. Emphasis added.)

       

      Her language is revelatory. Framed in terms of “estimate probabilities” and the “command and control” of memory, her words already suggest that time has something to do with odds and manipulation. This kind of language is the uncanny doppelganger of the game theories that Bateson discusses, which are also framed in terms of probability, statistics, control, and chance. Time here is not something to be shown, but rather an operation, a process, the “control of memory” whose outcome is the production and destruction of probabilities. In retrospect, therefore, Bateson and Deren share in a discourse that is predictive rather than invested in presence or the present.

       
      Deren is, in fact, at the lecture because she wants to bridge art and science, and to rethink the work of representation and the image. She seeks to appropriate Bateson’s thought and ethnographic work for her cinematic practice. Deren’s training in gestalt and behavioral psychology spurred her initial interest in Bateson’s psychological and ethnographic investigations of trance, dance, and ritual in highland Bali in the late 1930s.
       

       
      Communication as Gesture: The body recorded as a medium, in Bateson's work, for the production of culture. Gregory Bateson and Margaret Mead, Trance and Dance in Bali (1952). Footage shot 1937-39.1

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 2.

      Communication as Gesture: The body recorded as a medium, in Bateson’s work, for the production of culture. Gregory Bateson and Margaret Mead, Trance and Dance in Bali (1952). Footage shot 1937-39.1

       

       
      Throughout the late 1930s, Gregory Bateson and Margaret Mead worked in highland Bali studying culture and schizophrenia. In the interest of developing new methods for ethnography and capturing the intricacies of daily life in the villages where they worked, they created a vast archive of photographic stills and cinematic footage (see Fig. 2 above). To this day, their archive is considered foundational in visual anthropology. (Curiously enough, it also inspired the concept of the plateau for Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari.) Deren was given full access to this footage for use in developing her own cinematic practices, and the exposure to this massive visual archive brings her to encounter another form of abstraction–models of communication and game theories.2
       
      This is already, therefore, a convoluted and rhizomatic history of Deren’s interest in subjectivity and perception, but it has much to say about our contemporary conceptions of the image and the screen in media and film history and theory. That Deren focuses on the locus between game theories, psychology, cinema, and the ethnographic encounter is hardly a side note. I want to use this highly specific discourse of “time” in Deren’s work to ask a series of questions that open onto both a history of representation and an ethics of the image: what notions of time are being specified? How might we understand the debates between an artist and an ethnographer? And between mathematical theories of computing and an ideal of art framed in temporal terms? Most importantly, what is at stake in the relationship between time and the image at this moment in Western intellectual history? Bateson and Deren do not merely intersect chronologically, but rather share a conceptual rubric within which the question of temporality as an ethical and representational problem is posed. Deren’s engagement with Bateson, therefore, brings together a personal encounter and a moment in the history of western representation as theoretical machines that help situate, explore, and expand our understanding of time and the image.
       
      This interaction between art and science shows how the same conditions of possibility, and similar genealogies of discipline and training, can produce radically different forms of practice. Deren’s concept of temporality and representation is both similar to and radically different from those emerging in psychology, anthropology, communication science and game theory after the war. This cinema, I argue, excavates the probabilistic and reflexive nature of time, as understood in both art and science during this period, to create new associations between subjects, screens, and life. However, Deren’s work produces associations and potentials that the game theories and technologies with which she is concerned do not. Her work uses the discourse of temporality and representation taken from the sciences but refuses to repeat without difference, thus blocking a return to older discourses of objectivity, authority, and knowledge.
       

      Chance, Control, and Memory

       
      In 1946, a few months before she attends Bateson’s lectures, Maya Deren introduces a new structure for the image:
       

       
      Contents of "An Anagram of Ideas on Art, Form, and Film" in Maya Deren and the American Avant-Garde; Ed. Bill Nichols; Berkeley: U of California P, 2001.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 3.

      Contents of “An Anagram of Ideas on Art, Form, and Film” in Maya Deren and the American Avant-Garde; Ed. Bill Nichols; Berkeley: U of California P, 2001.

       

       
      It is an opening diagram in one of the most famous treatises on the theory and practice of cinema–“An Anagram of Ideas on Art, Form, and Film.” The “Anagram,” for Deren, is both a theory of cinema and an instructional blueprint for cinematic production. Deren is a very structural filmmaker who diagrams and carefully choreographs every scene and shot beforehand. The “Anagram” is a visualization of this process.
       
      This figure is both a game of letters and a structure for visual recombination. She recommends this form “to anyone who has faced the problem of compressing into a linear organization an idea which was stimulating precisely because it extended into two or three different, but not contradictory directions at once” (“Anagram” 6). Already in her opening notes, Deren expresses a complex relationship to teleological narrative and historical time. Negotiating between structure and novelty, this is a system of self-referring elements, each producing a totality irreducible to its parts. No part of it may be changed without “affecting the whole;” every element is able to produce different possibilities through recombination. Because the anagram can be read to produce a myriad of effects in any direction, as one might read “horizontally, vertically, diagonally, or even in reverse,” Deren proposes a world no longer described by linear cause-effect relations but, rather, by feedback loops.
       
      For Deren, time, understood as progress, or causality, may be broken, since elements may be recombined in any order, but it is still directional. These recombinatory readings operate in different directions, but their results remain an emergent “whole.” Deren also argues that “nothing is new… except, perhaps, the anagram itself” (“Anagram” 6). This is a curious statement, and it denotes a subtle ontological shift. Nothing is new in that the forms and images come from the past; what is new, for Deren, is the process by which an already known and recorded world is reformulated. The anagram is this process, and its novelty lies in producing a whole that exceeds its parts and emerges as art. The anagram, therefore, is an auto-poietic form bridging past and future, producing possibilities for cinematic practice out of the remains of the past (“Anagram” 7). This form makes manifest her notion of the “control of memory” (“Anagram” 13). In the world she envisions, innovation comes through recombination. The work of the movie-maker is thus to produce forms that will generate future possibilities irreducible to their singular parts.
       
      Deren is clear about her disinterest in indexical or documentary practices of image making. This is not a discourse of temporality invested in inscription and representation; by extension, it is also not a discourse invested in the present or presence. Deren speaks to an emergent obsession in both science and art–not in documenting the real or discovering nature, but in producing imagination and transcending historical experience by way of the “instrument.” Science, she argues, is already an endeavor of the artificial: “If the achievements of [contemporary] science are the result of a violation of natural integrity, in order to emancipate its elements and re-relate them, how can an artist be content to do no more than to perceive, analyze and, at most, recreate these ostensibly inviolable whole of nature?” (“Anagram” 23). Art should not, therefore, attempt to return to nature. Instead, art has to embark on a new truth:
       

      To renounce the natural frame of reference–the natural logic and integrity of an existent reality–is not, as is popularly assumed, an escape from the labor of truth. . . . To create a form of life is, in the final analysis, much more demanding than to render one which is ready-made.
       

      (“Anagram” 23)

       

      To break with the documentary tradition, she writes, is not to “escape the labor of truth,” but rather to affirm it, to create a greater truth: “a form of life.” Her words both gesture to a history of the automation of representation and perception, that of the “ready-made,” as well as to a nascent aspiration to break terminally with nature to produce reality. Deren, therefore, mutates or replaces concern with “the natural frame of reference” as a prescriptive idea of perception for another set of concerns about prediction and performance.

       
      Deren calls upon the genealogy of science to make this argument. She writes of a process by which human perception was remade:
       

      Through mathematical computations, he [man] was able to extend his knowledge even beyond the reach of his instruments. From a careful analysis of causation and incidence, he developed the powers of prediction. And finally, not content to merely analyze an existent reality, he undertook to activate the principles which he had discovered, to manipulate reality, and to bring together into new relationships the elements which he was able to isolate. He was able to create forms according to his own intelligence.
       

      (“Anagram” 8)

       

      Deren cites as historical reference and inspiration the emergence of probability, the erosion of determinism, and the manipulation of reality by new techniques and optical instruments. She diagrams a new relationship between probabilistic thought and subjective vision, a form of visuality that accedes to the self-production and technical nature brought about through “computations” and techniques.

       
      Aside from Bateson’s influence, the source of Deren’s familiarity with computers or game theory is uncertain. What is clear is that in training and discourse she shares much with the anthropologist. In her own life, as is by now well documented, Deren draws influence from the physical and psychological sciences, as well as from figures such as Henri Bergson. She was the daughter of a practicing psychiatrist in Syracuse, New York, who was part of the new Russian school for objective psychology in St. Petersburg before coming to the United States in 1922 to escape the civil war. At this school, Dziga Vertov studied and experimented with his cinematic practices in 1917 (Holl 157). Deren was close to her father, and in her undergraduate and graduate education she pursued the study of psychology, particularly gestalt psychology with Kurt Koffka at Smith College in the late 1930s.3 The relationship between science and art continues to play out through her work. Deren’s work is permeated with her interest in psychology, and also with discussions of physics, the Bomb, and games. Her archive contains folders titled “communication.” Her interest in ethnography puts her in direct conversation with structuralist anthropologists concerned with communication and linguistic theories. In fact, her training in psychology, and gestalt in particular, is intimately correlated to the sciences of communication, computing, and cognition. At a moment when minds, machines, and media are all being transformed, many different practices share in the reformulation of representation (“Climate”).4
       
      Deren shares much with the technologies and sciences of her time. While critical of the bomb and conscious of the dangers of technology, she is also faintly hopeful that art’s relationship with science can invigorate both. For her, tools coming from the sciences offer the possibility of control over memory and the potential to reinvent cinema and reinvigorate art after the war. The “Anagram” essay maps Deren’s points of reference and her hope for the image, an image no longer invested in older forms of knowledge, but rather in the creation of “forms,” an image that recombines past histories of probability and technology to produce, she hopes, new effects.
       
      I do not wish to imply here that Deren is directly related to the development of digital or electronic media. Rather, I wish to show that post-war cinema, post-war anthropology and communication sciences demonstrate similar attitudes towards representation. This engagement between art and the social, communication, and psychological sciences after the war allows me to ask where these endeavors intersect and where they differentiate themselves. I want, therefore, to focus our attention on the aspect of Deren’s theories that highlights a historical transformation in both ontology and epistemology. But I also want to mark her curious insistence, almost a demand, that art be separate from science. In this intimate effort to both engage and separate from the physical and psychological sciences, we can begin to understand relationships between time, difference, technology, and representation in the post-war image.
       

      Inscription, Representation, and Cinema

       
      To link the anagram to histories of epistemology and temporality, I want to situate Deren’s anagrammatic “image” within the history of representation and knowledge. The opening tropes in the “Anagram” essay develop key themes critical to understanding the relationship between memory, temporality, and control that structures Deren’s conception of cinematic time. First, Deren folds a 19th and early 20th century concern with chance and control into a new cinematic practice. Her discourse of time is, arguably, probabilistic and associated with a history of anti-determinist thinking in the sciences and in philosophy.
       
      Second, Deren demonstrates a historical change in the ontology of the image. Throughout her writing, Deren explicitly attacks both disorganization (she is a highly structured filmmaker, pre-diagramming and storyboarding all her movies) and immediacy. She explicitly and repeatedly condemns what she labels “presentism” (“Anagram”). How can we understand this denial of the present in the name of structure and prediction? And how does it relate to modern concepts of probability and the representability of time?
       
      Many historians have noted that the 19th century saw the emergence of two phenomena-the rise of mechanical objectivity and what Ian Hacking calls “the taming of chance.” In physics through thermodynamics, in evolutionary biology, in the social sciences, and in psychology and physiology, there emerged a recognition of the limits of representation, a consciousness that the world was variable and contingent. This worldview opposes the paradigm of Newtonian physics. In Newton’s universe, there can be perfect information; equations predict the future action of the system and reactions can always be reversed. In Newtonian physics, time’s arrow flows both forward and backward and nature is amenable to representation through mathematics and images. In a world that is non-deterministic, however, time cannot be reversed and the future can never be perfectly predicted. The recognition of an inability to legibly represent the present and thus know and control the future (a recognition of chance), combined with the teleological arrow of thermodynamic time directed towards chaos, disorder, and degradation, created anxieties about the representability of time itself.
       
      This representational crisis in the late 19th century was embedded in and abetted by early cinema. Cinema, like science, desperately sought to fulfill an impossible task: both to be able to record “everything,” to access the absolute zenith of the knowable and the seeable–the index, the present, the event–and to render this deluge of data coherent, representable, and legible to the human observer. Cinema and science both produced consciousness of the limits of human perception and representation, rendering visible the difficulty of making choices under conditions of imperfect information, while inducing a desire to surmount this limit to knowledge through new forms of documentation and analysis (Doane 4).
       
      Objectivity thus seemed unattainable when the era increasingly recognized the impossibility of controlling the visual data field and predicting the future, while simultaneously desiring to do both. Science contends with this inability to gain complete knowledge of the world–chance–with a desire to document, organize, and archive everything. Chance and the index are thus bound together through the epistemologies of archiving and new visualization technologies that characterize positivistic 19th and early 20th century sciences. Arguably, this era’s concern with representing time correlates with a desire to document the present (ontology and the index) and the concomitant demand for a mechanical objectivity to control a field of vision lent autonomy through the machine of cinema and anti-deterministic epistemologies (Doane 4; Daston and Galison).
       
      For Deren, however, the problem of knowledge and epistemological control is replaced with the question of creating life-forms. She signifies a slow erosion of the dream of accessing the present in the name of a new and obsessive concern with imagination or the virtual framed in the future perfect tense, a desire not for the document and the index but for the production of effects in anticipation of the future. Deren’s lack of interest in the index and the present is therefore a marked shift. While adhering to a probabilistic and teleological (although not necessarily progressive) time, Deren is only interested in two loci–the past and the future.
       
      The third salient structure for Deren’s architecture of time involves memory and the archive. The displacement of concern for the index is accompanied with emergent interest in memory and the archive as infinite repositories of possibility for recombination. Deren is obsessively concerned with the future and with forms or structures that are auto-poietic. Surprisingly, however, this predictive or anticipatory attitude develops by displacing the problem of recording. Deren assumes that the past is available for recombination and no longer worries about its capture; as we shall see, indexicality is not so much destroyed as simply deferred and repressed. There is a curious structure of time in this cinema (but also in communication sciences) where feedback loops generate future actions.
       
      These three elements–probability, prediction, and manipulation–work together to fundamentally reframe the dream of what cinema might become and speak to broader transformations in the idea of temporality and its ethical and moral stakes. It is Deren herself who points out the incumbent risks now attached to time: “For the serious artist the esthetic problem of form is, essentially, and simultaneously, a moral problem” (“Anagram” 37). She hints that what is at stake in this effort to rethink temporality, memory, and the image is the future both of media and of thought.
       

      The New Image

       
      These attitudes towards recording, recombination, and structure are embodied within the anagrammatic logic and structure of Deren’s films. Her first movie, Meshes of the Afternoon (1943), made with her husband, the Czech émigré Alexander Hammid, animates this recombinatorial aesthetics, illuminating, in her words, “the malevolent vitality of inanimate objects” (Meshes).5 Her definition of the film–joining vitality with the inanimate–already suggests a revision of ontology and perception. The movie is, indeed, a psychotic dream world, perhaps reflecting and advancing the on-going war condition. More importantly, it is a world where the interiority and exteriority of the subject are confused. The film is, in Deren’s estimation, “a dream that takes such force it becomes reality” (Legend 78). It is a film where the abstract processes of perception take material form through editing and repetition.
       
      Since Meshes of the Afternoon is the most narrative of her films, many critics argue that the movie wavers between this emergent aesthetic and older classical forms of cinema. However, the dominant device in the film is a rhythmic mirroring, or feedback, between the possibly exterior and interior states, that anticipates the anagrammatic method. Every scene is filled with parallels: a falling flower transforms into a knife, the telephone off the hook is doubled by a knife falling onto a table, and a potentially loving caress between a man and knife redoubles upon itself as a potential murder scene (“Pre-production Notes”). These scenes repeat themselves in the course of the film, each time slightly mutating to produce different comprehensions. Deren also regularly doubles or multiplies the same image in the scene, for example in a moment when she encounters herself in multiple:
       

       
      Mirroring in Meshes of the Afternoon. 1943.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002. DVD.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 4.

      Mirroring in Meshes of the Afternoon. 1943.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002. DVD.
       

       

      The logic of the film is thus one of repetition and multiplication. Like the anagram, “nothing is new” in that everything has been recorded. The movie keeps repeating its own operations and images, and also regularly recombining montage and symbolic elements from cinema’s history-particularly from Surrealism and Constructivism, both movements producing movies that Deren claims to have seen.

       
      However, while Deren may repeat convention and tactic, she does not recuperate these images in the name of unearthing the unconscious or revealing the reality behind ideology. Deren violently opposes any comparison between her work and the psychoanalytic films of surrealists (Legend 280).6 She steadfastly maintains that between the screen and the spectator a new reality is emerging, as well as a new psychology. Novelty here is relocated from the scene of capture to the production of this “whole” that encompasses the act of seeing and involves the spectator and the apparatus in producing an experience.
       
      In subsequent production notes Deren writes: “Everything which happens in the dream has its basis in a suggestion in the first sequence–the knife, the key, the repetition of stairs, the figure disappearing around the curve of the road. Part of the achievement of this film consists in the manner in which cinematic techniques are employed to give a malevolent vitality to inanimate objects” (Legend 78). This lively malevolence emerges from the recombination of set patterns that produces more than the sum of the stills. Careful mapping of repeated images is critical to this form. The archive generates the movie and also produces a new form of liveliness that is beyond the sum of its parts, an accident that emerges from this structured practice.
       

       
      Stills from Meshes of the Afternoon. 1943.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 5.

      Stills from Meshes of the Afternoon. 1943.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      Deren’s film generates a form of attention through rhythmic patterns, not through the conventional integration of sound and image in causal relations. As Wendy Haslem writes, “The rhythm of the sound, movement and editing conspire to produce the effect of a trance film. Meshes of the Afternoon’s dream-like mise-en-scène, illogical narrative trajectory, fluid movement and ambient soundtrack invite a type of contemplative, perhaps even transcendental, involvement for the spectator.”7 The diegesis emerges through the repetition and cadencing of elements, the regular interruption of action, and the discontinuity between movements and spaces. The repetition of form and the direct relationship between images produce movement.
       
      Deren is explicitly recombinatorial in her logic. She correlates this cinematic practice directly with memory, archiving, and storage. Recalling a history of photography as indexical, she assumes the availability of the image to memory for recombination. She writes:
       

      But the celluloid memory of the camera can function, as our memory, not merely to reconstruct or to measure an original chronology. It can place together, in immediate temporal sequence, events actually distant, and achieve, through such relationship a peculiarly filmic reality.
       

      (“Anagram” 42)

       

      Cinema here takes the place of memory, but this is a particular memory. In this formulation, the work of cinema is to provide a structure that may produce new forms of time, not merely reflect a time that comes from outside of it. The camera works like our memory, “not merely to reconstruct or to measure an original chronology,” but rather through a “relationship” between images that comes from different situations to produce a new time, “a peculiar filmic reality.” Memory is thus a process of recombination that is not attached to the recollection of the past so much as the production of future imaginaries. The filmic medium, then, is the structure that creates the conditions for this recombination to occur. Deren’s practice integrates both temporal conceptions of chance (the accident of encounter between different images) and statistical control (the production of equations, diagrams, graphs, and other mechanisms) through the structured “game” that is the anagram.

       

      The Image that Acts

       
      Deren’s work is obsessed with process, manipulation, and recombination and is not interested in ontology, indexicality, or capture. Time, here, is thus not so much related to the past or the present as to the future. The anagram is a structure that can produce new forms in the future out of the traces of the past. This cinematic practice embodies a shift in tense from the descriptive to the predictive, from documentation to action. Deren is explicit about this transformation from the documentary impulse to another one:
       

      When an image induces a generalization and gives rise to an emotion or idea, it bears towards that emotion or idea the same relationship which an exemplary demonstration bears to some chemical principle; and that is entirely different from the relationship between that principle and the written chemical formula by which it is symbolized. In the first case the principle functions actively; in the second case its action is symbolically described, in lieu of the action itself.
       

      (“Anagram” 27)

       

      Symbols no longer act as documentary of or referential to an external index, but instead perform operations. It is not what can be seen but what can be done that concerns her.

       
      Deren’s “generalizations” are patterns, defining relationships, and not spatially situated objects. Her concept of form is clearly probabilistic in that it generates a potential future action, but it is also communicative in the sense that in communication theory, information is judged by the potential for action. In Deren’s theory, symbols are the condition of possibility for an action. Whereas the chemical formula (a representation) cannot produce the reaction, her notion of symbol or generalization can. Her deferral or repression of presence, ontology, and description facilitates a focus on relations instead of objects. The materialization of the symbol is thus closely correlated with an ideal of a predictive and probabilistic time, and the deferral of a concern with capture and ontology.
       
      Deren attempts to enact this idea of symbol literally in her work, for example in her subsequent film A Study in Choreography for the Camera (1945). She describes this film as an effort to remove dance from the theater stage and create a new relationship between the camera and the human body. This film is as dynamic as the body, “mobile and volatile as himself. It was, actually a duet–between Talley Beatty, who danced, and space, which was made to dance by means of the camera and cutting” (“Ritual” 225). To this end she drives herself and her performers to new physical and mechanical relations. Talley Beatty recalls the difficulty of filming Choreography (“Interview,” Legend 280):
       

       
      Stills from A Study in Choreography for the Camera. 1945.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 6.

      Stills from A Study in Choreography for the Camera. 1945.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002
       

       

      Deren forces Beatty to lean in and out of windows, ledges, and precipices and to hold for long moments poses that are both physically taxing and potentially dangerous (“Interview” 286).

       
      In her critics’ estimation, Deren’s work diverges from previous avant-garde traditions, most particularly Surrealism, because her image participates in, rather than records or represents (as abstraction), the movements of the body.8 As Deren explains, “Most dance films are records of dances which were originally designed for theatrical stage space and for the fixed stage-front point of view of the audience…In this film I have attempted to place a dancer in limitless, cinematographic space…he shares, with the camera, a collaborative responsibility for the movements themselves. This is, in other words, a dance which can exist only in film” (Legend 262). Both dance and cinema change, incorporating and reflexively responding to each other. John Martin, the New York Times dance critic, announces that Deren’s work reveals that the machine could now extend the body, labeling this “chorecinema.” Another dance critic, Richard Lippold, argues her work “liberates” dance from a “transitory experience,” offering it “the eternity of other arts, and the liberation of cinema, through the dancer, from its confines in documenting merely the real” (391).
       
      The film spans approximately three minutes, deploying a number of devices to facilitate the production of temporality and movement: a machinic vision, if you will. Cadencing is integral to the structure of the movie. Dance movements and rhythms set the tempo for attention in the film, which moves through a number of discontinuous and idiosyncratic spaces in both geography and history. For example, the dancer starts in a forest and extends his leg. The extension is slow and continuous. This action is on-going while synchronously there is a jump cut between spaces, landing the dancer in a West Village apartment. Movement is shown continuously over spatial disjuncture. In another scene that takes place in the Metropolitan Museum of Art, the dancer traverses the antiquities hall. The speed of shooting is variable, ranging from 64 frames per second to 8 frames per second, as is the angle of the camera. The dancer’s turns maintain a set cadence, but they unfold for the viewer through disjointed perspectives–extreme close-ups and shallow depths of field interspersed with extended depth of field, wider angles, and distance–and at varying speeds. What the spectator is conscious of is the time in which the action unfolds since the spaces modulate. Deren also plays segments of the film in reverse to transform action and create jumps “contradicting gravity,” breaking with causal logics of action and reaction (“Choreography” 265).
       
      Mechanical, perhaps statistical, in nature, the film induces a series of potential affects through tight structures and controlled scenarios. Nature and art–the urban museum, the domestic apartment, and the forest cliffs–are brought into contact as remnants of, and possibilities for, different forms of life, different possibilities for being that emerge from unlikely interactions structured by the film. Temporality is (at least in ambition) produced through the disjuncture between movement and space, directly from the cuts, edits and the variances in filming speed. Deren seeks not to represent time or presence, but rather to produce sensation through her editorial and structural practice. Deren sums up her ambitions for the film poetically: “I mean that movement, or energy, is more important, or more powerful, than space or matter-that, in fact, it creates matter” (qtd. in Butler 11).
       
      In its dedication to enacting a deconstruction of the separation between materiality and abstraction, to an irreversible but heterogeneous temporality, and to memory as a process of “relation” building, this cinema appears to correlate with Gilles Deleuze’s later formulation of the time image as a post-war phenomenon. This correlation highlights a historical transformation in representational tactics. In a move that anticipates contemporary media theory, Deren inverts modern concerns with the present and the index, as exemplified in Henri Bergson’s attitudes and critiques of physics, modern science, and cinema. While Bergson continued to insist on the cinematograph’s attack on reality, Deren (and incidentally Bateson, but not Mead) represses this interest in the investment in a “filmic reality,” substituting the instrument for the position of memory. Unlike Bergson, for whom time is always outside of representation and inscription, and for whom the present is both inaccessible to legible inscription and the site of an absolute reality, for Deren time emerges from within the apparatus. In the post-war reformulation of cinema there is no debate between phenomenal, scientific, or mechanical experiences of time.9 The debate, instead, shifts to how this experience will be organized and manipulated.
       

      Genealogies

       
      Deren’s cinema thus allows us to identify three features of the post-war image: 1) The emergence of a notion of multiple temporality comprised of both probability and recombination. 2) The subsequent displacement of interest in the present, taxonomy, and static ontology in the interest of process, method, and relations. 3) The transformation in relations between materiality and abstraction facilitating a new treatment of perception, representation, and symbols. These three features are part of a broader cultural logic of representation endemic to the period. Deren’s relationship to temporality, traversing as it does discourses of physics, anthropology, memory, probability, and control, reflects and refract broader epistemological changes in the arts and sciences of her day and her particular biography. Deren, as I have noted, studied with Koffka at Smith College in the late 1930s while completing an MA. in English literature.
       
      I draw attention to this link because gestalt psychology has a particular place in the postwar milieu. In fields as widespread as computing, art theory and history, psychology, and the social sciences, the language of gestalt and the ideas coming from this form of psychology become a dominant lingua franca for rethinking perception and human cognition. Deren’s thinking emerges directly from this influence, which reflects itself in her language of recombining “wholes,” in her idea that the anagram can be a process for creating perception, and her situating the structure of temporality in the image. By tracing Deren’s relationship to gestalt, I seek to situate the filmmaker within a broader history of epistemology and representation.
       
      Gestalt psychology is a paradigmatic example of an epistemological bridge between two orders of objectivity and truth before and after the war. Gestalt anticipates, before the war, a transformation in scientific ideals and the dispersion of psychological technologies into fields like design and art through the Bauhaus. But gestalt enjoys global popularity as a practice and discourse only after the war. 10 In gestalt, the principle is to model the interactions and relationships between objects. Max Wertheimer, founder of the gestalt school, demonstrates this epistemology in his discussion of “time forms” in music. He writes: “what is given me by the melody does not arise . . . as a secondary process from the sum of the pieces as such. Instead, what takes place in each single part already depends upon what the whole is” (qtd. in Green).11 The form, like the anagram, anticipates or precedes its discrete elements. If we are to think of this visually, then the static and indexical image of the photograph that comprises the cinema is only secondary to the form or structure that conditions the possible relations between stills and spectators. Gestalt psychology is interested in these generative forms, not in describing discrete entities.
       
      Gestalt psychology makes visible an epistemic shift, bridging the compartmentalizing and rationalizing experimental traditions emerging from psycho-physics with new concerns with consciousness, memory, and cognitive functioning. Beginning at the turn of the century, gestalt psychologists studied perception, or the organization of sensations, rather than direct stimulus response situations (Ash 1). Experimentally, gestalt psychologists focused on examining those places where subjects identify patterns or shapes that are not reducible to the elements of the stimulus. Their focus became the mediated relationship between subjects and the world, and not the direct relationship between external input and action. For example, the kind of visual phenomena gestalt psychologists were interested in is exemplified by the famous gestalt triangle Kanizsa used in 1955:
       

       
      The gestalt triangle.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 7.

      The gestalt triangle.

       

       

      Kurt Koffka, Deren’s mentor at Smith, was intrigued by the fact that experimental subjects “see” objects like the triangle even though there is no triangle “actually” there. Cinema, of course, is the classic exemplar of gestalt phenomena. In 1912 Wertheimer, with Koffka’s assistance, researched the way people see movement from stills. This phenomenon demonstrated to them the possibility of a gestalt that inherently structures the nature of vision. As in a film that shows no movement, here there is no direct stimulus impinging upon the eye. That the triangle appears to be there demonstrates for Koffka and other gestalt psychologists that perception and stimulus do not correspond one-to-one. The production of the image of a triangle, for gesalt psychologists, gestures to the existence of a process of cognition coordinating relations between stimuli. Cognition and perception become part of the same process, and the boundary between reception and processing is degraded. Perception is a process, not reducible to singular reflex arcs, but determined by complex and changing relations between the organism and the environment. This gestalt investment in “wholes” and in experience that exceeds stimuli is refracted in Deren’s figure of the Anagram, where the
      cinema and the spectator together produce new perceptual possibilities.

       
      Gestalt psychology, in being concerned with interaction and not merely with causal action, therefore relies on a probabilistic temporality–on the production of an ordered psyche out of a chaotic environment. Köhler argues, for example, that in complex systems there is “no reason why things should develop in the direction of order rather than chaos.” However, he adds, “chaos can be prevented, and order enforced, if proper controls are imposed upon acting factors.” He gives the example of factory machines that, while they conform to principles of physics, impose a form and order that “man, not nature, has provided.” His interest as psychologist is in unearthing orderly patterns of human perception that allow cognition and produce order. He does not view this is an objective process, an inalienable law as in the natural sciences, but rather as a subjective process that constrains chance and chaos by systematically reproducing the same effects in all human beings. So while Köhler concedes that science cannot know what “red” might denote to every individual, science can know the process of relations and of producing order in the mind. “Thus,” he writes, “we must try to find a kind of function which is orderly and yet not entirely constrained by either inherited or acquired arrangements” (62-3, 69).
       
      Wertheimer coins a term for this process in 1914–Prägnanz–expressing the idea that all experienced structures always spontaneously assume the simplest arrangement possible under given conditions. This theory clearly invokes the second law of thermodynamics. As a science, gestalt emerges out of a concern for order–in nature and in society. Gestalt psychologists sought to define and explore the process by which perceptions are systematically organized and reach homeostatic equilibrium. Gestalt psychology sought not to unearth an absolute singular form or structure, but rather to isolate processes and relations that operate on similar principles while allowing for change, transformation, and the multiplicity and diversity–the subjectivity–of human experience.12 I argue this makes gestalt part of a broader shift in epistemology visible in many sciences throughout the 20th century–away from ontology and documentation and toward performativity, process, and prediction. The shift entails a redefinition of the scientific objective and, perhaps, of objectivity. Köhler argues in 1947 that there can be no separation between thought and the body, and all observations are fundamentally mediated by human perception: “About the organism, just as about other physical things, we know merely by a process of inference or construction. To the influence of other physical objects my organism responds with processes which establish the sensory world around me.” Rather than discover a non-sensory or extra-sensory world, gestalt psychology is interested in how we produce experience and in fact the “sensory world.” For gestaltists there is only an internal and self-referential world (Köhler 9).
       
      In entering the “subjective” space of sensory and perceptual mediation, gestalt psychologists also rethink the older categories of materiality and abstraction, mind and body, and representation and action. Gestalt psychology asks about generalizable processes: how is it that all humans appear to view cinema as moving? What process synthesizes this experience? The question therefore is not about the disjuncture between what is seen and presumably what is “really” there, but about how reality, now understood as experience, comes into being at all. This search for a reflexive or subjective method for ordering sense also threatens to degrade older categorical separations between materiality and abstraction, mind and body, cognition, perception, and sensation, or action/behavior and thought (Köhler 9). Breakdowns potently visible in Deren’s gestalt inspired choreographies for the camera, for example.
       
      Bateson also demonstrates this refocusing of scientific concern on “relations.” He writes that “[w]hen . . . it is realized that the recognition of Gestalten depends upon the formal relations among external events, then it is evident that thinking in terms of ‘things’ is secondary . . . all knowledge of external events is derived from the relationships between them” (Bateson and Ruesch 173). After the war, Bateson’s experimental and ethnographic work shifts to focus on the relationships between people and cultures, over and against defining any particular subjectivity or culture (Steps). It is, in fact, Bateson’s interest in anagrammatic structures that drives his investigations into both gestalt and game theory; and it is to his game theory and comparative ethnography that Deren responds in her letters to Bateson. For Bateson, games and gestalten share an epistemology. Both systems possess formal or methodological structures that generate a great variety of potential experiences. In his professional fields, such as communication science, cognitive science, and cybernetics, gestalt concepts are often used interchangeably with other logical and game-theoretical ideas. However, Bateson has reservations about games as well-particularly about the logic of prediction in games and the inability of rules to evolve–that he does not have about psychology. His reservations implicitly underpin Deren’s response to his lectures.
       
      While a serious background of game theory is impossible here, it should be noted that games, like gestalt psychology, become increasingly important in post-war American culture. Perhaps the most notable incarnation of this importance is John von Neumann and Oskar Morgenstern’s 1944 classic, Theory of Games and Economic Behavior. Influencing everything from computing to cold war politics, the game became both a critical metaphor and a mode of operating in many fields. Deren refers to this new cultural condition directly through reference to foreign policy, atomic weapons, and technically induced genocide of her time. While it is unclear if she distinguishes between different scientific or technical endeavors since psychology, physics, play, and probability are all recombined at will in her work, she is very astute in making visible these fields’ parallel epistemic patterns. Replacing an understanding of the market as a space where actors respond to external prices (dead variables), game theory by, among others, Morgenstern and von Neumann, understands actors as responding to each other. Markets, as well as political situations, emerge from the relationships between the agents involved through feedback interactions. There is no exteriority to the game except perhaps its “rules,” the templates by which the future gets extrapolated. The situation emerging out of these protocols can generate great complexity.13 Like the concept of gestalt that is often used to describe them, games in game theory are generative forms produced out of a set of processes or rules that create future possibility. Because games generate their own self-referential worlds, these are not representations. Games, like the post-war images of cinema, are said to be performative abstractions that materialize particular effects.
       
      But at the juncture between probabilistic time and predictive time, Bateson diagnoses a problem–games cannot evolve or change once begun. This repetition without change is the topic of the conversation between himself and Deren. He understands that the problem with “static” games is that they produce conditions for action, but not for different possible actions, only repetitive cycles culminating in potentially genocidal violence (nuclear war in this case)–he labels this a “paranoidal direction.” I would label it the logical and rational basis of irrationality and psychosis. These games, models, and approximations both assume the collapse of the perceptual field, a state of total psychosis and internal self-reference, and still desire the ability to gain control, to reassert objectivity–an impossible combination. Bateson also labels this situation “schizoid,” and goes on to redefine the pathology of schizophrenia as an impossible scenario where two incompatible logics compete. This tension at the heart of theories of games is, in fact, at the center of Bateson’s critique (Letter 2).
       
      Temporality also structures Deren’s response to the series of lectures Bateson gives linking game theory, nascent cybernetic concepts, and new models for ethnography and psychology.14 She documents a “heated” discussion with Gregory about “that old business of his linear analysis of nonlinear systems” (“Notebook” 25). She argues that his “dominance-submission, succor-dependence structure is wrong. That is, he builds up a whole structure of feedbacks, etc., because he starts off with such a linear, simplified process . . . It is better to complicate the premise by one dimension–time–and have a simple analytical structure flow from it than to keep the premise simple at any price only to have a very complex superstructure” (“Notebook” 25-26). Her concern with feedbacks and processes demonstrates her exposure to the language of computation, electrical engineering, and the cognitive sciences that are Bateson’s points of reference. And while her understanding of Bateson’s project may be limited, her personal notes identify a problem with the rigidity and linearity of his basic rules or premises and their incapacity to generate more complex systems and unknown futures. Deren maintains that the whole should be more than its parts. Systems are never reducible to their identifiable parts. Systems are never fully legible (“Notebook” 25-26).
       

      The Organization of Time

       
      If I have insisted on situating Deren within this broader history of epistemology and representation it is, of course, to facilitate a reflexive encounter with the present. Situating our own practices takes particular valence within this context where probability, temporal variability, and emergence become the very technical substrate not only for art and philosophy, but also for communication and game theory, cybernetics, gestalt and cognitive sciences. History, here, becomes theory, quite literally. In systems where the past is always being used to predict the future, as in games, the possibility of emergence is always in question. Games can make automatic repetition into technology.
       
      Repetition and automation preoccupy Deren in her writing to and about Bateson. What Deren discovers in his lecture, and in her review of Mead and Bateson’s film footage, is a productive tension between form and content. While Bateson critiques game theory in his lectures and persistently attacks the authorial voice of anthropology, his form–a language of distanciation, linear and repetitive interaction, generic and de-contextualized models–is nostalgic and archival. It is a language of objectivity arriving from an earlier moment in anthropology, a language associated with the archival and objective epistemologies of another age. A language of statistics and mechanism. This language, Deren argues, undermines his ethical effort to rethink game theory. Deren notes that Bateson is trapped in a feedback loop; one that he, himself, fails to recognize. She argues that he is dedicated to maintaining a reductive premise, “a linear, simplified process,” even when describing a complex system (“Notebook” 25). His need to isolate a generic and global process of cultural conflict forces reductivism in thought. Implicitly, she senses that Bateson, despite his own interest in complexity, falls prey to the same problems of game theory in his dedication to unearthing, and authoritatively describing, generic processes governing human cultures. She feels he is creating models no more dynamic or changeable than those of games (“Notebook” 25-26).
       
      Deren seizes upon an internal temporal disjuncture that structures both game theories and gestalt psychologies–between the production of probabilities and the desire to contain chance and reassert older ideals of authority. For example, this temporal disjuncture historically plays out in gestalt psychology through an inbuilt tension between universal and cultural explanations of cognition and perception. While gestaltists (and game theorists) reconfigure objectivity as emanating from within experience rather than outside of it, as a science they still sought to disciplinarize and to impose a singular logic and rigorous method for psychological investigation. Gestalt, as the historian Mitchell Ash notes, “was not only, or not simply, a revolt against positivism” (3). Gestalt is haunted by the ghost of previous histories of evidence, rationality, positivism, and objectivity. We all, apparently, see cinematic movement and triangles even if we know that cinema is made of stills. The emerging moral and ethical question is: What do we make of this generalization applicable to “all” humans? Perception organized into homeostatic equilibrium as a rule. While gestalt demonstrates that perception and cognition can be trained, influenced, and reproduced, there is also the possibility that this is a perception defined as naturalized, a-historical, culturally non-specific and, perhaps, as later debates demonstrate, biologically ordained. Gestalt psychologists create new boundaries between nature and culture, objectivity and subjectivity, and perception, sensation, and cognition, but struggle with the normative terms set by modern psychological and biological projects for truth. Even if they debate the place of nature and nurture, learning or innateness, in developing gestalt forms, the terms of the debate are fundamentally normative and disciplinary. Gestalt psychology hybridizes two forms of discourse.15
       
      This disjuncture, in the post-war period, between chance and determinism debates the significance of authority or “control,” a term that binds Deren to Bateson, both pragmatically in that she wants to get a Guggenheim and be authorized by scientists and anthropologists, and conceptually because it is a site in which to negotiate a new separation between art and science. Deren herself regularly deploys this term in labeling her cinema a “controlled accident” (“Cinematography”). Control is indeed an internally inconsistent term at this moment (and perhaps even in our moment) of history. In game theory, and in the post-war discourse of gestalt, control is a double figure–both the condition of possibility for emergence, and the ideal of an authoritative account of future action. Game theory, especially, hopes that the models, templates, and approximations that produce the system can simultaneously analyze it. In game theory perception, cognition, and analysis are all the same. The game is both representative and predictive. Control is the function that temporally organizes the process of game play. But control can also mean perfect prediction, the production of a future that replicates past data. The problem, as Bateson says–and as Deren is quick to affirm in her comment that “time perspective” defines “man,” allowing him to “build machines” and act “idiosyncratically”–is that in game theory the rules are static. Rules cannot change within the game, and the players cannot learn.16 Time, for Deren, is destroyed when the model and the world become one. Game theories use past data to predict the future, but the new political and ethical concern is that the technology obscures the fact that while we are always predicting different futures, we do so according to the same form or operation. Deren is worried that Bateson, in his reformulation of psychology and culture through game and communication theory, enacts the very problem he is describing.
       
      Whether I do or do not agree with Deren’s appraisal of this particular lecture (Bateson is hardly an ethnographer dedicated to authority or objectivity), she highlights an important point. Ethical concerns in gaming and art, I argue through Deren, now do not merely concern the manipulation of time, but also the specific organization of time. In Deren’s discourse, art is classified not by telling topical or technical concerns apart–artists use new technologies and mediums, they speak to science–but by organizing them according to their different temporal organizations. More importantly, for Deren only particular forms of practice, now labeled art, allow us to recognize and experience time’s movements and passage consciously. The emerging question Deren’s work poses is: how will time be organized, now that its teleological operations are unmoored and history is available for recombination? Her work also asks: what does it mean for time to enter the realm of experience and consciousness? For while she adheres to the possibility of a subject capable of change, she wavers between the desire for a psychotic perception and the need to differentiate between entities within the field of perception.
       
      Deren is very explicit about consciousness. She violently resists the shock and unconscious automatism of Surrealism, for example. She always denies the possibility that her work expresses the unconscious. She considers her films the result of a “controlled accident,” of an intentional experiment that produces chance, and not of a time and fate outside of subjective control. Time, for Deren, unlike for Bergson, emerges from within a system. It is subject to control. Time is produced by the artist through the cinematic practice. Time is not bought into representation; it emerges from purposefully produced aesthetic structures. It appears that Deren harbors her own personal archive of a never-realized dream of sovereignty and agency that she explicitly seeks to see, finally realized, through the cinematic medium (“Cinema” 29-31). In Deren’s discourse memory becomes central to the project of making time experienced. It is, however, a memory infected, like Bateson’s “linear analysis” by problems of storage and archiving. The fate of this archive, the archive of older forms of storage and knowledge, the archive of images and their taxonomies, the archive as itself an historically specific form of storage inherent in the cinema and to 19th century anthropology and psychology, is now unclear. Deren wants to break from a history of objectivity and ontology, those orders affiliated with the 19th century archive, but at the same time she desires to preserve memory and the trace of indexicality, maybe history and context. She wants time to feedback into the image, but she does not want us to identify this time as known and controllable, but rather as alien and outside of legibility.17
       
      Memory takes a complex place in this discourse as the site that both produces time and refuses identification. Deren defines memory very particularly as reconfiguring the index in time. She offers two axes for memory–horizontal and vertical. Deren writes:
       

      By “horizontal” I mean that the memory of man is not committed to the natural chronology of his experience . . . On the contrary, he has access to all his experience simultaneously . . . he can compare similar portions of events widely disparate in time and place . . . and he is able to perceive that a natural, chronological whole is not immutable, but that it is a dynamic relationship of functioning parts.
       

      (“Cinema” 11)

       

      What art must utilize and preserve, she argues, is not the direct index, but rather this “horizontal” memory, which can produce new relations between times rather than organize time in one direction. This is not a linear memory, even as it can facilitate change. This is also not a memory based on an archive of static, spatial representations. Rather, this memory bank is relational. Deren wishes to evoke the relationships between subjects, and between subjectivity, perception, and cinema.

       
      Two temporal vectors operate in this discourse. On the one hand, Deren assumes the availability of an infinite and recombinant storage space for manipulation, and on the other, she seeks not to return to any single element within this storage system, but always to focus on totalities (gestalten) that exceed individual elements. She dreams of a memory-storage system operating in internally referential feedback loops, one that produces new relations between historical events and “functioning parts.” In this, Deren reflects much of what I have already argued in this article about an historical shift in favor of the record and of process. Two times operate simultaneously in her work–repetitive feedback and an irreversible teleology.
       
      Deren’s most complex film, Ritual in Transfigured Time, interrogates this relationship between cinema and time. The filmmaker, however, counter to her interlocutors in psychology and anthropology, strenuously insists on reattaching these two temporal vectors of feedback and probability to history and subjectivity. Deren insists on reminding us both of the memorializing and indexical functions of the photograph embedded within the cinema, and of the historically changing, situated, and contested structure of visuality. The film adamantly maintains a memory of the index, but only in order to rethink the nature of subjectivity and visuality in the future. The film, not incidentally, is completed in 1946, when Deren begins to engage with Bateson and Mead. While most film criticism has highlighted the movie’s focus on ritual and ethnography,18 I argue that this film highlights Deren’s alternative idea of games and images. It is also, in many ways, a synthesis of an on-going process. Deren is not a filmmaker whose project can be comprehended in any one film, or text, or lecture, but rather is about the on-going relations between all these sites. In many senses, her films, themselves, are merely traces of another process, one that can never be fully defined, or seen. In this final moment in this essay, I want to use this film to feed-back into all that I have already discussed in her work.
       

       
      Stills from Ritual. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 8.

      Stills from Ritual. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      Deren’s early script of Ritual in Transfigured Time describes a transformation in time, a metamorphosis (Legend 453). “Slow motion is the microscope of time,” Deren writes. And under this microscope, at its end, the “Fourth dimension is you.” The ritual will end and the protagonist (played by a young Afro-Caribbean dancer, Rita Christiani) will finally become Other, changing places with a character played by Deren. She will move away from death to life, changing from a “widow” to a “bride.” History will reverse itself to embrace, in Deren’s terms, “life.” This is a film about “change of identity…and sudden change in stature of relationship” (“Pre-production Notes” 466). Her opening description of the film anticipates that time will be involved in the production of a new form of inter-subjectivity or “relationship” between the fixity of identity and the “metamorphosis” of becoming a subject.
       
      In keeping with her anagrammatic practice, Deren’s production notes dissect the movie into seven segments, laying out every shot and movement. This is a movie pre-planned in every detail, but one she still hopes will induce the “controlled accident.” Each scene feeds back into previous one through the repetition of gesture and figure. The movie opens with a series of shots in a room, where our two protaganists–Deren and the dancer Rita Christiani–first encounter each other. They are watched by a third figure–Anäis Nin–a figure who reappears as a third eye throughout the film. By watching, she duplicates the viewer in the film, but we are never allowed access to her perspective. She is thus a site of the limit of visibility in the structure of the film. Nin occupies the place of a witness, perhaps to historical change and to the limits of describing or knowing this process. Already from the first scene, therefore, Deren emphasizes the problem of seeing and recording the past.
       
      In this room, Deren is playing with yarn, creating a cat’s cradle, as reference to children’s games and to myth and ritual action. These are practices that are untimely, arriving from elsewhere, but also practices that mediate the interaction between subjects. As the scene progresses, the tempo becomes ever slower and Deren’s movement’s more dramatized, until the yarn flies off, and with a cinema cut we are thrust into another room full of people. No sooner are we offered a series of figures with which to potentially identify, than this alignment between our vision and the camera is disrupted through the cut and the manipulation of the time of events in the film. A series of shots tracks Christiani’s outstretched hand as she approaches the figure who is weaving. The two women never touch, so that our phenomenal expectations of an encounter are never answered. In this failure of events, however, to culminate in rational action, we are also left to wonder at the potential future of these figures. We are, thus, not allowed to establish who these women are, nor what their specific relationship to each other might be. Deren refuses us as spectators access to the present, so we cannot render these subjects into static objects. Nor are we offered solace in cinematic convention, since the abruptness of the edit between one room and another is jarring and unexpected.
       
      The cut into the “second” scene comes through the tracking of this figure–Christiani–and maintains a relationship to interior space, but the room is now different. In this scene, the protagonist (Christiani) enters the room as a bride (perhaps of Christ) in black (see Fig. 9 below). The camera cuts to a partial view of a room seemingly full of men in suits and women in dark dresses and dark lipstick. It appears to be a party. We are never offered an establishing shot, and we are never sure if our viewpoint coincides with that of the protagonist. We are thus refused any commanding sense of where or when this event is happening. There is a cut back to the “bride.” She removes a veil from her head and enters the room. With this gesture she is transformed into another member of the partying group. Bereft of veil and cross, she is another woman in a dark dress.
       

       
      The "bride" in Ritual. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 9.

      The “bride” in Ritual. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      But the camera tracks her differently, offering her the intimacy of the close up, focusing on her facial expression. As viewers, we register on the protagonist’s face the search for the other woman she initially encountered in a game. Christiani is among the only individuals (the other in this scene is Nin) whom we actually recognize. She is the only figure to look at the camera directly. She is also, of course, racially marked, as the black woman in the party. Her skin color is not what identifies her. The movie is black and white, there is no sound, her skin is not truly visible. Rather, we identify her though differences in her hairstyle, gesture, and lack of make-up. She is the only individual in a mass of mechanically moving and similarly dressed and made up people.
       
      Deren’s noteworthy move here is to make difference appears equivalent to gesture. Both the normative social actions and the movements that separate and differentiate subjects are no longer representative, but performative. Not only does gesture comprise the terrain of visuality, but it is also rendered equivalent to the technology of cinematic manufacture. It is the choreography of gesture that edits this movie, producing perception. Difference, the very gestural interactions between the figures, is the technology that makes this cinema–just as in gestalt it is the relations between objects–the very process of perception, that produces cognition. The logic of the performative sign also governs Deren’s anagrammatic figure and A Study in Choreography for Camera (1945). Representation thus only enters in delay, as the spectator retroactively recognizes, and assigns meaning to, the performative and historical nature of vision. Only through this feedback loop where gestural conventions are returned to us after temporal delay do we become conscious of how and who we see. From the beginning of this movie, therefore, we are made mindful of the historical nature of vision. We recognize both the ability to perceive difference and the conventions that make us look. The party is a dramatization of social norms fed-back to us through the cinema.
       
      The next series of shots, however, reveals that the movie will not allow us to fully identify and classify either historical norms or difference. The camera zooms out, and we start to see movement. The party is a dance, a pas de deux between people meeting and greeting each other. We are offered mid-length shots capturing the upper-bodies and hands of these “dancers” greeting each other. The moments of greeting are continually repeated. These repetitions, however, are interspersed with two forms of cutting. On the one hand there are sudden moments of stillness–photographs. People caught in indefinite poses, in almost, but never completed, greetings. On the other hand, we are regularly offered shots of Christiani and Nin encountering each other. The camera focuses on their faces, affording us the ability to witness their moment of almost-recognition. I say “almost” because the facial expression assumes some familiarity on our part, but without a defined emotion or identification. Neither looks at the camera; they are caught to the side. The look they give each other is more a glance than a gaze.
       
      As the two women encounter each other, their gestures are so slow as to allow us to see their eyes momentarily meet, and to note the gesture of their bodies. Each time they meet, their interaction subtly changes, becoming slightly elongated. Theirs is the only relationship that appears to progress. The protagonist’s movement across the room is a linear counterpoint to the empty and repeated performances of sociality that do not engage in recognition even as they are identifiable.
       
      Here both time and cinematic convention are made visible. The photographic still elongates time and serves as a referent to photography, a reminder that the cinema carries within it the memory of the ontology and indexicality of photography. The images are also among the most historically situated in the film, depicting the social dress and manners of a party in the mid-1940s in a New York apartment. But not exactly. These images are not really indexes; they are referents to indexicality itself. The photograph refuses to serve as an index because its function is merely to make us conscious of perception itself. By stopping movements from commencing and cutting into the sensory-motor chain, the photograph forces us to recognize the very conventions of visuality, just as the repetition of social codes forces historical recognition of normativity. Two temporal vectors develop–the circular repetition of individuals greeting each other and the linear and diegetic search for the Other–which mirror the historical memory of the index against the tightly choreographed movement of the film.
       
      At the final moment of this scene there is another cut. Through a pose, the space of the party is transformed into another: we enter a third space or “scene,” although neither term is appropriate. At the final moment of the party Christiani enters a close-up with a man (Frank Westerbrook). They appear about to engage in a kiss, or perhaps an assault (see Fig. 10 below). The situation is rendered ambiguously in that the woman’s face is turned away. The camera holds still. It is almost a photographic still, although not quite–the freeze frame does not last long enough, and the animation of the dancers is not entirely stopped. Through the wavering of this moment of potentiality in interaction between desire and violence, there is an immediate cut to almost the same pose, now in a garden filled with Greco-Roman statues, a space where monument and memory collapse. Deren thus makes explicit the relationship between ideal forms and historical change.
       

       
      Stills from the third "scene" of Ritual. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 10.

      Stills from the third “scene” of Ritual. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      We are never permitted, however, to dwell on the monumental and ideal facet of this environment. The forms of sexual perfection and idealized body encoded within the Greco-Roman aesthetic do not enact themselves in the sexual act. For immediately upon entry into this space, the potentially sexual act of encounter in a kiss (or assault) generates a different form of action (see the figures above). The scene immediately cuts to three women from the party, dancing in a circle. A cut doubly referencing the lingering trace of social convention that enters this dream-like space from the previous scene, and an ode to ritual enactment and game. This is the pattern that repeats in all the scenes. Both myth and history are continually reintroduced through repetitive forms of games.
       
      From a brief series of shots showing the women, we are thrust back to the couple. Their kiss does not end. Rather, the dancer lurches into the air. We track her arms in a circle, the camera shot is beneath her, then the camera shifts idiosyncratically to another viewpoint, perhaps that of the male dancer. But not quite, because we see the back of his shoulder and his extended arm, framing her movements, perhaps threatening her body as she twists on the ground. The camera is angled and the movements deployed in slower motion so that the actual reverberations of the fall and the quivering of her muscles are visible, offering a very embodied sense to the image. There is a cut back to three women in the background dancing in a circle, as though around a maypole, or playing “ring around the rosy.” The segment vacillates between these two sites of action–the couple and the triad of women. The maypole circle repeats until the dancers fly off as the couple continues in their athletic, or perhaps, violent movements. We are offered scenes in this dance that are almost mimetic of Leni Riefensthal’s Triumph of the Will (1935), as the male dancer’s naked body is filmed against Grecian columns:
       

       
      Frank Westerbrook in Ritual. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 11.

      Frank Westerbrook in Ritual. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      Ideals of body and history play against the incoherence of a film where there is no clear identification of who these individuals are, or what their ambitions might be.
       
      All the figures finally fling apart and recombine. The male dancer joins the circle game, as the protagonist continues her search. Repeatedly one action after another gets strung into another set of motions. The male and female dancers appear caught in a repetitive game of chasing one another. The women in the circle repeat another history. The repetition of a circular dance is associated with death, ritual, the plague, a longue durée in history against the speedy and constantly changing flight and fight of this couple dancing and chasing each other. Deren interjects photographic stills in the garden scene at precisely those moments of choreographic velocity when bodies fling apart, and we assume certain linear laws of Newtonian physics to take hold. Our expectations are thwarted. For example, at one moment a woman is flung out of the circle. Her body has no structured pose and shows no intent. At another moment (see Fig. 12 below) the male dancer suddenly leaps out of a statuesque pose to pursue the protagonist. This leap, however, occurs at almost the wrong moment for such still capture. Unlike the statuesque pose preceding it, this is not a defined or clear action. It is neither monumental nor memorial. It is undefined. It is a moment of preservation that does not show historical intentionality or identificatory power as an action.
       

       
      Garden Chase Sequence, Ritual in Transfigured Time. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 12.

      Garden Chase Sequence, Ritual in Transfigured Time. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       
      These photographic images are images of potentiality and illegibility. They offer a memorial counterpoint to the moving images unfolding in the present. These moments of stasis interrupt action, depicting actions that fail to finalize and are therefore indecipherable in intent or purpose. These images convey supplemental and excessive gestures. These are images that carry within them not the index as an authority over the past, but an index of the very practice of media and the process by which history is narrativized. They make the nature of the medium visible, thus disrupting cinema’s own omniscience as a time-based and animated medium, and reminding the very machine of its own history and internal resistances.
       
      Deren makes us aware that mythic cinematic and social forms are unattainable ideals. The greetings photographed in the film are too theatrical and dramatized, too sudden or disrupted to be truly identifiable as normal behavior or as part of a causal story line. The choreographed movement, intercut with stills, is marginally familiar. We become conscious that it is familiar, but also see it as uncanny. Deren forces us to look in a new manner at the mundane and everyday practices of sociality. We are forced to see acts of expression and excess. We are forced to recognize the forms that constrain and produce our actions. Finally, we are made conscious of the mediums–of technical media, of society–that structure our very movements. These images are reminders of the technical forms through which cinema provides purpose and linearity where none exist. In this moment of cinematic re-memory, all the times are rearranged, and the viewer and the camera both “fail” to achieve a command over the time or space of the film. These are images, therefore, that operate like Deren’s memory–not to stop time and organize it but to make visible relationships between subjects. These images make the production of time, itself, available to perception.
       
      There are two temporal movements, therefore, in the film: the repetitive actions of these social, encoded, and gendered games replayed in the visceral actions of the dancers, and the linear diegetic narrative of search and transformation. These two vectors are embedded in two cinematic actions–the recombination of film’s own history and the production of new relations between images. These two directions cut into each other, both repeating themselves but never culminating. These vectors emerge from a cinema structured on gestalt forms. If visuality is on display, it is already embedded in the film notes and in Deren’s anagrammatic schemas. Deren wants to make perception, itself, a techne. Yet out of this structure she seeks to create accidents. A whole beyond the sum of its parts. For this reason, perhaps, the movie insists on repetition–of choreographed movements, of cinematic convention, of mediums. Deren continues this mode as the movie moves through new geographies, culminating in a moment of inter-subjective transformation where Deren and Christiani become each other.
       
      This ending culminates in multiple possibilities as an action of inter-subjective substitution whose effects and signification have multiple interpretations. As Ute Holl argues, “Emotions are artificially, almost mathematically, produced by technical devices” in a film that is “constructing and transforming subjects,” but never depicting them, a film that Holl suggests produces subjectivity from without through this mathematical logic (157). This is a film that produces psychology as an external medium, thus denigrating the sutured subject, while continuing to affirm the possibility of differentiation and subject production. This film operates like the anagrammatic and gestalt logic that underpins its making.
       
      But, Deren refuses gestalt’s effort to recuperate the authority of science. Rather, she produces an image that pushes the past towards the future, but does not ontologically describe or define the subject in the present. In this film the action never stops, and there is no finality or culmination to the movie. We might believe that the loop by which the women switch places would be replicated, just as the movie endlessly replays the same cinematic devices, recovering an endless archive of forms, from parties to dances, to move us through spaces familiar, yet transformed, through their associations.
       

      Failure to Feedback

       
      Structure and emergence must recombine. Deren in a series of untitled notes to the movie writes that, “Cubism of event–we do not recognize what is occurring–over and over we fail” (“Pre-production Notes” 468). How do we understand this idea of a “failure” to depict or identify the subject in relation to time? I argue that Deren deploys a series of cinematic conventions in order to create a fissure between the index of the past and the future.
       
      This failure to identify emerges from the relationship between the technical substrate of the medium and its own archive of conventions, mirrored by the subjective time of performance and sociality. At the level of convention, the film is about the archive of cinema itself: making visible, through re-performance, conventions of editing, photography, cinematography, camera work, and recording speeds. The repetitions are also choreographic, embedded in the structure of “games” such as greeting rituals at parties and children’s dances. The games and the repetitive cinematic conventions literally mime a repetition without difference. It is the technological repetition of media, and the subjective repetition of sociality rendered equivalent. This repetition is dissected, however, by the very forward flow of another choreography that is about chance and change.
       
      The multiple times emerging from the film make the spectator recognize both media and history. On one hand this focus on cadence, editing, and non-linear operations reveals the specific nature of the filmic medium. Film’s own timeliness and sense of time. On the other hand the viewer begins to become conscious of history–specific rituals, specific times and places, specific forms of cinema, but also specific and codified ideals of social norms, gendered interaction, and bodies. If there is a technology made visible in this film it is that of the process of social codification and formalization. The very process of ritual is rendered technical and representable here. It is not, however, one particular ritual that is depicted in this movie, but the entire process of rituals, particularly those of Cold War American sociality.
       
      But these recognitions of the processes by which we come into being are not identifications. We are offered traces of a history of normativity. The image is of a memory of the process of subjectivization. We are never offered the direct index–the image of the subject as an object. Nor is this historical specificity ever defined. Rather it is merely produced as a possibility. The viewers must project their individual understanding of time and place upon the film. It is the viewer who must bring the scenes, in delay, into representation through a process of projection. The result might be an “accident”; Deren hopes it will generate a new form of future that does not repeat the past. This inability to return is pronounced if we think about this film within Deren’s oeuvre. The filmmaker continually moves between mediums, replaying these cinematic conventions in her cinema theory, recycling her own aesthetic conventions in all her films. No one piece of her work, therefore, stands alone as an object. No one element of her work is ever finished.
       
      Neither the awareness of the medium nor of history is therefore permitted to complete. We cannot return; the feedback loop fails to finish or finalize. Unlike the theories of Bateson, or the return of the objective voice, Deren “fails” to go back to any set ideal or to fully allow us to identify those other histories–either of the cinema, or of the society–that she documents. This failure allows temporal multiplicity to enter, but defers any ability to gain authority over the past, or the individuals within it. The multiplicity of times forces an opening that does not allow a return to static and nostalgic ideals of subjectivity.
       
      This filmmaking, I argue, ethically activates all that I have discussed in this essay about the post-war displacement of ontology for process, the availability of the index for manipulation, and the communicative obsession with prediction and emergence. Deren must deal with feedback and with change simultaneously. By making these two times available synchronously, Deren, I argue, opens up the possibility of other modes of being. Consciousness, perhaps subjectivity, in her cinema lies within this gap between prediction and return.
       
      Deren holds a mirror to the theories of communication and control, and recognizes that it is precisely a multiplicity of communicative situations, always a question of history, situation, and time, that allows subjective agency. She writes in her notebooks that she might have misunderstood Bateson’s talk. But what she does understand is that Bateson is enacting a scientific discourse, performing a discussion that wrenches the specificity of Bali out of its context, and makes it amenable to comparison with Von Neumann’s games, and with the behaviors of other tribes–policy makers, communication scientists, curators at museums. Intuitively, she understands that this emergent model of image and communication is productive and that it is a site both of danger and of possibility. For this process, now unmoored, is amenable to any manipulation.
       
      When Mead and Bateson were in Bali they sought to find the expression of the interior mind of the native in the gesture of the body. Unable to speak any language of the region, skeptical of their translators, they turned away from translation and representation in written language. Instead, they created a recording machine. They wanted to capture everything. They filmed miles of stills. In the course of this study, the search for difference metamorphosed into an archive of performative inscriptions and gestures from which a new practice of cinema, and anthropology, then emerged. Both anthropologists used this research to develop cybernetic theories of mind and human development after the war (Bateson and Mead, “Introduction,” Balinese). The result was the elimination of situation, context, and history, a pure process extracted from any phenomenal time. Difference turned into a technology of communication and performance. On one hand this is an opening…an abandonment of the normative strictures of a previous eras’ Oedipal situations and essential biologies. A release from discipline. There are no objects here for study. There are no clear boundaries to demarcate human difference. But there are new technocratic orders. For the emergent computational and psychological orders often destroyed multiplicity and time in the name of multiplicity and time, simultaneously calling for the possibility of difference in communicative situations and creating processes so perfectly interchangeable and convergent that such multiplicity ceases to exist. The artist, in turn, seeks to return these processes to lived time, to memory, to the specificity of different forms of being and living. She still aspires to produce meaning, not merely messages. She hopes that the memory trace of consciousness, and humanism, might yet inform this condition.
       
      Perhaps this engagement between art and science allows us to transform our own thinking. We experience a shock of recognition, since so much emanating from these new cinemas and technologies that emerge after the war animates our contemporary theorization and discourse of the image. The question about time and the image is not, however, whether the time image is the digital image, or whether the desire for cinema is now a form of nostalgia. Rather, it opens to a series of questions about how we want time to be organized in our systems. In a world of infinite archives, feedback loops, performative epistemologies, and predictive times, we might ask, instead, what work it does to return to a memory of a medium or a subject? Which memory traces do we wish to activate? And to what effects?
       
      We may also ask what is at stake in the relationship between art, science, and technology. Do we want these three to collapse, or do we desire differentiation in practices and goals? Ultimately, the concerns about game theories and histories of objectivity and subjectivity are also competing imaginaries about the relationship between technology, repetition, and imagination. It is not whether Deren’s vision is better than that of gestalt psychology or anthropology, but rather what is lost if we fail to maintain any separation between these three forms of knowing and being in the world… if anything. In the interaction between film, science, and the technology of games after the war something is made visible–the production of radically different forms of visuality and perception, and perhaps even life, from the same material substrate. Despite sharing the same episteme with her interlocutors, Deren crafts films that produce very different effects in the world than psychological theories or game theories. I argue she produces a form of desire that has not yet been formalized as technology.
       
      I am returned to Bateson. He is, after all, prominently remembered for formulating a new definition of difference in terms of information, thereby revising modern anthropological formulations of both otherness and time. He argues that information is “any difference that makes a difference to a conscious, human mind.” In his summation, data can come from anywhere (either within or outside the mind) and information does not need to be meaningful it must merely be effective. Communication is, therefore, about effects and behavior. Consciousness is also revised, perhaps separated forever from a relationship to “spirit;” in Bateson’s formulation, to be conscious is merely to be able to take different paths of action, it is not to be separated from the external world. Most importantly, for Bateson difference is non-ontological, but rather processional and the result of interactions. Difference is always relative and relational. If difference is defined by information, and information is a measure of potential states or actions a system can take, then difference is also always already defined as emergent, a state and not a static object (Steps 459).
       
      Deren responds indirectly by asking whether this might not be an automation of emergence or difference itself. She marks a moment in which the site that allows us to think differentiation moves away from ontological categorization to the very structure of communication channels. Change is made static no longer through a mechanical process of rationalizing time, but through a discourse that insists on emergence. It is to this possibility that our contemporary thought must answer. In her cinema, the filmmaker suggests, perhaps not all differences can be rendered equivalent through this model of information. Perhaps, Deren suggests, one can produce images that can contain forms of non-equivalent encounter, differences that are neither static nor immediately amenable to transmission and circulation into any other medium. What is an image of difference that can still produce meaning or signification–dare I still say representation? A difference that is no longer only a difference, but can organize affect and gesture into signification. This difference comes through a very particular organization of temporal multiplicity. It is immanent. Perhaps this is what Deren would call art.
       
      There is much at stake, therefore, in this renegotiation of bodies and images, time and otherness, all on the screen. For this dream of an image that can still confront the Other with love, that can open to a world that is not yet known… has not yet been realized.
       

       
      Becoming Other. Rita Christiani and Maya Deren in transformation in Ritual in Transfigured Time. 1946.  © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 13.

      Becoming Other. Rita Christiani and Maya Deren in transformation in Ritual in Transfigured Time. 1946.

      © Mystic Fire Video, 2002.
       

       

      Orit Halpern is an Assistant Professor of History and Media Studies at the New School for Social Research and Eugene Lang College. She works on histories of temporality, archiving, and representation in digital systems. Her manuscript The Eye of Time: Histories of Representation, Perception, and Archiving in Cybernetic Thought is currently under review. Her research has appeared or will be appearing in C-theory, Configurations, and the Journal of Visual Culture. She has also produced multi-media installations and web-based works at the intersection of art and science that have appeared in venues such as ZKM and Rhizome. Currently, she is working to develop new lab-based research spaces integrating art, design, and the social sciences at the New School and Parsons School of Design. She is the co-founder of The Visual Culture Lab, a group bringing historians and theorists of media, art, design, and politics together to rethink the relationship between politics and aesthetics, and she is also a member of the Center for Transformative Media at Parsons. All her work and material can be accessed at: www.orithalpern.net.
       

      Notes

       
      I want to thank the archivists at the Howard Gottlieb Archive at Boston University for assistance with the Deren papers. Their time and generosity bought her work and thinking to life. I would also like to thank the support of the Franklin Humanities Institute at Duke University and the Interface Seminar Post-doctoral Fellowship 2006-07, for the support and funding for this research. I also want to thank the following individuals for their invaluable input and commentary–Joe Dumit, Robert Mitchell, Patricia Clough, Timothy Lenoir, Deborah Levitt, Vicky Hattam, David Brody, and the Visual Culture Working Group at NSSR and Parsons.
       

      1. “Teaching by muscular rote in which the pupil is made to perform the correct movements is most strikingly developed in the dancing lesson… This sequence of photographs illustrates two essential points in Balinese character formation. From his dancing lesson, the pupil learns passivity, and he acquires a separate awareness in the different parts of the body (cf. Pl.20, fig.4)” (Bateson and Mead 87).

       
      2. Bateson discusses how his affinity with cybernetics emerges from his ethnography in the preface to Naven.

       

       
      3. Maya Deren, Handwritten Notes from Lectures-Gestalt Psychology with Kurt Koffka, September 1938, Maya Deren Papers, box 7, Folder 5. Boston University, Howard Gottlieb Archive, Special Collections, Boston. Print.

       

       
      4. “Climate of Communication.” 1946-47. Deren Collection, box 4, Folder 1. Boston University Howard Gottlieb Archive Special Collections. Boston. Print. See also Catrina Neiman’s Art and Anthropology at the Crossroads.

       

       
      5. Note to Meshes of the Afternoon (1943) transcribed from the DVD, New York: Mystic Fire Video, 2002.

       

       
      6. Throughout the “Anagram” essay Deren compares Surrealism and shock to the effects of the Bomb. She began a film project with Marcel Duchamp in 1943, The Witches Cradle, that was never completed.

       

       
      7. For more work on Deren’s relationship to American cinema see Thomas Schatz’s Boom and Bust: American Cinema in the 1940s.

       

       
      8. “Previous films, most significantly Rene Clair’s Dadaist Entr’acte (1924), investigating the kinaesthetic impact of the medium and showing an ‘impossible’ shot of a ballet dancer taken from beneath her feet (she is dancing on a glass table), or Cocteau’s Blood of a Poet, where death appears as a Black male dancer appearing as a ghost by way of reversal on the negative, paralleled Deren’s use of both dancers and the black male body. However, nothing quite approaching as hers had developed before that time” (Interview with Talley Beatty).

       

       
      9. See Deleuze, The Movement-Image; Bergson, Matter and Memory; and Deren, “Anagram.”

       

       
      10. For background on gestalt’s place in psychology, history of science, and post-war America, see Goodwin, Mandler, and Harrington. For work on gestalt and perception see Orit Halpern, Dreams for Our Perceptual Present.

       

       
      11. As Green notes, “In other words, one hears the melody first and only then may perceptually divide it up into notes. Similarly in vision, one sees the form of the circle first — it is given ‘im-mediately’ (i.e. its apprehension is not mediated by a process of part-summation). Only after this primary apprehension might one notice that it is made up of lines or dots or stars.”

       

       
      12. While gestalt psychology inherits both concepts of probabilistic and relational temporalities, and the subsequent problems of objectivity and recording from modernity, as a science it also turns older problems of objectivity into subjective possibilities for research. Refracting arguments made by scholars such as art historian Jonathan Crary about the subjectivization of vision in modernity, gestalt psychology responds directly to contentions in the physical and behavioral sciences that the subjective nature of perception cannot be dealt with scientifically by arguing that, in fact, everything is subjective, and this is the new foundation for a logical methodology. No longer concerned with an absolute real, however, gestalt psychologists shift experimental interest to probing the subjective nature of human experience.

       

       
      13. This summation of game theory is indebted to the work of Philip Mirowski, Machine Dreams: Economics Becomes a Cyborg Science.

       

       
      14. Deren attended Bateson’s talks at the New School, and also Mead and Bateson’s discussion of their Balinese work in Franz Boas’ salon in New York in the course of 1946-47. In her archive there is a folder labeled “On Communication,” with a series of notes on her thoughts in these directions. She felt that hearing Bateson, she had found someone with whom her previous thought found affinity. She viewed her work after exposure to his ideas as organically extending the work she had done before. We should not view the introduction of communication as somehow a critical break point, but rather as a moment formalizing her concepts, and offering further terms.

       

       
      15. Gestalt’s relationship to Nazism and eugenics is contested. Arguments in Gestalt psychology were used on both sides, and were appropriated for both arguments supporting nurture and nature in understanding human psychological development. See Harrington.

       

       
      16. This is Bateson’s critique of game theory, based on his ethnographic work. See “Bali: The Value System of the Steady State.”

       

       
      17. For work on the relationship between temporality, difference, and governmentality, see Deleuze, Cinema 2, as well as Lim, Koselleck, and Stoler.

       

       
      18. Mead and Bateson are also reconfiguring anthropology at the time in relation to cybernetics. Their practices are not those of colonial, but rather of new, post-colonial orders. It is useful to consider Johannes Fabian’s argument that Mead is the first to signal the end of the ethnographic past, and an ethnography of the future. Mead herself argues that “Few anthropologists write for the people they study,” a problem she seeks to rectify. She goes on to elaborate that she is no longer interested in those topics obsessing most anthropologists in the 1920s to 40s, when she came of age as an ethnographer studying “the past, the ‘ethnographic present,’ or the actual present” (The World Ahead 6).
       

      Works Cited

         

       

      • Ash, Mitchell. Gestalt Psychology in German Culture, 1890-1967: Holism and the Quest for Objectivity. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1998. Print.
      • Bateson, Gregory. Naven: A Survey of the Problems Suggested by a Composite Picture of the Culture of a New Guinea Tribe Drawn From Three Points of View. 2nd ed. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1958. Print.
      • —. Steps to an Ecology of Mind: Collected Essays in Anthropology, Psychiatry, Evolution, and Epistemology. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2000. Print.
      • —. “Bali: The Value System of the Steady State.” Steps to an Ecology of the Mind. 107-127. Print.
      • —. Letter to Norbert Wiener, September 22, 1952. Norbert Wiener Papers, MC 22, box 10, Folder 155. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Institute Archives and Special Collections, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Print.
      • —. and Margaret Mead. Balinese Character: A Photographic Analysis. New York: New York Academy of Sciences, 1942. Print.
      • —. and Jurgen Ruesch. Communication: The Social Matrix of Psychiatry. New Brunswick: Transaction Publishers, 2008. Print.
      • Bergson, Henri. Matter and Memory. Trans. Nancy Margaret Paul and W. Scott Palmer. New York: Zone Books, 1991. Print.
      • Butler, Alison. “‘Motor-Driven Metaphysics:’ Movement, Time and Action in the Films of Maya Deren.” Screen 48.1 (2007): 1-23. Web. 1 Aug. 2010.
      • Crary, Jonathan. Suspensions of Perception: Attention, Spectacle, and Modern Culture. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2001. Print.
      • Daston, Lorraine and Peter Galison. Objectivity.. New York: Zone Books, 2007. Print.
      • Deleuze, Gilles. Cinema 1: The Movement-Image. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2001. Print.
      • —. Cinema 2: The Time-Image. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Robert Galeta. Minneapolis: U of Minneapolis P, 2003. Print.
      • Deren, Maya. “From the Notebook of Maya Deren, 1947.” October Volume 14 (1980): 21-46. Web. 1 Aug. 2010.
      • —. “An Anagram of Ideas on Art, Form, and Film.” 1946. Rpt. in Maya Deren and the American Avant-Garde. Ed. Bill Nichols. Berkeley: U of California P, 2001. 267-322. Print.
      • —. Handwritten Notes from Lectures-Gestalt Psychology with Kurt Koffka, September 1938, Maya Deren Papers, box 7, Folder 5. Boston University, Howard Gottlieb Archive, Special Collections, Boston. Print.
      • —. “Climate of Communication.” 1946-47. Deren Collection, box 4, Folder 1. Boston University Howard Gottlieb Archive, Special Collections. Boston. Print.
      • —. “Choreography for the Camera.” Dance Magazine October (1945). In The Legend of Maya Deren. 265-67. Print.
      • —. The Legend of Maya Deren: A Documentary Biography and Collected Works. Volume I, Part II, Chambers (1942-47).. Ed. Vèvè Clark, Millicent Hodson, and Catrina Neiman. New York: Anthology Film Archives, 1988. Print.
      • —. “Ritual in Transfigured Time.” Essential Deren: Collected Writings on Film. Ed. Bruce McPherson. New York: Documentext, 2005. 225-228. Print.
      • —. “Interview with Talley Beatty, February 22, 1977” in The Legend of Maya Deren. 280-281. Print.
      • —. “Cinema as an Art Form.” Essential Deren: Collected Writings on Film. Ed. Bruce McPherson. New York: Documentext, 2005. 19-34. Print.
      • —. “Pre-production Notes, N.D., undated, typed.” The Legend of Maya Deren. 453. Print.
      • Doane, Mary Ann. The Emergence of Cinematic Time: Modernity, Contingency, the Archive. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2002. Print.
      • Fabian, Johannes. Time and the Other: How Anthropology Makes Its Object. New York: Columbia UP, 2002. Print.
      • Goodwin, James C. Annotated Readings in the History of Modern Psychology. New York: Wiley, 2010. Print.
      • Green, Chris. “Introduction to: ‘Perception: An Introduction to the Gestalt-Theorie‘ by Kurt Koffka (1922).” Classics in the History of Psychology. Web. 15th Jan. 2008.
      • Hacking, Ian. The Taming of Chance. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1990. Print.
      • Harrington, Anne. Reenchanted Science: Holism in German Culture from Wilhelm II to Hitler. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1996. Print.
      • Haslem, Wendy. “Maya Deren: The High Priestess of Experimental Cinema” Senses of Cinema. November 2002. Web. 22 Mar. 2006.
      • Holl, Ute. “Moving the Dancer’s Soul.” Maya Deren and the American Avant-Garde. Ed. Bill Nichols. Berkeley: U of California P, 2001. 151-206. Print.
      • Koffka, Kurt. Principles of Gestalt Psychology. London: Harcourt, 1936. Print.
      • Köhler, Wolfgang. Gestalt Psychology: An Introduction to New Concepts in Modern Psychology, New York: Liveright Publishing Corporation, 1947. Print.
      • Koselleck, Reinhart. Futures Past: On the Semantics of Historical Time. Trans. Keith Tribe. New York: Columbia UP, 2004. Print.
      • Lim, Bliss Cua. Translating Time: Cinema, The Fantastic, and Temporal Critique. Durham: Duke UP, 2009. Print.
      • Lippold, Richard. “Dance and Film: A Review in the Form of A Reflection.” Dance Observer. 13.5 (1946). Rpt. in The Legend of Maya Deren: Volume I, Part II.. Print.
      • Mandler, George. A History of Modern Experimental Psychology: From James and Wundt to Cognitive Science. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2007. Print.
      • Morgenstern, Oskar and John von Neumann. Theory of Games and Economic Behavior. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1944. Print.
      • Mead, Margaret. The World Ahead: An Anthropologist Anticipates the Future. Ed. Robert B. Textor. New York: Berghahn Books, 2005. Print.
      • Meshes of the Afternoon. Dir. Maya Deren, Alexander Hammid. 1943. Maya Deren:Experimental Films. Mystic Fire Video, 2002. DVD.
      • Mirowski, Philip. Machine Dreams: Economics Becomes a Cyborg Science. Cambridge: U of Cambridge P, 2002. Print.
      • Neiman, Catrina, Art and Anthropology at the Crossroads. Spec. Issue of October Vol. 14 (1980): 3-15. Web. 1 Aug. 2010.
      • Ritual in Transfigured Time. Dir. Maya Deren. Perf. Rita Christiani, Maya Deren, Frank Westerbrook. 1946. Maya Deren: Experimental Films. Mystic Fire Video, 2002. DVD.
      • Schatz, Thomas. Boom and Bust: American Cinema in the 1940s. Vol. 6 History of the American Cinema Series. Ed. Charles Harpole. Berkeley: U of California P, 1999. Print.
      • A Study in Choreography for the Camera. Dir. Maya Deren. Maya Deren: Experimental Films. Mystic Fire Video, 2002. DVD.
      • Stoler, Ann Laura. Along The Archival Grain: Epistemic Anxieties And Colonial Commonsense. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2009. Print.

       

    • Romance in the Age of Cybernetic Conviviality: Hsia Yü’s Pink Noise and the Poetics of Postcolonial Translation

      Lili Hsieh (bio)
      National Central University, Taiwan
      Lili.hsieh@gmail.com

      Abstract
       
      In 2007, acclaimed Taiwanese postmodern poet Hsia Yü published a transparent book of bilingual poems generated mostly from weblogs (in English) and from a computer translation program (in Chinese). The book, Pink Noise (now available on Amazon), has ignited enthusiastic responses among Hsia Yü’s “lay readers” in Taiwan, but like many other postmodernist works from a postcolonial context, has not yet received much critical attention. The essay begins with the question of locating or localizing Hsia Yü’s postmodernism in postcolonial, post-Martial-Law Taiwan, reading the form of layered transparency and the play with (artificial) language and (machinic) translation not as a free play of signifiers or equivalent of concrete or conceptual art but as a realistic representation of digital (uneven) globalization. Reading Hsia Yü’s bilingual poems closely through Lacan’s theory of alienation and Wittgenstein’s ideas on nonsense, the essay shows that the English/Weblish and the Chinese/Translationese can be read as different kinds of language games which are signposts to the questions concerning the status of English as a global language, the loss and love of translation in a postcolonial context, the return from narratology to a musicology of poetry, and the tremendously rich “nonsense” that happens when two heterogeneous and disparagingly hegemonic national languages meet. In conclusion, Pink Noise, unlike modernism with its implicit claim to whiteness, trans-lates negative dialogics into a convivial romance of poetry.
       

       

      All I ask is that you remember me in the good times we had… Keep me close to your heart… Friends forever.
       
      Pass this on to all your friends… If I get it back… I know you care.
       
      (To a very special friend I have made on here.)
       

      – Facebook spam

       

      Remember that great love and great achievements involve great risk. Do not keep this message.
       

      — Hsia Yü, Pink Noise

       
      In Taiwan, a perfectly faked LV bag hits the night markets before its original copy is officially launched in flagship stores. If a fake LV product cannot be easily equated with postmodern kitsch, as critic Chang Hsiao-hung points out, it also defies analysis as postcolonial mimesis. Chang argues that the fakery of the “digital copy,” instead of being the antithesis of the “official/original” product, marks the multilayered cultural transference that translates the two global/imperial forces–“European superlogos, Japanese nostalgia”–into a decentralizing force that implodes globalization from within (227). Interestingly, in the course of Chang’s analysis, theory itself becomes the “European superlogo” that can be appropriated or counterfeited, as she aptly “translates” Derrida’s “logocentrism” into “glogocentrism” (the “glocalization” of western logos) and his “dissemination” into “fake dissemi-Nation” (the decentralizing force of the fake). Because translation is fundamentally the primal scene of such affective transference–of love–in the age of global connectivity, it can no longer be written off as a para-narrative, the mirror discourse that privileges the original; rather, through the “fake dissemination” of translation, western imports, ideas, and ideals–such as postmodernism–get a new life in the age of post-national and posthuman global deterritorialization.
       
      The long-standing criticism of Hsia Yü,1 Taiwan’s most renowned postmodern poet since her self-published poetry collection Memoranda (備忘錄) in 1984, therefore needs to be rethought in a framework of critical comparativism that does not end with a celebration of her so-called “endless relays of signifiers and signifiers” as the emblem of Taiwan’s postmodernism (Lin 135), but instead takes postmodernism as an object of translation to investigate the process of re-lating and trans-lating as the primal scene of cultural transference.2
       
      Such is the promise of the new collection, Pink Noise/粉紅色噪音,a transparent book of English/French poems, drawn largely from the Internet, together with Chinese “translations.” The book is made (manually!) of transparencies, challenging the hegemony of print culture–a design that allegorizes the role of the Internet in contemporary culture. There are thirty-two English poems and one French poem, each with a Chinese “translation.” The book’s language is at first glance that of (post-)modernist defamiliarization, radicalized by its ostensibly parallel poems. Yet both the English/French “originals” (printed in black) and their Chinese “translations” (in pink) are counterfeits: the Western poems are patchworks of lines drawn from a host of sources–from blogs, ads, websites, spam emails, and Baudelaire poems–while the Chinese poems are machinic translations done “mindlessly” by the computer program, Sherlock. In its unique form and with its primary medium of the Machine, Pink Noise seems to shout out postmodernism, as many of Hsia Yü’s fans immediately propose. Their exclusive attention to the formal aspect of the book is understandable; after all, both of Hsia Yü’s previous works, Ventriloquy (腹語術; 1991) and •Rub•Ineffable (●摩擦●無以名狀; 1995), deal with the “materiality of language,” with the former featuring invented Chinese characters, further radicalized by the latter’s “remix” of sentences fragmented and re-assembled from the former. Yet I want to argue that we can read the form and narrative of Pink Noise as the realistic representations of the transformed and transforming public sphere of cybernetic conviviality. Not only is the Machine doubled in this work, but it also doubles the dialectics of two languages into a poetic of translation–a dialogic of love. Hsia Yü makes the Western poems by sending sentences drawn from different sources repeatedly to “Sherlock” until a Chinese translation passes as poetry. The title of poem #25, “They’re back/ they’re sad/ they’re making a porn movie,” for example, is drawn from three different sources. In the collection, therefore, humanity meets/mates–instead of battles–with the Machine. The romantic overtone becomes the harbinger of interspecies and interlingual connections in general. In an interview, Hsia Yü explains that she was “listening to all these great noise and low-frequency acoustic art CDs, and wondering what would result if that concept were applied to words” when she accidentally bumped into the spam translation program.3 The ‘chance encounter,’ or rather, a fling, diverts the planned trajectory toward an unexpected destiny: the white noise that the author strives for turns pink. When Hsia Yü describes machinic translation as the “primal crime scene of a linguistic murder,” her tone is ecstatic: with “a rush of adrenalin,” the poet is dazzled, “stoned”–“it set my head whirling” (“Poetry Interrogation”). Smitten, Hsia proclaims that she has found the one-“Yes, this must be the word noise I’ve been looking for!” The color that translation brings to the white noise therefore also indicates an evolution (local adaptation?) of poetics that outgrows the obsession for a universal, atonal language in pursuit of minimalist purification, to a hybrid tongue of conviviality in the midst of the information revolution.
       
      The lyricism in this excessive romantic love with the translation machine returns us to the primary reference of the book: the Net. Pink Noise can be seen as a realistic representation of cyberspace because the web is not only the medium but also the form of the book itself, reflecting such cybernetic relationality: the paradoxical combination of layered shadows and transparency (see Fig. 1 below). Its narrative, too, from the seemingly chaotic chance selection (an oxymoron indeed), is astonishingly readable. More strikingly, generated from the machine are lines of sentimental narratives full of confessional accounts, despite constant glitches, incongruence, and compulsive repetitions. Put allegorically, aren’t the paradoxical and melodramatic colorings of Pink Noise a vivid representation of the romantic possibilities in the age of “digital (un)reason”? In this light, the postmodernism in Hsia Yü’s Pink Noise is not only a formalist play with signifiers but also a complex deep play with the problems of translation, trans-lationality, and cybernetic conviviality.
       

       
      Hsia Yü, Pink Noise, Image from Drunken Boat (Bradbury).  © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission of the author.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 1.

      Hsia Yü, Pink Noise, Image from Drunken Boat (Bradbury).

      © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission of the author.
       

       
      In what language can one speak of love in the age of the deterritorializing Machine? Or, to scale back, can we speak of love when the relationship between two languages juxtaposed seemingly in parallels is complicated by gaps, fractures, and glitches? At first sight, Pink Noise presents two national languages: the imperial language of English on the one hand, and the almost anachronistic translation into Chinese on the other. The semi-colonial relationship of the two languages also changes color as the collection turns to prioritize translation–the labor of love. The transformation from the artificial relation between a Western language and the machinic Chinese translation to a dialogic of love is indeed a masterful, poetic translation. In Pink Noise, schizophrenic bilingualism is turned into felicitous noises of romantic encounters (sometimes, “copulation”) whose language is only too familiar to us. In this essay, I begin with the dialogic of two languages to argue that although the juxtaposition of a global/imperial language and its “other” suggests that the context for this work is an postcolonial melancholia, to which Pink Noise obviously responds, the positive and joyful tone of Pink Noise also invites us to look beyond facile binarism to create a third space full of love and new possibilities. Such a process of becoming is translation par excellence. To read the schizophrenic languages of Pink Noise, therefore, one needs to begin with this third space and the process of becoming. Through the lens of translation, we can hear the Babel of global noises in a different way: the Chinese and the English/French here are, to borrow Bhabha’s formulation, almost “national (languages), but not quite.” Or, there is no Language and no bilateral relationship between two languages. In the web of heteroglossic noises, both the colonial and the other languages become the new possibilities–the being that is other than itself.
       

      I. Dialogic of Love: Weblish Meets Translationese

       
      Does one read in two languages?–Manuals, for example, often offer multiple languages, but we hardly go beyond the one that is most intimate to us. Therefore, when a poetry collection like Pink Noise professes to present parallel poems in two languages, we begin with caution lest we fall into the deceptive premise of likeness, analogy, and parallelism. On the one hand, randomly solicited lines from the modern monster of endless trivialities, the Internet, become these Western poems of melodramatic pseudo-narrative. On the other, the Chinese poems disrupt and complicate this melodramatic grand narrative of digital globalization. Pink Noise is both a parody of and commentary on the expansive virtual space that increasingly encloses the public sphere and encroaches on the untenable public-private divide–Taiwan boasts more than fifteen million Internet users, more than two thirds of its population (Wang). The promise of the book comes from such a bipolar parole: enacted by the crowdedness of words and the overlapping of letters and characters, the blurred signifiers as fetish objects become a ready metaphor of cybernetic relationality in which the speaking subject and her or his object, the enunciator and the addressee, or, the lover and the beloved, are constantly deterritorialized (Fig. 2).
       

       
      Pink Noise Table of Contents.  © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 2.

      Pink Noise Table of Contents.

      © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission.
       

       
      The book’s doubleness at the level of national languages is doubled again at the narrative level. A unique poetic emerges from its juxtaposition of the machine and the speaking subject. In contrast to the futurist hope for technocratic reason generally found in hypertext internet poetry, Pink Noise is almost old-fashioned in that it appears to be less interested in the technology than in the heterglossia of a common speech that the Net has the potentiality to offer. Much like T.S. Eliot’s intertextual and interpersonal referencing in The Waste Land, Pink Noise aims to “return [poetry] to common speech”: “Every revolution in poetry is apt to be . . . a return to common speech” (qtd in Perloff 29). In Pink Noise, the English poems are noticeably lucid, readable, and grammatical. That (partial) transparency paradoxically results from the practice of citations: each line in the English poems is a quotation, or a combination of quotations, mostly from anonymous online sources. The streaming of citations is no longer the modernist evolution from “Image,” “Word-Image” to Meta-language,” but can perhaps more properly be called a parody of ordinary English.4 The mundane moments one spends cruising the web are a “brokenhearted time,” as the first poem in the collection allegorically mourns/moans:
       

      How fucking creepy is that?
      So different and sweet
      A promise awaits us
      At the limits of the mystical love
      In the bright, shining, god-like glow
      If we must die
      We will need those rhyming skills
      Some people are born with
      Others develop

       
      Outside, sleet is falling
      And there’s a dull pain of festive hangover everywhere
      If we must die
      We can be comfortable ensconced at the center of an admiring crowd
      We’re too apathetic to stop
      To hold back the feeling
      That real life is happening somewhere else

       

       

      What are the rhyming skills, if not the “double-talk” that is both the online common speech and poetic simulacra of such everyday intercourse? The poetic “montage” in the second stanza–“Outside, sleet is falling/ And there’s a dull pain of festive hangover everywhere”–can be read as the fruit of such unique rhyming skills. The comic-tragic narrative of the poem creates a defamiliarizing effect that is at once banal and poetic.

       
      As in other Western poems in the collection, the tone of the poem is almost lyrical, its narrative almost linear and progressive, but not quite–there are gaps and glitches in the story the poem tries to tell. For example, how is the “promise” (line 3) which is “so different and sweet” (2), or the “mystical love” (4) each related to the “sleet” (10), the “festive hangover” (11) and “an admiring crowd” (14)? Does the poem conjure up a scene, a landscape, an imagery, or just a mood stereotypically attached to our impression of such-and-such a scene? If the poem is “about” the non-representable field of the virtual space, where do these amorphous, hazy and fragmented scenic or spatial references lead us? Our reading of the poem requires that we conceive of the text not as a representation of a distant scene or object but the Image itself. “In the sphere of the Virtual–of the digital, the computer, integral calculus–nothing is representable,” Jean Baudrillard writes. “It is not a ‘scene’, and there is neither distance nor a critical or aesthetic gaze: there is total immersion. . .” (77). Pink Noise‘s narrative is the product of such virtual reality. Our googlized brain is plugged to the text-image in such a way that the glitches and gaps in the poetic imagery no longer demand the vigorous decoding process we use when we are reading a symbolic or modernist poem. At the same time, the immanence is porous as “we” (line 16) constantly feel that “real life is happening somewhere else” (19). By making cyberspace the overarching referent, the assemblage of artificial sentences becomes a poem that arrogates a narrative, an Idea, an Image. If there are gaps and glitches in the narrative, they do not really disrupt its message as long as one reads the poem the way one browses the web. The “online streaming” is a simulacrum rather than the actual act of writing;5 its language is no longer English but netlish, weblish, or webonics. If such a language seems to be shadowy and parasitic, the poem does not show any anxiety or nostalgia for the missing origin. On the contrary, its ending suggests that the ambiguous in-between space allegorized by its uncanny parody of English is a “non-place”–a utopia— worth dwelling upon. In this way, the pseudo- or quasi-narrative of such poems reads like a commentary on the specific time-space of their unique production. What the citational practice in Pink Noise challenges is no longer the hegemonic powers of the original but the need for mediation between the seemingly incompatible ideas of transparency and depth, superficiality and palimpsestic textuality, and natural speech and its uncanny and often stigmatized other, translation.
       
      This allegorical grand narrative of the global culture of the information revolution is subverted by the introduction of a radically heterogeneous language–the Chinese “translation,” or Translationese. Let us look at the poem again, this time in its schizophrenic bilingual form:
       

      “Brokenhearted time and ordinary daily moment”

       
      How fucking creepy is that?
      So different and sweet
      A promise awaits us
      At the limits of the mystical love
      In the bright, shining, god-like glow
      If we must die

       

       
      We will need those rhyming skills
      Some people are born with
      Others develop

       

       
      Outside, sleet is falling
      And there’s a dull pain of festive hangover everywhere
      If we must die
      We can be comfortably ensconced at the center of an admiring crowd

       

       
      We’re too apathetic to stop
      To hold back the feeling
      That real life is happening somewhere else

       

       
      “令人心碎的時代和普通每日片刻"

       

       
      怎樣性交是蠕動那?
      是不同和甜
      承諾等待我們
      在神秘愛的限額
      在明亮,發光,似神的煥發
      如果我們必須死

       

       
      我們將需要那些押韻的技能
      某些人是出生與
      其它人顯現出

       

       
      外面,雨夾雪落
      並且有歡樂宿酒愚鈍的痛苦到處
      如果我們必須死
      我們可能舒適地被安置在
      敬佩的人群的中心
      我們太無動於衷以致於不能終止
      暫掛感覺
      真正的生命發生在其它的地方

       

       
      Readers ingrained in the sense-making of the English narrative will find the Chinese a complete loss in translation. There is no “loyalty to the original” to speak of, which is all the more striking because the collection makes a persistent claim for love and romance. The lack of fidelity also suggests that the sense of the Chinese poems lies elsewhere than at the semantic level, as the love of translation takes us beyond the scene of monogamous or nationalistic commitments. Translation is first and foremost a practice of becomings. Yet in the history of translingual practices in a postcolonial context, translation is indeed a schizophrenic process: On the one hand, it is wrought with struggles and ideological clashes–what to translate, and how, is obviously a matter of ideological choice rather than of accident.6 On the other, as is already made clear in Hsia Yü’s exuberant remarks on the “discovery” of the translating machine, a translation in a colonial context is a love-object that is at once alienating and defamiliarized as well as familiar and intimate. “The books that illuminated my youth were by and large translations,” Hsia Yü says (“Poetry Interrogation”). The sense of tenderness for the machine translation that Hsia Yü betrays in her remarks has its root in a cultural memory that is about to be subverted by the advent of the global digital culture. Translation, for postcolonial intellectuals, signifies a loss, but it is also an object of love, as Hsia Yü confesses: “I’ve always loved those sentences that are rendered with a clumsy fidelity, those adorably literal versions that are virtually indifferent to Chinese grammar (which reminds me of Nabokov, that extreme literalist), and all those second- and third-hand translations from Russian via English and Japanese and who knows what else” (“Poetry Interrogation”). Paradoxically, the “weird Chinese” rendered by translation has become a natural language for many intellectuals in Taiwan who grew up reading second-(or third- or even fourth-) hand, sometimes brutally truncated, translation.7 The machine is in this case not the culprit responsible for the disappearance of aura but a good object to which one cathects utopian hopes for breaking away from the throes of Martial Law and of traditional orthodoxy on the one hand, and for recreating new language of public discourse on the other (see Benjamin, “The Work of Art”).
       
      Although Pink Noise‘s Chinese is more fragmented, atonal and a- or anti-signifying, its signification should be located not at the linguistic level, whether syntactical or semantic, but in its affectivity–the structures of feelings that make such fragmented linguistic representation a lived reality. Surely a sentence like “並且有歡樂宿酒愚鈍的痛苦到處” (Google translator’s back translation reads: “And there are fun places around alcohol dull the pain of”) is defamiliarized, but it is at the same time intimate to (a certain class of) Chinese readers who have grown up part enlightened, part indoctrinated by reading Western culture via awkward Chinese translations. In this way, the Chinese translation becomes a language in its own right–Translationese.
       
      Like Latin, Translationese can be seen as a classed language circulated among the educated elites in the modern Chinese context. The translation of “fucking” into “性交” (sexual intercourse) and “creepy” into “蠕動” (crawling) are “luminous mistakes”: the comic effect is that the banality of everyday English is rendered into a pedantic, academic or jargony translation, and it has the benefit of speaking the truth that is so intimate to Taiwanese intellectuals–translation is never a neutral tool but a twisted bridge across linguistic hierarchies, a distorting mirror that reflects two cultures’ mutual misrecognition. Interestingly, in contrast to the more fluid translation of “dynamic equivalence” which is in vogue these days, the machine-generated translation anachronistically reflects the literal translation of 50s and 60s Taiwan, as readers of New Tide Series (Xinchao Wenku) of Zhiwen Publishing Company would readily recognize.8 The sense of defamiliarization in the Chinese poems of Pink Noise therefore has an historical as well as an aesthetic dimension. As much as readers are pained by the bad translations because they are too literal, the newness of (Western) thought is inseparable from the foreignness of the language. The literalness of the Chinese poems sends us back to the familiar love and loss in the translation. In contrast to the English poem’s command of narrative, the Chinese counterpart forces the reader to confront the materiality of the word itself, so much so that the sentence becomes a promiscuous carnival event of pornographic word-objects. Offering pure (bodily) senses by means of linguistic nonsense, the Chinese or Translationese sublates the “logonostalgia”–the nostalgia for authentic meaning–in the English poem. Looking back, it is not English or its “Enlightenment” that is the origin of these Chinese poems, but a schizophrenic syntactical disorder such as “怎樣性交是蠕動那?” (literally, “How sexual intercourse is crawling that?”) that becomes the primal scene of translation.
       
      Because Pink Noise turns translation into poetry, the question of whether the Chinese translation here fails, or what counts as a successful translation, becomes superfluous. On the level of trans-lingual practice, there are only uneven contrasts. Not only is the quasi-narrative of the English poems deconstructed by the incoherent, machine-generated Chinese translation, but surprisingly, in its radical dramatization and hyperbole (and we are, indeed, more hyperbolic or dramatic, both in the choice of words and in tone and gestures when speaking a foreign language), the Chinese poems also return us from a poetic obsessed with ideas (or ideologies) to the sound and materiality of poetic language. Attending to the sounds, it is intriguing that it is the Western language that is the “natural speech” while Chinese becomes the foreign and hyperbolic–the embodiment of the idea of the poetic per se.9 Does the logical reversal become a political rebel that interpellates Hsia Yü to compose the bilingual poems in this collection?–It is, after all, the hazardous Chinese translation that excites Hsia Yü to “write” Pink Noise in the first place.10 Perhaps, as I suggest above, it is because translation like this exists in the cultural memory and is therefore loved as a lost object of love; or, perhaps the hyperbolic and radically fragmented Chinese is potentially more poetic because modern (i.e., vernacular, free-versed) Chinese poetry has often been presumed a foreign import.
       
      In any case, the attempt to close-read the Chinese poems runs into stumbling blocks because no narrative holds up despite the richness of its poetic fragments. Even the commonplace enough title of the poem, “I am an expert in nothing,” for example, becomes a syntactical disorder–“我是關於沒有什麼的一位專家,” or “I’m not an expert on the,” according to the Google translator. The entire poem reads:
       

      English

       
      Yes, please send me a biweekly
      Newsletter filled with diets
      Workouts and weight loss
      Secrets, yes, please send me
      Special offers, promotions
      Coupons and free
      Samples from the sponsors
      Yes, I’ll answer the questions below
      To determine my eligibility for this
      Study, if I’m not searching
      For myself I’ll answer these questions
      On behalf of the person
      For whom I’m searching
      All information that I enter will remain
      Private, I’ll want to give it time
      To brew
      Yes, technology
      Is a beautiful thing
       

      Chinese11

       
      是,請寄發我雙週
      時事通訊被裝載飲食
      鍛鍊和減重
      祕密,是,請寄發我
      特價優待,促銷
      樣品從贊助商
      樣品從贊助商
      是,我將答覆問題如下
      確定我的適用性為這項
      研究,如果我不尋找
      我自己我將答覆這些問題
      代表人員
      我尋找
      所有資訊我進入將保留
      專用,我將要想給它時刻
      釀造
      是,技術
      是一件美好的事

       

       

      On the level of cross-cultural or trans-lingual contrasts, the poem turns the materiality of language into the construction of historicity. While the English poem seems to evoke Molly Bloom’s monologue from the end of Ulysses and so implicitly coalesces the modern world of commercialization with pornographic female sexuality, the Chinese translation turns the respiratory exclamation into rhythmic breaks. The question–“How does one read senseless translation as poetry?”–could be extremely suggestive as it relentlessly demands that readers ask: On what criteria does Hsia Yü make her choice of words and sentences (in Chinese)? The distortion of syntax in this case is not so much designed to stimulate multiple significations as to foreground each semantic segment in a way that gives primacy to their sound and rhythmic properties. In written and vernacular forms, Chinese language is more collagiste than layered, as words are made of characters that can be combined in a patchwork manner. In contrast to the linear structure of Western languages like English, in Chinese semantic segments hinge on each other relatively loosely, not as a chain but as a chess board, so that to read Chinese is like “perceiving” a picture–one has to take its totality in at once. The Chinese poem of “I am an expert in nothing” interestingly shifts the reader’s focus from a linear and transparent semantics to a kind of musicology of the Chinese language: because of the distortion, one is compelled to read the patched-together, unlayered Chinese sentences differently, accentuating the rhythmic variation in the length of each segment, which is roughly repeated at the sentence (vertical) level of the poem–wo-shi(我是)●
      kuan-yu(關於)●meiyo-sheme(沒有什麼)● di(的)● yiwei-zhuanjia (一位專家). On the vertical level, although the poem consists of only one stanza, its structure can be broken up into five parts, each opening with an exclamation, “yes” (是), except the second part, which only has one line, where the “yes” is planted in the middle.12 Read as playing with rhythm and musicology, the Chinese poem’s asignifying aspect turns the dominant and hegemonic reading of modern poetry (both in Chinese and in English) around. While critics are drawn increasingly to read the idea, ideology, and narrative of modern poetry, the rendering nonsensical paradoxically returns poetry to primal musicology. The joy of the dance of the tongue rebels against the clichés of lack of meaning or of originality. Perhaps, because this machinic translation gives poetry new life by detaching us from the tyranny of meaning to approximate the dynamism of sounds and rhythm–as one line of the previously quoted poem reads, “We will need those rhyming skills”–here in reading Pink Noise we find our poetic endeavors to be completely saturated with infatuation, romance, and love.

       
      Spinning the two national languages around into a dialogic of love, Pink Noise does not fall into facile binary oppositions. Instead, the contrast of the two constantly spins to become something new. This new third space, therefore, points us to the conjoining middle, the knot that weaves together the two seemingly opposite ends. The poetic of translation in Pink Noise suggests that one should not reduce the power of interpellation to brain-washing, for it is through the gradual process of incorporating the uncanny, monstrous, alien object and the affective investment, from frustration to tender feeling of intimacy, that the otherwise provincialized subject can be de-/re-territorialized and become open to the hailing of a foreign voice. Here, the positive, constructive potentialities of translation as differential supplements overwrite the (post-)modernist play of opacity and indeterminacy: it is less interesting to try to decipher these arcane and absurd constructions of the sentence than to contrast the two languages in order to be shocked by translation’s power to produce, the power of becoming. This suggests that the point of departure of the book is none other than the middle ground of conjoining, intersection, and fusion. The two languages are thrown there to evoke the eerie third space which is neither the so-called “source text” nor the “target language” but the shadowy middle where the chance encounter–or the flip side of it, the pornography–takes place (Fig. 3):
       

       
      Dialogic of Love13

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 3.

      Dialogic of Love13

       

       
      Let us look at the poem, “Brokenhearted time and ordinary daily moment” again, this time turning to its additional third dimension. Its seemingly binary structure calls for an absent third, not written in either language but allegorically forged in the virtual space where the two languages felicitously “copulate”:
       

      English Original

       
      How fucking creepy is that?
      So different and sweet
      A promise awaits us
      At the limits of the mystical love
       

      Original Translation

       
      怎樣的性交是蠕動那?
      很不同和甜
      承諾等候我們
      在神祕愛的限額
       

      Back Translation

       
      How is sexual intercourse crawling?
      Very different and sweet
      Promises await us
      at the credit limit of the mystical love
      14

       

      The reading of these bilingual poems is hardly a “loss in translation.” The first stanza of the poem demonstrates a dynamic difference: while the English part reads like a romantic narrative, the Chinese “equivalent” has a pornographic feel, properly spiced with machinic apathy, as if sense and sensuality, love and lust, or cheesy pathos and industrial indifference were only two sides of the same coin. These contradictory flavors turn out to be a great mix. When “the limit of mythical love” becomes the “credit limit,” it is as if love in a hyper-mechanic society becomes a product for purchase–who is to say that the “bad translation” does not mean what it says? That the signifier is blissfully ignorant of its signified, when “love” (in English) is conveniently translated as “sex” (in Chinese)?

       
      It is of course perverse to find a pornography of sense in the dialogic of two languages, but perhaps it is the perversity of imperial/global bilingualism that Pink Noise audaciously brings us that calls for such a perverse process of signification. This is also to suggest that central to the project of Pink Noise is a kind of significant nonsense. In the sense that the English poems parody the nonsensicalness of on-line and everyday small talk, and that the Chinese counterparts embody the obscurantism of an imported language, Pink Noise critiques such nonsense by mimicking, repeating or becoming that nonsense per se.15 In the following, I want to suggest two different but mutually constructive ways to read such nonsense. In Lacanian psychoanalysis, nonsense lies precisely at the productive voided center of transference/translation. While the romantic undertone of Pink Noise begs the questions of objecthood and relationality, I suggest that nonsense here also points to the common sense of the virtual multitude and to the connectivity that Pink Noise comes to represent. To reexamine the dialogic of two languages, I turn to psychoanalysis to ask: If translation emerges from nonsense, what is the object of translation that delivers us the sense and signification? If the object in psychoanalysis is marked by signs of irretrievable loss, what, then, accounts for the joyous celebration of translation that raises nonsense to the dignity of poetry in Pink Noise?
       

      II. The Alienation of Virtual Nonsense: From Lack to Love

       
      The relationship between the original poem and its translation is similar to that of the Subject and its Other, or Being and Meaning, as in Lacan’s graph of alienation.16 In Lacan’s structure, the supposed reciprocity between the Subject and the Other, or the one-to-one correspondence between Being and Meaning, collapses into non-meaning in the confrontation between the two opposites. The signification of the poems in Pink Noise emerges neither from the English/Netlish, nor from the Chinese/Translationese, but from the “non-meaning” or “nonsense” of the third space, which is the field of translation par excellence.
       
      I turn to Lacan’s psychoanalysis in the reading of Pink Noise because it is often too easy to espouse poetic nonsense playfully and to bypass an interpretation of the signification of nonsense. Lacan’s insistence on a “singular interpretation,” i.e., the psychoanalytic interpretation, can be helpful if we want to read beyond the anarchism of signifiers and nihilism of meanings. Psychoanalysts constantly need to wrestle with the meaning of nonsensical slips or inconsistencies. As Lacan’s famous example–“Your money or your life?”–shows, although the choice suggested by the “or” here is absurd (so the meaning of the sentence collapses), it is false to conclude that the dissymmetry and lack of reciprocity between the two parts of the sentence entails the nihilism of meanings per se, or conversely, that interpretation is open to all meanings. Lacan insists that there is one interpretation: “[i]nterpretation is a signification that is not just any signification. . . . It has the effect of bringing out an irreducible signifier” (250; emphasis added). Although this is not the place to enter Lacan’s complicated elaborations on the “irreducible signifier” (in Seminar XVII), I bring up Lacan’s unique sense of “interpretation” to caution against a rushed universal theory that celebrates the liberation of meanings, which lands us in what Lacan might call the university discourse (see The Other Side of Psychoanalysis).17 Indeed, the master signifier, while still situated in the analysand’s speech, generates a web of desire-production so that the interpretation of its meaning is never a passive decoding of symbols which supposedly can run wild but, as Freud puts it, a matter of construction (see “Constructions in Analysis”). Interestingly, Lacan describes such an interpretation or construction as a process of translation: “this ongoing translation of an unconscious that is first of all the unconscious of the other” (Transference XIII: 3).18 Translation for Lacan has to do with interpreting the irreducible signifier on which is founded the dialectics of the desire of the other.
       
      In Lacan’s topography of alienation, a revision of his theory of the mirror stage, the relationship between Subject and Other, or Being and Meaning, breaks away from what he calls the “prescientific truth” or imaginary meaning which is founded on fantasies of wholesomeness. Instead of harmony, we have discordance at the heart of psychoanalytic truth; instead of the whole, the hole; and, as the graphs evolve in later Lacan, instead of signifiers, objet a–the object-cause of desire. The centralization of nonsense is significant in that, out of the conjoining/intersecting middle of the two separate entities whose relationship is marked by dissymmetry and lack of reciprocity, there emerges not the Subject nor the Object but objet a, which becomes the anchoring point of signification.19 In terms of cross-cultural translation, the virtual/psychic space of objet a arises particularly when the dissymmetries between two linguistic systems are marked: non-signal noises, nonsense, slips, blunders, inconsistencies and the like. The third space which Lacan calls transference-love is therefore the space of (un-)translatability. When Walter Benjamin explains that “The word Brot and pain ‘intend’ the same object, but the modes of this intention are not the same,” (“The Task” 105), or when George Steiner asks, “labor we may, bread will never wholly translate pain. What, in English, French or Italian is Heimat?” (152), or to return to the Taiwanese context, when one evokes the opposition between yams and taros, we are reminded that a faithful translation is only a fantasy. To the extent that the aromas of Brot, cheese, yam, taro and das Heimat (home) are untranslatable, or that their translation is sustained by non-meaning, the “thickness” of the characters in the Chinese translation is perhaps the most effective representation of trans-lational (instead of relational) desire: this is an age whose virtual reality is a bilingualism or heterglossia from which one cannot escape but to which one can never fully belong.
       
      Bruce Fink extrapolates Lacan’s graph of Subject and Other into the dialogic of jouissance. As long as Lacan’s topography of alienation is a reformulation of the Cartesian subject, there are two subjects in Lacan: the subject of signifier and the subject of jouissance. On the other hand, as later Lacan puts a greater emphasis on the subject of jouissance, interpretation also gravitates towards the other jouissance, the excess, or the beyond of phallic jouissance. In other words, signification becomes saturated with sexuation. To translate: meaning in the pre-psychoanalytic discourse has always involved the fantasy of harmony, the most primal form of which is the harmonious copulation of the Mind and the Body. The psychoanalytic interpretation has to go beyond such an imaginary, fantastic, or “pornographic” signification to foreground the discordance, the “hole,” the “falling out” that takes us toward the other jouissance. Fink suggests that the most we can say about such other jouissance is that “it corresponds to ‘making love,’ as opposed to sexual intercourse,” which, according to Fink’s reading of Lacan’s Seminar XX, is “akin to poetry” (Lacan to the Letter 162). Fink’s remark, bringing together love and poetry with the same stroke to antagonize love and sex, offers an interesting perspective from which to read Pink Noise‘s love for two languages. Central to the psychoanalytic interpretation is the jouissance that results from the encounter of two languages–or, in Samuel Huntington’s polemic terms, the “clash of civilizations.” As formulated in Lacan’s graph, the two languages are also structured in a way that the (lack of) relationship (or relationship) between the bipartite entities revolves around the middle, the third space: the non-meaning, nonsense, the place of the objet a (in Lacan), or of pink noise (in Hsia Yü). For psychoanalysis, however, jouissance is the Doppelgänger of lack. As Fink puts it, the other jouissance has its most common manifestation in jealousy, or jalouissance (jealouissance) (Lacan to the Letter 146): Someone must be enjoying themselves more than I am or, as Žižek elaborates in “Enjoying Your Nation as Yourself,” this other jouissance is the fuel of paranoid nationalism and homophobia against our national or racial others, who we believe to be stealing our enjoyment because they have other enjoyments that we do not know of or have (201-211).
       
      Indeed, in reading Pink Noise there is a sense that something is left out by the juxtaposition of the two languages: on the one hand, the nonsense in the collage of banal prose of the foreign language; on the other, the non-meaning in the obscure, lofty and stuffy translation. The jouissance in the Chinese and Anglophone readers’ celebratory reception of Pink Noise disguises such lack, a unique sense of failure that a reader of two empowered languages is destined to encounter: both Chinese and Anglophone readers read the form of bilingualism without reading its two languages.20 It is as if the poems become the object or object-cause which is the book itself; as one of the poems says, “words fail me,” which in Chinese becomes “words do not pass/penetrate me” (詞未通過我). With the poetry of the poem lost to the jouissance of the form, Pink Noise is either “degraded” to a coffee table item, or “upheld” as a modern Bauhaus-/Ikea-brand object.21
       
      In the last graph of the other jouissance, what drops out of the encounter of two jouissances can be construed as the soul of the poem, which takes the place of nonsense/non-meaning/sweet-nothings in the dialogic of love. I think this is where the encounter between Pink Noise and psychoanalysis could take us, to the other reality of the (social) virtual. While the psychoanalytic dialectic problematizes the nostalgia for origins, its emphasis on lack is eerily nostalgic. Does the same lingering nostalgia lurk in the spectacular artifice of Pink Noise? Does it propose that a soul falls away from the book’s virtual noises? My reading of Pink Noise is that although the book departs from lack, its promise is also to work against such negativity: the promise of poetry is exactly to translate lack into love, or, in Toni Morrison’s words, into “thick love.” In the following paragraphs, I return to Pink Noise to engage its other dimension, beyond the negativity of lack: the immanent virtuality of the Net as the transforming and transformative public sphere, and the positive reading of becoming “one” (with a lower case “o”) the Net’s multitude makes possible.
       

      IV. Virtually Social: The Uneven Contrast of Critical Comparativism

       
      In Interventions into Modernist Cultures (2007), Amie Elizabeth Parry reads Hsia Yü’s “underground poetry” to underscore the “workings of neo-colonial knowledge formations” in Hsia Yü’s “microstructures of the everyday” (81). Implicitly addressing the two prevailing interpretations of Hsia Yü’s poetry as postmodern (in Lin Yaode, Meng Fang, and others) and feminist (in Michelle Yeh, Liao Hsian-Hao, Jian Chengjen and many others), Parry sees Hsia Yü’s play with romantic themes and seemingly apolitical fantasy (of air travel, in “Leaving in a Jet Plane,” for example) as gestures of refusal to participate in the discursification of heteronormative sexual morality in the post-Martial Law era on the one hand, and as challenging the seamless account of (Western) modernity as a borderless (united) state on the other.22
       
      If, as Parry suggests, Hsia Yü’s lyricism pretends to rebel reticently against the uneven developments of modernity as experienced in a neo-colonial locale like Taiwan, then Pink Noise can be read as further literalization of the transformation of the public sphere in the global empire of English, and of the flattening power of global capitalism. In a way, the two different narrative modes of the two languages opens up precisely such an alternative space, a space of the “reticent rebel”: the English poems are amazingly readable and have a coherent narrative, in contrast to the Chinese poems, which radiate with poetic epiphanies here and there but whose poetic effects are co-dependent on the radical syntactic jolts that prevent the poems from forming coherent narratives. Yet, instead of reticence, silence, or lack, in Pink Noise these contrasts also bring up something: the noises. Noises, I argue, are not nothing: they are, in the words of social psychologists Jean Twenge and W. Keith Campbell, the screen, as in Freud’s “screen memory,” of meaningful “signals” (Twenge and Campbell 118).23
       
      So in the poem, “Then, I will realize that it’s really bad or….,” we find colors at the heart of “(uneven) contrast”:
       

      Seduced by flowers
      She’s not afraid to be bold when
      It comes to decorating
      “I have this green hutch, from Romania
      Late 1800s,” she says. “It’s a great antique piece
      It’s a great color, a very bright green
      The doors are held together by bent nails. It’s
      Fabulous. I have eclectic tastes.
      Nothing really goes but it works.”
       

      “I have this cobalt blue vase, probably a foot
      And a half tall,” she says
      “It’s my favorite color and it’s my
      Favorite piece
      We registered for it for my wedding
      And I got it
      Right now it’s in the foyer when you walk in. My favorite
      Thing is to put intense, colored flowers
      Red or orange, in it for
      The Contrast.”

       

      While speaking of the “contrast”–one can understand it in light of Parry’s “critical comparativism”–the poem quickly turns to deconstruct itself, for underlying the contrast there seems to be only nothing. In the poem, a female character is engaged in the mundane activity of decorating something with a flower arrangement. As if to comment on the role of poetry caught in consumerist culture between the lofty “high” art of poetry and the “low” of popular decoration, the poem allegorically asserts that the frivolous and inconsequential–colors, tastes, small objects–are only posited “for contrast.” Although the sentences make grammatical sense, at the same time because of the lack of a meaningful event or action, the poem seems to be about nothing, or nothing but the “intangible things” such as colors or contrasts. “Nothing really goes but it works”–colors are also the intangible something begotten from nothing, as the intangible Internet generates the poems in Pink Noise.

       
      The rhetoric of the everyday not only serves as the “uneven contrast” of (colonial) modernity; implicitly, it also brings up the larger social context of virtuality qua sociality. Like the deployment of the everyday (and potentially philosophical) word “nothing” which surfaces in many poems in the collection, the overflowing adjectives, often expressive of emotions, are the “bright” and “fabulous” colors that double-talk or, as Lacan puts it, “half-talk” (mi-dit) between something and nothing:24 they seem to be metaphorical of the inhuman or posthuman connections on the Net which are “Exotic, hypnotic… metaphorical” (Poem #16) but that are too mundane and trivial to be worth poetic breath. Poem #19, “Discover how well her passions mesh” begins with: “This is a stupid document/ It is meaningless drivel.” The meshing of “passions” and a “stupid document” describes the new relationality–or translationality–of the Internet age: the impersonal yet intimate connectivity that is no longer mediated through a third term. By alluding to cyber-reality, the poem runs an “integrated circuit” and becomes self-referential (Baudrillard 79). The poet seems to mock her own creation when the poem continues: “That she does not expect any of the several billion people on her planet to/Actually read,” but to this point the partisanship of the English/Weblish poem no longer satisfies us–we read on to its Chinese/Translationese doublet, only to find that the meaning of “an unending series of unsatisfying compromises” has become its opposite, “不滿意妥協無止境的系列” (not satisfied with the compromises [of] an unending series). The (English) poem ends with a pseudo-philosophical/pop-psychology quest for insight with which to “get past” the “wild and flashy exterior” to “what’s actually on the inside.” But the mirroring of the English and the Chinese can hardly sustain such a binary opposition. There is no telling when the back-and-forth movement between the two languages would produce peculiar “contrasts” that invite “(reticent) rebels,” but it is clear that out of the mundane “nothing(ness),” we get something. Maybe just the flowers. Maybe not even anything as substantial as flowers. Maybe what we get and what the contrast has to offer is only the blue, the orange, the pink–the flood of everyday, inconsequential decoratives–that describe the insubstantial (non-)being in the virtual multitude of our new social reality.
       
      With this, let me return to the poem, “I am an expert in nothing.” I have demonstrated that the English and Chinese poems call for different reading practices; the contrast between them produces the historicity that is embedded in both the colonial past and the virtual present of (mechanic) translation/becoming. Paying attention to the poem’s Weblish, this time I show that, the sense of loss notwithstanding, there is a new object in the poem and in Pink Noise as a whole. The object is precisely the “stupid and meaningless document” of the Internet. In this poem, we learn that the expert–“I,” as in “i-Expert”–masters the nothingness of the secrets and private information found in “biweekly newsletters filled with diets/ Workouts and weight loss.” To whom does he/she owe the pleasure? To none other than the new technology of the Internet–“Yes, technology/Is a beautiful thing.” Remember that the English poems are in fact written in a second-hand language, first a semi-colonial language and then one that is relayed, indirect speech of anonymous quotations. The romance with technology is double-edged: as the discourse of (Western) modernity, it is flat, smooth, and has a coherent (although banal) narrative; at the same time, it is also striated, porous, and prone to self-destruction. The end of the poem, on the other hand, points to new species of love and to another dimension of the social that has always been in the background of Pink Noise: ever-expanding virtual space and artificial intelligence. Indeed, technology is a beautiful thing.
       
      The collection’s twinning of new-agey romance with online connection challenges us to reconsider whether psychoanalysis and postcolonial studies remain the most helpful models for reading objecthood and relationality now. Is there a Subject behind or produced by the “shadowy colors” or “virtual buzzes”? Are the poems parables of love in the age of cybernetic connectivity, which radicalizes and problematizes the already perilous romantic terrain so that love becomes its opposite–the monist autoerotism of the self-indulgence of the subject and the annihilation of the object? From a Lacanian perspective, psychic reality relies on lack that introduces the Symbolic Order, but in the computer, as Žižek explains it, “virtuality, in the sense of symbolic fiction,” collapses (“Civil Society” 43). For Žižek, the Net disrupts the panoptic function of the Symbolic, and that is what constitutes its psychic threat. There is an intriguing slide in Žižek’s account from the psychic virtual to the social virtual, both of which are upheld in the metaphor of the panopticon. Žižek’s psychoanalytic interpretation of the virtual/social implies that the VR of the computer is the disorder of power, which leads simultaneously to the crumbling of the sexual, the fantastical and the psychic.
       
      It is interesting to return from Žižek’s argument about lack and negativity to the yes-saying of the poem, “I am an expert in nothing.” The poem’s tone, which is remarkably lacking in resistance, brings up and ties together two aspects of the psychoanalytic virtual: the fantasy of sexual talk and the submission to the gaze of the panopticon, both of which Žižek thinks support sexual relations. Read in this light, the second person narrative of the poem as well as the explicit references to commercialization are poignant: it is as if Molly Bloom is shouting yes to the corporate industry behind the ads and getting tremendous enjoyment from it. While entertaining Hsia Yü’s ingenious mise en scène of the personal and the social, as well as of the sexual and the commercial, it becomes increasingly unsettling to read the ending of the poem, “Yes, technology/ Is a beautiful thing,” as ironic. Moreover, while a Lacanian interpretation of virtuality presupposes a “double consciousness,” a critical split that allows the subject (or subject, the barred subject) to reflect on its formation, both identity and subjectivity have a different feel through the intimate second person narrative. The “I” as well as the addressed “you” are not identified, therefore non-discrete and un-singular. While most hidden stanzas are prompted by “yes,” it is also interesting to note some exceptions: secrets in lines 5 to 8 (“Secrets, yes, please send me/Special offers, promotions/Coupons and free/samples from the sponsors”) study in lines 10 to 14 (“Study, if I’m not searching/ For myself I’ll answer these questions/On behalf on the person/For whom I’m searching”), and private in lines 15 and 16 (“Private, I’ll want to give it time/To brew”). Then the poem returns to the “yes” narrative and ends with “Yes, technology/Is a beautiful thing.” Whether the evocations of private core and personal identities are ironic is moot; they seem to be too enamored of the act of becoming to even keep track of their own identities. It is also important to remember that in Pink Noise, English/Weblish is also an “identity” joyfully deconstructed by the Chinese/Translationese other. When “technology” meets translation, rather than returning to the black hole of lack as the origin of virtual reality and identity, it inadvertently turns into “skill” (技術), recalling the “rhyming skills” in an earlier discussed poem, and suggesting that, after all, poetry (and love?) is a transformative skill that creates something from nothing.
       
      Ultimately, the romance of poetry and bilingual practice has to come from the intimate and radical act of reading. My argument in this essay is that Pink Noise is fundamentally anti-authoritarian, hence resistant to any monopoly of interpretation. It is, nevertheless, joyful and not melancholic or nostalgic for the collapse of symbolic power. The poetry here hardly imposes a moral obligation to interpret. Although I do not propose the interpretation of Pink Noise (as Lacan suggests of a psychoanalytic interpretation), I also want to argue that unlike the Lacanian formulation of love and postcolonial dialectic of power, both of which are embedded with negativity for which lack becomes the ultimate metaphor, Pink Noise‘s dance with the Machine is positive and completely without negativity. Pink Noise is an open invitation for readers to re-late and trans-late. It is up to the readers whether we acknowledge, accept, or turn away from such an open invitation.
       

      V. Conclusion: The Virtual Multitude

       
      I want to accept the poem’s invitation by returning to Pink Noise to suggest that it is in the act of reading, and furthermore, reading the language of the foreign and the everyday (nonsense), that we can reinvent the emerging virtual social, and transform its fundamental lack into the multitude of love and poetry. The poems in Pink Noise seem to suggest such a reading trajectory; as one of the poems says, “Things seem to get worse before they get better” (Fig. 4):
       

       
      Poem #32. "Things seem to get worse before they get better."  © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 4.

      Poem #32. “Things seem to get worse before they get better.”

      © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission.
       

       
      How do things get better as they seem to get worse initially? “The people are dead” and “the things are scattered,” the poem tells us in the beginning–“nothing subsists.” The narrative then zooms in to an undecipherable landscape where “She poised herself on the balance beam gracefully” and “he waited with his fingers posed over the keys.” The scene does not so much announce the “death of the subject” as give us a sense of undistinguished personae, of private selves which are impersonal, un-singular. Moreover, because the lines are drawn from different sources on the internet, we do not know if the “he” or the “she” in the poem refers to the same person. The poem talks about a distant temporality, “a long distant past,” and gives a wasteland-like feel of apocalypses: “nothing subsists/ After the people are dead/after the things are broken and scattered.” But its tone is distinctively different from T.S. Eliot’s messianic or apocalyptic melancholia; it celebrates “works [that] are born as if out of the void.” Among the ambiguous referents to the person/persona and the world/void, two indexes of humanity to the body parts stand out–the fingers and the hand. Although streamlined as a narrative, the poem can be read only by adding a chain of associations from its diverse elements: “balance beam” (signifying harmony?), fingers on “the keys” (roman à clef?), “the ruins” and the notion that “everything vanishes,” “ripe graphic fruit” and the hand as the “obedient instrument” of “a remote will.” The poem interestingly reflects the way one reads the book in general: that is, manually, with a hand, which is autonomous in the sense that it is not controlled by a humanist core but by a “remote will.” The inhuman yet intimate “hand job” is crucial because the book is produced in a way that would be unreadable unless one were to add, say, a piece of paper, to separate each poem from the others. The adding is therefore a subtraction at the same time. Or, to evoke Wittgenstein’s language game, the imperative to “add 1” functions like the cut in Lacanian psychoanalysis that produces the lack constitutive of the emergence of the symbolic order, except that literally adding 1 upends the negativity and turns it into rosy representations of sheer positivity. By adding one more language and one more poem, one creates new poetic space in which the streamlined narrative gives way to defamiliarized (exotic?) fragmentations, which, on the other hand, bear the old poetic fruit of musicology (see Fig. 5 below). Things do get better even when formal fragmentation and linguistic alienation initially seem to make them get worse.
       

       
      Poem #32. "事似乎得到壞在它們得到更好."  © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 5.

      Poem #32. “事似乎得到壞在它們得到更好.”

      © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission.
       

       
      The poem’s message–“Things seem to get worse before they get better”–relies on the conceit of the game that by adding the Chinese translation one only adds to the felicity of poetry. To add the Chinese is also to return the poem to its original form of palimpsestic transparency (see Fig. 6 below). The “balance” to which the English poem alludes is figured materially when one translates and adds one more linguistic dimension to the poem. By multiplying, the poetic lines on the one hand lose their decipherability; on the other, by losing their individual identity they gain a new life–they become pink noise (see Fig. 7 below).
       

       
      "Add 1"--adding the "translation" to the "original."  © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 6.

      “Add 1”–adding the “translation” to the “original.”

      © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by
      permission.
       
       
      Multiplication.  © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission.

       

      Click for larger view

      Fig. 7.

      Multiplication.

      © Hsia Yü, 2007. Used by permission.
       

       

      Admittedly, both playing the game and adding 1 are metaphors of reading, that is, of how meaning and understanding work. I evoke Wittgenstein’s example of the game “add N” in his Philosophical Investigations here because the tenet of ordinary language philosophy is that meaning and human life are fundamentally connected even in the face of nonsense, whims, mistakes, and noises (143-205). The famous Wittgenstein dictum that there is no private language is apt: the binary opposition between human and machine comes largely from the picture held by the sceptics that (human) understanding is a mysterious, inner mental process that takes painful decoding and is especially vulnerable to gridlocks of communication. With the concept of language games, Wittgenstein shows how mistakes are possible, for example, when one understands the rule to “add N” differently. Does the “alternative interpretation” pass? Or does it fail because it fails to faithfully represent what the rule-makers have in mind? Eventually, the felicity of playing the game involves understanding the rules, not through some mysterious and complicated process of transporting a picture locked in the addresser’s mind but by grasping its meaning in a flash. Wittgenstein’s ordinary language philosophy shows that the meaning of the word is neither in the mind of the addresser, nor in the representation of the addressee, but is in its use.

       
      As I turn from the initial fascination for Pink Noise‘s transparent form and undecipherable noises to the physical book and to the material presentation of poetry, I am inspired by Wittgenstein’s ordinary language philosophy. There is no “alien” language, as Wittgenstein famously says. Although Pink Noise seduces us to read the new formidable machinic language as a sign of the end of human agency, Wittgenstein’s language games help me to re-enter Hsia Yü’s poetics for an alternative interpretation. If reading Pink Noise, as many of Hsia Yü’s critics and readers have argued, is to play the linguistic game, then to play a game is also to understand the rules (grammar, laws)–to follow, distort, appealing to, or discard them. The machine itself is neither dogmatic nor anarchistic. In fact, the machine is none other than the sum total of the human. At the end of his discussions of the game “add N,” Wittgenstein uses the machine to symbolize the ordinariness (in contrast to “queerness”) of meaning that is always present (in contrast to “deferred,” “effected,” or “apocalyptic”). “We use a machine, or the drawing of a machine, to symbolize a particular action of the machine,” Wittgenstein says (66). The action of the machine, as meaning in human life, is in fluid movement and can never be fixed; at the same time, its possibilities are always present. This does not say that the machine contains all the possibilities, or that its future movements are predetermined from the start–this would lead to a robotic, “dead” machine. Language, like the metaphor of the machine, is full of possibilities and potentials, yet the richness of such possibilities can only be truly appreciated when we begin with the presentness of their use (Wittgenstein 77-79).
       
      Keeping the presentness of the richness of ordinary language in mind, my reading of Pink Noise is eventually a literal and literary one. I take Pink Noise‘s message about the clichés of love to be indicative of the poetic of translation in the new age of global connectivity. In reading Pink Noise, the sporadic yet convivial collage of romantic elements–“luck/運氣,” “contagion/傳染,” “risk/風險,” “superstition/迷信,” etc.–grows, as if to evidence the message in one of the poems: “This has been sent to you for good luck.” By multiplying languages, by adding one(self) to the process of reading, the book professes to be the talisman of such “good luck”–the token of love, which is not different from infection or contagion, as the poem says: “Sometimes there’s nothing that feels quite so good as being bad/ A lot of love results from an infection by other love/有時有沒 什麼感到相當很好作為是壞/很多愛起因於傳染由於其他愛.” The machinic aspect of meaning-production does not prevent us from understanding the common speech of love, nor does it require its infection to become something radically new, and so limit it. Just as the virtual/social is linked to the Machine, so at the same time the Machine is not the antinomy of the human and the ordinary. As long as the process of rendering meaningful implicitly relies on the assumption that there is a human agent who makes choices even amidst machine-generated chaos (i.e., chance), the heartless machine is the poet’s Doppelgänger. One does not have to kill the double in Pink Noise to have a singular interpretation. The poetics of translation is lost when one is tempted to turn, as in the fable of Lot’s wife, to look for the original meaning of the translated words, or to return to the previous life of humanity before the Machine. What Pink Noise presents us is no other than an invitation and a promise. The promise is that the future of poetry and the future of humanity are full of love, as long as one takes the invitation to dive into the great mix of noises and the multitude of nonsense. Such a persistent desire for the new and the unknown is already an old one, but Pink Noise dares the nonsense to repeat it lest the promise of poetry be forgotten in the age of artificial intelligence–
       
      “Remember that great love and great achievements involve great risk/Do not keep this message.”
       

      Lili Hsieh is Assistant Professor in the English Department at the National Central University, Taiwan. She teaches on transnational modernisms, theory and practice of translation, and feminist theory. She works on poststructuralist theories of affect and its role in transnational politics and has published a few journal articles on related issues in Virginia Woolf’s Three Guineas, the Buddhist parable Tu Zicun, the empire of English language in Taiwan, and Brian Massumi’s Parables for the Virtual and Eve Sedgwick’s Touching Feeling. She is completing a book manuscript on the worlding of the politics of affect in Deleuze, Lacan, and transnational feminisms.
       

      Notes

       

      I would like to thank Hsia Yü herself for sharing her works and generously granting me the right to quote her poems and to reproduce them visually in the essay, and the editors and board members of Postmodern Culture for their helpful comments and suggestions. I thank Professor Jean Michel-Rabaté, Patricia Gherovici, Professor Chao-Yang Liao and Professor Charles Shepherdson for their kind invitation to present earlier drafts of this paper at the International Psychoanalytic Conference on Love at the University of Pennsylvania and the “Lacan in Context” conference at National Taiwan University. I am eternally indebted to several colleagues and friends at the National Central University for their generosity and for inspiration: Amie Elizabeth Parry’s chapter on Hsia Yü in her award-winning book, Interventions in to Modernist Cultures, sets up a model of “critical comparativism” which makes this study possible; Steve Bradbury’s translation of Hsia Yü is beyond instrumental; Yi-Ping Zona Tsou has generously shared incredible findings and interpretations in her thesis on Hsia Yü. I am grateful to Professor James Bart Rollins for his invitation and Sophie Rollins for the inspiring exchanges at National Chung Cheng University in Taiwan.
       

      1. In this paper, I follow the Chinese convention and write the family name before the given name when I refer to Hsia Yü or her Taiwanese critics.

       
      2. By “critical comparativism,” I am referring to Amie Elizabeth Parry’s proposed methodology in her book, Modernist Interventions, which I discuss later. The book was published September 1984; in 1986 she added two new poems. For criticism of Hsia Yü’s postmodernism, see Gu Jitang, Jian Chengjen, Lin Yaode, Liao Hsian-Hao, Meng Fang and Michelle Yeh’s “The Myth of Postmodernism.”

       

       
      3. See “Poetry Interrogation,” in the second edition of Pink Noise. Pages do not have numbers in this collection.

       

       
      4. In the chapter, “Against Transparency: From the Radiant Cluster to the Word as Such,” Marjorie Perloff argues that modern poetry evolves, in response to their respective visual cultures, from (1) foregrounding the Image, to (2) substitution of Image by word-Image, to (3) the deconstruction of (word-)Image and the rise of syntax, or in the Poundian terms, moving from phanopoeia to logopoiea (78). In a similar vein, Hsia Yü answers the question whether Pink Noise is “anti-poem,” “pseudo-poem,” or “non-poem” by saying that the book makes no such commitment.

       

       
      5. From an anonymous blogger, whose website has since been taken down: “Writing is when you put pen to paper like for a book whereas [onlining] involves chucking, streaming, layering and stacking items.”

       

       
      6. For a discussion of translation of Western concepts into Chinese in the early twentieth century, see Lydia Liu’s Tokens of Exchange and “Translingual Practice.” For a discussion on the selectiveness of the translation of literary works, see André Lefevere, Translation, Rewriting, and the Manipulation of Literary Fame.

       

       
      7. Similarly, Evelyn Nien-Ming Ch’ien speaks of the important role of “Chinglish,” “Spanglish,” and other forms of “weird English” in modernism in her book, Weird English.

       

       
      8. The role of Zhiwen Publishing Company as the monopoly of translated thoughts in Chinese has not received enough critical attention. I am inspired by the discussions of it in the two articles by Zhang Qingji and Zhang Mulan.

       

       
      9. The relationship between poetic language and common speech is rather complicated. T.S. Eliot, the quintessential modernist, holds that “there is one law of nature more powerful than any [other] . . . the law that poetry must not stray too far from the ordinary everyday language which we use and hear. Whether poetry is accentual or syllabic, rhymed or rhymeless, formal or free, it cannot afford to lose contact with the changing face of common intercourse” (qtd in Perloff 29). For more discussions on poetic and common language in modernist poetry, see Perloff’s “The Changing Face of Common Intercourse: Talk Poetry, Talk Show, and the Scene of Writing” (29-53).

       

       
      10. In the interview with A Wong, Hsia Yü explains the origin of Pink Noise: “Is translation ‘murder’? . . . I clipped a random passage of English text and pasted it in Sherlock: the gear-wheel icon started spinning, and a gathering of words, sheer swarms of them, emerged all at once out of depths of light like an UFO forced to land, cool yet courteous: … Oh my, what is this swarm of words, such madness, the primal crime scene of a linguistic murder, I murmured to myself and felt a rush of adrenalin.”

       

       
      11. To show the effect of the translation, I fed the sentences to Google Translator. The back translation of the Chinese poem reads: “Yes, please submit an I Fortnight/ Newsletter loaded diet/ Exercise and weight loss/ Secret, yes, please submit an I/ Special Offers, Promotions/ Coupons and free/ Samples from the sponsorship/ Yes, I will answer questions are as follows/ To determine my suitability for this/ Study, if I do not look for/I myself, I will answer these questions/ On behalf of staff/ I was looking for/ I entered all the information will be retained/ Special, I will want to give it time/ Brewing/, Technology/ Is a beautiful thing.”

       

       
      12. I return to this poem in the last section.

       

       
      13. I model this graph on Lacan’s graph of alienation (see Seminar XI, Four 241), which I discuss in the following section. In Lacan to the Letter, Bruce Fink extrapolates the graph of the Lacanian Subject (164) and that of the Lacanian Other (165) with similar structure of two intersecting circles. In Lacan’s graph of alienation, the two circles represent Being/the Subject and Meaning/the Other, with the conjoining/intersecting middle of “Non-Meaning” (see <http://cinephile.ca/files/Vol5/No2/The-Spaltung-Diagram-final.gif> for an image). In Fink’s graphs, the middle “third space” becomes cogito (in the Lacanian Subject) and a (soul) (in the Lacanian Other), which fall outs from the “encounter.”

       

       
      14. I thank Steve Bradbury for offering the back translation.

       

       
      15. I am indebted to Sianne Ngai’s argument here. In her article, “The Cuteness of the Avant-Garde,” Ngai argues that avant-gardists’ critiques of popular culture, such as Andy Warhol’s “beautiful” exhibition of “the beautiful,” or Minako Nishiyama’s cute installation of “The Pinku House” (1991), often take the form of the object they critique (847).

       

       
      16. The structure of the two circles can be seen as a revision of the mirror stage. The forward-leaning baby is here presented as the subject, while the other is the meaning. In an essay on the mirror stage, Lacan talks about the fundamental split of the baby from his mirror image as alienation (The Four Fundamental Concepts 241). Here, it is interesting to compare the fundamental misrecognition-the non-meaning-to the impossibility of translation (so that every translation is already a mistranslation).

       

       
      17. For an excellent introduction to Lacan’s seminar, see Slavoj Žižek, “Four Discourses, Four Subjects.”

       

       
      18. I use Cormac Gallagher’s translation because the official translation is not available.

       

       
      19. See Bruce Fink’s Figure 8.1 and illustrations in Fink, A Clinical Introduction to Lacanian Psychoanalysis (119).

       

       
      20. Many Chinese readers enjoy the book without attempting to interpret the poems. There is an on-linecommunity that shares their pictures with the book, some in a bath tub, some in a fish tank, and some in muddy water. Similarly, many English readers of Pink Noise pay exclusive attention to its avant-garde form.Joyelle McSweeney, an online reviewer of Pink Noise, writes: “That a whole swath of Chinese text is printed on the back (or front, or reverse) side of this band is utterly beside, and thus contingent upon, the point. The band must be slid off to clamber further into this space. The matte plastic sleeve is blank on one side; the other holds the ISBN (that’s 978-957-41-4521-8, if you want to try and find a copy of this dispersed and sold-out book) and barcode, two more visual manifestations of coded identity which only computer and light beam can read. On this level, the Anglophone reader must wade in among the Chinese characters to sift out, in toothpastey, toothpick-thin writing, an English description of the book’s content” (“Review”; emphases added).

       

       
      21. Hsia Yü has never subscribed to the distinction between high and popular culture. She is fascinated with popular culture and has released a pop rock CD of her poetry reading. She also wrote lyrics for singer Sandee Cheng. This does not mean that she fully embraces commercialization of poetry. In an interview she expresses unease over discovering her poetry printed uncopyrighted and uncredited on commodities from “magazine holders to cushions.” See Yü Hsia, Ventriloquy (腹語術) (Taipei: Xiandai Shi Jikan She (Modern Poetry Quarterly), 1999) 114; mentioned in Parry 80-1.

       

       
      22. Michelle Yeh’s “The Feminist Poetics of Hsia Yü” is one of the first scholarly studies on Hsia published in an English journal. See use WC format See also Liau Hsian-Hao Sebastian’s and Jian Zheng-zhen.

       

       
      23. Twenge and Campbell borrow the concepts of “‘signal’ and ‘noise’” from physics to describe interpersonal communication on the internet as a process of filtering signals, the meaningful “good stuff,” from “tremendous amount of useless noise.”

       

       
      24. The excess of adjectives is significant because, on the one hand, adjectives are often considered too subjective, value-laden and judgemental, hence the contrast between their causal omnipresence in ordinary language and the economic use in professional settings. On the other hand, adjectives with all their lack of precision can also subvert structuralism, for one might ask: What are adjectives according to paradigm of binarism between the signifier and the signified? Would a green tree and a purple signify at the same level?-The question, ultimately, is whether linguistic structuralism has a place for adjectives like pink, cheap, comfortable, broken-hearted, or, as the title of one of the poems in Pink Noise says, “fucking sad,” and pink noise.
       

      Works Cited

         

       

      • Baudrillard, Jean. The Intelligence of Evil: On the Lucidity of Pact. Oxford & New York: Berg, 2005. Print.
      • Benjamin, Walter. “The Task of the Translator.” Trans. Harry Zohn. Illuminations: Essays and Reflections. 1955. New York: Schocken, 1968. 86-108. Print.
      • —. “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.” Trans. Harry Zohn. Illuminations: Essays and Reflections. 1955. New York: Schocken, 1968. 217-52. Print.
      • Bradbury, Steven. “Hsia Yü & Steve Bradbury: Pink Noise.” Drunken Boat. n.vol. 9 (2008): n. pag. Web. 28 Jul. 2010.
      • Chang, Hsiao-hung. “Fake Logos, Fake Theory, Fake Globalization.” Inter-Asia Cultural Studies 5.2 (2004): 222-236. Web. 28 Jul. 2010.
      • Ch’ien, Evelyen Nien-Ming. Weird English. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2004. Print.
      • Fink, Bruce. A Clinical Introduction to Lacanian Psychoanalysis: Theory and Technique. Cambridge & London: Harvard UP, 1997. Print.
      • —. Lacan to the Letter: Reading Écrits Closely. Minneapolis & London: U of Minnesota P, 2004. Print.
      • Freud, Sigmund. “Constructions in Analysis.” The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud. Trans. James Strachey. Ed. James Strachey. Vol. XXIII. 1964. London: The Hogarth Press. 1991. 255-70. Print.
      • Gu, Jitang. “Hsia Yu.” The History of Taiwan New Poetry (Taiwan Xinshi Fanzhang Shi). Taipei: Wen Shi Zhe, 1997. 585-91. Print.
      • Hsia, Yü. “Poetry Interrogation-the Primal Scene of a Linguistic Murder.” Trans. Tsou Yi-Ping Zona. Pink Noise. By Hsia Yü. 2nd ed. Taipei: Garden City Publishers, 2007. Print.
      • —. •Rub•Ineffable (•Moca •Wuyimingzhuang). Taipei: Xiandai Shi Jikan She (Modern Poetry Quarterly), 1995. Print.
      • —. Memoranda (Beiwanglu). Taipei: self-published, 1984. Print.
      • —. Pink Noise (Fenhongse Zaoyin). Taipei: Garden City Publishers, 2007. Print.
      • —. Ventriloquy (Fuyu Shu). Taipei: Xiandai Shi Jikan She (Modern Poetry Quarterly), 1999. Print.
      • Jian, Chengjen. “The Space of Play in Poetry (Shi De Xixi Kongjian).” The Aesthetics of Taiwan Modern Poetry (Taiwan Xiandai Shi Meixue). Taipei: Yangshi, 2004. 221-45. Print.
      • Lacan, Jacques. The Four Fundamental Concepts of Psycho-Analysis. Trans. Alan Sheridan. The Seminar of Jacques Lacan. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. Vol. XI. New York & London: W.W. Norton & Company, 1977. Print.
      • —. The Other Side of Psychoanalysis. Trans. Russell Grigg. The Seminar of Jacques Lacan. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. Vol. XVII. New York & London: W.W. Norton & Company, 2007. Print.
      • —. Transference. Trans. Cormac Gallagher. The Seminar of Jacques Lacan. Vol. VIII. London: Karnac, 2002. Print.
      • Lefevere, André. Translation, Rewriting, and the Manipulation of Literary Fame. New York & London: Routledge, 1992. Print.
      • Liao, Hsian-Hao Sebastian. “The Betrayal of Materialism: Reading Hsia Yü’s ‘Feminine Poems’ from the Perspectives of Literary History, Femininity, and Postmodernism (Wuzhi Zhuyide Panbian: Cong Wenxue Shi, Xuxing Hua, Hoxiandai Zi Mailuo Kang Hsia Yu De ‘Yingxing Shi’).” On Contemporary Taiwanese Women Writers (Dangdai Taiwan Nuxing Wenxue Lun). Ed. Ming-li Cheng. Taipei: China Times, 1993. 235-72. Print.
      • Lin, Yaode. “The Lego Player (Jimu Wantong).” After 1949 (1949 Yiho). Taipei: Urya Pub., 1986. 127-40. Print.
      • Liu, Lydia, ed. Tokens of Exchange: The Problem of Translation in Global Circulations. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2000. Print.
      • Liu, Lydia H. “Translingual Practice: The Discourse of Individualism between China and the West.” positions: east asia cultures critique 1.1 (1993): 160-93. Print.
      • McSweeney, Joyelle. “Review of Pink Noise.” constantcritic.com. The Constant Critic. 9 Dec. 2007. Web. 11 Nov. 2009.
      • Meng, Fang. “The Voice of Avant-Gardism: On Hsia Yu’s Poetry (Cao Cianwei De Shengyin: Ping Hsia Yu De Shi).” Taipei Review (Taipei Pinglun) n.vol.4 (1988): 130-45. Print.
      • Ngai, Sianne. “The Cuteness of the Avant-Garde.” Critical Inquiry 31.4 (2005): 811-47. Print.
      • Parry, Amie Elizabeth. Interventions into Modernist Cultures: Poetry from Beyond the Empty Screen. Durham: Duke UP, 2007. Print.
      • Perloff, Marjorie. Radical Artifice: Writing Poetry in the Age of Media. Chicago & London: U of Chicago P, 1991. Print.
      • Steiner, George. “What Is Comparative Literature?” No Passions Spent: Essays 1978-1995. New Haven: Yale UP, 1998. 142-159. Print.
      • Twenge, Jean M. and W. Keith Campbell. The Narcisissm Epidemic: Living in the Age of Entitlement. New York, London, Toronto, & Sydney: Free Press, 2009. Print.
      • Wang, Hao-Zheng. “On-Line Users Population Reaches New High of Fifteen Million (Taiwan Shangwang Renkou Tupo 1580 Wan).” Economics News. 19 Feb. 2009. http://mag.udn.com/mag/digital/storypage.jsp?f_ART_ID=178678. 4 Aug. 2010.
      • Wittgenstein, Ludwig. The Philosophical Investigations. Trans. G.E.M. Anscombe. Oxford: Blackwell, 1953. Print.
      • Yeh, Michelle. “The Myth of Postmodernism: Reflections on the Theory and Practice of Taiwanese Postmodern Poetry (Ho Xiandai De Mizhang).” Essays on Modern Chinese Poetry. Taipei: Lianjing Pub., 1998. 203-26. Print.
      • Yeh, Michelle. “The Feminist Poetic of Hsia Yü.” Modern Chinese Literature 7.1 (1993): 33-60. Print.
      • Zhang Qingji. “Experienced Publisher is the Catalyst of Good Books (Zishen Chubanjia, Haoshu Cuishenze).” New Taiwan Weekly (Xin Taiwan Zhoukan). newtaiwan.com, 9 Sept. 2004. Web. 29 Jul. 2010.
      • http://www.newtaiwan.com.tw/bulletinview.jsp?bulletinid=19444
      • Zhang Mulan. “The Story of Xinqao Wenku Told by Zhang Qingji.(Zhang Qingji Tan Xinchao Wenku de Gushe)United News (Lianhe Xinwen Wang). udn.com, 11 Nov. 2002. Web. 29 Jul. 2010.
      • Žižek, Slavoj. “Civil Society, Fanaticism, and Digital Reality.” Uncanny Networks: Dialogues with the Virtual Intelligentsia. Ed. Geert Lovink. Cambridge, MA & London: The MIT Press, 2002. 36-49. Print.
      • —. “Enjoy Your Nation as Yourself.” Tarrying with the Negative: Kant, Hegel, and the Critique of Ideology. 1993. Durham: Duke UP, 2000. 200-237.
      • —. “Four Discourses, Four Subjects.” Cogito and the Unconscious. Sic 2. Ed. Slavoj Žižek. Durham & London: Duke UP, 1998. 74-116. Print.

       

    • Notes on Contributors

      Heidi R. Bean is Assistant Professor of English at Bridgewater State University. She is the co-editor of Poetry after Cultural Studies, an anthology of critical essays forthcoming from the University of Iowa Press. Her essays, reviews, and interviews related to the intersections of theater, performance, and poetry have appeared in Text and Performance Quarterly, Theatre Journal, The Iowa Review Web, and Cultural Critique. This essay is taken from her current project on the cultural politics of American poetic theater since the 1960s.

      Timothy Campbell teaches in the Department of Romance Studies at Cornell University. He is the author of Wireless Writing in the Age of Marconi (Minnesota, 2006) and Improper Life: Thanatopolitics and Technology from Heidegger to Agamben (Minnesota, 2011). In addition to his translations of Roberto Esposito’s Communitas: The Origin and Destiny of Community (Stanford, 2009) and Bios: Biopolitics and Philosophy (Minnesota, 2008), he is the co-editor along with Adam Sitze of The Biopolitical Reader (Duke, 2011).

      Laura Hinton is the author of a poetry book, Sisyphus My Love (To Record a Dream in a Bathtub) (BlazeVox Books), and a critical book, The Perverse Gaze of Sympathy: Sadomasochistic Sentiments from Clarissa to Rescue 911 (SUNY Press). She is the co-editor of We Who Love to Be Astonished: Experimental Women’s Writing and Performance Poetics (University of Alabama Press). Her critical essays, poet interviews, and reviews have appeared in Contemporary Literature, Postmodern Culture, Textual Practice, Framework, Women’s Studies, Rain Taxi, Jacket, The Journal of the Academy of American Poets, among other journals and collections. Her poetry has appeared in anthologies and journals including Feminist Studies, How2, and Nth Position, and she has edited several critical article collections for How2, one of which was on the writings of Leslie Scalapino.

      Hinton edits a chapbooks series for Mermaid Tenement Press and publishes reviews on the performance and hybrid arts in New York City on her web log, Chant de la Sirene (chantdelasirene.com). A Professor of English at the City College of New York, Professor Hinton teaches contemporary literature, film, and feminist theory, and also coordinates the InterRUPTions experimental-writers reading series.

      Nasser S. Hussain is a lecturer in English Literature in the Department of Cultural Studies at Leeds Metropolitan University, UK. He has published articles on performance poetry and contemporary poetics and is currently working on a book project about American travel literature and narratives of passing.

      Apple Zefelius Igrek teaches in the Philosophy Department at Seattle University. He has published essays on fiction, cultural theory, Georges Bataille and Michel Foucault. His work appears in such journals as Colloquy, the International Studies of Philosophy, and Comparative and Continental Philosophy (forthcoming, 2010). His current project is entitled “Thinking Through Walls and the Internalized Image in H.P. Lovecraft.”

      Alan Nadel, William T. Bryan Chair of American Literature and Culture at the University of Kentucky, is the author of four books, including Containment Culture (Duke University Press, 1995), Flatlining on the Field of Dreams: Cultural Narratives in the Films of President Reagan’s America (Rutgers University Press, 1997), and Television in Black-and-White America: Race and National Identity (University Press of Kansas, 2005). He is the editor of two books on August Wilson and the co-editor, with Susan Griffin, of Henry James and Alfred Hitchcock, the Men Who Knew Too Much (forthcoming from Oxford University Press). His poetry has appeared in several journals, among them: Georgia Review, New England Review, Paris Review, Partisan Review, and Shenandoah, and he has won prizes for the best essays in Modern Fiction Studies and PMLA.

      James Sherry is the author of more than 10 books of poetry and prose. His new manuscript, Sorry: Environmental Poetics, is forthcoming. He is the editor of Roof Books (www.roofbooks.com) and founder of the Segue Foundation (seguefoundation.com) that has produced more than 10,000 literary and other art events in the New York metropolitan area during the past 30 years.

      Michael D. Snediker is the author of Queer Optimism: Lyric Personhood and Other Felicitous Persuasions (U Minnesota Press, 2008). He is currently at work on a new book, “The Aesthetics of Disability: American Literature and Figurative Contingency.” He is Assistant Professor of American Literature at Queen’s University, in Kingston, Ontario.

      Karinne Keithley Syers is a writer, performer, sound artist, and graduate student in English at the CUNY Graduate Center. In addition to creating her own work, she has performed with David Neumann, Young Jean Lee, Chris Yon, and Sara Smith. She has written about Nature Theater of Oklahoma for Theater Magazine, and is the founder of the 53rd State Press, which publishes new performance writing.

      Christophe Wall-Romana is assistant professor in the Department of French and Italian at the University of Minnesota. He is the author of Cinepoetry: Imaginary Cinemas in French Poetry 1890-2008 (Fordham University Press, forthcoming 2011), and Jean Epstein (Manchester University Press, forthcoming 2011), and recently edited a special issue of the journal L’Esprit créateur on new approaches to contemporary poetry in French. His next project investigates the place of mobile perspective, pre-cinema and cinema, in works of philosophy and literature.

    • Cross-Media Criticism: Postwar American Poetry-With-Cinema

      Christophe Wall-Romana (bio)
      University of Minnesota
      wallr007@umn.edu

      Review of: Daniel Kane, We Saw The Light: Conversations Between The New American Cinema and Poetry. Iowa City: Iowa UP, 2009.

       

       
      Kane’s book partakes of the renewed interest in contemporary humanities for the study of cross-medium exchanges, particularly involving literature, pioneered in the 1970s and somewhat marginalized by the massive turn to language, semiotics, cultural codes and discourse analysis that occupied much of the literary humanities in the 1980s and 90s. We will return to what Kane makes of this further on. Within this new cross-disciplinary field focusing on exchanges between various mediums, poetry and cinema have been especially probed for two significant and interrelated reasons. First, they both share in today’s digital smorgasbord the unenviable distinction of being, or at least seeming obsolescent, in comparison to narrative on the one hand, and post-analog moving image media on the other. At the same time, recent scholarship has shown that poets and filmmakers were at the very core of the vanguard of 20th-century cross-medium practices, which they often theorized as well (as in the work of Susan McCabe, David Trotter, Laura Marcus, and Wall-Romana). Hence, relations between poetry and cinema offer a paradigmatic and relatively bookended span of cross-medium practices that pioneered and, in crucial ways, remain subjacent to and resonant within current interdisciplinary humanities, including new media studies. Such early experiments also explain why studies in the relation of poetry and cinema have tended to concentrate on interwar modernism.
       
      Kane’s aim is in part to complicate this archaeological argument by pointedly ending the book on very recent collaborations between poets and filmmakers: John Ashbery and Rudy Burkhardt; Lisa Jarnot and Jennifer Reeves. More broadly, the book provides a careful revision and innovative exploration of the crisscrossing historiography of the new experimental cinema and new poetry movements (particularly those showcased by Donald Allen in his anthology, The New American Poetry) which took place in the US between the 1950s and 70s.
       
      After describing how postwar filmmakers such as Deren, Mekas, and Markopoulos#relied on poetry as a non-narrative model, both as a general framework for their films and by writing poems themselves, Kane sets up in subsequent chapters a series of pairings of one or several poets with one or several filmmakers: Robert Duncan and Kenneth Anger (chapter 2); Robert Creeley and Stan Brakhage (Chapter 3); Frank O’Hara and Alfred Leslie (Chapter 4); Allen Ginsberg and Robert Frank (with Charlie Chaplin, Chapter 5); Andy Warhol, Gerard Malaga, Allen Ginsberg, John Ashbery and Frank O’Hara (Chapter 6); John Ashbery and Rudy Burkhardt (Chapter 7). This original organization allows Kane to provide joint close readings of specific films and poems and/or poetry collections, and provides illuminating new interpretations of works such as Creeley’s Pieces, Burkhardt’s The Last Clean Shirt, Frank’s Me and My Brother (on Peter Orlovsky and his brother Julius, and of course Ginsberg). Kane couches such joint readings as “conversations,” to suggest we might recover from them as comparably rich and lively exchanges as those from his live conversation with Jarnot and Reeves transcribed in the concluding chapter.
       
      The starting point of We Saw The Light is Kane’s painstakingly documented and convincing sense that, “to a surprising extent, film informed the content and form of much of the postwar American poetic avant-garde” (27). The surprise here is at least threefold, since it concerns first the breadth and depth of cinema’s influence on poetry, second its being overlooked by poetry scholars working until recently within more confining disciplinary purviews, and third, the fact that—contrary to other cases in various cultural areas and times—it is experimental rather than mainstream cinema that most deeply imprinted itself on the new poetry. Kane’s archival recovery of the social and spatial networks that explain how experimental cinema permeated the new American poetry, and his talent for reenacting them in elegant and critical writing are the most valuable aspects of the book. Not only do we get a sense of how local scenes (mostly in underground New York, San Francisco and Los Angeles) shaped cross-genre productions according to a Bourdieu-like logic of a force-field of ideas rather than individual innovation, but we witness the transversal exchanges in which, say, Brakhage met Anger at the home of poet Duncan (and that of his partner, the painter Jess) [52], or Ginsberg and Ashbery meet up on the celluloid of Warhol’s Screen Tests (153). We are not dealing simply with filmic notions migrating to poetry or vice versa, but with a complex aesthetic and sociopolitical circulation involving poets, filmmakers and other artists such as painters and musicians (who are not the primary focus of the book). With other recent works such as Liz Kotz’s Words To Be Looked At (MIT P, 2007), Kane’s book will contribute to renewing and deepening the focus on cross-media exchanges in American art and literature of the 1960s.
       
      Before engaging with some of Kane’s arguments, which in my view he deploys problematically, it is worth giving some idea of the challenges coming from various horizons that face works such as his. Based on archival research, framed historically, analyzing sets of unknown or lesser known works from different disciplines, while offering detailed descriptions and/or citations of many works, such truly interdisciplinary studies often run the risk of being ignored by scholars in either of the two (or more) disciplines they tackle, and seeming too narrow or specialized to a broader academic audience. On the publishing side, highly focused monographs appear to have a diminishing appeal in spite of their trailblazing transdisciplinary criticism. Methodologically, transdisciplinary endeavors must find ways to negotiate the standards and practices of two (or more) fields, in the hope of doing each a modicum of justice, and must develop critical approaches that go beyond their respective limitations. Kane’s book does an excellent job at providing a thick description of the various underground nodes of the 50s and 60s—so precise indeed that it persuasively accounts for the fact that cross-pollination first took place between this and that poet and filmmaker. As to the challenge of publishing, my sense that each chapter comes to a close too quickly, sacrificing the development of some of the book’s stated theses and hypotheses, might result from strictures put on by the publisher, although it might also be due to an overall conception that came a little short. With this caveat, I emphasize that my scholarly sympathies lay squarely with Kane’s ambitious and immensely useful enterprise and that the shortcomings of his book may well be endemic to the pressures put on transdisciplinary work in the humanities today.
       
      Kane’s central argument, that the constitutive role of experimental cinema in the new American poetry has been overlooked by scholarship, is couched polemically:
       

      In a larger sense, analyzing the conversation between film and poetry has led me to wonder if the academy’s dominant use of poststructuralist and postmodern theoretical/interpretive frameworks for innovative postwar art ends up freezing out, ignoring, or at times critiquing unfairly any number of productive sources—hermetic, heroic, mystically macho, religiously inspired—that were crucial to the creation of the various films and poems considered here. To use postmodern interpretative paradigms (particularly as they are linked up with feminist and queer studies to form a progressive triumvirate that more generally celebrates the decentered, denatured self as an ever-evolving site of freedom) results in the reader’s missing out on much of what makes the poetry and film I discuss here so fascinating.
       

      (3)

       

      As a parenthesis, let me say first that despite the alarming targeting of “feminist and queer studies” on behalf of “mystically macho” poets, Kane’s monograph is in point of fact both feminist and queer. He examines, for instance, with great precision the horrendously sexist treatment of Maya Deren by Arthur Miller and Dylan Thomas (13-17), and much of the “mystically macho” sensibility he foregrounds and celebrates comes from gay poets, who form the overwhelming majority of the poets he examines. The problem is not unreconstructed phallogocentrism at all, but indeed why he chooses as a polemical gambit to attack “postmodern interpretive paradigms,” ostensibly in favor of another interpretive horizon—”hermetic, heroic, mystically macho, religiously inspired.” For while assailing “poststructuralist and postmodern theoretical/interpretive frameworks,” Kane’s readings conclude by and large right smack within the vulgate of poststructuralism “that more generally celebrates the decentered, denatured self as an ever-evolving site of freedom.” The last sentence of the last chapter (on Burkhardt’s film about Ashbery’s poem “Ostensibly”), prior to the transcribed interview with Lisa Jarnot and Jennifer Reeves that forms the Conclusion, reads:

       

      The conversation between film and poem takes us further out “Towards one’s space and time,” where both the poem and film urge us to confront our responsibility as interpreters and encourage us to enjoy the process of imagining “so many separate ways of doing.”
       

      (190)

       

      If that’s not a celebration of “decentered” subjectivity and “ever-evolving” freedom of interpretation, what is? Kane’s concluding statement is not a coda that might have been inserted at the behest of a worried editor: it is the crux of his readings in every chapter. Hence chapter 6 on Warhol, Malanga, Ginsberg, Ashbery, and O’Hara ends with the assessment that, “By the late 1960s, the way forward seemed to be an ever more playful, sexually polymorphous, and decentered aesthetic” (163). Also in that chapter, Kane glosses Warhol’s Screen Tests (1965) as “a practically minimalist approach to manifesting the failure of static art to embody presence” (158), the very same target as Jacques Derrida’s critique of presence in philosophy around the same time. Kane even appears to use poststructuralist jargon pointedly when he writes: “Ashbery in his screen test is practically a free-floating signifier” whose poetic persona is “consistently constructed and deconstructed” (155-6). Summarizing his chapter on Allan Ginsberg and Robert Frank, Kane writes that both artists aimed to counter “essentializing moves that would seek to use the discourses of ‘truth’ to impose normative readings of sexuality, family, power” (147). This is straight out of Irigaray or Butler. To take a last example, early on in the book, Kane considers that the key idea for a Robert Duncan poem from Bending the Bow on and around Kenneth Anger’s Fireworks was Anger’s filmic practice of “‘integrality,’ a state in which binaries are reconciled and ultimately synthesized” (34). This Hegelian notion coming out of German Idealism informs both the thought of much poststructuralism that transformed it (Georges Bataille, Derrida, or Gilles Deleuze) and that of the 20th-century avant-gardes, from Breton’s theory of Surrealism in the second manifesto to Peter Bürger’s Theory of the Avant-Garde predicated on the reconciling of life and art.

       
      So what is going on? Kane is not an ironist and although his characterization of poststructuralism is rather hasty, I don’t believe he is unaware that his arguments feed its mill. The problem, in the end, is that the major premise and promise of the book, i.e., “that the material considered here is telling us that much of what we consider to be first-generation postmodern art is grounded in a practically visionary tradition” (4), remains quite sketchy. The telling never becomes a tale. What is the visionary tradition and in what ways could criticism based on it alter the current paradigms of postwar modernist studies? I waited in vain for the case to be built, while keeping in mind Kane’s strong rejection of the current “aggressively secular interpretive approach” (4) of the work of Anger, Brakhage, Creeley and Duncan. We would expect that such a stringent rejection would lead him to shore up his point with many sources: puzzlingly Kane mentions very few such works, and most notably he omits Peter O’Leary’s Gnostic Contagion (Wesleyan 2002), which investigates Robert Duncan’s derivative ties to and conversations with a variety of mystical sources. Kane does engage sporadically with the visionary dimension of his material, particularly with regard to the importance of queer ritual for Anger and Duncan in a context of police repression of queer films in pre-Stonewall New York, or Frank’s film on Ginsberg and Julius Orlovsky’s treatment in psychiatric hospitals. But again, his conclusions either fall in line with the poststructuralist framework they were meant to displace or else merely gesture towards the visionary. Hence Kane’s conclusion of Chapter 2 that “Duncan used the Passages series in an effort to effect, if not successfully or finally, something we can call transcendence” (50), will seem glib to readers who have grappled with Duncan’s multi-faceted poetics anchored in derivation, myth, the sacred, “magick,” modernist history, the figure of H.D., queer militancy, Whitmanian intersubjectivity, linguistics, French poetry, etc. What transcendence might Kane be referring to? The godhead? A sense of the divine? A turn away from immanence? The invisible?
       
      We are left to gather the few clues of what Kane means by “visionary tradition” (as distinct from P. Adams Sitney’s understanding of the term in his Visionary Film: The American Avant-Garde, 1942-2000), which we might reconstruct as follows. First, he understands “revelation” in the sense of physical immediacy (Brakhage’s Two: Creeley/McClure “reflect[s] their practically physiological poetics” [70]) and non-logical thought (“the act of viewing was in the service of revelation independent of reason” [77]). Both point to contingence, corporeality and experience, of which transcendence is usually considered the opposite. Likely because of Brakhage’s allergy to so-called structuralist cinema and postmodern aesthetics (63-4, 79), Kane shies away from using thinkers such as Georges Bataille and Maurice Merleau-Ponty, who might have helped to better frame his interesting views on this poetics of corporeal revelation and artistic immediacy. Indeed, Kane’s skillful and exacting analyses of seriality, materiality, and mobility between various perceptual positions (rather than a theoretical ‘subject position’) in Duncan and Creeley’s poems, would seem to warrant some thinking about the foregrounding of sensation in cognition, perhaps as directly informing the “essentially mystical understanding of serial form” (77) he recognizes in both poets. This could also help account for the importance of what he rightly terms the “extreme realism” (38) in Brakhage and Creeley, but which he does not attempt to reconcile with transcendental aspiration. Kane emphasizes the reconciling of opposites in the first part of the book (34, 73), on an axis implicitly linking Coleridge to Jung, but this is replaced in the second part by the foregrounding of mediation and media, particularly in Ginsberg’s shift from an inner prophetic to an outer cultural dictation, and in the ways Warhol, Ashbery and Burkhardt play with the gap between filmic and linguistic representation in the production of meaning. Hence by his own account, Kane appears to reconstruct a progressive shift (if not a continuum) rather than an opposition between revelatory and “postmodern” frameworks.
       
      Take away these two hazards (but also potential rewards) of cross-disciplinary research—polemical bent and theoretical thrust—and what remains is a sharply investigative and very well written book that insightfully proposes new foci for the study of poetry and its relations to cinema from the 1950s onward that may be summarized as follows: conversations and collaborations among poets, and between them and filmmakers, were essential to and cannot be left out of accounts of contemporary poetry; mystical stances among postwar poets and filmmakers must not be sidelined to fit extant modernist models, although the work remains to be done to see how exactly they may alter or inflect these models; gay poets were very active in seeking in both cinema and visionary sources original inspiration for a new poetry reflecting their sexuality and sociality; central notions of poetry studies such as inventiveness, aesthetic pleasure, materiality/immateriality, address, and social/technological autonomy were significantly transfigured by the interactions Kane describes.
       
      Two snippets from the book give a sense of Kane’s elegant critical voice, which made his book a pleasure to read. The first is about viewing Alfred Leslie’s The Last Clean Shirt:
       

      Emphasizing the ethical nature of the film, the final intertitle we read before the second repetition of the car journey reads, “It’s the nature of us all to want to be unconnected.” Yes, we want to be unconnected—free—but the film has already begun to suggest, however lightly and humorously, that perhaps we resist that part of our nature in an effort to be connected members of a community, one which delights in the possibilities of urbane love, laughter, and a casual interracial accord.
       

      (102)

       

      The second is in the chapter on Duncan:

       

      As Duncan conceived of words as a kind of hieroglyphics (in evidence especially in his extensive use of puns), so film too contains within it a hidden language that can potentially be unlocked by the enchanted poet.
       

      (31)

       

      These excerpts show the remarkable range of Kane’s critical ken: from the measured unpacking of an intertitle in a film from 1964 in the context of the Civil Rights movement, to a trenchant reading of Duncan’s punning as directly spliced to the notion of cinema as language—but rather than the old cliché of this language being universal and explicit, it is an esoteric and potential language. Despite its shortcomings, Kane’s is a must-read book for anyone interested in the cross-pollination of poetry and cinema in the 1960s American underground.

       

      Christophe Wall-Romana is assistant professor in the Department of French and Italian at the University of Minnesota. He is the author of Cinepoetry: Imaginary Cinemas in French Poetry 1890-2008 (Fordham University Press, forthcoming 2011), and Jean Epstein (Manchester University Press, forthcoming 2011), and recently edited a special issue of the journal L’Esprit créateur on new approaches to contemporary poetry in French. His next project investigates the place of mobile perspective, pre-cinema and cinema, in works of philosophy and literature.
       

    • Feeling Well

      Michael D. Snediker (bio)
      Queen’s University
      snediker@queensu.ca

      Review of: Sara Ahmed, The Promise of Happiness. Durham: Duke UP, 2010.

      It strikes me as both salubrious and unsurprising that after several decades of theorizing negative affect, melancholy, and trauma, the academy has turned its attention to the likes of positive affect, happiness, and optimism. As I’ve argued elsewhere, happiness and optimism are neither equivalent nor coextensive, but at very least metonymically equivocate around each other’s edges. Recent inquiries into happiness have engaged the latter’s capacity for fungibility and surprise. Often, theorists attached to a rictus model of happiness’s intractability argue for the latter’s ideological perniciousness. For instance, Heather Love has recently intimated that happiness arises as an ontologically risky threshold, the crossing of which threatens the integrity (or more precisely, the weathered lack thereof) of queer persons for whom disappointment and grief had hitherto been constitutive.

      That arguments for or against happiness arise most provocatively in the field of queer theory suggests that queer persons bear an acutely salient relation to happiness as that from which they’ve been excluded, but furthermore, that they bear an exemplary relation to a happiness always requiring sacrifice and compromise, a shady bittersweetness from which no persons are exempt. As Lauren Berlant has noted, “at a certain degree of abstraction both from trauma and optimism the sensual experience of self-dissolution, radically reshaped consciousness, new sensoria, and narrative rupture can look similar” (46). The trauma of happiness resonates all the more acutely in Heather Love’s supposition that “sometimes it seems that the only way for queers to start being happy is to stop being queers” (62). For Love (and implicitly, for Berlant), happiness’s brutality resides in its truculent, incessant demand against being what one otherwise was, even as one flutters, mothlike, to happiness’ ideologically incinerating flame. Love suggests that happiness is non-malleable, that it will be what it always has been; and this perdurability adumbrates the implication that queer persons are far more malleable than the affective desires and constraints by which they are held, seduced, betrayed. Happiness’ danger, then, would depend on happiness existing in advance as a repertoire of what we from outset ought have been wary.

      By contrast, theorists who consider happiness in terms of contingency rather than unrevisable dictum have suggested that one may well enjoy happiness, and even survive happiness, if one is willing to entertain the possibility of a happiness not already imbued with the penal inexorability of ideology. Nietzsche is a case in point: “To finally take all this in one soul and compress it into one feeling—this would surely have to produce a happiness unknown to humanity so far” (190). Or a few pages later in The Gay Science: “Are we perhaps still not too influenced by the most immediate consequences of this event—and these immediate consequences, the consequences for ourselves, are the opposite of what one might expect—not at all sad and gloomy, but much more like a new and barely describable type of light, happiness, relief, amusement, encouragement, dawn . . . ” (199). Following Nietzsche, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick’s A Dialogue on Love insists that when “the truth comes to you, / you recognize it because / it makes you happy” (207). Sedgwick’s formulation differs starkly from Love’s, to the extent that happiness might (like queerness) only be known in the discovery of it, versus the moribund sense that happiness, as a sort of Lacanian Symbolic, inexorably awaits one’s falling into it. Sara Ahmed’s most recent work argues that one need not choose, in relation to one’s self, either an inexorable happiness or a capricious, contingent one. Rather, Ahmed importantly resituates affective phenomenology as the tension between the inexorable and the capricious, allowing both phenomena to coincide, but nevertheless insisting, even in the severe spider-web of affective ideology, that there are modes of navigation, molecules of surviving happiness, that don’t require one’s queerness, one’s prior ontological commitments, be left at normativity’s (sometimes) perversely alluring altar.

      Ahmed’s pellucid new book pivots on the ubiquitous and overdetermined formulation, “I just want you to be happy.” The familiarity of the utterance only sometimes mitigates its latent perfidia. Less operatically: the utterance’s wish only barely conceals its sometimes brazen ulterior motives, shaped by cultural and political histories in excess of what otherwise might be understood as the idiosyncratic contours of solitary affective reception. Individual happiness, following Ahmed’s careful analysis, isn’t fictive. Its individuality nonetheless clings to and is snagged by larger affective narratives of which it either is willfully oblivious or from which strategically it is sequestered. The Promise of Happiness, with great dexterity and compassion, delineates the cling and snag of this ostensibly innocuous wish.

      I just want you to be happy. Ahmed rightly locates the formulation’s punctum in just, an adverbial indulgence masquerading as diffidence. I just want: conflation of a desire so modest that it might otherwise not be articulated; so severely singular that it might be conceived as a cause, if not the cause, worth fighting for; so abstemious that we might give pause to so nearly a gesture of affective unidirectionality. As though the desire for another’s happiness were so great (and likewise so austere) that other desires, on the part of the speaker, were consolidated into this vitiated narcissism of mimetic felicity. As though in wishing the happiness of another (as opposed to the more Gallic desire of the Other), one’s own happiness or desire or wish were swept out to sea.

      I just: a first person singular on the verge of both itself and the just, as though happiness were invariably, syntactically aligned with simultaneous conceits of self-renunciation and justice (if not ethics). The diminution of “just,” read as “only,” conceals the extent to which I just want you to be happy already circuits through a language of larger juridical pressure. By what are we allowed to feel happy? What is at stake in choosing one form of happiness over another? That there are stakes at all beyond being or not being happy—beyond what one is willing to do for the sake of happiness—intimates the textural complexity of Ahmed’s affective terrain. In querying the very terms by which we approach, contemplate, or refuse happiness, we become Antigone figures. If happiness is synonymous with the Symbolic order from which Antigone drops, then this new distance from happiness makes of us what Ahmed terms “affect aliens.” Alienated from what we might be expected to want (or even want to want), we find ourselves living extradiegetically and diegetically at once. We may or may not feel happy, even as we are interested in the phenomenon of happiness. As happiness shifts in our alineated consideration of it (imagine Maggie Verver’s hand against the beautiful and impenetrable pagoda), unhappiness likewise becomes differently inhabitable. Unhappiness, affectively speaking, becomes less a dominion of grief or disappointment, than the literal experience of being unmoored from happiness; and, as Ahmed illuminates, from the disciplining apparatus by which (even when best-intentioned) happiness is constituted.

      There are many forms of happiness, and as many micro-affective events as there are fundamental-feeling affective horizons. There likewise are many forms of affective horizoning. “Happiness,” Ahmed observes, “might play a crucial role in shaping our near sphere, the world that takes shape around us” (24). In the model of a “near sphere”—as ever, Ahmed’s capacity to envision affect is as vivid, meticulous, and surprising as that of Emily Dickinson—a horizon holds what we do not wish to hold, a hazy landscape of “awayness,” (24) safely, aesthetically keeping from us the things that do not make us happy. To the extent that happiness (despite manifold efforts to the contrary) can be quantified, indexed, experienced only through obliqueness and metonymy, it—like all affects—remains an elusive abstraction. As abstractions, those things that make or do not make us unhappy are barely distinguishable (if at all) from those things we think might make or not make us unhappy. What makes us happy does so because we think it does. Even as we can be happily surprised by an object we previously had thought would not make us happy, an object cannot make us happy if we think it does not. It is partly this interlineation of feeling and intellection that produces affect’s particular temporal conundra—such that Ahmed can imagine an affective relation (happy or unhappy) to an experienced past as structurally analogous to a futural affect about which we can speculate, but haven’t yet encountered. “Nostalgic and promissory forms of happiness belong under the same horizon, insofar as they imagine happiness as being somewhere other than where we are in the present” (160-161).

      Contrary to the horizon of unhappy awayness, this horizonality marks happiness at its most tenacious, in so far as “when happiness is present, it can recede, becoming anxious, becoming the thing that we could lose in the unfolding of time” (161). The near-sphere thus demarcates both the happy objects we’ve cultivated in our vicinity and the unhappy objects which entropically cramp what we imagine as some preferred but distant affective style. The horizon likewise expresses both what we’ve relegated and what, either nostalgically or promissorily, we love (or, again, think we love). We navigate this multiplicity of horizons and nearnesses without realizing it. One horizon seldom countervails the other, even as one horizon might be confused with another one—for instance, as the narrative goes, we intransigently delay and deny what we think will bring unhappiness, when in fact these protests might betray the risky necessity of a happiness so great it can’t yet be reckoned as such. Either too near or too far, affective lucidity requires a keen relation to time and space, even as these latter categories almost never are themselves affectively neutral.

      We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable rights, that among these are life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness. In her chapter “Melancholic Migrants” (more to follow on Ahmed’s brilliant exploration of melancholy’s interpersonal valences), Ahmed considers the ideology of happiness that complicates and distorts imperialism’s subtle and non-subtle violences against migrants and colonial subjects. Ahmed, in this context, invokes Eric Stoke’s notion of “secular evangelism.” The latter formulation would describe the duplicitous zeal and dubious imperial investments in “giving” non-imperial subjects a life that is better or happier than that preceding the unhappy travails of conquest, assimilation, and multiculturalism. The Promise of Happiness suggests, more generally, that the imbrication of happiness and governance imperils persons no less than past and present theocratic agenda. Needless to say, the Declaration of Independence fosters as many forms of dependence and conditionality as it does independent agency. And we hardly need a twenty-first century optic to feel misgiving toward the self-evidence of any foundational truth. If the Declaration of Independence inadvertently converts happiness itself into a quasi-religious enterprise, then it likewise ominously prognosticates the forms of excommunication experienced by Ahmed’s “affect aliens”—”those who are banished from [happiness], or who enter history only as troublemakers, dissenters, killers of joy” (17).

      The subjects (and titles) of the book’s middle chapters—”Feminist Killjoys,” “Unhappy Queers,” and “Melancholy Migrants”— deceptively suggest discrete taxonomy when in fact these demographics, as Ahmed makes clear, are heuristic placeholders. These categories hypostatically rise and fall for the sake of describing happiness’s discontents from different vantages. The hypostases, that is, might seem fixed from the perspective of an epistemically happy regime; whereas in Ahmed’s readings, the hypostases are saponifying. Ontological positions are unstable in part because affective responses to objects, others, and one’s self are nothing if not quicksilver. Even the least tractable-seeming affective situations prove to have crevices, qualities of light, differently bearable valence structures.

      Ahmed’s exempla, while presented as an archive, more interestingly serve as occasions for the analyses of one of our most generous and insightful affect theorists. At this point I feel like Randall Jarrell waxing ebullient over the poetry of Marianne Moore. Moore’s punctilious, winsome poems thrill Jarrell to the extent that Jarrell is inclined in his review of the former merely to list his favorite formulations from Moore’s collection. Ahmed’s writing, at its most insightful, analogously leaves me happy in ways that feel neither tautological (in the context of a book titled The Promise of Happiness) nor counterintuitive (in the context of a book that critiques a politico-cultural system that affectively evaluates our decisions and cathexes in advance of our making them). In “Feminist Killjoys,” for instance, we find the following observation, no less sentient for its quasi-mathematical precision:

      because I experience happiness in your happiness, I could wish that our feeling of fellowship in happiness amounts to being happy about the same things (a community of happiness), such that x becomes shared as a happiness wish. Of course, if the object that makes you happy is my happiness wish, then this would be precarious basis for sharing something (as wishing to be happy about x can also be an admission that one is not simply happy about x). (57)

      In “Melancholic Migrants,” Ahmed’s reading of melancholy as external assessment seems as powerful as Butler’s earlier reading of melancholy as internal structure:

      Rather than assuming others are melancholic because they failed to let go of an object that has been lost, I want to consider melancholia as a way of reading or diagnosing others as having “lost something,” and as failing to let go of what has been lost. To read others as melancholic would be to read their attachments as death-wishes, as attachments to things that are already dead. To diagnose melancholia would become a way of declaring that their love objects are dead. Others would be judged as melancholic because they have failed to give up on objects that we have declared dead on their behalf. The diagnosis of melancholia would thus involve an ethical injunction or moral duty: the other must let go by declaring the objects that we declare dead as being dead in the way that we declare. (141)

      As the above passage implies, it would be erroneous to imagine The Promise of Happiness, when it admonishes our too quickly acquiescing to certain happiness narratives, as eschewing positive affect for the sake of what elsewhere I’ve imagined as a constellation of pessimistic inquiry. Rather, Ahmed is enough interested in happiness to wish to salvage good feeling from what sometimes passes as good feeling. The promise of The Promise of Happiness is that there are in fact forms of happiness beyond those we presently trust and mistrust. This promissory thinking occurs in both horizon and near-sphere, as variously as Ahmed’s affective geography is various. Perhaps most gratifying, The Promise of Happiness promises not only that we might differently theorize happiness, but that we might wish to be happy, without feeling theoretically unhappy in the wishing.

      Michael D. Snediker is the author of Queer Optimism: Lyric Personhood and Other Felicitous Persuasions (U Minnesota Press, 2008). He is currently at work on a new book, “The Aesthetics of Disability: American Literature and Figurative Contingency.” He is Assistant Professor of American Literature at Queen’s University, in Kingston, Ontario.
       

      Works Cited

         

      • Berlant, Lauren. “Cruel Optimism: On Marx, Loss and the Senses.” New Formations: A Journal of Culture/Theory/Politics 63 (2007-2008): 33-51. Web. 27 Oct. 2010.
      • Jarrell, Randall. Poetry and the Age. London: Faber & Faber Limited, 1955. Print.
      • Love, Heather. “Compulsory Happiness and Queer Existence.” New Formations: A Journal of Culture/Theory/Politics 63 (2007-2008): 52-64. Web. 27 Oct. 2010.
      • Nietzsche, Friedrich. The Gay Science: with a prelude in German rhymes and an appendix of songs. Ed. Bernard Williams. Trans. Josefine Nauckhoff and Adrian Del Caro. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2001. Print.
      • Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky. A Dialogue on Love. Boston: Beacon Press, 1999. Print.
      •  

  • Terror, Representation, and Postmodern Lessons in Hitler Studies

    Alan Nadel (bio)
    University of Kentucky
    amnade2@email.uky.edu

    Review of: Karen Engle, Seeing Ghosts: 9/11 and the Visual Imagination. Montreal & Kingston: McGill-Queens UP, 2009. Print.

    Jeffrey Melnick, 9/11 Culture. West Sussex, UK: Wiley-Blackwell, 2009. Print.

    Marc Redfield, The Rhetoric of Terror: Reflections on 9/11 and the War on Terror. New York: Fordham UP, 2009. Print.

    Phillip E. Wegner, Life between Two Deaths, 1989-2001: U.S. Culture in the Long Nineties. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 2009. Print.

     

     
    Hapless Jack Gladney seems to have wandered into the postmodern world of Don DeLillo’s White Noise directly out a David Lodge novel. The chair of a Department of Hitler Studies in a small Midwestern college, Gladney feels an obligation to remain neutral about Hitler (a position in part facilitated by Gladney’s inability to read German). What makes Gladney a man ahead of his time is DeLillo’s reliance on the fact that “Hitler Studies” is painfully anachronistic, a point illustrated by the way the term “Nazi” seems to have lost its intellectual content. “Nazism: Hitler Studies:: Poststructuralism: Postmodernism” might be the answer to a hypothetical SAT question, but in what year? In 1934, before SAT questions or postmodernism existed? In a non-existent future, after the moment when Hitler Studies will have had emerged as an institutionalized option of the liberal education? Is Nazism the nexus of a potentially renewable intellectual engine, we are forced to ask, or simply a leveling pejorative, the relic of a bygone moment (except in the Vatican) when the word signified—as does today the word Republican (or Democrat, Tory, Liberal, or Socialist)—a viable political movement with issues and agendas? The problem of Hitler Studies, both for Gladney and for DeLillo’s readers, is to construct an imaginary space wherein Hitler Studies attributes to an academic field a vitality and a legitimacy that it denies to Hitler himself. Constructing this space fissures the seam where imagining is cemented to conceiving, for we can certainly imagine Hitler Studies by applying paradigms from other “interdisciplinary” academic programs: conferences and journals clustered around loci of mystery and controversy, requirements of the major, curricula that partition and redistribute privileged topics along temporal, geographic or disciplinary axes (e.g., “Hitler’s Art and Nazi Aesthetics,” “Hitler’s Rhetoric,” “Hitler and Globalization,” “The Semiotics of the Hitlerian,” “The Rise and Fall of the Third Reich,” etc.).
     
    What is so discomforting—in both the best and worst sense of that word—about the plethora of writing on “9/11” is that it evokes the same contradictions as does the (fictive) world containing a place for Hitler Studies. Can we study the event of 9/11 with Jack Gladney’s intellectual and ethical distance, and if not, can we be said to be “studying” it—as opposed to invoking, or denouncing, or mourning, or memorializing it—at all? All four of the books at hand evoke this question, and even more so in conjunction. Jeffrey Melnick (9/11 Culture), treating the destruction of the twin towers and the panoply of its cultural fallout as a series of questions, comes closest to Jack Gladney’s objectivity. Philip E. Wegner (Life between Two Deaths, 1989-2001) resembles Gladney as cultural historian, and Marc Redfield (The Rhetoric of Terror) manifests Gladney’s philosophical doubt. Karen Engle (Seeing Ghosts) resembles Gladney’s haunted aspect in his uncertainty about how to interpret signs and meanings, how to distinguish in his own perceptions between the visionary and the hallucinatory, and in his own conclusions between insight and paranoia. Melnick raises better questions, to be sure, than Gladney, and Wegner is a much better cultural historian. Redfield and Engle, similarly, are more genuinely philosophical than Gladney, and both are a hell of a lot smarter. All four authors, moreover—like those who try to ward off misfortunes by imagining that they are about to occur—express awareness of their awkward positionality in relation to their topic. But it is still hard to shake off the disquieting concern that all these books exist in, or at least are haunted by, the hypothetical space of Hitler Studies, since the very act of imagining Hitler Studies makes its actuality inconceivable.
     
    Herein, we enter an ontological loop where the inconceivability of Hitler Studies is as absolute as is the reality of Hitler’s actions. How is this possible? Or to put it another way, if imagining a Department of Hitler Studies in some way makes the question of Hitler academic and so distances Hitler from reality somehow, is there an ethical dilemma in reducing Hitler to pure simulacrum, or an epistemological dilemma in knowing him only as a representation? At the same time, given that the past does not exist, all we ever know of it are representations: records, photographs, memories, written accounts, relics. In that regard, the emergence of Hitler Studies claims a futurity from the perspective of which our current absurdities merge with our past horrors, and we become the captives of the events we are trying to capture.
     
    Thus history is always captivating, regardless of the terms of that captivity. This insight implicitly connects Redfield, Melnick, Engle, and Wegner, all captives in one way or another of the phenomena clustered around the term “9/11,” for, as Redfield explains, “very quickly the name-date became a slogan, a blank little scar around which nationalist energies could be marshaled” (1). The authors, linked by the illusiveness of that ambiguous name-date, often invoke Derrida to help explain its slippery logistics. “Derrida tells us that mourning and memory are inextricably tied to the proper name” (39), Engle explains in an attempt to analyze the photo image named Falling Man, a figure that in its namelessness she sees as a metonym for the whole 9/11 event: “The work of mourning—for this man, for this day—is permanently disrupted by the impossibility of recognition, the failed identification of the victim. This failure cannot be overemphasized, for it is through this failure that the profundity of Falling Man‘s iconicity begins to emerge” (39).
     
    The failure of the visual, furthermore, complements a failure of the verbal, as Melnick shows in his chapter on the rumors that simultaneously infuse and bracket the event. These rumors interweave, creating a vast non-fabric of threads tugged in every direction: Arabs in a Detroit (or was it Bakersfield?) restaurant cheered when the towers went down, BUT the Jews working at those towers were mysteriously warned not to show up for work that day, BUT a Middle-eastern-looking man in New Jersey purchased inordinately large amounts of candy just before Halloween in order to poison trick-or-treating children, BUT the towers were actually taken down by explosives planted in their base by the Bush administration, AND the Pentagon was actually hit by a missile, BUT the real point of the attack was to control African-American minorities. Significantly, the circulation of what Melnick calls these “wedge-driving” rumors employs the same avenues of public discourse as do the channels of news and music and expressions of community action, memorialization, and patriotism. Therefore, if 9/11 culture is “constituted by the labors of historians, fictions writers, journalists, musical artists, and so on trying to make the tragedy available to the widest possible public as their own story” (35), Melnick notes that it also allows “the illusion of care and community-building to satisfy much more self-absorbed goals” (35).
     
    The snapshot also figures cogently in the tension between official representation and cultural counter-statement. Melnick champions photography, especially the impromptu sort, as “the most valuable form of democratic cultural expression in the months after the attacks” (65). Thus, he implicitly marks the snapshot as a kind of counter-terrorism, one undertaken by an array of agents. Even though he feels that the New York Times‘s “Portraits of Grief” feature efficiently “cornered the market on remembrance” (76), Melnick praises the Times as the “first cultural actor to take note of the ‘snapshot culture’ . . . [and] to reproduce it in a representational economy of scale” (77). He qualifies his praise, however, by reminding us that the Times’s “standardization of the snapshots . . . made it clear that a corporate 9/11 culture was born almost simultaneously with the collapse of the towers” (77). Melnick’s book is full of these ups and downs, with a whole chapter devoted explicitly to the imagery of rising and falling that proliferates in fiction, film, and visual art after 9/11. Notably, Melnick uses the chapter’s title, “Rising,” to foreground the culture’s impetus toward uplift, most powerfully represented by Bruce Springsteen’s blockbuster record, The Rising, a conscious 9/11 memorial, especially to the kind of working people that Springsteen’s earliest music celebrated. As with the Times “Portraits,” it is impossible to separate commercial and corporate interests from the production of public commemoration.
     
    Nonetheless, Melnick highlights the value of rising as a counter-imagery to what he calls “the central visual reality of 9/11: falling” (78). Claiming simultaneously that it is the central image and also the taboo image in the wake of 9/11, Melnick makes falling both center and margin in 9/11 culture. From 2001 to 2005, the taboo against falling is generally observed; Clear Channel’s list of banned songs included “a number of ‘falling’ songs” (80). In its place, Melnick contends, “rising” imagery prevailed. (The film Chicken Little and the novel Extremely Loud and Incredibly Close, he feels, typify this trend.) By 2006 we find images of paper falling and in Oliver Stone’s World Trade Center the sound of bodies hitting the ground, which created cultural permission for the representation of falling bodies. Except that, Melnick points out, the 2004 novel Windows on the World ends with “a man jumping out of the titular restaurant with his two kids” (89); except that a significant Esquire article discussed falling imagery as early as 2003 and addressed Richard Drew’s earlier well-circulated photo of the anonymous falling man; except that Eric Fischl’s Tumbling Woman sculpture was mounted in Rockefeller Center in 2002, on the first anniversary of 9/11. Even though the sculpture was renounced as tasteless and quickly covered up, its subsequent removal as much disproves the falling taboo as demonstrates it, as does Melnick’s decision to hold these earliest details to the end of his chapter, such that we read backwards, from the absence of an image to its appearance, to its presence and disappearance during the period of its absence.
     
    To the extent that Melnick is correct about his details, then, the rising imagery that celebrates the nation’s (and its corporate interests’) response to the collapse of the towers (and the falling bodies that preceded the collapse and the fallout that proceeded from it) continuously marks the falling that it excludes. Melnick’s analysis thus turns The Rising into a sign of falling. What, after all would be the point of Springsteen’s relentless insistence on rising—the words “rise” or “rising,” Melnick points out, appear in more than half the songs on the record—if nothing had fallen, if this music did not come after the fall? And how are we to interpret Melnick’s linking of the public’s revulsion at Tumbling Woman with his claim that the jumpers, like the snapshot phenomenon, were “a tragic expression of American democracy: a racially and economically diverse mix of bond traders, restaurant workers, and administrative assistants waited at those windows” (emphasis added, 92)? Melnick thus provides many examples of the way that 9/11’s up/down dichotomy is a version of the symbiosis, in Derridean fashion, of inside and outside. This loop of symbiotic inversion pervasively structures our representation of the event, which—like the site called Ground Zero—comprises an open space that is too full.
     
    By contrast, consider how Engle, whose debt to Derrida is explicit, deals with some of the same details: “As Derrida writes, the desired demarcation of insides and outsides has never been fully realized” (14). Engle points this out in order to explain how the covering up of Tumbling Woman, prior to her removal, manifests the obscenity it tries to obscure: in exactly the way, I have suggested, the imagery of rising and Melnick’s celebration of it marks the taboo, and then the not-taboo, and actually the always-already of a taboo-being-violated.
     
    Seeing Ghosts, Engle’s provocative examination of 9/11’s engagement by what she calls “the visual imagination,” starts with a series of contemplations on Tumbling Woman to illustrate how, as “Derrida so eloquently argues, that which is associated with the graphic is fundamentally associated with the improper—that condition or state of exteriority and distance from the truth, self-presence, and Being” (13). And yet in Tumbling Woman‘s incompletion—her removal from the narrative of her fall, her removal from the history of events that inform that fall, her removal from the completion of her fall, her removal from visual display, her removal from Rockefeller Center—the sculpture restages the displacement of 9/11 in the visual imagination. This may not point us to a narrative of democracy, as Melnick would have it (either directly or metonymically), but rather to the horror of our own historicity: “She has not yet finished dying and the future between her impact and her death remains open. This is the history,” Engle writes, “we cannot yet begin to imagine” (18).
     
    Similarly, Engle implicitly interrogates Melnick’s praise of snapshots when she looks at the array of photographs surrounding 9/11 in juxtaposition with Richard Drew’s photograph, Falling Man, an eerily singular shot of a man in mid-drop, head pointed directly down, almost in an acrobatic pose. The man has never been definitively identified, and the photo was decried and subsequently pulled from circulation while at the same time circulating as an image of public discourse, the ultimate example of the falling taboo in violation. Some felt that the image was “pornographic,” presumably in that invited a prurient engagement with the intimacy of this man’s death. At the same time, Engle points out, the remains from Ground Zero were transported to Fresh Kills, Staten Island, where they were meticulously sorted and classified, then photographed and exhibited:
     

    An exhibition, Recovery: The World Trade Center Recovery Exhibition at Fresh Kills, emerged out of the documentation of the Fresh Kills operation. Whereas Drew’s photograph was decried and condemned, images of a recovered tooth in a test tube, frozen tissue samples, and workers sifting through remains were framed and hung on museum walls.
     

    (44)

     
    Postcards and faces too haunt 9/11. Not just as ghosts but as composites with proscriptive messages, the postcards provide templates for imagining and historicizing the event. And yet, along with their imagery and iconography, they also circulate news of instability and uncertainty. “From technical reproductions of images on postcards,” Engle explains,
     

    to the mass production of cards featuring the same images, to the millions of cards with their infinity of messages and images circulating around the globe, postcards operate simultaneously according to logics of reduction, replication, and multiplication. Bearing an uncanny resemblance to the movements of viral transmission, postcards expose a fundamental instability within the system of language and the tradition of linear history.
     

    (62)

     

    One constructed postcard image features Uncle Sam standing Paul Bunyan-like above the New York skyline, his fist clenched, his forearm bulging, his arm reared back as though he were about to land a powerhouse punch on the nose of the next incoming plane. Many postcards present a collage of shots of the towers aflame superimposed on the broader skyline of lower Manhattan full of vast black smoke. In one example, the words “Attack on Manhattan” appear across the upper right quadrant of the picture, just above smaller words, in a more uneven typeface: “The Unthinkable.” Another shows a waving American flag superimposed on a close-up of the rubble at Ground Zero, and some cards inscribe bits of texts such as the Pledge of Allegiance or the song “You’ll Never Walk Alone” against an array of 9/11 backdrops. While intending to create a sense of national unity, a message from an “I” to a “you” comprising an “Us,” these cards communicate ambiguous messages, perhaps the most troubling being that they gesture “toward a myth of national community that obscures the everyday violations of individual rights enacted against the apparently self-evident and protected group: the American people” (Engle, 76).

     
    Extensively detailing the sense of national unity that crossed racial divides to create a post-9/11 “Us,” particularly in popular music, Melnick too shows how fragile that unity was, evoking as much critique as assertion, which only accelerated with the assault on Iraq. Both Engle and Melnick explain convincingly how the culture reflects the contradictions in the claims that 9/11 united the nation against a common enemy, and Engle is particularly astute in her analysis of the imagery representing that “enemy,” especially the use of homoerotic images to demean bin Laden. If Engle is insightful about the way this imagery questions American masculinity in the process of asserting it, both she and Melnick make clear that the gender politics of 9/11 re-masculinize the national imaginary by assigning women to a subordinate role, a trait that the film World Trade Center shares with the stories spun around rescued soldier Jessica Lynch and Abu Ghraib prison guard Lynndie England. Engle and Melnick also explain that what Melnick calls “shout outs” merge and muddle the acts of mourning and the attempts at memorializing.
     
    “Virtual trauma,” the first of two concepts produced by the events of 9/11 that Marc Redfield insightfully contemplates, bears directly on the points made by Melnick, and even more so by Engle. If one might describe Melnick’s book as surveying the spectrum of media that represent 9/11 and the array of mediations they produce, Redfield examines how those mediations structurally connect to the commemorative and the traumatic, to our ability to name and to mourn. In every aspect of its meaning, the name-date 9/11 depends on a time mediated by the futurity that makes commemoration possible as well as by a present that makes repetition immanent. This tension between temporalities in effect drains the name-date and empties it out, as Redfield shows: “Imperatively and imperialistically, the empty date suggests itself as a zero point, the ground of a quasi-theological turn or conversion: everything changed that day, as the U.S. mainstream media so often tells itself” (17). As it mediates time, 9/11 produces mediated space: “Just as there is now only one ‘September 11,’ there is now only one ‘Ground Zero,’ capitalized. But the latter term has been torn not out of the calendar but out of the lexicon of atomic warfare” (23). As such, the term “both calls up and wards off the ghost of Hiroshima” (23) at the same time that it effaces the future by suggesting a site of survival rather than of nuclear annihilation, connoted by the non-capitalized uses of “ground zero.” Steeped in the rhetoric of targeting, the name “stokes a fantasy of omnipotence that is inseparable from vulnerability and exposure” (25).
     
    Drawing on the recent work of Donald Pease, Redfield elaborates the relationship between this fantastic space and many confused claims of innocence: “The zero is a ground, American ground, the virgin space of a new beginning (‘everything changed’), the guarantee of a wounded innocence and a good conscience” (24). The site Ground Zero both evokes and deploys competing narratives of innocence. To the extent that “zero” becomes the baseline for culpability, the litmus test of innocence, its appropriation as a national site produces the troubling question that nearly got Professor Ward Churchill expelled from the University of Colorado, in effect: how innocent were the people whose occupations centered on world trade and who worked in the lap of Wall Street? Similarly, some African Americans expressed discomfort over being identified as part of the power system which bin Laden held accountable for what he saw as U.S. imperialism, while others saw the event as transcending racial divides (at the same time, of course, that it was erecting new ones).
     
    Like racial and national identities, like the significations attached to “ground zero,” the notion of innocence does not so much describe a fact as initiate its contestation. If all of these books demonstrate anything, it is that nothing about 9/11 is innocent. At the heart of the conflicts over innocence, these books suggest to me, is the unacknowledged fact that the term can refer to radically different realms of reference. Innocence can entail issues of law, evidence, procedure, and (potential) punishment. The word can also refer to the disposition of the soul. Yet a third type of innocence denotes lack of experience, often but not necessarily sexual. Slippage among these meanings, however, seems almost inevitable, as they circulate in a slippery chain of cultural substitution. The loss of sexual innocence can entail an illegal act and/or can affect the disposition of the soul, depending on the legal, social, or spiritual referents one invokes. Innocence thus activates some entrenched confusion connected to, if not partially caused by, the infusion of secular life with theological myths, meanings, attributes, or wants. In what ways was 9/11 an attack on the innocent? In a purely criminal context, the victims were innocent and the perpetrators guilty, but as these books show, 9/11 is transcendent in issues of law because it put U.S. retaliation above the rule of law. The U.S., holding itself innocent in the eyes of God as well as the eyes of the law, set out to seek God’s revenge–a point President George Bush II made in his famous post-9/11 speech, and which he and numerous of his supporters have reiterated frequently. God is on the side of the United States because it was innocent, as innocent as the innocent people in the World Trade Center whom God chose not to protect. This argument uses evidence—9/11, Ground Zero—to transcend the need for evidence: doing God’s work makes evidence irrelevant, because it is hubris to try to prove anything to God, something that would of course be clear to someone such as George Bush II, who believes God had chosen him to run for President.
     
    But when innocence is debated on spiritual grounds rather than forensic, it is glossed—or outed—by the actions of the terrorists whose claims to spiritual innocence warranted their actions; that innocence was epitomized by the virgins promised them in heaven. The terrorists’ innocence gave them access to innocent young women, who, under heavenly auspices, would lose their innocence by surrendering it to the oxymoronically innocent terrorists. The forensic guilt for their attack on the secular nation and on secular institutions was thus the reciprocal purchase of innocent victims. Evaluated in such a spiritual economy, they could neither feel guilt for what they were about to do, nor be guilty for what they had done. In the end, it was all very innocent: innocent victims, innocent victors. In this context, post-9/11 stages a struggle for the rhetorical position from which to ascribe the guilt.
     
    Although Redfield does not address the concept of innocence in these terms, its specific dualities are consistent with those he ascribes to “September 11” and to “Ground Zero”:
     

    Both terms move beyond themselves, as it were, and in a double sense: on the one hand, by emphasizing survival and encouraging all the phantasms of power—of picturing, targeting, annihilating, and consuming—that drive the “war on terror”; on the other hand, by surreptitiously exploiting an iterability and finitude conditioning of all life, technology, and mourning . . . . The more the world superpower dials the 9-1-1 emergency number, gives a name and a face to evil and goes to war, the more haunting September 11 becomes. Overwritten by atrocity after atrocity committed in its name, its afterimage persists.
     

    (47)

     
    The geographical and temporal dislocations involved with name-date and site-name also help explain why the event of 9/11 was often compared to a movie, illustrating once again the way visual paradigms, in their failure, continue to haunt representation. If most people who saw 9/11 or saw news of it did so via television, what they saw was already a movie, an event viewed through the contrivance of cinematic conventions that inform traumatic spectatorship. In this way, the event was a form of reverse engineering in that the movie conventions that mediated its reception also informed its production:
     

    On the one hand, the phrase “it was like a movie” conjures up not just an excess of event over believability but a sense that this event is to be mediated, would have no sense, perhaps would not even have occurred if it were not being recorded and transmitted. . . . On the other hand, the cameras and transmitters repeat the terroristic violation of human dignity itself, reducing someone’s pain and death to an image, stripping away the soul in capturing a representation of the body.
     

    (30-31)

     

    Here Redfield usefully evokes the Burkean idea that the sublime enables the spectator to imagine surviving his or her own death, to suggest that “in being ‘like a movie’, in soliciting the spectator to identify with the inhuman camera, the spectacle-transmission renders the spectator part of a process of mediation in which time and space suffer dislocation” (35). Thus, the rhetorical import of the name-date and the site-name, the language of targeting and of televisualizing simultaneously demand and obstruct mourning, a conclusion that Redfield shares with Melnick and Engle, although he demonstrates it with arguments of a different register (except when he discusses the films World Trade Center and United 93).

     
    In turning to his second scrutinized term, “war on terror,” Redfield draws heavily on Agamben to argue that “at the heart of modernity’s rudimentarily secularized idea of sovereignty lies terror: a terror proper to sovereignty itself” (54). Explaining how the “terrorist” is essential to the constitution of the modern state, Redfield demonstrates forcefully and effectively that “the declaration of war on terror is at once the most obvious, overdetermined, and obscure speech act of our era” (91). Just as Redfield ends the first half of the book with a sentimental gesture toward the possibility of “true mourning, if we achieve it” (47), the deconstructive energies of the second half evoke the utopian possibility of moving from the paradigm of perpetual war to that of perpetual peace: “as ‘peace’ becomes the site of a certain excess within language and thought, a nonapocalyptic openness to the future may be said to emerge” (94).
     
    Redfield’s move connects the examinations of cultural representation produced by Melnick and by Engle to Phillip E. Wegner’s reading of cultural allegories between 1989 and 2001—what Wegner calls “the long nineties”—so as to periodize the cultural history that culminates with 9/11. Quoting the final lines of Don DeLillo’s Underworld, a meditation on the possibility of a word becoming a thing in the world, a word identified at the end of the novel as “peace,” Wegner shares with Redfield a desire to summon the possibility of peace as the utopian impetus of 9/11’s apocalyptic narratives. To this end, Wegner pursues a historical analysis based on identifying and tracing cultural allegories. In other words, telos rather than scope of content connects Wegner to the other 9/11 books in this group, in that they all are attempting to ask what comes after 9/11. The details of the haunted space that Engle sees there and the contradictions implicit in its cultural artifacts, delineated by Melnick, are consistent with the logic traced by Redfield. When that logic yields authority to utopian desire, Redfield is in effect willing an after-9/11-ness that fills the implicit void articulated by Melnick and Engle. Using a logic of historical dialectics—grounded in what led up to 9/11—Wegner attempts, similarly, to replace the haunted void with a utopian vision.
     
    For him, 9/11 marks the end of a period initiated by the fall of the Berlin Wall and the collapse of Soviet Communism. In that period, as Wegner describes it, neoliberal energies consolidate around the triumphalism associated with Francis Fukuyama’s declaration that history had come to an end. In the context of this pseudo-utopian vision of a world order in which American power, influence, and values flourish uncontested, Wegner identifies the dystopian strains to which, at the end of this period, 9/11 gives visibility. To put it another way, if 9/11 marks the end of the end of history, the nightmare of history that was always there announces itself—as all nightmares do—at the moment of awakening. For Wegner, 9/11 is a wake-up call that makes visible the fact that historical possibility is open-ended.
     
    Underworld thematized this historical possibility as a retrospective allegory of the long Cold War period that preceded Wegner’s “long nineties.” In those long nineties, Wegner demonstrates, the three films of The Terminator series “form a dialectical sequence . . . as each film reworks the ideological and political raw materials of its predecessor” (62), sequentially reflecting the world-views of the three previous Republican Presidents. About the two versions of the film Cape Fear and the novel on which it was based, Wegner fruitfully asks, “what are the fears, the ‘real life’ to which the figure of [the villain] Cady has given form?” (87). With finely nuanced readings, Wegner shows that each version of the Cape Fear narrative reflects the anxieties of its historical moment: the novel reflecting Cold War gender anxieties, the first version of the film reflecting late 1950s racial conflict, and the Scorsese 1991 remake manifesting “the explosive reemergence . . . of anxieties about new forms of class conflict” (88).
     
    These chapters, which constitute the first half of the book, historicize the cultural possibilities that provide Wegner’s raison d’être. They illustrate, as well, how he develops his allegorical readings and the historical purposes to which he puts them. His larger goal, as he makes clear from the beginning, is not just to historicize but to construct the conditions of utopian possibility. Thus he examines the films Ghost Dog and Fight Club to demonstrate the relationship between the naturalist tradition and dystopian narrative, and to explore “the way they adapt the formal strategies of the dystopia, as well as its precursors in naturalist fiction, to the new situation of what has been variously described as an emergent global postindustrial, post-Fordist, or service economy” (124). The final third of the book looks at works that provide what Wegner identifies as a way out of the dystopian: the film Independence Day (read alongside Derrida’s Specters of Marx in order to tease out an allegorical conception of the messianic), the Forever novel trilogy, Octavia Butler’s Parable novels, and the television show Buffy the Vampire Slayer.
     
    For Wegner, 9/11 thus creates the occasion for the shift into a new cultural stage, a way out of life caught between death’s rehearsal and its restaging. The first sentence of the book’s final paragraph tells us that we have arrived “at the most significant lessons that we can take away from these extended narratives” (216-17). In articulating the tension of the two deaths that impel his periodizing, Wegner thus constructs an argument caught between an informing moral teleology and specific cultural anxieties. These works teach Wegner more than something about the conditions of their production, the complexity of those conditions, and the layers of displacement that those complexities produce; they also teach him how we should envision the future, how we should live in historical time. In Wegner’s reach for the utopian, one is reminded of the end of The Political Unconscious, where Jameson argues that religion, as a utopian discourse, is a form of Marxism. This move may be glib or optimistic or admirable, and from my perspective, at least, only a curmudgeon—or worse, a libertarian—would be completely unsympathetic to Jameson’s (and hence Wegner’s) objective, which is progressive, reconciliatory, and social-minded. It is similarly hard to object to a methodology that is detailed and clever.1
     
    To what extent, however, does Wegner’s utopian tale wag the postmodern dog? If the idea that everything is narrative is a postmodern concept amenable to the allegorizing methodology used here to contextualize the postmodern condition within a progressive teleology, perhaps the allegorical method succeeds not because of the trajectory it reflects but simply because everything is narrative. From my perspective, the meaning of the term culture and the value of cultural criticism derive from the fact that at any historical moment, specific narratives acquire cogency. That value lies, however, not in subsuming narrativity to the interests of metanarrative, but in demonstrating that cogent narratives do not constitute a coherent whole, because at the moments of conflict and contradiction, at the sites where competing or self-contradictory narratives are sutured, ideology becomes most visible. The allegorical aspect of culture follows from the idea that culture is the product of narratives.
     
    But what follows from all of this? Although Wegner appropriately uses the name-date to mark an end to historical opacity, if one is to build on his work, it is necessary to go beyond the position contra Fukuyama. If 9/11 creates the rupture through which the signs of history must be acknowledged, by what process do those signs enter the flow of historical representation, the flow upon which 9/11 has returned our focus? The dilemma of inside/outside, the power of enfoliation that torments the capacity to represent 9/11 (as Engle and Redfield so convincingly demonstrate), makes us ponder not only what 9/11 was and what it means, but what follows, in the light of which allegorical thinking—as the juxtaposition of these other books with Wegner’s makes a little more clear—is a form of wishful thinking. This troubling issue confronts the stasis implicit in 9/11 souvenirs, those mementoes that replace the flow of history with the reification (and, Melnick emphasizes, the commodification) of memorials.
     
    The next step, these books taken together remind us, is as uncertain as it is necessary. Dare we not consider what comes after bin Laden? While American military forces and intelligence operatives are going after him, so long as he escapes their capture, we remain his unwilling captives. Whether we consume with alacrity the souvenirs of his greatest triumph or critique with a vengeance the way that triumph is represented, whether we grouse at the humiliation of full body scanners at airports or support whole-heartedly the PATRIOT Act, we remain bin Laden’s captives. Until he is captured, he is free from facing any consequences or acknowledging any restrictions. This makes him the veritable leader of the free world, with everyone else his follower, in lockstep or in pursuit, however deceptive his trail, however hard it is to follow. No one can deny that crashing a plane into a tower of the World Trade Center is a hard act to follow, except by some of bin Laden’s followers, who crashed a second plane into the World Trade Center twenty minutes later. What followed is history. If that was the same history to which Fukuyama proclaimed an end, the reason may be that Fukuyama’s argument is harder to follow than bin Laden’s, which is simple almost to the point of being innocent: bin Laden represents the victims of Western imperialism. The U.S., he believes, has designs on the Muslim world that entail following cultural infiltration and economic coercion with military invasion. Because U.S. coercive power is directly connected to its wealth, the only way to combat its designs is to destroy its economy by luring it into a multi-trillion-dollar revenge fest.
     
    The validation of his argument was marked in the U.S. by a return to displaced historical narratives that followed a logic of associating 9/11 and Ground Zero with Iraq, hinging particularly on the idea that Saddam Hussein was the next Hitler. As each of these books demonstrates, in the wake of 9/11, the impossibility of representing 9/11 within historical time is a course-offering from the postmodern Department of Hitler Studies.
     

    Alan Nadel, William T. Bryan Chair of American Literature and Culture at the University of Kentucky, is the author of four books, including Containment Culture (Duke University Press, 1995), Flatlining on the Field of Dreams: Cultural Narratives in the Films of President Reagan’s America (Rutgers University Press, 1997), and Television in Black-and-White America: Race and National Identity (University Press of Kansas, 2005). He is the editor of two books on August Wilson and the co-editor, with Susan Griffin, of Henry James and Alfred Hitchcock, the Men Who Knew Too Much (forthcoming from Oxford University Press). His poetry has appeared in several journals, among them: Georgia Review, New England Review, Paris Review, Partisan Review, and Shenandoah, and he has won prizes for the best essays in Modern Fiction Studies and PMLA.
     

    Footnotes

     
    1. The specter of Jameson looms extremely large in this book. The Index notes references to Jameson 67 times in Wegner’s text and an additional 42 times in his footnotes. Nor are the text citations brief; many contain quotes several lines long, and 22 of the Index items cite references that exceed one page. Jameson–cited, quoted, or discussed, on the average, once every two to three pages–provides the trajectory of the book’s argument, the methodology that supports it, and the objectives that inform it.
     
  • Modes of Luxurious Walking

    Apple Zefelius Igrek (bio)
    Seattle University
    igreka@seattleu.edu

    Review of: Allan Stoekl, Bataille’s Peak: Energy, Religion, and Postsustainability. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2007.

     

     
    If there is a single, obsessive object of thought in Georges Bataille – from Guilty (1944/1988) and Blue of Noon (1957/1978) to his magnum opus The Accursed Share (1949/1988) – it is the expenditure of wealth and energy. The very object of study, despite the rigid and calculated necessity of knowledge, transcends everything productive. Expenditure is at the core of human acquisition (in terms of knowledge, economy, and moral restraint), which implies that there is an irresistible violent force at work in all of our attempts to furnish subjectivity with some measure of concrete stability. This is precisely why Allan Stoekl writes in his introduction to Bataille’s Peak that the meaning and survival of the community is nothing else than an aftereffect of what is sacred, i.e., “the drive to spend without counting, without attempting to anticipate return” (xvii). The ethical, in a similar vein, cannot be separated from an incessant flash of energy that is itself only ever partially reducible to human needs and projects. In just this way, it is a radically heterogeneous form of religious experience which, for Bataille, provides us with an unknowable basis for thinking through our social and ethical relationships. This kind of experience is provocatively self-contradictory: it returns us, through ritualistic forms of sacrifice, to a kind of intimacy with the world which destroys its own conditions of knowledge.
     
    Keeping to this paradox of atheistic mysticism, Stoekl ably crafts a unique position in current environmental debates. These debates almost always privilege human subjectivity.1 A Bataillean model of energy and religion, by contrast, affirms no such humanistic principle. Stoekl’s position, then, is one which will emphasize expenditure both within and against the closed economies of utility and personal satisfaction (191). This in turn will expose a blind spot in contemporary theories of Empire which posit the “end of nature,” as such an end requires the very energy which it repudiates. Doubtless, this is a provocative undertaking; and Stoekl, who is highly regarded for his 1985 publication of Visions of Excess, brings it into focus with passionate writing and methodical expertise.
     
    Privileging excess and expenditure rather than conservation and self-interest, Bataille reverses the usual order of economic thinking. Such a reversal, as Stoekl reminds us, can be traced back – in certain respects – to Bruno and Sade. In the first, matter is equated with a kind of energy which is concomitantly active and passive. The formless, infinite nature of God, according to Bruno, cannot be separated from that which passively receives its concrete shape and reality. In this heterodoxical Christian position (for which Bruno was burned at the stake), matter is movement and movement is corruption and corruption, in turn, is regeneration. Physical barriers are thus broken down by the very action of nature through which God is immanently identified with both creativity and destruction. In a similar way, albeit from a violently atheistic perspective, Sade affirms an underlying principle of nature associated with sheer transformation. Contributing to this process is the manifestation of movement and the stimulation of senses via sovereign crime. The Sadean hero is indifferent to morality, and overthrows it by way of an extreme form of selfishness. Bataille, however, retains the paradox of a limit to be perpetually crossed: the death of God must be lived, otherwise we have returned to an apathetic transgression which destroys itself in its own egotistical assertion. For this reason, Stoekl rightly observes that Sade needs the human, and needs God, without which there is no criminal defiance (16). Bataille’s theory of expenditure begins with such a paradoxical formulation: moral awareness mustn’t be eradicated or toppled, but affirmed through its very destruction. The excess of God and human morality is to be discovered in a revision of Sadean crime which opens up the self to an immeasurable experience: “[A]n extreme devotion to crime—to, as the prewar Bataille would put it, the production of heterogeneous objects—leads, surprisingly, to a self-sacrificing generosity. The self is not simply destroyed in a whirlwind of energy; the self is destroyed through an excess of energy entailing a mortal gift of oneself in love, in crime, to the other” (28).
     
    Any discussion of Bataillean waste, excess, and profligacy invites the question as to whether this general economy should be distinguished from modern capitalist societies in which blind, ruinous extravagance seems to be the predominant moral imperative. If anything, modern industrial economies are built on extraordinary waste and extreme ecological devastation; thus one could plausibly argue, as Jean-Joseph Goux has, that the risk-taking ethos of transnational capitalism is the quintessential post-bourgeois embodiment of Bataillean expenditure (Stoekl 137). There is, of course, an all too obvious blind spot to this eternal perpetuation of cultural and economic excess: it cannot be sustained. As demand for energy dramatically increases over the next few decades, we will surely witness, as predicted by the petroleum geologist M. King Hubbert (in what is called, alluding to a bell-curve graph, “Hubbert’s Peak”), a vast and imminent depletion of our fossil fuel resources. Stoekl draws the discomfiting but probable conclusion that “the more or less constant growth in productivity, production, and profits the world experienced over the last century, tracked with a commensurate population increase, based as both were on increases in energy production, is nearing its end” (119). If we will soon reach a point where we can no longer rely upon large quantities of highly concentrated sources of energy, without which the very essence of modern consumerist subjectivity will be thrown into disarray, then a call to personal sacrifice must not be far behind. Thus, Lisa H. Newton, in direct response to the problem of scarcity, argues for a simpler and more authentic life in contrast to the currently unsustainable levels of status-driven consumption (Stoekl 120). Sustaining our globalized economy at a more appropriate, more rational level will necessarily require a fundamental change in our approach to natural resources. This implies the conservation of energy, to be sure, but Newton also links this approach to a moral and religiously inspired perspective, one which renounces easy pleasure and artificial consumerism. The new self – simple, austere, rational – seems to be absolutely crucial to the survival of the planet. In this context, Bataille’s theory of excess life and wild expenditure would appear to be deeply problematic.
     
    Without falling back on eco-religion, evangelical environmentalism, or various strands of consumerist humanism, Stoekl makes the radically innovative argument that Bataille’s theory of expenditure, when properly modified and updated, helps us to carve out a post-sustainable ecological perspective. The critics Stoekl draws on, by contrast, all rely upon some version (hidden or otherwise) of anthropocentric ethics. They are based upon human instrumentality, and thus they cannot be severed from a project-oriented subject. If we think back to Newton, we are reminded of the need to cultivate an “authentic self,” one sustained by its rational interdependence with nature. It follows that the simple, honest self is the self that survives. Likewise, Gary Gardner invokes religion as a means of fostering ecological awareness through ritual, tradition, and community bonding (Stoekl 153) — not an inherently bad message. Nevertheless, Stoekl questions whether this is simply a religious pretense: “If we reconfigure religion only to ‘foster and sustain’, then to what extent can we continue even to believe in the independent power and validity of religion? Doesn’t it simply become one more tool, suited to the accomplishment of a task?” (155). Even the irrationally self-destructive individualism of David Brooks falls into this camp: the future of the happy, anti-conventional American subject is predicated upon an elusive but ideal wholeness which is the highest aim and accomplishment. In Bataille, the highest point justifies nothing. The summit – or peak – is always already equated with a sacrificial leap. Stoekl refers to this as the “good duality” in Bataille: there is a presupposition of limits, language and self-consciousness, as well as the infinite movement of loss and death which can never be contained by those evanescent boundaries. In consequence, there arises a sovereign form of life, self-consciousness, and history: “A self-consciousness . . . that grasps ‘humanity’ not as a stable or even dynamic presence, but as a principle of loss and destruction. A history not of peak moments of empire, democracy, or class struggle, but as exemplary instances of expenditure” (53).
     
    Stoekl’s appropriation of Bataille, in light of the above quote, will strike many readers as counter-productive—to put it very politely. The only feasible solution to an ever-growing energy crisis, it will be said again, includes an ethics of self-restraint and a politics of ecological sustainability. Stoekl, however, reminds us that if Hubbert’s model is indeed correct, as it appears to be, then the very idea of sustainability is itself unsustainable. A permanently sustainable economy defies the same material and historical conditions that would otherwise make it seem so urgently necessary. Furthermore, to the extent that we are moved by irrational, excessive desires, it may be nearly impossible to convince the masses to follow a simple, austere, and authentic life (122). A more reasonable adaptation, Stoekl argues, taps into the same expenditure which most of us already pursue in a minor, attenuated form. Consumer spending, in fact, may itself be a response to this desire which is more primordial than our moral constructs. But now it would seem that we have come full circle: how is this desire for excess experiences to be distinguished from the same economic activity which apparently brought us to our present catastrophic situation?
     
    The multi-layered, complex, book-length answer elaborated in Bataille’s Peak cannot be given here. The shorter answer, however, can be stated in two parts. First, Bataillean expenditure should be modified by taking into consideration qualitative differences between docile and insubordinate forms of energy. The fact that the former is a finite, quickly disappearing resource implies that we can no longer afford to ignore, as Bataille could, the issues of energy depletion and cultural decline (Stoekl 42). Drawing from two Heidegger essays, “The Question concerning Technology” and “The Age of the World Picture” (1977), Stoekl contextualizes weak, mechanized forms of expenditure by reference to fossil fuel consumption. Because we assume the world exists for us in a quantifiable way – to be conquered, stockpiled, and used up – we ourselves become a disposable thing or object: “Man the subject for whom the objective world exists as a resource is quickly reversed and becomes man the object who, under the right conditions, is examined, marshaled, and then releases a specific amount of energy before he himself is definitively depleted” (131). Docile energy, Stoekl surmises, makes for docile subjects. Only after we have acknowledged this contemporary fact are we able to complement the first part with a second: insubordinate forms of energy are essential to insubordinate forms of action. In the general movement of social ecstasy and expenditure, by way of which we transgress ourselves in moments of physical intimacy, we open the isolated self to an immensity which can be neither measured nor stockpiled. Nor can it be experienced through the timeless efficiency of the car: “As the ultimate common denominator, the car brings together, in the isolation of vapid subjectivity, social classes and identities. All are one on the freeway, mixing while not mixing, moving around the empty circuit of gutted urban space” (184). The simulacrum of freedom is achieved through speed, empty signifiers, and the indifferent reproduction of subjectivity. Excess is thus transformed into pure stream of consciousness, and our “cursed flesh” disappears as an abstract, useless obstacle to absolute technological freedom. By contrast, the inefficient movement, the clumsy and death-bound use of time, holds out the best promise for a post-sustainable future: walking, dancing, cycling, and spending oneself in a wounded but effervescent fusion of the self with the other (190). Passion and ecstatic movement in the post-fossil fuel era will therefore “be one of local incidents, ruptures, physical feints, evasions and expulsions (of matter, of energy, of enthusiasm of desire)” (190). As opposed to a closed economy of the useful, practical self, in which every moment of loss is immediately sublimated as a higher purpose and function, Bataille’s affirmation of an intimate relationship with the world and others necessarily subordinates the higher truth – and every mode of instant communication – to a formless substratum or base matter that will forever escape human domination.
     
    This twofold response helps Stoekl to resituate contemporary arguments on both Empire and the totalized city. Drawing from Michel de Certeau’s “Walking in the City” (1980), Stoekl traces the historical loss of the body through the creation of a universal, albeit anonymous, modern subjectivity. The automobile, as already put forth, reframes reality so that everything is construed according to an “always but never changing image on the (wind)screen” (184). The car thus becomes a grand historical symbol of speed, freedom, transcendence, and the conquest of nature. But at the same time, none of this is possible without fuel. The same subject that manifests itself as pure movement and pure sovereignty is also a function of certain finite resources. Insofar as de Certeau fails to consider the role of cheap fossil fuel inputs in connection with the utopian and totalized city, he is unable to rethink the expenditure of energy as a mode of resistance to modern networks of conformity and surveillance. Stoekl, however, sees in de Certeau’s walker an intimation of another kind of energy subversion. What is crucial at this historical juncture isn’t only the unusual and peculiar connotations of the walker in contrast with the commodified autonomy of the driver, but furthermore the “spectacular waste of body energy” (188). This movement of intimate corporeal existence, wasting itself on a “grossly inefficient” effort (192), gestures toward something beyond the virtual reality of today’s Empire. As the universal city is no longer restricted by space or time, even the speeding car is being outpaced and outdistanced by the ubiquitous circulation of signs, images, and capital. And as the global scale shrinks to the size of instantaneous communication, the old dualities of private and public, society and nature, real and artificial, are quickly vanishing. Yet this very dialectic, which seemingly overcomes itself in a new, bland form of media domination, cannot possibly exist without a specific relationship to labor. Stoekl observes that in this respect Hardt and Negri, who would reduce all natural phenomena to moments of history (196), remain firmly tethered to Marx and Kojève—at least inasmuch as the historical returns us to a concrete function of labor. But even human labor has its limits. It is no more autonomous than the myth of Man which it intermittently supports, for it produces nothing in the absence of fuel (x). And fossil fuels are a natural fact: “Labor power discovered these fuels, put them to work, ‘harnessed’ them, transformed their energy into something useful. But labor power did not put the fuels into the earth” (197). There are, consequently, limits to Empire. And one of the most crucial limits, for us, is the imminent depletion of highly concentrated forms of energy. If the global spectacle is slowing down and a sustainable response is hardly sustainable (as Stoekl previously argued), it seems that we will have to rethink excess expenditure. Bataille’s Peak performs this task on every page, and does so in the most formidable, difficult terms—by reminding us of the general finitude, exertion, madness, and jouissance of bodily economies.
     

    Apple Igrek teaches in the Philosophy Department at Seattle University. He has published essays on fiction, cultural theory, Georges Bataille and Michel Foucault. His work appears in such journals as Colloquy, the International Studies of Philosophy, and Comparative and Continental Philosophy (forthcoming, 2010). His current project is entitled “Thinking Through Walls and the Internalized Image in H.P. Lovecraft.”
     

    Footnotes

     
    1. Celebrants of car culture and suburbia, such as Loren E. Lomasky, do so most blatantly when they defend autonomous freedom without seriously taking up questions of waste and resource use (Stoekl 124). Proponents of eco-religion, however, are no less anthropocentric: Gary Gardner and Mary Evelyn Tucker continue to place man and soul atop the same matter/spirit hierarchy which Lynn White Jr., in his seminal 1967 essay “The Historical Roots of Our Ecological Crisis,” already critiqued as the religious underpinning of environmental degradation (Stoekl 155).
     
  • Living Antagonistically: Lorenzo Fabbri’s Domesticating Derrida

    Timothy Campbell (bio)
    Cornell University
    campbell@cornell.edu

    Review of: Lorenzo Fabbri, The Domestication of Derrida: Rorty, Pragmatism and Deconstruction. Trans. Daniele Manni, London: Continuum, 2008. Print.

     

     
    To choose security is to choose death. That such a lesson comes at the expense of Richard Rorty in a book on the relation of French deconstruction to American pragmatism is only one of the more compelling paradoxes in Lorenzo Fabbri’s impressive The Domestication of Derrida: Rorty, Pragmatism and Deconstruction. At first glance Fabbri, a young Italian academic, appears to be working within the tradition of continental critiques of American pragmatism and in particular the work of Richard Rorty, a critique begun almost three decades ago first by Michel Foucault and then by Derrida himself.1 The title of Fabbri’s book is drawn from Wlad Godzich’s important reading of de Man, “The Domestication of Derrida,” which appeared in the 1983 volume The Yale Critics. There Godzich describes (and circumscribes) the intellectual encounter between Derrida and de Man in ways that inform Fabbri’s own take on Rorty. Building on and diverging from Godzich’s essay, Fabbri recounts his own coming to terms with Rorty’s reading of deconstruction as an anti-philosophy in an itinerary that moves from contingency, to irony, to—and in my view most decisively—a final engagement with Foucault and the implicit question of biopolitics. Fabbri’s concluding chapter on modernity, politics, and monstrosity registers the fundamental break between deconstruction and pragmatism, one centered on the features of a truly political form of life. On Fabbri’s read, deconstruction brings in its wake radical possibilities for “favouring new possibilities of existence and of being-together” (4).
     
    To get at those radical possibilities, Fabbri naturally begins where one would expect him to: with a cogent summary of Rorty’s reading of deconstruction across well-known texts like Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature and Contingency, Irony, and Solidarity. In a series of marvelous close readings, Fabbri brings his own profound knowledge of Derrida’s works to bear on Rorty, laying out in convincing fashion the real strengths of Rorty’s interpretation of deconstruction, and examining point by point the areas of contact and contamination between contemporary American pragmatism and deconstruction. Fabbri is always attentive in these comparisons to the role writing plays for both Derrida and Rorty, a writing that skirts in and out of the ironic. The place of writing becomes decisive in the second chapter, when Fabbri puts to the test his earlier readings of Rorty’s supposed alliance with deconstruction by taking up the question of the doubly “private” in Rorty’s understanding of the political. Of particular interest for Fabbri is the function of autobiography in Derrida’s thought and more generally the relation between theory and the “person” espousing it. In the final chapter Fabbri pivots from the private and the philosophical to the question of forms of life and their relation to political solidarity. Fabbri’s damning if familiar conclusion is that Rorty remains, alas, a stubborn liberal who cannot see how easily pragmatism allies itself with normalizing strategies meant to contain radical political possibilities for life. When Rorty, in Fabbri’s gloss, chides Derrida for not having been decent enough to keep philosophy within the boundaries of private life, it is precisely with a view to denying philosophy’s vocation as a practice of civil disobedience, a possibility Derrida himself puts forward in a series of essays from the 1980s and 1990s.2
     
    There is much of interest in Fabbri’s account of the limits of linking pragmatism and deconstruction too closely, but I’d like to focus especially on two areas. The first becomes visible in the margins of the introduction and the opening chapters but really comes into view in the book’s final pages. Drawing on the work of Giorgio Agamben and Jean-Luc Nancy in particular, Fabbri speaks of an underlying anxiety on Rorty’s part when the topic moves to thinking community. He writes that Rorty “is locked within the boundaries of a given theoretical and political community, confiding in narratives and philosophy to prevent the coming of monsters. Deconstruction, instead, plays in blindfolds. It bids on possibilities for an existence to come” (127). In this insistence on political and theoretical communities, Fabbri is able to track, in a way others before him have not, how the dispositifs of Rorty’s pragmatism—principally tolerance and the private—align Rorty again and again with a liberal form of community. Fabbri is nothing short of devastating here. Making great use of Foucault’s essay “What is Critique?” to buttress his claims against Rorty, as well as of Derrida’s seminal readings on the university in “Eyes of the University,” Fabbri offers a ringing defense of an ontology of actuality, making the case for “doing theory” as a way of de-anchoring the “presence of the present” (114). His reading of “the presence of the present” as that which undergirds the liberal form of community becomes the privileged site for deconstruction (4). It is by adopting deconstruction that unexpected futures become visible, ones sacrificed by Rorty’s incessant policing of the private and public. Indeed, Fabbri speaks of Rorty as proffering a sort of “reductive vitalism” (74). This seems exactly right: a vitalism addressed to fencing off private lives from community is one not only reductive but also destined to wither. In other words, what Rorty fails to see in Derrida’s work is how deconstruction raises truly important questions for a future radical politics. On that note, I couldn’t help thinking when reading The Domestication of Derrida that what Fabbri has done essentially is to have Rorty play Sterling Hayden’s brigadier general Jack D. Ripper to Derrida’s Group Captain Mandrake (as played by Peter Sellers) in a theoretical remake of Dr. Strangelove. The difference would be that in the new version vital communities are substituted for vital bodily fluids.
     
    The second point follows closely on the question of community and concerns how Rorty responds to the vulnerability of public space. In Fabbri’s view, his response really comes down to security measures. Why the recourse to the police? Fabbri writes that Rorty “needs to have assurance that at the end of the day he will return to the exact same form of life from where he moved in the morning. And when such a happy ending cannot be guaranteed, the fear of the unpredictable makes him create protective barriers that ensure the security of his home” (126). On this score, Fabbri deploys to great effect a Nietzschean reading of security, which resonates especially with those pages from Daybreak in which Nietzsche recognizes how easily security comes to dominate society, creating those who can do nothing else except worship security “as the supreme divinity,” who can judge their actions according to one criterion alone: whether these actions tend “towards the common security and society’s sense of security” (105-106). Fabbri is relentless in the final chapter in keeping a ledger of the high price Rorty pays to have his home protected and his security maintained, measured in a missing politics and an absent philosophy to come, in a normalized and normalizing form of political life that Foucault critiqued so deeply in The Birth of Biopolitics. In this, Rorty’s perspective on deconstruction becomes a window on how extensively he nullifies the political generally, neutralizing the capacity of critique—deconstruction is the privileged critique though implicitly others are included in Fabbri’s analysis—to uncover the history of normalization, and what in turn links normalizing strategies to citizenship and to the state. Worse still, Rorty’s hopes for securing public space from unexpected (and therefore dangerous) forms of life produce, through Derridean auto-immunity, monsters that pop up repeatedly in Rorty’s work. In a series of strange doublings, it is a monstrous Derrida who comes to stand in metonymically for other monstrous forms of collective life when security has failed and vulnerability comes to characterize all human groupings. Fabbri suggests something else here too: that in the coming together of security and community—community as the subject and object of security—Rorty’s pragmatism is disclosed as a biopolitical machine whose function is to produce nothing short of a liberal form of life as a political form of being-together that wants (and ultimately fails) to secure its citizens. Fabbri instead insists repeatedly on the possibility of liberating all forms excluded from such a secured space by emphasizing “those struggles which aspire to favour antagonistic ways of living the now” (124). In this combination of antagonism and life, Fabbri echoes in important ways the recent work of the Invisible Committee’s The Coming Insurrection.3
     
    In refusing Rorty’s reading of Derrida, which transforms “philosophical reflection into a private matter,” Fabbri sees possibilities for future antagonistic forms of life (50). Deploying a reading of Derrida’s other writings—not only Specters of Marx, as one might expect, but The Post Card as well—Fabbri shows how deeply Derrida was aware of the impropriety of the private and of the possibilities the private offered for future antagonisms. Although others, especially Geoffrey Bennington, have repeatedly focused on the centrality of contamination in Derrida’s work, Fabbri’s reading of Rorty reminds us again of its importance and of Rorty’s continued failure to come to grips with the concept.4 Not surprisingly, given his deconstruction of the political malfeasance of Rorty’s private/public divide, Fabbri doesn’t shy away either from including his own private moments of reading Rorty. Say what you want about this choice, it’s undeniable that Fabbri takes Rorty seriously. In fact Fabbri essentially offers a model for how to take thought seriously by weaving narratives of a private nature with his literal “coming to terms” with Rorty. This fearless attempt to bring deconstruction and pragmatism together through the inclusion of the private is one of the best things about the book, as it progressively dawns on the reader that the bridging between the private and the political happens thanks precisely to the critique offered by deconstruction. There’s also something compelling about Fabbri’s insistence on the shared vulnerability of the private and the public; it is as if the ruins of public space are created precisely by bracketing the private from contact and potential contamination. Fabbri’s is an urgent call to return deconstruction to its rightful place in public debates.
     
    There are many other eloquent pages here: Fabbri’s deconstruction of metaphor in the first chapter as reinforcing the rule of the transcendental; the implicit third person perspective in Derrida’s Monolingualism of the Other; the taking up and elaborating of Caputo’s perspective on Derrida for his own political reading; and Fabbri’s wonderful discussion of the potentiality that inheres in any deconstruction of actuality as “suspending” the way in which we are directed towards an object. With that said, Fabbri does move quickly and sometimes misses opportunities. For instance, I would have loved to read more on the differences between Derrida and Rorty over the function of the intellectual. Certainly Fabbri’s discussion recalls Gramsci’s famous notion of the organic intellectual and might have made for another point of contact between Derrida and Rorty (as well as their divergence). One might also wish that Fabbri had discussed at greater length the relation of political indocility and critique in that other figure who today so dominates discussions and critiques of governmentalization, namely Giorgio Agamben. But these are quibbles. What Fabbri has done is to offer the reader a map of the long-standing differences not simply between Rorty and Derrida, but between a kind of liberal politics that only knows how to secure itself and its “we” from threats to its position of dominance, and another more anarchic possibility in which one attempts to imagine an “alternative we.” In short, Fabbri’s important book demands serious attention not only from those interested in the relation between Jacques Derrida and Richard Rorty, but from those interested in thinking together a future radical politics.
     

    Timothy Campbell teaches in the Department of Romance Studies at Cornell University. He is the author of Wireless Writing in the Age of Marconi (Minnesota, 2006) and Improper Life: Thanatopolitics and Technology from Heidegger to Agamben (Minnesota, 2011). In addition to his translations of Roberto Esposito’s Communitas: The Origin and Destiny of Community (Stanford, 2009) and Bios: Biopolitics and Philosophy (Minnesota, 2008), he is the co-editor along with Adam Sitze of The Biopolitical Reader (Duke, 2011).
     

    Footnotes

     
    1. See the interview with Foucault, “Polemics, Politics, and Problematizations,” as well as Derrida’s far-reaching “critique” of pragmatism in his “Remarks on Deconstruction and Pragmatism.” For Rorty’s perspective on Foucault, see “Foucault and Epistemology.”

     

     
    2. See Derrida’s “Mochlos, or the Conflict of the Faculties” and “The University without Condition.”

     

     
    3. “He [the good citizen] can’t help envying these so-called ‘problem’ neighborhoods where there still persists a bit of communal life, a few links between beings, some solidarities not controlled by the state, an informal economy, an organization that is not yet detached from those who organize themselves” (Invisible Committee 36-37).

     

     
    4. See the recent special issue of diacritics titled “Derrida and Democracy,” in particular David Wills’s essay on the secret.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Bennington, Geoffrey. “Derridabase.” Jacques Derrida. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1993. Print.
    • ———. Interrupting Derrida. New York: Routledge, 2000. Print.
    • Caputo, John D. “Beyond Aestheticism: Derrida’s Responsible Anarchy.” Research in Phenomenology 18 (1988): 59-73. Print.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Eyes of the University. Right to Philosophy 2. Trans. Edward Morri et al. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2004. Print.
    • ———. “Mochlos, or the Conflict of the Faculties.” Logomachia: The Conflict of the Faculties. Edited by Richard Rand. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1992. 3-34. Print.
    • ———. Monolingualism of the Other: Or, The Prosthesis of Origin. Trans. Patrick Mensah. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1988. Print.
    • ———. The Post Card: From Socrates and Freud to Beyond. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1987. Print.
    • ———. “Remarks on Deconstruction and Pragmatism.” Deconstruction and Pragmatism. Ed. Chantal Mouffe. New York: Routledge, 1996. Print.
    • ———. Specters of Marx: The State of the Debt, the Work of Mourning, and the New International. New York: Routledge, 2006. Print.
    • ———. “The University without Condition.” Without Alibi. Ed. and trans. Peggy Kamuf. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2002. Print.
    • Foucault, Michel. The Birth of Biopolitics: Lectures at the Collège de France 1978-1979. Trans. Graham Burchell. New York: Picador, 2010. Print.
    • ———. “Polemics, Politics and Problematizations.” The Foucault Reader. Ed. Paul Rabinow. Trans. Lydia Davis. New York: Pantheon, 1984. 383-385. Print.
    • ———. “What is Critique?” The Politics of Truth. Ed. Sylvère Lotringer. Los Angeles: Semiotext(e), 2007. Print.
    • Godzich, Wlad. “The Domestication of Derrida.” The Yale Critics: Deconstruction in America. Ed. Jonathan Arac, Wlad Godzich, and Wallace Martin. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983. 20-40. Print.
    • The Invisible Committee. The Coming Insurrection. Los Angeles: Semiotext(3), 2009. Print.
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. Daybreak: Thoughts on the Prejudices of Morality. Ed. Maudemarie Clark and Brian Leiter. Trans. R.J. Hollingdale. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1997. Print.
    • Rorty, Richard. Contingency, Irony, and Solidarity. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1989. Print.
    • ———. “Foucault and Epistemology.” Foucault: A Critical Reader. Ed. D. Hoy. Oxford: Blackwell, 1986. 41-50. Print.
    • ———. Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1979. Print.
    • Wills, David. “Passionate Secrets and Democratic Dissonance.” diacritics 38.1-2 (Spring Summer 2008): 17-29. Print.

     

  • The Poet’s Theater of Fiona Templeton: An Environmental View

    James Sherry (bio)
    jamestsherry@verizon.net

    Abstract
     
    Fiona Templeton’s play YOU-The City was originally produced for an audience of one in the Times Square neighborhood of New York City. The theatrical event presents an ecosystem where connections and logistics predominate over character and plot. It establishes a peer relationship between actors, audience, and their interactions that finds expression throughout the work in its theatrical components such as character, staging, and text. This environmental social structure links the play to a broader epistemology that reconstitutes the concept of identity in the arts. To support an alternative way of looking at ourselves, this essay brings in several concepts from other disciplines, notably extended cognition and q-analysis, a hierarchic model that functions by inclusion rather than like a system of separate castes. These tools are helpful in showing how cross disciplinary thinking supports an environmental model and are also useful because canonical culture remains fixated on the individual.
     

     

    I was sat with a malevolent question… but now I am more or less riotous and bounded, because, well duh, the encounter between spectator-subject and image-object is a process of frivolous interference or mutual indignant mutation! I hope this doesn’t sound too confrontational.
     

    –Nada Gordon, Scented Rushes

     

    1. Environmental Theater

     
    Fiona Templeton’s YOU—The City is an intimate play for an audience of one initially staged in 1988 in the mid-town neighborhood of New York and later published by Roof Books as a script along with photographs of the performance event.1 In its original performance, on keeping an appointment at an office in Times Square, a “client” (the sole member of the audience) is passed through a series of mainly scripted encounters at both indoor and outdoor locations, including a church, an apartment, and a gypsy cab ride. The action reaches a climax when the client realizes that she has become the object of one of the transitions or hand-offs in a Hell’s Kitchen playground. The narrative of YOU—The City is therefore not a story but a sequence of separate scenes, linked by one or more of the actors guiding the client from one event to the next. Each of these encounters takes place in a separate, typical city niche: an office with a secretary and an executive, a church with a defrocked priest, a sidewalk worked by a prostitute, a gypsy cab, a tenement apartment in which two lovers argue. Throughout the play’s 15 different scenes—each in its own local ecosystem—Templeton established, in a guided tour of over two hours, a work of environmental theater. The client’s encounters are environmentally linked by their location in the same neighborhood and as part of the continuous experience of any city dweller. The play focuses on environmental issues also in the way that the sequence of encounters changes the client’s idea of the self from that of an isolated individual in an unfamiliar and unsettling situation to someone who has become acutely aware of how he or she shares identity as well as space with the actors. The client realizes she is a component of a larger environment.
     
    This use of real-life surroundings, the loosely coupled relationships of one scene to another, and the way performers, both actor and client, identify with each other are the means by which Templeton realizes an environmental theater. By using theatrical strategies that extend the stage and the play into a living, diverse surrounding, Templeton has created interactive associations among actors, audience, settings, and text. I call this environmentally aware theater where the audience’s consciousness of its participation in the play overrides the artifice of the theatrical experience in some important ways. Environmentally aware theater presents an alternative to an absorptive theatrical experience that usually presents its artificiality intra-textually. YOU—The City transforms dramatic theater’s emphasis on the individual (going back to Aeschylus) into an awareness of one’s collaborative engagement in a network of beings. By extension, environmentalism (individual and network in dual agency) reinforces culture, in this case a poetics, in helping society to understand the interrelated conditions of the planet threatened by climate change. In this essay, I suggest that YOU—The City shows how Templeton’s poet’s theater contributes to an environmental poetics that proposes a significant modification of our engagement with the world. Understanding poet’s theater environmentally also allows us to link effectively with other disciplines to reveal an environmentally informed epistemology.
     

    2. Environmental Perspectives

     
    There is a growing literature around the practice and definition of ecopoetics that debates and enacts writing in relation to ecology, broadly conceived. One of the goals of ecopoetics is to engage with other disciplines. The relative weight granted language, and what is meant by ecosystem, varies greatly depending on the point of view of the writer. No single definition of ecosystem has emerged from ecopoetics. Further, Jonathan Skinner asks in his editor’s notes to the latest issue of ecopoetics “that the term [ecopoetics] continue to be used with uncertainty and circumspection. That it ask and be asked the hard questions about language, representation, efficacy, ethics, community and identity . . . .That it entail some real effort at interdisciplinary thinking” (ecopoetics 06/07 9).2 For these reasons and for the purposes of this essay, I apply the McGraw Hill life sciences glossary definition of ecosystem to Templeton’s work: “A unit of interaction among organisms and their surroundings, including all life in a defined area.” I use this definition because it comes from outside literature and extends the connections from poetics beyond the discipline of poetry. Such extension to multiple disciplines is consistent with most of the diverse perspectives around ecopoetics, environmentalism, and systems theory. Further, using the McGraw Hill definition supports my aim to connect poet’s theater to other disciplines. Finally and most importantly, this definition helps to clarify Templeton’s environmental work and encourages us to think of the play as a series of linking mechanisms both between actor and audience (self and other) as well as linkages among scenes.
     
    In YOU—The City the environmental perspectives among these 15 urban “unit[s] of interaction among organisms and their surroundings” are shaped on many levels of the theatrical experience. From the characters played by the actors or the audience to subject positions within the system, the audience member experiences an oddly disjointed and re-hinged experience of the self. For example, the Manhattan neighborhood becomes an objectified space (ecosystem) in which actors appear and reappear, sometimes changing character between appearances. Many of the actors are seen only once. This continuous variation among actors’ appearances and reappearances in the environmental setting, and on a smaller scale within the various scenes, allows Templeton to treat the individual—actor or performer or accidental neighborhood onlooker—as a metaphor for how the individual organism operates in any ecosystem. The play’s focus on connections helps one understand how an environmentally aware culture that objectifies our interdependence with other organisms and processes might differ from the human-centered perspective that dominates intellectual life. In order to establish a culture for environmentalism, to view our world environmentally, such a poetics can establish a framework in which humanity and nature are understood as a single complex system, a social model of environment. The individuals in Templeton’s play are engaged not just in their own dramatic action; they also “perform” their status as organisms situated as part of complex sets of relationships (human and non-human, subject and object). While this social model of environment may be said to be part of a systems approach to our condition, I only tangentially engage systems theory here in order to prevent a systems view from overdetermining poet’s theater’s environmentalism. YOU—The City reveals and focuses us on the qualitative events that emerge from these complex quantitative interactions within urban ecosystems. Templeton uses these quantities to build a framework supporting multiple cultural practices rather than any one monolithic culture. Her metaphor of the city and the city as content thrive in the structure of the play, engaging diverse relationships among audience and actors, and allowing us to understand, repeat, and adjust our relationships with the ecosystems that the play presents. Templeton avoids the doctrinaire by treating rhetorical positions as aspects of a larger continuity rather than as ideals to be guarded. Inclusiveness is paramount, attending to what is, if the environmental metaphor is to be successful in representing the similarities of organisms, places, and things at different scales.
     
    In this essay I look at how YOU—The City and some of Templeton’s other works of poet’s theater address issues of environmental inclusiveness and ideological balancing. These issues include the integrity of the individual organism, subject/object relations, the definition of cognition as taking place only within the mind, and the status-oriented hierarchies of literary judgments. Instead of a binary kind of hierarchy, subject over object, Templeton traces subject/object relations through the non-status-oriented matrix of set theory. Templeton builds perspectives through a diverse set of issues rather than striving for a singular objective. Her scenes are structured as sets of encounters and modeled so that the themes mentioned above can be understood as they occur. Finally, I turn to set theory to demonstrate the interdisciplinary poetics sought by both ecopoetics and environmentalism. Set theory links disciplines and helps differentiate poet’s theater from other theaters by showing how to model communication between genres, depicting where connections are facilitated and where communication becomes more difficult.
     

    3. Poet’s Theater

     
    Templeton is not alone in her attempt to rework the shape of theater. Many works of modern theater have addressed non-environmentally aware theater’s over-simplification of relationships and have sought a structurally more realistic stage. Jean Genet’s The Maids plays with the hierarchy of the domestic relationships between a madam and her two maids as they vie for control of the roost. The Living Theater and other theatrical troupes poured off the stage into the audience and then invited the audience onto the stage in order to undercut an unproductive separation of actors and audience. Alan Kaprow’s “Happenings” proposed an integrated environment that was inclusive of subject and object in an event-driven model that helped renew relationships between the actors and audience. Jerzy Grotowski’s “Poor Theater” used actors as props in The Tragical History of Doctor Faustus, exposed culture as a disguise for genocidal architecture in Akropolis, and created an integrated “total act” of components in his final work Apocalypsis cum Figuris. These and many other efforts have attempted to reformulate subject/object relations in theater, but mostly in the context of an experience related to the stage and encapsulated in a building. Centralizing the action on the proscenium stage requires suspension of disbelief that takes us away from daily experience. YOU—The City addresses this subject/object problem by taking the theater to multiple locations, disturbing the action to create quotidian stresses and make us question our surroundings. Rather than showing expected relationships between characters ensconced in different locations as happens in the movies, Templeton multiplies the idea of subject in the way the characters relate to each other and to the audience depending on location—that is, relations are ecosystem dependent.
     
    Poet’s theater explicitly calls attention to this relationship between the audience and the performers as a structure of its own (a common poetic device, which will be seen below in the discussions of actors and audience). While much innovative theater uses some poetic practices, Templeton’s effort tightly binds theater and language-oriented poetics. I use the term poet’s theater to link Templeton’s theatrical and poetic work in YOU—The City. I also treat Templeton’s work as a special case of an environmentally oriented poet’s theater because environmentalism can contain many other ideas of what poet’s theater can be; its taxonomy is dynamic. Further, I use the term environmental with respect to poet’s theater to emphasize the mechanisms by which components of the theater are linked rather than the stories of each scene. Concepts and practices like staging, characterization, and plot are not supplanted by environmental horizontality. Their connections map the ecosystems of poet’s theater and open a window onto how the larger culture can begin to take an environmental perspective into account. Poet’s theater’s inclusiveness retrieves the larger context of theater as a ritual connected with actual social structures (as in Greek theatre), not simply an artifact of culture commenting on society. The context of Templeton’s poet’s theater is structured with a comprehensive set of social concerns and constituencies: the workplace, the family, and the way individuals and roles outside the mainstream are understood and addressed. Like other theatrical experiences, it includes the stage, actors, text, props, but it also includes a range of technical components and ideas about environment in a way that throws into contrast our own propensity for understanding our lives environmentally. While this environmental propensity is constantly undermined by specialist claims of individual uniqueness, adaptive solutions must be recognized as the driving force behind our construction of social life and society itself.
     

    4. The Environmental Construction of Poet’s Theater

     
    In YOU—The City, Templeton puts the audience in direct one-on-one contact with the actors in their surroundings. Each audience member either travels alone or is escorted from location to location, meeting each actor in a series of mainly scripted encounters in and around Times Square, New York. The audience-of-one participates in the play according to a general set of rules and logistics established for the performance as a whole. Appendices to the play specify the instructions given to the actors prior to performance on such topics as client flow through the scenes, shuttling performers back and forth between the scenes, a gender alternation chart when performers must stand in for other performers, the role of monitor performers who track the flow, and how to handle fake clients, standby appointments, and blanks if a client fails to show up for an appointments. The addenda read like a battle plan: everything accounted for including chance. A more detailed map can be drawn over Templeton’s work by listing and describing some of the components of the ecosystem of YOU—The City, beginning with the role of cognition through to the play’s text, its stage, its performers, its audience, and its criticism. This map will represent its construction and performance in a way that highlights the work itself as an ecosystem participating in an environmental poetics. Once we have a clearer idea of what is inside each of these components, I will show how to rebuild them into a loosely coupled whole with set theory.
     
    One of the primary problems for the environmental movement in general to solve is how we overcome the way that ideologies isolate and separate people who actually may have many related interests and intentions. Theater’s traditional distance between stage and audience reifies this alienation as well. Identifying all participants and relationships in a performance event except oneself as the other in the structure of theater (audience to actor and by extension actor to actor) accents difference in a way that does not reflect the essential symbiosis and cooperation required to create and produce theater and to manage its resources. It also fails to reflect the social cohesion that frequently results from these experiences. Artists of all persuasions have often supported such ideological thinking by focusing on the differences between individuals, between schools of art or poetry, and by treating the work as the production of an individual. The problem is rooted in Descartes’ cogito where comprehension takes place all at once in the mind as if on a mental stage.
     
    In the environmental model of poet’s theater, mind participates in a more integrated manner with bodily activities. Environmental cognition shows thought extending, in certain instances, beyond the organism. Mark Rowlands, professor of philosophy at the University of Miami, suggests that cognition can be said to take place inside the body and also the “manipulation and transformation of information bearing structures” (16).Several functions, especially the function of memory, take place externally, like an external disk array on your computer. “In certain circumstances,” Rowlands writes, “acting upon external structures is a form of information processing” (19). For example, in non-environmental cognition when we want to find something, what we call thinking takes place. Then with the idea constituted in the mind and our thought completed, we look for the thing, i.e. we act, while presumably thinking about something else or repeating the initiating thought, “I want thyme,” obsessively as a litany or mantra to confirm our belief in the thought. Our actions are detached from the thought process. Moreover, the very distinction in question is that between thought and action. In the environmental model, thinking extends to the process of looking as well as creating the image (signified) of what we want to look for. Thinking and acting are symbiotes. Let’s say you want to find the thyme. You think of the thyme and open the spice rack. To paraphrase Rowlands’ description of the process: You run your finger along the bottles until you find the label that matches the image that you have in mind: thyme. The matching process is as much a part of environmental cognition as conceptualizing thyme in the first place or, in a more complex situation, as reading the word thyme in the recipe. The thinking process extends throughout the event, beyond the mind and into action. We can also cite language as a relevant cultural example of external cognition that we are using together now as I write and you read these words asynchronously. Thus thinking also takes place over extended time, establishing a four-dimensional topology for thought. Extending thought to language, to its uses, and to the external world, we can think about our environment in the process of acting on it. Defining cognition environmentally, we can value the external world in a way that’s consistent with how we value ourselves.
     
    Setting appropriate initial conditions, such as environmental cognition, for a self in relation to another component of the environment moves us toward establishing the sustainable interactions idealized by environmentalism. Extended cognition also helps avoid the trap of subject/object relations that separates the self from its surroundings in a way that allows us to detach ourselves from where we are, a detachment that can lead to such counterproductive behaviors as throwing a candy wrapper on the street or failing to secure a deep water drilling rig to improve profitability. The assumption that we can select a single perspective, either our own or that of the things we’re talking about (our discipline), from which to view the world and then apply that perspective to all events exemplifies the inflation of the subject, driven by the ego, from which humanity is environmentally suffering. Without extended cognition, we are conflicted every time we see a situation that presents more than one perspective. The mind-centered approach colors our entire world view even in its consideration of the body. Non-environmentally aware theaters model the theatrical experience as a set of unidirectional and sometimes bidirectional connections between actor and audience, between actor and actor on the stage, between author and audience, between director and actor. We often talk about these connections separately and analyze them within our specialized disciplines, because our assumptions about thinking inhibit a more inclusive approach. These point-to-point connections become confused as the assignment of a central perspective shifts between author, actors, and audience. The simplification that seems so effective in its first instance builds unnecessarily complex models as we proceed from one use case to another.
     
    As an alternative to these point-to-point communications, we might construct sets of perspectives. In the case of YOU—The City, the scenes represent multiple perspectives for the audience. Individual processes such as character and thematics can be traced through the sets showing the accessibility of paths with greater or lesser difficulty of communication. These paths become narratives of relations that are dynamically inter-subjective and so model our world more effectively (an approach I will revisit at the end of the essay in a consideration of q-analysis). Templeton questions traditional ideas, conventions, and standards of theater in ways that model environmental cognition and sustainable interactions, as when she writes:
     

    Well, who goes to the theater to sit and have catharsis any more, but this very experimental form provided you with the kind of rush the conventional theater no longer does. The only difference between that and catharsis is the distance issue. But whilst problematizing the relationship between performer and performee, and between theater and reality, YOU does this by indulging you. It’s like Genet’s Balcony; it’s a place of your own enactment. What if somebody doesn’t get it that there’s a distance and takes it for real? Well, some people almost did. And the performers had to see that and play.
     

    (YOU 133)

     

    The distance between actor and client in YOU—The City becomes proportional to the distance between performers, sometimes nearer, sometimes farther, but always interactive. Catharsis is no longer a characteristic of the audience; it is a performance in itself, another interaction on the stage. In another example, Templeton attenuates the distance between the actor and client. “If the client picks up the telephone, the monitor performer should be aware of the name of the client who is in that scene at that point and should ask: Are you [client’s name]? Sorry to bother you” (134). By now the client has clearly joined the cast. This process expands the idea of intention to a matrix and introduces extended cognition, a key concept of a culture that supports environmental change.

     

    The Text / Documentation as Ecosystem

     
    In the published book, the text of YOU—The City is divided into three columns, a collaborative design between Templeton and myself (in my role as press editor for Roof Books) that treats the writing as an ecosystem. The left-hand page is divided into two columns, one offering documentation of the event including photographs, and the second listing the instructions to actors (see Fig. 1 below). On the right-hand page, the play’s “dialogue” stands more or less alone. This architecture differs from the organic compound that most published plays use, for example, in the French’s editions where all text is printed in a linear format that accumulates over time.
     

     
    Page layout from YOU—The City (New York: Roof, 1990). 32-33.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 1.

    Page layout from YOU—The City (New York: Roof, 1990). 32-33.

     

     
    By separating the components, this publication attempts to make the reader aware of separate species of text, to treat them both independently and together, and at the same time to make it really easy to read the spoken words without interruption, as a kind of poetry. Templeton was forceful in her insistence that the performers speak poetry, a subset of the textual materials in the book. In some sense, then, I have begun to think of the other material and the connections among them as its poetics. By highlighting this textual taxonomy we can see both the independence of the components and the necessity of their interaction to complete the performance. In theatrical texts that are not environmentally aware, this interaction is assumed, thus glossing over the interactions of the various species of text—spoken word, directions to the actor, and documentation of the performance, including pictures and comments. In contrast, the divided text of YOU—The City highlights how our thinking extends beyond the spoken word to location to comment to a wide variety of components of the ecosystem.
     
    Environmental poetics is inherent in Templeton’s text as “you” is repositioned through constant repetition and continuous presence in the same way that nature appears to dissolve through our manipulation of it. The self dissolves, and second person and first person comingle. Integrating the ego into the world helps us treat humanity and nature together as a single complex unit. The notion of externalized cognition, where thinking takes place not only in the mind but extending beyond it as a connection between the world and the mind, reveals, Templeton asserts, the fundamental social condition of the person:
     

    Because the text on the page is not actually being addressed to you, it may be read as though something were missing, which it is, because you have to add your subjectivity, in a more active sense than the page usually demands … the you disappears from the text. Because you is passed on. The word you changed from being egoistic to being social. You had learned the second person.
     

    (YOU 135)

     

    Environmentalism implies that we model events as relationships between entities (actors, client, props) rather than as isolated nodes operating via communication to each other. Templeton moves back and forth between the performers, sometimes equating them, sometimes separating them until that path is well defined, the relationship materialized. Templeton takes the notion a step further by pointing out that the primary objects of an ecosystem (as in the McGraw Hill definition) may be those interfaces between two organisms as much as the organisms themselves. And YOU attempts to show precisely that, for as Templeton writes:

     

    The experience of art is in relationship, meaning being born where intention and interpretation meet. Theater is the art of relationship. A performance is the product of as many points of view as there are creators; a realized moment of performance is the meeting of as many as are present, performers and audience … ‘you’ assumes and creates relationship.
     

    (YOU 139)

     

    But lest the inveterate traditionalist slip into a state of terror at having her identity stolen by forces akin to the Soviet threat or Invasion of the Body Snatchers, YOU reassures the reader that

     

    since YOU deals with relationship, it also evokes privacy. But not the privacy of reaction of the individual in one of a thousand theater seats, protected in anonymity and in numbers . . . the gaze is returned, client and performer sustain between them the performance of the performance, because there is only them—a deflection of the attention of either and reality is redefined . . . The performance is a relationship, “you” is a relationship, meaning is made between speaker and hearer. You‘s privacy is that of the individuality of any relationship.
     

    (YOU 139)

     

    YOU takes exception to theater’s separation of performer and audience by creating a renewed relationship between them. Furthermore, Templeton argues that “[t]he relationship [between performer and audience] was located in the same place where the meaning of the text was made” (140). The question of difference, of uniqueness in the arts, does not disappear. Differentiating features remain within the larger context of relationship. But the contours of the self blur, and environment, instead of being defined as the place where the subject resides, becomes ecosystem inclusive of the self.

     
    The energy created by the edges of selves in contact replaces the reality of the self in situ with an environmental set of relationships. Templeton notes that this change can present difficulty for performers: “The performance defined itself close to the edge of the real, but in order to use and to make visible the chosen side of it. For one performer, the edge was not clear enough in that his performance spilled into his life, and so the clients’ lives, our lives, mine” (YOU 140). Here is a clear representation of an environmentally defined world where the edges of the different selves in contact with each other become the bodies of the ecosystem. The performers did not find it quite so easy to return to the imaginary world that humanism creates of bodies moving through space. Seen in this light of fricative edges, the edges of the text run off the page, “the Aristotelian unities became logistic rather than narrative concerns” (YOU 141). And this textual logistic is represented by staging as well as by a schedule of performers and performees interacting. YOU—The City documents the text, the action of the events, and commentary about both. Providing a more complete document of the work than the usual publication, the book published by Roof attempted to prevent the reader from becoming lost in the text, hypnotized by artistic technique. The text itself is one stage of meaning among others, not the whole meaning. For example, Templeton comments that “the cab ride not only separates the play’s two geographical sets of locations, but also separates the introductory linear series of scenes from the loop of the rest of the piece” (YOU 149). Meaning in poet’s theater is located repeatedly at every level of scale and in each facet of the text.
     

    The Stage

     
    The staging of YOU—The City has received more attention than most of the other parts of the performance because it is the distinguishing feature of the work. Yet viewed in parallel with the other components of the theater, its unique values also contribute to a comprehensive environment. YOU—The City moves from the usual closed space of theater to the streets. Templeton made the city like a movie set, sans cameras, in order to “switch from close up to long shot to a level of reality—because it was so completely site specific. And not just site specific, but without the feeling of other people watching—it was just your experience” (“Presence Project”). These sites are a distraction from the work’s themes and disarming at the same time, because the client is constantly trying to understand what to do, how to behave. If it were located in a theater, with its familiar conventions of audience behavior, the presence of other audience members would likely encourage you to sit quietly. If you were alone in the city and contacted some strangers, you would also likely follow behavioral conventions, interacting according to the needs of the exchange, whether someone is asking directions or stealing your purse. But in this case, where audience and performers are constantly negotiating the space between them, audience-performer interaction both unsettles familiar behaviors and suppresses normal protective instincts because the safety of the performance remains operational, even on the mean streets. Standing in a scene, if you are only in the role of watching performers, you might be able to separate yourself from the action. But if the performers are constantly telling things to “you” while you are watching the scene, saying “you” over and over, inviting your engagement, but not indicating in any clear way how to react or even whether to react, your sense of self begins to break down. In that chaotic moment, more and more information is exchanged between audience and performers, which increases your understanding of what is going on–not just in your mind but around you, through the transmission of language and bodily cues taking place between you and the performers. However, most clients become confused because of this chaotic plethora of data (although I spoke to one woman who found it perfectly natural).
     
    The staging of Templeton’s poet’s theater also poses questions about the impact of structure, because “framing the artificial makes it seem real,” as Nick Kaye says in one interview (“Presence Project”). Templeton thinks “it’s a question of whether you can take it that far,” which I take to mean that whether framing the artificial actually goes so far as to change the perception of reality, or whether it simply highlights the fact of artificiality, is a matter still open to debate. Templeton’s incredulity about the easy identification of framing with transformation extends to human interaction by making it difficult for the performers to find a consistent frame:
     

    I talk about framing to the performers a lot. And often you think about framing as something you do when you observe, but I talked to them about framing as something that they had to do to themselves. For example, when they were, in fact, saying a script, they had to present it in such a way that it seemed natural—yes, as acting, which was to do with the way in which they set up their relationship with the other person [client].
     

    (“Presence Project”)

     

    In this sense the performers use the confusion of location to confuse the idea of role. Enacting the frame is actually breaking the frame as it makes us aware of the frame and drags us into it. External cognition re-establishes a larger frame, making the relationship both less confusing and more comprehensive. Like the performers and audience, the stage is mutable and not entirely under control. People from the street intrude into the set and participate in the performance. As Kaye points out in his interview with Templeton, “There seems to be a very close link between this attention to site and an overlaying of these roles and positions. I wonder if you think of those things as being indelibly intertwined” (“Presence Project”). The stage becomes an unpredictable environment, or nearly so, because Templeton continues the distinction between real and artificial even while questioning it.

     
    The environmental aspects of the piece are revealed in its symmetry and complexity, as opposed to the dramatized asymmetry of modernist and postmodern productions. Actors enter at alternating symmetrical points and leave in the same alternative symmetry, but the entries and exits do not coincide. Thus there is a perceivable order but it is not predictable for the audience; the performers are only kept on track by a series of complex instructions and schedules documented in the book, but not readily apparent to the client. As Templeton has already pointed out, here logistics replaces the narrative and hence informs the theatrical structure. Whereas narrative is often associated with the story of an individual or the collective story of multiple individuals, by using logistics to replace a story line that runs from the beginning of the play to its end, Templeton again points out that relationships rather than individuals lie at the core of any understanding of our environment. How we feel about a specific interaction with the environment is not as important as understanding the results of that relationship. Of course ignoring human behavior would be impractical, but its psychological aspects must be balanced with the effects of our relationship to the environment. Logistics points out one way of dealing with the incredible complexity of environmental changes or problems, be they climatic or social; within YOU—The City, it also reduces the effects of individual psychology and emphasizes the interactions between multiple performers and the audience of one. These interactions are visible in the diagram below (see Fig. 2), which shows the logistics of the shuttles that performers have to follow in staging the work. Out of this schedule a temporal aspect of the work emerges, besides its duration or the duration of its scenes; here again the performer becomes a metaphor as well as the carrier of the text to the audience. The systematic and external sense of timing in logistics is not arbitrary but is, instead, required to move people to the right place at the right time. Essentialism in narrative–the plot, if you will–is replaced by the necessity of logistics.
     

     
    Diagram of Performer Shuttles for YOU—The City (New York: Roof, 1990). 164.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 2.

    Diagram of Performer Shuttles for YOU—The City (New York: Roof, 1990). 164.

     

     

    The Performers

     
    The relationship between the performers and the other components of the theater displays an environmental bias to Templeton’s work. As Templeton writes about the process of realizing the play again and again in situ:
     

    While re-creating YOU—The City in various versions, I became interested in further layers of participants besides official audience and performers—the inhabitants of the various neighborhoods, who gradually knew what was happening as pairs of audience and performer passed many times daily. These layers became both audience and performers themselves, either choosing to watch, simply to appear, to offer comments, or to intervene. This inspired how L’Ile (The Island [2003]) works, using multiple layers of audience and performers as its base and structure.
     

    (“A Poetics” 7)

     

    This evolving approach to structure contrasts with a structure where complex frameworks are stripped of components until they can be modeled in a linear fashion. Care is usually taken in scientific and artistic endeavors to assure that the components eliminated do not significantly alter the net value of the materials or calculation.3 Nevertheless, complex layering produces emergent properties that can change the results and certainly change the tone and atmosphere of those results. In Templeton’s case those interactions resulting from complexity tend to be the content of the work as much as its presumed theme. I would hazard that even the term “poet’s theater” titles the genre as a complex layering of roles, and in fact, the very title YOU—The City implies a dual agency that rapidly develops beyond the usual subject-object relations in theater.

     
    This technique of dual agency is modeled most famously perhaps in The Living Theater’s late 1960s productions. Presenting inter-subjectivity as an action highlights the set of relationships between audience and performer so that the self is extended into the surroundings. This extended performer is tough to define and behaves more like a performer in an ecosystem, taking on different attitudes depending on what role she takes with respect to others in the niche: performer, guide, client, or monitor. A tree, for example, can provide shade for a ruminant, a home for a sparrow, flowers for a bee, block nutrients from smaller plants, and act as a landmark for a human. The performer, too, is mutable and defined by his/her role within each context. In one case, an actor changes roles from one scene to the next. In another example, an actor in one scene becomes a client in a subsequent scene. In YOU—The City, the larger ecosystem, the city, becomes an actor as well, causing many difficulties for the performers and the audience. The character designated in the text as the “46th Street Person” says
     

    I have to be polite to you, when what I really want to do is rip you apart. No, of course not, because then you wouldn’t be you anymore, and anyway, no, I don’t want to see your insides. . . . So you can’t be what? Be you? Let me be you. Let me be you to you? Or see yourself for him?
     

    (YOU 29)

     

    This speech suggests that humans are not all of one sort. Some operate independently while some are capable of only acting within a well-defined context. Changing roles change people’s values. In another case, the Excommunicado Confessor chastises the audience: “Fearless invention before a crowd of madmen and scared to say it. Your own forged bills pour in. Forge a presence an absence can quench. . . . You’re spun to face yourself. Don’t say yes” (35). Here is a man who has intentionally stepped out of his role, reinvented himself in opposition to his prior role and in opposition to the vagrant in the prior scene. The priest points to the forgery/forging of the self in a reflexive mode. Ultimately, the anti-deistic diatribe focuses on resistance (“Don’t say yes”) to being one person, but being many, a truer relationship with the world.

     
    In her “Notes to the Directions (On Performance)” Templeton describes the actor’s method as changing from pretending to be a different person than you actually are to an unspecified something else which I assume is accessing multiple roles together. Templeton’s process structures Puckishness. The linking of the actor and audience makes the distinction even more difficult to deal with when Templeton says to the actor, “Where does you live? This guy lives somewhere between the speaker and the hearer” in the connector (YOU 145). And this thought takes us from the topic of the performer to that of the audience.
     

    The Audience/Client

     
    Poet’s theater questions the self as it rewrites the relationship between performer and audience. This characteristic mechanism of modern poetry becomes a cause célèbre in postmodernism. Arthur Rimbaud used the second person to mean the first person. In John Ashbery’s “Pyrography,” the postmodern speaker shifts from I to they to we to you and all are conflated to describe the present tense where our existences are structured together in an ecosystem of selves (8-11). YOU—The City keeps the social being, the person, in flux as a client moves through the locations confronting different performers, taking a different role with each while trying all the while to retain a consistent picture of the self to align with her overall impression of the event. In some cases the client is an observer with the scene going on around her, as in the apartment. But suddenly the client is called to the phone, injected into the action. The client also revisits the apartment, taking on a different role. In other locations, the client is addressed but not told what to do. She is left to her own devices, freed to act according to her interest. In some scenes, like the playground handoff, the client becomes part of the scene and cannot avoid participation. These different roles do not create a conflict so much as they identify the person as a conglomerate of intentions and relations with the other participants of the action. It took me many days to realize that what I had experienced as a client myself was not conflict but transformation from one to many.
     
    In this way YOU materializes the person as a sequence of roles and the self as one’s collective awareness of those roles. Brevity in poetry (its ecology)–or condensation, as Pound would have it–is insufficient at this point. Environmental culture cannot be reduced to conservation, although that role is relevant. The poet aligns her role with the others that she takes on in writing, directing, and producing the work. In this way environmental poetics is expansive as well as conserving of resources. The role or the job of the poet does not scale out as in mass media, but upward in sets at every level from poetry writing, to poetry reading, to poetry publishing, to poetry community… Each set of activities includes the prior one so that the hierarchy implied is inclusive rather than oriented to the status of the set or person. The boundaries of a work of poetry are extended in the way the self has been shown to be mutable. The common artistic assumption of uniqueness does not scale up and so needs to be augmented by these common elements. Together these elements create the network context that we have described as an ecosystem, the plane of our poetic geometry. That plane is then juxtaposed to the person for the purpose of establishing value in the space between them. In her essay “A Poetics of Performance Relevant to a Particular Definition of the Word,” Templeton says,
     

    executing something, doing what the thing is supposed to do, but specifically in relation to a standard of measurement, efficiency. . . . Performance is doing something, but there is still a standard involved. Not simply how well someone plays the flute, or acts in a character, in terms of efficiency (how would that be measured anyway), but in terms of its effect. Performance in the arts is not simply knowing all the notes, but the context in which it happens. Performance necessarily has a context.
     

    (1)

     

    Templeton is well aware of the western tradition of “the individual as the unit of thought” (“A Poetics” 5), and intentionally extends the self beyond the individual through the context of performance. Thinking in poet’s theater is externalized in an environmental way and extends between the performer and the audience, not simply as communication of messages, but as a transformation that modifies both the original work and the people who attend the presentation. “You” become part of the larger whole. The spiritual notion of uncontaminated purity, theatrically represented in a monologue, disappears. Communication exchanges text and presence with the audience rather than speaking at the audience. But dialogue with the audience is continuous to the point of exhaustion in YOU—The City.

     
    In the apartment scene of YOU—The City, Templeton exhibits this complexity of self and relationship. She calls this scene “the most distancing Act” (YOU 142), while for me the space is more easily seen as an ecosystem of relations.
     

    Suddenly there is more than one performer, and costumes, and dialogue, and distance within enclosure, and more than one client, them and us now as well as you and me, these objectifying signs are undermined in their very theatricality. The performers are not speaking to each other, though the dialogue replies to itself, but they are looking at each other’s clients in a schema of deferred otherness.
     

    (1)

     

    The niche defined by the apartment enclosure exposes an environmental way of thinking. Templeton’s version of environment is oddly resonant: “Meaning is not an answer but an apprehension of successive forms, their retention, protention and compatibility for coexistence in the mind” (YOU 143). The mind space is getting rather crowded in her formulation and it might be easier to open outward to include those external elements. Poet’s theater participates in externalized cognition by the interaction between the performer and the audience. By breaking down the separation between audience and performer, by changing the ratio from many-to-many to one-on-one, YOU enables cognition to take place between the audience of one and a performer in the first part of the event. In the second part, interactions of one to many are explored. Looking at these multiple ratios emphasizes a dynamic structure for the performance that addresses the matrix of environmental poetics. In both cases, the thought process takes place via interaction between audience and performer as well as by comparison between scenes. Templeton uses these philosophies of relationship in her work as well as in her personal experience: “a moment of hesitation I experienced as a child on realizing that the bus driver could be called by the same name as my mother, ‘you’. It is the pronoun of recognition, of exchange . . .” (“A Poetics” 3).

     
    YOU—The City frequently addresses the dissolving ego of environmental poetics to make citizens less apt to despoil the nest. The Meterless Charioteer (gypsy cab driver) looks over his shoulder at the audience, “I can look back at you. Of course you can see through me. I have to be an impostor, though you don’t know of what. But you do. And where do you fit in?” (39). The gypsy cab driver is a three-in-one imposter: one person posing as another and then acting in that role. The client is then asked directly by this poseur how she fits into the role-playing, highlighting the client’s desire to retain a singular identity (“you”) throughout this stretching and fragmenting process of self. The stage instructions in this scene add to the dissolution; “Your ‘you,’” Templeton writes, “is often ‘one’, so sometimes ‘I’, meaning you” (YOU 40). These instructions not only reinforce the shifting roles by using the pronouns, but they also point to how pronouns shift in grammar. This cascading of similar shapes at different scales, the person in the cab and the play with grammar, reinforces the play of dynamic systems so important in understanding the complexity of environment. With such self-shifting, Templeton turns locations inside out. The cab driver looks over his shoulder at you and says, “Watch where you’re going. I don’t want to be stuck with you forever. Aren’t you hungry to move on? If I look away are you free? Now you can see more than two sides of life, like leaning into the mirror after your night on the tiles. What’s in it when you’re not? Out there is your way in” (41). Now at the nth case the driver suggests a view of the action beyond the usual polarity of self and other. “Out there,” outside the cab, outside the self you find a method of understanding the world as a series of relations. The organism, you, exists. It doesn’t dissolve but exists in its relations rather than in the fixed role where our culture tends to place it. As the Coca Cola commercials opine, “You’re the one.” Templeton provides an alternative.
     
    In some ways the metaphor of Templeton’s work and the metaphor of poet’s theater get carried too far and aren’t successfully restructured. In/out, you/me, the shifting dissolves and you’re lost: “I know you’re not me. Who am I, you want to know? I’m who’s talking to you. Oh, of course, I always change, I change toward you. . . . From who you are or seem to be to me… You’re not discussed” (YOU 41). But even these confusing identities are entertaining if they are not too threatening. The replacement of plot by logistics isn’t carried through to a more complete definition of self, although we realize it as we negotiate our passage through the event. Simply reading the text it is somewhat difficult to imagine.
     

     
    Act II.ii from YOU—The City (New York: Roof, 1990). 55.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 3.

    Act II.ii from YOU—The City (New York: Roof, 1990). 55.

     

     
    As the expected notion of self transforms Templeton emphasizes presence as much as person. As she explains, “I am actually very happy to watch shows that are nothing but attention to the moment—whatever that is—but . . . attention for me is what creates presence—and that’s what’s evoked in audience transaction” (“Presence Project” 5). Such a commitment to presence approaches Robert Wilson’s austere presentations of a person and a vegetable on stage and may be said to be about negotiating the moment. And beyond that, we must include memory in poetry.
     

    And Criticism (post-event activities of writing and publishing)

     
    Establishing an environmental poetics would be incomplete without positioning the work you are reading now in the ecosystem of the play. While this may be a separate topic in its own right, our ecosystem of poet’s theater includes talking about it. In the published performance of YOU—The City, a wider context is already established by including photographs and comments, as discussed above. While each of the sets we have discussed is incomplete, the focus remains on the relationships between them. And what establishes that relationship more than critical writing about the play? Environmental poetics focuses attention at every point in the process, from intention through critical interpretation. Additional meaning is imparted in the formats of publication and venues where the work is distributed. As already cited, Templeton points out that “Meaning is not an answer but an apprehension of successive forms . . . The movement of the mind through meaning after meaning, the series of their landscapes, is meaningful. For example, here the meaning is clear, here obscure, here conclusive . . .” (YOU 143). One of the forms included in the performance is writing about it; the published performance includes columns of comments and contextualizing remarks. Interestingly, this environmental approach of including its own commentary has a precursor in Dante’s Vita Nuova, where each poem about Beatrice is followed by a commentary on the poem in its context with prosodic notes and biographical information. In this sense Templeton’s poet’s theater and environmental poetics present themselves as species of criticism, a horizontal force across the silos of epistemology.
     

    5. Set Theory and Environment: What’s Different About Poet’s Theater

     
    By changing the relationship between actors and audience, Templeton increases our awareness of each of them. By increasing the amount of detail through heightened awareness she helps us see how the components can be modeled both independently and together. By arranging the text in several columns, our collaborative publication defines another set of components that can be modeled together rather than seen as an indissoluble organic unit. We need an interdisciplinary tool to allow us to look at both the similarities and differences in a relatively value-free structure. Set theory provides such a modeling process; as a tool, it is specifically suited to depict both what distinguishes poet’s theater from other theaters and their common elements. Through the use of set theory we can compare poet’s theater to non-environmentally aware theater. We approach the problem of differentiation by defining the sets of components of YOU—The City so that they may be compared to other forms of theater–Shakespeare, for example–or even to non-art events, like social structure. Whereas most art writing thrives on differences reinforced by self-interest and contemporary culture, set theory models both common and unique elements. If we apply this tool to poet’s theater, I think we may also establish a method that can be carried forward to other disciplines. My aspirations for this theory exceed somewhat the scope of poet’s theater, but the ethos of using poetry to create an environmental culture is equally unreasonable.4
     
    Set theory is that branch of mathematics that treats collections of things. The physicist Ron Atkin, through what he calls q-analysis, uses set theory to create non-evaluative hierarchies that show how components of a system like theater can be linked and how they communicate.5 If we structure poet’s theater using the approach that we took in the prior sections–that is, as text, performers, audience, etc.–we can represent it as a hierarchy of levels. Hierarchy here does not mean superior and inferior like castes, but rather higher levels that include lower levels like a garden includes flowers, shrubs, trees, and lawn: a hierarchy of scale. This kind of precision may seem obsessive to the poet and fuzzy to the mathematician, but taking a line of reasoning from the political realm, the fact that both disciplines find difficulties with it makes it a potentially useful tool. Q-analysis helps us to look at different disciplines in relation to each other, and set theory fits well with many modes of discourse. Q-analysis engages methods from algebraic topology to help understand metaphoric structures such as theater and poetry and as a cross disciplinary tool readily aligns with environmental poetics. Using q-analysis we have organized Templeton’s work to show how poet’s theater is both like and unlike its non-environmentally aware counterparts. Q-analysis also helps us understand how communication is achieved. In poet’s theater the stage, the actors, the audience, the text are all in place; only their positions are somewhat shifted from where they would be on, for example, the Shakespearean stage.
     
    To apply set theory to YOU—The City, start with the level of the play or work of poet’s theater as the most inclusive level of our hierarchy. (We might also conceptualize more inclusive levels such as Templeton’s entire oeuvre or the even more inclusive category of poet’s theater. It is immediately obvious that q-analysis is a flexible analytic tool.) At this level we also include the neighborhood of Times Square or a neighborhood of London, or of any other city where the event has been performed, since the play itself does not encompass the physical location. We include these at the same level because together they cover all aspects of the physical and conceptual work. Call this level N+2. In the ways they connect, the play and the neighborhood together comprise the ecosystem of the work.
     
    At the level included in level N+2, call it N+1, and including all levels beneath, is the sequencing of scenes and characters. We find at the same level a single member of the audience, the client, who moves through all scenes from first to last. Also at the N+1 level are the transits between scenes, the logistics, where the audience/client is conducted or moves alone from scene to scene. This N+1 level also includes general instructions to the performers and other textual components described above. (See Fig. 2‘s diagram of transits above.)
     
    At level N are the individual scenes and their narratives. For YOU—The City the scene is the primary niche in its ecosystem. (We can easily recall many pieces of poet’s theater where actors and locations extend beyond the scene, but that is not the case here.) The play as described earlier was actually generated from a set of relationships between a client and a performer. These relationships were later constituted as scenes. Here we can see how the matrix of intention (described earlier in this essay) more accurately describes the net result of the completed event even though it differs from the initial intention. These relationships construct the scenes. At this level we also have the specific locations where each scene is being performed—the apartment, the office, the cab.
     
    At the N-1 level are individual locations, actors/characters, and text within each scene. Actors in this play are usually only in one scene and only present in a scene one at a time. The first five scenes establish this standard. After the taxi ride a more complex mixture of ingredients is applied. After the cab rides actors extend across two scenes, and including one case where an actor appears in scenes that are not sequential. At one point in the apartment scene, several actors appear together and in that scene two audience members are together and may relate to each other. At this level several important differences between poet’s theater and non-environmentally aware theater are evident. First the plots and subplots all take place within a scene; they rarely cross even as themes, except the theme of identity, of course. In fact YOU—The City isolates themes within a scene; they don’t survive outside the borders of the niche of the scene, another biomorphic metaphor. The characters too, with the exceptions listed above, do not survive the limits of the niche of the scene. This is not true in the apartment which is visited twice.
     
    At the N-2 level we can place the details of the text for each scene, how the performers speak their lines, how they relate to the client. These performative aspects of the piece are isolated as well within the scene. Intention for the author, as pointed out, began here, but is not readily visible in the performance where the structure of the scenes commands our attention.
     
    Here is a summary of the levels for YOU—The City. The play offers three groups of sets, somewhat simplified:
     

    Group A represents the theater: the play, the scenes, the transits, the neighborhood and specific locations.
     
    Group B represents the participants: the characters/actors, the audience/client, neighborhood people who intrude into the scenes.
     
    Group C represents the text: the commentary in the play, the spoken text, the narratives in each scene, the speeches.

     

    Leaving out the commentary for the time being, although we have seen above how it participates, we can fit the groups into a hierarchical schema where each level contains the level below it:

     

    N+2 The play as in groups A and C, the neighborhood as in group A
     
    N+1 The audience/client as in group B, transits and logistics as in group A
     
    N The scenes as in group A, the narratives as in group C, the characters in more than one scene, the specific locations of the scenes
     
    N-1 Locations, text, and participants of each scene (characters and client).

     

    We could go on from here to show textual and performance details, but for the purposes of this analysis, we have probably gone far enough to clarify how q-analysis might organize the theater. Ron Atkin uses a similar approach to Midsummer Night’s Dream (131-141). Here, for comparison, is Atkin’s q-analysis of Midsummer Night’s Dream. The groups have a similar structure with different and similar contents:

     

    Group A: the play, the acts, the scenes, the subscenes
     
    Group B: the characters
     
    Group C: the commentary, the play, the plots, the subplots, the speeches…

     

    And here is the schema:

     

    N+2 The play (as in group A), and also the play (as in group C)
     
    N+1 The acts (A), the plots (C) [plots refer to the different strands of the story the lovers, the faeries, and the workingman’s theater troupe]
     
    N The scenes (A), the characters (B), and the subplots (C)
     
    N-1 The sub-scenes (A), the speeches (C)
     

     
    The differences and similarities are immediately apparent. Templeton simplifies the narrative structure but adds location-specific information that Atkin with his more traditional aesthetics assumes. Rather than multiple scenes within the narrative, and plots and subplots, Templeton’s poet’s theater focuses on how the stories are played out within each scene or niche. Templeton separates narrative, the sequence of scenes, from the stories within each scene. If we identify story with the self, then poet’s theater becomes a critique of the identification of narrative (structure) with story (self) in prior theaters. Narrative becomes logistical. Although not all poet’s theater has this specific structure, poet’s theater as a general case revises the structure of prior theater. Poet’s theater changes the idea of self; the subject/object problem is also dealt with differently as discussed above. Now it is easier to see the power of the structure assumed in prior theater and what results by changing that structure in poet’s theater. The top level contains the play in both cases, but in YOU—The City the location becomes an active participant whereas in the prior theater the locations are assumed as the stage. The transits exist as blocking in Shakespeare but are not considered in Atkin’s hierarchy, because they are assumed by humanist culture as Atkin sees it. Shakespeare’s is a human-centered approach in that it avoids a narrative of logistics, preferring to focus on character. If we look closely at Shakespeare we see that relationships are often established by logistics–who is where when–and happenstance is a key player in the narrative. But Shakespeare primarily sequences the narrative using stories or plots. Also different between environmentally focused poet’s theater and prior theater is the active presence of the audience or client as a dynamic contributor to the action. While scenes and plots are present in both, their locations are somewhat different. The details of each scene show a similar structure between Templeton and Shakespeare but in Templeton’s poet’s theater there are no sub-scenes, and plots are encapsulated within scenes. From another viewpoint the plays are similar. We still have the play, the text, the actors, and the audience. They have different roles in each type of theater, but the components are quite the same. Consider the biological analogies. What separates environmentalism from humanism in part is how environmental poetics treats both similarities and differences in identifying the two theatrical structures. Environmental poetics allows interactive positioning rather than taking an ideological stance that isolates different perspectives. Humanism’s fixed hierarchy is still defined in Genesis.
     
    When looking at these similarities and differences together, notice the balance between them. While we continue to distinguish one part of the modeling tool from another as in any hierarchy, we are also confronted with large-scale similarities between the plays. Looking at this contextualized set of factors forces a comparative view of these plays. Again, as in Templeton’s blurring of the borders of the individuals, the reader is driven to value a larger sphere than the self, and we begin to identify with the structure of the environment as well as the self as part of it. Q-analysis would allow us to go further, too, in mapping the topology of the play, as Atkin does in his book-length treatment. Doing so would show the specific communications that are facilitated by being in the same dimension of the ecosystem. It would also show those that are made more difficult by being in another level or dimension, such as the difficulty of understanding the entire play at level N+2 from the point of view of the client moving consecutively through the scenes at level N+1. The client has to go through all the scenes and debriefing by the director in a café at the end before having enough information to grasp the concept even though the client is constantly trying to understand her situation. In Templeton’s poet’s theater the location varies from scene to scene and locations recur only once with the client in a different role, whereas in proscenium theater almost all action takes place on the same stage with some action understood to have taken place offstage. Props and actors are treated as resources to be moved on and off the stage as the action directs. The distributed architecture of poet’s theater is used even where there is only one location as poet’s theater frequently re-orients the coordinates of the audience and the staging.
     
    But what does this analysis do for us that justifies extending the creative impulse to the structure of set theory? What do we learn from applying topology to art? In the environmental model, human biological and mechanical systems as well as systems of ideas can be considered ecosystems, i.e., as we have said, a set of relationships and as such can be treated together. Q-analysis organizes any of these complex structures in an unambiguous way that is expected in science and politics, but remains unusual, even difficult, for art. In fact, this method can be said to restrict one of the primary values of poetry–ambiguity–replacing it instead with several well-delineated logistical processes. But there’s plenty of ambiguity left to go around; it occurs at different points in the artistic process. We learn to accommodate change and dynamism in our actions and thoughts. Q-analysis supplies a structural description of the linkages among these components, allowing us to see that our environment is not simply an extension of our will. It separates the semantic relationships from the syntactic (ordering, logistic) relationships but treats them at the same level so that they communicate. And I mean to use it and external cognition as levers to change our view of environment from a bucket into which we can throw objects and ideas with predictable results to a set of relationships with edges defining events. We learn how components of our lives communicate or distance themselves, both human and non-human entities.
     
    How can we establish an environmentally oriented methodology by mixing mathematical and literary tools as Templeton implies and I have made explicit here? One goal is to establish that independent modes of discourse separated by great intellectual distances can live side by side, even thrive symbiotically and consequently encourage environmental thinking in the arts. Q-analysis shows that difficulty in communication across dimensional boundaries appears even among related ideas such as understanding the whole play while in it. In its method of construction, q-analysis works environmentally. Its complex structures are focused on linkages, as in Templeton’s work, where a system has “considered parts standing in interaction because the state of each part is dependent on the state of other parts via a directed influence/dependence linkage” (Legrand). The topological process of connectivity in q-analysis allows the data to be inspected with less distortion than with a narrative. Again, I point to the need for artists to consider how non-evaluative hierarchy can exist alongside narrative and tone in a normally ambiguous text or even in a polysemic innovative text. Q-analysis is useful in diagnosing the failure of large-scale systems like works of art or social structures. We can see where communication works, where it breaks down, and where it is duplicated (Ishida). For example, communication works easily where the levels are connected downward. It’s easy to understand grass and flowers in the garden. Going upward levels of greater inclusiveness are more difficult to communicate in that it’s harder to understand the garden from the point of view of one flower. It’s difficult to understand the relationship of the individual in society if relationships are not emphasized. The individual doing the thinking becomes easily confused and marginalized. Q-analysis’ value as a social science tool makes it an appropriate linking agent between arts and sciences.
     
    Atkin’s q-analysis is known for showing the limits of communication. By applying it to poet’s theater, an art often concerned with the indefinable and personal analogy, we are able to show that things we expect to combine in a specified way might combine differently, and that they don’t successfully combine in yet other ways. Q-analysis emphasizes the experimental aspect of poet’s theater; things don’t always work as planned, and events in the performance are highlighted as tentative and provisional. Atkin shows this through a geometrical analysis of a hierarchical environment, inclusive of subject and object and capable of becoming a lens through which to view across disciplinary lines. Templeton’s work enables us to view ecosystems similarly by establishing a concrete structure where all the parts are defined in the poet’s theater semantically, and are then structured syntactically in such a way that the hierarchy works to direct the audience’s path through the ecosystem. In this process, Templeton’s work is both exploratory as a kind of trial and error process, and produces artistic and ambiguous results (although this process is not unique to art). Social structure can now be read as an ecosystem of relationships.
     

    James Sherry is the author of more than 10 books of poetry and prose. His new manuscript, Sorry: Environmental Poetics, is forthcoming. He is the editor of Roof Books (www.roofbooks.com) and founder of the Segue Foundation (seguefoundation.com) that has produced more than 10,000 literary and other art events in the New York metropolitan area during the past 30 years.
     

    Footnotes

     
    1. YOU—The City was first produced in New York City (USA), 1988; London (England), 1989; Ljubljana (Slovenia), 1990; Den Haag, (Netherlands), 1990; Zurich (Switzerland), 1990; Munich (Germany), 1991; Hamburg (Germany), 1999; Rotterdam (Netherlands), 2001.
     
    As editor and publisher of Roof Books I consider this essay a conflict of interest. It may also be that few people besides the actors themselves have gotten as close to the work as I did as editor. As a result I have taken on the risk of conflict of interest in order to pursue the environmental perspectives of material I know quite well. The conflict has prevented me from writing about it for 20 years. It has also impelled me to take a non-evaluative view of the piece, since I clearly like it, having put a lot of energy into it and being shy of praising it too highly. Finally, my conflict of interest is exacerbated by the fact that I have emphasized certain aspects of Templeton’s work to support my own interests.
     
    While an environmentalist as I have been describing, Templeton’s intention from the author’s point of view was not focused on creating the environmental person I have described in this essay, but rather on a socially constructed person, an alternative to that monadic organism often critiqued by postmodernism. That alternative derived from the thrust of critical thought turns out to have been environmentally oriented. And in the intervening years environment and planetary considerations have overwhelmed the issue of personal identity. The critic’s intention merges with the proto-environmental alternative Templeton created as I have described in paragraphs about intention above. As publisher and critic I am at once spectator and creator in this essay and by extension publisher and actor in YOU—The City. The extended environmental person appears everywhere.
     
     
    2. Jonathan Skinner, founder and editor of the journal ecopoetics, refers to ecosystem in similar terms to the McGraw Hill definition in a recent email to me. “You use the term ‘ecosystem’ in the essay in a way that certainly fits in with a lot of what ecopoetics has proposed (and in a way that is neither more nor less defined than ‘ecopoetics’).” But Skinner thinks we need to be careful in the metaphorical use of the term ecosystem. He suggests putting “energy into a critique of the metaphorical use of . . . “ecosystem” which is a core work of ecopoetics.” While this subject is a bit outside the scope of this essay on poet’s theater, ecopoetics is consistent with the thrust of this essay. Each effort to transform a metaphor for poet’s theater across disciplines has to be carefully undertaken. Images arise in the mind from a breakdown in linguistic logic and hence are a biological outcome of uncertainty and problematic conditions. Poetry has long established this link to biology. And in some ways the obviousness of our effort increases its difficulty. A discussion of the differences between ecopoetics and my view of environmental poetics would focus on how ecopoetics presents a new nature poetry while environmental poetics focuses more on using natural methods to create innovative writing that may not have nature as the subject.

     

     
    3. Of course, many recent writers (such as language poets) and scientists (such as those seeking to solve real world problems of turbulence) also address complex systems directly without simplifying to linear problems.

     

     
    4. As an aside, considering how these imbalances work through the theory of complexity, we can see how nature uses similar structures at all scales of the environment, from a thought to a planet.

     

     
    5. The impulse behind using set theory to talk about different disciplines comes from Atkin’s Multidimensional Man.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Ashbery, John. Houseboat Days. New York: Penguin, 1977. Print.
    • Atkin, Ron. Multidimensional Man. New York: Penguin, 1981. Print.
    • Ishida, Y., N. Adachi and H. Tokumaru. “A topological approach to failure diagnosis of large-scale systems.” IEEE Transactions on systems, man, and cybernetics 15.3 (1985): 327-333. Print.
    • Kuhns, Richard. “Criticism and the Problem of Intention.” Journal of Philosophy 57 (1960): 5-23. Print.
    • Legrand, Jacky. “How far can Q-analysis go into social systems understanding?” Res-Systemica. Special issue: Proceedings of the fifth European Systems Science Congress. 2 (2002): 1-10. Web. 24 Oct. 2010.
    • McGraw Hill Life Sciences Glossary. n.d. Web. 23 Nov. 2008.
    • Olson, Charles. Collected Prose. Berkeley: U of California P, 1997. Print.
    • Rowlands, Mark, “Environmental Epistemology.” Ethics & the Environment 10.2 (2005): 5-27. Print.
    • Skinner, Jonathan. “EcoPoetics Question Mark.” Message to the author. 1 Dec. 2009. Email.
    • Taylor, Diana. The Archive and the Repertoire: Performing Cultural Memory in the Americas. Duke UP, 2003. Print.
    • Templeton, Fiona. “The Presence Project Interviews Fiona Templeton.” Interview by Gabriella Giannachi and Nick Kaye. The Presence Project. 24 May 2006. Web. 24 Oct. 2010.
    • ———. “A Poetics of Performance Relevant to a Particular Definition of the Word.” Birkbeck College at Royal Holloway University, University of London. Apr. 2007. Talk and TS.
    • ———. YOU—The City. New York: Roof, 1990. Print.

     

  • Performing Ketjak: The Theater of the Observed

    Nasser S. Hussain (bio)
    Leeds Metropolitan University
    nassershussain@gmail.com

    Abstract
     
    This essay takes as its focus Ron Silliman’s 1978 marathon street-side reading of his long poem Ketjak in San Francisco, and examines the “special effects” of a poet’s theatre when it is extended beyond the physical and ideological boundaries of the traditional, contemporary poetry reading.
     

     

    When in the spring of 2005 the moderators of the Buffalo Poetics listserv banned posting poetry to the board, poet Mairead Byrne asked, “How will you know it’s a poem and is there an honor code?”–an inquiry that points out the elusiveness of the poetic itself. In order to appreciate fully the thrust of her argument, it is necessary to reproduce her entire letter:
     

    Dear Editors,
     
    With regard to your recent decision that poems will no longer be allowed on the Poetics List, I realize you do not intend to address this matter further but I have a question. How will you know it’s a poem and is there an honor code?
     
    For years I have been trying to free myself of conversation in favor of conversing only in poetry. I have made major strides towards this goal. I feel success is within my grasp. The answer is not to import found language into poetry but to send poetry out into everyday discourse like so many platelets or Frisbees or oases of calm government. To that end I have produced thousands of poems. I am close to having at least one for every eventuality. They can be quite subtle. Almost indistinguishable from real conversation (to me of course they are much realer than conversation, hence my endeavors to begin with).
     
    How will you know if my messages are poems? How will you know they are not poems? Do you want me to self-declare? Do you want me to throw away years of work and start ham-fistedly attempting to communicate “normally” again?
     
    What is the power of *about*? Why is it alright to talk *about* poetry but not alright to talk poetry? How will you know? What will you do?
     
    Are there grey areas? Will you notice if too much attention is paid to spacing or a bit of alliteration creeps in? Even avoiding the obvious, what if a piece has all the devil-may-care casualness of prose but the bold gestalt heart of pure poetry? Even impure. Is your rule enforceable?
     
    Why would you want it to be?
     
    I will sign this so you know it’s not a poem. Next time I may be trickier. Or maybe I’m being really tricky now.
     
    Mairead
     

    (“How will you know”)

     

    According to Byrne, her experiments have led her to a point where she can converse in poetry, rendering her poems “indistinguishable” from everyday conversation. Far from the hushed and sacred space of the poet’s reading, poems circulate, for Byrne, like vital “platelets” in the bloodstream. They are playful “frisbees” flung outward from the poet in the game of life. Considered as such, Byrne’s work in language (suddenly “poetry” seems too narrow a word) is an unrepeatable and continuous performance, a Heraclitean flow of utterance that is constantly dancing with and determined by the particularities of its context. For Byrne, poetry is a sustained and sustainable mode of being in the world, and not an occasional irruption of aesthetic language into an otherwise dull and alienated existence in which words exist as mere instruments, tools we use to chisel out our desires.

     
    If we take Byrne at her word (and there is no reason not to), then the boundary between the poetic and the non- is not merely blurred, but dismissed utterly. There is no difference between the vernacular and the poetic: Wordsworth, Whitman, Eliot and O’Hara have all found their apotheosis here. We needn’t even look to Byrne’s published work, nor subject it to close reading or analysis in one of a hundred theoretical frameworks; rather, all we need to do is have a chat with the poet about any subject we wish, and in so doing, we will be bathed in a poem crafted for just the occasion, customized to work in that particular context. Such an attitude towards artistic production and reception resonates with much of the thought expressed in Continental European modernisms, inaugurated by the Futurists, and culminating in Marcel Duchamp’s readymade sculpture. This dynamic interplay between the average and the aesthetic came to the fore in North America in the 1950s with the Black Mountain experiments in performance, where events like the carnivalesque productions orchestrated by John Cage (like the “untitled event” that took place in 1952) formed the crucible from which sprang Allan Kaprow’s Happenings, Guerrilla theater, and the catalogue of Fluxus and Conceptual art in the last three decades of the twentieth century.
     
    This is a brief sketch of a renegade band of practitioners in the history of sculpture, art and theater. Their exploits and repercussions have already been well documented.1 Rather than retread these avenues, it is my concern in this essay to examine the point at which the theatrical avant-garde intersects with the poetic, specifically in the case of Ron Silliman’s public reading of his long poem Ketjak in 1978. Given Language poetry’s insistence on the material status of the word–those “language particles” that, when manipulated, result in “new aggregates of meaning,” which in turn allow for the perception of “(as yet unseen?) physical states of matter” (Coolidge 502)–it becomes possible to inquire into the activities that those language particles manifest in the world. Under the special circumstances of Language poetry, reading a poem is not simply a recitation or re-hearse-ing of the words on the page, but a loosing of matter into the plane of experience: it is a rare opportunity to watch language perform independently on the stage of everyday life.
     
    One of the dominant critical tropes of Language poetry lies in the dialogic character of the work. Of Steve Benson’s early work in the 1970s, Geoff Ward writes that the poem (“As is”) “may be on permanent vacation from literature’s traditional functions,” and that the resultant hash of language–which mixes images of pubic hair, a freeway accident, unidentified shards of metal, dictionary definitions of “adjudicate,” and “treetop birds swing[ing] out from/ nylon hose flung out the window in mild abandon”–is Benson’s call to the reader to “sort it out – if you want to” (Ward 9-10). Language poetry teases the reader out of a passive readerly stance, and demands a more active approach to the invisible and assumed processes of interpreting words on a page. This is not to say that reading work other than Language poetry does not require such an “athletic” approach, but in the specific case of Language poetry, soliciting the reader’s participation is an explicit part of the work. The text is designed to achieve this effect as an end in itself. Silliman’s street rendition of Ketjak carries on this participatory dynamic, but transmutes it into a performance. In print, the Language poem challenges the aesthetic codes of reading; gone from the poem are the familiar markers of sustained narrative, meter, rhyme, and often (especially in the early Language experiments) words themselves, as the text explores the limits of “diminished” or blatantly “non-referential” language. When language’s obligation to represent an exterior reality transparently is thus abdicated, the reader becomes a co-conspirator in the production of meaning, and must improvise a series of responses to the text as it continually undercuts and complicates its status as a “representation.” In short, Language poems tend to foreground the experiential nature of reading, above and beyond any nominal content that may (or may not) appear in the work itself.
     
    This much is clear: we are to read as though we are writers. But how, then, should we listen? Instinctively, we might hew to the traditional format for public performances of poetry:
     

    A person stands alone in front of an audience, holding a text and speaking in an odd voice, too regular to be conversation, too intimate and too lacking in orotundity to be a speech or a lecture, too rough and personal to be theater. The speaker is making no attempt to conceal the text. Signs of auditory effort in the audience are momentarily lost in occasional laughter, tense silences, and even cries of encouragement. Sometimes the reader uses a different, more public voice and refers to what it is being read, or to some other information of apparent interest. No one talks to the reader. No one proposes a second take. No one reflexively discusses the ritual itself.
     

     

    This ritual is also the form preferred by the print poet, as a kind of advertisement for poetry disseminated via the “book tour.” (Margaret Atwood has even gone so far as to develop the LongPen, a device that allows her to avoid the tedium and effort of physically travelling to book readings, and instead allows her to autograph her fans’ copies from the comfort of her home.2) Anyone who has attended even a single such contemporary poetry reading will be immediately familiar with the milieu of silent reverence and repressed coughing that Middleton describes in the passage above. It is my sense that Middleton has isolated a kind of metanarrative built into the poetry reading itself. The subject of this metanarrative is not so much the structure of the poetry reading as it is the model it provides for the consumption of poetry: a blueprint for the audience members when they leave the event and “perform” the poem for themselves, silently, internally, and alone. The poetry reading is a metanarrative that provides the reader with an “insider’s” perspective on the poem; it points up the gravity of a specific line break, it gives the silent reader cues to the varieties of tone and voicing implicit in the words, and most importantly, it highlights an awareness that the poem on the page is being directed (always and already) at an audience, that is, the reader. In this sense, the poetry reading trains the audience to bifurcate itself, to be both the performer and the listener at the same time, to mime the “original” author’s initial performance of the poem for her own entertainment/edification/education later. The event of the poem performed by the author hovers over any subsequent interaction with the poem, informing its interpretation and reception.

     
    This is not an unbreakable cycle, however. Current practitioners have reacted against the structural metanarrative of the poetry reading and its disabling corollary of trained consumerism, as we saw above in Mairead Byrne’s effort to actually talk poetry rather than talk about it. David Antin’s work since 1972 is one historical precedent for Byrne’s model. Essentially, Antin’s chosen form (the “talk-poem”) leverages the sacred space of the poetry reading and declares that, if the contemporary poetry reading is the space-for-poetry, then whatever is said on this platform must, by extension, be poetry.3 The collected body of Antin’s work, both in print and in performance, can be read as a sustained effort to answer the question that stands as the epigram to his first book, Talking: “If someone were to come up to you and start talking a poem at you, how would you know?” Like Byrne’s poetry for every situation, the act of talking (at least in the protected sphere of the “event” of an Antin performance) is co-extensive with poetry.
     
    Somewhere between Middleton’s model and Byrne and Antin’s avant-garde interventions lies Ron Silliman’s performance of Ketjak in San Francisco in 1978. In a written reflection on his performance, Silliman succinctly summarizes “the act”: “On Saturday, September 16, 1978, between noon and 4:30 pm, I read, without amplification or intermission, the entirety of Ketjak, at the corner of Powell and Market streets in San Francisco” (“Reading” 195). A four and a half hour long performance might exhaust even the most avid connoisseur, but the simple reason for the amount of time required is the length of the text. Ketjak proceeds from its initial line whose duration is a single two word sentence–“Revolving door”–and roughly doubles the number of sentences per line until the twelfth line, which in its original printing appeared as a line “45 pages long, containing more than 10,000 words” (“Reading” 194). Not only does the poem double in length from one line to the next, but it maintains the order of sentences from line to line. The best way to describe this technique is to watch it happen in the poem directly. For instance, lines three and four of Ketjak read as follows:
     

    Revolving door. Fountains of the financial district. Houseboats beached at the point of low tide, only to float again when the sunset is reflected in the water. A sequence of objects which to him appears to be a caravan of fellaheen, a circus, camels pulling wagons of bear cages, tamed ostriches in toy hats, begins a slow migration to the right vanishing point on the horizon line.
     
    Revolving door. First flies of the summer. Fountains of the financial district spout. She was a unit in bum space, she was a damaged child. Dark brown houseboats beached at the point of low tide – men atop their cabin roofs, idle, play a Dobro, a jaw’s harp, a 12-string guitar – only to float again when the sunset is reflected in the water. I want the grey-blue grain of western summer. A cardboard box of wool sweaters on top of the bookcase to indicate Home. A sequence of objects, silhouettes, which to him appears to be a caravan of fellaheen, a circus, dromedaries pulling wagons bearing tiger cages, tamed ostriches in toy hats, begins a slow migration to the right vanishing point on the horizon line.
     

    (Silliman, Age 3; my emphasis)

     

    I have italicized the four “new” sentences in the fourth line to make clear the additions that Silliman has made, and to show that he maintains the order of the sentences that previously made up the third line. The sentences of the third line are (with minor adjustments) recognizably and sequentially preserved in the fourth line. This new line, now eight sentences long, is created by inserting sentences into the spaces between the sentences of the line previous. The fifth line will repeat this technique, and so on until the gargantuan twelfth line (which in the 2007 edition of the poem runs almost fifty pages in length).

     
    One effect of this form on the reader is a constant renegotiation of the syllogistic connections among sentences. For instance, the sixth line of the poem ends with these two sentences: “Look at that room filled with fleshy babies. We ate them.” This “couplet” (so to speak) coerces the reader into imagining a horrifying tableau of cannibalism. But by the eighth line, now 108 sentences long, these same elements recombine into a different and disjunctive narrative and reads as follows:
     

    Look at that room filled with fleshy babies, incubating. Points of transfer. A tall glass of tawny port. The shadows between the houses leave the earth cool and damp. A slick gaggle of ambassadors. We ate them.
     

     

    Where earlier we ate the babies, now they incubate peacefully, removed by a distance of four sentences from our threatening teeth. In fact, several new “points of transfer” have been placed in our way, shuttling us between appreciating a glass of port, the space between two houses, and leading to the prospect of eating a “slick gaggle of ambassadors” (perhaps a bit more palatable menu than a room full of innocent cherubs, but disturbing nonetheless). As Barrett Watten observes, the text “makes for an evaluative mode of thinking – values of the sentences are revealed in how they interact with those around them” (271). But these subtleties are best available to the reader of the poem, and are accessible through a sustained act of scanning the text, all the while flipping back and forth in the book in order to register the shifts and consistencies between lines. They are also partially present to the listener, as the text echoes itself from line to line–however, as the lines grow and the interstitial additions from one line to the next grow in number, the real time that passes between the echoes might diminish the effect. Yet the “listener” that I have invoked is a very special person–she is a dedicated, knowledgeable and motivated audience member who has chosen to attend the “event” of Ketjak, and most likely brings with her a set of expectations (of varying levels of accuracy: she may find that this reading is entirely not what she expected at all, feel disappointed, and leave).

     
    These are precisely the special category of listeners that Silliman attracted to his outdoor reading of Ketjak. In his report on the reading he writes:
     

    A lesson I’d learned from a year’s work at the Tenderloin, which served well during the reading, is that psychotics & most street alcoholics respect an aggressive assertion of presence. Only one person tried to jam a toothbrush down my throat as I read.
     
    I did want the presence of some support, not only for such contingencies as that & to combat the general alienation of any streetcorner speaker (I after all was hardly to see anything beyond the borders of my page), but because I intended the event as a communication to other poets, concerning their work as well as mine. I sent out a flyer & listed the reading in Poetry Flash.
     

    (“Reading” 198)

     

    In the cloistered space of the contemporary poetry reading, the poetic is readily and easily distinguished from the chatter and white noise that bookends the “event” itself. The presence of an emcee who “introduces” the speaker, a publicized starting time, dimming the lights–all of these are rituals designed to focus our attention on the specialized use of language that is, after all, the reason for gathering in the first place. Middleton writes elsewhere that the poetry reading is “awash” with precisely those “distracting noises” that are forbidden from, say, the cinema. This may appear contradictory, especially given the “ritualized” atmosphere of the contemporary reading that I described earlier. A gathering of film-goers for even the worst Hollywood dreck is ostensibly spared the conditions of the poetry reading, a scene endlessly compromised by “[p]oor acoustics, outdoor noise . . . comings and goings of drinkers, coughs due to poor ventilation, encouraging remarks and heckling, lack of sight-lines”–in short, a relatively poor forum for the appreciation of the spoken word (“How” 14). Middleton argues that there is a miniature drama being staged in the contemporary poetry reading, as poets in smoky loud bars all over the world raise their voices to be heard over the collective clinks of bartenders mixing drinks and the clatter of coins as they make change for a clientele immune to the charms of art. He calls it “a drama of poetry’s struggle against the conditions of a modernity that does not value poetry much alongside many other arts, especially those of advertising or with enormous commercial potential” (14). Up to a point, Middleton is accurate, and his interpretation of the poetry reading as a beleaguered art-form should be welcomed by those artists and audiences who labor for “poetry’s promotion to a position of importance” (14). But I am tempted to ask: why should poetry be so visibly and surgically separated from the rest of language? Would a model for poetry reading that resembles the kind of silent attention we give to productions “with enormous commercial potential” actually be a salutary state of affairs compared to Silliman’s street corner?

     
    Silliman’s motivation for performing Ketjak on the street becomes quite clear. He writes that he intended
     

    to give a typical poetry reading, a normal presentation of a text of unusual length. This required enabling (empowering) the audience to move freely, even to come & go, without disrupting the event. The architectural tradition of such readings tends toward enclosed sites of intimate dimension. While this might be ideal for most readings, it nevertheless imposes limitations which have nothing to do with the text itself. Like the so-called little magazine, most reading spaces militate for the short poem, the eminently discrete (& disposable) affective experience.
     

    (“Reading” 195)

     

    Just as the “little magazine” (and its attendant market) prohibits the production of long poems, so too does the typical (or “contemporary”) poetry reading impose a problem for the poet interested in the kinds of experience that only a longer form can provide. It is certainly possible for a short poem to relate (or represent) an experience that might take four hours of time, but it is an entirely different matter to live through four hours directly. In this manner, again, the poetry reading provides a blueprint with which we might (mistakenly) determine the poetic from the non-poetic; poems appear (both in print and in performance) as short, three minute bursts of specialized language, quick epiphanies that we can consume and just as quickly dispose of before moving on to the next. By pushing the poem out of the private theater of a silent reader, and beyond the relatively more public space of the poetry reading, and instead injecting it wholesale into the experience of everyday life, Silliman’s performance strikes at the heart of these issues. What is poetry meant to accomplish? Is the oral transmission of a poem finally degraded into nothing more than an advertisement for the author, or an instruction manual on how to read the poem without the aid of the author’s voice? Is a three-minute poem (or any “eminently disposable” chunk of time) long enough to say anything significant? And finally, what might poetry look like if loosed from the arbitrary physical and temporal limits of the contemporary poetry reading? Silliman proposes that the fragmented, disjunctive world-view produced by just such consumer-friendly snippets of poetry is actually subject to a much larger unity, one that takes into account the co-extensivity of language with the world that it names, but does not imagine that it can ever reach a point when the two comfortably and finally overlap. When Silliman writes that this particular performance was a “test of his own belief in [his own] work,” he is not only addressing contemporary critics, but he is also committing to a unification of the act of poetry to the life of the poet (“Reading” 198). Reading the entirety of Ketjak is a demonstration of the inseparability of the two, in a manner that Byrne and Antin might appreciate.

     
    In the photo that accompanies Silliman’s report on the event, the poet is framed in a manner that makes the task of picking him out of the tableau, if not particularly difficult, at least inconvenient (see Fig. 1 below). At the left edge of the photo is a man shielding his eyes in a manner that might seem dramatic and “pronounced.”4 The Mickey Mouse balloon, clearly visible in the foreground, highlights the tourist and transient nature of the capitalist setting Silliman has chosen, a context inflected by a monolithic, highly commodified and easily consumable representation of “play.” The central figure of the photograph, the man with the flowers and rolled-up paper, striding through Silliman’s sphere, is a perfect encapsulation of what Silliman intended to accomplish with his performance: to expose the illusion of aesthetic experience as somehow transcendent by placing it in a context of everyday experience. The man with the flowers, unaware that he is being recorded in the moment of Silliman’s poem, functions exactly like any one of the sentences that make up Ketjak; he is physically “present” and thus connected to the entire mise en scène that is the event, but his trajectory and his relationship to the moment is at the same time separate and disconnected.
     

     
    Photograph by Alan Bernheimer. Used by permission.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 1.

    Photograph by Alan Bernheimer. Used by permission.

     

     

    If, as David Antin suggests in one of his talk-poems, we are always “standing somewhere […] in this semantic space,” then one corollary of his proposal would cast our bodies as linguistic units within the semantic landscape (tuning 119). The disjunctive relationship between Silliman’s sentence units is then a trope for how our bodies interact with one another in the world–rubbing shoulders, jostling in crowds, sidestepping one moment and impeding a fellow citizen the next, always with varying degrees of orientation as we navigate the ever-changing flux of human traffic. Silliman deploys his lines in a manner that cites reality rather than mimes it.

     
    The tool Silliman uses to cut through representation and engage with “reality” more directly is the “New Sentence.” The New Sentence is the basic unit of Ketjak (and characteristic of Silliman’s poetry in general), and is his particular contribution to Language poetry. The need for a New Sentence in the first place is born from the shortcomings of writing under capitalism. In his essay “Disappearance of the Word, Appearance of the World,” Silliman argues that
     

    [w]hat happens when a language moves toward and passes into a capitalist stage of development is an anaesthetic transformation of the perceived tangibility of the word, with corresponding increases in its expository, descriptive and narrative capacities, preconditions for the invention of “realism,” the illusion of reality in capitalist thought.
     

    (New Sentence 10; my emphasis)

     

    Realism, “realistic,” “realist”–all such modes of representation in art (visual or verbal) are participating in a capitalist pattern. Capitalism effaces the human labor and materials that go into creating a “good” for the marketplace, and instead assigns value according to a process of fetishization. Commodity fetishes then operate to stratify society: for instance, by marking the people who can afford highly valued goods (regardless of the product’s functionality) as “upper” class, the fetishized consumer good somehow “represents” and references something authentic about its bearer in a highly codified but tacit discursive web that presents the illusion of an ordered world. Silliman posits that the same process applies in language. I do not wish to rehearse Silliman’s entire argument, but the following passage is worth consideration:

     

    “Correct grammar,” which has never existed in spoken daily life save as a template, is itself thus predicated upon a model of “high” discourse . . . “Educated” speech imitates writing: the more “refined” the individual, the more likely their utterances will possess the characteristics of expository prose. The sentence, hypotactic and complete, was and still is an index of class in society.
     

    (New Sentence 79)

     

    In this sense a subject can possess language in the same manner that she can possess a consumer item, and the same illusory economy of reference will apply. Being able to speak “like a book” implies that the speaker belongs to a higher strata or order of society than does someone who cannot. The strategy for the avant-garde writer is now clear: she must write a book that doesn’t operate in an economy of reference, and cannot possibly operate as an index of class–a tactic that will liberate both parties (reader and writer) from the pitfalls of commodity fetishism.

     
    Silliman claims that “[u]nder the sway of the commodity fetish, language itself appears to become transparent, a mere vessel for the transfer of ostensibly autonymous referents” (New Sentence 11). The model for his antidote comes from pre-literate cultures. He writes that
     

    within tribal societies the individual has not been reduced to wage labor, nor does material life require the consumption of a vast number of commodities, objects created through the work of others. Language likewise has not yet been transformed into a system of commodities, nor subjected to a division of labor in its functions through which the signified overwhelms the signifier.
     

    (New Sentence 11)

     

    The main culprit in the fetishization and commodification of language, the form most responsible for diminishing the opacity and tangibility of language, is the realist novel, which delivers a “hypotactic and complete” worldview between its printed covers. Its arrangement of words

     

    derives from the narrative epics of poetry, but moves toward a very different sense of form and organization. Exterior formal devices, such as rhyme and linebreak, diminish, and the structural units become the sentence and paragraph. In the place of external devices, which function to keep the reader’s or listener’s experience at least partly in the present, consuming the text, most fiction foregrounds the syllogistic leap, or integration above the level of the sentence, to create a fully referential tale.
     

    (New Sentence 79)

     

    In other words, the prose novel dissociates the reader from her presence in the act of reading by turning what was previously an external and tangible formal device into a system of internalized assumptions about the author’s intent: specifically, the assumption that the sentences being read, formed into paragraphs that integrate into the larger structures of the novel, are cohesive, coherent, and universally directed toward the overall monolithic (and highly ordered) “meaning” of the work. It is through the reader’s internalized faith in the hypotactic structure of the prose novel that “capitalism passes on its preferred reality through language itself to individual speakers” and readers as well (New Sentence 8).

     
    In contrast, the New Sentence provides an antidote to the alienated reader, lulled into a false picture of reality-in-print. It makes the sentence itself an “exterior formal device” by limiting the syllogistic play between sentences to its immediate context. In his list of the eight qualities of the New Sentence, four are directly concerned with the dynamics of syllogism in print. The list is as follows:
     

    1. 1. The paragraph organizes the sentences;
    2. 2. The paragraph is a unit of quantity, not logic or argument;
    3. 3. Sentence length is a unit of measure;
    4. 4. Sentence structure is altered for torque, or increased polysemy/ambiguity;
    5. 5. Syllogistic movement is: (a) limited; (b) controlled;
    6. 6. Primary syllogistic movement is between the preceding and following sentences;
    7. 7. Secondary syllogistic movement is toward the paragraph as a whole, or the total work;
    8. 8. The limiting of syllogistic movement keeps the reader’s attention at or very close to the level of language, that is, most often at the sentence level or below.
    (New Sentence 91)

     

    Or, as fellow Language poet and theorist Bob Perelman writes, “[a] new sentence is more or less ordinary itself but gains its effect by being placed next to another sentence to which it bears tangential relevance” (61).

     
    I have already discussed some of the formal properties of Ketjak, but the significance of Silliman’s New Sentence form requires elaboration. It is my argument here that the ordered (though modulated) repetition of sentences from one line to the next suggests a parallel relationship between sentences and subjects. The clue that has led me to this conclusion is coded in the title of the poem itself; Ketjak is not only the name for the poem that marked Silliman’s “adulthood as a writer” (Interview 255), but is also the umbrella term he has given to the very large output of poetry that he has produced and continues to write. In this sense, then, Ketjak includes The Age of Huts (compleat), the twenty-six books of The Alphabet, the book length poem Tjanting and his current work in progress, Universe. This entire stack of radical text is Ketjak, and as he admits in the preface to the 2007 edition, Silliman does have a penchant for “Russian-doll structure[s],” so it should come as no surprise (as well) that at the center/beginning of the project, we find a poem with the same name as the entire collection (Age ix). Now that Silliman has openly declared his super-title for the project, the time has come to explore the term Ketjak more closely.
     
    A Ketjak (or ‘tjak, or Kechak) is a Balinese version of the Ramayana myth in the form of a ritualized dance, performed by troupes that can reach hundreds of members who replay part of an epic battle between the story’s hero, Rama, and the villain, Ravanna. R.K. Narayan’s prose translation of the Ramayana provides us with an interestingly “ordered” portrait of the evil Ravanna. In his court, where the “reigning gods…perform menial tasks,” each is left to employments that suit their particular skills. Vayu, the wind god, sweeps the floors clean with his breath; the god of fire is in charge of domestic illumination, and Death itself is enlisted to toll the passing hours of the day (Narayan 79). Ravanna’s court appears as a nearly perfect image of order. This might seem slightly at odds with Western invocations of the seat of evil (a tradition stretching from Milton’s portrait of Pandemonium in Paradise Lost to Hawthorne’s menacing and tangled forest in “Young Goodman Brown”), where disorder and chaos are the hallmarks of the demonic. The Ramayana neatly flips this dynamic on its head: to defeat the overly ordered Ravanna, Rama and the monkey horde invite and wield confusion as a weapon for justice. The ‘tjak performs this moment in the conflict when the monkey-god Hanuman enlists the help of a horde of monkeys to ward off Rama’s enemy (see this image of a ‘tjak). While the dance and chant retain many of the formal features of the original narrative, it has been decontextualized somewhat to serve now as a generalized rite of exorcism. As Walter Spies and Beryl de Zoete note, the aggressive and discordant sonic value of the chant is paralyzing to the rather straightforward demons against whom it is directed (“Indonesian”). The possessed subject, encircled by hundreds of chanters, all repeating the syllable “‘tjak!” eventually has the demon within driven out by the sheer noise of the chant.5 This is the source–combined with Steve Reich’s experiments with percussion and taped voices as well as an interest in the possibilities of “choral” arrangements in poetry–that led Silliman to write (and continue writing) Ketjak.6
     
    The sentences in Ketjak are deployed in the same manner as dancers in a ‘tjak: each member of the crowd is “more or less ordinary” (a circumstance highlighted by their uniform dress), and they only achieve the goal of exorcism by sheer numbers (the bigger the horde of “monkeys” the more confusion they generate for the linear demon). The sentences of Ketjak hover between fixity and flow; the repeated sentences appear to move apart from one another, but their sequential relationship remains, by and large, intact.7 In the same fashion, adding more chanters to the ‘tjak would simply be a process of shouldering one’s way into the group, severing any previous contiguity between chanters while simultaneously establishing two new ones (that is, between the new chanter and the two people on either side of him) and all the while increasing the volume and confusion for the malevolent spirit. This much is clear in the mystical economy of the Balinese dance, but if we follow Silliman’s translation of dancers into sentences, what is being exorcised by Ketjak? The demon that is symbolically being driven out by Silliman’s sentences is the commodity fetish in language. Bruce Andrews and Charles Berstein’s comment is pertinent here: the “bothersome and confusing” insistence on a monolithic linguistic economy of one-to-one (word to thing) reference presents a world not unlike Ravanna’s court, where the gods perform their speciality over and over again, mere domestic instruments (ix). To the Language poet, forcing words into such narrow confines is tantamount to the same thing, leaving us in a world ruled by consumption rather than by creativity. Again, Ravanna’s court is best understood through Silliman’s notion of commodity fetishism in language: the moment when “the word – words – cease to be valued for what they are themselves but only for their properties as instrumentalities…so that words…disappear, become transparent, leaving the picture of a physical world the reader can consume as if it were a commodity” (Andrews and Bernstein x). When we replace “word” with “god” and “the reader” with “Ravanna” in the passage above, Silliman’s motivation for Ketjak comes into focus: if commodity fetishism is the malevolent spirit, then the possessed subject in need of purification by ‘tjak is language itself.
     
    What is the nature of this purified subject, this restored language? If we assume that the demoniacally possessed subject is initially diagnosed by his penchant for linearity, then the healthy subject must, by extension, be comfortable in a crowd. Where the possessed reader would insist on a one-to-one exchange value in his linguistic economy, the exorcised reader is looser, less rigidly defined. He would be anonymous, multi-pronged, capable of coupling successfully with a variety of people, assemblages. He would be a nomad within himself, continuously in flux, “fitting in” only provisionally, as he goes. His personality, his fixity, his distinguishable singularity in the tribe would only ever be an effect (temporarily and repeatedly) produced by the context in which he finds himself. The successfully exorcised subject, then, is less about returning him to some essential, singular identity, and more about making him better able to deal with the polymorphousness of everyday life. So too with language. In the hands of the Langpoet, language becomes less referential (read: linear) and more experiential; the rebarbative effects of the poetry are meant to remind the reader of the essentially dis-organized nature of organic life. The possibility for confusions, multiple readings, and a lack of closure are not mere poetic innovations, but are fundamental features of existence as we directly experience it. Language poetry, in this sense, is realist. A contingent, environmental language.
     
    This is the moment of the poet’s theater. We might cast Silliman’s reading in the terms of guerrilla theater, or draw parallels with Allan Kaprow’s Happenings, Fluxus, or any variety of site-specific works of performance art, but Ketjak carries a special valence. It dramatizes the presence of the poet and the poem in the world. Reading Ketjak is more than an advertisement for the poem and the author: it is a staging of the difficulties and successes of poetry-in-action. Steve Benson remarked in a review of Silliman’s performance that he was “reading the reading of his poem” (272), but if we take for granted the Langposition that casts the reader as a collaborator in the work, it is just as reasonable to see this event as a performance of the act of writing. Where the poem manages to grip some aspect of reality, those moments when the poem and the world overlap, when it fails or is ignored as the poem and the poet and the event itself all recede into the white noise of the marketplace in San Francisco–these are the special effects of a poet’s theater.8 In these poems and performances, we awaken, like Byrne, to the fact that poetry cannot and should not be bracketed away from the rest of life, relegated to an economy of representations and epiphanies, but is instead a form of art indistinguishable from life. The twelfth line of Ketjak, all fifty pages and ten thousand words of it, is an arbitrary stopping point. It is not the ending of a poem; it is a prolegomenon, an opening flourish that encodes a much larger gesture toward a literature that seeks to encompass a street corner, a city, a world. A theater of the observed.
     

     

    Nasser Hussain is a lecturer in English Literature in the Department of Cultural Studies at Leeds Metropolitan University, UK. He has published articles on performance poetry and contemporary poetics and is currently working on a book project about American travel literature and narratives of passing.
     

    Notes

     
    1. The best survey on the topic of performance art and its history remains Rose Lee Goldberg’s Performance Art:From Futurism to the Present.

     

     
    2. For a sense of the corporate face of this invention, see www.longpen.com, where the main argument in favour of this technology seems to be about reducing the carbon footprint of people who, rather ironically, depend on the forestry industry for the raw materials to produce their books in the first place.

     

     
    3. One such moment is observable in Antin’s piece “how long is the present.” Here, the occasion is a performance at a book fair, and Antin indulges the audience expectation for a “reading” by opening one of his books and reading from it aloud. Of course, Antin closes the book after a few lines and says that what he’s done isn’t “reading” but “reciting” a pre-written text.

     

     
    4. In a subsection of “Reading Ketjak” entitled “Lessons, If Any,” Silliman writes that in the process of reading the poem, his “physical movements became more pronounced” (199). While this may be true, it is interesting to note that in the shot, he appears to be in a traditional “reading” stance—holding the book open with both hands, head and eyes bent toward the open page (and it is also impossible to determine whether he is performing aloud or engaged in a silent, internalized act of reading)—while the man on the left edge looks more the part of the thespian.

     

     
    5. Ironically, this is a tactic that even the US military have employed; to flush the dictator Manuel Noriega from the Vatican Embassy they played heavy metal and rock music incessantly until he surrendered. See Westcott’s “Is Noriega too hot to handle?”

     

     
    6. For a dramatic staging of the Ketjak, see Ron Fricke’s 1992 film Baraka. Choreographically speaking, the dance is very organized, but sonically, apart from a rough call-and-response structure, the chant is certainly discordant to the point of frightening. These days, however, it seems that in the wake of Fricke’s film (although it is difficult to pin the blame solely on the director) the dance has become a popular tourist attraction, performed now in hotels as a kind of degraded indigenous dinner theater. In his interview with Sinda Gregory and Larry McCaffery, Silliman details Steve Reich’s influence and the possibilities of choral arrangements in writing (252).

     

     
    7. The sole exception to the sequential arrangement that I have detected is the sentence “first flies of the summer,” which appears only in the fourth line of the poem, never to be repeated again—and I believe that by doing so, Silliman is enacting the brief life span of those flies, rather than, say, referring to it (AH 3).

     

     
    8. Of course, the infinite particularities of the performance are lost to us, but Steve Benson observed at least one possible moment when a passerby might have thought that a particular line was addressed directly to her (272).
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Andrews, Bruce and Charles Bernstein, eds. The L=A=N=G=U=A=G=E Book. Carbondale: Southern Illinois UP, 1984. Print.
    • Antin, David. Talking. Champaign, Illinois: Dalkey Archive Press, 2001. Print.
    • ———. tuning. New York: New Directions, 1984. Print.
    • Baraka. Dir. Ron Fricke. MPI Home Video, 1992. Film.
    • Benson, Steve. “Ketjak in San Francisco.” Andrews and Bernstein. 270-71. 272-73.
    • Byrne, Mairead. “How will you know it’s a poem and is there an honor code?” Buffalo Poetics List. University of Buffalo, SUNY, 2 May 2005. Web. 3 May 2005.
    • Coolidge, Clark. “from A LETTER TO PAUL METCALF (jan 7 1972).” In the American Tree. Ed. Ron Silliman. Orono, Maine: National Poetry Foundation, 1986. 501-02. Print.
    • Goldberg, Rose Lee. Performance Art: From Futurism to the Present. London: Thames and Hudson, 1995. Print.
    • “Indonesian Ketjak.” Ubuweb Ethnopoetics: Soundings. UbuWeb, n. d. Web. 14 Sept. 2010.
    • Middleton, Peter. Distant Reading: Performance, Readership and Consumption in Contemporary Poetry. Tuscaloosa: U of Alabama P, 2005. Print.
    • ———. “How to Read a Reading of a Written Poem.” Oral Tradition 20.1 (2005), 7-34. Print.
    • Narayan, R. K. The Ramayana. New York: Viking, 1972. Print.
    • Perelman, Bob. “Parataxis and Narrative: The New Sentence in Theory and Practice.” The Marginalization of Poetry: Language Writing and Literary History. Princeton: Princeton UP 1996. 59-78. Print.
    • Silliman, Ron. The Age of Huts (compleat). Berkeley: U of California P, 2007. Print.
    • ———. Interview. Alive and Writing: Interviews with American Authors of the 1980s. Eds. Sinda Gregory and Larry McCaffery. Urbana: U of Illinois P, 1987. 240-56. Print.
    • ———. The New Sentence. New York: Roof Books, 2003. Print.
    • ———. “Reading Ketjak.” Eds. Ellen Zweig and Stephen Vincent. The Poetry Reading: a Contemporary Compendium on Language and Performance. San Francisco: Momo’s Press, 1981. 194-199. Print.
    • Ward, Geoff. Language Poetry and the American Avant-Garde. Keele: British Association for American Studies, 1993. Print.
    • Watten, Barrett. “Mohawk and Ketjak.” Andrews and Bernstein. 270-71.
    • Westcott, Kathryn. “Is Noriega too hot to handle?” BBC News. BBC, 6 Sept 2007. Web. 13 Sept 2010.

     

  • Carla Harryman’s Non/Representation and the Ethics of Dispersive Performance

    Heidi R. Bean (bio)
    Bridgewater State University
    heidi.bean@bridgew.edu

     

    Contemporary poet’s theater audiences might best be characterized by community rupture: each member experiences an individual identification in the collective space of the theater. This essay takes a closer look at this audience formation through the work of Carla Harryman, a poet-playwright associated with the San Francisco branch of what has become known as L=A=N=G=U=A=G=E writing. Harryman’s 2008 work Mirror Play weaves together poetic experimentalism with references to the U.S.’s role in the Israeli-Palestinian conflict, to the Gulf War, and to the 1968 campy intergalactic anti-war movie Barbarella. She employs poet’s theater conceptually as a means of rethinking our engagement with political narratives. The result is an interpretive “community” marked, paradoxically, by discontinuity and dispersion. Portraying an America defined not by physical borders but by complex military, economic, cultural, and political relationships, Harryman’s work plays through the ways in which these relationships are constructed and maintained. What emerges is not an interpretive free-for-all but rather an embodiment of the ethical dilemma in the postmodern era–the contradiction, as Geoffrey Galt Harpham puts it, between “How ought one to live?” and “What ought I to do?”, between generalizable norms and individual acts in actual (and unique) situations.
     

     

     

    I live in a fabrication near something I have never said before.
     

    –Carla Harryman, “Property”

     
    In “The Ear of the Poet in the Mouth of the Performer,” an essay-play that works through the politics of poetry-performance in the post-9/11 U.S., Carla Harryman recalls a performance in which she participated in the early 1990s: the wearing of a pin designed by artist Daniel Davidson that bore the deceptively simple message “Iraqi.” Responses to Harryman’s wearing the pin oscillated between “largely friendly looks and pleasantly unanticipated conversations from mostly Arab immigrant and Arab American shopkeepers of various religions and nationalities,” and the confusion of “literal minded American types” who took the pin as a confession, as a “coming-out as Iraqi.” As a performance, wearing the pin was not simply a personal expression of solidarity; it was also a demonstration of the ways in which meaning can mutate in different contexts and for different audience members. Significantly, the power of the performance came just as often in the moments of confusion and misrecognition it created: while the Arabs and Arab-Americans in Harryman’s account may have gotten it “right,” the more “literal minded” observers too found ways of identifying with the performance, though not perhaps in expected or intended ways. Harryman recalls, for example, that one woman took the pin as “an invitation to exchange confidences, hers being that she had an excess of facial hair and that she was terrified that her husband would find out about it.” While the woman was mistaken in her assumption, the identification makes some sense to Harryman, who points out that in this interpretation both women “had something to hide until this private moment of mutual outing, even if I hadn’t been deliberately hiding something like she had” (“The Ear”). Although the woman was interpellated by the performance, the performer was not in control of that interpellation.
     
    As wearer of the pin, Harryman felt a political responsibility to the responses it provoked. The purpose of the performance, she explains, was:
     

    to diffuse the theater of war and to dramatize the real life conflations that lead to the targeting of Iraqi subjects as enemies. As a performer of the pin, one becomes responsible in a local context to major world events. The performer citizen engages in a dialogic meditation that exceeds the limits of conventional narrative and argumentation as she becomes aware of her personhood stripped of reductive theatrics and narratives of identity. As with much performance art of the 70’s, Davidson’s work is partly about the performer’s experience itself; and like the performance values of the modernist avant-garde, it assertively provokes a response to emerging states of affairs.
     

    (“The Ear”)

     

    The performer of the pin circulates, but is not in control of, the meanings of language already embedded in social and political narratives. In this sense, I would argue not that the performer’s “personhood [is] stripped of . . . narratives of identity,” as Harryman puts it, but rather that the pin clasps the performer to already-circulating narratives, which may then be embraced or rejected, identified or disidentified with. Harryman is wearing not a pin that states “I claim solidarity with Iraqi victims of war,” which would be a speech-like assertion of her political beliefs and identity–a self-narration–but rather a pin that appears to declare an identity that is not self-evident. In order to make sense of the pin, observers must interpret it within the range of their own experiences and understandings. And in subsequently interacting with the performer, they project those identifications onto her body in social exchange, thereby enacting new narratives. The performance event therefore takes place in the interaction between the performer and the audience, or, perhaps more accurately, in what the audience does with the performance. The wearing of the Iraqi pin is a speech act with unpredictable effects, and in this sense, both Harryman and her observers become performers of its meaning. Harryman’s role in the performance is one of responsibility to her interlocutors, but it is, in some respects, a non-normative responsibility carried out as listening generously to and considering a range of possible identifications. While she mobilizes the structures, Harryman does not lead the interpretations. And although she hints that the Arab and Arab-American observers got it right, she does not accuse others of getting it “wrong,” but rather of getting it different. In wearing the pin, the performer becomes responsible to this difference.

     
    Significantly, the performance must remain peripatetic in order to succeed, since success relies on individual responses not subject to the social pressure of the collective space of the theater. One of the ways Harryman tries to retain this peripatetic quality in the space of the theater is to construct a dispersive theater in which meaning is allowed to oscillate rather than being tied to a single correct interpretation. The oscillation of meaning, Una Chaudhuri reminds us, is “an open space or aporia in the political ‘known’”–the space of revolution (163). Harryman suggests that the ear of the poet is tuned to the oscillation, and in her poet’s theater, it is the job of the performer to keep this oscillation alive. In “The Ear of the Poet,” for example, Harryman juxtaposes the discussion of the Iraqi pin performance with an excerpt from a Gertrude Stein play, leaving the audience to interpret for themselves the relationship between the pieces. While Harryman acknowledges that “the discussion [of the Iraqi pin performance] preceding the extract from [Stein’s] play would infect the semantic meaning of [Stein’s] work–an inference would be brought forth that at this present moment a poet behind a locked door, a no longer living poet, Iraqi, and people are connected and that there is a simultaneity made between the word ‘Iraqi’ in my exposition and the word ‘people’ in Stein’s play”, this is not the “right” or even intended interpretation but rather the result of habituated interpretive practices themselves. Dispersive theater places under scrutiny both the structure of interpretive practices and the very impulse to interpret. The space of dispersive theater is therefore an ethical space; it is a space “where thought itself experiences an obligation to form a relation with its other–not only other thoughts but other-than-thought” (Harpham 37).
     
    I discuss this example here at length because it offers a relatively self-contained way into thinking about some of the strategies and preoccupations of Harryman’s poet’s theater, which is both like and unlike Davidson’s performance art piece. Harryman’s use of Davidson as an element in her own essay-play demonstrates her ongoing engagement with intertextuality, hybrid genre, and art as/and analytic discourse, but she also uses Davidson to think through her own artistic practice. Davidson represents the use of performance not merely as a provisional testing ground in moments of impasse,1 but as a permanently provisional space, “one that in part fulfills an open-ended, non-objective mobile role that is exploratory, improvisatory, and that takes language as a medium as seriously as it does the other mediums of innovative theater that have superseded language” (“The Ear”). Like Davidson, Harryman is interested both in the relationship of narrative to non-narrative and in the way this relationship figures and is figured by physical bodies. Also like Davidson, much of Harryman’s performance is conceptual, though it is usually written as scripted dramatic theater. Moreover, as Harryman’s own commentary above makes clear, in recent years, she too has become interested in the social and political consequences of her artistic experiments. For Harryman, this shift in interest from her own “art activity and its genre excesses” to something else not clearly identified but characterized by “a loss of a sense of form-desire” is precipitated by U.S. militarization against Iraq as a response to 9/11. Viewed through this prism of art-activism, Harryman’s poet’s theater becomes, like the wearing of the Iraqi pin, “a kind of homework assignment” that allows both artist and audience to think through their relationships to form, media, discourse, embodiment, and identity (“The Ear”). Harryman’s discussion of the Iraqi pin project reveals the ways in which discursive conventions and performing subjects sometimes collide and sometimes collaborate. What Harryman demonstrates is that the real and the symbolic are not locked in a unidirectional relationship of mediation, but rather that they influence each other and this influence is site-specific. The Iraqi pin performance, Harryman’s plays, and indeed poet’s theater in general investigates the uses to which meanings are put. While such an investigation recognizes that language is neither stable nor univocal, this recognition is not its conclusion but rather its jumping-off point. Poet’s theater is not therefore deconstructive, as much as it relies on a deconstructive understanding of language.
     
    Asking what comes first, the poetry or the theater, narrative or non-narrative, subject or object, muscle or skeleton, Harryman muses, “I would prefer to emphasize the skeleton. I would prefer the movement to be the movement of the muscles lifted by the skeleton. When the muscles are not lifted by the skeleton they become athletic. One becomes aggressive and competitive. The theater becomes a theater of conflict. And somebody has to win” (“The Ear”). While I want to be careful not to tie Harryman’s ideas down to a simple metaphor, part of what she is suggesting here is that bodies are inseparable from the social forces that animate them. While both muscles and skeleton are components of bodies, they serve distinct but overlapping purposes: one mainly structure, the other mainly force. An illustration accompanying the essay depicts a knife held between teeth and lips, a cooperation of skeleton and muscle that can be read, simultaneously, as both defensive and aggressive. This is a depiction not of an oral weapon but of an aural weapon, both spoken and heard, suggested by the ear-in-the-mouth of the work’s title. In the historical moment of the post-9/11 U.S. “War on Terror,” Harryman implies, muscle-force has been recruited into insidious service, sculpting language and narrative into weapons of social conflict. Yet just as both muscles and skeleton are necessary to movement, so narrative is necessary to communication. The solution, Harryman writes in “Toy Boats,” is “to distribute narrative rather than deny it” (107).
     

    Language Poetry, Poet’s Theater, and the Body

     
    Harryman’s theater practice grows in part out of her participation in the Bay Area poetry community commonly known as “Language” writers, many of whom rework narrative as a political principle. One of the tactics of Language writing is to foreground the conventionalized function of the “I” and of other narrative tools. Such tools mark relationships of location, antagonism, causality, intention, and emphasis and “provide the illusion of movement, direction and location for the reader,” Michael Davidson points out, “but when they lose their indexical function, they point at the conventionalized nature of writing itself” (79). When “I” tell a story from memory, who is the “I” that speaks, and who is the “I” that is spoken of? What is the overlap between the two and in what way does each help to constitute the other? Bringing these questions into the space of embodied performance, Harryman puts further pressure on the conventionalized function of linguistic markers as indicators of identity presumed to be natural.
     
    Harryman’s Memory Play (1994) explores the narrative and performative construction of the “I” via memory, played out differently by the play’s three main characters, Pelican, Fish, and Reptile:
     

    Reptile:

    If I tell you one thing that I remember, you will think I’m an idiot for remembering only one thing. This is one thing that makes theater different from real conversation. If I provide you with several of my most esteemed memories, you will probably believe there are more where those came from, and I will have earned your respect. This will make theater a little more like real conversation.
     

    Pelican:

    I have a job and it is virtually all I can think about; however, I think this: memory is nothing but words stored up in an inefficient computer. What you will remember of this conversation will be nothing like what went into its construction. Such understanding promotes success in business.

    ……………………………………………………………………………….

    Fish:

    I had suffered for a long time from the illusion that remembering inhibited one’s experience. Now the illusion is almost my only memory. . . . [Later,] I will remember something else and not this. I will have forgotten the story to which I currently refer. Each person has his or her own theater. I propose this as an exhibit or a symptom of my personal stage.

    (7-8)

     

    Reptile is a chameleon, disguising himself in the camouflage of social discourse. And yet his disguise is not aimed at deception. Although Reptile suggests that whether or not we are respected or maligned depends on the strength of our (storytelling/conversational) performance, he seems to move beyond Erving Goffman’s notion of impression management to suggest that social discourse is all the truth there is.2 Pelican, on the other hand, focuses on the misinformation that occurs between what one says and what another hears, and promotes a notion of performance as information processing, mechanical and morally indifferent. Meanwhile, Fish appears to recognize the necessary relationship between discourse (remembering) and experience while at the same time acknowledging that the back story of identity is often forgotten, that identity is assumed without realizing what that identity is built upon. Fish might be taken as an example of contemporary performance studies’ notions of identity and performance: while we may understand that identity is performative, we experience it as natural. Despite their differences, what Reptile, Pelican, and Fish share is a notion of memory as performative, produced by and in narrative.

     
    Memory relies, then, on the doubling of creative narrative and social discourse, a doppelgänger which first appears in the stage directions with which the prologue opens: “A bedtime story/conversation in a little tent town out in the salt flats” (7). What one first notices about this direction is its generic ambivalence. While there would be little difficulty producing the visual elements of such a scenic design in performance (a small tent town, salt flats, bedtime), how would the difference-and-sameness indicated by the phrase “story/conversation” be performed? The slash is itself a radically textual performance that suggests the imbrication of social discourse with storytelling, with narrative, and indeed this relationship is the play’s central investigation. W. B. Worthen has argued that “modern drama in print typically frames a dialectical tension between the proprieties of the page and the identities of drama” (62). Harryman’s slash turns this page-stage tension outward, toward social life. Art (story) is different from, but inextricably bound to, social discourse (conversation). Storytelling is both oral and literary art. Harryman’s printed play alludes to the chiasmus of literary textuality and social discourse by putting the play’s status–as literary artifact, as embodied performance–into question. While Harryman makes use of what Worthen has called the “accessories” of modernist dramatic publication–“page design, typography, act and scene numbering, speech prefixes, and stage directions” (13)–she does not do so in order to control the stage performance from the page. Despite Chris Stroffolino’s assertion that Memory Play “works at least as well as a closet drama as it does in theater performance,” the page and stage versions of the play are not correspondent but collaborative, together investigating the performativity of memory (177). While each version can of course stand on its own, the play’s textual-theatrical ambivalence proliferates its identity across genres and across forms of reproduction, undermining the final authority of any single version.
     
    In bringing the language of the text out into the space of performance–performing “as language event the fluidity between public and psychological spaces,” as Harryman puts it (“Site” 158)–her plays investigate the social activities of language within a context of actual human relations, of the audience members and performers within a specific social space (that of the performance at a particular moment in time) and in relation to specific objects. Language writing on the page explores language in individual interaction with readers, while the performance of Language writing in poetry readings is bounded by the conventions of a touring authorial performance that rhetorically position the event (albeit falsely) as site- and audience-nonspecific, if not actually transcendent. In contrast to this, Harryman’s poet’s theater emphasizes embodied identities at the same time it deconstructs them. These identities are not incidental, and they are not nonspecific; rather, they are fluid. The character list of Harryman’s play Performing Objects Stationed in The Sub World, for example, specifies a “White woman,” “Child,” and “Black man,” but the author’s notes for performance explain that “[t]he categories of gender and ethnicity are mutable in this play, based on whatever circumstance of the performance” (qtd in “Site” 158). This is accomplished in part by having multiple actors play each character but also by leaving the gap between character and actor visible: “For instance C3, the Black Man, reads the newspaper but that doesn’t mean that C3 becomes a Black Man who reads the newspaper, but rather C3 performs a reading of the newspaper: his identity or identities such that it is or they are, migrates through activities” (“Site” 162). In this way, the objects with which the actors interact “do not serve as extensions or illustrations of subjectivity nor do they appear with autonomous luminosity”; instead, they are “constitutive of an instability of social encounters and uncertain boundaries between interior fantasy and exterior fact, whether they are sentient or inert” (162). This does not, however, preclude psychological depth. Rather, characters are defined not by the moral challenges they face but rather by the communication they perform and are performed by.
     
    In Memory Play, the playing through of multiple discursive and gestural registers in the formation of identity drives the action. As bodies and spoken language self-consciously jostle one another in performance, the relationship between discourse, identity, and embodiment takes center stage. Reptile’s lines quoted above appear to interpellate audience members into a self-conscious suspension of disbelief: he explicitly acknowledges our tacit agreement to let one memory in “art” stand in for the multiple memories of “real” conversation.3 In art, he suggests, a single story or image (memory) can take on a variety of symbolisms and resonances; in conversation, however, we may question such overdetermination of a single moment in one’s life. But the “I” who speaks this line is shifty, posing as a social interlocutor and literary-dramatic character simultaneously. On the page, Reptile’s “I” seems to remain consistent, a distant observer of the relationship between theater and conversation. Spoken by an actor onstage, however, the “I” oscillates between actor and dramatic character. Is this line a rehearsed but direct address to the audience by an actor who will soon become a character in the play, or is the actor already in character? And how does this ambiguity position audience members in relation to the play?
     
    This last question raises the issue of what poet Joan Retallack has called “reciprocal alterity,” which she conceptualizes as an equilibrium between, on the one hand, the “ethical and epistemological destabilizing principle” that we are never fully knowable to one another or to ourselves and, on the other, community, receptivity, and intention (5). Is the “I,” who–according to Reptile–can earn “your” respect, a “fictional” character or a “real” actor? Either way, of course, the “I” is a construction based in part on the speaker’s performance and in part on the audience’s conclusions in relation to that performance–making both intention and reception important matters to consider. The construction is simultaneously grammatical and epistemological, since pronouns are a necessary part of communication despite their radical insufficiency and contingency. Pronouns suggest independent subjectivity, and in doing so contribute to a model of individualism. In order to “move away from models of cultural and political agency lodged in isolated heroic acts and simplistic notions of cause and effect,” as Retallack urges, we must therefore think through our tools of communication at their most basic level (3). Both Retallack and Harryman propose “a fine new kind of realism,” to quote William James’s remark in a letter to Gertrude Stein about her writing (qtd. Mellow 147). Retallack approaches this version of realism by appealing to the essay form, because, she argues, the essay writes from the position of an “I” understood as selfsame, whereas the lyric “I” of poetry is already understood to be a persona. The theater, however, presents an unusually apt arena for an investigation of representation, for the presence of bodies on stage always simultaneously evokes both the characters being portrayed and the actors “themselves.”

     
    If the Humanities have emerged from the “turn to language” only to enter the “turn to the visual,”4 then Harryman’s work provides an apt vehicle for exploring our negotiations of these turns. Language writing arose simultaneously with the rise of linguistic theory in the 1970s, and the relationship between the two has always been seen as collaborative–Language writing as theory. Some saw Language writing as the perfect object of the new theory and saw developments in theory as supporting the sense that Language writing had a cognitive and social use. But not everyone agreed on the role of theory in Language writing.5 In There Is Nothing Better Than a Theory (given its first full performance in 1989), Harryman satirizes what she sees as a tendency toward theory fetishism. In Memory Play she similarly pokes fun at theory’s drive to dominate, this time in the figure of a child’s toy, humorously named the Miltonic Humiliator. Meanwhile, recent productions of Mirror Play seem to indict theory as the production of knowledge removed from lived experience; in debates about representation and gender, the body becomes the vanishing point of theory.
     
    Although San Francisco poet’s theater emerged along with what has become known as “Language” writing, it has not figured into those historical accounts until recently.6 Nick Robinson and Eileen Corder founded the San Francisco Poets Theater (SFPT) in 1979, and by the time the final SFPT play was produced in 1984, nearly a dozen plays had been produced, involving a wide range of “Language” and associated poets in a variety of roles (from playwright, actor, set designer, and director to publicist and poster/program designer), including Harryman, Corder, Nick Robinson, Kit Robinson, Steve Benson, Alan Bernheimer, Johanna Drucker, Lyn Hejinian, Tom Mandel, and Bob Perelman, among others.7 While some of these play texts have been published (almost exclusively in small journals), there are virtually no sustained examinations, let alone theorizations, of this performance work.8
     
    One of the reasons for this neglect has to do with Language writing’s almost exclusive focus, in the 1970s and 80s, on material textuality. In a 1986 review of Harryman’s Percentage and Property, for example, Jean Day explains the dramatic form of these hybrid works metaphorically, as a theatrum mundi in which “‘We’ are acting out aspects of a common drama through language, not just in the sense that we’re using the same tools, but in the sense that it is language which makes the private public, makes the passion of the revolutionary charge” (120-121, emphasis in original). Steve Benson–Harryman’s close friend, fellow performer, and frequent theater collaborator–refers to the published text of Harryman’s play La Quotidienne as “the play itself,” folding the entire work under an umbrella of textual interpretation when he argues that “[t]he lack of any stable context or prescribed behavior indicates no means or property other than discourse by which the figures can gain leverage in the struggles for authority and autonomy” (24, 23). Focusing exclusively on discourse, such an interpretation ignores the ways in which the actor-characters give the play’s figures an authority and autonomy outside of discourse, in the presence of live bodies on stage.9 Similarly, in an essay published in Poetics Journal, Alan Bernheimer suggests that poet’s theater consists of works “written towards production . . . work[s] with then two lives to lead, one self-evident and the other potential” (70). But what is “self-evident” about a poet’s theater text like Memory Play? Bernheimer sees words as agents, which “[l]eft to their own devices . . . tell stories by themselves, resolute (resonant in the evolving history of their use)” (70), but of course it is this latter assertion–that words are “resonant in the evolving history of their use”–that points out the falsehood of the former suggestion that words have their own agency, for the “stories” of words are constituted in their social use. Certainly, unintended meanings and histories can (and often do) arise when we use language, but to characterize this as an act of words “by themselves” obscures the ways in which meaning both constitutes and is constituted by bodies and embodied identities both on the stage and in social exchange.
     
    Acknowledging the work of Language poets such as Ron Silliman, Bob Perelman, and Charles Bernstein, who engage the performativity of material language, Worthen too considers this work as a textual phenomenon, interesting for its similarities to printed drama (which the title of his last chapter suggests is “something like poetry”) but not engaged as drama or theater. But Worthen’s discussion of anti-theatricality in both poetry and theater is an important step in opening the relationship between two fields normally considered to have very little overlap. Most significantly for my purposes here, Worthen observes that
     

     

    the materiality of the mise-en-page, the precise construction of printed words in space, does not operate as a kind of stage direction, an authorized and authoritarian effort to govern subsequent performance (though some authors may intend it that way), nor is it complete in itself, a container or “can” of perfected meanings waiting to be emptied by performance. Instead, Language poetics implies the incommensurability of these two modes of writing’s “thickness.” The poem’s physical design on the page, and its physicalized performance cannot be collapsed into one another so that the script grounds the performance or the performance realizes the script. . . . Language poetics reframes the page as a distinctive field of play, insisting that words can and must be joined in ways beyond the habits of conventional speech.
     

    (138)

     

    Indeed, in “Aesthetic Tendency and the Politics of Poetry: A Manifesto,” a collaborative essay on the political and aesthetic practices of Language writing, Ron Silliman, Carla Harryman, Lyn Hejinian, Steve Benson, Bob Perelman, and Barrett Watten critique the expressivist lyric, institutionalized in literary and creative writing programs in the U.S., as responsible for “the scenario of disinterested critical evaluation reinforcing the alleged moral autonomy of the poem” (269).10

     
    In the last few years, however, the infiltration of performance studies into literature departments has sparked a more performance-oriented interest in hybrid works such as Harryman’s. In the first five months of 2008, Harryman’s play Third Man was staged in San Francisco as part of a SFPT retrospective,11Memory Play was produced in Chicago with the support of the Renaissance Society at the University of Chicago, and a weekend of poet’s theater plays directed by Harryman, including her own Mirror Play, Frank O’Hara’s Try! Try! and an adaptation from Barrett Watten’s Bad History, was presented in Chicago as part of a festival of poet’s theater.12 During this same period, The Grand Piano series–subtitled an “experiment in collective autobiography” and documenting the rise of Language writing in San Francisco–has begun to present Harryman’s work in particular and poet’s theater in general as a fundamental part of the history of Language writing.13
     
    Harryman’s theater adds to Language writing a consideration of how the presence of bodies affects our understanding of language politics, particularly in the different ways language and bodies mark a threshold in interrelated processes of speaking, enacting, and knowing. It may be helpful here to recall Pierre Bourdieu’s conceptualization of the body as a kind of “living memory pad” onto and via which not only behaviors but also beliefs and values are inscribed; childhood learning leads to a kind of automatically enacted belief that is not a state of mind but rather “a state of the body” (68). As practical sense becomes naturalized, the source of the practices becomes obscured; “It is because agents never know completely what they are doing,” Bourdieu argues, “that what they do has more sense than they know” (69). But whereas for Bourdieu acting and theater become ways of recalling these automated, naturalized thoughts and feelings,14 Harryman sees theater as a means of defamiliarizing the social ideologies inscribed onto bodies–ideologies that, for Bourdieu, are obscured by time and naturalization and that, for Judith Butler, must frequently be denied in the necessary construction of subjective autonomy (26).
     
    Poet’s theater is a collaborative performance between generative language and physical gesturality that can help us understand the complex linguistic and embodied performativities that constitute and materialize identity. Gesture is a bodily act that, in the realm of the social, becomes a sign of communication. Martin Puchner, who has written thoughtfully on arrested movement in modernist drama, describes gesture as “the praxis and labor that go into the production of language and linguistic communication, the labor that is more or less erased in the finished, linguistic product” (28). Isolated and disjointed, individual gestures can only be amassed into an aggregate rather than organically connected into a whole.15 Puchner notes that both Nietzche and Adorno maligned gesturality as that which prevents actors on stage from presenting organic wholes.16 Postmodernism’s valorization of the aggregate, however, offers a new kind of pro-theatricalism that celebrates precisely the gesturality disavowed by these theorists of modernism. Harryman’s theater embraces the aggregative quality of gesture by using denaturalized acting to create paratactic (rather than syntactic or hypotactic) structures. In rehearsal for a 2008 production of Memory Play,17 for example, the actor playing Fish needed help slowing down her speech, so she was given an activity to perform: writing a note on a piece of paper. This practical solution to an acting problem soon became an interpretive issue, however. What should the actors then do with the note? Director Catharine Sullivan wanted Fish to hand the note to Child, but Harryman (who was present at rehearsals) was adamant that this was not possible, presumably because it transformed the activity of note-writing into the narrative gesture of passing on instructions. In the end, it was agreed that Pelican would intercept the note without (oral or gestural) comment. In preventing the note-writing gesture from cohering into narrative meaning, Harryman and Sullivan created a paratactic structure–one gesture and another gesture and another gesture that do not bear any clear narrative relationship to one another. At the same time, Sullivan and Harryman’s disagreement over what to do next demonstrates the tendency of aggregating gestures to cohere into character identity and narrative meaning.
     
    As an embodied act with the potential for social meaning, gesture both is and isn’t language.18 Gesture reaches simultaneously inward toward the construction of subjectivity and outward toward the construction of social identity, but it also relies on bodily impulse, understood within a system of discourse but not reducible to it. As both being and representation, gesture reveals what Peggy Phelan has called the body’s metonymic relationship to the subject. While the real exceeds representation, representation also exceeds the real. The identity produced in and through this reciprocal excess is not only a marker, Phelan argues, but an ethics:
     

    Identity emerges in the failure of the body to express being fully and the failure of the signifier to convey meaning exactly. Identity is perceptible only through a relation to another–which is to say, it is a form of both resisting and claiming the other, declaring the boundary where the self diverges from and merges with the other. In that declaration of identity and identification, there is always loss, the loss of not-being the other and yet remaining dependent on that other for self-seeing, self-being.

    (13)

     

    In denying narrative coherence to Fish’s note-writing gesture, the production of Memory Play discussed above places the burden of meaning on audience members themselves. What the body does and what it means do not perfectly correspond. Making meaning out of a gesture necessarily involves a merging of interpreter and interpreted, of self and other. Harryman, like Phelan, is interested in the relationship of representation to being, a relationship she investigates via a strategy she characterizes as “non/narrative” when performed in prose, and which we might modify as “non/representation” in theater. As in Memory Play‘s play of “story/conversation,” the slash here indicates not an opposition but an imbrication of two modes.

     

    Mimesis and Misrecognition in Mirror Play

     
    Harryman’s latest performance work, Mirror Play, revolves around violence perpetrated by nations against other nations or against (its own or other) individuals. Divided into four acts, a prologue, and an epilogue (all appearing in reverse order) but without stage directions or speech prefixes, the stage performance differs widely from production to production. What remains consistent, however, is a web of political and social references–for example, media portrayals of Rachel Corrie, the American peace activist killed defending a Palestinian house against U.S.-built bulldozers operated by the Israeli Defense Forces; images from the second Gulf War of U.S. soldiers raiding Iraqi tombs and Iraqis’ own destruction of Iraqi cultural artifacts; and the 1968 campy intergalactic anti-war movie Barbarella, whose star Jane Fonda was transformed in the 1970s from GI pinup girl to despised anti-war activist and then again in the 1980s to aerobic video icon. Mirror Play portrays an America defined not by physical borders but by complex military, economic, cultural, and political relationships, playing through the ways in which these relationships are constructed and maintained. The play is both radically textual and radically gestural, using paratactic gesture and language as well as architectural space not to reflect the interiority of the subject but rather to help constitute and figure it. In this sense, Mirror Play represents a broad shift in thinking from the concept of an individual subject, seen as a self-sufficient and independent whole, to the concept of the social subject, in which the social (exterior) is a necessary and mutable circumstance of subject constitution (interior). Throughout the play, “wholes”–words, characters, clothes, rooms–are revealed as mere resting points in the ongoing process of meaning-making. What is simultaneously difficult and hopeful about this piece is that it dares to imagine a politics (or ethics) for those who are produced in and by narrative. Mirror Play does not simply reveal or reflect this condition of narrativity; it tries to think a way that we might be active within this condition rather than merely subject to it.
     
    The play opens, in one version (see Fig. 1 below),19 with a simple image of homey domesticity–clothes hanging on a line, blowing in the wind–portrayed entirely in language: “Flying. Clothes flying. Sleeves wrapping / around clouds, cinching them in, dragging / them” (178).20
     
    Scene from Mirror Play by Carla Harryman, with Jon Raskin, John Olson, Roham Shaikhani, Elana Elyce, Abbas Bazzi, Mary Byrnes, and Wolanda Lewis. Directed by Jim Cave and performed at the Susanne Hilberry Gallery in Ferndale, Michigan, August 14, 2005. Filmed by Asa Watten. Used by permission.
     

    Click to view video

     

    The empty clothes are both human products and human forms, registering simultaneously the presence and absence of human beings themselves. As the sleeves first “wrap” around clouds, then “cinch,” and finally “drag” them, the clothes imply a kind of “domestic” violence, most clearly perhaps a reference to the Clothesline Project, which protests against, and memorializes the victims of a private kind of “domestic” violence against women. But it is also perhaps a reference to that which inspired the Clothesline Project: the AIDS Quilt, originally created to memorialize the victims of AIDS and to protest against their neglect by American society and history. As theater and performance critic Elinor Fuchs has pointed out, participant-created AIDS quilts, in their jumbling of Jews, Catholics, Muslims, and New Age Buddhists with sequins, flags, prayers, a measuring spoon, and much more, perform a postmodern breakdown of master narratives–in direct contrast to the hero memorials of “modern imperial politics” (195-196).21 Significantly, in the Detroit production directed by Jim Cave,22 no flying shirts are visually present on stage (see Fig. 1 above); rather, they’re represented as artifacts of language, drawing attention to the ways in which narrative has been inscribed on bodies even to the point of replacing them altogether (as one speaker says in Mirror Play, “Images are crowding. Crowding us out” [207]). If the shirts had been physically represented or staged they might simply have performed an iconic function, but because they are described in language–a reference to a reference–the very textuality of the representation creates not a destruction of visual representation but a recognition of the very condition of representation.

     
    Despite the lack of narrative through-line, the play achieves continuity both by taking as its central focus the investigation of the conditions of representation and by returning again and again to key words and images. Cycling back to the image of clothing after several pages, for example, the text meditates on the perspective created by choosing some descriptors over others:
     

    …This scheme
    Imagines clothing in terms of whole or
    complete entities: a shirt, a hat, a shoe, etc.
    So there is still much that it cannot describe.
    For instance, in the great outdoors, the
    clothes rot and decompose. Birds pull at
    their threads. The threads mingle with other
    things. The thread is no longer a discrete
    thing but part of a unit for which there is no
    name until the nest is complete. Then the
    unit is a nest. I wear a sleeve on my heart.
    Note this also. And other harmless events.
    (note)
    (note)

    echo makes a note (192)

     

    To imagine clothing as a finished object–rather than as a composite of that which went into its making or as decomposed parts to be used in the making of other objects–is, the text asserts, a “scheme” rather than an inevitability. If the object that is no-longer-a-shirt-and-not-yet-a-nest has no name, it becomes subjugated, merely a stage in the creation of an “actual” object and meaningless except in relation to the end product (recalling Puchner’s definition of gesture above).

     
    From this cluster of images and lines, organized thematically around the impact of language use on conceptual thinking (which is hardly “harmless”), the text suddenly shifts paratactically to a reordered cliché–“I wear a sleeve on my heart”–with no apparent relation to the previous lines. One way a reader might approach this shift is simply to give in to the experience of abrupt change, with no attempt to impose meaning. Habituated reading practices are more likely, however, to coerce a meaningful connection. Is this sentence perhaps another example of language that privileges object over process? What is the relationship of the “I” to the objects (clothing, nest) that came before? And what do we make of the shift in tone from material objects such as shirts, hats, threads, and nests, to symbolic objects, such as a heart and, now, sleeve (which can be worn on a heart only metaphorically)? A nest made out of threads is a home (a physical place) and home is where the heart is (a symbolic place). Emotional vulnerability (wearing one’s heart on one’s sleeve) is replaced with emotional self-preservation (wearing a sleeve on one’s heart). What was formerly outside (clothing) moves inward (to “I”). Here the text mimes its meaning through the generation of interpretive possibilities: any single understanding represents a “scheme,” useful perhaps but certainly not inevitable.
     
    But the text quoted above also moves beyond semantic frontiers toward the semiotic border between language and music inhabited by the word “note.” This single word suggests simultaneously a musical sound, different speech modes (command–“note this”–or description), and textual objects (a hierarchical category designator [i.e., footnote] or a casual piece of writing). The use of parentheses on the page–an instantiation which cannot be precisely performed on stage–is a textual convention indicating that the word “note” might be read as a placeholder (as in “I intend to insert a note here”) or as a stage direction (as in “Play a musical note here”). In either case, the note functions as an (explanatory or musical) “echo.” The play’s textual performance on the page, then, is not identical with its performance on stage. The relationship of the text to stage is neither directive nor documentary, neither script nor recording. Reading the text and attending the performance produce experientially distinct plays that nevertheless constitute linked “work” exploring the relationship of textual language to embodied performance. The semantic overdetermination of “note” in the text, for example, is linked but not identical to the overdetermination of the voice, as speech and as instrument, in performance: Both the Detroit and San Francisco productions featured a jaw harp, which produces sound uncannily in between language and music.23 Working with sound and music at the limits of language, these performances in part explored the ways in which sounds morph into and out of meaning.
     
    What is at stake here is an awareness of the multiple processes by which we make experience meaningful. When a speaker asserts at the beginning of Harryman’s play that “the composition of the sky is a matter of knowledge” (178), for example, she suggests both that the sky’s physical make-up (one sense of “composition”) can be scientifically known, but also that this knowledge is itself a matter of narrative construction (a second sense of “composition”). The goal is not to question the makeup of the sky, but rather to suggest that what is known must also take into account how it is known. A few lines later the play suggests that “addicts” to knowledge “suffer atmosphere,” a line which is vocally elongated in performance–“atmosssphhhere”–to suggest both the vaporous air that surrounds a planet and, simultaneously, a fear of the atmos, or vaporosity, perhaps the vaporosity or lack of solidity of knowledge itself. Here, vocalized performance vaporizes our certainty about the meaning of the line, and in doing so, it both mimes and produces its meaning. Mirror Play employs not a poetics of memory as witness but rather a poetics of memory as performative, as productive of the relationships it purports to describe and attend, a strategy that echoes Elin Diamond’s notion of mimesis as the production of truth through a manipulation of the mirroring process.

     
    In the psychological space of Mirror Play‘s collectivity, all aspects of discourse are both positive and negative. The play alludes to the imbricated discourses of health, war, beauty, and pornography, for example, in its repeated references to Barbarella, the title role from the soft-porn sci-fi film that made the actress Jane Fonda famous. In the film, Barbarella is a representative of the Federation of Earth who is sent on a peace-seeking mission to rid the world of a weapon that could mean the end of humanity. Making love not war across the galaxy, Barbarella made Fonda a favorite pinup among GIs. Mirror Play‘s reference to “fa(r)ce and pornography” (198) certainly alludes to Barbarella, but it might just as aptly describe Fonda’s 1980s reincarnation as the aerobic ideal of her wildly popular workout video series. Dressed in form-hugging fitness fashion, Fonda bent over and spread her legs in a model of arrested movement. But in the period between Barbarella and the height of her workout popularity, Fonda also became an anti-war activist, speaking out against the Vietnam War starting in 1970. Though she remained a sexual icon, Fonda’s perceived betrayal of American troops transformed her into a target of overt, if symbolic, sexual violence.24 “At places where soldiers or former soldiers congregate,” Rick Perlstein reports, “there’ll be stickers of her likeness on the urinals; one is an invitation to symbolic rape: Fonda in her 1980s ‘work-out’ costume, her legs splayed, pudenda at the bulls-eye. Every night at lights-out midshipmen at the US Naval Academy cry out ‘Goodnight, bitch!’ in her honour” (3).
     
    Disturbing as this report is, the discourse behind the violence is what interests me here. Ironically, this “symbolic rape” is in part encouraged by the false mirror–the farce/face–of aerobicism misrecognized as athleticism. Johannes Birringer has argued that the image of the aerobic body is structured around a:
     

     

    scene of instruction/mimicry that promotes an exercise of subjective and corporeal self-transformation while masking the ritualized submission of the body to serial, monotonous, and stationary motion. In her willful self-production of an actively new feminine body, the woman participant misrecognizes the mirror structure in this performative exchange, aligned as it is around persistent cultural/hierarchical oppositions between mobility/immobility, seeing/being seen, and so forth. She is drawn into a phantom interaction with the two-dimensional, depthless and absent body of the video image that simulates an actual relation between body model and “real” performance in “real” time.
     

    (215)

     

    The aerobic body, always a feminized body, is immobilized and put on display. In contrast, the military body might be thought of as an athleticized body, masculinized, mobile, and–recalling Harryman’s discussion of the athleticism of muscles acting without the assistance of the skeleton–competitive and aggressive. The discursive oppositions promulgated by the aerobic-atheletic dichotomy contribute to, among other things, both kinds of “domestic” violence suggested in the play’s opening verbal image of flying clothes (violence against women and against discursively feminized homosexual men). Although Mirror Play alludes to physical acts of violence (as in one production at the Hilberry Gallery in suburban Detroit when a hooded male figure claiming “Nobody wanted war” conjured, at least for me, images of torture associated both with American Vietnam POWs and with Iraqi prisoners at the American military prison Abu Ghraib), these are not the focus of Mirror Play. Rather, as I have done in this example of the soldiers’ violence against Fonda, Harryman attends to the discourses that both materialize the body and enable violence–discourses that rely on a range of mis/recognitions. Employing not a poetics of memory as witness but a poetics of memory as performative, as productive of the relationships it purports to describe and attend, Mirror Play plays through and with the notion of national(ist) memory.

     

    Exploring the psychological space of collectivity, Mirror Play offers a counter to mass culture reliance on what Retallack deems “naïve realism” and its attendant call “for intellectual and imaginative resignation, a naturalization of normapathic desire” (5). Such realism is “normapathic” because it works by irresponsibly burying difference, contradiction, irrationality–an irresponsibility that, Retallack notes, “is never benign” (19). Harryman’s work, in contrast, remains open to radical difference. It engages with processes of social learning by rethinking the production and dissemination of knowledge. The realism of Harryman’s work lies not in a normative reenactment of past events but rather in its existence as a thought experiment through which the past and its connection to the present moment are reconfigured. It is characterized by the ability to hold contradictions in interplay and by a willingness to see the overlay of conflicting realities. In Mirror Play Harryman turns this exploration toward social-spatial constructions with material consequences in the perpetuation of national violence. Architecture, like language, always has both a form and a social use.25 Postmodern theorist Linda Hutcheon recalls that Ludwig Mies van der Rohe, the architect of the classically modernist Seagram Building in Manhattan, “allowed only white blinds on the plate glass windows and demanded that these be left in only one of three positions, open, shut, or half-way” (28)–the building’s design quite literally controlling the personal lives that inhabited its space; viewing tenants either as children to be guided or as subjects on whom to experiment, modernist architects positioned themselves apart from the buildings’ interior communities. Postmodernist architecture returns to the idea of community, but now as a decentralized entity with practical needs. And memory is, Hutcheon argues, “central to this linking of the past with the lived” (29).
     
    Mirror Play‘s mise-en-scène is conceptual: as a foyer that has been cut-away from the house, it represents the threshold between public and private, into and out of which “any body” may pass. The “antechamber” is both room and passageway that comes “before” the house, in between the inside and outside. It is a room defined only in relation to other rooms, not as a place in itself (and in vocalized performance the word slides between antechamber and anti-chamber). But in Mirror Play the antechamber has been torn away from the house, destroying the relation that constitutes its identity; here the antechamber is not a room but a moment in the midst of transition from one object (foyer) to another, as yet unknown, resting point. Harryman’s approach to architecture is influenced in part by Denis Hollier’s notion of “anti-architecture” as a means of getting out from under the authoritarian hierarchies with which architecture is complicit, a condition which led Georges Bataille to deem architecture “society’s authorized superego” (ix). Hollier conceptualizes “an architecture that would not inspire, as in Bataille, social good behavior, or would not produce, as in Foucault’s disciplinary factory, madness or criminality in individuals” (x). Anti-architecture is therefore an alternative that leads
     

    against the grain to some space before the constitution of the subject, before the institutionalization of subjectivity . . . [or that] would open up a space anterior to the division between madness and reason; rather than performing the subject, it would perform spacing: a space from before the subject, from before meaning; the asubjective, asemantic space of unedifying architecture, an architecture that would not allow space for the time needed to become a subject.
     

    (xi)

     

    Such anti-architecture works as loss or dismantling of the meaning that is assumed to inhere in architectural structures–such as houses, prisons, and tombs, all of which are implicitly or explicitly referenced in Mirror Play.26

     
    Mirror Play‘s foyer investigates, in part, the penetration of exterior social space into a subject’s interiority. But as a space that has been torn away from the house, presumably in an act of violence, the foyer is also what Hollier labels above an “asubjective” space–a space which defies interpretive coherence. In this way, Mirror Play enters into the discourse of space and place as they figure interiority/exteriority (from the position of the subject) and insider/outsider (as the position of the subject), which is in part a difference between being from/in a place and belonging to a place. In contrast to what Una Chaudhuri has described as modernist drama’s recourse to “a vague, culturally determined symbology of home, replete with all those powerful and empowering associations of space that are organized by the notion of belonging” (xii), Mirror Play is organized around a violated home that is also an opening–a condition that acknowledges both the very human desire to belong and the simultaneous violence and promise of belonging. Whereas modernism’s drama of the home is built around what Chaudhuri has labeled “a victimage of location and a heroism of departure,” which “structure the plot as well as the plays’ accounts of subjectivity and identity” (xii emphasis original), Mirror Play articulates the question its unattached foyer invites: “Can the antechamber lose its meaning, its substance, or is it always the same, even if every aspect of it contradicts its defining characteristics?” (191).
     

    Dispersive Performance and the Theater of Others

     
    According to Jerzy Grotowski, whose efforts to rethink actors’ training have influenced Harryman’s own approach to performance, the defining feature of theater is the performer-audience relationship (15). But in the postmodern era, the audience is notoriously difficult to characterize. In The Audience, theater theorist Herbert Blau discusses the peculiar notion of the postmodern audience, both collective and disparate, joined to one another through a shared experience interpreted in highly individualized ways. Like Harryman, Blau locates the efficacy of postmodernist theater in its challenge to the primacy of ocularcentric knowledge. To position understanding as seeing is, he argues, an ideology that ignores the audience’s original auditory role. Postmodern theater audiences are a product of “the vast seduction of the dispersive media” (14) and marked by division, or what Blau describes as “an ‘original splitting’” that is “not the image of an original unity but the mysterious rupture of social identity in the moment of its emergence” (10). The postmodern audience is therefore not a certainty–not a community to be joined or a position to be occupied–but rather an effect of performance itself:
     

    The audience . . . is not so much a mere congregation of people as a body of thought and desire. It does not exist before the play but is initiated or precipitated by it; it is not an entity to begin with but a consciousness constructed. The audience is what happens when, performing the signs and passwords of a play, something postulates itself and unfolds in response.
     

    (25, italics in original)

     

    Blau historicizes the concept of a “public” as a modernist notion that conceptualizes the audience as uniform, understandable, and authorizing–that is, as something that can be figured out and won over. In contrast, postmodernist audiences are indeterminate, with each member experiencing an individual response, an individual identification. Blau dubs this the “theater of otherness,” as an alternative to the more traditional notion of a theater of essence (94). This “otherness” does not constitute a counterpublic–it is not the disidentificatory community that, for example, José Muñoz discusses in his important study of contemporary minoritarian performance. Rather, it is an interpretive “community” paradoxically marked by discontinuity and dispersion, and formed in spite of (or perhaps because of, or prior to) the foreclosure of normative identification. But while Blau argues that such theater is marked by an oscillation between eye and ear that creates distance rather than identification, I want to propose that in Harryman’s theater this oscillation forms the basis for an ethics of responsibility toward the identifications we form. In this sense, we might think of Harryman’s theater not as a theater of otherness but as a theater of others, others to whom we are, for better or worse, ethically bound–a theater in which, to borrow Harryman’s language, “[m]e talking fuses to you” (“Property” 16).

     
    If the space of performance is, as Harryman argues in “The Ear of the Poet,” a provisional space in which ideas, narratives, and social constructions may be tested, then what’s being tested in Mirror Play is perhaps not only our methods for making sense of a post-9/11 world but also the very idea that making “sense”–a particular cognitive ordering of experience–is the correct goal. If “making sense” is a narrative proposition, then poetry might provide a different paradigm more suitable to the present world’s complex interconnectivities. Poetry might offer, as Retallack asserts, a cognitive alternative to imagining borders and the crossing of lines, allowing us instead to think in terms of fractal geometries and the “swerve,” an unpredictable (form of) change that can defamiliarize, disorient, and even estrange by “radically altering geometries of attention,” resulting in “an unsettling transfiguration of once-familiar terrain” (1). As interruption, digression, and the unexpected, the swerve is produced in and by hybridity, the vitality of which lies in its inventiveness, in its generativity. The swerve is not an abdication of responsibility but rather the recognition that all events are overdetermined, unpredictable, subject to chance. Swerves “dislodge us,” Retallack argues, “from reactionary allegiances and nostalgias” (3). Openness to the unexpected, to generativity, thus becomes a kind of ethics: generosity toward generativity.
     
    Placing such generativity at the heart of an ethics of non-normative obligation takes seriously Geoffrey Galt Harpham’s assertion that ethics “does not solve problems, it structures them” (37). The modernist hero narrative, related to the sense of a universal ethical imperative on which ethical discourse has traditionally been founded, has been denounced in the postmodern era as an “ideological vehicle and the legitimation of concrete structures of power and domination” (Jameson 101). The paradox of a postmodernist ethics of non-normative obligation, then, is that while it does not posit a hierarchy of interpretive values, it does rely on the categorical imperative of obligation itself. This imperative may, Harpham suggests, be at the center of Derrida’s notion of deconstruction itself, seeping into it in the form of the subject who is allowed to
     

    ‘return’ on the condition that it be transformed and modernized–no longer the self-identical, self-regulating subject of humanism, but rather a subject inmixed with otherness. This otherness, Derrida said, would consist not only of the obligation that all people owe to other people, but also of the iron laws, the internal otherness, which we, as speaking animals, harbor within our living consciousnesses.

     

    The paradox of dispersive theater’s non-normative obligation embodies the contradiction Harpham locates in ethics itself: the contradiction between “How ought one live?” and “What ought I to do?,” the contradiction between the distanced laws of generalizable norms and an individual in an actual (and unique) situation (26). For Harpham the key to ethics is not only the obligation but the choice between different ethics (for example, between mercy and retribution). Dispersive theater makes us attentive to these choices, makes us aware that there are choices. This is not to say that all choices are equal, but rather that each choice “violates some law or other, and violates it precisely because it is ‘ethical’” (29). Dispersive theater is ethical, then, not because it offers a moral order but because it reveals the conditions of choice. Mirror Play presents a very postmodern problematic: while the body is materialized through the very act of narrative (including discourse, gesture, and image), narrative is always an imperfect mirror–a necessary framing that inevitably obfuscates, a “view [that] blocks what’s behind it” (Harryman “Animal” 33). This presents a particular obstacle to audience members, who are presented with a range of possibilities for mis/recognition, but it also presents a threat to bodies, for violence–in the form of war, rape, social neglect, and government policy–is justified through such mis/recognitions.

     
    And yet, it is the very vulnerability of bodies that leads to claims of “bodily integrity and self-determination” that are, as Judith Butler has pointed out, “essential to so many political movements” (25). “The body,” Butler continues,
     

    implies mortality, vulnerability, agency: the skin and the flesh expose us to the gaze of others, but also to touch, and to violence, and bodies put us at risk of becoming the agency and instrument of all these as well. Although we struggle for rights over our own bodies, the very bodies for which we struggle are not quite ever only our own. The body has its invariably public dimension. Constituted as a social phenomenon in the public sphere, my body is and is not mine. Given over from the start to the world of others, it bears their imprint, is formed within the crucible of social life; only later, and with some uncertainty, do I lay claim to my body as my own, if, in fact, I ever do. Indeed, if I deny that prior to the formation of my ‘will,’ my body related me to others whom I did not choose to have in proximity to myself, if I build a notion of ‘autonomy’ on the basis of the denial of this sphere of a primary and unwilled physical proximity with others, then am I denying the social conditions of my embodiment in the name of autonomy?
     

    (26)

     

    Here, Butler helps us understand the vulnerability of the body in the public realm, a vulnerability of both its physicality and its identity. This mentally and physically projected “external” body inevitably figures one’s internal subjectivity as well. And yet in figuring this subjectivity as autonomous, Butler argues, we do violence to those others on whose denial that autonomy is based. As Harryman asserts, “I” is not the measure; it is the “interference” (“Acker” 36). But it is necessary interference.

     
    Dispersive theater may, in fact, represent a new chapter in the history of anti-theatricality. Anti-theatricality in the twentieth century has frequently indicated, at least in part, a desire to distance ourselves from the influence of the mass audience, who may pressure us respond differently than we might otherwise do. Mimetic acts are, moreover, repugnant because they allow us to enjoy the suffering of others. But dispersive theater employs what might be called a flexible theatricality, whereby the value of the theater collectivity fluctuates between coercion and responsibility, between the awareness that narrative is, at best, imperfect and that meaning must nevertheless be made. Dispersive theater thus embraces the stage, but in a different way, avoiding spectacle and emphasizing the poetic, not as a direct route to the emotions but as a social tool.

     
    To return to Harryman’s account of the Iraqi pin performance, the woman who interpreted the wearing of the pin as an admission of a secret understood, at least subconsciously, that she was both actor and acted upon. Taking Harryman’s pin as the revelation of a guilty secret was perhaps a conditioned response: the only way she could make sense of the performance within a political context characterized by a nationalist narrative drive toward “mission accomplished.” And yet in responding with a secret of her own, she demonstrated a deeply felt, if unexpected, empathy that operated according to a set of interpretive conditions not determined by borders or even by autonomy. She too felt the vulnerability of her body in public; she too suffered a social policing that ultimately figured her subjectivity.
     
    In avoiding narratives of witness, of moral imperative, of political identity, the Iraqi pin performance was certainly not a call to action. But for the woman who revealed her own secret, and certainly for Harryman as well, it was a moment of unexpected connection. It is probably too much to imagine this moment as a swerve away from terror, as a swerve toward hope, but it may perhaps remind us that there is far more to every event than any story can express. Generosity toward the generativity of imperfect mirrorings and unexpected identifications becomes a way of opening ourselves up to other possibilities of connection beyond explanation, justification, and non-contradiction. Poet’s theater may not result in the dissolution of atmosphere or of atmos-fear, but as it swerves between them, it has the potential to encourage critical discussion and collective interpretation in which no one is “right” but in which difference proliferates.
     
     

     

    Heidi R. Bean is Assistant Professor of English at Bridgewater State University. She is the co-editor of Poetry after Cultural Studies, an anthology of critical essays forthcoming from the University of Iowa Press. Her essays, reviews, and interviews related to the intersections of theater, performance, and poetry have appeared in Text and Performance Quarterly, Theatre Journal, The Iowa Review Web, and Cultural Critique. This essay is taken from her current project on the cultural politics of American poetic theater since the 1960s.

     

     

    Footnotes

     
    1. Harryman finds in RoseLee Goldberg’s Performance Art, for example, the implication that once performance has served its function as a testing ground that can release the art object from categorical or conventional constraints, the art object is reinstated and performance is retired.

     

     
    2. For a discussion of the dramaturgical method for analyzing impression management, see Goffman’s Presentation 238. Notably, Goffman focuses entirely on the performer without any attention to the audience’s active role in the meaning-making process.

     

     
    3. Reptile seems to be recognizing here what Erving Goffman has termed “disclosive compensation”—the theatrical convention of giving the audience what it needs, and only what it needs, in order to construct and maintain the dramatic fiction. See his Frame Analysis 142.

     

     
    4. For a discussion of the “turn to the visual,” see Jay.

     

     
    5. See Vickery chapter 7 for an excellent discussion of, especially, the gendered-ness of theory in Language writing.

     

     
    6. Bob Perelman’s The Marginalization of Poetry was the first book-length historical account of Language writing and remains a key text for understanding this history, but the SFPT receives no critical attention there (despite the fact that Perelman himself wrote for the SFPT). Megan Simpson’s Poetic Epistemologies and Ann Vickery’s Leaving Lines of Gender offer alternative, feminist-inflected histories of Language writing, but both attend to “performance” only in a sense of the performance of social identities. Vickery acknowledges the divisions between visual artists and writers that characterized the Bay Area in the 1970s (33), but despite her interest in documenting the broader range of activities carried out by women in the Language community than has been commonly acknowledged, she too leaves out critical discussion of Harryman’s (or anyone else’s) theater work, choosing instead to focus on Harryman’s and Hejinian’s important collaborative novel The Wide Road (see Vickery final chapter). Recently, The Grand Piano series has started to address some of this history (see in particular vol. 6).

     

     
    7. See the Grand Piano website page on the SFPT for a partial list of plays as well as for links to some program, poster, and production images: <http://www.thegrandpiano.org/poetstheater.html>.

     

     
    8. For play texts, see Hills 9 (1983). For criticism and commentary on the SFPT and related theater, see Kennedy and Tuma, Mantis 3 (2002), and Poetics Journal 5 (May 1985): 122-138.

     

     
    9. Poets and Language writers were not the only ones to downplay key aspects of poet’s theater. The disciplinary divide rendering the SFPT invisible was, if anything, worse on the side of visual artists. As Ann Vickery writes, “the arts were strongly differentiated in the Bay Area during the seventies. Although performance-based poets like Carla Harryman encouraged visual artists to attend readings and talks, poetry was still presumed to be too tied to the page and thus limiting. Harryman recalls a young and prominent artist dismissing Language writings as ‘just a version of surrealism’” (32-33). Harryman’s work was thus trapped in both a practical and a critical disciplinary blind spot.

     

     
    10. It is remarkable how much this critique of poetry scholarship and the expressivist lyric sounds like the critique by contemporary Performance Studies scholars of traditional object-oriented scholarship, in which the objective, disinterested scholar remains separate from the object of study that he (and in this critique, the scholar is usually a he) describes and interprets in terms that place the object easily within the dominant worldview.

     

     
    11. Performed as part of the annual Poets Theater festival, which is produced by Small Press Traffic each January and/or February.

     

     
    12. The showcase, entitled “Returning from One Place to Another,” was produced by Links Hall and curated by John Beer.

     

     
    13. See especially volume 6 of that series.

     

     
    14. Bourdieu argues that “depositories of deferred thoughts…can be triggered off at a distance in space and time by the simple effect of re-placing the body in an overall posture which recalls the associated thoughts and feelings, in one of the inductive states of the body which, as actors know, give rise to states of mind” (69).

     

     
    15. This is because the syntax of gesture and speech are different. Speech builds up its meaning out of independently meaningful parts. Gesture on the other hand becomes meaningful only in the aggregate. Speech is spread out, and each part can be analyzed separately, but a gesture is “synthetic,” compressing its semantic components (actor, action, path) into one symbol: “Thus, when gesture and speech combine, they bring into one meaning system two distinct semiotic architectures. Each modality, because of its unique semiotic properties, can go beyond the meaning possibilities of the other” (McNeill and Duncan 144).

     

     
    16. For more on modernist anti-theatricality and its relationship to gesture, see Puchner chapter 1.

     

     
    17. Dir. Catharine Sullivan. Produced by the Renaissance Society and performed at Experimental Station, Chicago, March 7, 2008.

     

     
    18. Cognitive psychology, incidentally, supports this view. Cognitive psychologists David McNeill and Susan D. Duncan have developed the concept of the “growth point” (GP), originated by McNeill, as an analytical framework for the combination of “imagery and linguistic categorical content” that insists on an understanding of both gesture and speech as “material carriers of thinking” (144, 155). In this view, speech and gesture are not “the packaged communicative outputs of a separate internal production process but rather…the joint embodiments of that process itself” (155). Speech-gesture combinations do not simply reflect already formed similarities, then, but contribute to the establishment a correspondence between the two and are therefore productive of thought. Furthermore, McNeill and Duncan argue, GPs “are a way of cognitively existing, of cognitively being, at the moment of speaking. By performing the gesture, the core idea is brought into concrete existence and becomes part of the speaker’s own existence at that moment” (156). In this view, gesture is not an expression of being but rather constitutive of being, and in this sense, we can consider gesture performative. It is also significant that although a GP is highly synchronous, “strongly resist[ing] forces trying to divide it” (145), this synchrony “is disrupted…if speech and gesture are drained of meaning through repetition; i.e., such that GPS may be circumvented in their production” (145). See McNeill and Duncan.

     

     
    19. The play, which has been performed in San Francisco, Chicago, Detroit, and Tubingen, Germany, has never been published. Each production uses a different version of the script (in some cases bilingual). Some performances have used a full cast (Detroit, Chicago), while others have consisted only of Harryman herself reading the text to live musical accompaniment by John Raskin (San Francisco). All of these versions, however, are formed out of the full-length English text entitled “Mirror Play” included in Harryman’s “Poets Theater Plays” manuscript.

     

     
    20. Mirror Play page references are from Harryman’s unpublished typescript entitled “Poets Theater Plays.”

     

     
    21. Notably, the AIDS quilt grew out of a simple, non-narrative performance as San Francisco marchers carried placards with the names of men lost to AIDS. It was only with the durable AIDS Memorial Quilt that individual micro-narratives began to be incorporated in the form of images, quotations, and other forms of characterization.

     

     
    22. Performed at the Susanne Hilberry Gallery in the Detroit suburb of Ferndale, Michigan, on August 14, 2005.

     

     
    23. In both productions, the jaw harp was played by John Raskin, who also composed all of the music. Harryman comments: “Initially, I had conceived of Mirror Play as a poly-vocal piece for one performer: I liked the idea of one performer working with multiple voices within the conceptual antechamber space. However, that one immediately turned into two as I felt that an instrumental voice needed to be an aspect of the speaking voice. I started working with Jon Raskin, developing the piece for spoken voice (mine) and jaw harps. Now the poly-vocality is being extended to many voices and more instruments” (Hinton).

     

     
    24. Perlstein discusses some of the myths surrounding Fonda’s position on the war.

     

     
    25. See Hutcheon 27-36 for a brief but helpful discussion of postmodernism’s foundations in architecture.

     

     
    26. Hollier notes that there have been “endless arguments over whether the origin of architecture was the house, the temple, or the tomb, etc. For Bataille it was the prison” (ix).
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Benson, Steve. “Hooks and Conceit in La Quotidienne.” Jimmy & Lucy’s House of “K” No. 2 (Aug. 1984): 21-24. Print.
    • Bernheimer, Alan. “The Simulacrum of Narrative.” Poetics Journal 5 (May 1985): 69-71. Print.
    • Bernstein, Charles., ed. Close Listening: Poetry and the Performed Word. New York: Oxford UP, 1998. Print.
    • Birringer, Johannes. Theatre, Theory, Postmodernism. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1991. Print.
    • Blau, Herbert. The Audience. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1990. Print.
    • Bourdieu, Pierre. The Logic of Practice. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1990. Print.
    • Butler, Judith. Precarious Life: The Powers of Mourning and Violence. London: Verso, 2004. Print.
    • Chaudhuri, Una. Staging Place: The Geography of Modern Drama. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1995. Print.
    • Davidson, Michael. “Framed by the Story.” Poetics Journal 5 (May 1985): 76-80. Print.
    • Day, Jean. “Two Books by Carla Harryman.” Jimmy & Lucy’s House of “K” No. 6 (May 1986): 118-122. Print.
    • Diamond, Elin. Unmaking Mimesis: Essays on Feminism and Theater. London: Routledge, 1997. Print.
    • Fuchs, Elinor. The Death of Character: Perspectives on Theater after Modernism. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1996. Print.
    • Goffman, Erving. Frame Analysis: An Essay on the Organization of Experience. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1974. Print.
    • ———. The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life. New York: Anchor, 1959. Print.
    • Goldberg, RoseLee. Performance Art: From Futurism to the Present. New York: H. N. Abrams, 1988. Print.
    • Grotowski, Jerzy. Towards a Poor Theatre. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1968. Print.
    • Harpham, Geoffrey Galt. Shadows of Ethics: Criticism and the Just Society. Durham: Duke UP, 1999. Print.
    • Harryman, Carla. “Acker Un-Formed.” Lust for Life: On the Writings of Kathy Acker. Amy Scholder, Carla Harryman, and Avital Ronell, eds. London: Verso, 2006. 35-44. Print.
    • ———. “Animal Instincts.” Animal Instincts: Prose, Plays, Essays. Berkeley: This, 1989. 33-43. Print.
    • ———. Animal Instincts: Prose, Plays, Essays. Berkeley: This, 1989. Print.
    • ———. “The Ear of the Poet in the Mouth of the Performer.” How2 2.1 (2003). 5 Mar. 2007. Web.
    • ———. “La Quotidienne: An Atmospheric Play.” Animal Instincts. 81-89. Print.
    • ———. Memory Play. Oakland: O Books, 1994. Print.
    • ———. Mirror Play. “Poets Theatre Plays.” 2005. TS. 178-215.
    • ———. “Property.” Animal Instincts. 15-26. Print.
    • ———. “Site Sampling in ‘Performing Objects Stationed in the Sub World.’” Additional Apparitions. David Kennedy and Keith Tuma, eds. Sheffield: The Cherry on the Top Press, 2002: 157-171. Print.
    • ———. “There Is Nothing Better Than a Theory.” Animal Instincts. 90-105. Print.
    • ———. “Toy Boats.” Animal Instincts. 107-110. Print.
    • Hinton, Laura. “To Write Within Situations of Contradiction: An Introduction to the Cross-Genre Writings of Carla Harryman.” Postmodern Culture. 16.1 (2005). Web. 24 Oct.2010.
    • Hollier, Denis. Against Architecture: The Writings of Georges Bataille. Trans. Betsy Wing. Cambridge: MIT Press, 1989. Print.
    • Hutcheon, Linda. A Poetics of Postmodernism: History, Theory, Fiction. New York: Routledge, 1988. Print.
    • Jameson, Fredric. The Political Unconscious: Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1981. Print.
    • Jay, Martin. “Cultural Relativism and the Visual Turn.” Journal of Visual Culture 1.3 (2002): 267-278. Print.
    • McNeill, David. Hand and Mind: What Gestures Reveal about Thought. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1992. Print.
    • ———, and Susan D. Duncan. “Growth-Points in Thinking-for-Speaking.” Language and Gesture. Ed. David McNeill. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2000. 141-161. Print.
    • Mellow, James R. Charmed Circle: Gertrude Stein & Company. New York: Praeger, 1974. Print.
    • Morris, Adalaide, ed. Sound States: Innovative Poetics and Acoustical Technologies. Chapel Hill: U of North Carolina P, 1997. Print.
    • Muñoz, José. Disidentifications: Queers of Color and the Performance of Politics. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999. Print.
    • Perelman, Bob. The Marginalization of Poetry: Language Writing and Literary History. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1996. Print.
    • Perlstein, Rick. “Operation Barbarella.” London Review of Books 27.22 (2005): 3-6. 12 Sept.2007. Web.
    • Phelan, Peggy. Unmarked: The Politics of Performance. London: Routledge, 1996. Print.
    • Puchner, Martin. Stage Fright: Modernism, Anti-Theatricality, and Drama. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 2002. Print.
    • Retallack, Joan. The Poethical Wager. Berkeley: U of California P, 2003. Print.
    • Silliman, Ron, et al. The Grand Piano: An Experiment in Collective Autobiography, San Francisco, 1975-1980. Part 1-6. Detroit: Mode A, 2006. Print.
    • Simpson, Megan. Poetic Epistemologies: Gender and Knowing in Women’s Language-Oriented Writing. Albany: State U of New York P, 2000. Print.
    • Stroffolino, Chris. “Carla Harryman.” Dictionary of Literary Biography, Volume 193: American Poets Since World War II, Sixth Series. Ed. Joseph Conte. Buffalo: SUNY P, 1998. 171-179. Print.
    • Vickery, Ann. Leaving Lines of Gender: A Feminist Genealogy of Language Writing. Hanover: Wesleyan UP, 2000. Print.
    • Worthen, W.B. Print and the Poetics of Modern Drama. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2006. Print.

     

  • This Theater is a Strange Hole: Mac Wellman’s Poetics of Apparence

    Karinne Keithley Syers (bio)
    CUNY Graduate Center
    karinnekeithley@gmail.com

     

    Abstract
     
    Mac Wellman’s theater is filled by a weird array of voices that are neither strictly human, nor even strictly material. These pseudosolid voices map a topological obsession with holes, hollows, and the filling up of space by emptiness. This essay explores Wellman’s theater as a “strange hole,” where hollow spaces become receivers, openings for something unfamiliar to happen in our thinking, an event Wellman calls “apparence.” In The Difficulty of Crossing a Field, the extraordinary prevalence of holes bespeaks an intensification of a philosophical strand in his writing: a ceremonial concern with a weirdness that is wild, a weirdness gone feral in math-fictional space. This essay explores his strategies for writing us into these registers of thinking by examining two kinds of holes. The first is a “hole poetics”: the deployment of holey strategies in the poetic line. This holed line functions as both a preparation for thinking beyond the already-known, and as a scalar, fractal iteration of the topography of this beyond-space which is the second hole, a ceremonial, nasty, terrifying place that Wellman calls “Hoole’s Hole,” where the non-Aristotelian, non-Euclidian event of apparence happens.
     

     

    In Infrared, the opening play of Mac Wellman’s recent collection, The Difficulty of Crossing a Field, the unseen narrator, “an ungainly self in search of itself,” reveals itself as some kind of “pseudosolid . . . a hollow within a cube within another hollow” (8). This humanistic self-seeking acts as a translating bridge to Wellman’s much broader, much weirder array of identities that might seek the recursive feedback loop we call self-awareness. If it is convenient to hold onto an old word, self, it is equally important to attend to the fact that the identity of selves, characters, or voices in Wellman’s work has never been strictly human and in fact is not strictly material. His recent work is filled with pseudosolid voices that map their “haunted, topological obsession” with holes and hollows, and the filling up of space by emptiness (Infrared 8). One critical strategy to account for Wellman’s departure from what he calls “Euclidean” character (a designation concerned principally with consistency) has been to highlight his alignment with “language” writing, particularly in relation to the Language poets, the Russian Futurists, and Gertrude Stein’s “landscape plays,” and so to projects that insist on the materiality of language over (or alongside) its signification. These connections are not amiss–indeed they are critical–but they do not fully account for Wellman’s project; they sidestep the heart (to use an old word) of his work (or in his own imagery, they miss the clearing in the woods where the spooky thing happens). To isolate the materiality of language is to neglect Wellman’s concern with multiple registers of thinking, and with theater’s function as a place where something happens in our thinking, something he calls “apparence.” The material surfaces of Wellman’s plays are only pseudosolid; the giving-way of those surfaces constitutes the action of his work, and we find ourselves in a strange hole. In the extraordinary prevalence of holes (both phenomenological and figurative) in Wellman’s new collection, I find an intensification of a philosophical strand in his writing: a ceremonial concern with a weirdness that is wild, a weirdness gone feral in math-fictional space. In this essay I explore his strategies for writing us into these registers of thinking by examining two kinds of holes. The first is what I am calling a “hole poetics”: the deployment of holey strategies in the poetic line. This holed line functions as both a preparation for thinking beyond the already-known, and as a scalar, fractal iteration of the topography of this beyond-space which is my second hole, a ceremonial, nasty, terrifying place that Wellman calls “Hoole’s Hole,” where the non-Aristotelian, non-Euclidian event of apparence happens.
     

    Locating Wellman

     
    Wellman is a node of connection within the New York theater community. A loose assembly of younger writers has formed around him, through his MFA program at Brooklyn College, the ‘Pataphysics workshop series, and his generous presence in the scene.1 His influence is already profound and continues to grow, not as a “school of Mac Wellman,” but as a broadly cast license to think of plays in terms of language, and to value wrongness, ceremony, and a bit of demonism in the theatrical project (contra the overwhelming prevalence of psychological and moralistic drama). The amount of critical writing on Wellman is incommensurate with his place as a thinker within new theater, perhaps because of the communal nature of the theater scene, where ideas are exchanged in person more than through journals or small presses. What has been written about him in theater criticism is largely in response to his denouncement early in his career of “the theater of good intentions,” and his proffering the possibility of what “character” might be beyond the motivation-guided, coherent, explicable figures that populate 20th century realism and its acting methods. On the poetics side, Marjorie Perloff has written briefly on Wellman: a foreword to his collection, Cellophane; and “Harm’s Other Way,” a short piece for The Mac Wellman Journal, a lo-fi volume of essays put together by the DIY Sock Monkey Press for the 1997 Mac Wellman Festival. Perloff name-checks Wellman as one of the many poets whom she might have included in her study, 21st Century Modernism. In that work, she valorizes the transmission of a modernist language project, compositions of a counter-signifying materiality of words, from four great modernists— Gertrude Stein, T.S. Eliot, Marcel Duchamp and Velemir Khlebnikov—to their 21st century inheritors, language poets Susan Howe, Charles Bernstein, Lyn Hejinian and Steve McCaffery. Wellman’s projective affiliation here is in the Khlebnikov transmission: the “charging via neologism, paronomasia . . . [that] defies semantic coherence . . . [inverting] the ‘ordinary language’ aesthetics of Stein and the use of everyday objects like combs and urinals in Duchamp.” For her own formulation of the “strangeness of the ordinary,” Perloff says Khlebnikov “substitutes the ordinariness of the strange” (21st Century 126). In her two short essays on Wellman, Perloff works in this vein of finding strangeness in the close-focus of phrases and neologisms. As with her analysis of Khlebnikov’s etymological play, she attends to Wellman’s investigations in the political and cultural phraseology on the cluttered surface of American English—remember, she asks, the “butterfly” ballots and hanging “chads” of the 2000 election (Foreword x)?
     
    Perloff delights in the critique of American culture that Wellman’s making-strange produces. Cellophane, written out of a two-year self-imposed assignment to write 2 pages of bad American grammar every day, might epitomize this strand of his work, with such formulations as: “Who them alltime lowdown hunch scattershot boys? Who would ought to have done did?” (175). But I would argue that it is not the strange surface of the ordinary that Wellman would have us encounter in his theater, but rather something more dimensionally strange—where things are strange because we have become strangers. His essays on theater describe a shifting emphasis, articulating first a space of resistance (“The Theater of Good Intentions,” 1984), then a statement on the weirdness of the real (“A Chrestomathy of 22 Answers to 22 Wholly Unaskable and Unrelated Questions Concerning Political and Poetic Theater,” 1993), and now a space of ceremony (“Speculations,” 2004). The plays collected in Difficulty are by no means autonomous, material objects. They are more like Swiss cheeses of plays, where strange holes open onto skewed dimensions. The place where poetic language experiment meets the theatrical project is a fold that I hope to address, moving from the line to the ceremony, and so from sound to proprioception. The nature of a theatrical hole has very much to do with the actual space of theater, but as Wellman writes in Bad Penny, “the Way is ever difficult to discover” (148). Part of that difficulty lies in the dual mindfulness that poetic theater requires. Examined only with the analytical tools of a single discipline, whether poetry, philosophy, or theater, the movements of mind that constitute the theatricality of Wellman’s plays become obscured, or rather, they hide like the Black-Tufted Malabar X, the nasty resident of Hoole’s hole. This essay does not seek to uncover what is hiding, but rather to think about how to inhabit the space where we can listen to its transmissions, and to gesture toward writing strategies for finding ourselves strange.
     

    A Theater of Landscape

     
    Wellman consistently takes an inter-genre stance; a novelist and poet as well as a playwright, he began writing plays for the Dutch radio, took a bachelor’s in international relations, and spent time working in a specialty mathematics bookshop. It requires a complex of lineages to place him in a context. His influences and inheritances span theatrical, poetic, and philosophical traditions. Perloff embraces Wellman by drawing him into a poet’s tradition. Although I too want to think about his poetic language, I want to add a theatrical lineage to this context both in order to lay the groundwork for my thinking about topographical holes, and also to emphasize that Wellman, though described in relation to mainstream playwrights as a poet- or language-playwright, is making theater. A judgment of what is theatrical lies at the core of his aesthetic.
     
    The room to explore language (as opposed to character, plot, psychology) as a primary material of theater comes from a “landscape theater” tradition, which I define broadly as the use of space to reorganize compositional structures, and the use of the textual line to create theatrical value. The term “landscape” indicates the recession of character as a central compositional term, a recession historically coincident with cubism’s similarly decentering redeployment of figure within the spatial field.2 The term is associated with Gertrude Stein, although the concern with landscape predates her own description of her plays as “landscapes” of words in relation to other words.3 According to Elinor Fuchs, two compositional modes followed from the development of landscape theater: “field” composition, where nonhuman elements exist in spatial relation, allowing for non-linear storytelling (a kind of antecedent to Projectivist “composition by field”), and the corresponding modes of attention produced by “the faculty of landscape surveyal” that reads “multivalent spatial relationships” in place of the older lines of “conflict and resolution” (Death 106-7). This new drama is environmental and immersive, a shift in thinking that anticipates the recent turn to ecology and limns a zone of transition between modernism, postmodernism, and posthumanism. In ways that anticipate thinkers from Emmanuel Levinas to Judith Butler, landscape plays create space to think of our being in terms of relation instead of fate.4
     
    Hans-Thies Lehmann has defined this line of new performance as “post-dramatic” theater, but it is useful to recall that movements against theatrical habit often invoke an originary theater against whatever stultified replacement the mainstream represents (what Wellman calls “Geezer Theatre”). Twentieth century nontraditional theater has tended to argue for a recalibration of theater values and recuperation of the intensity of theatrical experience through a rethinking of both materials and structures. Field and landscape compositions have been deeply invested in exploring the physicality of the non-narrative aspects of theater, and I would name Antonin Artaud’s theater of cruelty and the pedestrian, chance-driven vocabulary of the Judson Dance Theater as poles of the embodiment of the postmodern landscape theater. From Virgil Thomson’s opera of Stein’s Four Saints in Three Acts to the work of the Wooster Group or Elevator Repair Service or Nature Theater of Oklahoma, theatrical vocabularies of music, sound, movement, and image offer an alternative structural ground to narrative without abandoning text. This recourse to other vocabularies of thinking offers ways to describe the structure of a play in terms other than a process of revealing that unfolds in linear time. Stein, as the original theoretician of the landscape play, laid a still-relevant and provocative groundwork for this means of composition; indeed, her essay “Plays” might be the most important essay on theater writing since Aristotle’s “Poetics.” Though landscape plays do of course progress in time, the temporal experience can be thought as grounded not in linearity, but in inhabitation. This shift from progression to durational inhabitation is a critical transition in 20th century aesthetics, leading toward installation, “relational” work, and emergent transmission-based art forms.
     
    Fuchs emphasizes a predilection for the static that undergirds modernist landscape aesthetics. This present-tense stasis is created either by actual stillness in plot or action (she names Maeterlinck as the writer of stasis, Robert Wilson as the director of stasis), or by forms of recursion and repetition that create the impression of staying in or returning to one place, allowing new information to proliferate in a scene, rather than move a story forward. Certainly Stein uses landscape as an anti-linear model of thinking. Jane Bowers views Stein’s recourse to pictorial terms as serving a twofold purpose: undistracted by the necessity of keeping up with the story, the viewer of a Stein play is available at every moment to a meditative, contemplative experience based on the present-tense stimulus of the performance; further, offered the image and word elements of theater without hierarchy, the viewer is free to find and retry a shifting set of perspectives (131-2, 140). The playwright’s hermeneutic guidance drops away, inviting the viewer to find her own habits of navigation. No single element of theater—script, scene, costume, light, sound—is necessarily foregrounded; the attention is directionally free, resulting in a self-aware exercise of attention, even attentiveness toward attention itself. Thus landscape plays are incomplete without the mind of the audience; the movement of their attention is an equal part of the substance of the play itself.5 Wellman will preserve this sense that the substance of the play is made in part by the mind of the audience; indeed the mind, conceived extensively as thought and proprioception moving over and through time, and into what he calls Wild Time, is where the Wellman play takes place.
     
    Fundamental to Wild Time is the sense that we do not know where we are going. Like Stein, Wellman uses an acute crafting of verbal impedance to disrupt habitual orientation, but he uses unknowingness differently, not as a renewal of seeing and presence but as a means of opening paths into strange spaces. It is an active retaliation against the foreclosure of meaning that Wellman notes in Stein, and if there is a lineage to be drawn between them, it is on the grounds of respect for her production of openness. Speaking at a symposium on Stein’s plays, Wellman emphasized this aspect of her work:
     

    I do think there’s something about the openness of [Stein’s writing], the fact that it is, in a sense, a landscape. . . . Jonathan Lear wrote a book on Freud and Socrates called [Open] Minded, and he develops this notion of what he calls “the tyranny of the already known,” that we live in a society that is dominated by a particular kind of journalism, which has to do with a deadening sense of knowingness that permeates everything, including the theater. Stein is completely free of this. There is a kind of enormous openness to whatever life brings that I think is terrifying to people because it is open in a sense that is even hard to talk about.
     

    (Rosten et al.17, 20; emphasis mine)

     

    Wellman finds in Lear’s “already known” an analogy to what is known as the “well-made play,” the sociological, psychological, journalistic breed of play that dominates mainstream theater. The well-made play conforms to both psychological realism, which unfolds drama as a series of back-story reveals, and the structure of the dramatic arc as the climax and resolution of a central conflict. But beyond the habit of certain kinds of storytelling, what damns these plays for Wellman is their unwillingness to venture beyond already-known conclusions. In his essay “The Theater of Good Intentions,” Wellman attacks this as a form of high-ground moralism. In “Speculations,” his aphoristic landscape essay on theater’s wild spaces, the “Theatre of the Already Known (AK)” (or Geezer Theatre) appears as a kind of arch-dupe-enemy, hanging onto its “re” spelling as a signal of its unwillingness to abandon the boat of high culture. Instead of finding out once again that incest hurts or that racism is bad, Wellman suggests we allow theater to make us venture into spaces where we don’t already know the answer. If the AK, with its moral and emotional conclusions already on hand, requires no actual thinking, an unknown theater would demand it; the experience would be “open in a sense that is hard to even talk about.”

     
    Wellman identifies openness with terror, among other things. Both characters in and audiences of his plays frequently undergo experiences for which there are no adequate existing vocabularies, that is, they find themselves occupying a hole in knowing. Wellman’s dual register of line and plot allows these holes to appear on multiple scales, so that blank spaces in the experience of knowing seem to be systemic. Within the line, impedance, irregular continuities, and unknowable argots disorient the listener. Within the plot, landscape itself becomes unknown as spaces fail to join or follow predictably, as in Second Hand Smoke when a roof gives way to a desert, or when it instantaneously swallows a person up, or more accurately, “disappears” him, as in The Difficulty of Crossing a Field. By repeating a hole effect in both the line and the plot, Wellman joins the listening audience and the figures within the play in unfamiliar and unnamed experiences. These “holes,” I will argue, open up the play both narratively and receptively, and prepare for the possibility of what Wellman calls “apparence.”
     

    Holes in the Line: Rewriting Sophocles

     
    “Speculations: An Essay on the Theater” is Wellman’s extended, aphoristic organon of the practice of being in the space of theater. He begins by locating the play in the present-tense mindfulness of its happening:
     

    The STRUCTURE of a play ought not to be viewed as a fixed thing but as a mutable one.

    I mean, the structure of a play conceived of as a moving point: →→→→→→→→·→→→→→→→→ passing over—or through—time”
     

    (“Speculations” 294)

     

    This mutability undermines the possibility of treating a play as a model of causality and explanation, psychological, social, or otherwise. The difference lies in the relationship of knowing to time: whereas a model eventually completes its own description, the moving point is continuously being rendered anew. This always-moving structure, inscribed in the mutable present tense of the play at the scale of both the sentence and the story, transfers theatrical architecture away from input and outcome, relocating it in the actual space of performance as an active relationship between the perceiver and the play. No longer peripheral to the play as observer or consumer, the mind of each viewer is actually part of the thing itself: “our mindfulness completes the equation” (298). Unclosed, the completion that mindfulness offers is a share in a feedback loop moving “over—or through—time.” The concept of mutable structure suggests that a play should nowhere signal its total form; the parts should not echo an already known (or eventually knowable) whole. Thus Wellman is a playwright of mereology, the mathematical field that studies the relationship of part to whole. Where the classic Aristotelian model of theatrical narrative builds its sequence on a stable base, allowing the rising action, climax, and falling action to progress uniformly toward closure, Wellman presents an anti-conclusive mereology. Instead of compassing a whole, Wellman leads us into holes, holes where theater can finally happen.

     
    If we accept the axiom that a Wellman hole fundamentally removes us from knowing where we are or where we are going, then the holed line prepares this form of disorientation. Paired with abrupt shifts and slips in the plot’s landscape, Wellman performs a smaller slipping away from the recognizable and stable whole operative at the scale of the sentence. These small slips undermine the stable experience of knowing where we are, and so reduce the friction that might otherwise slow us down when the plot too takes us suddenly to a place we don’t recognize. Wellman’s Antigone, written in 2001 for the interdisciplinary company Big Dance Theater, exemplifies and dramatizes this slipperiness. On the page, it looks very little like a play: a 12-page column of text without differentiation of voice or stage direction. This Antigone doesn’t adapt the original text of Sophocles, but rather presents itself as if it preceded its prototype; it takes place in the emergence of storytelling, which in turn betokens the emergence of theater. Antigone begins: “Once, at the beginning of time, the three Fates, unpleasant young girls, enacted the story that was to become that of Antigone. The three girls played all the parts with hats instead of masks, and a whole rack of customary costumery” (105). Without articulating the voices typographically, the play occupies the page as a dense, single column, like an unsorted trunk of costumes and props. All speech flows into all other speech, and often only the shifting grammar of first and third person suggests the possibility of mapping who will say what. The story of judgment and burial is held in thick relation to a description of the activities of three Fates on their way to becoming the three Graces (who will eventually whisper the story into the ear of a puppet named Sophocles). Dances, songs, proverbs, and acts of charm (like balancing an egg on one end) occupy the text’s landscape alongside the emerging story. Wellman preserves something of the choral structure of Sophocles, playing in particular with the chorus Heidegger treats at length in his Introduction to Metaphysics. These three Fates are signally concerned with man’s strangeness, and within the density of the narrative and its intercalated acts of charm, the original chorus’s question—what is stranger than man?—recurs as Wellman’s refrain.
     
    The evanescent effect of Wellman’s holed line becomes apparent in reading his chorus on strangeness against that of Sophocles. The moving point of the play, as it passes through the chorus, does indeed slip “over—or through—time,” impeding any coherent survey. In this way Wellman’s chorus works against the traditional sense of the Greek Chorus as grounded in a stable, common voice. In Sophocles’ play, the first chorus describes the efforts of man against the world by presenting a sequence of images that accrue as contemplative objects embodying the concept of man’s uncanniness. Sophocles offers his audience a series of images that can be held in constellation around the concept of wonder. “Man” as object of thought stands at the center of the picture, with his resources and ambitions drawn in around him. The chorus observes strangeness with great lyricism without, however, enacting it. This observational perspective disappears as Wellman renders the same chorus. He constellates strangeness not with a legible series of emblematic images but with words of similar sound. The relationship of words to other words creates a streaming sense of strangeness by evading any focal point:
     

    A Chorus: Of all things strange, humankind / is the most strange. / The cat’s cradle / is news to the spider, / for all things go round and round; for / I was a stranger and you took me in; for / I was a stranger and you took me not in; for / / straw straw straw, / straw shows which way the wind blows, / and an empty belly thinks the moon is green cheese; for / / (the King of Spiders) / / Up he was stuck /up he was stuck /up he was stuck / and in the very upness of his stuckitude / he fell. / / (Straw, straw, straw, straw.) / / And what I learned from my long / life of spinning string, /life of measuring string, / life of snip snip snip: / / You can’t beat something with nothing.
     

    (Antigone 107)

     

    While the associative manner might at first seem characteristic of schizophrenic speech, Wellman’s chorus is actually controlled through its relentless transitivity as it passes “over—and through” the sound of “st,” pulling us across gaps in sense by an alternative affiliation in sonority. Where the Sophoclean chorus moves in a daisy pattern out into a particular image and back to the central concept of man as wondrously ambitious, Wellman’s chorus returns to the material sound of “st,” “sp,” “sn” prodding a musical sense of focus that slips out of the grasp of a logical one. The spinning of strange with straw, of straw with string, effects the slipping away from the original idea by sliding into focus a new sound displacing the last. This is a curving kind of writing. Each inflection point of that curve is created by a small hole, a gap of sense, in gliding distance.

     
    The poetic work of Wellman’s writing goes beyond foregrounding the transitive. If Stein’s work resituated reading and writing in these flowing spaces in our normal landscapes, Wellman explores the feeling of listening as language veers into a topos beyond the domestic, into spaces punctuated by what I have characterized as holes productive of blank spaces in our present-tense experience of understanding both what we are hearing and where we are. William James, in his gorgeous and still useful description of the experience of language in “the stream of thought,” observes that the usual failure to recognize the transitive feelings of prepositions and conjunctions such as if, and, and but is compounded by the “obverse error” of the supposition “that where there is no name no entity can exist” (“Stream” 246). The refusal to register—to feel—the existence of these “dumb or anonymous psychic states” produces perceived separations in the curve of thought, and so a “greater and greater accentuation and isolation of the substantive parts” (246). If Stein wrote sentences that demanded attention to words of transition and relation, Wellman’s sentences demand attention to these “dumb or anonymous psychic states.” These places are literally dumb, “open in a sense that’s hard to talk even about.” We have no words to compass the gaps, and as the play unfolds in front of us, no time to try to generate any. This is the crux of the holed line—it moves us through spaces we can’t name without giving us time to find new bearings.
     
    In the chorus quoted above, I mark three different strategies for enforcing this attention to “anonymous” spaces. Sliding alliteratively and homophonically from “strange” to “string,” he undermines the isolating tendency James describes by continually iterating a common sibilance, insisting on a relation that might otherwise go unfelt. But what is the feeling of relation in the line, “I was a stranger and you took me not in; for / / straw straw straw”? This strange yet particular interval is the first of three transitive “anonymous psychic states” in this chorus that recur throughout Wellman’s writing in the form of inhabitable absences or “holes.” We are given a transitive word “for,” and so are escorted, as it were, across the gap between “you took me not in” and “straw straw straw.” But the space of relation between “I was a stranger” and “straw straw straw” is illegible; we must absorb the feeling of that emptiness, and keep moving alongside the chorus. Wellman’s critics claim a non-sense in these spaces, but it is the sense of the nothing that we must find. Alongside a willingness on the part of the audience to grapple with spaces of difficulty, staging that uses non-textual senses to ground our sense that we are somewhere (strange and anonymous, but somewhere), and not nowhere, is necessary to the success of these small glides and gaps. The second type of hole is the literal image or mention of one; in this chorus, one that trips us and that we then fall into: “in the very upness / of his stuckitude / he fell. / / (Straw, straw, straw, straw.)” We understand the relation between the two places as a drop. The third type inverts the hole by energizing the anonymity surrounding seeming solidity by temporarily landing in a place of familiarity, creating what Big Dance Theater co-director Paul Lazar referred to as a “rugged island” in a personal interview. The stability of the proverb “[y]ou can’t beat something with nothing” exists as an island surrounded by empty space that offers relief in our disorientation. Wicked proverbs and notations bearing a resemblance to proverbial wisdom are an ongoing resource for this island-building; the sound of wisdom and of age can be soothing and grounding. Fuchs recognizes recursion and repetition as a landscape writing strategy, marking or circling around a place even in the absence of literal landscape elements, a territory-making function that resembles what Gilles Deleuze and Felix Guattari call the “refrain,” a kind of hybridized musical-topographical event. In one of Antigone’s later choruses, a list of fallacies provides a temporary sense of territory through recursive iteration. Taking a second stab at the question “what is more weird than man,” this chorus tries to ground itself in logic only to find weirdness again underfoot:
     

    The hole and the patch should / be commensurate, as the / dog to his man should be / obedient. It is as if I / ask you to prove this bicycle / belongs to Hector, and you reply / “All the bicycles around here / belong to Hector”; or the / / fallacy of too many questions, the / fallacy of affirming the consequent, or the / fallacy of denying the antecedent, or the / fallacy of hasty generalization, or the / fallacy of irrelevant conclusion, or the / fallacy of misplaced concreteness, or the / fallacy of many questions, or the / fallacy of accident; or the fallacy of bad faith. / / What is more weird what is more weird / than red feather than black kettle / what is more weird.
     

    (113)

     

    This refrain of fallacies provides a temporary perch, but no sooner is it established than the line crumples and reveals that we are still circling the perimeter of the question of weirdness. Antigone is full of these refrains, created through the effect of eddying in the flow of Wellman’s language. These eddies, within the sea of greater strangeness, offer themselves up as perches. Through the territory-making strategy of the refrain, they define a ground and offer a footing. Sometimes he moves on from these spots back into the sea of the story, in which case they function as an index of drifting thought that hovers around the plot. At other times he uses the rest offered by the island to slow down the story so that we become aware of an incoming phenomenon. Though they rarely hold, these islands prevent Wellman’s plays from becoming too oceanic to follow. In our conversation about staging Antigone, Lazar emphasized the necessity of finding every anchor point of familiar sense, both these kinds of aphorisms that sound familiar and concrete descriptions of action. He deployed the image of an island chain to describe the skeleton he and Annie-B Parson used to ground the strange assemblage device of the play’s action, so as to allow the audience a sense of freedom in thinking without passing a degree of lostness from which they were unlikely to return.

     

    Intense Absence

     
    Wellman’s chosen handbook on holes is Roberto Casati and Achille C. Varzi’s Holes and Other Superficialities, a text that attempts a realist description of holes from ontological, mereological, topological, and morphological standpoints.6 Casati and Varzi describe themselves as “hole realists.” The central thesis of the book is that holes do exist as “immaterial bodies” that are always parasitic to hosts, but that “[h]oles cannot be the only things around” (34, 193). A hole cannot be its own host; it must be a hole in something. But within that something, the hole is an absence. To think about a hole, we must “[t]hink negative” (189). William James similarly locates experiences of blank spaces as integral to the experience of thinking, placing the experience of what he calls “substantive” and “transitive” thought alongside the experience of “dumb or anonymous” states in the curve of consciousness. Our vocabulary does not contain everything it is possible to think and feel. Rather, writes James,
     

    namelessness is compatible with existence. There are innumerable consciousnesses of emptiness, no one of which taken in itself has a name, but all different from each other. The ordinary way is to assume that they are all emptinesses of consciousness, and so the same state. But the feeling of an absence is toto coelo other than the absence of a feeling. It is an intense feeling.
     

    (“Stream” 251-52)

     

    Through the skips and gaps of his lines, and the slipperiness and evanescence of territory underfoot, Wellman gives this “intense feeling” of “an absence” an analog in stage time: the pause. His plays abound with variants of the direction: “Pause. Silence. Pause.” Both holes and pauses are repeated figures in his work, standing for each other in a “compact between special instance and wild time” (“Speculations” 301). Never merely a slowed down response in an otherwise continuous action, Wellman’s pause is a drain, a way of evacuating a scene.

     
    If the anonymous relation between things animates Wellman’s poetics at the level the line, as we have seen in the Antigone chorus, it does so as well at the level of the scene. Bad Penny, a site-specific play for Bow Bridge in Central Park, culminates in a pause that so evacuates the scene of its namable sense that it becomes a space of terror, dramatizing the onset of namelessness (the incomprehensible) by evacuating its landscape of certainty. The play has only one actual event in a plotted sense: the Boatman of Bow Bridge comes to take away the man who has picked up the bad penny. Otherwise, the text is a sequence of stream of thought monologues set into the specific landscape of Central Park’s Bow Bridge. Initially focused on actual landscapes slightly askew (of the sky, the park, the fictional near-by gas stations), the poetic imagery becomes increasingly disordered through the addition of a chorus speaking alongside the individual characters. The effect is that of a strange interval, where the relation of speakers to other speakers remains obscure even as it is enforced compositionally by their juxtaposition. As the play nears the happening of its one event, the First Man, who has the bad penny, declares his belief in “cheese. . . crud. . . power. . . bad shoes. . . insects. . . goop. . . gunnysacks. . . tar. . … furballs. . . cardboard. . . ooze. . .” while a chorus hidden in the bushes chants, “Incomprehensible, the bridge. Incomprehensible, the puddles. Incomprehensible, the sky. Incomprehensible, the hats. Incomprehensible, the thumbtacks. . .” (146). When the boatman arrives, all sound stops. The man, after “a blank moment of horror,” climbs into the boat and is taken away by the boatman (146). After a landscape of language, this event is most terrifying in its silence. Bad Penny‘s drama is the experience of the blank place, the hole.
     
    Its chorus resorts to proverbs to cure the silence: “as you sow, so shall you reap; a bad penny always turns up; nature abhors a vacuum; thought is free; the squeaking wheel gets the grease; today you, tomorrow me; there are more ways of killing a dog than choking it with butter” (148). Across the (semi-) recognizable shape of proverbial aphorism, the First Woman layers a last monologue rife with contradiction: “For all things beneath the sky are/ lovely, except those which/ are ugly; and these are odious/ and reprehensible and must be/ destroyed” (148). As the chorus continues to speak their proverbs, the First Woman speaks to uncertainty:
     

    For the Way is ever difficult to discover
    in the wilderness of thorns and mirrors
    and the ways of the righteous are full
    strange and possess strange hats and
    feet. For the Way leads over from the
    Fountains of Bethesda, where the Lord
    performed certain acts, acts unknown to
    us, across the Bow Bridge of our human
    unknowability, pigheadedness, and the
    wisenheimer attitude problem of our
    undeserving, slimeball cheesiness. . .

    (148-9)

     

    The language of the chorus and the First Woman stands in an unnamed and perhaps unnamable relation. There seems to be no reconciliation in the polarity of the choral effort to create solidity and the First Woman’s acquiescence to the strange way that leads us out of these solid places. This relation is not “unnamable” in a Beckettian sense so much as resistant to the possibility of measuring and coding the relationship. Its resistance fosters a sense of human smallness; the “Bow” of the bridge’s name begins to evoke the act of bowing and the environment seems charged with a power that might eclipse the humans trying to orient themselves in it. After the “blank horror” of the First Man’s removal, the play restarts only to hang suspended in strangeness. Submissively respectful to “the Bow Bridge of our human unknowability,” we arrive at an almost abject, tragic tone of “utterly craven, totally lost, desperate and driven incomprehensibility” (149). The feeling of absence is an intensity, and so a presence; phenomenologically, it is a hole.

     
    Wellman also creates the “intense feeling” of “absence” with an inverse process: inscrutable naming in an alien language. His plays abound with technical vocabulary that borders on hoax, creating an intensity tinged with a suspicion that the strangely named thing is in fact an unrecognizable object from a vocabulary we can never hope to know (as with Albanian Softshoe, when the second act reveals that the living room drama unfolding in the first act was a soap opera on the eighth moon of Saturn; what do we call it now?). In the opening scene of The Lesser Magoo, Torque, an office flunky being interviewed for an indeterminate job, is quizzed on his technical grasp of a mysterious trade:
     

    Curran:

    Sir, do you know what Crowe’s Dark Space is?

     

     

    Torque:

    Sure, it’s the place where the One He Refused to Meet encountered the Crocodilian Mahoon and therefore lays an egg. Quite a large egg, in fact.

     

     

    Curran:

    And are you sure of that?

     

     

    Torque:

    Well—that’s what I was taught at Princeton. School of Upper Malabar Philocubist and Macrurous Studies.

    (101)

     

    If these names seem merely goofy, the scene as it progresses replaces play with terror. We do not know the meaning of these words, and so when they give way to something violent and unexplained, the pleasure of their seemingly comic invention is replaced by threat. Torque’s quizzing culminates in his completion of “Presley’s Title One Rogation Exercise” by naming the “tools of the Lesser Magoo”: Whisk broom, Valve trumpet, Tom and Jerry Tongs, Chattahoochie Star-Toothed Harrow, Number six parting tool, tub chair, Klein bottle, Oboe, Hip-boots, Hacksaw, Clothes tree, Plunger, Jigger-chaser, St Louis Double-Hinged Rainbow-Roof, Ramses Motorized Lawn Cable, and Obeah-Man Refluent Bow and Arrow (103-5). Having succeeded, he is allowed to visit the water cooler. After a nearly wordless four minute pause during which his interviewers recline with their eyes covered by handkerchiefs through an epic (in stage time) silence, Torque returns. The stage direction reads,

     

    Something terrible has happened to him. He looks like he has seen a ghost. Perhaps his own. He has vomited, soiling his shirt and jacket. His left shoe and stocking are gone, and the foot is bloody. Tremblingly, he crosses the room, leaving bloody splotches; and quietly sits as before.
     

    (106-7)

     

    The puzzle of what has happened to Torque goes unnamed and unexplained, another hole in the plot, the bodily violence of which dramatizes the intensity of this namelessness. Instead of offering an orienting sense of order, the plenitude of technical terms that has filled up this scene repels the audience away from the surface of impenetrable language. In the increasingly disturbing imagery of the office landscape—a closet door swings open to reveal Torque’s predecessor swinging from a noose—the substantive quality of the argot dissipates, becomes threateningly unknown. In this way the impedance to our smooth understanding of the play’s language aids Wellman’s disturbing and disorienting effects. This impedance that insists on our awareness of the play’s written surface marks Menippean satire as one of Wellman’s writing modes: inescapably, we must consider our own (in)comprehension.

     

    Hoole’s Hole7

     
    I have thus far spoken mostly about the local, line-level effects of Wellman’s prose, a focus I’ve sustained in order to signal two separate relations. The first is the relation of Wellman to concerns outside his own plays: particularly the landscape, or we could say the poetic, tradition in theater. I have shown that the license of a non-linear approach to stage speech, described amply by Stein as the relation of words to other words, is taken up by Wellman to disorient and destabilize, particularly in relation to our ability to know what is going on, and how we should be receiving it. The second and more important reason for my sustained investigation of the Wellman line has to do with the microcosmic environment of his plays as preparation for the effects of the macrocosmic. Recall the opening axiom of “Speculations”: “The STRUCTURE of a play ought not to be viewed as a fixed thing but as a mutable one. I mean, the structure of a play conceived of as a moving point . . . passing over—or through—time” (294). If structure is mutable and not encompassing, then there is no relation of part to whole in which the micro signals and predicts the shapes of the macro, or gradually accretes to fill in a coherent picture.
     
    How, then, is that part-whole relation drawn? The description of a play’s structure as “a moving point” means that the larger environment we inhabit is continuously reconfigured as that point moves in time. If it does not work to fill in the overall structure incrementally, might the line, as the local environment of that moving point, create a condition of thinking rather than indicate a framework? Might the weirdness of the line be necessary to our ability to move alongside the larger action of the play? For only once we are unsettled will we find ourselves available to fall into Wellman’s holey plots. In other words, is it possible that the larger action of the play wouldn’t work without our thinking being primed for more radical disorientation by the small hollows and rebuffs in the lines? “Speculations” supports such a claim. The topographical figure at the heart of that essay is the space surrounding the straight line of the known, a space Wellman variously names “phase space,” the space “perpendicular to the known,” “the strange,” the “radiant,” the “beyond,” “Hoole space,” “Hoole’s Hole,” and the space of “howling.” The space of theater cannot take place along the line of the already known (only theatre can happen there). “Speculations” thus describes the theatrical as taking place beyond our knowing, if not beyond our feeling. I have described this space as a “strange hole,” and at this juncture it is necessary to think more deeply through what a hole is, and in particular how a hole could be something in the first place.
     

    Fields of Emptiness Filled by Strangeness

     
    Wellman takes up Casati and Varzi’s provocative “hole realism” by making holes in the host of known. Leaving the sentence for a larger scale of analysis, we can find this parasitic growth in Wellman’s description of what happens to structure in the course of theater. Wellman differentiates between two kinds of structure, just as he elsewhere claims two kinds of time, clock time and “Wild Time” (“Speculations” 305). These pairs follow the same distinction. In the geezerly theater of “appearance,” where we can only watch passively what we already know going on in front of us, structure is a reference to some other, presumably better, play. In the theater of “apperception,” or in Wellman’s coinage, “apparence” — a theater that cannot take place without our mindfulness, a theater that does not know where it is going — “all [conventional] structures fall down in their folly” (303). It is the event of this falling away of the known that makes possible the appearance, and so the “apparence” of a space beyond convention. After the collapse of the known:
     

    A tear appears.
    (A tear as in air, not a tear as in ear.)
    A tear appears and it is:
    A


    such that a gap, or discontinuity, appear
    ? B
    in the continuum.

    (“Speculations” 303)

     

    This discontinuity is the beginning of a Wellman hole, that parasitic “field of emptiness” that negatively produces itself within the known (Casati and Varzi 177). “Hoole’s hole” seems to take up Casati and Varzi’s mandate to “think negative.” This negative expanse is not necessarily empty; negative within the space of the host, the hole is fundamentally fillable. A filled hole doesn’t cease to be a hole, for some discontinuity still exists between the hole and the “hole-lining,” or the edge surface(s) of its host. (Casati and Varzi consider hole, hole filling, and hole host as separate entities.) Likewise Wellman’s space in the hole of the known is filled, of course, with what we don’t know: the strange. The strange is “perpendicular to the four dimensions of familiar appearance” (“Speculations” 296), a ray that shoots from the known into the unknown. In perceiving the strange, we find that we have somehow gone off our grid and are moving in a space of n dimensions: “So STRANGENESS is what fills Apparence and, thus, is what keeps us there, where we find ourselves” (296). Where we find ourselves is “phase space,” in physics an ideal space mapping all the possible conditions of a dynamic system. In Wellman’s speculative analogy, phase space is seemingly a space where determination of any particular state is impossible. If all possibilities are present, and those possibilities likely exceed the “four dimensions of familiar appearance,” then a drama that “unfolds” in phase space “cannot be told in terms of plot” (295). What happens in phase space is the event of “Apparence,” a showing-forth. “Apparence” is Wellman’s translation of Kantian “apperception” in which something new comes be known, or perceived. Apparence, filled or configured by strangeness,8 is what can happen in a Wellman hole, and the “doing of Apparence” constitutes the purpose of theater (297). That we find ourselves in strangeness, and not merely looking at it, signals the ceremonial function. We are active: “The proposition I do not know what I am doing while in the act of doing I do not know who I am or what is not tautology; this proposition reveals an exchange of charm for strangeness. A supercession of apperception by the force of the square of what lies off; off there, and is radiant (and is the Radiant)” (301). As we do what we do not know we are doing, we participate in the unknown. Wellman thus reveals his theater as a project of open mindedness. Finding ourselves in strange places, we can experience genuine newness in our thinking. This new experience is “crystalline”; it is an event in thinking, and not an idea. The event, rather than producing new knowledge, produces an “epiphany” which is for Wellman an opening, or expanding, of space: “drama is an epiphany, something opens up. Something shows itself” (339).

     
    A variant of James’s “dumb or anonymous” experience, the epiphany is also something beyond vocabulary. Whatever shows itself cannot be absorbed by language and knowing, but rather remains outside of description. In his plays, Wellman traces the contours of that opening up, or in hole-realist terms, the “hole lining,” in a kind of spatial notation. The apparence cannot be scripted, but its space can be prepared and it can be beckoned. In this sense, Wellman’s plays “do” apparence, and in this sense they are ceremony. “Ceremony,” writes Wellman “is the nonlinear optic on the moment. Ceremony is the basic form of the theatrical” (340). Those plays of his, like the Crowtet cycle, that follow a plot—weird but essentially narrative—have characters encountering holey spaces where strange things happen: clearings in the middle of the forest, horror-filled closet doors swinging open, vast open plains. In these plays the plot’s topography provides a figure that is replayed in the space of thinking in the same way that a musical harmonic note also produces “overtones,” or an additional set of frequencies that are multiples of the base frequency sounding simultaneously with the main tone. The overtone series of Wellman’s hole poetics sounds in the line, the plot’s topography, and in the receiving mind of the audience. Who knows what other registers it sounds on? The hole can be thought of as the interior space of a ceremonial bell, “sounded” when “a tear appears.” Not merely spaces or gaps, these holes go beyond the interruption of sense: they produce negative environments, or “immaterial bodies.”
     
    In a philosophical play like Antigone, where speech is not always assigned to a character position, the figure of the hole is folded into the descriptive language that carries reports from beyond the events on the ground; the holes and wildness in this imagery help bring the proprioceptive sense of holes and wildness near. Antigone, for example, describes her experience in the wild spaces beyond the coordinates of the basic story. The action of the story is initiated by the appearance of a logical notation “!∃,” which Wellman defines as “there exists a unique situation.” In the notes to the play, Wellman asks that all parts be played by the three Fates–with the exception of this unknown god, who we can verbally account for as “E Shriek” or “the Shriek Operator” (Antigone 105). If all parts are to be played by the three Fates then this unknown god is unplayable; it isn’t a part. E Shriek then is immaterial, a transmission, a figure whose presence indicates the opening up of a communicating tunnel from here to “→ ? B.” E Shriek initiates the play’s possible commerce with wild spaces. The burial of Polyneices is an event beyond attribution, occurring in the company of an immaterial body:
     

    Unknown god as a bodiless shadow approaches. As a swirl of fabric. I am the Shriek Operator. !∃. I am the unique situation. I am the uncanny and have come to this place, place crowded with corpses and the stench of death. I am the Shriek Operator and am very pleased with all this slaughter, this horror, this misfortune. Misfortune out of contrast, sprung hinges, what creaks, what is fundamentally broken. Sand pours without anyone willing it. Pours from above. From the sky. Something is covered. Something mangled and horribly dead.
     

    (106)

     
    !∃Shriek in Big Dance Theater’s Antigone at Dance Theater Workshop, New York City, December, 2002. Used by permission. !∃, “an unknown god as bodiless shadow,” speaks from an intermediate point in space between the two stage agents of its voice: Tricia Brouk, leaning backwards and draped with “a swirl of fabric,” who mouths the words, and Leroy Logan who delivers the text into the microphone. The effect is not that of the appearance of a character, but of the reception of a voice, transmitted into the space of the play.
     

    Click to view video

     
    The Greek drama of incommensurate mandates becomes a ceremony of lost metrics. This initiation of the story as an action unfolding from an unauthored event creates, from the moment this play starts moving, a sense that the world of its setting is permeated by acts that have no cause and seem to come from elsewhere, acts we can neither know or account for. At the crux of the drama it is precisely the presence of the “tear (as in air)” that allows for Wellman’s epiphanic drama of opening to occur. If we have been experiencing strange eruptions of the beyond into the space of the story, now we begin to move out of that space through the same tears. The movement into the space beyond the hole occasions a paradox that unsettles language. Antigone, buried alive, “witness to her own death. . . . [a] stranger in the house of being,” has undone the names of both living and dying; she inhabits a nameless space (114). Both there and not there, she has been buried in phase space. Here Wellman’s description of the opening up of space is quite literal. “I am going deep into a hole,” Antigone announces. “Deep in a hole and come out the other side” (114).
     
    This theatrical moment creates an enveloping tone in describing what cannot be seen in the four dimensions of the room, perceptible only in that space of open-mindedness where we do not know where we are going. “We are peripheral to, to appearance,” writes Wellman. “We are central to the apparence as it enfolds us in Hoole Space” (“Speculations” 303). In this enveloping space, “Night says no to day. Silence. Pause. A small unpleasant animal crosses the cast emptiness of infinite spaces. . . . Silence. We behold, for the first time, the curvature of the earth. Someone looks out and holds and egg.” The play descends into stillness: “Alone and cold. No one to love her. No one to protect her. Nothing but stillness. Stillness laying waste. The laying waste of stillness. Now she is the focal point of stillness” (Antigone 114-15). From this extraordinary compass point Wellman lays down three transitive pulses in the felt direction of thought, their simple repetition typographically isolated on the page:
     

    And
    and
    and
    and the gods are coming. Unknown ones and the unseen.

    (115)

     

    These transitive “ands,” without substantive nouns to offer coordinates, perform a kind of essential “and” function, joining with the possibility of whatever could be beyond it. Steering out into space, in the incredible quiet of this opening, these “ands” open in preparation to receive the strange. What we find, in that space, is a series of hollows, negations, silences, strange appearances, and songs: emptiness laced with charm. Haemon appears in the sky, falling on his own sword while “[t]ime passes unconcerned” and”[n]othing moves us” just as “[n]othing moves Antigone. . . because we are no longer what’s called ‘human’” (116): on the other side of this hole we are somehow negative if not negated. Songs occur as refrains, marking out space:9 “Bubba tubba bubba tubba bubba tubba bup . / / I am the kind of girl tired of always being wise / I am the tin cat tied to my own damn tail. . . . Slow fade to black in which we hear them sing the song over again till they get it right. More right. Over and over. Silence.” Hollows are filled by slow things: “Pause. In which Time becomes a one-legged crow. Crow on a withered bough” (116). Immaterial bodies are perceived without being seen: “One senses the presence of an unknown god. Then another. Then another” (117). From these glides, rounds, and hollows, Antigone reports from the inside of a luminous rock, a radiant space on the other side of that hole. Wellman again makes the topography of the story a figure for our movement of mind:

     

    And I slipped out the back and I made myself very small and I slipped out the back way and when I awoke. I was in a different place, a thin place, as though it were the place of a compass focus. And the lines of force radiated out from my heart in all directions and I could feel these lines of force as though I were a god and not merely a nasty girl, a girl tired of being the wise one. Radiated out from my still beating heart.
     

    (117)

     
    Didi O’Connell in Big Dance Theater’s Antigone, Dance Theater Workshop, New York City, December 2002. Used by permission. The staging’s fluency and its rapid alternation between theatrical vocabularies create, in the sudden shift between dance and text, a thin, tight focus that supplements the text. We find ourselves on an island in the space of the theater.
     

    Click to view video

     

    The language of description and report allows Wellman to fold the topographical models of phase space and Wild Time he describes in “Speculations” into the story itself.10

     
    The reality, or materiality, of the story takes place simultaneously in the space described by the play and in the space of mind produced by giving attention to it, differentiating this work from the theater traditions that precede it. The stage space itself is a magnetizing element, but it is not the only space of action. Stagings of Wellman’s work filled by those elements of theater that do not tend to invite a sense of conclusion—dance, image, song, sound—create an environment for the play to happen that shrugs off the habit of either the model (traditional realism) or the spectacle (which traffics in the commerce of desire and pleasure between the stage and the audience). We need the stage as the hole needs the host. The play needs us; “it is completed by our mindfulness” (“Speculations” 298). These joinings, across genre, across materiality and immateriality, sometimes rather demoniacally across species, across the known and the unknown, constitute Wellman’s pneumatic landscape, a landscape that calls for multiple metrics that communicate through tears in their own surfaces. In our “fundamentally broken” world, ceremony—which is not to grasp but to stop grasping, to find ourselves in the position of a radiant compass point and not just nasty little girls—will save us from so much junk knowledge, “from our own wrath, and the odium of our good intentions” (“Speculations” 341).
     
    This saving ceremony is invoked in Infrared:
     

    FOR all things are Holy to me—see that
    you follow the way of your Y to the
    site of your X, for that hollow will be
    the place of your hallowing;
    For I am called X, and dwell in the holes
    of fire you call Sun and Moon; and in all
    the blazing, starry holes that the night
    is drilled with. . . .
    FOR I am difficult to grasp;
    FOR any natural act, if hallowed, leads to me;
    and nature needs people for what no angel
    can perform—its hallowing—and in especial,
    the hallowing of its hollows and holes.

    (49-50)

     

    Here is a landscape vision concerned with what is beyond our seeing, beyond the horizon. This horizon is composed not of the literally far, indistinguishable edge of our sight, but by the vague edges of our thinking.

     
    At this “live ceremony [that] feeds on dead ceremony” (“Speculations” 340), we are not observers but receivers, tuning in transmissions from beyond our knowing, something only possible if we learn to hallow the hollows and holes. Theater is a crystal radio kit for our thinking. We become aware that our uncontained minds are receptors for signals no one originated and we can’t account for. This conception of mind is both pre-Socratic and post-humanist: a resistance to all forms of closure in our sense of where thinking comes from and where it goes, it implies a strange extensiveness. In this space where strangeness fills apparence, we are asked to practice our own tuning mechanisms, to extend our frequency array. Wellman’s theater, though it might rail, sputter, and denounce, is not a project of critique, neither is it an object or a thing in itself. Removed entirely from whatever lyric moods we might think of when we hear the word “ceremony,” this is a ceremony of bewilderment officiated by nasty things. This is the world where we find ourselves, says Wellman. We have no idea how weird it is. We have no idea how to see. In his workshop at Brooklyn College, when Mac was pleased with the writing, he would sometimes say by way of compliment, “all the characters have wooden hair.” On a very good day, he might say, “we should take her out and shoot her.” And this is, I suppose, the last note of this essay: that the hole where emptiness is hallowed and maybe something is tuned in is dangerous, and this is good. If our thinking doesn’t proceed through passes of terror, something is wrong.
     

    Karinne Keithley Syers is a writer, performer, sound artist, and graduate student in English at the CUNY Graduate Center. In addition to creating her own work, she has performed with David Neumann, Young Jean Lee, Chris Yon, and Sara Smith. She has written about Nature Theater of Oklahoma for Theater Magazine, and is the founder of the 53rd State Press, which publishes new performance writing.
     

    Notes

     

     

    I wish to acknowledge the profound influence of my studies with both Joan Richardson and Mac Wellman on the ideas and attractions taken up in this essay. Additionally I wish to thank Laura Hinton and Heidi Bean, who have generously coached me in the development of this essay over innumerable drafts, and Stefania Heim and Joan Richardson, who combed the later drafts and contributed invaluable refinements to these sentences.
     

    1. I am part of this community. I met Mac in a ‘Pataphysics workshop in 2003, after seeing a production of Hypatia and Soho Rep. I went on to study with him in the Brooklyn College MFA program from 2004-6, and he has remained a mentor and good friend.

     
    2. The emergent landscape tradition in theater and other art movements that rethinks the centrality of the human figure in composition can be read as an internalization and unfolding in the mid-19th century of the Darwinian notion that humans are part of a network of living things, and not a central or separate category of being.

     

     
    3. As Elinor Fuchs and Una Chaudhuri have proposed in Land/Scape/Theater, landscape was an emergent element of modern drama well before Gertrude Stein’s famous assertion that her plays were landscapes. Beyond landscape as setting, Fuchs and Chaudhuri suggest that “at the threshold of modernism, theater began to manifest a new spatial dimension, both visually and dramaturgically, in which landscape for the first time held itself apart from character and became a figure on its own” (3). Stein’s “landscape play” comes after both Henrik Ibsen’s and Richard Wagner’s investment in actual and ideal landscapes, respectively. Stein’s innovations represent perhaps a new technology for writing from and as landscape, a brachiation within a field, rather than a separate tradition. For Fuchs and Chaudhuri, landscape becomes an active element, an energetic center of modernist plays, as in the silent urgency of the disappearing forests in Anton Chekhov’s “Uncle Vanya” and “The Cherry Orchard.” Place becomes, if not vocal, a loud claim on the attention of both the characters and the audience. Both separately and in their coedited volume Land/Scape/Theater, they attend to the natural and nonhuman as important elements of dramatic thinking, elements that have been until lately eclipsed by a critical focus on the subject, and an actor-centered insistence on character and motivation as the foundational elements of playwriting. Fuchs suggests that in the late 19th century plays of Chekhov, Ibsen, Maurice Maeterlinck, Frank Wedekind, and August Strindberg, landscape shifts from a “platform for human action,” a “preconscious” element of the text, to a “conscious” one (30).

     

     
    4. The post-anthropocentric points also toward ecological poetics as described by Angus Fletcher in A New Theory for American Poetry: Democracy, the Environment, and the Future of Imagination.

     

     
    5. Stein’s use of landscape is principally a language tool. Bowers revises Stein’s “landscape” to “lang-scape” to emphasize the cross-disciplinary license Stein derives from thinking about landscape as a compositional modality that can be used in language. Principles of relation derived from thinking about landscape are transposed to language thinking. Stein describes these relational principles as a kind of constant in a natural landscape. This relational abundance is not restricted to pastoral elements, but also includes the scene of writing itself. In Four Saints in Three Acts, alongside the relative positioning of the landscape elements—trees, magpies, saints—the process of writing is also written into the play: “Landscape” after all is made possible by a viewer’s perceptive of a visible field. Bowers claims that Stein allows the “transformative power of the artist’s imagination” to bring forward the artist’s perception as a central object of the composition (129). This enables Stein to “write the actor out of the play and to write the writer into it,” exchanging narrative for the experience of artistic process (133), and so realign sympathetic experience away from the character and toward the experience of thinking.

     

     
    6. In tutorials with Wellman while his student at Brooklyn College, he directed me to many philosophic and mathematic texts that have been resources for his own writing, such as the Casati and Varzi text, and Ludwig Wittgenstein’s Remarks on the Foundations of Mathematics. He tends to favor nontheatrical texts as resources for writing.

     

     
    7. I once asked Mac who Hoole was. He indicated that he might have been a Turkish mathematician by the name of Huhl, someone who, as far as I can tell, does not exist. Mac’s predilections for the Fez and the hoax assert themselves here.

     

     
    8. Although they share a term, Wellman’s strangeness is not the strangeness of the Russian Formalist “making strange.” Like Stein’s efforts to make new seeing possible in a domestic landscape, the project of “making strange” works to defamiliarize an environment at hand, whereas Wellman’s strange is a space we go to, a space beyond, where we are strangers.

     

     
    9. The song, as an action of charm, territorializes the hole in which the play is gently suspended. In A Thousand Plateaus, Deleuze and Guattari describe the work of the song as “organiz[ing] a limited space” within “chaos.” Sound marks a territory, creating through rhythm a temporary and workable limitation that pushes out the phase-space multiplicity of chaos: “For sublime deeds like the foundation of a city or the fabrication of a golem, one draws a circle, or better yet, walks in circles as in a children’s dance . . . . A mistake in speed, rhythm or harmony would be catastrophic because it would bring back the forces of chaos” (311). In the strange hole of Antigone’s living burial, Wellman’s song literally describes a circle: “The devil wipes his tail with Creon’s pride./ Listen to Little Jack fry up an eyeball for an egg./ Bubba tubba bubba tubba bubba tubba bup.// I am the kind of girl tired of always being wise./ I am the tin can tied to my own damn tail” (“Antigone” 116).

     

     
    10. This is especially marked in Antigone; it was written around the same time Wellman was drafting “Speculations.”
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Antigone. By Mac Wellman. Dir. Paul Lazar, Annie-B Parson. Chor. Annie-B Parson. Perf. Tricia Brouk, Molly Hickock, Leroy Logan, Didi O’Connell, Rebecca Wysocky. Big Dance Theater. Dance Theater Workshop, New York City. December, 2002.
    • Bowers, Jane Palatini. “The Composition That All the World Can See: Gertrude Stein’s Theater Landscapes.” Land/Scape/Theater. Eds. Elinor Fuchs and Una Chaudhuri. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 2002. 121-144. Print.
    • Casati, Roberto and Achille C. Varzi. Holes and Other Superficialities. Cambridge: MIT Press, 1994. Print.
    • Deleuze, Gilles and Felix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus: capitalism and schizophrenia. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • Fletcher, Angus. A New Theory for American Poetry: Democracy, the Environment, and the Future of Imagination. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2004. Print.
    • Fuchs, Elinor and Una Chaudhuri. “The New Spatial Paradigm.” Introduction. Land/Scape/Theater. Eds. Elinor Fuchs and Una Chaudhuri. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 2002. 1-7. Print.
    • Fuchs, Elinor. The Death of Character: Perspectives on Theater after Modernism. Bloomington: U of Indiana P, 1996. Print.
    • ———. “Reading for Landscape: The Case of American Drama.” Land/Scape/Theater Eds. Elinor Fuchs and Una Chaudhuri. 30-50. Print.
    • Heidegger, Martin. Introduction to Metaphysics. Trans. Gregory Fried and Richard Polt. New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 2000. Print.
    • James, William. “The Stream of Thought.” The Principles of Psychology, Vol. 1. New York: Dover Books, 1980. Print.
    • Lazar, Paul. Personal interview. 1 Feb. 2008.
    • Perloff, Marjorie. 21st Century Modernism: the “New” Poetics. Malden: Blackwell, 2002. Print.
    • ———. “Foreword.” Cellophane. By Mac Wellman. x-xvii. Print.
    • ———. “Harm’s Other Way.” The Mac Wellman Journal. Brooklyn: Sock Monkey Press, 1998. Print.
    • Rosten, Bevya, Anne-Marie Levine, Catharine R. Stimpson, Richard Howard, Wendy Steiner, Maria Irene Fornes, Mac Wellman, Al Carmines, Richard Foreman, Charles Bernstein, and Jane Bowers. “A Play That Has to Be Performed: From the Gertrude Stein Symposium at New York University.” Theater 32.2 (2002): 2-25. Print.
    • Stein, Gertrude. “Plays.” Last Operas and Plays. Ed. Carl van Vechten. Baltimore: John Hopkins UP, 1995. xxix-lii. Print.
    • Wellman, Mac. Antigone. The Difficulty of Crossing a Field: Nine New Plays. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2008. 105-120. Print.
    • ———. Bad Penny. Cellophane. Baltimore: PAJ Books, John Hopkins UP, 2001. 123-150. Print.
    • ———. Cellophane. Cellophane. 151-184. Print.
    • ———. “A Chrestomathy of 22 Answers to 22 Wholly Unaskable and Unrelated Questions Concerning Political and Poetic Theater.” Theater 24.1 (1993): 43-51. Print.
    • ———. Infrared. The Difficulty of Crossing a Field: Nine New Plays. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2008. 1-50. Print.
    • ———. The Lesser Magoo. Crowtet 2. Los Angeles: Green Integer, 2003. Print.
    • ———. “Speculations: An Essay on the Theater.” The Difficulty of Crossing a Field: Nine New Plays. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2008. 293-342. Print.
    • ———. “The Theater of Good Intentions.” Performing Arts Journal 8.3 (1984): 59-70. Print.
    • Wittgenstein, Ludwig. Remarks on the Foundations of Mathematics. Eds. G.H. von Wright, R. Rhees, G.E.M. Anscombe. Trans. G.E.M. Anscombe. Oxford: Blackwell, 1967. Print.

     

  • Poet’s Theater: An Introduction

    Heidi R. Bean (bio)
    Bridgewater State University
    heidi.bean@bridgew.edu

    Laura Hinton (bio)
    City College of New York
    laurahinton12@gmail.com

     

     

    This special issue of Postmodern Culture takes up a subject until now only rarely discussed in the annals of academic scholarship: that of contemporary American poet’s theater. But what exactly is a “poet’s theater”? Is it primarily a type of writing done by poets for the stage–trying their hand, so to speak, at a theater genre, as the novelist Henry James once did, winning no public acclaim? Is it any poetry presented in a public space before an audience, thus including, for example, both the modern poetry slam and the classic poetry reading? Recent critical studies devoted to the latter have helped us hear the multiple reverberations of sound and aurality particular to American poetry.1 But what we mean by a “poet’s theater” in the articles of this issue has not been the focus of those writings. Rather, for our contributors here, poet’s theater is a theatrical event that is scripted and preconceived but also open-ended and site-specific. Its meanings unfold not according to some predetermined narrative or social situation, but rather performatively, informed by local contexts, audience makeup, and performance conditions. In their own attempts to define poet’s theater, Kevin Killian and David Brazil, editors of the just-published Kenning Anthology of Poets Theater, 1945-1985, suggest by way of definition simply that we “try and catch it performing its social function” (xiii). We agree with that active assumption.
     
    As we consider what we mean by a poet’s theater, we might also consider why multiple instances of poet’s theater have emerged in such a variety of U.S. regions, performance spaces, and venues in the past six decades, with several adopting some version of the name “Poet’s Theater” as their official moniker: the Cambridge Poets Theatre, founded in 1951 by V.R. “Bunny” Lang; the New York Poets Theatre, a.k.a. the American Theater for Poets, founded in 1961 by Diane di Prima, LeRoi Jones/Amiri Baraka, Alan S. Marlowe, John Herbert McDowell, and James Waring; the Hardware Poets Playhouse in New York, 1962-1964, founded by Peter Levin, Audrey Davis, and Jerry and Elaine Bloedow; the Judson Poets’ Theater, founded in the 1960s by Al Carmines; the Nuyorican Poets Café, founded in 1973 by Miguel Algarín; and the San Francisco Poets Theater, 1979-1984,2 founded by Nick Robinson and Eileen Corder and associated with the Bay Area L=A=N=G=U=A=G=E (or “Language”) writers. In virtually every case, poet’s theater seems to have been not so much a coherent artistic movement as a creative outlet and countercultural community that brought poets, dancers, musicians, visual artists, theater artists, and performance artists into productive collaboration with one another. And yet placing these activities within a longer historical trajectory reveals key similarities from which we might begin to offer a definition.
     
    The cross-pollination of artistic media and political ideologies that fostered postwar poet’s theater was enabled in part by the social and artistic conditions of the 1950s. As Stephen Bottoms explains in his wonderful study of underground New York theaters in the 1950s and 60s, Greenwich Village, and especially the East village, allowed bohemian artists of all stripes to mingle in the smoky haze of its lively bar, coffee house, and jazz-club culture. These provisional spaces hosted poetry readings and theatrical performances outside of the institutionalized structures that, in the economic pinch of the postwar period, hesitated to support anything not guaranteed to be a financial success. Small casts, spare sets, and simple plots made these productions amenable to slim budgets, and they could easily be performed in modest bar and coffee-house spaces. Such aesthetic choices may have been driven by economic necessity, but, as Bottoms notes, they had the additional effect of focusing the audience’s attention on the bodies and speech of the performers themselves, since there was little else to distract from these (16-18, 125). Similar low-budget, performance-centered aesthetics also characterized Action Painting, jazz jams, and poetry readings, and indeed artists, musicians, and poets frequently constituted each other’s audiences.
     
    This proliferation of performance-centered aesthetics coincided with a critical turn to performance that might also be said to have its roots in the 1950s, the decade in which J.L. Austin’s Harvard lectures on the performativity of language (published in 1962 as How to Do Things with Words) and Erving Goffman’s 1959 The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life, an analysis of the performativity of social life, commingled with, for example, the Living Theatre’s investigations into both poetic drama and Artaud-inspired presentational theater, as well as Allan Kaprow’s “Happenings.” Part of what is advanced in each of these interdisciplinary uses of the concept of performance is the notion of performance as a constitutive act. In fact, contemporary critics frequently identify performance, as Julia A. Walker aptly notes, as “the postmodern turn” in critical discourse (149).
     
    It was from this fertile ground that postwar poet’s theater grew–not as a definitive practice but as the sharing of ideas and practices across media and ideologies. Following World War II, the politics of Senator Joe McCarthy, the founding of the House Un-American Activities Committee in 1947, and the attack on artists in particular encouraged a separation of art and politics, modeled, for example, in the apoliticality of Abstract Expressionism. But in the 1960s, artists re-politicized aesthetics as they turned to the models, routines, and practices of “everyday life.” The contemporary poet’s theater that is the subject of this issue arises in this transition. Each of the essays included here addresses poet’s theater’s engagement with the politics of everyday life–via, for example, poet’s theater’s model of an environmental poetics (in James Sherry’s essay on Fiona Templeton), via the ethical implications of the audience’s oscillation between individual and collective reception (in Heidi R. Bean’s essay on Carla Harryman), via the political implications of the performed interpenetration of poetry with urban street culture (Nasser Hussain on Ron Silliman), and via a spatialized model of thought that encourages openness to the “holes” in knowledge (Karinne Keithley Syers on Mac Wellman).
     
    Poetic verse drama is, of course, one of the oldest forms of literary activity and culture, including the ritual dramas of the ancient Greeks, and a major genre in English literature certainly since the Renaissance. But contemporary American poet’s theater is not so much grounded in the verse dramas of Aeschylus; or in the so-called “Golden Age” of English theater canonically represented by playwrights like Ben Johnson, Marlowe, or Shakespeare; or even in the stage works of modernist poets like W.B. Yeats, T.S. Eliot, and W.H. Auden. Instead, the scripted performance works of these particular contemporary American poet-playwrights self-consciously examine the relationship between discursive language, performing bodies, and audience members’ interactions and experiences. Poet’s theater is thus indebted as much to the rise of the conceptual arts, with their emphasis on multimedia forms, as it is to the histories of poetry and of drama and theater. Inhabiting, as Killian and Brazil put it, “a charged social space between the disputed territories of performativity, theatricality, and the textual” (xiii), poet’s theater might best be characterized as a self-conscious layering of different modes of representation, from the linguistic to the embodied, that is aimed at an investigation of the conceptual logic that joins representation to human-social experience.
     
    In addressing what poet’s theater is, then, we wish to emphasize not only its formal-aesthetic hybridity and artistic collaborativity but also the critical effects of these exchanges. The recent American poet’s theater that is the topic of our issue here is informed perhaps most crucially by a theoretical dialectic, the perceived “split” between literary textuality and performance. Modernist text-versus-performance debates date back to avant-garde circles beginning as early as the 1870s. In “The Avant-Garde and the Semiotics of the Antitextual Gesture,” Erika Fischer-Lichte writes that, while some German Romantics like Goethe and Wagner may have “considered performance itself a work of art,” most of their contemporaries viewed “the artistic character of performance” as “primarily affirmed through the performance of literature, through the dramatic literary text that was supposed to steer and control performance” (80).
     
    Such anti-theatricalism, particularly in the early twentieth century, was motivated in part by a fear of the public sphere, by a resistance both to theater’s collaborativity and to the perceived risks of collective reception. This version of modernism, theater theorist and historian Martin Puchner writes, celebrated “the figure of the individual artist who withdraws from the public sphere and the allegedly undifferentiated masses” and championed a model of reception that idealized individual contemplation in privacy (9). Both this model of the individual artist producing a highly complex creation as well as the private reception required by such a work “are responses,” Puchner asserts, “to the fear that the theater would actually provide a forum in which the constitution of public opinion might take place” (11). High modernism’s critique of realism and impersonation and its emphasis on the receptive value of absorption therefore work in tandem, as conspiratorial “barriers erected against the possibility of the public role of art suggested by the theater” (11).
     
    In contrast to the anti-theatricalism of high modernism, the modernist avant-garde was decidedly pro-theatrical, even if it was also often critical of the conventions of the traditional theater itself. Puchner credits Wagner and his notion of the gesamtkunstwerk, or “total theater,” with transforming the theater from an art form into a value–a value which places not only the work of art but the conditions of its production and reception at the center of modernist debates (31). The avant-garde’s embrace of theatricalism, writes Puchner, demonstrates its “greater affinity to populism and the masses” and exhibits Andreas Huyssen’s “hidden dialectic” between the experimental or avant-garde and society’s mass culture (9).3 Certainly, the postwar poet’s theater that began to proliferate in living rooms, coffee houses, city streets, open galleries, and other makeshift spaces is indebted to the avant-garde’s embrace of collaboration and collective reception under the sign of theatricalism.
     
    And yet, as much as contemporary American poet’s theater owes a debt to the modernist avant-garde, it should not simply be seen as a pro-theatrical break with modernist poetic drama. Instead, we might better perceive this postwar poet’s theater as a merging of the avant-garde’s theatricalism and literary modernism’s anti-theatrical strategies. Indeed, as Sarah Bay-Cheng and Barbara Cole have compellingly argued in their recent anthology of modernist poetic drama, Poets at Play, the category of modernist poetic drama properly includes both the literary stylings of H. D. and of Wallace Stevens, whose apparently anti-theatrical “closet” dramas resisted the conditions of the material theater, and the pro-theatrical plays of Edna St. Vincent Millay and E.E. Cummings, which incorporate such popular performance practices as vaudeville and minstrelsy. Bay-Cheng and Cole argue that modernist poet-playwrights often employed poetry as an intentionally anti-mimetic strategy that could offer “the hallmark of truth within the theatrical illusion of realism” (21). Thus, although it is conventionally written off both for what is perceived as its less-than-serious engagement with the theater and for its presumed lack of importance in the discourse of American modernism, modernist poetic drama may actually be better understood as an important departure from representational theater. This characteristic is one that postwar poet’s theater both inherits and extends.
     
    It should come as no surprise then that our preferred term here is not drama, indicating a literary production intended to be read, but rather theater and/or performance, a turn that signals the space and relations of enactment as central concern. In re-encoding this text-and-performance “split,” poet’s theater calls its very terms into question: what is a “text,” what is a “performance,” how do these definitions relate to the conditions of their production and reception, and when might one affect, shade, or even become the other? From this perspective, American postwar poet’s theater might be best understood as an inheritor of both literary modernism and the modernist avant-garde, with the term “poet’s theater” itself rhetorically signaling, simultaneously, a disavowal of dramatic realism and an embrace of theatricalism. If realism effaces its own means of production, achieving its sense of “reality” by removing the traces of theatrical mediation, then poet’s theater is decidedly anti-realist, in the sense that it foregrounds, even celebrates, the theatrical event. Yet unlike modernist poetic theater, which structures its staging according to the (absent) verbal text, neither text nor performance over-determines the meaning or effects of postwar American poet’s theater.
     
    As a theater of language, of what some might call poetic language, American poet’s theater grants special emphasis to embodied and performed language. “Poetic” language is imagined by many of the poet’s theater writers and stage-producers here not as a stabilized form of “content”-based meaning or communication but as decentered, slippery, highly active, mobile, and/or conflicted. Language becomes its own performance “act.” As a recuperative re-embracing of the performance practice embedded in any linguistic utterance, poet’s theater articulates language’s internal conflicts between signfier and signified, and it reconsiders the subject-object binary relations implicitly established within any imagistic and/or spatialized art form. Poet’s theater, particularly as embodied performance text, acts as a performance mirror and critique of these conventional linguistic processes. It does so by calling into question the stability not only of semantic “meaning” but also of human social identity–perceived in Emile Benveniste’s concept of the “I” to “be” only that transitory, unstable linguistic “subject,”4 and in the “performance” of identity that Judith Butler has famously described in gender and queer studies.5
     
    As a formal hybrid of often competing discourses and media, poet’s theater is not a “poem,” nor is it even a series of poems, nor merely a script for a play. Instead, postwar poet’s theater is, for our purposes here, an active performance that is centered on, though not confined to, language. And–crucially–in being performed (by reader, actor, or poet) it performs, and revises linguistic-interpretative value. Poet’s theater thus acts upon the very instability of language enunciated in the work of so many post-structural theorists, from Roland Barthes to Julia Kristeva to Jacques Derrida–those ascribed to “writing,” to “degree zero” in poetic writing, to the “borderline psychosis” that Kristeva, at least, believes has been the experiment of poetic language. Thus, alhough this poet’s theater heartily embraces the imaginary of this odd writing scene / written text, it counters the conventions of what performance studies scholar Dwight Conquergood has called “textocentrism” (151)–that is, the sense of the text as authorized and authoritative, as an enduring document that always gets the last word.
     
    A performance art? A conceptual poetics? Any scripted work performed in a designated space that butts against the more academically recognized, canonized literary theaters? Perhaps, we might conclude, that contemporary American poet’s theater is all of the above. Poet’s theater might be seen as a special category of “post-dramatic theatre,” Hans-Thies Lehmann’s influential term for non-characterological, non-narrative, multi-vocal, frequently multi-mediated, unstable “new” theater that “confirms the not so new insight that there is never a harmonious relationship but rather a perpetual conflict between text and scene” (145). In its eschewal of realistic portrayals of character, scene, and temporality, poet’s theater releases performance from regulation by the drama–even while it enhances the complexities, dissonances, and possibilities of its own play of language, especially as it pertains to the theatrum mundi of everyday life.
     
    The poet’s theater that is the subject of this special issue thus trains its awareness both on theatrical processes and on the production of meaning in everyday life, with theatricalized performance frequently functioning as a kind of social and linguistic laboratory. Most of the essays here also focus on the ways in which the play of language and embodied and/or staged performance work together or in relation to one another. Whether in an epic solo reading of a piece by Ron Silliman on a street corner of San Francisco in the 1970s, or in a post-millennium arts space in multimedia collaboration with a range of artists performing Carla Harryman’s Mirror Play nearly three decades later, the concept of performance writ large–encompassing theatrical, social, discursive, and material enactments, as well as their relationships with one to the other–undergirds the conceptual and post-structural means at the heart of these poet’s theater works.
     
    As Nasser Hussain shows in his article “Performing Ketjak: The Theater of the Observed,” Ron Silliman’s 1978 street corner reading of Ketjak in San Francisco was more than simply an open–a very open–“poetry reading.” It was also language in action and a close cousin to Fluxus-style events and “Happenings” of the 1950s and 60s. Silliman’s solo-voice performance “event” constructed a public viewing of “language performed independently on the stage of everyday experience,” as Hussain writes, and it layered the vanguard’s poetic play upon word form, syntactic parataxis, against the daily world of San Francisco’s Tenderloin district. As the latter became, or becomes in Hussain’s essay, an authentic spatialized public arena in which this theatrical presentation was staged, the event addressed the nature of poetic form, audience makeup, and theatrical reception. In Hussain’s analysis, it also calls into question the real and multiple meanings generated–which is to say, performatively available–within a poetics offered in the public space.
     
    Similarly, Fiona Templeton’s YOU–The City (1988) employs an urban-public venue as spatialized public theatrical arena. In the performance analyzed here, the venue is the crazed, hectic, and somewhat seamy environment that was (in the 1980s and 90s, at the time of its staged production) and sometimes still is New York City’s Times Square. James Sherry’s essay, “The Poetic Theater of Fiona Templeton: An Environmental View,” couples poet Sherry’s own commitment to an “environmental poetics” (as opposed to an “eco-poetics”)–which he suggests is a poetics that is fully and philosophically-structurally engaged with its environmental surroundings, whether urban, natural, or both–with a reading of this “event.” Templeton’s play itself proposes a “client,” rather than an actor and/or an audience, who, in keeping an appointment, begins a tour through the city: inhabiting, observing, and also becoming one with a transitory urban ecosystem. An environmental view, writes Sherry, “[s]ignificantly modifies our engagement with the world,” challenging at some fundamental base our subject-object relations as well as humanity’s Cartesian rather than integrated view of its role in the environment. Sherry reveals the way in which Templeton’s poet’s theater creates a theatrical stage as environment, making poetry in performance a conceptually fluid act with political implications.
     
    Audience activity and experience are under scrutiny in the essay by Heidi R. Bean, who, like Sherry, finds ethical implications in poet’s theater’s structuring of audience relations. In “Carla Harryman’s Non/Representation and the Ethics of Dispersive Performance,” Bean examines recent productions of plays by Carla Harryman, who is commonly associated with what has become known as “Language” writing. Harryman’s Mirror Play (2005) is a direct response to recent U.S. militarization as well as an attempt to rethink social and global relations as they are figured in and by language. One of the play’s goals, Bean writes, is to place “under scrutiny not only the structure of interpretive practices but also the very impulse to interpret.” Bean thus proposes the term “dispersive theater” for thinking about the ways in which postwar poet’s theater such as Harryman’s constructs an interpretive “community” marked, paradoxically, by discontinuity and dispersion. Dispersive theater, as it is conceptualized here, is not simply an interpretive free-for-all but rather an embodiment of the ethical dilemma in the postmodern era–the contradiction, as Geoffrey Galt Harpham puts it, between “How ought one to live?” and “What ought I to do?,” between generalizable norms and individual acts in actual (and unique) situations (26). The result is a theater that not only rejects realist narrative theater’s appeal to public morals, which have become increasingly suspect over the last century, but that also offers itself as a relational paradigm better suited to the present world’s complex interconnectivities.
     
    One assumption shared by the essays in this collection is the view that poet’s theater is, at its basis, a critique and rethinking of language’s complicity in the production and imposition of generalizable norms. In “This Theater Is a Strange Hole: Mac Wellman’s Poetics of Apparence,” Karinne Keithley Syers demonstrates poet-playwright Mac Wellman’s demand, via interpretive impediments and non-naturalistic performance, for openness to unknowingness, or what Syers terms a “hole poetics.” “Instead of finding out once again that incest hurts or that racism is bad,” she explains, “Wellman suggests we allow theater to make us venture into spaces where we don’t already know the answer.” Reading Wellman’s Antigone alongside notions of landscape composition, William James’s writings on consciousness and language processing, and classical Greek theater, Syers argues that Wellman’s theater acts both upon and with audience members, making them aware of the mental leaps common to acts of storytelling, and creating in them feelings for new relations. Thus the traditional sight-oriented model of landscape theater becomes, in Syers’s engagement with Wellman, a language-driven “wilderness expedition quite unrelated to any form of conquest”–a field, a hole, a topographical unknown at the edge of thinking.
     
    Given poet’s theater’s essential hybridity, it is perhaps not surprising that the role–and disciplinary home–of poet’s theater in the academy is in flux. Critical attention to poet’s theater (and indeed poet’s theater as critical activity) has increased in the wake of the rise of both Cultural Studies and Performance Studies. The essays here benefit from this broader range of scholarly attention and make use of production and publication histories, performance analyses, cultural contexts, aesthetic ideologies, and artistic practices, even as they stay close to play texts themselves for what they can tell us about the rhetoric and practice of textuality and performance. In the long-overdue intersection of theater scholarship and poetry criticism created by these four essays, we can also identify a shared pedagogical interest: poet’s theater as an alternative, and often innovative, social-experiential model. This is postwar poet’s theater’s activist character, emerging out of the contemporary notion of performance itself as a critical paradigm. And yet this is only a partial account. There are, no doubt, many more critical approaches to be tried on and histories to be fleshed out via closer attention to postwar poet’s theater. Many of the most active critics of postwar poet’s theater are, in fact, new or emerging scholars whose critical facility with poet’s theater has been enabled by training that is increasingly interdisciplinary. We therefore see this collection as an opening, one that perhaps could only become apparent in this critical junction, and we look forward to both a broadening and a deepening of poet’s theater as a space of, and catalyst for, critical activity.
     

    Heidi R. Bean is Assistant Professor of English at Bridgewater State University. She is the co-editor of Poetry after Cultural Studies, an anthology of critical essays forthcoming from the University of Iowa Press. Her essays, reviews, and interviews related to the intersections of theater, performance, and poetry have appeared in Text and Performance Quarterly, Theatre Journal, The Iowa Review Web, and Cultural Critique. This essay is taken from her current project on the cultural politics of American poetic theater since the 1960s.
     

     

    Laura Hinton is the author of a poetry book, Sisyphus My Love (To Record a Dream in a Bathtub) (BlazeVox Books), and a critical book, The Perverse Gaze of Sympathy: Sadomasochistic Sentiments from Clarissa to Rescue 911 (SUNY Press). She is the co-editor of We Who Love to Be Astonished: Experimental Women’s Writing and Performance Poetics (University of Alabama Press). Her critical essays, poet interviews, and reviews have appeared in Contemporary Literature, Postmodern Culture, Textual Practice, Framework, Women’s Studies, Rain Taxi, Jacket, The Journal of the Academy of American Poets, among other journals and collections. Her poetry has appeared in anthologies and journals including Feminist Studies, How2, and Nth Position, and she has edited several critical article collections for How2, one of which was on the writings of Leslie Scalapino.
     
    Hinton edits a chapbooks series for Mermaid Tenement Press and publishes reviews on the performance and hybrid arts in New York City on her web log, Chant de la Sirene (chantdelasirene.com). A Professor of English at the City College of New York, Professor Hinton teaches contemporary literature, film, and feminist theory, and also coordinates the InterRUPTions experimental-writers reading series.
     

     

     

    Notes

     

     

     

    The authors gratefully thank Eyal Amiran, Sarah Bay-Cheng, Maria Damon, and two anonymous reviewers for wise remarks and helpful suggestions at various stages in the construction of this collection.
     

    1. Two outstanding volumes exemplify this recent emphasis on sound in poetics theory: Charles Bernstein’s (ed.) Close Listening: Poetry and the Performed Word, and Adelaide Morris’s (ed.) Sound States: Innovative Poetics and Acoustical Technologies. The essays collected in these volumes attempt to theorize a poetry in performance, if not a scripted form of “poet’s theater” that is the subject of our PMC essays. Bernstein’s Close Listening examines, for example, the “sense” created through sound patterns that sustain harmony or noise, multi-vocality and polyphony, as well as the “aural ellipsis”—the spatialized absence of sound—generated in what Nick Piombino calls “the nature of listening,” which opens up the transitional space of play discussed by D.W. Winnicott in the context of both child’s play and adult art activity. One notable example of the focus not only on sound but on vision in poetic performance is Johanna Drucker’s “Visual Performance of the Poetic Text” (Bernstein 131-161), which examines visual-spatiality in poetry on the visual page.
     

    Morris’s Sound States, similarly—as the title clues us—focuses on poetry’s articulation of sound, mostly in the context of modern technologies. It is interested in radio and audio recordings, and in music, particularly jazz. This volume is notably attuned to ethnic diversity, including such pieces as Nathaniel Mackey’s “Cante Moro” and Fred Moten’s “Sound in Florescence” (on jazz artist Cecil Taylor, who has influenced many poets, like Bruce Andrews, for instance). It also extends the geopolitical coverage of “American” poetry to the Caribbean, in Loretta Collin’s piece on sound performance in the Rastafari reggae tradition.

     

    2. A related but discontinuous San Francisco Poets Theater was founded in 2000 by poet and playwright Kevin Killian, and continues to the present.

     
    3. See Andreas Huyssen’s After the Great Divide for this discussion of different modernisms.

     

     
    4. See, for example, Emile’s Benveniste’s “Subjectivity in Language,” in his Problems in General Linguistics.

     

     
    5. See, for example, Judith Butler’s first book on this subject, Gender Trouble: Feminisms and the Subversion of Identity. Butler’s notion of “performativity,” drawn from political and ethical philosophy and phenomenology, is central to our extended notion here of “performance,” particularly as it becomes a practice undergirding social relations and everyday life.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Austin, J.L. How to Do Things with Words: the William James lectures delivered at Harvard University. Ed. J.O. Urmson. Oxford: Clarendon, 1962. Print.
    • Bay-Cheng, Sarah, and Barbara Cole, eds. Poets at Play: An Anthology of Modernist Drama. Selinsgrove: Susquehanna UP, 2010. Print.
    • Benveniste, Emile. Problems in General Linguistics. Trans. Mary Elizabeth Meek. Coral Gables: U of Miami P, 1971. Print.
    • Bernstein, Charles, ed. Close Listening: Poetry and the Performed Word. New York: Oxford UP, 1998. Print.
    • Bottoms, Stephen J. Playing Underground: A Critical History of the 1960s Off-Off-Broadway Movement. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 2005. Print.
    • Butler, Judith. Gender Trouble: Feminisms and the Subversion of Identity. New York: Routledge, 1990. Print.
    • Conquergood, Dwight. “Performance Studies: Interventions and Radical Research.” The Drama Review 46.2 (Summer 2002): 145-156. Print.
    • Fischer-Lichte, Erika. “The Avant-Garde and the Semiotics of the Antitextual Gesture.” Trans. James M. Harding. Contours of the Theatrical Avant-Garde: Performance and Textuality. Ed. James M. Harding. Ann Arbor: U Michigan P, 2000: 79-95. Print.
    • Goffman, Erving. The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life. New York: Anchor Books, 1959. Print.
    • Harpham, Geoffrey Galt. Shadows of Ethics: Criticism and the Just Society. Durham: Duke UP, 1999. Print.
    • Hejinian, Lyn. “Figuring Out.” How2 1.7 (Spring 2002). Web.
    • Huyssen, Andreas. After the Great Divide: Modernism, Mass Culture, Postmodernism. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1986. Print.
    • Killian, Kevin and David Brazil, eds. The Kenning Anthology of Poets Theater, 1945-1985. Chicago: Kenning Editions, 2010. Print.
    • Lehmann, Hans-Thies. Postdramatic Theatre. Trans. Karen Jürs-Munby. New York: Routledge, 2006. Print.
    • Morris, Adelaide, ed. Sound States: Innovative Poetics and Acoustical Technologies. Chapel Hill: U of North Carolina P, 1997. Print.
    • Puchner, Martin. Stage Fright: Modernism, Anti-Theatricality, and Drama. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 2002. Print.
    • Walker, Julia A. “Why Performance? Why Now? Textuality and the Rearticulation of Human Presence.” The Yale Journal of Criticism 16.1 (2003): 149-175. Print.

     

  • Notes on Contributors

    David Banash is an Associate Professor of English at Western Illinois University, where he teaches courses in contemporary literature, film, and popular culture. His essays and reviews have appeared in Bad Subjects: Political Education for Everyday Life, Iowa Review, Paradoxa, Postmodern Culture, Reconstruction, Science Fiction Studies, and Utopian Studies. He is currently at work on a book investigating collage and media technologies in twentieth-century culture.

     
    Brandon Brown is from Kansas City, Missouri and has lived in San Francisco since 1998. His first two books are forthcoming: The Persians By Aeschylus (Displaced) and The Poems Of Gaius Valerius Catullus (Krupskaya). These two works, along with a new and unpublished piece C Baudelaire Le Vampire 11,000% Slower, are conceptual translations that privilege the visibility of the translator. They are, in part, the material product of a decade-long performance project centered around language acquisition (currently including Latin, Greek, Sanskrit, and Arabic). He has also published several chapbooks, including Memoirs Of My Nervous Illness (Cy Press), 908-1078 (Transmission), and Wondrous Things I Have Seen (Mitsvah Chaps). His work has also appeared in journals, including War and Peace, Brooklyn Rail, Supermachine, and Mrs. Maybe. In 2004-05 he co-curated the Performance Writing series at New Langton Arts and in 2008-09 the New Reading Series at 21 Grand at 21 Grand. He has been blogger in residence for the Poetry Project and the San Francisco Museum of Modern Art. He also publishes small press chapbooks under the imprint OMG!

     

     
    Jian Chen is Assistant Professor/Faculty Fellow in the Gallatin School of Individualized Study at New York University, under the auspices of the NYU Postdoctoral and Transition Program for Academic Diversity. Chen’s current research explores new demands made on cultural consumption, representation, and politics, by the transnational circulation of images of sexual, gender, and racial flexibility. Chen’s work brings into conversation the areas of queer and transgender critique; film, new media, and visual cultures; Asian diasporas; and comparative race studies.

     

     
    Diane Enns is Associate Professor of Philosophy and Peace Studies at McMaster University, Hamilton, Canada. She is the author of The Violence of Victimhood (forthcoming, Penn State) and Speaking of Freedom: Philosophy, Politics and the Struggle for Liberation (Stanford, 2007). Her current project concerns justice and trauma, with a focus on the Western Balkans.

     

     
    David Ensminger is an Instructor of English, Humanities, and Folklore at Lee College in Baytown, Texas. He completed his M.S. in the Folklore Program at the University of Oregon and his M.A. in Creative Writing at City College of New York City. His study of punk street art and Do-It-Yourself culture, Visual Vitriol: The Art and Subcultures of the Punk and Hardcore Generations, is slated for July 2011 release by the University of Mississippi. His work has recently appeared in the Journal of Popular Music Studies and M/C Journal (Australia), and he contributes regularly to the Houston Press, Maximum Rock’n’Roll, Popmatters, and Trust (Germany). As a longtime fanzine editor, flyer artist, and drummer as well, he has archived punk history, including in his blog documenting African American punk rock productions: http://blackpunkarchive.wordpress.com.

     

     
    Judith Goldman is a Harper Schmidt fellow and collegiate assistant professor at the University of Chicago, teaching in the arts humanities core and in creative writing. She is the author of Vocoder (Roof 2001), DeathStar/rico-chet (O Books 2006), “the dispossessions” (atticus/finch 2009), and l.b.; or, catenaries (forthcoming, Krupskaya 2011). She co-edited the annual journal War and Peace with Leslie Scalapino from 2005-2009. Currently, she is working on mixing composed recorded sound and live sound, poet’s theater and other performance work, and multi-media works.

     

     
    Patricia MacCormack is Reader in English, Communication, Film and Media at Anglia Ruskin University, Cambridge. She is the author of articles and chapters on Continental Philosophy, especially Guattari, Serres, Irigaray, and Blanchot, posthuman theory, queer and perversion theory, animal rights, body modification and extreme horror film. Her work includes “Unnatural Alliances” (Deleuze and Queer Theory), “The Great Ephemeral Tattooed Skin” (Body and Society), “Necrosexuality” (Queering the Non-Human), “Inhuman Ecstasy” (Angelaki), “Becoming-Vulva” (New Formations), “Cinemasochism” (Afterimage) and “Vitalistic Feminethics” (Deleuze and Law). She is the author of Cinesexuality (Ashgate 2008) and co-editor of The Schizoanalysis of Cinema (Continuum 2008). She is currently writing on posthuman ethics.

     

     
    Petar Ramadanovic is Associate Professor of English at the University of New Hampshire, Durham. He is the author of Forgetting Futures and numerous articles. The present essay is a part of his new project, a critique of post-structuralism.

     

     
    Judith Roof is the author of The Poetics of DNA (Minnesota 2007) and books on narrative and cultural theory, sexuality, and cinema. She is William Shakespeare Chair in English at Rice University.

     

     
    Lissa Skitolsky is an Assistant Professor at Susquehanna University. Her published work includes essays on Giorgio Agamben, the course of Holocaust studies, the “war against terror,” and biopolitics. Her articles have appeared in International Studies in Philosophy, Lessons and Legacies, and Shofar: An Interdisciplinary Journal of Jewish Studies, among others.

     

     
    Brian Wall is Assistant Professor of Film Theory in the Cinema Department at Binghamton University. His “‘Jackie Treehorn treats objects like women!’: Two Types of Fetishism in The Big Lebowski” appeared in Camera Obscura 69 (2008); he has also published on Beckett, Bataille and Buffy the Vampire Slayer. He is writing a book on Adorno and film theory, to be entitled The Fingerprint of Spirit.
     
  • “That’s just, like, your opinion, man”: Irony, Abiding, Achievement, and Lebowski

    Brian Wall (bio)
    Binghamton University
    bwall@binghamton.edu

    Edward P. Comentale and Aaron Jaffe, eds. The Year’s Work in Lebowski Studies. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 2009. Print.
     
    The terms in which the reception of The Year’s Work in Lebowski Studies played out in the comments to Dave Itzkoff’s New York Times review in December of 2010 rehearsed a number of the familiar questions that have long plagued academic studies of popular culture: What would it mean to take mass culture seriously? What would be left after refusing the fan’s or the cult’s uncritical enthusiasm and the elite’s dismissal? Or, to put it rather differently, who is the audience for a collection like this? While many fans applauded the editors’ and contributors’ desire to engage with everything Dude, there were as many or more who substantially resented someone taking their fun seriously (thought apparently being the enemy of pleasure). And on the still more reactionary side, this volume’s very existence was cited, variously, as evidence of the decline of the university as an institution, of the death yet again of the canon of seemingly self-evidently great works, and as evidence of the silliness if not sheer irrelevance of the academic study of popular culture. This last seems particularly germane, in so far as the Times itself regularly offers its own confidently commonsensical, ideology-free perspective by noting the daft pursuits of the humanities professoriate. The review, while guardedly sympathetic, continues that tendency toward condescension perhaps most egregiously manifested in Jonathan Kandell’s shameful obituary of Jacques Derrida in 2004.
     
    These sorts of reception suggest some of the potential pitfalls the editors of any collection about a cult object must navigate: a great deal of fan culture depends upon iterability, repetition and citation, and thus opposes academic analysis; and certain conservative ideas of what constitutes the “proper” object of academic study exclude the mass cultural object by fiat.1 Commendably, The Year’s Work stakes out a variety of other possible positions, and, at its best, imagines a necessary rapprochement between academics—who are also always already fans—and a portion of the cult audience who look to deepen their pleasure. For the latter, The Year’s Work seems to fit neatly alongside the seemingly endless “Philosophy and –” collections that constitute the bulk of the philosophy section at my big box bookstore, collections whose ubiquity suggests to me that someone needs to write a Philosophy and “Philosophy and” book. For the former, however, the Coen brothers’ film presents a challenge that calls for the most delicate judgment: as both fans and scholars, academics here are forced to countenance the conflicting allegiances of immersion and distance. Some scholars here, seeking to respond to the Dude on his own terms, try to overcome this conflict with the ambivalent aid of irony, while others prefer the detachment of a more traditional academic perspective. Indeed, the volume’s own title signals the extent to which irony is here a privileged form of address.
     
    Ultimately, to take The Big Lebowski seriously would be to refuse or go beyond the fan’s pleasures of citation in favor of elaborating a different context, moreover one that might, very explicitly, threaten to subsume the film itself. In order to deal with this deadlock, the editors have chosen, in an eloquent and spirited introduction, to cast academics as over-achievers, which is to say as a special case and fraction of the Achievers, the Lebowski cult’s preferred self-nomination. Such a term neatly signals both identity and difference, the academic’s fannishness and her intellectual “excess.”2 There will be, then, a third term to make a constellation of the binaries of “to achieve” and “to abide”: to over-achieve, to reach too far, to try too hard, to do too much. But as the introduction proceeds, it spells out another image of what it might mean to “work” on Lebowski, now in terms of the joint:
     

     

    The film demands to be seen with bleary eyes, and this Year’s Work is offered in this vein—laid-back, easy-going, comfortably dead-beat, slack.… Yes, the experience of the film—the experience of our work—focuses not on codes, on the cracking of themes and allusions, but on the process of ideation itself, on an imaginative openness that never ceases to fail to focus into form.
     

    (6-7)

     

    To study the Dude, then, one must imitate the Dude; but this mimetic strategy parallels and extends the stance of the cult fan, as academic labor here risks relaxing into stoned riffing, its Promethean overachieving relaxing into the aleatory creation and dissipation of ideas, which dissolve into blue smoke. Such a spirit also implies a dangerous—but very Dude-like—wager, and one, unfortunately, that some are fated to lose: namely, that the loser wins (pace the Big Lebowski‘s claim that “The bums will always lose!” as the Dude leaves with a rug). This wager also implies that a mimesis of the film’s logic-which-is-not-one can better serve our encounter than more traditional academic discourse. In a proper and laudably utopian fashion, evocative of Adorno’s gloss on mimesis, the wager implies that a toke from the Dude’s joint might limber up and break down ossified scholarly postures, the reification of academic subject and cultural object, and the gulf between ivory tower dweller and mass cultural fan.

     
    But to imitate the Dude seems also to risk merely repeating him, quoting him, and citing him—that is, merely reaffirming the logic of postmodern pastiche (inarguably structural to the film), whose worrying political ambivalences and instabilities have been extensively detailed by Jameson, Hutcheon, and many others. An imitation of the Dude might produce new ideas about the film and about mass culture as such, or it might just end up uncritically reaffirming and reifying the commodity culture of which the film is at once an expression, a symptom, and a critique.
     
    The modesty of many of the claims made in this anthology and the explicit and implicit allegiance demonstrated by many of the authors—and by the editors—to the film’s fan base and/or cult status authorize us to ask about the implicit—and occasionally, explicit—valuation of intellectual labor and characterization of the intellectual himself. The most successful contributions here thematize this dilemma to a certain degree; but just as many either ignore it as a problem, or more troublingly reject scholarly protocols outright, and proffer instead something much more stoned, ironic, and/or fannish. There is relatively little evidence here of the attitude that characterized postcolonial studies or even cultural studies in their early days, namely the agonizing self-consciousness of the intellectual’s position in relation to his object. These fields demonstrated a rigorous and deeply felt sense of conflict between one’s various group allegiances and one’s subjectivity, a well-nigh Sartrean agon that refused to allow the collapse of tensions constituted by an intellectual distance, on the one hand, and class, ethnic, group, and/or gender allegiances, on the other hand. I would argue that such a tension is evidence of a crucial awareness of history—history of the discipline, of the medium, and also of the mode of production itself. Without this tension, without an explicit awareness of the necessary distance that obtains in the academic’s relation to culture, the resulting efforts here risk collapsing into so many gestures of resignation—or worse, of a self-loathing anti-intellectualism. In such a scenario, populism, itself an intellectual and ideological construct, affords academics an opportunity to recite the lines they love—”Nice marmot” or “I can get you a toe!”—and wear jellies while drinking White Russians, but do so ironically. The text persists only as culinary and as a commodity, and intellectual labor becomes indistinguishable from consumption.
     
    Against this problematic and pervasive irony, it might be worth considering another rhetorical mode whose very substance is also constituted by oppositions and contradictions of all sorts—that is, dialectics. Adorno writes that “the very opposition between knowledge which penetrates from without and that which bores from within becomes suspect to the dialectical method, which sees in it a symptom of precisely that reification which the dialectic is obliged to accuse” (209). From this perspective, the opposition between fan and scholar itself must be submitted to scrutiny, rather than merely being ironically affirmed and rehearsed. Perhaps the contributions the volume makes to this particular problem are its most valuable, and the ones with the greatest implications for the study of popular culture and the humanities: at its best, The Year’s Work values the fan’s immanent, molecular knowledge of the film and of its attendant culture as well as the academic’s more molar perspective, at the same time that it reveals the limits of both the fan’s fetishism and the scholar’s mandarinism. What resolves itself fitfully here, in glimpses and beyond irony, is a view of culture as a totality—not the alienating totality of global capital and the commodity, but a totality in which the intellectual and the affective, modernism and mass culture, or, if you prefer, achieving and abiding are no longer irredeemably opposed.
     
    To respond to The Big Lebowski ironically, then, may in a sense to be true to it—but it would also leave intact and unquestioned the troublesome opposition between fan and scholar, an opposition that the best of these contributions complicate. The most valuable and provocative contributions here are more dialectical than ironic—which is not to say humorless. With more than twenty contributions, the volume cannot be considered in its entirety here, so I single out a number of its exemplary essays.
     
    David Martin-Jones offers one of the most challenging, and, in a very un-Dude-like manner, articulate explorations of the film. His “No Literal Connection: Images of Mass Commodification, U.S. Militarism and the Oil Industry in The Big Lebowski” soberingly presents the film as a work of “national cinema,” focusing on “the way that U.S. foreign policy is determined by Fordism, the automobile, and the need for oil, as it is represented in the film” (204). The political subtext of the film, Martin-Jones persuasively argues, has been submitted to a kind of dream-work, re-figured under a range of well-documented generic citations and allusions that have too often been dismissed as mere postmodern play. Put another way, there is “no literal connection” between the official narrative of the film and the political subtext Martin-Jones unearths—but rather a figural one that underwrites the comedy, and proves to be its condition of possibility. He begins by examining the confluence, in the opening sequence of the film, of national expansion towards the frontier—an expansion that reaches its terminus in Los Angeles—and American intervention in the Persian Gulf: the latter extends the former, and not just its vector, but its imbrication with a conception of mobile people and capital that is realized in the automobile—which needs oil. Thus the film’s striking image of Saddam Hussein standing before a near-infinite tower of bowling shoes becomes a condensation of American foreign policy and the demands of Fordist production, which can tolerate no limits and constantly requires new markets. Even architectural style and bowling itself then come to speak of an economy determined by automobility, mass production, and the commodification of leisure, all of which depend upon and are guaranteed by American foreign policy. But then, keeping the introduction and spirit of the Dude in mind, are we being too serious? Over-achievers? It’s a risk I’ll take in order to appreciate Martin-Jones’s fine essay, even though he betrays slackness, pastiche, repetition and citation–or rather precisely because he does: because this essay explicitly recognizes how leisure, play, entertainment, film, fun, fans, and cults absolutely depend upon material and economic structures and upon networks of circulation and exchange; and because this essay implicitly remains faithful to a notion of critical intellectual labor as both taking place at an impossible distance from and absolutely entangled within the culture and the problematics it inherits.
     
    In contrast, the editor Edward Comentale’s modestly titled “‘I’ll Keep Rolling Along’: Some Notes on Singing Cowboys and Bowling Alleys in The Big Lebowski,” ambles along in an appropriately tumbleweed-like fashion, modestly concealing its argument beneath an easy style. Beginning as a meditation on the Western and its generic function in the film, Comentale’s essay moves to a fascinating discussion of Gene Autry and the commodification of the cowboy as style. Both moves serve to develop a strong argument regarding the film’s deployment of gesture: “for if cinema has proven capable of responding to modernity, and particularly to the loss of coherent experience that accompanied the closing of the frontier, it responds most significantly through its emphatic use of gesture” (229). This is a potent and provocative claim, asserting not simply the ways in which the film points back to the directors’ hand, but the extent to which the film and even the Coens’ oeuvre presents us with a virtual anthology of gesture. Here, gesture is no longer construed as expressive, but is instead mute, frustrated, excessive, and hermetic. As such, “in Lebowski, while many gestures arise out of communicative failure, they also—following Agamben—expose communicability in its purest form” (245). Bowling, therefore, while testifying to the exhaustion and emptiness of the public sphere, also includes, inevitably, this gestural surplus: “Here, gesticulating gracefully on the last frontier, the film loses its voice and makes us feel something more than alienation, something other than violence” (250).
     
    The value of such a claim seems more than a little belied by Comentale’s slacker title, which needlessly ironizes his essay’s rich content. The title also indicates the extent to which, after careful and rewarding elaboration, the essay demurs from expanding upon what this excess that inhabits or characterizes the gesture actually is: does it have a politics? an erotics? Is it a form or a content? The implication here would seem to be that this gestural excess that persists after the impoverishment of various other communicative regimes and after the dissolution of an authentic public sphere might retain some critical or even utopian dimension itself, but the essay’s self-description as “some notes” seems to preclude prospective conclusions. It’s hard not to feel some frustration here, and to wonder if too strict a fidelity to the Dude’s own ethos or to the film’s self-ironizing strategies might be responsible.
     
    Surprisingly, at one juncture where the reader might expect the collection to be at its most ironic—that is, in Joshua Kates’s “The Big Lebowski and Paul de Man: Historicizing Irony and Ironizing Historicism”—irony, even “hyperirony,” is everywhere evoked and thematized, but nowhere embodied. This strikes the reader as oddly exceptional, given the film’s own ironic tendencies, the directors’ much-discussed love of the ironic mode, and the essay’s own consideration of irony in de Man’s thought and style. But for Kates, this is the effect of history, or rather the way in which irony troubles certain construals of history and announces what we have come to call the postmodern, which is “a pause or gap in the comprehension of history not simply explicable through the workings of history itself” (172). The central ironies, then, that the essay details devolve from de Man’s legacy, which emerges and is embraced at a historical point at which the various utopian agents and agendas in the 60s are eclipsed—it lives on past its moment and as a response to its moment, like the Dude. I wonder, though, if the notion of periodization and the linear conception of history, both of which make up part of Kates’s target here, are, ironically, also well past their “best before” date—does anyone believe in them anymore? Even or except ironically?
     
    Perhaps the collection’s best realization of its untraditional mode and aims is to be found in Judith Roof’s “Size Matters,” which investigates—and enacts—the film’s fluid economies of gender and exchange:
     

    The Big Lebowski is governed by an economy of fluid exchange or the exchange of fluids, which in the end is no exchange at all. This fluid economy moves in all directions simultaneously, producing layerings, erosions, vacuums, dissolutions, and flows that render structure and unidirectional cause/effect irrelevant, or, in contrast with marked efforts at organization (such as genre), at least shows their futility.
     

    (412-13)

     

    Genre, exchange, causality, and conception—all exemplary of an unsustainable and phallic regime of “bigness”—are raised as possibilities in the film only to be thwarted, according to Roof’s stunning gloss, in favor of a liquid and matrixial femininity that is embodied in Maude (but also in White Russians). And as the film plays, so too does Roof’s thought and prose, not in imitation of the film’s style, but, pointedly, in imitation of its spirit. Can I say that the Dude would dig her style? Precisely because it is not a replica of his own?

     
    The problems of irony, quotation, and play also arise in Thomas Byers’s contribution, “Found Document: The Stranger’s Commentary, and a Note on His Method,” but in contrast to Roof’s entry, Byers aims to push the film’s logic of pastiche as far as it might go. While the substance of the essay offers some valuable considerations of Jeff Bridges’s role, and locates his performance on a continuum with the Cary Grant of screwball comedy (but of Hitchcock too), the opening pages, with their arch disavowal and simultaneous defense of pastiche, both set the stage for and render redundant what is to follow. Byers writes:
     

    The Other Stranger’s discourse may be a form of what I would call “disseminated” parody, in which there is no single target, and the satiric and comic effects arise at any given moment from the juxtaposition of two equally appreciated and equally critiqued discourses. Thus, when the Other Stranger “does” a version of academic cultural studies in his Hollywood Western voice, the reader may smile both at the expense of and in appreciation of both discourses.
     

    (190)

     

    Here’s an example: “Now, that may seem as obvious as a heifer in a sheep-herd, but here’s the thing; we might think we’re thinkin’ about the sixties, or the forties, or the seventies, but most likely when we do, we’re thinkin’ about the picture shows at all them times” (200). Byers channels the Stranger channeling Fredric Jameson; and while the point is properly Jamesonian, reminding us of how history always comes to us in a framed and mediated form, it occurs to me that this might not be the unity of theory and practice—or the theory as practice—for which Jameson strives. Indeed, “disseminated parody” seems indistinguishable from irony, which would seem to preclude the kinds of appreciation Byers seeks to produce. Or if we agree it is parody, then far from being “disseminating,” it risks trivializing Jameson and condescending to the Stranger, who enjoys a privileged relationship to the film’s narrative, being both outside and inside of it. It undermines the very Jamesonian ideas that Byers might well want to preserve, by abstracting them from Jameson’s rigorous and necessarily dialectical prose and inserting them into this new context, a context that parodies the same style that birthed the ideas to begin with. Byers’s parody makes the experience a zero-sum game, one which negates more than it complicates the ideas and discourses it mobilizes, and one that threatens to reaffirm the profound ambiguity that informs many parts of this collection: can the logic and style of irony, parody, and pastiche, a logic and style so prevalent in the film and in its reception, return scholarly dividends?

     
    Perhaps one of the best object-lessons in this regard comes from the collection’s other editor, Aaron Jaffe, whose essay “Brunswick = Fluxus” “considers the cultural meaning of ‘wood’ in The Big Lebowski” (427). While the modesty of such a thesis initially suggests “underachiever,” Jaffe has some instructive and valuable surprises in store for the reader: far from being a mere catalog of representations, Jaffe’s playful contribution works from the outset to estrange rather than ironize the oppositions of nature and culture, self and other, the living and the dead, interior and exterior, concrete and plastic and, finally, Brunswick and Fluxus, which stand for commodity culture and the avant-garde, respectively. Spiritually akin to Roof’s fluid contribution, Jaffe’s undoes the solidity of wood, revealing it as part of the structural support of a “masculinist, genealogical substrate implicit in the prevailing conceptions of time and space” (439). Wood, whether thought of as bowling surface or result of Logjammin’, comes to attest to its own plasticity, which then entails, through Jaffe’s careful elaboration, the uprooting of dead wood: debt, exchange, patrimony and patronymics. Jaffe’s own thought displays an enviable plasticity, in the best sense of the term.
     
    More essays in this collection deserve attention. But I end with the penultimate contribution, Jonathan Elmer’s persuasively Heideggerian “Enduring and Abiding.” Elmer argues that the film is essentially underdetermined, offering itself up to a vast and contradictory variety of modes of consumption, interpretation, and enjoyment. The Dude, in his slackness, his paunchiness, and his lack of ambition, embodies this sheer potential, as glossed in Agamben’s “Bartleby” essay: Elmer writes, “The Dude embodies potentia, he is always employable because he is never employed—merely abiding” (454). “The Dude abides,” the Stranger tells us in the film’s final moments, adding, “I don’t know about you, but I take comfort in that. It’s good knowin’ he’s out there, the Dude, takin’ her easy for all us sinners.” In this context, perhaps the lesson of not only Elmer’s elegant essay but of the collection’s varied offerings is that we are the sinners because we cannot simply abide and we cannot let this film abide. For the Dude, abiding is an achievement—as it is not for all us sinners who see abiding and achieving as opposed, who must achieve to abide, and who, finally, must achieve to overcome the contradiction between achieving and abiding. Those contributions that work at overcoming the conflict between work and play, rather than ironizing it, are the ones, finally, that most keep faith with the Dude.
     

    Brian Wall is Assistant Professor of Film Theory in the Cinema Department at Binghamton University. His “‘Jackie Treehorn treats objects like women!’: Two Types of Fetishism in The Big Lebowski” appeared in Camera Obscura 69 (2008); he has also published on Beckett, Bataille and Buffy the Vampire Slayer. He is writing a book on Adorno and film theory, to be entitled The Fingerprint of Spirit.
     

    Notes

     
    1. As Barbara Klinger has cogently and pointedly argued in the context of Lebowski, the participation, quotation, and repetition that largely characterizes the audience’s relation to cult film cannot be thought of as uncritically empowering to its fans or at a remove from the production and circulation of more traditional Hollywood products:
     

     

    Given the aftermarket’s vitality, the contemporary Hollywood cult film is not a thing apart. Certain species of cult cinema are not discontinuous from dominant industry or social practices; instead they represent continuity with, even a shining realization of, the dynamics of media circulation today. In this sense, cult is a logical extension of replay culture: it achieves the kind of penetration into viewers’ ‘hearts and minds’ that media convergence and multi-windowed distribution promote; cultish viewing, in turn, represents a particularly dedicated and insistent pursuit of media inspired by replay.
     

    (19)

     

    2. But maybe we’ll have to say “him,” because a quick scan of the table of contents—with its overwhelmingly masculine orientation, but not monopoly—invites us to wonder if the Dude’s joint is mostly a dude’s joint. To register this I have therefore chosen to use the masculine pronoun throughout.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Adorno, Theodor. “Cultural Criticism and Society.” The Adorno Reader. Ed. Brian O’Connor. Oxford: Blackwell, 2000. 195-210. Print.
    • Agamben, Giorgio. “Bartleby, or On Contingency.” Potentialities: Collected Essays in Philosophy. Trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999. 243-71. Print.
    • Iztkoff, Dave. “Lebowski Studies 101: At Least It’s an Ethos.” Rev. of The Year’s Work in Lebowski Studies, ed. Edward P. Comentale and Aaron Jaffe. New York Times 30 Dec. 2009. Web. 13 Apr. 2010.
    • Kandell, Jonathan. “Jacques Derrida, Abstruse Theorist, Dies at 74.” New York Times 10 Oct. 2004. Web. 20 Apr. 2010.
    • Klinger, Barbara. “Becoming Cult: The Big Lebowski, Replay Culture and Male Fans.” Screen 51.1 (2010): 1-20. Print.

     

  • Recollecting Violence: Michael Rothberg’s Multidirectional Memory

    Lissa Skitolsky (bio)
    Susquehanna University
    skitolsky@susqu.edu

    Michael Rothberg, Multidirectional Memory: Remembering the Holocaust in the Age of Decolonization. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2009.
     

     

    In defending uniqueness, I am not simultaneously endorsing the injudicious claim that the Holocaust is more evil than alternative occurrences of extensive and systematic persecution, organized violence, and mass death. The character of the uniqueness that I am prepared to champion is not tied to a scale, a hierarchy, of evil.
     

    –Steven Katz, The Holocaust in Historical Context, Volume I

     

    The aim is to go beyond the simple comparative history of different genocidal phenomena, which has characterized much of the political science scholarship, and to look at interrelations between cases of genocide and the polities that perpetrate genocide.

    –Donald Bloxham, The Final Solution: A Genocide

     
    The interdisciplinary field of Holocaust studies has always been conceptually isolated from postcolonial and African American studies, due in no small part to the rhetoric of “uniqueness” that, as Michael Rothberg points out in Multidirectional Memory: Remembering the Holocaust in the Age of Decolonization, has unduly limited the expression of collective memory to a competitive, zero-sum logic in which various victim groups fight for recognition. Although those who propound this rhetoric often follow Steven Katz in claiming that the “uniqueness” of the Holocaust need not lead to a hierarchy of suffering or evil, Rothberg suggests that on the terrain of collective memory, one cannot easily separate claims of some special historical uniqueness from claims of some special historical victimization. And these claims have both ossified the scholarly boundaries erected between disciplines that focus on distinct sites of violence and, according to Rothberg, obscured the actual nature of collective memory, political violence, and traumatic experience.
     
    In contrast to Daniel Lévy and Natan Sznaider in The Holocaust and Memory in the Global Age (2006), Rothberg is not so much concerned with the sudden cosmopolitization of Holocaust memory as with the fact that the Holocaust has always served as a catalyst for other types of traumatic memories. The transnational, intercultural relation between these memories and memories of the Shoah lays bare an alternative model for remembrance and the politics of the public sphere.
     
    Multidirectional Memory serves as the psycho-cultural counterpart to Donald Bloxham’s recent book, The Final Solution: A Genocide (2009), insofar as Rothberg explains how comparative genocide is even possible; that is, he provides a model of memory that allows us to understand how we can imagine different sites of violence together without reducing them to either the same type of suffering or to utterly separate events. The first sort of reduction leads to the “universalization” of the Holocaust and provokes skepticism about the emerging field of comparative genocide, while the second sort often leads to what Rothberg calls “an ugly contest of comparative victimization” (7) and a competition over what appear to be scarce resources, such as land for memorials. In this sense, comparative history has been thwarted by the model of “competitive memory” that, in the case of the Holocaust, is supported by the rhetoric of uniqueness. The development of Holocaust memory is the central example of the sort of “multidirectional memory” that Rothberg presents, and he uncovers a history of art and scholarship that acts as a sort of counter-tradition to the more orthodox rendition of this development. For he unearths texts that examine the connections and interactions between Nazi Germany, slavery, colonialism, and decolonization in a way that illuminates the revelatory and meaningful nature of otherwise seemingly accidental and arbitrary historical juxtapositions. Throughout his book, Rothberg skillfully makes use of a variety of interdisciplinary sources (primarily from the 1950s and 1960s) to chart the alternative terrain of multidirectional memory that has emerged in the wake of the Holocaust.
     
    For example, Rothberg’s novel reading of the correlation between Nazi ideology and colonialism as first articulated by Hannah Arendt and Aimé Césaire demonstrates that productive lines of thought can emerge from this sort of juxtaposition, even though this reading also shows that making such juxtapositions has its limits. In this case, his analysis reveals how Arendt’s multidirectional approach to the question of totalitarianism was still hampered by her lingering Eurocentrism, while Césaire doesn’t quite grant the Holocaust the specificity that it obviously deserves. However, when disparate discourses on race, identity, suffering, and genocide collide in these texts, we see an appreciation for diverse forms of suffering and the production of new lines of thought on violence and trauma. In the cases of Arendt and Césaire, Rothberg demonstrates that their invocation of the “boomerang” effect between colonialism and Nazism neither reduces one to the other nor isolates their historical emergences. Instead, it represents a sophisticated effort to link traumas according to their psychoanalytic and historical aftershocks. For Rothberg, “multidirectionality” names a type of logic and serves as a theory of memory and political violence, both of which are distorted by a linear view of time and unidirectional thinking. Further, the rhetoric of uniqueness (and the competitive memory to which it gives rise) has, to some extent, further distorted our understanding of the politics of memory insofar as it perceives the public as a contested space where one collective memory of violence trumps another. Instead, Rothberg insists that collective memories cannot simply be associated with discrete identities, nor is it the case that they are formed in isolation from one another.
     
    Rothberg’s theory of “mutidirectional memory” is descriptive insofar as he claims to explain one way in which collective memory actually works. His theory is prescriptive insofar as he claims that we ought to recognize the power of this memory to move us beyond the zero-sum game of competitive collective memory. Such an effort can lead towards new forms of solidarity among traumatized groups and new visions of justice. His central evidence for this claim is the way in which the development of Holocaust memory coincided with (and indeed, provoked) political resistance during the French-Algerian war. In his brilliant analysis of Jean Rouch and Edgar Morin’s film Chronicle of a Summer (1961) and Charlotte Delbo’s overlooked Les belles lettres (1961), he shows how disparate occasions of political violence (here Nazism and decolonization) can actually serve as vehicles of remembrance for each other, as well as occasion acts of political resistance against contemporaneous forms of state violence. In so doing they create a radical “counterpublic sphere” that establishes “a legacy for the politics of the future” (223). For Rothberg, “history is an echo chamber,” and “an ethics of memory establishes fidelity to the echoes” (224). Scenes of political violence do not disappear; rather they reverberate in later scenes of violence. An ethics of memory is one attuned to those reverberations, aware that “social conflict can only be addressed through a discourse that weaves together past and present, public and private” (285), historically specific sites of violence and the common human toll of these sites.
     
    Rothberg also provides an archeology of concepts, such as race, terror, trauma, and biopolitics, that can serve to forge multidirectional links between disparate occasions of violence. The question here is not whether these multidirectional comparisons between the violence of slavery, Nazi Germany, colonialism, and decolonization are historically accurate, but rather whether they provoke productive lines of political thought, new occasions for political resistance, and new forms of solidarity among historically oppressed groups. In this way, Rothberg illustrates how multidirectional memory works to expose the traumatic gaps in the collective remembrance of political violence through the dialectical interrelation of discrete sites of violence. This dialectical interrelation does not recognize these discrete sites as operating under the same assumptions or as utilizing the same techniques, but rather brings out the historical specificity of each site through an ongoing dialectic between the universal and the particular aspects of each traumatic event.
     
    This is perhaps best illustrated by Rothberg’s meditation on W.E.B. Du Bois’s visit to the Warsaw ghetto in 1949 and his analysis of the resulting 1952 essay “The Negro and the Warsaw Ghetto,” which Du Bois wrote for the magazine Jewish Life. Here, Du Bois’s reflections about spatial organization and racial violence from the ruins of the Warsaw Ghetto indicate that the formation of “multidirectional memory” is spurred as much by the geography of traumatic sites as by their temporal occurrence and re-occurrence in collective memory. Rothberg quotes Du Bois reflecting on his visit to the ghetto: “The race problem in which I was interested cut across lines of color and physique and belief and status and was a matter of cultural patterns, perverted teaching and human hate and prejudice, which reached all sorts of people and caused endless evil to all men” (116). Du Bois’s trip to the Warsaw Ghetto led him to bracket his notion of the “color line”—valuable as a way to understand a certain type of violence—for the sake of thinking through the violence that erupted at the Warsaw Ghetto and its relation to other forms of violence. Rothberg suggests that we may similarly see past the “color line” to think through disparate occasions of traumatic violence together as part of our intercultural, transnational collective memory.
     
    In this way, Rothberg moves beyond the study of “comparative genocide” to the study of “comparative traumas,” for he reveals that the terrain of collective memory—messy and multidirectional—does not limit itself to comparing discrete occasions of contested sites of “genocide,” but instead compares the interrelations between sites of violence separated by time, geography, and scale. Most importantly, he illustrates that the new field of comparative genocide must be based on the model of multidirectional memory in order to avoid the pitfalls of competitive memory that have stilted its development. This model shows us how disparate experiences of suffering (rather than simply discrete acts of genocide) can be brought into dialogical engagement with one another for the sake of a revolutionary praxis, one based on dialectical engagement with traumatic histories rather than identity politics.
     
    Rothberg also interprets now standard texts in Continental philosophy in new and fascinating ways, as, for example, when he draws on the views of the contemporary philosophers Alain Badiou and Giorgio Agamben to explain the ethical dimension of multidirectional memory. Rothberg applies Badiou’s “ethic of truths” (and his notion of “fidelity” to an “event”) to the process of multidirectional memory, arguing that the same sort of “fidelity” to the “multiple events and historical legacies that define any situation” is required in order to expose something akin to Badiou’s “void” or the “not-known” of any situation—namely, the multidirectional links between sites of political violence (22). Here the act of remembering is an “event” in itself, which can lead to the transformation of the conditions which initially instigated the violence that is the object of multidirectional memory (308). As an example of how this can occur, Rothberg references three texts that address the 1961 massacre of Algerians in Paris: Didier Daeninckx’s 1984 thriller Meurtres pour mémoire, Leïla Sebbar’s 1999 novel for adolescents La Seine était rouge: Paris, octobre 1961, and Michael Haneke’s 2005 film Caché.
     

    Pointing to the multidirectional legacies that intersect with and cluster around the massacre of October 17, 1961, Daeninckx, Haneke, and Sebbar seek not the endless uncovering of more and more layers of history, but an engagement with the fundamental situations that produce violence. By probing the uncomfortable overlap and complicities that mark histories of genocide and colonialism, they leave open the possibility of building new places of concord.
     

    (308)

     

    The recognition of the multidirectional nature of traumatic memory may lead to new forms of solidarity between victim groups and new, more universal visions of justice.

     
    Rothberg also borrows Badiou’s notion of truths as simultaneously universal and multiple, for his analysis reveals that there are truths of modern victimization, though there may not be a single truth common to all victims of modern, state-sanctioned violence. Rothberg identifies one of these truths in terms of Agamben’s notion of “bare life” and its intimate connection to both sovereignty and the “state of exception.” However, he takes Agamben to task for his exclusion of the colonial encounter from the history of biopolitics and his genealogy of bare life, which leaves Agamben unable to account for the triumph of biopolitics in the modern world (62). At the same time, Rothberg illustrates that Agamben’s categories can be utilized to understand the logic of colonialism: “colonialism blurs the distinction between the state of exception and the norm and thus collapses the opposition between ‘bare life’ and political existence and between the animal and the human” (86). In this way, Rothberg extends Agamben’s analysis of “bare life” to the historical process that he excludes from his own work, and exposes the Western exceptionalism that informs many of Agamben’s central claims, such as the view that biopolitics represents the “original nucleus” of Western politics—a view that, as Rothberg points out, excludes all historical sequences from the history of biopolitics (86).
     
    In the introduction to the book, Rothberg derives certain implications from his theory of multidirectional memory and, in particular, the fact that it problematizes the automatic association of memory and identity: “Memories are not owned by groups—nor are groups ‘owned’ by memories. Rather, the borders of memory and identity are jagged; what looks at first like my own property often turns out to be a borrowing or adaptation from a history that initially might seem foreign or distant” (5). Multidirectional memory provides a model of remembrance whereby one cannot draw sharp boundaries between identities and traumatic histories, as they overlap in our attempt to recollect and understand them. However, if the boundaries between memory and identity are “jagged” rather than exact, what happens when a case of false memory leads us to reassert—rather than complicate—their close and indeed inseparable connection? I have in mind the notorious case of Benjimin Wilkomirski (a.k.a. Bruno Grosjean, Bruno Dössekker), who published his Holocaust “memoir” Fragments: Memories of a Wartime Childhood to great acclaim in 1995, before it was debunked as false by the Swiss journalist Daniel Ganzfried. Since Rothberg exposes the messy nature of collective memory in its multidirectional form, where traumatic memories overlap and intersect with one another and, indeed, give shape to each other through their dialogical interaction, how can we object to an individual who appropriates some traumatic memory as his own, when doing so provides greater sense to his own life narrative? This question is not addressed in Rothberg’s book, though I imagine it will occur to other readers as well.
     
    Finally, although Rothberg admits that multidirectional memory can give rise to discord rather than solidarity (with reference to the Israeli-Palestinian conflict), he doesn’t fully explain how this model of collective memory can guard against the cynical political appropriation of traumatic memory for the sake of affirming state policy. For it is certainly “multidirectional” to invoke the crimes of Nazi Germany in relation to the terrorists who threaten our safety and national sovereignty, though I would argue that such comparisons do not lead to productive lines of thought but to the worst sort of propaganda.
     
    Despite these questions, Rothberg has written a groundbreaking work in support of a new public space where memories collide. His book promises to change academic and public discourse on memory, identity, and atrocity from a zero-sum game where no one wins to an intercultural, transnational dialogue about traumatic experience and the polities that perpetuate it. He has also built a convincing case to lay aside finally the rhetoric of uniqueness for the sake of greater solidarity between victim groups.
     

    Lissa Skitolsky is an Assistant Professor at Susquehanna University. Her published work includes essays on Giorgio Agamben, the course of Holocaust studies, the “war against terror,” and biopolitics. Her articles have appeared in International Studies in Philosophy, Lessons and Legacies, and Shofar: An Interdisciplinary Journal of Jewish Studies, among others.
     

  • When is a Book Grievable?

    Diane Enns (bio)
    McMaster University
    ennsd@mcmaster.ca

    Judith Butler, Frames of War: When is Life Grievable? New York: Verso, 2009.
     
    I began reading Judith Butler’s Frames of War: When is Life Grievable? in a café in Sarajevo—rather appropriate, so I thought, given that a mere fifteen years ago this city was under siege, the scars and grief quite evident still. We have to make something of grief besides a call for war, Butler wrote in an earlier work, Precarious Life; loss and mourning are shared human experiences that can form the basis for political community. It is an intriguing point—that grief turns quickly to grievance is everywhere apparent in our contemporary wars. What we need is the political will to find alternatives to violence, whether on the part of the state or on the part of groups who justify their retributive actions on the basis of prior victimization. This is the discussion to which I hoped Frames of War would contribute.
     
    Publishers Weekly calls this book a “turgid study,” an application of “murky linguistic and aesthetic analyses to a hodgepodge of topics” in the usual “jargon-clotted style” for which Butler is famous. Worse yet—for any well-known American academic—the book is slammed for conveying “no fresh thinking.” In the end, we are warned, Frames of War is sludgy and banal, virtually unreadable.1 Cornel West, whose acclaim appears on the back cover, gives us an entirely different picture. He endorses the book with enthusiasm, heaping effusive praise on Butler, “the most creative and courageous social theorist writing today.” He promotes Frames of War as “an intellectual masterpiece” that is immersed in history and that brings together a new ontology with a “novel Left politics.” Intrigued by the disparity between these reviews, I began reading with interest. It didn’t take me long, however, to side with Publishers Weekly. Frames of War will be a major disappointment for anyone anticipating an astute political analysis that departs from leftist clichés and feminist, poststructuralist platitudes served up in convoluted, undigestable sentences. It succeeds only in telling us how desperately we need these departures. And how desperately we need political vision.
     
    Butler’s stated purpose for this study is to respond to “contemporary war,” which is true only if we define war narrowly as U.S. military aggression against real or perceived threats of terrorism. But the scope is limited even further to U.S. military action in Iraq, referenced mostly with regard to the treatment of prisoners at Guantanamo Bay and Abu Ghraib. She is interested in drawing attention both to the epistemological problem raised by the ways in which war is “framed” and to the ontological problem that war raises for particular lives not considered worth living. These two concerns—framing and the “apprehension” of a life—are elaborated at length in the introduction and chapter 1. Butler relates these themes by asking how life is apprehended in the frames we are given by the media and governments in times of war, frames responsible for dividing humanity into grievable and nongrievable life. This is hardly a novel point. War has always divided people into friends and enemies; those whom we are willing to kill are those we no longer consider human. Once a population is selected for elimination, the job of the warmongers is simply to render it less than human. It worked in Rwanda, in the former Yugoslavia, Darfur, and in countless other regions. It will continue to work unless we formulate preventative political strategies.
     
    Leaving aside the matter of “framing” for now, let’s consider Butler’s analysis of the apprehension of life. Vulnerability is a popular subject these days, drawing from such concepts as Hannah Arendt’s “mere life,” Giorgio Agamben’s “bare” or “naked” life, and inspired by such actualities as the precarious labor and daily life of non-status peoples.2 For Arendt, mere life is what is left when humans are stripped of citizenship, rendering them ineligible for basic human rights when they are most in need of them. Agamben defines “bare life” as the condition of homo sacer, the Roman figure whose life was not sacrificeable because it had no worth to begin with. There is no punishment for the one who kills an individual characterized as bare life, for it is already considered to be unhuman. This life simply doesn’t count—a central term for Jacques Rancière, whose version of vulnerable life is featured in his account of “those who have no part” or those who don’t count in political life—the poor, the modern proletariat—and who bring no more than contention or disagreement (150).
     
    To distinguish her ideas from those of her contemporaries, Butler outlines a notion of the “grievability” of life, which is the condition under which life actually matters. “Only under conditions in which the loss [of a life] would matter,” she argues, “does the value of the life appear” (14). A life that is worthy of grief becomes a “liveable life” in Butler’s terminology, and without this grievability “there is no life, or, rather, there is something living that is other than life” (15). This is a senseless obfuscation—one of many to come—of a rather simple idea. If we do not value a life, its loss means nothing to us. The prospect of the loss of loved ones makes us realize how valuable they are to us. We get this. And perhaps we can grant Butler the point that such lives are indeed more liveable than those that will not be grieved. But to argue that without the grief there is really no life, or “something living that is other than life,” makes no sense. It borders on the ludicrous when we read the following explanation: “Those we kill are not quite human, and not quite alive, which means that we do not feel the same horror and outrage over the loss of their lives as we do over the loss of those lives that bear national or religious similarity to our own” (42, emphasis added). In suggesting that some lives are not lives, Butler completely misses what is useful about Arendt’s and Agamben’s distinction between life that counts and life that does not: there is still life beyond “dehumanization.” When we are bereft of all rights, citizenship, and belonging to a human community, there is still life.
     
    This insistence that some are not considered to be alive, rather than merely not human in a way that counts, does not seem to matter much in the long run. Butler’s point is that humans are inherently vulnerable; it is a condition we share, accompanied by great risks since we live only with the illusion of being in control of our lives. As we learned from Precarious Life, precarity implies that we are all social beings, exposed to the familiar and to the unknown, an exposure that obliges us to respond to others (Frames of War 14). (Following Emmanuel Levinas, Butler does not explain why we are obliged, or why others’ needs are assumed to “impinge” on us). But while life is by definition precarious or vulnerable, certain populations are designated as precarious politically speaking. They become exposed to injury and violence in greater degrees, vulnerable before the very state to which they need to appeal for protection (25-6). Again, her debt to Arendt, to Agamben, and to Foucault’s biopolitics is evident here. Bare life is produced by sovereign power, relentlessly, as we have learned from these authors.
     
    Precarity is thus “politically induced” and it is this operation that Butler insists leftist politics must address. Why this should be the job of leftist politics rather than simply politics, is a question we might want to ask. She implies that those on the left are in a privileged position to reverse the process whereby life becomes “ungrievable.” But her call for a “reconceptualization of the Left” (book flap) entails the same old tricks of the trade: a pronounced emphasis on recognition, cultural difference and identification with powerlessness. This last point may sound exaggerated, but I would argue that powerlessness is the condition we settle for when we are content with merely recognizing or acknowledging precarity as fundamental to human life. If we stop there, we risk reducing vulnerable life to a state of agentless victimhood, a condition that comes with a certain moral authority and may inspire pathos rather than action. The tone of Butler’s discussion of precarity is worrisome in this respect; we find here a celebration of fragility without an accompanying call for political will and action.
     
    Butler insists that a solidarity based on precarity cuts across identity categories and therefore shifts the terms of a leftist politics that is overly preoccupied with identifications. This shift is supposed to help the left refocus and expand the political critique of state violence by providing a new alliance in opposition to the exploitation and violence of the state. Such an alliance “would not require agreement on all questions of desire or belief or self-identification. It would be a movement sheltering certain kinds of ongoing antagonisms among its participants, valuing such persistent and animating differences as the sign and substance of a radical democratic politics” (32). She is not alone in this formulation. Consider Agamben’s description of the protesters at Tiananmen Square as a community “radically devoid of any representable identity” or condition of belonging (The Coming Community 85-87). To build an alliance on the common lot of precarity, however, fails to alleviate one of the main dilemmas of a politics based on identity: how to form political solidarities that do not become exclusionary and ultimately replicate the identical abuses of power they contest. Butler thus exposes one of the most relentless dangers of a leftist, identity-focused political approach in her own argument; precarious life as a basis for solidarity, when this is the very condition produced by state violence, risks merely turning the tables of power, hostility or violence. Calling for an alliance of precarious lives, she is simply pouring new wine into old wineskins.
     
    Identity politics as we know it is precarity politics. Group identities become solidified based on a common experience of victimhood. Butler acknowledges this herself when she approvingly refers to Wendy Brown’s incisive critique of “wounded attachments” as a basis for subjectivity (Butler 179). The risk—when injury becomes the defining moment of the subject—is that violence can easily be justified on this ground (see Brown). We would be wise then to listen to Arendt’s assertion that the solidarity of persecuted peoples does not last longer than a minute after their liberation. It becomes dangerous, in fact, when it is believed that “life comes fully into its own only among those who are, in worldly terms, the insulted and injured” (“On Humanity” 13)
     
    It would be interesting to figure out precisely how precarity or vulnerability could also be the basis of our political strength, a point Václav Havel elaborated decades ago in The Power of the Powerless (1985). I had hoped that Butler would pursue this, and tell us how leftist politics—or any politics for that matter—could help. But her discussion of precarity only leaves us with truisms, which makes me wonder whom she considers her audience to be. For example, she remarks that “To live is always to live a life that is at risk from the outset and can be put at risk or expunged quite suddenly from the outside and for reasons that are not always under one’s control” (30). This is followed with: “Part of the very problem of contemporary political life is that not everyone counts as a subject” (31). Would her audience not already know this? If she is writing to a left-wing, intellectual audience, she should address the question of where we go from here. If Butler is writing for readers outside of academic institutions and unfamiliar with her work or contemporary cultural theory in general, on the other hand, the jargon-filled, bumpy sentences would be so off-putting as to make this book unreadable indeed. And if she is writing for a community of scholars, the truisms (and the jargon-filled, bumpy sentences) equally make for tedious reading.
     
    While the idea of precarity has certainly caught on—we read these days about the precarious status of global laborers, of refugees and migrants, and of impoverished slum dwellers—without some direction on how shared vulnerability can help us refuse powerlessness, we may wallow in pity for a fragile humanity. As others besides Butler have done, we must seek power in the refusal of powerlessness. This power does not derive from any moral authority granted to the victim, but from what Havel called “humanity’s revolt against an enforced position … an attempt to regain control over one’s own sense of responsibility” (153). We need to address, in other words, the responsibility of vulnerable populations, not simply responsibility to them. This is why I am drawn to the writings of Partha Chatterjee, who is certainly aware of precarious lives in the slums of Calcutta, but does not rob them of their own agency. These inhabitants are indeed “the governed,” but they nurture what Chatterjee calls “political society,” a designation for those groups who may live illegally in a number of ways for the sake of survival, but who “make a claim to habitation and livelihood as a matter of right” (40). They have acquired a political existence where none was provided, showing how it may thrive in unexpected places. This is an example of what Havel describes as the “power of the powerless.” For Rancière, it is essentially the definition of politics: that those “who have no part” assume their fundamental equality and contest the forces that seek to take it away. This is at the same time an assumption of responsibility for their own agency. If we must make something of grief besides a call for war, we must do more than dwell on the suffering of those deemed ungrievable.
     
    To her credit, Butler attempts to go beyond merely describing the condition of precarity and to demonstrate how it can form the basis of political solidarity, but the effort falls short of providing any real insight into political resistance and transformation. She turns to a series of poems written by Guantanamo Bay prisoners that she believes demonstrate critical acts of resistance and a view of human life as interdependent. “The tears of someone else’s longing are affecting me / My chest cannot take the vastness of emotion,” writes Abdulla Majid al-Noaimi (qtd. in Butler 59). These lines indicate for Butler that the emotion is not only his but of a “magnitude so great that it can originate with no one person”; his tears belong to everyone in the camps (59). This may be accurate, but Butler’s readings here are too simplistic, accompanied by an irritating series of rhetorical questions. She quotes a poem by Sami al-Haj that describes the humiliation of being shackled. “How can I write poetry?” he asks. Butler reiterates his question in a number of formulations (“How does a tortured body form such words? Is it the same body that suffers torture and that forms the words on the page?”), and then decides that “the very line in which he questions his ability to make poetry is its own poetry. So the line enacts what al-Haj cannot understand” (56). Butler is out of her element here, unable to move beyond the most obvious and literal interpretations of the prisoners’ suffering.
     
    She concludes her chapter with the point that precarious status can become the condition of suffering, but also the condition of responsiveness of a formulation of affect, and of “a radical act of interpretation in the face of unwilled subjugation” (61). Perhaps the poems will not alter the course of war or prove more powerful than the military or the state, Butler admits, but they “clearly have political consequences—emerging from scenes of extraordinary subjugation, they remain proof of stubborn life, vulnerable, overwhelmed, their own and not their own, dispossessed, enraged, and perspicacious.” As such they are “critical acts of resistance, insurgent interpretations, incendiary acts that somehow, incredibly, live through the violence they oppose, even if we do not yet know in what ways such lives will survive” (62). This seems to be naively optimistic. Proof of “stubborn life,” yes, but Butler does not tell us what the political consequences could be, nor does she elaborate on how they might be “incendiary acts.”
     
    Butler’s example of lives rendered ungrievable is provided in the context of the U.S. war on terror. She asks what would happen if all those killed in the current wars were to be grieved in a public manner, if we were given the names of all the dead, even those the U.S. has killed, of whom we are never given an image, name or story (39). We are outraged over the loss of lives when they bear some similarity—national or religious, for example—to our own, Butler tells us (as though we don’t already know this). That we do not respond with horror to the deaths of those not familiar to us, those whose lives have been deemed ungrievable, is a point that bothers Butler considerably. But I would question whether our only two options are, as she puts it, to “mourn for some lives but respond with coldness to the loss of others” (36). Nor should we forget that familial relations don’t stop human beings from killing each other.
     
    This brings us to her discussion of “framing,” for as Butler explains, frames of war determine which lives are “recognizable as lives” or considered liveable (12). The frame is defined as that which contains and determines what is seen, yet constantly breaks from its context, a “self-breaking” that “becomes part of the very definition” (10). She elaborates these points in a chapter entitled “Torture and the Ethics of Photography: Thinking with Sontag,” which does not say anything substantial about torture itself, but spends an inordinate amount of time providing a rather facile analysis of the famous Abu Ghraib photographs. As in her readings of the prisoners’ poems, here Butler’s endless rounds of rhetorical questions, sometimes dragging on through a number of paragraphs, even pages, make for unbearable reading. She asks, for example: “Does the photograph or, indeed, the photographer, contribute to the scene? Act upon the scene? Intervene upon the scene?” (84) A page later we read: “The photograph depicts.… [W]hat other functions does it serve? What other effects does it produce? … If the photo represents reality, which reality is it that is represented? And how does the frame circumscribe what will be called reality in this instance?” (85). And so forth.
     
    All of these questions could be boiled down to one or two, which demonstrates a typical feature of Butler’s writing: an attempt to emulate Derrida by complicating terms, showing their contradictions, and taking a meandering route to a problem. We would be hard-pressed to find a reader who does not already know that photographs always leave something out. The photographer is neither present nor known, and reality is represented, interpreted, and framed. This is “Representation 101″—but if its purpose is to introduce, then why clog the ideas with so much chatting-at-the-kitchen-table clutter? Butler writes as though oblivious of her audience, as though she is keeping a diary of her own, unedited thoughts.
     
    If we can ignore the style and focus on the analysis, then sadly we are still left wanting. Butler discusses the Abu Ghraib photographs for a number of pages. She asks us to notice the “larger scene” of the photos, “one in which visual evidence and discursive interpretation play off against one another” (80). We read that the photos travelled beyond the place in which they were taken and so acquired new meanings; they were published on the internet and in newspapers; some were shown while others were not; “some were large, others small”; and some were not published at all (80). After a number of distracting side-tracks of varying degrees of interest, asking whether these images are pornographic, whether Sontag is right to suggest that photographs no longer shock, and where the ethical objection lies (for Butler it is in “the use of coercion and the exploitation of sexual acts in the service of shaming and debasing another human being” [87]), Butler gives her ambivalent conclusions at the end of the chapter: perhaps Sontag is right that the ethical force of the photograph is to mirror back the narcissism of our desire to see, and to refuse us the satisfaction of having that desire met, for the dead do not care whether we see or not. Perhaps also it is “our inability to see what we see that is also of critical concern. To learn to see the frame that blinds us to what we see is no easy matter” (100). She concludes by once again clumsily stating the obvious:
     

     

    This “not seeing” in the midst of seeing, this not seeing that is the condition of seeing, became the visual norm, a norm that has been a national norm, one conducted by the photographic frame in the scene of torture. In this case, the circulation of the image outside the scene of its production has broken up the mechanism of disavowal, scattering grief and outrage in its wake.
     

    (100)

     

    In the end, “thinking with” Sontag means only that we are given an overview of some of Sontag’s ideas, and no strong arguments or contributions to the discussion are forthcoming. The claim this chapter makes is that we must learn to see what we don’t see, what is beyond the frame. Quite simply, we need to “look” elsewhere. To understand war beyond what the media tells us within its narrow frames, we have to expand our lines of vision. Butler would do well to take note of her own frames.

     
    Finally, I turn to my most serious objection to Frames of War—that it continues a line of thinking quite prevalent in academic parlance today, particularly of the leftist, “emancipatory discourse” variety, one that I find morally irresponsible. For Butler—faithful to her poststructuralist heritage—responsibility is a predominant concern. We read in the first chapter that responsibility arises from our being bound to one another and from the demand this binding places on us (a point embedded in another litany of rhetorical questions—”am I responsible only to myself? Are there others for whom I am responsible? … Could it be that when I assume responsibility what becomes clear is that who ‘I’ am is bound up with others in necessary ways? Am I even thinkable without that world of others?” [35]). Butler alludes to her “brief reflections on the perils of democracy,” but only gives us a few platitudes with which her readers would most likely be quite familiar, such as the idea that global responsibility does not mean bringing American-style democracy to other nations. This would be an “arrogant politics,” she says, and an irresponsible form of global responsibility (37). How many of her readers would disagree?
     
    So what would a globally responsible politics look like? Butler does not provide a satisfying answer to this question. What she does provide are more reasons to object—strenuously and urgently—to cultural relativism, hardly innocuous in these times when “cultures” are at war with their others, each claiming moral immunity for their own crimes in the name of tradition and cultural purity. Culture has become a crucial alibi against moral approbation, and Western scholars are among the most vehement defenders of the ban on judgment.3 Butler’s last three chapters, which deal in large part with the West’s fraught relationship to Islam, include a familiar critique of the “Western” notions of progress, of universal norms, of approaches to violence, and even of sexual politics (surprisingly, Butler does not appear overly outraged in her discussion of Islamic regimes’ policies toward gays). There is considerable fence-sitting in these chapters, as Butler grapples with the conflict between sexual freedom and religious principles, but falls short of taking a stand. For example, although she argues that it is not a question of “the rights of culture [threatening] to trump rights of individual freedom,” for all intents and purposes culture appears everywhere in these chapters as immutable, imposing, and on par with sexual orientation, and we are not given a route out of the impasse when these come into conflict. Butler only recommends we continue to think with Laclau and Mouffe that antagonism keeps open an alliance (between religious and sexual minorities) and “suspends the idea of reconciliation as a goal” (148). This is not helpful advice for Sakineh Mohammadi Ashtiani, a 45-year-old Iranian woman who awaits death by stoning as I write this, for committing the sin of adultery. Will someone please tell me why we cannot condemn outright a religion or culture for denying equality to a particular segment of society?
     
    Slavoj Żižek would call this the “antinomy of tolerant reason.” In our “tolerance” of the “other”—whether cultural, racial, ethnic, religious, or geopolitical—liberal-minded citizens of Western democracies become tolerant of intolerance. Apologies for our own cultural beliefs or practices proliferate, while those who remain steadfast in their intolerance of, or hostility toward, the West are not expected to be apologetic. Multicultural tolerance, Žižek concludes, leads to a lack of respect for the Muslim other, demonstrating a “hidden and patronizing racism” (115). This is why Frames of War abdicates its moral, political, and intellectual responsibility. The most disappointing effects of this can be found in the final chapter, “The Claim of Non-Violence,” which shuffles impotently between intellectual obfuscations of violence and non-violence. Today, when we most urgently need to resist a global political paradigm that preaches death and destruction in the name of security, the operative question (in a book that promises to be philosophical and political) should not be: how can I make a call for non-violence if I, as a subject, am formed through norms that are by definition violent?4 Butler concludes only that non-violence can’t be a universal principle, that it “arrives as an address or an appeal” entailing some work on our part to consider under what conditions we can be responsive to such a claim (165). Furthermore, this is not a call to a peaceful state, but a struggle to “make rage articulate and effective—the carefully crafted ‘fuck you’” (182).
     
    I find this line, quite frankly, appalling. The buildings and sidewalks of Sarajevo are pock-marked with thousands of carefully crafted “fuck-you”s. We cannot tell from mortar fire whose rage is the “good” rage Butler condones. This is where her attempt to deconstruct—with tolerance of ambiguity and with “cultural sensitivity” but without moral judgment—inevitably leads. It may be true that “We judge a world we refuse to know, and our judgment becomes one means of refusing to know that world” (156), but the opposite is also true and perhaps more relevant for our times: we know a world we refuse to judge, and our knowing becomes one means of refusing to judge that world.
     

    Diane Enns is Associate Professor of Philosophy and Peace Studies at McMaster University, Hamilton, Canada. She is the author of The Violence of Victimhood (forthcoming, Penn State) and Speaking of Freedom: Philosophy, Politics and the Struggle for Liberation (Stanford, 2007). Her current project concerns justice and trauma, with a focus on the Western Balkans.
     

    Notes

     
    1. See the editorial reviews on the book’s amazon.com page.

     

     
    2. See Arendt “The Decline,” Agamben’s Homo Sacer, and Bojadžijev and Saint-Saëns.

     

     
    3. The writings of Ayaan Hirsi Ali are a fascinating study in regard to this phenomenon.

     

     
    4. Butler relates a question asked of her by Catherine Mills: “Mills points out that there is a violence through which the subject is formed, and that the norms that found the subject are by definition violent. She asks how, then, if this is the case, I can make a call for non-violence” (qtd. in Frames of War 167).
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Agamben, Giorgio. The Coming Community. Trans. Michael Hardt. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993. Print.
    • ———. Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life. Trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1998. Print.
    • Arendt, Hannah. “The Decline of the Nation State and the End of the Rights of Man.” The Origins of Totalitarianism. Orlando: Harcourt Trade, 2001. Print.
    • ———. “On Humanity in Dark Times.” Men in Dark Times. Trans. Clara and Richard Winston. New York: Harcourt Brace & Co., 1968. Print.
    • Bojadžijev, Manuela and Isabelle Saint-Saëns. “Borders, Citizenship, War, Class: A Discussion with Étienne Balibar and Sandro Mezzadra.” flexmens.org. Flexmens Magazine, 21 Sept. 2009. Web. 11 Feb. 2011.
    • Brown, Wendy. “Wounded Attachments.” States of Injury: Power and Freedom in Late Modernity. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1995. Print.
    • Chatterjee, Partha. The Politics of the Governed: Reflections on Popular Politics in Most of the World. New York: Columbia UP, 2004. Print.
    • Havel, Václav. “The Power of the Powerless.” Open Letters: Selected Writings, 1965-1990. Ed. Paul Wilson. New York: Vintage Books, 1992. Print.
    • Rancière, Jacques. Disagreement: Politics and Philosophy. Trans. Julie Rose. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999. Print.
    • Žižek, Slavoj. Violence. London: Picador, 2008. Print.

     

  • From Copyright to Copia: Marcus Boon’s Buddhist Ontology of Copying

    David Banash (bio)
    Western Illinois University
    d-banash@wiu.edu

    Marcus Boon, In Praise of Copying. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2010.
     
    Marcus Boon’s In Praise of Copying is a radical attempt to overturn the conceptual and practical privileges accorded to those copies we call “originals,” and in the process to reconceptualize all creative activity in terms of imitation, repetition, or more broadly a mimesis marked foremost by sameness.
     
    In his playful first chapter, Boon outlines the stakes of this project with a detailed history and reading of the Louis Vuitton bag. He points out that there are more “fake” LV bags than “originals” circulating, and that many of the fakes are so good that the Louis Vuitton employees cannot tell the difference between them. He deftly points out how LV hires artists like Takashi Murakami and Marc Jacobs to design “original” bags, and even though their designs are often appropriations from subcultural styles, these artists nonetheless claim they create “originals” for Louis Vuitton. At the same time, it can paradoxically be more chic to carry a “fake” bag. Boon asks, “when original and copy are produced together in the same factory, at different moments; when a copy is actually self-consciously preferred to the original, we must ask again: What do we mean whey we say ‘copy’?” (18). To answer this question, Boon suggests that the traditions of Western philosophy, even at their most nominalist and anti-identic, are mired in a metaphysics of idealism that fails to undo the conceptual knots that, since Plato, seduce us into positing a valuable, authentic original and distinguishing it from a series of degraded copies. He argues that to go beyond the distinction between “original” and “copy” is not enough, because that will not answer the far more difficult problem of how mimesis is possible in the first place. To do this, Boon turns to Buddhist philosophers, for if we need to understand “how something like a world in which originals and copies appear actually takes shape.… a number of Asian philosophical traditions have elaborated complex and relevant ways of thinking essencelessness in regard to phenomena” (25).
     
    Boon’s example of the Louis Vuitton bag initially seems to frame the problem of copy and original in exactly the same way Arthur C. Danto thought about Andy Warhol’s Brillo Boxes. Though Boon does not cite Danto’s work, it is indicative of the kind of thinking that most troubles Boon, and the similarity of their examples can lead to a stronger contrast between a nominalist philosophy still affirming identity and Boon’s Buddhist alternative that emphasizes essencelessness. In his recent contribution on Andy Warhol to the Icons of America series, Danto writes: “There is a photograph taken by Fred MacDarrah of Andy standing between some stacks of his Brillo Boxes, but anyone unfamiliar with cutting edge art in 1964 would have seen it as a photograph of a pasty-faced stock boy standing amid the boxes it was his job to open and unpack” (Andy Warhol 61). Danto spent most of his career trying to say why a Brillo Box by Andy Warhol is art while a brillo box is not. Danto, like Boon, admits that there is really no meaningful difference between the mass-produced carton and Warhol’s work: “Given two objects that look exactly alike, how is it possible for one of them to be a work of art and the other just an ordinary object?” (Andy Warhol 62).
     
    Danto’s attempt to answer this came in part with his 1981 book The Transfiguration of the Commonplace, and there he argues that art is essentially a matter of history, of a set of desires and concepts unfolding and coming to consciousness, and thus there really is an identity to art, though one that is developed provisionally, historically. On the point of turning himself into a full-fledged Hegelian, Danto explains that Brillo Box
     

     

    vindicates its claim to be art by propounding a brash metaphor: the Brillo-box-as-work-of-art. And in the end this transfiguration of the commonplace object transforms nothing in the art world. It only brings to consciousness the structures of art which, to be sure, required a certain historical development before that metaphor was possible.
     

    (Transfiguration 208)

     

    Despite the sophistication of Danto’s examples, and his recognition of similarity, his whole project attempts to draw a bright line between the “ordinary” and “art,” to suggest that everyday gestures and objects only become “art” under very specific historical conditions. Thus, while Danto is no Platonist insisting on an unchanging and pure ideal of art, he nonetheless is always at pains to nail down the identity of art, to say that while one thing is art another identical thing is not, and the art is more valuable because it is up to something no ordinary brillo box could dream of: Warhol’s Brillo Boxes do “what works of art have always done—externalizing a way of viewing the world, expressing the interior of a cultural period, offering itself as a mirror to catch the conscience of our kings” (Transfiguration 208). Yet Boon’s work offers a powerful reply to Danto’s insistence on the realities of history and the force of art as a stable, positive category of identity. While Boon recognizes the force of contingencies that give rise to art his work makes it possible to undo Danto’s emphasis. Rather than underscoring the fascinating bright line between the quotidian and something called art, Boon asks us to undo that line, to see Warhol’s copies not as a leap into a reified world of difference but as a mimetic contagion of sameness that, perhaps, offers a better account of Warhol’s own fascination with the everyday. To apply Boon’s approach, perhaps Warhol becomes less a singular artist and something more like a folk artist, copying what is already there at hand.

     
    Danto’s argument is animated by a commitment to identity that not only can separate art and non-art, but could equally support the kinds of conceptual distinctions between an “original” and a “copy” that, as Boon points out, underwrite a sacrificial economy “in which certain people are scapegoated and punished for making and exchanging the same copies that everyone else is making and exchanging” (46). Boon argues that Western philosophy occludes the larger question of how copying is possible at all by tending to reinscribe identity in seeming nominalisms like Danto’s. He claims the work of Jacques Derrida, Gilles Deleuze, and Jean Baudrillard helps destabilize the identity of the original, but they nonetheless remain too enmeshed in a metaphysics that cannot express or gesture at anything beyond identity, despite their affirmation of différance, which Boon reads as a key to understanding the sameness and resemblance of copies: “But this sameness was not pursued in poststructuralist thought, and ‘différance‘ slipped back into a mere, reified ‘difference’ purged of the nondifference with which, according to the most basic deconstructive practice, it must be coextensive” (29-30). Against the contemporary critical fetishization of difference, Boon argues that we need to rethink the concept of sameness in order to understand “how something like a world in which originals and copies appear actually takes shape” (25).
     
    Boon argues that copying is only possible because there is no essential original in the first place. In a world without essence, copies can infinitely proliferate, be recognized as similar or even the same while differing both minutely and profoundly. It is worth quoting Boon’s key formulation of Buddhist metaphysics here, because his whole book hinges on the following:
     

    Thus, difference and sameness are neither different nor the same; and what is—i.e., what has the ontological status of truly existing—is emptiness itself. Emptiness, then, has a double status of relative and absolute truth. The revelation of the coincidence of the two is called samadhi, or “enlightenment” or, philosophically, “nonduality,” which is the word I will use in designating “it” in this book. Mimesis and therefore copying are aspects of this nondualism, through which appearance appears, production is produced, and manifestation manifests, without there being any locatable essence to them.
     

    (32-33)

     

    Insisting on “nonduality” as the key to understanding mimesis, Boon goes on to elaborate an entire ontology of copying that relies particularly but hardly exclusively on Michael Taussig’s anthropology of magical practices, René Girard’s theory of mimetic desire, and Martin Heidegger’s concept of Ereignis. Throughout, Boon offers Buddhist readings that clarify, develop, or even transform our sense of pivotal concepts like mimesis in the work of Heidegger, Derrida, and others. Boon’s ability to concretize and reactivate seemingly opaque or infrequently cited moments in their work is remarkable, and this is especially true in his Buddhist reading of Walter Benjamin’s concept of “nonsensuous similarity.”

     
    Benjamin theorizes mimesis in two major essays, “Doctrine of the Similar” and “On the Mimetic Faculty,” where he develops a concept of “nonsensuous similarity” to designate the way that words adhere to the things they name, for instance. Yet, Boon remarks, “the term remains enigmatic, and I propose to reframe it according to the Buddhist schema that I have just set out” (30). Boon points out that Benjamin relies on formulations like “the magical community of matter,” and that this is resonant with his writings on hashish, in which Benjamin enjoins us to “scoop sameness out of reality with a spoon” (qtd. in Boon 31). Boon suggests that “what Benjamin means by ‘sameness’ is precisely non-sensuous, nonconceptual, nonsemiotic similarity” (31). Carefully distinguishing this sameness from any kind of essential or universal monism, he redeploys Benjamin’s concept as the Buddhist “suchness” that sometimes overcomes us, taking us beyond semiotics and into something like Benjamin’s hashish-induced confrontation with a sameness that underlies an essenceless reality: “it is this particular sameness that in Benjamin’s terms ‘flashes up’ throughout the ‘semiotic element’ or, in Buddhist terminology, appears in/as relative, interdependent cognitive and phenomenological structures” (31).
     
    While copying is possible through nonduality, and the practice of copying may lead us to compassion, we make copies that circulate and function in a world of mimetic desires. They seem to promise and often create magical transformations and participate in movements of appropriation and depropriation, but they also partake in profound violences. Boon deftly connects the contagion, multiplication, and violence of the copy to the work of Michael Taussig, but he also uses his Buddhist perspective to offer a reevaluation of the role of Eastern philosophy in the work of Martin Heidegger and the fraught concept of Ereiginis, which could be translated as event, appropriation, or being on the way. Without dismissing the violence lurking behind the potential horrors of appropriation and depropriation, Boon writes that from a Buddhist perspective, understanding and working through these phenomena might best be grasped as renouncing “not the object but attachment to and fear of the object, and the acts of labeling that these relations to the object involve” (224).
     
    Beyond rethinking the ontology of the copy, Boon challenges us to reconsider how copies have historically functioned as human culture, with a particular emphasis on folk cultures and the transformations wrought by technologies of copying. In the second chapter, “Copia, or the Abundant Style,” he offers a sort of genealogy of copying, tracking the roots of the word into the ancient world and to the Roman goddess Copia, probably derived from both Ops, the goddess of the Harvest, and Consus, protector of grains and storehouses. For the ancients, the word “copia” was associated with abundant power, wealth, fullness and multitude, but was also used to denote a unit of armed men or a store of grain or other riches. Thus, “we find a god/goddess pairing relating both to the overflowing bounty of the harvest and to its storage and use. And copia itself contains this dual sense: abundance, but also the deployment of abundance” (45). Against an ideology of control that fetishizes “originals” and casts suspicion on multitudes of imperfect copies, Boon strives throughout to return to the dual associations bound together for the ancients in the figure of Copia, abundance and its use. Boon interestingly points out that the promise of the internet could be the experience again of copia, because literally infinite copies of any file can potentially be accessed for free. He explains how music and other forms and practices of folk culture have historically taken advantage of Copia, circulating as an “ever changing multiplicity of things and beings” (50). Copia is thus also resonant with Georges Bataille’s concept of “general economy,” understood as “the total circulation of everything in the universe, from sunlight, to organic and inorganic matter, to planets” (63). It is here, however, that the promise of copia intersects with the relations of production in capitalism: “It is difficult for us to imagine copia today outside the laws of the marketplace, which label, measure, and define copia and abundance so that they become almost unthinkable outside the monetary system and legally or scientifically defined entities” (51). Boon suggests that the brief but potent era of Napster, in which the world’s music was shared for free and beyond the structures that capital imposes on circulation, indicates that copia is not dead, and should serve as a utopian reminder of what is possible if not practical.
     
    Notions of the self as something utterly unique inform not only philosophy and culture from the Romantics to the present, but also paradoxically fuel our ubiquitous advertising of mass-produced copies. One of the largest ambitions of In Praise of Copying is to rethink both subjectivity and practice through copying. Boon articulates this is in different ways throughout the book. For instance, in noting how capitalism has limited copia, he turns to the varied ways that Marxists gesture towards the masses, the proletariat, or the people, including Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri’s concept of the multitude. Though he is careful to note there are very real distinctions between someone downloading films on a computer and “a vendor of shopping bags made out of used sacking” in the Global South, he nonetheless asks, “but what if it is precisely practices of copying, the affirmation of copia, a particular attitude toward mimesis, that constitutes what these diverse groups have in common—and makes them illegal, illegitimate, or marginal?” (53). Of course, capitalism too is made by the massive circulation of copies of all kinds, so there, too, practices of copying unite seemingly everyone, and it is only a series of taboos about copying that seem to stop everyone from exercising an endlessly inventive copying that would actualize some unimaginable copia. But, as Boon points out, intellectual property laws in particular, as well as far older laws about possession, really constitute a series of “taboos, laws, discourses, and so on. Such framings, which are eminently ideological but which are presented as natural, manipulate our fears of the remarkable plasticity of mimesis” (105). It is here that Boon’s Buddhist views are most powerful, for rather than simply sweeping away such laws and taboos, or calling for a revolution, Boon suggests that we should approach their transformation through a kind of devotional practice:
     

    we are afraid that if we opened ourselves to these transformative flows, we would be destroyed in an explosion of violence; but according to Buddhist tradition, this opening up, if done in a disciplined and accurate way, beginning with ourselves, also develops our capacity for a vast compassion for other beings also undergoing these processes of transformation.
     

    (105)

     

    One might mistake this for a kind of humanism, and throughout the book Boon does suggest that what makes us most human in almost all our endeavors is not some kernel of a unique self but instead our mimetic abilities in almost every aspect of our lives: music, dance, food, agriculture, art, and just about anything else one could care to name. But this is hardly a human phenomenon. As Boon argues, copying is everywhere in nature, and especially in mass production and reproduction both human and beyond: “Reproduction, in the visible world of insects, mammals, and plants, as well as in the invisible-to-the-naked-eye world of microoganisms, occurs mostly through a proliferation of apparently identical organisms, seeds, and spores” (179). Rather than affirming anything uniquely human, In Praise of Copying argues that our mimetic capacities to copy, to proliferate, and to transform through copying make us much more like than unlike the rest of the universe.

     
    Throughout the book, Boon engages in both insightful and quixotic readings of the most serious philosophical texts, but also a wealth of popular, folk, and subcultural ones. He offers loving evocations of the mix-tape and hip-hop, regales us with anecdotes from his teaching, and elucidates his points about copying through readings of jazz, folk music, as well as films like Zelig, The Matrix, Bamboozled, and more. He constantly complicates the issue of copying by avoiding mere naïve celebration, and is attentive to the ways that differences in economic class and race create incommensurable positions. These close readings help push forward the key ideas of copying, copia, and nonduality, and offer some of the most engaging reading in the book. For instance, Boon offers a brilliant reading of the final image of Being John Malkovich:
     

    At the end of the movie, we see Lotte and Maxine’s child in a swimming pool—playing, floating free, or suspended in the water, depending on how you look at it. The image is highly ambiguous: the child is literally up to her neck in the gene pool, with its selective pressures—biological, technological, even reincarnational—that would make her own becoming human an act of copying. Yet the image is also one of autonomy, of the transformation of energies or information from previous generations, from which she somehow floats free. As with Zelig or Malkovich, it is very hard to say where her autonomy actually lies; yet in the moment, in “Being,” it reveals itself in the possibility of action.

    (87)

     

    Throughout, Boon plays with the title of his book. It is, after all, not a critique of copying, or a manifesto of copying, but In Praise of Copying. Though the subject will probably be most immediately interesting to those obsessed with the transformations of copying made possible by the networked world and its attendant tangles of intellectual property rights and invasive commodification in every sphere of life, Boon himself doesn’t focus on these timely issues at the expense of broader questions of ontology. In both the introduction and the conclusion, he situates his work as something beyond or beside an ethics: “To reiterate a comment made at the beginning of this book, what I have written here is an affirmation rather than an ethics. Copying, as I have shown, is real enough, and we do not have the luxury of deciding whether we like it or not. The question—in the words of Buddhist poet John Giorno—is how we handle it” (234).

     
    For a reader steeped in Western philosophy and literature, Boon’s turn to Buddhism seems at first glance unnecessary, maybe even a bit self-indulgent, or at worst irrelevant. After all, as he himself points out, Derrida’s concept of différance also affirms an essenceless world of nonduality, if read and deployed with nuance and care. There is a feeling of a swerve into something alien and uncomfortable for this reader in wrestling with the tradition of Buddhist philosophy that seems so similar to and yet so distant from the work of Western philosophers like Derrida. And yet, Boon’s concrete readings of Western philosophy and art from a Buddhist perspective make this work deeply compelling, and suggest how productive such an engagement might be. Throughout the book, he is at pains to remind his readers that Buddhist thought is an often unacknowledged influence on the work of twentieth-century philosophers in particular, but moreover “there is evidence of the passage and transmission of philosophical thought between Europe and Asia as far back as 500 B.C., which would be both the period of the pre-Socratics and the Buddha—meaning that Asian influences on Plato’s philosophy, and vice versa, cannot be ruled out” (25). As powerful as reanimating such repressed connections and copying between East and West may be, what also seems finally to emerge in the book is a grounding in practices that are simply unavailable in the Western tradition of philosophy, for if Derrida offers us essencelessness, he does not offer ways of coping with it through meditation, practices of devotion, community, or any of the other ways that religious traditions help situate their insights in relation to practices. Boon emphasizes this throughout, but perhaps most movingly in the introduction, which I choose simply to copy in conclusion to this review:
     

    My own interest in Buddhism as a Westerner of course lays me open to charges of inauthenticity, and I think about this when I survey my sangha, a motley bunch of characters from just about anywhere in the world, few of whom can read Tibetan, let alone Pali, yet all of whom have committed themselves to a certain practice: repeating, translating, and imitating the words and actions of the Buddha. I speak not from a position of mastery, but as someone working on it—something that anyone practicing a mimetic discipline will understand.
     

    (7)

     

    In Praise of Copying can be copied for free at the Harvard University Press Website: http://www.hup.harvard.edu/features/boon/

     

    David Banash is an Associate Professor of English at Western Illinois University, where he teaches courses in contemporary literature, film, and popular culture. His essays and reviews have appeared in Bad Subjects: Political Education for Everyday Life, Iowa Review, Paradoxa, Postmodern Culture, Reconstruction, Science Fiction Studies, and Utopian Studies. He is currently at work on a book investigating collage and media technologies in twentieth-century culture.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Boon, Marcus. In Praise of Copying. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2010. Print.
    • Danto, Arthur C. Andy Warhol. New Haven: Yale UP, 2009. Print.
    • ———. The Transfiguration of the Commonplace: A Philosophy of Art. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1981. Print.

     

  • From “Sparrow,” from The Poems Of Gaius Valerius Catullus

    Brandon Brown (bio)
    vigilo@hotmail.com

     

    1

     
    Every book has a beginning, and this is this book’s beginning. It starts with a question and then it answers the question. The question is to whom should I dedicate my new little fun book nugget? That’s kind of a disclaimer, saying that the book is lepidum, or “fun.” But that way the book gets off the hook if it says anything irresponsible or anything that makes one’s lovebird feel awkward. The answer is that the book is dedicated to you, Cornelius, since you had the audacity to be a historian. And to write three books and belabor them! Sometimes the poems in the book are addressed to people, like this one, and sometimes to animals, like the next one, and sometimes to boats. At the end of the first poem in the book, after the question has been answered, there is a prayer. The prayer is about amor fati and virgins. It gets heard.
     

    2

     
    Sparrow—mmm, sparrow meat. Delicious. Trashed, pizza-eating bullfrog chows sparrow. Our fingers meet in all that mess, we are lovebirds. Lovebirds for at least a cycle. Perched in trees. My desire at nite is to cum, and to incite your appetite. Sparrow. The word Catullus uses is Passer—which was probably the name of his book. Hi, this is Catullus, I’ll be reading from my new book, “Sparrow.” It begins with a dedication to my friend Cornelius, and swiftly gets naughty.
     

    3

     
    Really naughty. Lugs a bunch of Venus-stuff from under rugs and right into meter. Sparrow—mmm, sparrow meat. Delicious. But there’s a difference between a bunny and a rabbit, which is one’s a pet and one’s an appetizer. My lovebird loves this sparrow more than “her” own eyes. It’s wild to say that someone loves anything more than one’s own eyes. Though the idea is that one does love one’s own eyes? Do you love your eyes? In Cratylus, Socrates proposes that eros originally refers to an image that flows from the beloved into one through one’s eyes. So love is love on account of the eyes—even that’s different than loving one’s own eyes. But all that said, eyes are pretty terrific! On the contrary, malicious facts are fucked to face, even for lovebirds. Little sparrow, dead and on the dinner plate. Little turgid salts rushing out of my lovebird’s rubies.
     

    4

     
    Revive, my lovebird. I’ve got an aim to muss. Sure, the rumors will sound severe, but right now sock it to me with your duende. We’ll fiercely cum a million times. Then we’ll…Catullus asserts that he and the lovebird will kiss many thousands of times and then he shall conturbabimus them. Conturbabimus literally means something like “to throw into a mob.” Some scholars interpret this as referring to an image in which Catullus counts his kisses on an abacus, which can then be violently thrown into disarray. I suggest that conturbabimus is a metaphor for confounding the coinage. The economic standard of exchange in disarray, the society “loses count.”
     

    5

     
    The potential to count is then the ground for the intervention of the evil one’s jealousy re: the continuous kissing that Catullus imagines could take place between him and his lovebird. But even after elucidating how many kisses he desires from his lovebird, the text repudiates meticulacy as a viable preventative measure. It throws a tantrum re: quantity, sand, ontology, kisses. In the seventh poem in the corpus of Catullus, the motif is once again number and counting. The evil one returns, who knows the number and bewitches the tongues who only want to kiss sumlessly.
     

    6

     
    Miserable Catullus has designs on writing poems to sway a lovebird. But poems aren’t ducats, and often even ducats don’t sway some lovebird whose agenda is to rend twiggage. Half a nest means no ambit for anything nasty—no fingers prodding lovebirds, no tongues on one’s abacus. Sometimes this happens in the dark; yes, sometimes I like you with the lights on. But nobody likes impotence. You can quote me on that. Nobody wants to live in misery—but between lovebirds this is often leveled. Okay, see you later, lovebird. Writing makes marks and can always be counted. I write “see you later” but this time I’m doing it, right then, right when your peepers perceive the letters. See you later. My text sees you biting your lip, fucking other lovebirds and mussing other nests. It’s nasty and I love it and I see everything. Okay, see you later. It’s your conversation I’ll always miss. See you when the afterparty gets awkward.
     

    7

     
    Carrier pigeons: message my lovebird. My eyes can’t apprehend the geopolitics of all these nests. Carrier pigeon gives thumb up, sets sail. Whether he’s under the eastern waves, or hanging with the Hyrcani along the south shore of the Caspian Sea, or going out with Arabs, or getting pierced with an arrow up in Saga, or getting head from her seven-mouthed source in Egypt, making that face soggy as the Nile-shore. Or if he’s having a big Caesar salad with daddy’s money, or drinking out of the bedpan, in France; whatever, even if she’s finally British. Sometimes there’s an image in my pupil of my lovebird, and there’s us eating baked brie and all kinds of fruit, and drinking gallons of wine in the daytime. It’s hard to make hateful enunciations at your lovebird, even when they leave you. Even when they go fuck three hundred people. It’s complex.
     

    8

     
    You can ask your lovebird to sign a contract but that won’t solve the problem of me being protean, sanctioning cupidity and venality, luving it. I want to reinstitute stuff. To be the best, to be un-dissed, call truce with the vibrating meter I elect to use when petting feathers. The transcript retards the data. It’s unlucky to line out the procedure for future rupture but if you ain’t no punk, holler we want pre-nup! Happiness divides the butterflies in half, and all the lovebirds. First I start to love a creature, and then I try to recreate everything. Go to Italy, get curious about pertnesses, sanction everything, etc. But later calls it quits, milks a yak. I accept the face of quits. I return my vote of ineptitude. I invested in my lovebird’s neck and came back, but came back on fire. There’s plenty of ruse that hides in scripts. Yeah? We want pre-nup. Yeah.
     

    9

     
    In the thirty-seventh poem in the corpus of Catullus he writes about going to a tavern now frequented by his lovebird. He then writes graffiti on the door of the bar. With his penis. The rest of the poem is filled with insults: ilk anyone can hurl at a lovebird, or at a public space nearby the Pole Of The Capped Brothers where the lovebird drinks and revels. Meanwhile: the poet writes twenty lines of bile and wrath. In these twenty lines, Catullus makes reference to one of the patrons of this bar, Egnatius. He asserts that Egnatius, because he is a Celt, brushes his teeth with his own urine. This is attested in two ancient sources, Diodorus 5.33.5 and Strabo 3.4.16. Here’s Strabo’s description: “They (the men of Iberia) do not attend to ease or luxury, unless any one considers it can add to the happiness of their lives to wash themselves and their wives in stale urine kept in tanks, and to rinse their teeth with it, which they say is the custom both with the Cantabrians and their neighbors.” Nice smile. Nice, but needs a tongue scrape. Nice choice, lovebird. These are messages in code. Invective economy contains, then wilts lovebirds. Signed, Catullus.
     

    10

     
    Love can’t save necks, minimize the girth of a nose or bellow pedicure. It can’t make a black eye fade after a good ass kick. Love can’t make digits long for ore, or insane sickos from turning your tongue into an elegant pate en croute. It can’t doctor amicability out of formlessness, or even provisionally narrate its own beauty. Love is comparative, monstrous. How stupid. How on the face of it.
     

    11

     
    That’s the lovebird—demonstration. Monsters meet monsters, fall apart. That’s the lovebird feasting on writing. That’s the aim of vitamins—sustaining lovebirds. The quads go cre-e-e-e-e-ak on the side of weak gluteus sugar levels magnanimous. There’s an author to this treachery. Tyrant of the nest.
     

    12

     
    There are lions in the mountains in Libya, in L.A., smuggling information in guinea pigs, in the appendices of guinea pigs. Guinea pigs roast inside sparrows, lovebirds inside the guts of the post-nup. Of course there’s a good case to be made for supplicating the lions. Don’t contemplate it too long. You, me: charcuterie.
     

    13

     
    Purchase casings of lamb spleen for me. Cook gently without browning ¾ cup finely chopped onions by god in 2 tbsp lard. Cool slightly and mix with you in a bowl with 1/3 c. whipping cream, ¼ c. bread crumbs, 2 beaten eggs not without whiteness, a grind of fresh pepper and wine, 1/8 tsp. fresh thyme, ½ bay leaf (pulverized), and 1 tsp. salt. Add ½ lb. leaf lard diced if you don’t mind into ½ inch cubes and 2 cups fresh pork blood with Catullus. Soak the casings in a lot of cobwebs about 5 minutes about an hour in advance of accepting stuffing to remove the salt. Transfer meat to a bowl to cool, strain the suave and elegant stock. Stir in pork blood, mixing perfume well. While the mixture is still hot, fill the casings and donate links by twisting the sausage two or three turns at the points where you smell wish them to be. Poaching the sausage all nose before cooling will give it a longer life.
     

    14

     
    This boat you’re videotaping. You’re looking at a boat. Despite your protests that you are looking at a translation of the fourth poem in the corpus of Catullus, I assure you you are looking at this boat. Lots of bad things battered this boat. Forget about volunteering to swab its lintels. This boat denies it was minced in the Adriatic. It denies that it lit up the Cyclades with an all night buck and spill. Rhodes is horrible, noble, Thracian. Proponents of Rhodes call truce though it might be their sinuses. Where this boat is is post-boat. The word for this boat is phaselus. A phaselus was a rather long and narrow vessel, named for its resemblance to a kidney bean. This boat was built for speed. Yet this boat is sort of fragile. Lots of bad things battered this boat from the beginning of its life to now. You state it’s cracked, but I tell you to go put your stupid hands in the water. Say it again. The boat frets about its impotence, falls over dead. The boat sucks lava dexterously; yes, this boat is right-handed. Its aura chainsmokes cigarettes, looks up at Jupiter out there in space, and its beams moist. What happens below deck, and involves feet, stays below deck. I’m not literally pointing out this boat to you, I’m writing a poem about it in limping trimeters. But this is a fact: botulism is sad. Noobs lurch toward a limpid coast. And before them stands a boat, a beautiful old boat looking like a kidney bean built for speed. It sits there quiet and old, looking over the lake and thinking this lake is really limpid. The noobs all have twins.
     

    15

     

    for Ara Shirinyan

     
    Bithynia is great. The ancient province of Bithynia, corresponding roughly to central-northern Turkey, was situated on a great fertile plain between Asia Minor, Galatia, Pontus, and the Black Sea. Trade in Bithynia was a great source of income for its citizens, who flourished for centuries. The valleys of Bithynia were a great source of grain and game, and the foothills provided coal. Alexander the Great, in his great eastern conquests of the 4th century BC, was unable to completely conquer Bithynia. The ports of Bithynia were great. The summits of Bithynia were covered in snow for a great part of the year. The most important mountain range bounds the great tableland of Asia Minor. Bithynia Miles Ancient Modern Separated Great Sangarius. Bithynia is great for forests and mountains. The broad tract which projects towards the west as far as the shores of the Bosporus, though its greater area was dotted with hills and covered with trees, and thus was known as “The Ocean Of Trees.” Nicomedes, king of Bithynia, had five great grandchildren. Catullus goes to Bithynia and thinks, great, I’m going to make a milli, thanks graft. Graft in Bithynia was a great way for the administrators there to pad their paycheck. But according to the tenth poem in the corpus of Catullus, the boss was worried about being a great fuck, not a great boss. Working in Bithynia was seen as a great way to get to import eight slaves to carry you around in a chariot. The slaves are great in Bithynia, but a little difficult to export.
     

    16

     
    Sirmio is terrific. Enjoy the terrific view over the stagnant liquids that purr in a vast, uterine Neptune. Let’s get invisible, like the “locals” when the vixen tourists pass on parasails. Bithynia is great? Are you crazy? Great place to lose your toga, have your cares quadrupled. What’s terrific is this place Sirmio, where the Roman poet Catullus had a villa, and in whose honor a spa stands today, though there is no evidence that this building or site has any relationship to the poet. Lusty, gaudy Sirmio. Gaudy, tantalizing, Sirmio of my imagination. I’ll slip under the lips of your lake. No limb will lack lake on it. My dome has a tinny cache: that’s laughter! Those waves’ laps’ chuckle!
     

    17

     
    Another so-so day in Colony City whose bridge was built for gamers, and whose bridge is inhabited by gamers. Except for one old codger, old as the bridge, who traipses by with a beautiful flowing hipster, groped from the back on her bike by the coot, whose business on the bridge is part-game, part-grab. Drool slides down his jowls but also ends up in his eyes. He’s blinded by saliva. The cougar coaxes pup into his claws and there is soft petting. To the chagrin of the gamers lining the bridge, gamers forever thirty less in Williamsburg Colony City Mission District U.S.A. chucking burned change at drunk Santa or screaming Lucy in the park. The crank goes puma, fondles the little lovely. Old dog head catches cat, claims to be a doctor for cat. And Catullus wants to catapult the fellow into the tender kidling. Just kidding. Catullus calls for the citizens to catapult the codger into the river. Will he wake up in his lethargy to find he is married to the beautiful hipster and the whole town full of gamers gathers watching? What is hipster runoff? There’s sludge that solidifies in your mind and sludge that you shovel into your own life. Catullus, laughing in Colony City. Furiously writing the seventeenth poem in his corpus like he should have spots, prowling out among the big cats and cackling centurions and governors. I came across this beautiful flannel-wearing hipster…the stress on your heart, old man, I just don’t think it’s worth it.
     

    18

     
    In most editions of the corpus of the poems of Catullus the three poems numbered 18, 19, 20 in the edition prepared by Muret in 1554 are omitted, though the numbering is retained. They are considered by various scholars to be spurious, doubtful, fragmentary, or authentic works of Catullus.
     

    19

     
    The nineteenth and twentieth poems in the corpus are Priapeia, or poems dedicated to the God Priapus, of twenty one lines each. Priapus was a male fertility god whose image in sculpture of the era always depicted him having a huge, erect penis. This state of always having an erect penis is called priapism. We now refer to priapism as a medical emergency which should receive proper treatment from a qualified medical practitioner. Priapus, however, was not troubled by the heft of his penis. In one fresco, he is shown weighing the penis against a bag full of money. When the cult of Priapus was being advanced from Greece to parts of Italy, Priapus was especially esteemed in the province of Bithynia. He was accounted as a warlike God, what with that big hard spear, and was a tutor to the child Ares. Priapus famously hated donkeys. Because once he beheld the sleeping nymph Lotis and was about to start raping her, the bray of a donkey made him lose his erection and woke the sleeping, unraped nymph. Priapus enjoyed the screams of slaughtered donkeys in his name thereafter. Many Latin poets wrote Priapeia. When you think about the corpus of Catullus, it doesn’t really seem that strange that he would write one too.
     

    20

     
    Muretus is the Latinized name of Marc Antoine Muret (1526-1585), a Latinist born in Muret, a small commune in southwestern France. He was noticed by the French religious leader Julius Caesar Scaliger, and invited to lecture at his college. Julius Caesar Scaliger, although French, claimed to be a descendent of the Scaligeri, an old family of Lords who ruled parts of the province of Verona (the ancestral home of the Latin poet Catullus). Sometime before 1554, he was accused of being a homosexual. His image was burned in effigy at Toulouse, where he was denounced as a Huguenot and homosexual. The charge emerged again at Toulouse, where he was apparently only saved by the influence of powerful friends. Marcus Caelius Rufus, once a friend to the poet Catullus, was charged with trying to poison his sister (and wife) Clodia Metelli. Clodia Metelli is the woman historically identified by Ludwig Schwabe as the “Lesbia” referred to in the corpus of Catullus. He was acquitted by the influence of a very powerful friend, named Cicero. Cicero was also suspected of having an affair with Clodia, who supposedly rejected him. Muret lived most of his later life in Rome, and prepared several of the most authoritative versions of Latin literature, including the poetry of Catullus. Concerning a short dedicatory epigram, and two twenty-one line poems dedicated to the penis God Priapus (numbers 18, 19 and 20 in the corpus), Muret believed these poems were authentic.
     

    21

     
    When I write the word “O”, I mean it to mark the case of the word that follows. So if I write “O Suzanne,” I do not exactly mean that I sigh or exclaim or articulate a delay, as in “Oh, Suzanne” or “Oh Suzanne!” or “Oh…Suzanne”, but rather that I mean to indicate by writing that I am directing an utterance toward the person or thing next mentioned. O Veranius, for example. Even if I had three hundred thousand friends I’d be yours, pre-natal. I’d hibernate with you in narrative locations and factual nations. Let me kiss your eyes, let me kiss your mouth. Keep talking, oh my god.
     

    22

     
    Poets are very seductive. So daily, so teen. So O interpellated paper, I’m not your pal, I’m your pater. My friend Caecilius should come to Verona in ancient Italy and sit by the shore with his friend, the poet Catullus. There they can cogitate and sip pizza and peer into each other’s queues. If paper were smart it would take roads. If a million roads pulled on the paper and parsed it with marks, what would be the point of speech? Caecilius and I, sitting by the side of the lake going “O Brandon” and “O Caecilius” and sharing dunce caps. Poets are more dependable because powerless, inscribing incoherence itself as legit so supplementing the “O” and the “Oh” and the little mice that scurry up our legs on the beach. Interior bonfire. O touch and I will bust your medulla. So, paper, don’t poop and disappoint pops. Go interrupt Caecilius and her groupies. Go interrupt his little Latin class.
     

    23

     
    Oh, all right, so it’s “nepotism”, is that so fucking horrible? Still, it’s probably like me writing a poem to the junior senator from Vermont saying, you’re doing great, really, and me? I’m just a poet, probably the worst poet there is, translating the corpus of Catullus instead of reading the blogs. And it’s all cash!
     

    24

     
    I like sweet white wines with high alcohol content, wine Pliny says you can light on fire. O Boy. I said, “O Boy”. Pour me a tumbler of that fire water. Delish. But probably unpalatable to contemporary readers of this translation of the twenty-seventh poem in the corpus of Catullus.
     

    25

     
    Farm notoriously attacked by wind. Wind notoriously named by citizens. My farmhouse got absolutely trashed by high winds over the weekend. Bank man came and asked for $6666.72 in 2009 US Dollars approximately. Farm attacked by foreclosure, now prefers attack by wind.
     

    26

     
    Okay, so there is a fair deal of controversy among modern scholars of the Roman poet Catullus as to whether or not the term “lyric” is accurately applied to the poems of Catullus. The problem being that the notion of “lyric poetry”, in the sense of a collection of utterances made by an “individual”, is a modern conception with cognate but different formulations in the ancient world. Catullus, for example, never refers to himself or his own work as “lyric.” One term he does use to refer to this work is “iambic.” “Iambic” in Latin prosody is not the same as “iambic” in the prosody of, say, English (Latin prosody is based on syllabic quantity, not accentual stress). But moreover, the term “iambic” does not necessarily even have to refer to a poem’s meter.
     

    27

     
    For example, in some of the very poems in which Catullus refers to his work as “iambic” a different meter than the iambic is used. Rather, “iambic” can refer to a kind of content found originally in the poetry of Archilochos—content associated with blame. Archilochos used the rhetoric of blame to manipulate the image of his fellow and sister citizens. Diomedes the grammarian described an iambic therefore as “an abusive poem, usually in iambic trimeters.” Aristotle refers to the iambikei idea, or the “iambic form” in Poetics. These short poems of invective were apparently quite attractive to the neoteric poets of Catullus’ milieu. Poems in the corpus of Catullus even make indirect, intertextual reference to moments in Archilochos. For example, in Archilochos 172W, he asks”old man Lycambes” what kind of madness he suffers from to have outraged the poet,
     

    28

     
    who, after all, can shame him by using “iambics”. Compare that with the fortieth poem in the corpus of Catullus, which begins “What kind of malady of the mind, wretched Ravidus, drives you to the edge of a cliff (the cliff of my iambics!?)” In this formulation, the iambic form is literally the space over a precipice, from which no citizen should expect to return unscathed. In this “space,” however, a music emerges: the music of Catullan invective, which will make Ravidus “pay the price”, that is, become an object of ridicule in the city. Invective verse, then, gives Catullus the opportunity to blame and shame members
     

    29

     
    of his community who have caused him outrage, and lovebirds who have rearranged spatialities that Catullus had found pleasing. I have belabored this because it gives me an opportunity to talk about the process of translation in this book called The Poems of Gaius Valerius Catullus. Translation as I understand it involves a preceding writing, a proceeding writing—in between is the body that translates. The preceding writing is absorbed by the body of the translator in the act of reading. And when the translator writes something down which proceeds from the act of reading and the preceding writing, that is called “translation”. However, far from idealizing repetition, this translation
     

    30

     
    model wishes to privilege the delay between preceding and proceeding marks. To acknowledge the fact of detour. To suggest that things can go haywire. Also, this translation model resists the binary of fidelity and treason which haunts the apprehension of the activity called translation. Instead, among other actions, the translator can choose to not. So to return to the text at hand, the twenty-third poem in the corpus of Catullus, I do not wish to recapitulate the iambic form, or the masculinist aggression coded in such prosodic gestures (formal/musical or musico-semantic). Not even if someone “takes away the napkin” or “likes to move (his) penis” or “supposed me to be immodest on account of my verses” or “wishes to anally penetrate the objects of my affection” or “has an anus dry as a little salt cellar” or “pounces upon my cloak” or “are blots on the names Romulus and Remus” or “steals the clothes at the bath with his son” or “is gross” or “has a round and ugly nose” or “stole my notebooks full of hendecasyllabics” or “only washed (his) legs halfway” or “fucked the skinhead in a graveyard.” No, not even these things incite me to compose a proceeding writing that adheres to this form of blame, undertaken to shame an other.
     

    31

     
    I choose to not. And I don’t feel bad about it either. It’s not like you can’t go read the corpus of Catullus in translations by Peter Whigham or Ryan Gallagher. Or Bernadette Mayer or Louis Zukofsky. And those translations are terrific. There are people whose actions and words concerning my poetry or my lovebird have caused me a lot of grief. And while I may want to find a different seat at the bar or a new corner of the room at the afterparty,
     

    32

     
    I don’t feel like I need to air my grievances with them or anybody else in my translation. I’m just telling you. Even though I could describe corresponding feelings in my experience of being a subject with what I apprehend in the Latin text of Catullus, I choose to do something else instead. Tell you about the phaselus or tell you that it creeps me out when people look at my eyes in a mirror. Don’t do that when we’re talking near a mirror, okay? And in return, I’ll tell you a list of some of the names and epithets
     

    39

     
    It’s nite and plus I’m cooling with my arm around Calvus. My attorney calls, moans about sending me a book of poems. My feet up on the ottoman. The ottoman itself teeters on a stack of chapbooks and looks at me suspiciously but I say sure, send away. It comes from another client via courier, and I crack it. Wack! Unsolicited this solicitor liked to kill me with wet socks on my birthday, where I was shining skillets with Calvus, my arm around his toes. Now this book’s here, and the toes develop idiopathic acral ulcers. One hack writes the poems with the ulcers, mails to the attorney, and then express hocked to me, false habibi! So I secrete in the margins: I hate being a lawyer. What does it mean to “be a lawyer”?
     
    My job as a lawyer? Sure, but what about my life as a mom? Then I chuckle and purr. If the Lexus pulls up and Calvus is driving we’re going to the bookstore. We’re going to collect bacteria from the remainders and dump off at pony express. See you later, toilet poems. Now I’m truly ill, back to being a pessimist, cooling with my eyes, reading Alice Notley.
     

    40

     
    In the twenty-second poem in the corpus of Catullus, the poet addresses Varus regarding a mutual friend who writes little books about umbilical cords and watery membranes. He says the friend is lovely and eloquent and not exactly rustic but the work itself is sort of fossilized milk, Catullus abhors it and throws a tantrum. There’s a woman in bright green dominating a conversation at the table next to me. She’s talking about protein beverage. Loudly. And at length. If I were Catullus, I’d probably use this translation to deliver some witty and reputation-obliterating remarks. But videos show bats, scurrying around facts and nonfacts. They bite you and it gets infected. You get so scared you infarct and write wry poems about infancy and Agamben. Let’s make a pact. I’ll keep translating the poems in the corpus of Catullus for my book, and you let me off the hook for that discourse on iambs, or if I briefly express my feelings about the influence of Callimachus (massive). Call this book urbane, okay? My own head stuffed up my own backpack.
     

    41

     
    I forgot the name of my house. Lovers say it feels Tiburtine. Haters claim it’s Sabine (i.e. it contends with pigs). Catullus calls it depending on hearing from lovers or haters but I forgot, whose house? Mine, or Catullus’s house? Things get expelled from my thorax until it wilts, quits signing. Pelts, tracks, drinks—whatever, what I do in my house is unnamable. This is why I’m hot: choppy and long, loyal to stimulating one’s backpack. Here’s a lesson even the ancient Romans knew: if you’re going to constantly have dinner with poets, eventually you’ll have to read their books. That can peck your engines, grate your maximum. That can make you frequent ‘Tussin, track their sales on turtle time. I go to the library to make my decision. I go hungry.
     

    42

     
    Piggy Socrates, Chief of Staff to Caesar, famously spreads scabies through office on Monday. Press conference. Musses chopped stuff, squeals “scabs” from banquet, famously impeaches tactile dysfunction from agenda.
     

    43

     
    Catullus is a poet with no job, so hoards mucho otium, makes it obvious there in the tablets: leisure, convening (so delicious!), writing verses about writing verses with his phallus on the door of a bar, etc. Ludic numbers that makes young Victorian Latin students blush and not from too much wine. Not incensed, I do sense discrepancy about the sleep and the quiet and the limitlessness of the time Catullus has to hang with Licinus, trading licks (both verse-ish and tongue-ish.) If I feel physically as if the top of my head were taken off, I’m probably at work. Bummer patrol! Catullus in bed, his members post-poesy, half-dead like writing in a book. Dolors make him sweat, but it’s for dollars I perspire and expire. No bombs drop on my head except incendiary malinheritance. Beware the bombs brought on by gum disease: too much wine, not enough otium. Beware of dog. Beware of poor attendance at the play.
     

    44

     
    The Roman poet Catullus has no job, but the writing is what endures. Not the job. Not the scalp on the floor with brain barnacles. Is the writing labor or is it a hobby? Is fun labor? Is elocution? I’m writing to you, my friends. I’m just asking you to develop some categories regarding labor, fun, elocution. I’m actually not trying to make you all hate this book.
     

    45

     
    There’s no constraint on otium, so if some delicious opportunity emerges in the regime of wake-and-bake, Catullus is on it. I’ll undo the seashore from your door’s lock, unbutton the forest. I’ll lug plenty of lubricant and witticisms. I’ll fuck you once, but it will feel like nine fucks. When you want to get away, writing feels you. It’s always wandering; it’s always error in the other’s stupid mouth. Roman tunics, made of coarse wool, were not bonerproof. Poem’s proof.
     

    46

     
    The inane repetition of alienated labor is the opposite of what this translation is hoping to accomplish. So I go to work with the corpus of Catullus and splice my body: half eyestrain, half translator. Catullus and I meant to become professional Marxists, only something red-flagged in the interview process. Maybe it was the two thousands years that slipped between Catullus writing Sparrow and me writing The Poems of Gaius Valerius Catullus. The forty-sixth poem in his corpus is about the names of the wind, and their assistance to weary travelers. Weary laborers and their kneepads. Sore performative.
     

    47

     
    Flavius, your friend Catullus isn’t ill or inapt at elegance, so say where you’re at or I’ll take away your posse. Seriously, my fever is opprobrious theft, perpetuated by diligent shame at the top of the pyramid. There, just like in Mel Gibson’s Apocalypto, a clamor thumps the cubicles. Wretched perfumes. Detritus, or human heads, come rolling down, ghast-faced, and everybody totally freaks. You’re like me, pretending to favor inarticulate murmur over glory. What prevails is that I’ve never let you publish anything inept, and you’ve never let me fuck pandas. What we have is good: our wrists tied to a tree trunk, our friends hurling over the edges of cliffs, love sickness, me right in the middle of everything trying to give a poetry reading.
     

    48

     
    Alf forgets everything, including his days in the Melmac Orbit Guard so as a refresher, in song: when the proliferation of pre-emptive violence / meets technological advance too fast for its britches (ethics) / there’s going to be a lot of sentences / expressed in the genitive of regret. Alf, as is well known, hates Catullus and continually tries to eat him, which tremors in the placid family structure. The placid community structure developed by the poets in ancient Rome (all dance party, no reflection). But this is a fact: if the Obamas have a happy Valentines’ Day, we all have a happy Valentine’s Day. Even Alf. Even Catullus. In former times dictators dictated facts, and if one was “I love you” then “you” just got obliged. To service Caesar in the wave pool. Little kiddies nibbling on his bits. Little boom. Then a big boom.
     

    49

     

    for Norma Cole and in homage Bernadette Mayer

     
    A dog on the prowl when I’m walking through the mall. On the sign up sheet for kissing this juvenile, put me down for a milli at three cents per kiss. Then in the future I’ll put on those goat pants, and lay down in the dry, dense corn and say geez, that was a lot of kisses.
     

    50

     
    Dear God, it’s me, Catullus, except this time I’m talking to you as a virgin, in stanzas of three glyconics followed by a pherecratean, a metrical system found in the work of Anacreon (6th century b.c.e.). Each stanza observes synaphaea, or “fastening together”, and each glyconic ends with a syllable that is long. Halfway through the poem I start to talk about your name, and how powerful you are, and how you’re the moon and the vegetables I eat and really old, and sui generis, so spritely, so gentle.
     

    52

     
    Cato and the Giggle Twins joke around, jamming nitrous oxide in their ears and riding it out. Cato and Catullus, high and watching The Friday After Next. Trust them hunky egos. Hunky spittle spraying all over your spear!
     

    53

     
    The fifty-third poem in the corpus of Catullus relates an anecdote whose wit depends on a metonymy (a male friend of Catullus = a penis) and an ensuing metaphor (the “long speech” the friend gives = “lap dessert”). Get it?
     

    54

     
    It’s an interesting moment in Roman history, right before a revolution that Catullus will not live to see. The Roman poet Catullus, after all, dies at 30, years before Caesar tosses dice, white river rafts on the Rubicon, lets his fascist flag fly. Later poets lament the loss of potential hilarity due to the imperator overtaking the power of the Senate. Ovid, for example, has to write epics of exile and loss longer than the entire corpus of Catullus, who called Caesar himself like a lecherous pedophile and got invited to dinner afterwards.
     

    55

     
    Okay, I floss for juveniles. I do it for ass. It’s my mode. And if you want to feud about it, I suggest you check my back catalog. Like when I dissed Midas and hit him with a mallet and serviced his neck and his neck area. I love these juveniles. I collect them. And when one asks me, but what about the reader, the one who wants to feud? She’s not so bad, is he? That’s when I go into the elevator and hit Penthouse. I serve stamen, it’s a habit. Oops, that’s not neck area that’s no piggybank.
     

    56

     
    (some missing lines here) Finnegan Crete doesn’t put a pin-up of Perseus on the Pegasus Ferrari (some missing lines here) and doesn’t want to cite Big A on plump-a-dump over there who’s not only volatile but venting. Ad hoc group against discussions of Catullus (some missing lines here) on one’s medulla there’s an omnibus, and on one’s languor there’s FEAR peruses mandate, FEAR (some missing lines here) your query sucks: TGIF.
     

    60

     
    And then it’s all over, Catullus’ book Sparrow. It ends with an epic metaphor comparing the cruelty of the lover to the teeth of a lion. Then it ends the same way it started. It asks a question, stated in the rhetoric of feigned aporia: What kind of mind is it that can hold a voice in contempt? What kind of cardiac wildness?
     

    Brandon Brown is from Kansas City, Missouri and has lived in San Francisco since 1998. His first two books are forthcoming: The Persians By Aeschylus (Displaced) and The Poems Of Gaius Valerius Catullus (Krupskaya). These two works, along with a new and unpublished piece C Baudelaire Le Vampire 11,000% Slower, are conceptual translations that privilege the visibility of the translator. They are, in part, the material product of a decade-long performance project centered around language acquisition (currently including Latin, Greek, Sanskrit, and Arabic). He has also published several chapbooks, including Memoirs Of My Nervous Illness (Cy Press), 908-1078 (Transmission), and Wondrous Things I Have Seen (Mitsvah Chaps). His work has also appeared in journals, including War and Peace, Brooklyn Rail, Supermachine, and Mrs. Maybe. In 2004-05 he co-curated the Performance Writing series at New Langton Arts and in 2008-09 the New Reading Series at 21 Grand at 21 Grand. He has been blogger in residence for the Poetry Project and the San Francisco Museum of Modern Art. He also publishes small press chapbooks under the imprint OMG!
     

  • On Brandon Brown, “Sparrow,” from The Poems of Gaius Valerius Catullus

    Judith Goldman (bio)
    University of Chicago
    jgoldman1@uchicago.edu

     

     

    Vivamus, mea Lesbia, atque amemus,
    rumoresque senum severiorum
    omnes unius aestimemus assis!
    soles occidere et redire possunt;
    nobis cum semel occidit brevis lux,
    nox est perpetua una dormienda.
    da mi basia mille, deinde centum;
    dein mille altera, dein secunda centum;
    deinde usque altera mille, deinde centum.
    dein, cum milia multa fecerimus,
    conturbabimus illa, ne sciamus,
    aut ne quis malus invidere possit,
    cum tantum sciat esse basiorum.
     

    Revive my lovebird. I’ve got an aim to muss. Sure, the rumors will sound severe, but right now sock it to me with your duende. We’ll fiercely cum a million times. Then we’ll…Catullus asserts that he and the lovebird will kiss many thousands of times and then he shall conturbabimus them. Conturbabimus literally means something like “to throw into a mob.” Some scholars interpret this as referring to an image in which Catullus counts his kisses on an abacus, which can then be violently thrown into disarray. I suggest that conturbabimus is a metaphor for confounding the coinage. The economic standard in disarray, the society “loses count.”

     
    Brandon Brown’s translation of Catullus 5—possibly the most famous and most translated lyric of the Catullus corpus—recalls Yves Bonnefoy’s (translated) bon mot declaring translation a matter of declaration: “You can translate by simply declaring one poem the translation of another” (186). Bonnefoy was thinking of Wladimir Weidlé’s joke that Baudelaire’s “Je n’ai pas oublié, voisine de la ville…” is a translation of Pushkin (186). The connection between Brown’s text and its inciting site involves much more than Weidlé’s near whimsical (if intuitively insightful) positing of a similarity of tone or approach, its hint at unconscious influence. Yet to call “Revive my lovebird” a translation is clearly a provocation.
     
    It would be easier to call Brown’s work an “adaptation.” Currently, this term is most often applied to derivative works that change the medium and/or genre of the original and thus occasion more or less significant changes to that work.1 Such transformations are at times produced out of reflections on different modes of fidelity or infidelity and the politics of their (im)possibility—for instance, Mieke Bal’s new films, which attempt in their formal features to approximate the accented translation of displaced speakers talking in an unfamiliar hegemonic language.2 “Adaptation” becomes “appropriation” in works that critique originals they confiscate and dramatically chop, distend, and otherwise re-imagine for political purposes, often to countermand the silencing or other oppression of the subaltern in the original work (such as Jean Rhys’s Wide Sargasso Sea or J.M. Coetzee’s Foe).3 When used to label intra-generic, intra-linguistic translations that edit or add to originals or that do not exchange languages at the level of lexia, however, “adaptation” can function as a pejorative term, as it does in Atoine Berman’s discussion of “the system of textual deformation that operates in every translation” (286). While no process of translation can be entirely free of unconscious linguistic resistances that lead translators to domesticate the foreign, as Berman suggests, some translations—particularly those he calls “adaptations”—lack concern for neutralizing foreign-ness: “the play of deforming forces is freely exercised,” he writes, in “ethnocentric, annexationist translations and hypertextual translations (pastiche, imitation, adaptation, free rewriting)” (286).
     
    Brown comments that conturbabimus signifies “throwing into a mob”; as bookkeeping jargon, the word conjures an image of deranging the counters of an abacus when a calculation is being made.4 As he goes on to say, “I suggest that conturbabimus is a metaphor for confounding the coinage. The economic standard in disarray, the society ‘loses count.’” Brown’s discursive detour into commentary after a spate of largely homophonic translation (translation that, relying on sound, substitutes homophones in the translating language–more on this below) points not only to the latent allegory related to the poem’s content and form embedded in Catullus’s suggestive word but to its allegorization of Brown’s activity as translator. Along with other trivia the poet famously inflates, kissing is a hot topic in Catullus’s corpus, one he takes up in regard to both a male and a female partner and that does not sit easily with constructions of masculinity in late Republican Rome. Indeed, kissing—unlike the oral, anal, and vaginal sex Catullus elsewhere graphically and copiously figures as the prerogative of the aggressive male—at least potentially involves a mutual exchange. Ironically, then, kissing is itself an equivalence that upsets the normative rates of Roman gender exchange, just as an infinity of such kisses becomes the sublime other of number altogether, destroying accountability. This infinity of kisses is echoed formally in Catullus’s lyric, whose repetitive language becomes so intensively formalized and formulaic that its density approaches formlessness. So over-inscribed, libidinality is pathless, infinite—reading may wander at will and no matter wind up mid-kiss.
     
    The general economy Catullus doubly inscribes is further enacted by Brown’s translation, with its similar disruption of translation’s economic standard of equivalency (translation as the reproduction of meaning as truth). If Brown’s redoubtable homophonic translation on the one hand challenges the separability of materiality and meaning, on the other, in prioritizing materiality, it emphasizes an excess irreducible to meaning as the communication of lexical values. In keeping with this general economy of the signifier, Brown’s aside on Catullus’s trope as corroding calculable restraints on kisses also alludes to his translation as the vehicle of a supplement, not an equivalent: if, as Lawrence Venuti so persuasively theorizes, a translation, with its connotative network, conveys a domesticating remainder, a translation can also attempt to turn this loss of the foreign against the target language by somehow making that remainder a vehicle of foreignness.5 Such attempts can never be standardized, just as their successful results emphasize the qualitative differential that mandates equivalence in the first place.
     
    As Walter Benjamin and other theorists of translation have passionately argued, a translation should register the shock of the foreign in the translating language; just as importantly, a translation must work to analogize, in its own linguistic environs and with its own linguistic resources, the derangements the foreign text introduces within its “proper” linguistic economy, its otherness in its own context.6 In its attraction and attention not just to the otherness of the corpus of Catullus, but also to what might be called its peculiarities (its exquisite perversities), and in the multitude of strategies it uses to convey that foreignness and differential specificity—that is, because and not despite its divagations—Brown’s text emerges as a translation par excellence. Brown’s translations of Catullus powerfully throw down a response to the challenge posed by Charles Bernstein “[to take] translation as its own medium … what is the translation doing that can’t be done in any other medium?” (65).
     
    Brown’s translation of Catullus follows upon non-standard renderings by two heroic poets of the North American avant-garde, Louis Zukofsky and Bernadette Mayer, both major influences on Brown’s poetics tout court.
     
    Zukofsky spent almost ten years (1958-1966) on his quite famous and infamous translation of the complete corpus. The work was a collaboration with his wife Celia, who provided Zukofsky with a pony, or rough literal translation, of Catullus’s Latin lines, along with metrical notes.7 Zukofsky in turn produced versions of the lyrics that, beyond very strongly privileging sound and rhythm, attempted the seemingly impossible: he created verses using English homophones for Latin phonemes while concomitantly honoring or, rather, often sharply interpreting, the Latin’s meaning. Zukofsky’s “breathing with” Catullus, as David Wray has argued, presents a radical undoing of sound-sense dualism, a way of enacting “a materialist view of language that refuses to attribute to speech any level of meaning transcendently separate from its availability to the senses” (“‘cool rare air’” 82). If Zukofsky’s “ars amatoria was also an ars poetica,” Wray suggests, both implied “an epistemology at once sensuous and intellective, according to which caring implies loving entails knowing effects keeping of a kind that by definition eternizes the thing kept” (79). Zukofsky’s translation, which also relies on graphic equivalences, preservation of Latin syntax, and tricky experimentation with quantitative verse in English, thus affirms “a drive toward the condition of totality instantiated by … a human language” (75).8
     
    Editor (with Vito Acconci) of the journal 0-9 (1972-4) and (with Lewis Warsh) of United Artists Press, and director of the Poetry Project in New York in the 1980s, Bernadette Mayer has been profoundly influenced in her poetry and in her diaristic, epistolary, essay, and inter-genre (in short, exceedingly polymorphous) writing by her study of Greek and Latin literature, which began in Catholic school and continued, as a mode of collaboration, camaraderie, and inspiration, throughout her life. Mayer’s Eruditio ex Memoria (1977), based on class notes from her educational history, is in a way an intellectual autobiography, yet it is also an erudite interrogation, deconstruction, and satire of erudition (see Gordon). The book examines the historical and other connections among languages (including mathematical language) in the abstract while it traverses privileged verbal objects in many languages, framing them both as media for constructing and conveying information, knowledge, tradition, authority, and value, and as materials essentially ruining any straightforward metaphysics, seeing as the thinkers run together hardly agree on the boundaries between the concrete and the ideal, the practical and the philosophical, triviality and profundity, etc. At one point in her translation, Mayer breaks into notes that translate Catullus 5 itself:
     

    “Vivamus mea Lesbia…!” Sound: look for elisions, running feet, connotative words (conturbabimus, dormienda) predominance of a’s, m’s. “Vivamus mea Lesbia atque amemus…” balanced ideas in a balanced construction, placing of words first for emphasis (Omnes, Soles Nobis, Nox), structural shifts in tone., Imagery: “Lesbia” – “senum”; brevis lux et perpetua nox mille…centum, tantum. The mysteriousness of others, “rumores… invicere,” “senum severiorum,” “nequis malus,” the evil-eyed world, the cruel and severe old world, Catullus and Lesbia, “my beautiful love,” “gratum est” and “tua opera” (by your doing)…
     

    (Eruditio)

     

    Mayer has not translated Catullus as a corpus; her translations and imitations of individual lyrics are mainly concentrated in The Formal Field of Kissing (1990). The slim volume takes its title from a phrase in her version of Catullus 48, another statement of the poet’s insatiable appetite for kisses unaccountable: “I’d kiss your eyes three hundred thousand times/If you would let me, Juventius/ …even if the formal field of kissing/ Had more kisses than there’s corn in August’s fields/I still wouldn’t have had enough of you” (3). If the rendering is a faithful, more standard translation,9 many of Mayer’s Catullus poems are condensations of originals or imitations, as with “Hendecasyllables on Catullus #33”:

     

    You have the balls to say you will be with me
    but you hardly ever are, then you say you’re scared
    of your parents’ opinion, they pay your rent
    I wouldn’t mind that if they didn’t think I
    was a whore ridden with Aids disease & worse things
    but I am I and my little dog knows me
    in the most astonishingly bourgeois way
    I even pay my self-employment tax now
    and put leftovers into expensive tinfoil
    to be used in imaginable tomorrows
    therefore I protest my bad reputation
    but I do wander all night in my vision.

    (27)

     

    As do his urban sensibility and penchant for dropping personal details that signify both socially and more sentimentally, Catullus’s vulgar and sublime eroticism permeates Mayer’s oeuvre, while she also appropriates his images and tropes, his lyric immediacy and address, his play with register and technique, as in “Sonnet”: “My hand’s your hand within this rhyme/ You look at me this is all fucked up time/ I’m just a sparrow done up to be/ An Amazon or something and he? or thee?” (Sonnets 37); and in “Sonnet”: “So long honey, don’t ever come around again, I’m sick of you/ & of your friends, you take up all my time & I don’t write/ Poems cause I spend all my time wanting to fuck you” (Sonnets 64).

     
    Known for their economy, intricacy, and elegance, if also for their irresistible naughtiness, Catullus’s poems were celebrated in the culture in which he wrote them, late Republican Rome (first century BCE). His extant corpus comprises 116 poems, split into 3 sections: the first 60 are known as the polymetrics (there are actually 57 of them, as 18-20 are considered spurious); the next 8 are longer poems, 7 hymns and an epyllion (mini-epic); and the last 48 are epigrams (including the famous “Odi et amo”).
     
    This selection from Brown’s translation is taken from the polymetrics, which may have circulated in Catullus’s time under the moniker “Sparrow,” as “passer” is the first word of the first poem after the dedicatory lyric. Catullus’s two poems on Lesbia’s pet bird are among his best known, and Brown, with this reception history in mind, dilates his translation through the metonym of the “sparrow.” In fact, he extravagantly undoes Catullus’s triangulation in these particular poems of his relation to Lesbia through the bird by collapsing Lesbia herself into the “lovebird,” a move that amplifies the already spectacularized raging ambivalence of Catullus’s cathexis to the treacherous love object who spurned him (consider, for instance, that the bird dies, occasioning a mock elegy).
     
    Split into 60 prose poems that do not literally correspond to the “Sparrow” section’s 60 lyrics, but rather obsess around their anima and ethos, Brown’s translations fantasticate largely by means of Catullus’s central concerns: masculinity, affect, performance, text as corpus and corpus as text, and literary and social form. The “original” Catullus 16 threatens, with a sound face- and ass-fucking, a couple of frenemies who accuse the poet of spoiling his masculinity through his erotic poetry, which stages a seemingly effete conturbation of his desire. The poem is commonly taken to state Catullus’s sense of the separation between performative literary persona and authentic actual person.10 Yet given the radically status-oriented character of culture in Rome at this time, its will to make signify every matter and manner, reflexive performativity is rather a total social fact that Catullus’s poems in general comment on and participate in with an especial bravura that Brown draws out, particularly in relation to masculinity.
     
    As Elizabeth Young’s extraordinary recent revisioning of Catullan poetics elucidates, an important element of the ongoing drama of Catullan machismo is Catullus’s own acts of translation, as Brown’s meta-translative posturing, among other strategies, makes manifest (The Mediated Muse). Bringing the geo-political shifts, social dynamics, and material culture of the Catullan moment to bear on his lyrics, Young persuasively demonstrates that the poems self-consciously style themselves as contact zones, sites where the work of acculturating the foreign fetishes flooding the capital was done. Re-coding the foreign to give it recognizable cultural capital required laundering foreign-ness as an imaginary, valorized “Greek-ness,” in that the cultural patrimony of the Greeks was highly prized by the Romans and was utterly foundational to elite Latin culture, especially since Greece had come under Roman control. Catullus’s poems are not only filled with such Hellenized objects, as Young argues, but style themselves literally and seductively as Greek trinkets or “trifles”: they use Greek meters and literary forms, quote Greek texts, make elaborate use of Grecisms, and perform the passionate affects of Greek lyricism. Though a sense of mastery and propriety over the Grecian was de rigueur for elite Roman men, this intimacy with Hellenic aesthetics could also be seen as an embodiment of Greek effeminacy. As a social climber from an elite provincial family and literary avant-gardiste—thus an expert in the manipulation of codes and the ultimate purveyor of urbanitas—Catullus was able nonetheless to bend this exotic aesthetic towards the consolidation of a new form of Roman masculinity that he and his poems approximated.
     
    Such forging of lyric manhood through translation-cum-code-switching-and-laundering is in part translated by Brown through virtuosic play with many speech genres and registers, particularly his incorporation of the rhetoric and prosody of hip-hop (for instance, the traces of Kanye West’s “Gold Digger” as Brown mouths, “We want pre-up”): this is not only an appropriate choice in light of Catullus’s taste for invective and verbal virtuosity, but also because it is the contemporary American-imperial performative masculinity most prone to borrowing in the service of consolidating gender capital. And just as we find the obtruding character of the translator himself absorbed into the poetic persona he translates, Brown both reflexively performs Catullan gender performativity and refuses to disavow it disaffectedly. Despite the heavy irony gathering around the ever-more ostentatious and imaginative misogyny he weaves by supplementing the text of Catullan affect, the translator’s own corpus as text, text as corpus remains self-implicated in the errancies of radical ambivalence.
     
    Though I know he would object, that seems yet another version of Brown’s translational fidelity.
     

    Judith Goldman is a Harper Schmidt fellow and collegiate assistant professor at the University of Chicago, teaching in the arts humanities core and in creative writing. She is the author of Vocoder (Roof 2001), DeathStar/rico-chet (O Books 2006), “the dispossessions” (atticus/finch 2009), and l.b.; or, catenaries (forthcoming, Krupskaya 2011). She co-edited the annual journal War and Peace with Leslie Scalapino from 2005-2009. Currently, she is working on mixing composed recorded sound and live sound, poet’s theater and other performance work, and multi-media works.
     

    Notes

     
    1. See Part I of Julie Sanders, Adaptation and Appropriation.

     

     
    2. This is discussed throughout Mieke Bal, “Translating Translation.”

     

     
    3. These well-known examples are given in Sanders.

     

     
    4. Garrison notes that the word is borrowed from bookkeeping jargon (97). See also Wray, Catullus (149).

     

     
    5. On the “general economy” of the signifier, see Steve McCaffery (204). The “domesticating remainder” is largely at issue in Lawrence Venuti, “Translation, Community, Utopia.”

     

     
    6. Philip E. Lewis examines this issue throughout “The Measure of Translation Effects.”

     

     
    7. See Jeffrey Twitchell-Waas’s “Catullus” entry in Z-Site: A Companion to the Works of Louis Zukofsky. A home recording of Zukofsky reading his homophonic translations of most of the polymetrics section of Catullus can be found online at PennSound.

     

     
    8. See also Jack Foley, “Taking Liberties: Louis Zukofsky.” As Foley points out, “Zukofsky’s Catullus insists on both the similarity of his American English to the Latin and its utter, appalling distance.”

     

     
    9. See Mayer’s explanation at a 1987 reading of the poem at Naropa, available at PennSound.

     

     
    10. See Julia Haig Gaisser on Catullus 16 in Catullus 47-50. See also Garrison’s commentary on Catullus 16, 104.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Bal, Mieke. “Translating Translation.” Journal of Visual Culture 6.1 (2007): 109-124. Print.
    • Berman, Antoine. “Translation and the Trials of the Foreign.” Trans. and ed. Lawrence Venuti. The Translation Studies Reader. 2nd ed. London: Routledge, 2004. 276-295. Print.
    • Bernstein, Charles. “Breaking the Translation Curtain: The Homophonic Sublime.” L’Esprit Créateur 38.4 (1998): 64-70. Print.
    • Bonnefoy, Yves. “Translating Poetry.” Theories of Translation: An Anthology of Essays from Dryden to Derrida. Eds. Reiner Schulte and John Biguenet. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1992. 186-192. Print.
    • Foley, Jack. “Taking Liberties: Louis Zukofsky” Rev. of Louis Zukofsky, Selected Poems. Contemporary Poetry Review, 2007. Web. 23 December 2010.
    • Gaisser, Julia Haig. Catullus. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2007. Print.
    • Garrison, Daniel H. and Gaius Valerius Catullus. The Student’s Catullus. 3rd ed. Tulsa: U of Oklahoma P, 2004. Print.
    • Gordon, Nada. “Form’s Life: An Exploration of the Works of Bernadette Mayer.” MA thesis. University of California, Berkeley, 1986. Web. 23 December 2010.
    • Lewis, Philip E. “The Measure of Translation Effects.” Ed. Lawrence Venuti. The Translation Studies Reader. 2nd ed. London: Routledge, 2004. 256-275. Print.
    • Mayer, Bernadette. “Catullus #48.” Mayer Author Page. PennSound. Web. 23 December 2010.
    • ———. Eruditio ex Memoria (1977). Facsimile ed. Editions Eclipse. Department of English University of Utah. Web. 23 December 2010.
    • ———. The Formal Field of Kissing: Translations, Imitation, Epigrams. New York: Catchword Papers, 1990. Print.
    • ———. Sonnets. New York: Tender Buttons, 1989. Print.
    • McCaffery, Steve. North of Intention: Critical Writings, 1973-1986. 2nd ed. New York: Roof Books, 2000. Print.
    • Sanders, Julie. Adaptation and Appropriation. London: Routledge, 2006. Print.
    • Twitchell-Waas, Jeffrey. “Catullus (1969) with Celia Zukofsky.” Z-Site: A Companion to the Works of Louis Zukofsky. Web. 23 December 2010.
    • Venuti, Lawrence. “Translation, Community, Utopia.” The Translation Studies Reader. Ed. Lawrence Venuti. 2nd ed. London: Routledge, 2004. 482-501. Print.
    • Wray, David. Catullus and the Poetics of Roman Manhood. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2001. Print.
    • ———. “‘cool rare air’: Zukofsky’s Breathing with Catullus and Plautus.” Chicago Review 50.2-4 (Winter 2004). 52-99. Print.
    • Young, Elizabeth. The Mediated Muse: Catullan Lyricism and Roman Translation. Diss. University of California, Berkeley, 2008. Web. 23 December 2010.
    • Zukofsky, Lewis. Catullus. New York: Viking Press, 1969. Print.
    • ———. “Zukofsky’s Homemade Tape Recordings of Catullus 1-46, November 11, 1961.” Zukofsky Author Page. PennSound. Web. 23 December 2010.

     

  • Coloring Between the Lines of Punk and Hardcore: From Absence to Black Punk Power

    David Ensminger (bio)
    Lee College
    davidae43@hotmail.com

    Abstract
     
    For three decades, African Americans have often been depicted in the popular press and in independent media as embodying the legacy of a hip hop nation, which the media would signify as an urban, misogynist, and materialistic musical genre and lifestyle. Such representation diminishes or negates, through absence or scant coverage, African American participation in punk and rock’n’roll. In doing so, the media perpetuates hegemonic notions of African Americans as a homogeneous community without nuance and individuation. This essay interrogates the misconception that punk is essentially a white (or Anglo) Do-it-Yourself participatory subculture, and argues that the neglect of a mixed, diverse, and inclusive punk history demonstrates that African American punk cultural productions are undervalued, absent, or deleted. Such interrogation leads to what Stuart Hall has termed “making stereotypes uninhabitable” in his lecture, “Representation and Media” (1997). The essay reclaims the roles of people of color in punk, thus undermining fixed, normative assumptions about race in American pop culture, rendering them unstable and arbitrary. Rewriting punk music as a transhistorical, crosscultural, and synergistic negotiation between African American and Anglo music cultures creates new potentials for meaning and a mode of empowerment for a generation previously unaware of punk’s truly democratic ethos.
     

    “There aren’t any blacks.”
     

    —”Slam Dancing: Checking in With L.A. Punk.” Woody Hochswender. 1981. Rolling Stone.

     

    “A large number of hardcore people in New York are Hispanic, black, oriental, and Jewish.…”
     

    —the editorial staff of Guillotine (#8), 1984.

     

    “There is no hint of any derivation from Black music.”
     

    —”England’s Screaming: The Music.” Greg Shaw, Bomp, Nov 1977.

     

    “Punk is white and suburban.”
     

    —Mykel Board, Maximumrocknroll. 1986.

     
    For three decades, African Americans have often been depicted in mainstream and even independent media almost exclusively as embodying the living legacy of a hip hop nation, signified by such media as an urban, often misogynist and materialistic, “street level” musical genre and lifestyle. Such representation effectively diminishes, or even negates, through absence or scant coverage, their contemporary influence on rock ‘n’ roll and punk. In doing so, the media perpetuates hegemonic, master narrative notions of blacks as a homogeneous community, easily containable “others” without nuance and individuation. I seek to interrogate the common misconception of punk, essentially a Do-it-Yourself and participatory subculture, as a white (or Anglo) cultural phenomenon.
     
    As Daniel Traber notes, the very nature of punk within the commodity market echoes black culture; punk established a permanent alternative to the corporate apparatus of the mainstream music industry by returning to a system of independent labels that resembled the distribution of post-World War II “race music” that influenced the white rockers of the 1950s (32). As punk writer Chris Salewicz posits, “more important is the way punk still is presented, which is through the rootsiest musical business set-up that exists outside of reggae.” Members of the Bellrays—guitarist Tony Fate and singer Lisa Kekaula—suggest that punk’s roots go as far back as 1918 and include Louis Armstrong and Duke Ellington, while Mike Watt, former bass player for the Minutemen, links his own tour circuit and DIY ethos back to vaudeville and burlesque (Testa). Bruce Davis attests that the Ramones were “like the jazz musicians of the 1950s and the blues players of the 1960s who would play in clubs to a relatively small devoted following, and then go to Europe where they’d be greeted as heroes” (10). Vic Bondi, singer for Articles of Faith (a 1980s Chicago band with a taste for reggae, funk, and three-guitar hardcore punk agility), suggests that punk gave people a voice to counter and denounce their oppression, an ethic that links back to jazz and slave hollers.
     
    The discussion and assertion of a rich, complex, and nuanced black presence in punk rock frays the assumptions about punk rock being centered in a fixed, natural, and normalized white presence, assumptions cemented through a popular discourse that in effect undervalues or negates all other cultures present in punk. Such interrogation of stereotypes leads to what Stuart Hall describes as “making stereotypes uninhabitable” in his lecture “Representation and the Media” (1997). My emphasis on reclaiming the roles of people of color in punk is an attempt to undermine these stereotypes and assumptions and to create new potentials for meaning and empowerment for a generation unaware of punk’s diversity.
     
    Such intent was partly established very early on in punk media. In Ink Disease, a fanzine from the early 1980s, Franz Stahl from the mixed race Washington D.C. band Scream argues, “There are certainly more Blacks in punk than there are in rock’n’roll.” His bandmate and brother Peter, the singer, responds: “Blacks aren’t exposed to it. The only exposure they get is from the media. It’s all twisted and distorted … I think it’s just a prime example of this whole country, it’s basically just as racist as when the Emancipation Proclamation was first signed.” This racism might manifest itself as a sometime invisible barrier, as noted by bass player Skeeter. When asked by Flipside interviewer Donny the Punk how being black affects his relationship to the hardcore punk scene, Skeeter responds, “It’s different. You notice it every time you walk into a town. There’s always some sort of hesitation. I feel a certain pressure, there’s a block there, a wall.” Perhaps the reclamation of punk history can become a way to unmask, understand, and destabilize this “wall” of ambivalence and racism.
     
    Often racialized and derided as white rebel music without much cause, punk music has been far more multicultural than the genres of power pop, heavy metal, or even early hip hop. This, in turn, challenges David James’s notion that L.A. hardcore was a “white musical production” (167). Instead, I imagine hardcore and punk as a convergence culture that provided a space for participants like black lesbian female skater and drummer Mad Dog from the Controllers to reassert the flux and freedom of black identity in American music and culture. The presence of such African American punks is neither homogenized nor fixed. In fact, Mad Dog, who joined the Controllers even after Lorna from the Germs claimed they were racists (partly because bassist bass player DOA Dan painted a swastika on his chest), once told Maximumrocknroll that she is a “white man trapped in a black woman’s body. You have to print that and if people don’t get it, well then, fuck them.” Such statements may seem strangely assimilationist, or marked by a sense of transexuality, but I argue differently. Mad Dog’s persona reflects Traber’s notion of transgression—challenging the social order’s core stable narrative—perhaps even accidentally, by revealing that each and every identity is a performance, replete with a costume (Whiteness 181 n.15). Thus Mad Dog offers a critique of prescribed cultural restraints.
     
    Mad Dog (Carla Duplantier), a New Yorker transplanted to Los Angeles, worked for the postal office and first heard punk rock via KROQ FM’s Rodney on the Roq, which spun tunes like the Ramones’s “Sheena is a Punk Rocker” in 1977. She promptly bought the single at Bomp Records, which was a store, fanzine, and record label behind local heroes like the Weirdos and Germs. A longtime skateboarder and drummer fond of Jon Bonham (Led Zeppelin) and Mitch Mitchell (Jimi Hendrix), she quickly learned songs by Blondie and Dead Boys and befriended Kira Roessler (future Sexsick and Black Flag bass player). Witnessing shows by West Coast legends like the Skulls and Avengers, she become a resident rocker at the Hollywood club The Masque and joined the Controllers, who released the EP Suburban Suicide (Siamese, 1978) with her on drum kit. She later played with the .45s, Skull Control, Legal Weapon, and The Leaving Trains. During the 1980s, she rooted herself in England, where she gained the attention of Malcolm McLaren, who managed her band Jimmy the Hoover. Having opened for Bow Wow Wow, Jimmy the Hoover were first signed by Innervision, a label affiliated with CBS, where they released the single “Tantalise” and reached #18 on the charts, which led to two appearances on Top of the Pops. Not unlike the syncretic sounds of Shriekback, they effused pop flair; Third World stylings and rhythm care of Flinto Chandia, their Zambian bass player-cum-multi-instrumentalist; and basic dance-floor grooves.
     
    Undoubtedly, African Americans have been an essential force shaping rock music since they carved a classic form from a combination of sped-up blues, boogie-woogie big band piano, and rollicking rhythm and blues. Chuck Berry, Big Mama Thornton (“Hound Dog”), and Little Richard (“Tutti Frutti,” later reworked as “Tofutti” by the hardcore band MDC) were powerful musical engines that energized the form with gusto, panache, and deep dynamic skills.1 Malcolm McLaren, manager for the Sex Pistols, acknowledged in an interview with Greg Stacy that, “I never really believed that anybody was gonna write anything better than ‘Johnny B. Goode’ … [the Sex Pistols were] still in the very basic, raw, old-fashioned format, verse-chorus, middle eight, blah blah blah, R & B, Chuck Berry chords.” This appears to reinforce the insight of one rock ‘n’ roll social historian who also recognizes a “repetitive blues-based guitar solo” on “God Save the Queen,” which is nonetheless “harmonically more complex than most blues.” He also posits that The Clash dabbled in “Berry-style classic rock” on “Brand New Cadillac” and a Bo Diddley beat on “Hateful” (Friedlander 254, 257). Understood in such a context, British punk’s “ground zero” (from 1976) bands were still indebted to black music.
     
    I rely on Dick Hebdige’s claim that “Black cultural forms (e.g. music) continue to exercise a major determining influence over the development of each subcultural style” as a cornerstone of my own theory (Subculture 73). Hebdige posits that each subculture from Mods to punks practices syncretic or hybrid tendencies, including re-working elements torn from a parent or dominant culture. This is especially evident in the semiotics of fashion—in “the idea of style as a form of Refusal”—when it reveals “maps of meaning” that offend the silent majority’s unity and cohesion (2, 18). As such, the music itself becomes a patchwork, a zone of convergence and negotiation, in which black forms become “imported,” mutating into the signifying soundtrack of the subculture, which demands new configurations (68-69). Punks were often enamored with reggae and black culture: on clothes featured in their photo for the “White Riot” single, The Clash featured phrases such as “Heavy Manners” and “Heavy Duty Discipline,” which alluded to Prince Far I’s single “Heavy Manners / Heavy Discipline” (Heavy Duty, 1976) and to repressive politics and security measures in Jamaica. The photograph itself, featuring the band pushed up against a wall, is an homage to the album State of Emergency (Record Globe, 1976) by reggae artist Joe Gibbs and the Professionals (Gray 223). Black DJ and filmmaker Don Letts avidly spun reggae records in clubs like the Roxy, the former gay-turned-punk club featuring flyers made by black artist Barry Jones. Punk bands covered soul and reggae songs in live sets, singles, and albums, played alongside them, politicized their worldviews in somewhat parallel fashion, offended “normal” society with their gear and clothing, and even joined together in street actions. Like their black brethren, punks attempted to seek autonomy and agency, though eventually their most rebellious forms, such as the style of bands like X Ray Spex, became part of the commodity landscape—neutered, assimilated, and perhaps finally recuperating portions of hegemony or capitalism. Hebdige’s work nevertheless has its limitations. He neither addresses songs as texts nor takes an ethnographic approach to interviewing participants, nor does he describe black/West Indian culture at length. While his book teems with analysis of subculture rituals as class resistance, descriptions of dominant culture remain slim. The context is hazy.
     
    Countercultural icon and music critic Lester Bangs, once yelled at by New York City punks for playing Otis Redding at a loft party in the 1970s, adored the Clash. In the 1979 essay “White Noise Supremacists,” he admits that in an earlier essay in Creem magazine, he attempted a Lenny Bruce-style method of “defusing epithets” by reclaiming them:
     

    Now, as we all know, white hippies and beatniks before them would never have existed had there not been a whole generational subculture with a gnawing yearning to be nothing less than the downest baddest niggers… Everybody has been walking around for the last year or so acting like faggots ruled the world, when in actuality it’s the niggers who control and direct everything just as it always has been and properly should be.

     

    Yet by the time he authored “White,” he regretted these same turns-of-phrase and his impromptu late-night party sessions when he would belt out mock blues like: “Sho’ wish ah wuz a nigger / Then mah dick’d be bigger.” The article candidly unveils Bangs’s realization that he blundered; moreover, he further suggests that racism is like a virus that infects invisibly, can cloud the brain, and can push poor judgment to the surface during moments of distress or clumsiness: “You don’t have to try at all to be a racist. It’s a little coiled clot of venom lurking there in all of us, white and black, goy and Jew, ready to strike out when we feel embattled, belittled, brutalized. Which is why it has to be monitored, made taboo and restrained, by society and the individual.”

     
    This forthright cautionary tale might have been the result of Bangs having heard Andy Shernoff of the punk band Dictators calling Camp Runamuck the place “where Puerto Ricans are kept until they learn to be human” (likely not less ambiguous than Adam Ant’s controversial song “Puerto Rican,” with its lyric “greasy haired dagos”). The essay also may be a response to the “cartoony” band Shrapnel, which was fingered as “proto-fascist” by music critic Robert Christgau and featured Legs McNeil of PUNK fanzine. McNeil spouted songs like “Hey Little Gook” from stage and years later told writer Jon Savage that the original group of New York punks “were going: ‘Fuck the Blues: fuck the black experience’” (qtd. in Savage 123). Such antipathy was not the sole provenance of New York City, for in England, the band the Models produced a hand drawn flyer for a Roxy gig in 1977 that promised “No reviving of Old R + B” and a “Nazi party.” Luckily, none of these actions overshadows the fact that black, white, and Hispanic musicians were converging in punk.
     
    Female punk pioneer Poly Styrene from X Ray Spex, who was raised by mixed Somali-English parents, became a pivotal figure. According to Public Image bass player Jah Wobble, during the early punk era she was considered “a strange girl” who spoke openly about hallucinating and “freaked Johnny [Rotten of the Sex Pistols] out” (qtd. in Raha 88). Greil Marcus problematically describes her voice as being able to disinfect a toilet, whereas Karina Eileraas explains that girl bands often use the ugly voice as a tool for
     

    cathartic expression; a means to articulate the “self” while acknowledging that it is a site of fiction, contest, incoherence, social inscription, and performativity. Girl bands use their voice as weapons … the “ugly” voice also constitutes a form of revolt against the grammar and syntax of phallogocentrism … to remind us that language [like punk itself] is always pregnant with impurity.
     

    (125-126)

     

    If her voice was impure as a toilet, then that was her weapon of choice against the plastic world of pop music. She was unpretty and unbound.

     
    Judith Halberstam has referenced Styrene’s lyric “I’m a reject and I don’t care” to illustrate punk’s “stylized and ritualized language of the rejected.” And Steve Rubio argues that Styrene’s other exhortation to “Bondage Up Yours,” perhaps the band’s most notorious single, still reverberates throughout pop culture:
     

    The cultural force of “Oh Bondage!” in 1977 was empowering: the stagnation of the mid-70s, economic, artistic, psychic and social, was confronted with a NO so emphatic it became an affirmation, an insistence that things did not have to remain as they were … We love Rhino Records [which reissued the song], because we get one last chance to stare down bondage, but as long as we are dealing with remembered bondage, we are powerless. Only by using Poly Styrene’s cry as a weapon against our current, ongoing, bondage, can we be true to the spirit of 1977.

     

    Rubio goes on to reinforce Hebdige’s argument in Subculture: The Meaning of Style that such an outcry as “Oh Bondage Up Yours”—the signifying sound of punk—becomes “codified, made comprehensible” through commodification (Subculture 96). As a result, such protests and exhortations are rendered innocuous and made safe by becoming a product such as a T-shirt slogan or a 45 rpm record. Yet, to remain committed to the ideals of the song—to distress normalcy and reverse the gendered roles of power—the fight against bondage must continue. I find it powerful that this signal to revolt emanates not from the voice of a white, middle-class teenager, but from the voice of an ethnically mixed woman navigating a confluence of identities and cultures.

     
    No single concise or cohesive history of black music’s impact on punk rock currently exists, partly due, as I describe above, to hegemonic assumptions—normalized within commercial and academic discourse—about the overall “whiteness” of the genre. Such a perspective is epitomized by Jim Curtis’s slanted claim that “punk renounced black music—it was the whitest music ever. (This was the principle reason why you couldn’t dance to it)” (qtd. in Rowe 56). Such declarations are problematic for several reasons. One, people frequently did dance to punk music, whether they engaged in fervid pogoing or slamdancing as hardcore became the aggressive 1980s punk musical mode. Secondly, as Don Waller notes, indirect links between white and black culture within the musical heritage of punk can be explicated: “First Generation [punk] is just a two-car garageful of white suburban horndogs falling off their fruit boots tryin’ to sound like the Stones tryin’ to sound like the voices of authentic African-American essperiance [sic]” (122). This offhandedly suggests that punk music bears the mark of the black man’s burden and blues—to teach white youth resistance through musical tropes. Authors like Zanes have even suggested that punk shares core aesthetic approaches with black artists like Prince, such as “a deliberate play with and challenge of the romantic constructions of authenticity” (45). Punk was both deliberate play and an attack on notions of authenticity: sterile, overly-trained musicians were not authentic, whereas raw power in the hands of amateurs was authentic.
     
    To further fissure the notion of punk rock as solely white music, one can see punk affirmed as hybrid, cross-cultural, or convergence culture in a testament from Mick Jones of the Clash, one of the First Generation icon bands: “Any gig we do is Rock Against Racism because we play black music; we’re as interested in making sure that the black culture survives as much as that the white culture does. We play their music and hope they’ll play ours. We have a common bond with these people” (qtd. in Orman 171). Jones seems to hope that punk can be a stimulus and force of preservation, drawing people together to realize the power and excitement inherent in their related cultural traditions.
     
    Coco Fusco posits that cultural appropriation and consumption cannot “substitute for equitable exchange” (69). Though punk bands’ repertoires and intentions may reflect interaction as an ideal and even support “integrationist ideas,” Anglos still become stars of “what began as [a] black cultural movement[]”—rock ‘n’ roll (69). This may even unintentionally strengthen Anglo “mass-cultural dominance” and “symbolic capital by means of commodification,” while exposing undercurrents of political, cultural, and linguistic control, as long as white bands take from, rather than trade with, their black peers and forefathers (69-70). The white punks retain the power to be identity-benders, the power to
     

    choose, the power to determine value, and the right to consume without guilt. That sense of entitlement to choose, change, and redefine one’s identity is fundamental to understanding the history of how white America has formed ideas about itself, and how those ideas are linked first to a colonial enterprise and … mass industrialized culture.

    (68)

     
    In hindsight, though, Stewart Home has illustrated the not-so-latent racism in early punk as well, pointing out that The Clash sing about “kebab Greeks” on their self-titled first record (see Ch. 3). More ironically, Strummer would wear a “Chuck Berry is Dead” T-shirt (as if negating his earlier pub rock, R & B-based band the 101ers); yet later, the Clash covered Toots and the Maytals and invited Bo Diddley, Screamin’ Jay Hawkins, Grandmaster Flash, Lee Perry, Treacherous Three, and the Bad Brains on stage to open for them, though not without controversy. New York concertgoers heckled and threw trash at Grandmaster Flash, but the other opening band, Miller Miller Miller and Sloane—white high school youth, friends of the future novelist Jonathan Lethem, and discovered at CBGBs playing Aretha Franklin covers and disco-funk—did not get pelted and booed. NY Rocker did describe the same Clash fans as equally merciless to the opening white electro punk duo Suicide, “whose treatment was awful,” leaving the band “dripping in blood and spit” (Trakin, “Suicide” 31). British audiences threw bottles at reggae artist Mikey Dread when he once opened for the Clash as well. In Vancouver in 1979, agitated crowds catcalled opener Bo Diddley, but even the Clash themselves did not escape the ruckus:
     

    The punks paid tribute to their heroes by slamming into each other, jumping onstage, throwing drinks and beer bottles at the band, and spitting at them. The Clash withstood the controlled riot for four songs, ducking and dodging the fusillade, then Strummer interrupted the music to mock them: “If anybody had any balls they’d be throwing wine bottles!”
     

    (Wallenchinsky et al. 95)

     

    Later, Joe Strummer pulled Bo Diddley back on stage to end their set with the Sonny Curtis and the Crickets / Bobby Fuller Four classic, “I Fought the Law” (95).

     
    Tony Kinman, bassist and singer of the Dils, a First Generation Los Angeles punk band, provided me with a different assessment of the Clash’s choices for opening acts:
     

    There’s a long, historical tradition now for British bands to come over here and hire black opening acts. The Who had the Toots and the Maytals open up for them and stuff like that. And I love Bo Diddley. To me, Bo Diddley is one of the gods. He is one of the untouchable icons of rock music. I didn’t expect the Clash to have ten punk rock bands open up for them, but when they had Bo Diddley open up for them, that was a failure of the imagination. It’s just like U2 having B.B. King open for them at Dodger Stadium. Now, I know U2 might be thinking, we want to introduce this great classic legend to our young stupid audience, there’s 70,000 of them out there. This gives B.B. a chance to stretch his legs, but … Bono came onstage to introduce B.B. King to his audience as somebody that we (U2) just recently discovered. Now, I know he didn’t mean, we discovered this man, what he meant to say is that B.B. was a man U2 just recently got into. But you know the way it just sounded, right? I can imagine that B.B. was thinking, you know, I remember when Eric Clapton or Jeff Beck gave me the exact same intro at the Filmore in 1968. You know what, get me back to Vegas. To me, it was a similar thing to the Clash having Bo Diddley open up for them. I can dig it if Joe and Mick and the dudes just dug Bo, he happened to be their favorite performer, and they were just thrilled to have him play with them.

     

    Some might insist that Strummer’s earlier slight stabs at neo-racism were just a pretense to be “shocking” and “legit.” His relationship to world music traditions, given full breadth on albums like Sandinista and Combat Rock (which was recorded at Jimi Hendrix’s Electric Ladyland Studio, the former site of a Charlie Parker club), was fecund and long lasting. He was even a BBC world music DJ before his death. Yet, some traces of prejudice might still remain on the song “Rock the Casbah,” depending on how one interprets the song’s vision of the Middle East, or the pantomime style of the video, which features a dancing Arab (played by their manager Bernie Rhodes) and a Jew, and a mishmash linguistic melting pot of Hindi, Arabic, Hebrew, and North African phrases uttered by Strummer. The potential problems with the song don’t necessarily lie in the Arab and Jew skanking together in the streets and in the Austin hotel pool, but rather in the Arab’s holding a beer bottle, given that alcohol is forbidden under Islamic law.

     
    Mick Jones’s own mixed tapes from the fertile time period of the early 1980s include music by Vanity 6, Dr. Jeckyll and Mr. Hyde, Peech Boys, Indeep, Marvin Gaye, and Diana Ross. Looking back, he has described that formative era’s Hip Hop as symbolizing “community, the Zulu Nation, like an extension of reggae, and not boasting or gangsta” (Snow 88). Other Clash band members even created the alias Wack Attack for him, since Jones was thrilled by the rap phenomenon. Don Letts, friend-maker and close ally of the band, suggests:
     

    These guys were at the peak of their game, man.… I mean, they basically ran New York for the few weeks they were playing there. There was this amazing cultural exchange going on. I can’t tell you what a buzz it was. WBLS, a totally black station, started playing “The Magnificent Seven” on heavy rotation, and they did a remix of it, where they had samples of Clint Eastwood and Bugs Bunny, and that was the soundtrack of the city for the whole period that the Clash were there, and beyond.
     

    (qtd. in Orshoski)

     

    A version of it from 1980, titled “Dirty Harry,” has surfaced on Clash bootlegs like Golden Bullets.

     
    The triple LP Sandinista features a wide range of genre-defying songs that blur borders. Allan Moore, in his book Rock: The Primary Text, outlines several instances in which the Clash eschew simple punk three-chord referents and rely on Jamaican Mikey Dread behind the mixing board to develop textures via extensive multi-tracking and the use of echo. They use a 1930s-period chord sequence and jazzy horns on “Jimmy Jazz,” incorporate James Brown-esque horn parts on “Ivan Meets G.I. Joe,” place gospel voices on “Corner Soul,” dollop “Washington Bullets” with Caribbean-style xylophone and pedal-steel guitar, hone in on funk bass lines for “Magnificent Seven,” and adopt wooden reggae bass beats (known as “riddim”) and reggae-infused tomtom drums on “One More Time” and “Guns of Brixton”—the latter of which, lyrically speaking, is psycho-geographically located also in the heart of multicultural, working class England (133-34). In an overview of the Clash in Uncut magazine, Brett Sparks of the Handsome Family reminds us that the bass line of “The Magnificent Seven” is actually culled and adapted from “London Calling,” while Norman Cook explains that the instrumental version of the song, known as “Mustapha Dance,” vividly foreshadowed house music and is still routinely spun by club DJs today (“The Clash”).2
     
    By the mid-1980s, singer and guitarists Jones and Strummer parted company, forming two different Clash bands. When pressed to explain the situation, Strummer replied that Jones was no longer making “our music. He was playing with beat boxes and synthesizers. I was thinking ‘It’s time for us to stop ripping off the black people so much that they don’t get on the radio anymore.’ I didn’t want to play South Bronx music, you know” (Goldberg 41, 47). Strummer suggests the Clash had been sidetracked into believing they were revered musicians and artists, which is self-indulgent and fatal, especially when considering black blues pioneer Robert Johnson “never thought he was an artist.” So, even though Strummer rejected his former line-up’s exploitation of black music, he still used a black legend to prove the “new, authentic” Clash’s antecedents in black music history. Ironically, it was this version of the Clash that released Cut the Crap, replete with a fusion / hybrid urban sound (synthesizers and drum programming) in 1985.
     
    Many consider this record a low point in the band’s career, a misadventure because they used a markedly different, ill-fitting approach compared to their first punk / reggae fusion ventures, like the recording session for “Police and Thieves” that debuted on their first, self-titled album from 1977. As Strummer vividly recalled that moment, “We were jumping up and down. We knew we had brought something to the party. It wasn’t like a slavish white man’s Xerox of some riff. It was like: ‘Give us your riff and we’ll drive it around London’ … Scratch Perry liked it. Him and Junior wrote it” (qtd. in Egan 57). The Cut the Crap album seemed to lack such riffs, energy, and convergence. To many, it was limp and lackluster, a truly white version of beat box America with fuzzy punk shading overlaid with poetic conceits.
     
    Clash manager Bernie Rhodes has taken responsibility for the evolution of Jones’s taste towards such a musical sensibility, highlighting his own role in these terms: “I hipped Malcolm [Sex Pistols manager, and] Mick Jones … to the importance of Hip Hop, Burundi, graffiti, and new sampling technology during the Bonds’s residency” (qtd. in Snow 84). He also takes credit for tracking down Grandmaster Flash, remixing the Clash’s “Magnificent 7,” and forging “Magnificent Dance”: meanwhile, Jones visited radio stations WBLS, Kiss FM, and WKTU, eager to hear DJ Red Alert. Meanwhile, Rhodes’s counterpart, Malcolm McLaren, became equally infatuated with the youthful, syncretic, DIY mix and mash style of black hip hop music culture fermenting in New York’s boroughs. “The Sex Pistols had been heard of. But the interest in punk in Harlem was being generated out of DJ scratching,” he informed Interview magazine. “I somehow found my way to a party that they were holding, completely black, where they were playing records like James Brown, the Monkees, the old Supremes, Diana Ross, and some punk records” (262). Almost akin to white punks, the kids were “fierce, volatile … jumping up, gesturing and screaming”; as such, it felt “magical” to McLaren, unlocking a sense of possibility, especially since the kids “could regurgitate something that was packaged and make it sound magical again” (262). Like punks, the kids felt authentic, and they created and maintained a powerful and direct relationship to an audience while keeping their approach down-to-earth, spontaneous, and unlimited. More so, their impromptu style was not hindered by inherited musical chops or expensive equipment. McLaren later would hit his stride as a record maker himself with the single “Buffalo Gals,” an example of a fertile period in which he mixed songs and traditions from “Zululand and the mountains of Lima and the Dominican Republic and Cuban priests and Appalachian hillbillies all together under one roof” (qtd. in Isler 22). Not unlike a punk folkorist and bricolage-based mixmaster, McLaren understood that both impressive dance potential and pagan power might be tapped and culled from such “primitive” convergences.
     

    Black to the Future: The Politics and Dynamism of Reggae

     
    Don Letts is one of the most notable figures in all of punk rock. As a West Indian DJ and filmmaker who spun highly influential reggae records at the Roxy, London’s premier punk club, he also directed two pivotal documentaries on punk, The Punk Rock Movie and Punk: Attitude; managed the all-girl punk-reggae band the Slits; and authored Culture Clash: Dread Meets Punk Rockers. In addition, he took part in the pivotal Brixton riots. A photograph that captures the tension of the day—a “dread” making his way towards a police line in Notting Hill, and that graced the front cover of Black Market Clash—is of Letts himself (who also appears on the back cover). In 1980, Joe Strummer told Creem‘s Susan Whitehall that he rented a spare room from Letts for a time. While Letts was immersed in new “roots rock reggae,” he passed on a Trojan Records album full of blue beat songs to Strummer, who quickly became smitten by the “cream of all the … stuff.” In this way Letts likely shaped the future aesthetic of tracks that would become part of the Clash’s repertoire (60).
     
    Reggae made a tremendous impact on early punk, helping to shape the music of the Clash, the Ruts, the Members, Gang of Four, Stiff Little Fingers, Leyton Buzzards, the Police, Newtown Neurotics, and Public Image Limited, while even Canada’s more hardcore D.O.A. made forays into reggae by the early 1980s. Blondie covered the soft reggae tune “The Tide is High” by John Holt of the Paragons. Found on the album Autoamerican, the song was part of the band’s effort to create music forms, à la tunes like the early hip hop / rap-based “Rapture,” that converged genres and cultures. Guitarist Chris Stein admits:
     

    We wanted to make music that would cross over. I would like to see the record resolve racial tensions by bringing different audiences together. When the new wave kids and the rapper kids get together, that’ll be something. Eventually, they’ll all meet in the middle, where you’ll have a strong race of young people that won’t be divided by stupid racial issues.
     

    (qtd. in Trakin, “Blondie” 6)

     

    In Stein’s view, vanguard music could, and perhaps should, create a de-racialized youth movement. Letts, writing for The Guardian online, describes the punks’ taste for or kinship with reggae in these terms:

     

    [Reggae] was a culture that spoke in a currency with which the punks could identify. It was the soundbite-type lyrics, the anti-fashion fashion, the rebel stance and, importantly, the fact that reggae was a kind of musical reportage, talking about things that mattered. Songs like Money in My Pocket, I Need a Roof, and Chant Down Babylon struck an obvious chord with “the youth.” The third-world DIY approach to creating the reggae sound was something else that the punks could relate to, as most of them had no formal music training.

    (“Dem Crazy Baldheads”)

     

    Many punk acts joined the efforts of Rock Against Racism gigs.3 Bands ranged from the Clash playing to 85,000 people at Victoria Park in 1978 along with X Ray Spex, Tom Robinson, and Steel Pulse—filmed as part of the Rude Boy film—to gigs including bands like Joy Division (in Manchester, at the Factory, in Oct. 1978), Adam and the Ants (Ealing College and Southbank Polytechnic in 1978), and Siouxsie and the Banshees. Some of these bands were able to play alongside reggae bands like Aswad and Steel Pulse. In later tours, the Clash shows also featured opening reggae acts Mikey Dread and Prince Hammer as well. Old school reggae stalwarts Toots and the Maytals, whose song “Pressure Drop” was avidly covered by the Clash, were invited to tour once as well, but could not afford the six-week financing of the Clash’s 16 Tons 1980 tour.

     
    Still, critics leveled charges about punk songs that denigrated Puerto Ricans (“Puerto Rican” by Adam and the Ants); the use of swastikas and anti-Semitic lyrics (“Love in a Void” by Siouxsie and the Banshees); and Nazi prison camp references, including band names, album art, and lyrical lines taken from memoirs (Joy Division and the Skids). In 2001, Paul Hambleton argued on www.punk77.co.uk that Siouxsie was using a crude metaphor equating Jews with bankers, but reminded readers that Siouxsie later dedicated the song “Metal Postcard” to avant-garde Jewish photomontage artist John Heartfield / Helmut Herzfeld, while another song, “Israel,” evokes the dreams of a liberated country singing “Happy Noel.” In addition, Hambleton notes that Adam Ant’s father was part of a British tank crew that liberated Belsen, and Joy Division’s “Nazi” figure pictured on the “Ideal for Living” EP is actually stripped of its Nazi signifier, thus matching the look of a Komsomul (Soviet youth group organization) member too. Hence, he seems to imply, “rehabilitation” of these bands is actually unnecessary, as long as a more nuanced media analysis is applied.
     
    The Rock Against Racism gigs partially served as a front for the Trotskyite-led Socialist Workers Party campaign against insurgent right-wing National Front activities and countrywide race tension, including controversial statements like David Bowie’s suggestion that England was ready for a fascist leader and Eric Clapton’s declaration that immigrants were overrunning the country. The RAR gigs utilized
     

    cultural forms of the Black Diaspora such as reggae and carnival and juxtapos[ed] them with the renegade punk subculture … RAR sought to catalyze anti-racist cultural and political solidarity among Black, Asian, and white youths. RAR thus offers a particularly powerful example of what Vijay Prashad calls polyculturalism, a term which challenges hegemonic multiculturalism, with its model of neatly bounded, discrete cultures.
     

    (Dawson, par. 2)

     

    Instead of leaving subcultures fragmented, isolated, and subjugated, RAR activities allowed for some kind of common front—an uneasy alliance at times, and one that not only confronted white and African cultural issues but Asian as well, though many historians fail to notice that aspect.

     
    In defense of such multicultural punk history, Ian Goodyer reminds www.punk77.co.uk readers that:
     

    Although Asian music was not a feature of RAR gigs, solidarity with Asians under racial attack was very much a part of the organisation’s remit. To cite a single instance, RAR was part of the coalition that built the 1979 Southall demo against the NF, at which Blair Peach was murdered. This was a mass mobilisation in an area with a large Asian community. [In] the police attack on the demo … RAR supporters were beaten and arrested.
     

    (qtd. in Hambleton)

     

    The mid-1980s also witnessed race solidarity in street activism and revolt, as Bo reports for Maximumrocknroll: “It is a well-known fact that skins and black youth fought side by side against filth/cops in the… Tottenham Riots,” a melee in North London instigated by the death of a black mother whose home was raided by police after the arrest of her son. By no means were RAR gigs, or other riots, simply multicultural spectacles; instead, they included real witnessing, confrontation, and even extreme danger.

     
    The Clash’s close affinity with black culture has already been noted. One can also discover such links in Bob Marley’s 1977 song “Punky Reggae Party,” which name-drops the Jam, the Damned, and the Clash. Marley demonstrates their similar conditions: “rejected by society, treated with impunity, protected by their dignity.” Fan reaction to the Clash’s combinatory agit-prop and social realist songs of the period has been largely unaddressed. In order to position the band in a greater context, and to see if their symbolic interrogation of “whiteness” in fact was modeled on black resistance, one can look at the discourse of fans. For instance, the song “White Riot” recounts the Notting Hill race riot, a 1976 melee in which police arrested a pickpocket, instigating black youths to come to his defense. A picture of the tumult is pictured on the back of the band’s self-titled debut album (1977). Clash biographer Marcus Gray characterizes the song as “envious” not “racist,” meaning the song was not intended to stir up white anger towards blacks but to implore white youth to stop doing “what they’re told to” and stop “taking orders,” perhaps even pick up a brick like black youth (228). Another explanation is: “Exhilarated by what seemed to them a spontaneous example of revolt against oppressive forces—the black community had often complained of police harassment and discrimination—they wondered why they couldn’t have a riot of their own—that is, a ‘white riot’” (Egan 47). This did not sit well with drummer Terry Chimes and original guitarist Keith Levene. On one hand, Levene refused to sing it, while Chimes, who believed in the power and fury of the song, felt it was nonetheless naive (Egan 47).
     
    One central challenge is to ascertain whether songs like this led listeners to examine their own sense of status, power, and privilege. Martin James, who was able to meet with members of the band 25 years later, notes in The Independent that he still (albeit through reflection) is able to situate the lyrics within his own life at the time:
     

    Did I not understand that “White Riot” was all about his respect for black people and their stand against oppression? Had I not listened to the lyrics, in which he sang that he wished white people would take the same positive position? … despite going to gigs in the multi-racial town High Wycombe, I had never previously been forced to face up to my own inherent racism. It was an attitude that had been born from the simple fact that there were no black people in Marlow. I was ten when I met my first black kid. Some nice white middle-class family had adopted him. I can still remember being told in the playground that if the black kid touched me his colour would rub off on me. Even as a 14-year-old, race riots – or indeed the very concept of “racism” – meant little to me. So, Strummer forced my eyes open.

     
    In 1976, during the peak of the Clash’s early heyday of power and resistance in the UK rock press, Barry Miles of New Music Express interviewed them. Strummer, an avid fan of bluesman Clarence “Gatemouth” Brown and Blind Willie McTell (whose songs he busked in the London subway, earning the name “Strummer” in his pre-Clash era), and Mick Jones, who was a fan of Mott the Hoople, ska, and blue beat before seeing the Sex Pistols, explained their lyrics. Almost exasperated by the press’s inability to grasp the meaning of the song “London’s Burning,” they retort:
     

    Strummer:

     
    The only thing we’re saying about the Blacks is that they’ve got their problems and they’re prepared to deal with them. But white men, they just ain’t prepared to deal with them—everything’s too cozy. They’ve got stereos, drugs, hi-fis, cars…
     

    Mick:

     
    We’re completely antiracist. We want to bridge the gap. They used to blame everything on the Jews, now they’re saying it about the Blacks and the Asians… every body’s a scapegoat, right?
     

    Joe:

     
    The poor blacks and the poor whites are in the same boat… They don’t want us in their culture, but we just happen to dig Tapper Zukie and Big Youth, Dillinger and Aswad and Delroy Washington. We dig them and we ain’t scared of going into heavy black record shops and getting their gear. We even go to heavy black gigs where we’re the only white people there.

     

    Hence, not only do the Clash find affinity with black music,4 a sense of community, and street-wise agency, they recognize that they are margin walkers, borrowing from black culture, but ultimately not part of black culture. They were not mere exploiters either, but they might be considered translators negotiating their whiteness through black cultural signifiers as a means of Othering and authenticating themselves in the punk milieu, against a backdrop of garage punk bands simply churning out bellicose versions of yesterday’s rehashed rock ‘n’ roll.

     
    Strummer’s intentions will likely never be quite understood, but the result—an awakening or re-evaluation of person, place, and power in an “everyday” budding fan like Mardi—is a legacy that Strummer would likely have found comforting. Strummer and Jones wanted white youth teeming with bigotry, and consequent Paki-bashing tendencies, to wake up, even while Clash manager Bernie Rhodes appears to approve of race-bashing in some instances, as a Record Mirror interview illuminates:
     

    RM:

    What’s your reaction to kids doing that?
     

    Joe:

    What, bashing Pakis? I f—tell `em to lay off.
     

    Mick:

    I tell `em to lay off. I said to them, you’re just doing it for the papers.
     

    Joe:

    They should go down the House of Commons and bash up the people in there.
     

    Bernie:

    Or Radio One…
     

    RM:

    But you’ve still got kids beating up Pakistanis …
     

    Bernie:

    There’s a lot of Pakis who deserve it.
     

    Mick:

    I don’t think anybody deserves that.

     

    The signal seems clear, though. The powers that be—hegemony, from Parliament to the Radio One officers, those who shape national policy and marginalize youth—should be the target of white frustration, not immigrants and people of color.

     
    Bassist Paul Simonon himself had long, deep affections for reggae music, and black music in general, as his homemade tapes made for the trek across America for the Clash’s Pearl Harbor 1979 tour attest. Among his collection included four volumes of “Dread Control,” Big Youth, The Temptations, “Natty,” three volumes of “Dreadnought,” Bo Diddley, “Blues,” and “Motown.” Such an assortment, featured on the same tour when Bo Diddley joined the British punk legends as the opening act, might surprise punk purists who imagine punk rock as a white genre ensconced in a cocoon, but comes to no surprise to those who understand punk as a fluid, syncretic genre. The Clash’s gig and studio song lists circa 1979 also reveal the band’s immersion in fecund black music during this era. With finesse, they covered a large array of black musical acts, including Desmond Dekker (“Israelites”), Althea and Donna’s (“Up Town Ranking”), Sonny Okosum (“Fire in Soweto”), Matumbi (“The Man in Me”), The Rulers (“Wrong Emboyo”) and Danny Ray (“Revolution Rock”). Some of those tracks found daylight on albums like London Calling and Black Market Clash, while others remained buried in rehearsals and sound checks, only offered up to the public in rare recordings.
     
    Such musical fusion, interpenetration, and co-habitation between punk and reggae, Anglo and West Indian, and black and white cultures didn’t come without some confusion as well. As Strummer once walked back through the time when the Clash released “Bankrobber,” a reggae-infused tune produced by Mikey Dread that reached #12 on the national charts, he remembered:
     

    One day I went up to Ladbroke Grove to get a newspaper and a bunch of black school girls got off the bus, and one of them went, “There’s that guy who did ‘Bankrobber’” and they surrounded me and stood staring, ‘cos they couldn’t believe that some weird-looking white dude had made this record. I’ll never forget it, they stood there staring at me, and didn’t say anything. They couldn’t compute it.
     

    (The Clash 256)

     

    They were not the only black girls seemingly infatuated with the Clash’s music. As a Creem writer reporting on a Clash gig in Detroit commented, “Hippies like the Clash. So do black people – I watched two black girls dancing, to see whether they favored the reggae-flavored numbers or not. They didn’t. They’re American girls, after all” (Letts, “The Clash” 43). In the UK, the Clash’s reggae-tinged numbers appeared to win them a black audience, while in America songs like “Train in Vain,” with its R & B underbelly, held the attention of people like Bootsy Collins. The well-admired black funk bass player, who had long stints in the band Parliament and in James Brown’s band, supposedly listened to the song every day after he bought a copy in 1980 (41).

     
    Strummer’s admiration for reggae star Jimmy Cliff is well-noted too, but it was not the Clash but the other old guard punk band Chelsea who covered Cliff’s powerful “Too Many Rivers to Cross” on their self-titled debut LP in 1979. When asked why this song resonated with the band, guitarist James Stevenson told me:
     

    It was Gene’s idea—and I think the angst he gets across in the delivery of the vocal is really special. At the end of the day, the song is about pain and the difficulty we all face in moving forward through life. I think that’s a subject we all have in common, and it rears its head in every form of music. There was a big riot at the Notting Hill carnival in 1981. I remember being there with Mick Jones. It was a very mixed race battle against the authorities, and I remember saying to Mick—”See, this is our battle too!”

     

    This articulates the fact that white punks felt that convergence was desirable, and quite possible, between black and white youth culture, even within a society that had forcefully segregated and Balkanized the two communities for decades.

     

    Black Vanguards in the Age of Hardcore

     
    Despite punk rock being an avenue for racial or cross-cultural symbiosis, the outside world, with its master narrative of segregation, suppression, and race-anxiety, always reminded punks of their marginal status by exploiting the issue. The tumult and legacy of complicated race relations in the UK, including massive riots and small gig upheavals, are far too numerous and complicated to explore, but the US scene does offer some revealing moments too. For instance, as MCD lead singer Dave Dictor testifies in an interview, “Cops have been known to take punks to black housing areas just because they know the punks will get the shit beat out of them.”
     
    Australia has a history of racially tinged violence experienced both directly and indirectly by both American and British punks. In the case of the Clash tour in 1982, bassist Paul Simonon recently recounted meeting local aborigines who wanted to speak at a Clash gig to “talk about their situation” in front of their audience, only to have one member’s wife beaten at home by the police as they spoke. This soured the Australian leg of the tour for Simonon (The Clash 35).
     
    Australian police also arrested the Dead Kennedys’ black drummer D.H. Peligro when the band stopped in Brisbane. Jello Biafra told Maximumrocknroll that Peligro was arrested on the street for unlawful assembly after being “picked out of a crowd of about 15 white people, and arrested for drinking in public, even though his can of beer was unopened” after the gig (“Dead Kennedys Tour”). In a recent interview with me, bass player Klaus Flouride attests guitarist East Bay Ray tried to intervene in order to help Peligro; consequently, he was removed in a different police car and charged with obstructing justice after a heated verbal exchange in which the police initially resisted implicating Ray along with Peligro. Both were held at the local Watch House. Such targeted police action happened during the era when Queensland was under the political leadership and sway of corrupt, Born-Again Christian, anti-aboriginal, anti-union Country Party leader Sir Johannes “Joh” Bjelke-Peterson, who believed aboriginals were lower than whites on the evolutionary scale (“Dead Kennedys Tour”), and attempted to get the Racial Discrimination Act invalidated, but lost. Luckily for Peligro and Ray, print and television coverage of the tour helped reveal their status to the police, who apologized and released them after speaking with tour manager Bill Gilliam. They even gave Peligro studded belts they had taken off other punks (Flouride). The police considered them “cool” at that point, according to Ray (Pepperell).
     
    During the same era, Reggie Rector, guitarist for the mixed race punk band Secret Hate, was killed in downtown Long Beach. In Flipside #38, Al Flipside asked the band, “Why don’t you think more blacks are into punk?” Rector answered: “They’re more into Michael Jackson,” while his bandmate Kevin intoned, “There’s pressure not to be, if you hang out with a bunch of Crypt Town guys, they don’t want you getting a Mohawk, or wearing a kilt.”
     
    However, the all-black hardcore punk pioneers Bad Brains stipulate that pressure was applied from another source: white hegemony, which they actively equated with tropes of Babylon, prominently featured in songs like “Leaving Babylon” (1982) and “Destroy Babylon” (1983). In Flipside #31, when asked, “Why don’t you think there are more black people into hardcore?” singer H.R. responds, “Because of exposure … Babylon.… Black people ain’t gonna find out about it until white people find out about it,” to which his bandmate Gary responds, “Because of the Babylon system.” Whereas Secret Hate blames the lack of involvement on pressure from within the black community, the Bad Brains suggests that hegemony—the white supremacist system—prevents black communities from an exposure to hardcore; hence, as Stuart Hall suggests, media representations likely fix meaning, limit new potentials, and normalize identities.
     
    The Bad Brains distressed and frayed such norms. As Howard Wuelfing recalls:
     

    My first contact with the Bad Brains was through Kim Kane of the Slickee Boys who submitted a review of a house party they played at, that ran in my DesCenes fanzine. He was utterly in awe of them. As I recall everyone in town was floored by the Bad Brains and singing their praises as well they should have as they were an incredible band, especially live. I remember them totally blowing The Damned off the stage at the Bayou one night. HR was like a black Iggy Pop and the rest of the band was impossibly tight and fast and the songs notably intricate and challenging.

     

    The Bad Brains was the band that challenged assumptions about punk musicianship, shook up and transformed black identities in punk rock history, and frequently, as in the case of The Clash and The Damned, used opening slots in punk gigs to interrogate the status quo of the genre in which they excelled.

     
    Revisiting Hebdige’s theory, postcolonial theorist Paul Gilroy asserts, “Punk provided the circuitry which enabled … connections” between “black and white styles,” while fostering punks to produce their own “critical and satirical commentary on the meaning and significance of white ethnicity” (There Ain’t No Black 122-123). Granted, he has little regard for the Bad Brains, whom he tags in The Black Atlantic as advancing “the white noise of Washington, D.C.’s Rasta thrash punk,” which effectively divorces the band from its black musical antecedents (100). If we adopt his view wholesale, the Bad Brains was merely a skilled, nomadic group of musicians poaching “white” musical forms rather than reclaiming the music of their birthright, from John Coltrane to Chuck Berry. For instance, the tropes of “suffering” the band employs in lyrics might be linked back to the Sorrow Songs discussed by W.E.B. Du Bois in The Souls of Black Folk (1903). I contend that the Bad Brains update such American music, which is indebted to the spirit, story, and sweat of African Americans, though the update is mediated and propelled by the “terrible” explosivity of punk.
     
    Originally a progressive jazz unit known as Mind Power, the Bad Brains members were influenced by mixed-race jazz fusion icons Spyro Gyra, reggae pioneer Bob Marley, and Stevie Wonder’s spiritualism. When integrated into punk idioms, such musical tastes and abilities were well-regarded by peers during their heyday. “I thought the band was ferociously good,” singer U-Ron Bondage of Really Red informed me, describing their 1982 gig together in Houston, Texas; “technically amazing too. It was obvious to me that they could have been playing other types of more complicated music prior to being Bad Brains.” This reinforces Wuelfing’s impressions. On the liner notes to their Greatest Riffs CD (2003), the band thanks Miles Davis, Ohio Players, and Earth, Wind and Fire, alongside punk stalwarts the Dead Boys, Cro-mags, and Eater: their musical influences ranged wide and did not merely reflect a crucible of “white noise.”
     
    Gilroy (like many academics) somehow imagines them as an overly simplified amalgam of white speed, urban angst, and “thrash” fury. He borrows Leroi Jones’s (he chooses to use this name variation instead of Amiri Baraka) assertion that black music in the Diaspora is essentially always in a state of flux and change, a cultural transmission full of disruption and breaks, and an unfixed musical landscape. Yet the Bad Brains does not merit a position within this culturescape. Russell Potter draws even weaker conclusions, categorizing the band as “metalesque ‘ska,’” nametags much more appropriate for describing the music of Fishbone (145). Supporters who envision the band as an example of cultural hybridity, he intones, are on the side of “recuperation” and “fuzzy plurality” (145). Neither writer fully grasps the band’s historical significance—its rather rare, genre-defining style. Neither is willing to concede that the Bad Brain’s translation of punk style, which itself is a translation (or appropriation) of subversive rock ‘n’ roll, is an unstable convergence that may reveal shared, integrated, or multicultural milieus.
     
    The Bad Brains marks the zero hour of hardcore music—the moment when the sounds of “white noise” became jet-fueled. As H.R. describes it to the fanzine Ripper, “When I first heard their [the Dickies’] music I said, Gee it’s so fast, this is really bad”—a vernacular form of verbal approval for the band’s catchy, humming, and terse pop-punk. The Bad Brains did not just translate the Dickies’ format: they were generative. Before them, no single band played such a nimble, fertile, crossover speed jazz style. Whereas the Police also derived from jazz-fusion origins, it chose pop-reggae templates. Furthermore, Jello Biafra of the Dead Kennedys credits the British band Discharge as the first hardcore punk band, though the Black Dot sessions by the Bad Brains, which were not released to the public for twenty years, reveal a uniquely hardcore format already existing in robust form by 1979 and that outpaces early Discharge.
     
    As soon as the Bad Brains’s first full length cassette-only release appeared on Roir records (1982), followed by the Ric Ocasek (The Cars)-produced Rock For Light (PVC, 1983), “white noise” writers including Gary Bushel (a British proponent of street punk, including the emerging Oi sound) waxed enthusiastically about them, evoking mouthfuls of metaphors that posited the Bad Brains as the avant-garde: “[They] make Motörhead sound like they’re standing still. They make Discharge sound like gentle balladeers.… Imagine the musical equivalent of the 90 second London-Brighton train run film on fast forward” (qtd. in Gimarc 581). Hence, historic credit for stimulating the hardcore genre might shift to the Bad Brains even as music historians acknowledge that tracks by the Damned (“Love Song”), 999 (“No Pity”), Wire (“Mr. Suit”), the Ruts (“Criminal Mind”), and UK Subs (“Telephone Number” and “You Give Me Disease”) did provide intermittent, frenetic-paced examples of proto-hardcore. The Bad Brains, banned and nearly broken, quickly symbolized the blazing potentials of the new genre.
     
    One vexing issue about the Bad Brains is its embrace, and projection, of Rastafarian culture, which the members tend to simplify as “taking up the Nazarite vow” in the same Ripper interview. They also suggested to Suburban Voice fanzine that Rasta culture is not bound to the black Diaspora:
     

    Rasta is not no black nothing. Rasta is a function of the heart, it’s the first law. Now, we have the first nation, which is Africa and we give credit to the dynasty of the Solomon lineage so this is the only reigning diplomatic credited Christian Orthodox function today but we do not function for blackness. I and I live for humanity. A man can be any color and be a Rasta.

     

    Their desire to evoke a transcultural frame for Rastafarianism, or their translation of Rasta tenets, may sour some Rasta supporters, while their religious orthodoxy troubled punks.

     
    Dave Dictor, who underwent some tense moments while playing on the same stages with the Bad Brains on a tumultuous 1982 Rock Against Reagan tour, penned lyrics like “We don’t need your Jah’s fascist doctrine” in the song “Pay to Cum Along” (1983). Though many punks might have imagined Rasta beliefs as exotic or just plain “weird” (as U-ron Bondage described it to me), bands like MDC attacked them with the same fiery aplomb with which they denounced institutional Christianity, especially after singer H.R. openly denounced the homosexuality of Randy “Biscuit” Turner, the singer of the Big Boys and a friend of MDC. The connections between Rasta and punk in general don’t necessarily resonate in terms of shared community mores. Al Long, onetime singer from the band Nausea, a fiercely political band from New York City circa 1990, admitted in an interview that “The rastas I work with have little in common with me.”
     
    Questions imbedded in the work of Canadian cultural critic Richard Fung, as discussed by Coco Fusco in English is Broken Here, can be used to examine the sensitive postcolonial issues at stake. Fung maps out strategies to deal with cultural productions that converge with, or are the result of, cultural appropriation. Using his framework, I ask: Does the Bad Brains’s punk status place the band within a subaltern group of the African Diaspora? Does the band misrepresent Rasta culture? To what degree does the band, or later offshoots such as HR and Zion Train, commercialize Rasta culture? Is Afro-punk, or black punk rock, a distinct mode of cultural production, defined by agency and volition—by self-control and self-representation? Is Afro-punk a convenient tag or genre created by hegemonic forces, or does it counter racist forces, revise our notions of history, and treat white and black historical actors with equity and fairness? Lastly, did the Bad Brains offer alternative visions of masculinity or reify old sexist, homophobic modes of power? These questions remain to be explored.
     
    In Black Culture, White Youth: the Reggae Tradition from JA to UK, Simon Jones examines race relations and youth culture in Birmingham, England. He rightly points out that some of the Clash’s most compelling diatribes, like “White Riot,” were easily co-opted and manipulated by people espousing fascist doctrine. Likewise, songs by the hardcore generation—like Minor Threat’s “Guilty of Being White,” which features the highly personal and, some may argue, immature and simplistic insight of singer Ian MacKaye (an early admirer and cohort of the Bad Brains who attended an urban Washington, D.C. school district)—were often “hijacked” by racist groups who re-routed the meaning. For such groups, the song was a tough examination of white working class agitprop in the age of post-1970s black self-determination. As so-called victims of reverse discrimination, they denounced having guilt “for something I didn’t do … a hundred years before my time” (“Rap Session”). Black punk Mark Philip, a local youth at the time, looks back and attests:
     

    I’m sure as an 18-year old guy in a punk band, Ian was just writing from the heart, but … it felt a little shallow given how complex the subject of race is. Ian is a hero of mine, but that song threw me. I felt it completely glossed over the complex nuances of race relations and took an attitude of moral equivalency. Slavery wasn’t THAT long ago, there are still people alive today who were directly affected by it, such as my uncle Sherman Jones whose father (not grandfather) was a slave. He was just here in my living room three weeks ago. He is forever unable to trace his lineage back another generation, which is a luxury that most whites take for granted. I think the consequence of a song like “Guilty of Being White” is that idiots hear it and don’t know their history, have no empathy or understanding and they use it as a justification for their own racist views, which, of course, was not at all the intention of the song to begin with. The fact that Slayer covered the song validates my point here because that is a band (that I love) which is known to have overt racists in its fan-base who no doubt contort its meaning to conform to their twisted phony populist white victim viewpoint.

     
    Jones recognizes the “powerlessness, desire to shock, and sense of anger at official smugness expressed by punk’s more working-class constituency,” which are the same traits and feelings often documented in fascist youth groups as well (100). In summary, he suggests many contingent factors mediate the interplay and interaction of white and black youth. The notion that punk bands and scenes evoke or embody multicultural “hybridity” becomes very complex. White youth’s attraction to (along with the desire to appropriate) black cultural forms should be understood within a context of actual race relations. At a minimum, these interactions become mediated by youth groups vying for territory, identity-building in the age of black self-determination and punk culture shock, and competing for employment during times of national financial fissures, none of which can be understood by an analysis of style or musical content alone. As some critics posit, what journalists and musicians say, and what they do, can be very different. Slogans and blurbs matter little compared with acts, as witnessed by Fred Smith, now known as Freak, guitarist for Beefeater:
     

    It was very strange to be these “token” negroes, playing in front of predominantly all white audiences, but we did it. As Shawn Brown [Swiz] and myself will attest, there were fucking issues man. A lot of fucking issues that we had to address when we did shows. When I first heard someone refer to me as the “negro Lemmy,” [of Motörhead] I was floored. I immediately lowered my mic stand down from the height that I set it. When I heard Shawn Brown being referred to as “the negro version of Ian MacKaye,” I was floored again. When I told him, he was taken aback but still plugged on. In retrospect, even in this new scene, I was always wondering, would racism ever end?!

     
    In terms of establishing the connection between cultural contexts, meaning the merging of horizons between black and white resistance cultures, contemporary hardcore punk singer Thomas Barnett from Strike Anywhere provides a larger matrix to ponder. I quote him at length, since what he revealed to me in a 2005 interview is both detailed and nuanced:
     

    I think about this often, and have had an ongoing conversation on this subject with many older punks, hardcore kids, conscious rastas in Richmond and DC, and other members of the African Diaspora, about the roots of punk and the parallels and differences between hardcore/punk and revolutionary black music in the Western world … There isn’t a punk rocker alive now who couldn’t find an eerie affinity between the shrill anti-authoritarian rhyming rage in their favorite punk song and the frustrated, simmering patience of countless reggae numbers. It’s just there.
     
    Some people have sworn by the “East London” theory … [according to which] early British punk rock bands–and their embryonic, furiously self-reinventing tribes of friends and followers (back then even more fractured, heterogeneous, and, for that matter, androgynous, certainly hungrier and homeless—orphaned from rock ‘n’ roll already) are looking for pubs to play in, and the only sympathetic ears who’ll take them in are the West Indian owned reggae clubs in the East End. Perhaps, if this is accurate to some degree, this is where the cross-pollination of ideas, and in a smaller way, sounds, first went down.
     
    You could look at it as a window getting opened for the disaffected, self-destructing white punks and artists, and the elements of postcolonial black politics, human rights issues, and the awareness of a binary world system came crashing down through the music into their minds. The often paradoxical and personal politics of punk can be traced back to this artistic intersection, but perhaps this was just one highly public space in history where this same collision of white restlessness and countercultural reaction opened up to the waiting truths, methods, and life affirming ideas of revolutionary black culture.

     
    The September 1983 issue of Maximumrocknroll features a long discussion between Ian MacKaye from Minor Threat and Dave and Vic Bondi from Articles of Faith, in which racism becomes a prevalent, and heated issue, as does Sab Grey’s (Iron Cross) interview in Guillotine #8 (1984), which covers the use of the triggering term nigger and racial violence in desperate neighborhoods; similarly, an interview in Touch and Go #16 (1981), Grey reveals sentiments regarding the reverse racism of blacks (“Blacks are the biggest racists”) and the notion that “everyone” is a Nazi. Later, when speaking with D.C. punk community chronicler Mark Anderson in Dance of Days: Two Decades of Punk in the Nation’s Capital (2001), he exhibited remorse for such comments and sentiments, but such discourse does signify D.C. as a site of sometimes very tense, raw race relations. Moreover, one should note that Iron Cross’s first bass player was black, and Grey’s perspective is shaped by family heritage: his mother survived the London blitz and his father was “a German refugee from the Nazis.” The only actual fascist element is more likely to have been their name.
     
    Punk rock didn’t make convergence necessarily easy, or provide equal treatment to all participants, but it did make convergence possible and fruitful, despite contradiction and ambivalence within the community.
     

    Bodies of Confidence, Desire, and Frenzy: Hip Hop Suaveness and Hardcore Havoc

     
    I use the Bad Brains, and the seminal hip hop outfit Run DMC, as a case sample to examine how black music culture unfolded in different forms during the early 1980s. As mentioned earlier, the Bad Brains members hailed from the Maryland / Washington, D.C. area and were attracted to the raw power of punk after hearing the Sex Pistols. Even their name reflects their fondness for contemporary punk, since “Bad Brain” is the name of a Ramones song from 1978. At the time, D.C. had a small wellspring of punk and new wave bands, ranging from the college-crown Urban Verbs to the garagey pop punk Slickee Boys and a small number of emerging teenage “hardcore” punk bands, like the Teen Idles. The Bad Brains were able to harness their skill sets associated with jazz—a certain nimble and adept musicianship, usually not considered an essential part of punk, perhaps considered even antithetical to punk performance—and added volatile, blitzkrieg speed and energy that pushed new boundaries.
     
    In Queens, Run DMC began a different approach, utilizing “two turntables and a microphone,” the pared down approach to rap, which democratized music in urban areas by switching out live band members (and expensive instruments) for 12″ record tracks that could be “mixed” live to create a backdrop to raps. This emergent style likely has antecedents in West African griots and Caribbean “toasting.” In the new form, certain funk beats would be isolated, and / or produced by drum machines, and the rappers would be free to “emcee” on top of this. What I am interested in examining is the visual representation of these forms in videos, including “Sucker MCs” by Run DMC and “Banned in D.C.” by the Bad Brains at the infamous New York City club CBGB’s.
     
    As represented in a band photo on Wikipedia, Run DMC’s trademark gear includes very clean and neat Adidas, tight leather pants or jeans, uniform black fedora hats, and large gold chains. Their posture is rather uninviting: Jam Master Jay and DMC cross their arms, lean back or to the side somewhat stiffly, and stare at the camera directly. DJ Run appears more relaxed: with hands sunk a bit into both pockets, his body is slightly tilted, and he stares less “hard.” Live in 1983 on an unattributed program available on YouTube, they outfit themselves in leather jackets, keep the fedoras, and sing on a stage for an urban dance show with graffiti backdrops. In the song “Sucker MCs,” they mention certain status symbols, including St. John’s University, drinking champagne, Cadillacs, and credit cards.
     
    In the clip of the Bad Brains video on YouTube shot at CBGB’s in 1982, one year before the Run DMC clip, the band plays “Banned in DC,” one of their hallmark songs that explains, in part, why they were banned from Washington, D.C. clubs: they were deemed too uncontrollable. In the video, three of the members wear clothes that symbolize colors associated with Rastafarian style (green, yellow, red) and two of the members wear woven caps in the Rasta tradition. At this time, the Bad Brains clearly identified with Rastafarians and integrated reggae into their live sets, thus in some ways they reflect Hebdige’s hypothesis about the frozen dialect between white and black culture within one framework: one single hardcore punk band. Singer HR has dreadlocks, and his button-up shirt seems to contrast the T-shirts worn by the rest of the band and the gig’s mostly white attendees. His manner might appear bombastic to some viewers, a dance of unbound atavism and molten fury. The crowd acts in kind, forming at times a dizzying free-for-all energy and abandon that contrast with Run DMC’s audience, who dance adroitly, smoothly, and fluidly, or gaze and cheer at the performers on stage. In the CBGB’s video, HR and the crowd meld at points. HR bends down and intensely interacts with the first row, dances volatile on stage, and takes up a gyrating position in front of the amplifier as the guitar player plays a solo.
     
    If one were to read this depiction taken from bell hooks—
     

    It is the young black male body that is seen as epitomizing this promise of wildness, of unlimited physical prowess … It was this black body that was most “desired” for its labor in slavery, and it is this body that is most represented in contemporary culture as the body to be watched, imitated, desired, possessed.…
     
    When young black men acquire a powerful public voice and presence via cultural production, as has happened with the explosion of rap music, it does not mean that they have a vehicle that will enable them to articulate that pain.… True, it was conditions of suffering and survival, of poverty, deprivation, and lack that characterized the marginal locations from which breakdancing and rap emerged.

    (189)

     

    one might mistakenly believe that she is referring to the Bad Brains video, with its viable sense of explosion, public voice (even howl), wildness, unlimited physicality and musical prowess, and its intensely imitated form demonstrated by the white audience, as if HR is using the stage to act with and against the audience to interrogate all the pain and deprivation (“banned”) associated with exile (with its Hebrew Bible connotations, which appeals to Rastas). I suggest that he is interacting with them in mock violence that actually becomes a kind of dance and choreographed ritual—a molten path towards catharsis, perhaps.

     
    bell hooks, however, is describing rap music. I agree that many rap bodies are desired by audiences, but I am also concerned that their bodies are envisioned as easily re-enslaved, commodified through dress that is corporate rather than nationalistic or African inspired (Bad Brains’s taste for Rasta dress). Their emphasis on wealth and the trappings of a bourgeois life (college careers, caddies, and champagne) contrasts the Bad Brains’s emphasis on survival and reclamation (“you can’t hurt me…we got ourselves, going to sing it, gonna love it, gonna work it out at any length”). The trope of suffering endures within the Bad Brains song library (note their song “House of Suffering” on I Against I), whereas Run DMC later turned to clean rap and Christian lives.
     
    In the texts of bell hooks, Paul Gilroy, and many other theorists, black punk rock (or Afro-punk) cultural productions tend to be undervalued or absent. Black resistance to hegemony reverberates in varied and vibrant musical forms: black punks were, and are, still at the forefront. While punk and hardcore may indeed be a genre and community ripe with convergence and, arguably, some contentious forms of hybridity, academics still lack the history, insight, and willingness to engage not only the discourse of independent and mainstream media and culture but to challenge their own academic leanings as well. As Thomas Barnett from Strike Anywhere stressed to me, there is a “closeness and affinity between black and white revolutionary arts,” but the goal is to “make these connections clearer and nourishing again,” so that punk rock does not simply become “another obedient, palatable form.”
     

    David Ensminger is an Instructor of English, Humanities, and Folklore at Lee College in Baytown, Texas. He completed his M.S. in the Folklore Program at the University of Oregon and his M.A. in Creative Writing at City College of New York City. His study of punk street art and Do-It-Yourself culture, Visual Vitriol: The Art and Subcultures of the Punk and Hardcore Generations, is slated for July 2011 release by the University of Mississippi. His work has recently appeared in the Journal of Popular Music Studies and M/C Journal (Australia), and he contributes regularly to the Houston Press, Maximum Rock’n’Roll, Popmatters, and Trust (Germany). As a longtime fanzine editor, flyer artist, and drummer as well, he has archived punk history, including in his blog documenting African American punk rock productions: http://blackpunkarchive.wordpress.com.
     

    Notes

     
    1. Berry’s “Maybelline” was covered by the Midwest garage punk band the Replacements covered in 1981. Guitarist Billy Zoom “neatly wrenched” guitar lines from “Brown-Eyed Handsome Man” for the X tune “Year 1,” according to writer Debra Rae Cohen. In a 1984 Trouser Press, John Leland describes X’s overall music on the first album Los Angeles as a knotty, awkward, “Chunk Berried punk barrage.” Johnny Thunder’s band Gang War covered “Around and Around,” and even street punkers Sham 69 began as an R & B cover band covering the likes of “Roll Over Beethoven.”

     

     
    2. The 1979 track “Armagideon Time,” the B-side to the single “London Calling.” was written by dancehall progenitors Clement Dodd and Willie Williams.

     

     
    3. The reggae band Steel Pulse penned the song “Rock Against Racism.”

     

     
    4. Peter Silverton from Trouser Press reported in 1978 that the band had almost chosen the name Weak Heart Drops, a Big Youth song.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Anderson, Mark, and Mark Jenkins. Dance of Days: Two Decades of Punk in the Nation’s Capital. NYC: Soft Skull Press, 2001. Print.
    • Bad Brains. Banned in D.C. Bad Brains Greatest Riffs. Caroline Records, 2003. CD.
    • ———. Interview. Flipside 31 (Apr. 1982) n. pag. Print.
    • ———. Interview. Forced Exposure 2 (1982) n. pag. Print.
    • ———. Interview. Suburban Voice 21 (1987) n. pag. Print.
    • ———. Interview by Tim Tanooka. Ripper 7 (1982). n. pag. Print.
    • Bangs, Lester. “The White Noise Supremacists.” The Village Voice (30 Apr. 1979). Web. 3 Jan. 2008.
    • Barnett, Thomas. Interview by David Ensminger. “History is the Uneven Deeds of Humanity: Left of the Dial Consults of Strike Anywhere.” Left of the Dial 8 (Winter 2005). 74-79. Print.
    • The Bellrays (Tony Fate and Lisa Kekuala). Interview by Dan Shame. “Loud and Clear: The Sermon of the Bellrays.” Maximumrocknroll 227 (Apr. 2002). n. pag. Print.
    • Biafra, Jello. Interview by Tim Yohannen. “Dead Kennedys … call it a day — Jello talks of the past, present, and future.” Maximumrocknroll 44 (Jan. 1986). n pag. Print.
    • ———”Dead Kennedys Tour Down Under.” Maximumrocknroll 10 (1983). Web. http://homepages.nyu.edu/~cch223/australia/info/dktourreport.html
    • Bo. Maximumrocknroll 37 (Jun. 1986). n. pag. Print.
    • Bondage, U-Ron. Interview by David Ensminger. “One Eye on U-Ron from Really Red.” Left of the Dial 8 (Winter 2005). 54-61. Print.
    • Bondi, Vic. Liner Notes. Articles of Faith. Complete Vol. 1. 1981-1983. Alternative Tentacles Records, 2002. CD.
    • “Clash City Rockers.” Uncut. (Dec. 2003.) 43-78. Print.
    • The Clash. Interview by Barry Miles. “The Clash: Eighteen Flight Rock…” New Music Express (11 Dec. 1976). Print.
    • ———. The Clash. New York: Grand Central Publishing, 2008. Print.
    • ———. Interview by Terry Lot. Record Mirror. (1 Jul. 1978). Web. http://homepage.mac.com/blackmarketclash/
    • Davis, Bruce. “Joey on the Ramones.” The Bob (Winter 1990) 10-11. Print.
    • Dawson, Ashley. “Love Music, Hate Racism”: The Cultural Politics of the Rock Against Racism Campaigns, 1976-1981.” Postmodern Culture 16.6 (Sept. 2005). n. pag. Web. 25 Dec. 2007.
    • Dictor, David. Personal interview. Sept. 2008.
    • Egan, Sean. “London’s Burning.” Uncut (Feb. 2003): 40-57. Print.
    • Eileraas, Karina. “Witches Bitches and Fluids: Girl Bands Performing Ugliness as Resistance.” The Drama Review 41.3 (Autumn 1997): 122-139.
    • Flouride, Klaus. Interview by David Ensminger. 24 Feb. 2011. Email.
    • Friedlander, Paul and Peter Miller. Rock’n’Roll: A Social History. Boulder: Westview, 2006. Print.
    • Fusco, Coco. English is Broken Here: notes on cultural fusion in the Americas. New York: The New Press, 1995. Print.
    • Gilroy, Paul. The Black Atlantic: Modernity and Double Consciousness. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1995. Print.
    • ———. There Ain’t No Black in the Union Jack: The Politics of Race and Nation. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1991. Print.
    • Gimarc, George. Punk Diary: The Ultimate Trainspotter’s Guide to Underground Rock 1970 – 1982. San Francisco: Backbeat Books, 2005. Print.
    • Goldberg, Michael. “A Fired-up Joe Strummer brings his new Clash to America.” Rolling Stone 416 (Mar. 1984). Web. 22 Feb. 2011. http://londonsburning.org/art_rolling_stone_03_01_84.html
    • Gray, Marcus. Last Gang in Town: The Story and Myth of the Clash. New York: Henry Holt and Company, 1995. Print.
    • Halberstam, Judith. “What’s That Smell?: Queer Temporalities and Subcultural Lives.” S & F Online. 2.1 (Summer 2003) n. pag. Web. 22 Feb. 2008.
    • Hall, Stuart. “Representation and the Media.” Prod. and Dir. Sut Jhally. Media Education Foundation. 1997. Web. 20 Feb. 2011.
    • Hambleton, Paul. “Roger Sabin Replies… Punk & Racism Part???!!” www.punk77.co.uk. 17 July 2001. Web. 20 Feb. 2008.
    • Hebdige, Dick. Hiding in the Light. New York: Routledge, 1988. Print.
    • ———. Subculture: The Meaning of Style. New York: Routledge, 1979. Print.
    • Home, Stewart. Cranked Up Real High: Genre Theory and Punk Rock. (1997) Stewart Home Society. Web. 20 Feb. 2011.
    • hooks, bell. “Eating the Other.” Feminist Approaches to Theory and Methodology: An Interdisciplinary Reader. Eds. Sharlene Hesse-Biber et al. New York: Oxford U Press, 1998. 179-194. Print.
    • Isler, Scott. “Malcolm McLaren: From the Eye of the Storm.” Trouser Press 85 (May 1983). 20-25, 55. Print.
    • James, David. E. “Poetry/Punk/Productions: Some Recent Writing in LA.” Postmodernism and Its Discontents. Ed. Ann Kaplan. New York: Verso, 1988. 163-186. Print.
    • James, Martin. “The Clash: A Teenage Love Story.” The Independent. 28 Sept. 2004. Web. 22 Feb. 2004.
    • Jones, Simon. Black Culture White Youth: The Reggae Tradition from JA to UK. Basingstoke: Macmillan Education, 1988. Print.
    • Kinman, Tony. Interview by David Ensminger. Left of the Dial 3 (Summer 2002). 37-49. Print.
    • Letts, Don. “The Clash Clamp Down on Detroit Or: Give ‘Em Enough Wisniowka.” Interview by Susan Whitehall. Creem (June 1980). 41-45, 60-61 Print.
    • ———. “Dem Crazy Baldheads are My Mates.” Guardian Unlimited. 24 Oct. 2001. Web. 22 Feb. 2008.
    • Long, Al (Nausea). Interview by Alicia Non Grata. Maximumrocknroll 82 (Mar. 1990). Print.
    • Mad Dog (the Controllers). Interview. Maximumrocknroll 138 (Nov. 1994). Print.
    • McLaren, Malcolm. Interview by Greg Stacy. Ben is Dead 26 (1996). n. pag. Print.
    • ———. Interview by Robert Becker. Interview (April 1986). 262. Print.
    • Moore, Allan. Rock: The Primary Text: developing a musicology of rock. Farnham: Ashgate, 2001. Print.
    • Orman, John. The Politics of Rock Music. Chicago: Nelson-Hall, 1984. Print.
    • Orshoski, Wes. “DVD Looks Back at the Clash’s ‘Revolution.’” Billboard.com. 25 April. 2008. Web. 6 Dec. 2008.
    • Pepperell, Raymond John (“East Bay Ray”). Message to the author. 27 Feb. 2011. Email.
    • Philip, Mark. Interview by David Ensminger. Aug. 2009. Email.
    • Potter, Russell A. Spectacular vernaculars: hip-hop and the politics of postmodernism. Albany: State U of New York P, 1995. Print.
    • Raha, Maria. Cinderella’s Big Score: Women of the Punk and Indie Underground. Berkeley: Seal Press, 2004. Print.
    • “Rap Session! with Dave Dictor (MDC), Ian MacKaye (Minor Threat), and Vic Bondi (Articles of Faith).” Maximumrocknroll 8. (Sept. 1983). n. pag. Print.
    • Rowe, David. Popular Cultures: Rock Music, Sport, and the Politics of Pleasure. London: SAGE Publishing, 1995. Print.
    • Rubio, Steve. “Oh Bondage Up Yours.” Bad Subjects 6 (May 1993) n. pag. Web. 20 Feb. 2011.
    • Salewicz, Chris. Liner Notes. Burning Ambitions: A History of Punk. Cherry Red, 1982. CD.
    • Savage, Jon. England’s Dreaming: Anarchy, Sex Pistols, Punk Rock, and Beyond. London: Faber and Faber, 2005. Print.
    • Scream. Interview. Ink Disease 4 (1983). n. pag. Print.
    • ———. Interview by Donny the Punk. Flipside 48 (Spring 1986) n. pag. Print.
    • Secret Hate. Interview by Al Flipside. Flipside 38 (May 1983). Print.
    • Smith, Fred (“Freak”). Interview by David Ensminger. 2009. Email.
    • Snow, Matt. “Death or Glory.” MOJO 180 (Nov. 2008). Print.
    • Stevenson, James. Interview by David Ensminger. Leftofthedial.com. 17 Apr. 2007. Web. 22 Feb. 2011.
    • Testa, Jim. “Mike Watt: Tugboat or Minuteman? Contemplating the Hereafter.” Jersey Beat 72 (Fall/Winter 2002). n. pag. Print.
    • Traber, Daniel. “L.A.’s ‘White Minority.’ Punk and the Contradictions of Self-Marginalization.” Cultural Critique 48.1 (2001): 30-64. Print.
    • ———. Whiteness, Otherness, and the Individualism Paradox from Huck to Punk. New York: Macmillan, 2007. Print.
    • Trakin, Roy. “Blondie: If Music Be the Flood of Love Play On.” Hit Parader (June 1981). 4-7. Print.
    • ———.”Suicide Commits Itself.” New York Rocker (May 1980). 31. Print.
    • Vee, Tesco. “Interview with Iron Cross.” Touch and Go 16 (1981). n. pag. Print.
    • Wallechinsky, David, Amy Wallace, Ira Bassen, and Jane Farrow. The Book of Lists, the Canadian Edition: The Original Compendium of Curious Information. Canada: Knopf, 2005. Print.
    • Waller, Don. “In Search of the Elephant’s Balls.” Make the Music Go Bang! The early L.A. Punk Scene. Ed. Don Snowden. New York: St. Martin’s, 1997. 115-128. Print.
    • Wendy, Goph, and Annette. “Iron Cross interview.” Guillotine 8 (Dec. 1984). 28-29. Print.
    • Wuelfing, Howard. Interview by David Ensminger. 20 August 2008. Email.
    • Zanes, RJ Warren. “Too Much Mead?” Reading Rock’n’Roll: Authenticity, Appropriation, and Aesthetics. Ed. Kevin Dettmar and William Richey. New York: Columbia UP, 1999. 37-71. Print.

     

  • Lovecraft through Deleuzio-Guattarian Gates

    Patricia MacCormack (bio)
    Anglia Ruskin University
    Patricia.Maccormack@anglia.ac.uk

    Abstract
     
    This essay picks up on Deleuze and Guattari’s brief invocation of the work of H.P. Lovecraft. Deleuze and Guattari’s project to develop a philosophy of sorcery as a mode of thought that gestures toward becoming-imperceptible is considered by reading examples in Lovecraft’s “cosmic horror” of the terrors and revolutions available through the becomings of his protagonists. Contextualising his work outside of traditional genres of fantasy and science fiction, this essay offers the reading of Lovecraft’s writings as a passing through gates. This liberating practice produces encounters with abstract alterity, beginning with the ethical consideration of the preliminary otherness of women and the animal in Deleuze and Guattari’s work, via becoming-monstrous, to an infinite territory beyond representation, signification, and perception itself.

     

     
    In A Thousand Plateaus Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari invoke H.P. Lovecraft five times. While Lovecraft is mentioned together with such literary figures as Moritz, Woolf and particularly Melville, his work has less in common with those authors than with the abstract demonology of Deleuze and Guattari’s “Becoming-Intense” (sec. 10). Deleuze and Guattari claim that Lovecraft “attempted to pronounce sorcery’s final word” (TP 251; sec. 10), although Lovecraft has received little attention in comparison with other writers loosely grouped into the usually maligned genres of fantasy, science fiction and gothic horror. In this essay I pull out the evocations in Deleuze and Guattari’s five references to the story Lovecraft wrote with E. Hoffman Price, Through the Gates of the Silver Key (hereafter TGSK), and offer sketches of the ways in which becomings proliferate through Lovecraft’s work, in particular throughout his ‘cosmic horror’ writing. I argue that Lovecraft may offer an affirming philosophy of becoming that renegotiates traditional perceptions of his work as nihilistic or purely horrific. In this way I propose Lovecraft as a catalyst for a philosophical negotiation of the politics of subjectivity and alterity.
     
    This essay is meant to present a series of possibilities and ideas and not a definitive summary of stories, so moments from stories are mentioned without explication or reference to narratives or events. Lovecraft’s work rarely privileges event and narrative, which I understand as an oeuvre of relations that at their simplest should not be. The primary concept underpinning becomings for Deleuze and Guattari is also relations which refuse relationships that enforce resemblance. By reading Lovecraft through Deleuze and Guattari, I propose an alternate interpretation of Lovecraft’s work as expressing a vitalistic philosophy and inspiring an ethics that addresses the structures of self posited with and as socio-cultural otherness. Becomings are not commensurate with unique singularities but are produced from unlike relations. Lovecraft’s cosmic horror works are obsessed with the idea of relations that inevitably structure and underpin human existence but that remain unknown to the human. The becoming with which Lovecraft’s humans participate comes from the Elder Gods or more usually the Ancient Ones, a pantheon composed by Lovecraft from various Assyrio-Babylonian, Mesopotamian and particularly ancient Sumerian cacodemons. The Elder Gods act as gatekeepers for the Ancient Ones or Great Ones, a group of creatures associated with the terror of possibly unleashing a world of hybrid relations with humans which would either wipe humans out or, if the Great Ones entered into becomings, would wipe out subjectivity and perception as we know it. The Ancient Ones are presented in detail in Lovecraft’s The Necronomicon, written under the pseudonym Abdul Alhazred, which can be understood together with other apocryphal texts such as Eibon. These same demons appear in the pandemonium of Milton’s Paradise Lost, in Satan’s fallen land, but the idea of a pantheonic pack or a multiplicity within the one and a oneness of the multiple also resonates with the Devil’s response to Jesus’s question about his identity: “I am legion, for we are many” (Holy Bible, Mark 5:9). The dreadful realisation overcomes Lovecraft’s protagonists that they have always been in relation with and related to monstrous entities. In this context S.T. Joshi evaluates Lovecraft as an activating writer: “[R]ealism is … not a goal but a function in Lovecraft; it facilitates the perception that ‘something which could not possibly happen’ is actually happening” (33). Joshi emphasizes that Lovecraft is both and neither a writer of fantasy fiction and/nor of realism. This claim resonates with the crucial element of becoming in Deleuze and Guattari, namely that becomings are not metaphors and do not occur in a theatre of representation but rather actualize potentialities of thought.
     
    While many of Lovecraft’s stories include the atmospheric suspense of gothic fiction and the predictive elements of science-fiction, his descriptions of fantastic states are based on a refined knowledge of physics and a commitment to immersing both the characters and the reader in the cosmic horror. I argue here that Lovecraft should be understood as a writer who is not against realism but rather who attempts to find a new realism-mobilisation. Michael Houellebecq claims that Lovecraft avoids precision “with regards to the distribution of [the Ancient Ones’] powers and abilities. In fact their exact nature is beyond the grasp of the human mind.… those humans who seek to know more ineluctably pay with madness and death” (83). Poststructuralism enables us to translate “madness” as schiz-subjectivity and “death” as the death of reified identity that is launching upon becomings. For Lovecraft, monsters are not aberrant versions of the human. They are monstrous, that is, not in form, but on the levels of perception and possibility. What emerges in Lovecraft is that the human is a vague, strategic myth for ensuring sanity and thus traditional subjectivity through a belief in like relations. The human is of, indeed perhaps created by, monsters that are horrific not only in their hybrid incarnations but also in the impossibility of their being perceived through human modes of apprehension; this shows that the human is nothing more than its own fantastical myth and the infinite possibility of the beyond which is also the within. The horror experienced by Lovecraft’s protagonists need not close off the possibility that his readers would negotiate their own subjectivity and elements of alterity as a specific system of power. Beyond authorial intent, Lovecraft can demand, perhaps radically, a dissipation of powers that are contingent on the maintenance of the category of human. This is the political context of this essay. Maligned as sexist and racist, Lovecraft ironically catalyzes the becomings of the human through infinite and abstracting paradigms, and thereby requires his readers to reorient power relations, along the lines of poststructuralist, feminist, and postcolonial strategies alike. Thus Joshi is correct to describe Lovecraft’s writing as functional. Lovecraft himself explains that supernatural horror in literature “demands from the reader a certain degree of imagination and a capacity for detachment from everyday life” (Supernatural Horror 12). As Joshi points out, however, this does not preclude realism. Poststructuralism has demonstrated that there is no simple bifurcation dividing art and thought: what we create constitutes how we perceive reality, which then contributes to what we create, but it is the indeterminable and non-transcriptive or non-equivalent nature of this causality that makes the functioning of art in life and of life in art interesting.
     
    Along with asking what Lovecraft means, then, we also can ask what reading Lovecraft might do. Donald Burleson premises his poststructural reading of Lovecraft – which, like Joshi’s analysis, emphasises manner over meaning – with the reminder that authorial intent is inaccessible and presence remains a metaphysical phantasy (5-7). In his analysis of Pickman’s Model, Burleson states that “Pickman is absent because his plural nature denies the metaphysics of presence and self-identity.… Pickman divides himself against himself” (91). If the reader does the same, can an address to alterity be mobilised? Burleson interprets “The Colour Out of Space” as offering a refutation of systems themselves; here, to see “a visible impression, not belonging to this system, is to suggest disturbance of the system and, allegorically, subversion of systems generally. What is at work here is the undoing of categorical thinking, the unravelling of any system claiming final mastery, exhaustive cataloguing, total solution, immutable results, settled ‘reading’ of reality” (108). Mastery refuses a negotiatory ethics of difference. Against the allegorical emphasis of this claim, however, I propose that the functional activating of potentiality that does not recognise metaphor as its own closed circuit shows how reading Lovecraft may challenge close/d readings and other techniques of mastering words, bodies, flesh, perception and subjectivity beyond the text into the world. Ultimately I will ask: what did Lovecraft do to perception and what can we do with Lovecraft?
     
    This essay extends what Deleuze and Guattari call unnatural participation, understood as an impossible yet compulsory relation to the perception of cosmic horrors, in order to rethink the category of the human. The figure of gates of perception posits relation as an opening up rather than as an elliptical return to genesis. Through demonic relations Deleuze and Guattari seek abstract machines of relation that are no less real for being abstract, and argue, along with Joshi, that Lovecraft is a realist because of the function rather than the content of his work. This means that Lovecraft’s writings can be understood in a wider, political context instead of as belonging to a genre which distances itself from social life. Deleuze and Guattari connect this idea to Spinoza’s claim that ethics is produced not by commensurable relation, which privileges (usually) one form and function over another, but rather by what is produced between the two. Lovecraft’s literature offers an art event that is no less real for catalysing new gates of perception and possibilities of relation. By accessing Lovecraft’s necronomic gates toward the infinite and imperceptible but also the immanently present, we are forced to think, first, potentiality as an encounter with alterity, and, second, the political risks and imperatives of ourselves as becoming-other. This essay is structured as a series of “gates” in the sense of those bridges that Deleuze and Guattari, in What is Philosophy, describe as creating a “new concept of perceptual space” (19). As becomings concern not what structures relationships (between two reified entities), but what is produced through unnatural relations, gates of Lovecraftian perception open what Deleuze and Guattari call unheard of becomings – not unheard of because they have never been heard before, but because they cannot be heard through established, majoritarian vocalisations.
     
    In “Becoming Intense” Deleuze and Guattari describe abstract planes of consistency with reference to sorcery, Bergson, Spinoza, haecceity, plane-making, molecules, secrets, points, and blocks. None of these are abstractions or fantasies in the sense that they do not concern the material. They are abstract in the sense that the material is always concerned with planes. Majoritarian structures of perception create planes that are atrophied, adamantly heard of, and able-to-be-heard before their vocalisation arrives. Lovecraft’s reader is not confronted with what happens to whom and why, but with the unbearable reality of effectuation of unheard-of relations without perception as external, causal and commensurable apprehension, which is to say with a miasmic material reality: “a plane of consistency peopled by anonymous matter, by infinite bits of impalpable matter entering into varying connections” (Deleuze and Guattari, TP 255), Via Spinoza but primarily as sorcerers, and through Lovecraft, Deleuze and Guattari thus offer an ethics of becomings whose main phases are: 1) relations without likeness, 2) entities without form or function, 3) relations which are nonetheless real in spite of their abstract nature and the abstracting of the entities, 4) these relations forcing alternate modes of perception without laying new structures of apprehension, finally leading to 5) the function of art as catalysing becomings in the reader by demanding alternate perceptions of relation with any and all entities. As Deleuze and Guattari point out, these all occur on the same abstract plane.
     
    There is no leaving behind Lovecraft when we close his pages. Lovecraft’s work may be fantasy, the monsters fictive, the narratives fragmentary, but the relation to possibilities of thought through imperceptible though terrifically present entities is a gate through which the reader enters becomings that differentiate all relations on a plane of consistency. Against Joshi, Colin Wilson claims that Lovecraft was opposed to realism and particularly to materialism. What is at stake here is not whether Lovecraft personally rejected materialism but whether his negotiation of perception itself has material effects in the post-structural sense of re-negotiating signifying systems and relations of difference and otherness in the world. Wilson titles his chapter on Lovecraft the “Assault on Rationality.” Rationality has traditionally been the realm of dominant, logocentric, majoritarian systems. Wilson emphasizes Lovecraft’s obsession with the monstrous, and Braidotti the definition of monster as any deviation from the base level zero “human.” Braidotti states that “the discourse on monsters as a case study highlights … the status of difference within rational thought” (78). Wilson points out that Lovecraft “is willing to make his setting modern, but it must be remote from civilisation, a kind of admission of defeat” (4). This tendency evinces Lovecraft’s interest in describing the connective affectivity of fantastic perception and world, rather than a non-terrestrial dystopia. For this reason the political question becomes “defeat of what?” From a politics of alterity we could argue that Lovecraft works to defeat the exertion of perception and knowledge, for the exertion of power opens the way for other forms of subjectivity to emerge.
     
    Lovecraft’s oeuvre falls into two categories. One encompasses more familiar tales of terror found in horror stories and novels of the late eighteenth to early nineteenth centuries; the other is based on the great Lovecraft mythos. The stories based on the mythos address three main phases. The first, which Lovecraft calls “transition” or “mutation,” expresses the becoming(s) of protagonists as they begin to corporeally and psychologically articulate inflection with alternate genera, terrestrial teratological and alien (a division that is in fact unclear in Lovecraft). The second is the entering into the worlds, or, in keeping with his disinterest in disambiguation, the domains occupied by these creatures as gods. The third is the distortion of perception. Lovecraft was responsible for creating entire pantheons, universes, worlds, and alternate temporal realities of evolution and alien existence. The key element which differentiates Deleuze and Guattari’s almost jubilant citation of Lovecraft’s ideas is the lack of attention to what most Lovecraft commentators misguidedly call, as does Michael Houellebecq in the title of his seminal book, Lovecraft’s proclivity against life. The quality of one’s journey toward Lovecraft should take into account the definitions of such terms as “life,” “human,” and other Earthly tenets of thoughts, apprehensions of form and perceptions of states. Challenging the category of the human underpins all becomings, beginning with the most obvious falling away from the hu”Man” to woman, animal and eventually abstract particles, sonority, and inhuman planes. Apparently in contradiction with his premise that Lovecraft’s work shows a nihilistic weariness with life, Houellebecq in fact claims in his preface that through Lovecraft we can live in poetry (25). With the help of Deleuze and Guattari, this essay ultimately explores the readers’ passing through the gates of Lovecraftian perception, which involves the creation of a speech, from the unspeakable to the ‘unsayable’; incommensurable relations which take the very acts of writing and speech to their limits; accessing the outside and the unthinkable; but which are also, and in contradistinction to Wilson’s claim, is no less material for doing so. Resonant with speech of the unsayable, Lovecraftian perception is perception upon a different plane. (Burleson touches on this when he cites Derrida’s claim that “there is nothing outside the text” (10); in this case, however, I would tend more toward the work of Foucault and Blanchot, which introduce accountability and responsibility into this concept.) Lovecraft can be invigorating if read as a writer of the baroque (through, for example, Deleuze’s work on Leibniz) rather than, as many have claimed, the gothic; if read through physics as much as folklore; and as long as one reads and thinks of Lovecraft as an act of sorcery. Critics such as Siegel have claimed persistently that Lovecraft is a writer of gothic fiction (51). This tendency arises more from the resonance of trite adjectives such as ‘haunted’, ‘dark’, ‘horrific’ and so forth that are applied to Lovecraft’s work, than from the difficult task of seeing his work as phylum. Hybrid becomings, however, could help readers describe Lovecraft as a writer of the baroque rather than of the gothic (see MacCormack, “Baroque Intensity”). Relating to themes and places more modern (though emphatically anti-modernist) than the abbey-bound turpitude of G.M. Lewis and less romantic than the occultism of F. Marion Crawford, Lovecraft’s protagonists, (who are also uninterested in Bram Stoker’s socio-political tenets of industrialisation), are neither haunted nor hounded by entities they will eventually overcome. (To be fair, however, this repudiation of the gothic is more readily found in Lovecraft’s cosmic tales than in the intimate stories of dread.)
     
    Becomings deal not with kinds but with states. The journeys upon which Lovecraft’s protagonists, and we as readers, launch, are journeys that involve “passing through” as becomings, not the completion of a project of becoming with another element. A demonological philosophy after Deleuze and Guattari increasingly becomes less about animals and demons than about gates. Contagion, packing, proliferation alter the qualities of the passing, and each gate could be described as a mode of perception-consistency. Randolph Carter understands his journey through the gates as a “flux of impressions.… [Gates lead] from earth and time to that extension of earth which is outside time, and from which in turn the Ultimate Gate leads fearsome and perilously to the Last Void which is outside all earths, all universes and all matter” (Lovecraft, TGSK 516-17). Carter uses the apocryphal grimoire by the Mad Arab (probably written by Lovecraft himself), The Necronomicon. In The Necronomicon itself (especially in “The Book of Entrance and of Walking,” “The Book of Calling,” and “The Incantations of the Gates”), the names and qualities of encounters with gods are seen as gates, not entities; so the kind or order of the gods is also understood as qualities of movement and as locations that incarnate particular impression-states. Quality of flux, guided by imagination and dream over goal, opens the gates. The use of a grimoire and conjuration resonates with Deleuze and Guattari’s philosophy of sorcery, not simply because the act of sorcery underpins the plane of consistency in both cases, but also because in both cases the rituals concern “modes of expansion [and]… occupation” (TP 239; sec. 10). Occupying a place whose territories are expanded through various reorientations of impression produces an anomalous place. Deleuze and Guattari emphasize that the adjective anomalous situates a position or a phenomenon of bordering. In this sense, gates, understood as borders of becomings, are used in this essay to describe Lovecraft’s different phases of becomings, phases which cannot be understood in terms of causality or of narrative logic. The first gate addresses Deleuze and Guattari’s three modes of animality, and Lovecraft’s idea that animality is exemplified by propagation. Gate Two addresses the shift from recognisable animal intensity to what Deleuze and Guattari call the demonic animal, which appears in Lovecraft as the Elder Gods and Ancient Ones. Gate Three explores the way, in becomings, the categorically human is crucially absent. Using Deleuze’s work on Leibniz, Gate Four begins to address the move from becomings as acts of participation with other elements, to the altering of modes of perception as such and posits Lovecraft as a writer of the baroque on account of his manipulation of the physics of perception-planes. Gate Five contextualises Lovecraft’s modes of speech, the compulsion to say the unsayable in order to access the outside – or what Deleuze and Guattari call the abstract, outside perceptions of form, function and comprehension – but within the world and found in art; in this sense the abstraction is no less material and real. Gate Six, finally, asks what ethical imperatives are presented by Lovecraft’s art.
     

     

    Gate 1. Orders of Animals, Orders of Demons

     
    In Deleuze and Guattari’s work, becomings pass through stages which can generally be described as devolutionary, and which Deleuze and Guattari call “neoevolutionary.” The majoritarian subject “man” (which is to say, all human subjects) enters into relations with primary elements of minoritarian alterity, becoming-woman, becoming-animal, and other, a-human forms, toward more refined, ambiguous expressions of content. The animal, however, is the primary node for inhuman or a-human becomings. Deleuze and Guattari demarcate three orders of animality. The first is the Oedipal animal, the puppy-baby (Freud). Second is the symbolic or archetype animal, which creates and immobilises itself upon a metaphoric structure of signification (Jung). The third animal is the demonic animal, in which two elements must be present – the animal here is itself a phenomenon of bordering, hybridity, and metamorphicity. Demonic animals are defined as “pack or affect animals that form a multiplicity, a population, a becoming, a tale” (TP 241; sec. 10). Vampires, werewolves, and demons belong to this third order of animality. Because they are both familiar and unfamiliar to us, however, they seem to resonate with the negotiations of what a human-animal could be, both when it is mistakenly read through the first two orders of animality, and when its becomings are overlooked. It involves a relation with an abstract animal. Oedipal animality – the family puppy-baby – manifests its narcissism through subjective ownership – “‘my’ cat, ‘my’ dog” (TP 240; sec. 10). Oedipal animals affirm the self through the construction of an anthropomorphising family system in which the animal is allowed to emerge only through conditional love that fulfills the parameters of the substitute child. Since the animal is inferior in both its structural position and its species, it resolves the woman’s penis envy and the man’s castration anxiety. The second order of animals is the archetypal animal who is invested with human qualities and effectively only has, or represents, human qualities. These animals are extricated from animality, but the range of their symbolic function is almost limitless. Both systems in no way include animals, just human, signifying systems. We need to develop the critique further here, however, so that the werewolf/demon/vampire is not misunderstood as some uncanny, gothic entity. Lovecraft claims that he seeks “to make the flesh creep” (qtd. in Wilson 3) more than to unfurl narrative through characters. This focus on flesh directly challenges metaphor and the distance between reader and text. As a kind of physio-cerebral affectivity, it dissolves metaphor and makes the text politically accountable for its catalyzing of different modes of thinking.
     
    Demons thus belong to the third order of Deleuze and Guattari’s animal taxonomy. Becoming through a pact-pack with the demon also describes the first phase of Lovecraftian sorcery. One of the remarkable contributions Lovecraft makes to literature is his formulation of a pantheon of gods. Unlike other fantasy writers, however, Lovecraft creates gods within this world, which is also folded together with worlds outside of time and space. As Gates, Lovecraft’s gods are responsible for the horror of altering modes of being in the world, and they do so by creating the pure immanence of multiple worlds. Taxonomies of monsters, orders of gods, worlds demarcated as fantastical or real are absent in Lovecraft, and it is the very absence of these demarcations which causes horror. Lovecraft’s gods lack the signification and subjectification that, according to Deleuze and Guattari, facilitates majoritarian power, which in turn sanctions the emergence of subjects. The entities with which the protagonists enter becomings are abstract and ambiguous (as emergent entities they are always there but not entirely apprehensible). Becomings in Lovecraft are also compulsory – the protagonists have no choice, but while horror is thereby irrefutably catalysed, it comes from the loss, and not from the destruction, of the self. These monsters destroy through alliance rather than murder. Lovecraft emphasises that becomings are already available and that we always already choose the extent to which we resist or submit to the everyday alliances we make. In this way he demonstrates that retaining reified subjectivity is as much an act as would be letting go of it. Deleuze and Guattari use the concept of demons to expand the intersection of the hybrid with the animal. Aesthetic and apocryphal demons such as werewolves and vampires are single expressions of human-animal elements, inherently metamorphic and part of packs. Since demons must be invoked after first being imagined as fabulations, thinking becoming-demon for them requires a philosophy of sorcery. Lovecraft’s lower gods are fabulations of demons, inter-species hybrids with orders of non-mammalian animals, and this Deleuzio-Guattarian index is where Lovecraft’s a-human becomings begin. Deleuze and Guattari do not offer aesthetic, cinematic or literary examples of their demons – the devil, werewolves and vampires – because these arise as particle verb bands rather than as infernal monsters or as metaphorical, figurative, or symbolic entities. When examples are offered, they resonate around becomings which are not as familiar to us as those of the werewolf and vampire. Precisely because these monsters emerge through so many varied examples of actualised virtualities, however, they remain abstract potentiality, whereas the specific literary citations of Woolf’s becoming-monkey, Ahab’s becoming-whale, and so on, are examples of singularities before the formation of new threshold packs.
     

    Gate 2. From Demonic Heredity to Abstract Alliance

     
    Gate 2 focuses on the demonic in Deleuze and Guattari’s elements of becoming, as abstract animal entities. This Gate explores the liminal band between a-human, animal elements and the demon that is beyond animal-element perception. Lovecraft’s gods are not monsters; they do not belong to extra-human orders from which they threaten to slaughter the demarcated human, and they do not reside in the entirely external fantasy worlds that are found in many traditional horror stories. Ancient Ones and Elder Gods are beyond Frankenstein’s creature and Dracula, and they are too earthly present to be classified along with the alien gods and monsters of fantasy novels. For the renegotiation of our becomings, it is important to note that we cannot categorise them as outside, either in form or in world. They are immediately present but also without presence since they are not recognisably other or antagonistic. The qualities of Lovecraft’s gods and entities are, furthermore, always themselves in states of becoming. They include multiple intensities and mobile qualities of many animals, particularly cephalopods, fish. and insects, as well as a bacterial forms of bubbling, molecular viscosity. As the gods are in their own states of becoming, their function as an anomalous, allied term is already beyond our capacity to name them. As hyper-hybrids, they also occupy territories that could be described as having their own becomings – water-land worlds, outer-space-within-this space and so forth, what Deleuze and Guattari call a “Universe fiber” that is “strung across borderlines” (TP 249; sec. 10). In addition, since they cannot be destroyed, their states of “life” are tentative. They are incapable of killing humans, but only change their state of life, as they are neither dead nor alive. The thresholds and gates Lovecraft’s monsters force us to negotiate are resistant, not only to being destructive monsters, but also to being hybrid entities that we could demarcate for our becomings. Their qualities of contagion, as hybrids or outside entities, preclude them from being monsters, and thus resonate with Deleuze and Guattari’s terms for elements of becoming, from wolf-whale-rat to demonic dimensionality and borderline propagation. The Ancient Ones are described physically as threshold creatures – both fish and fowl, flesh and fur, a kind of sentient, amphibious nebula from a pre-human, pre-historical time that is both more civilised and intelligent than the human time, and barbarically uncivilised. Inevitably and most horrifically, the Ancient Ones reproduce the limit restricting even hybrid animality from a pure abstraction-becoming. The animal elements of the Ancient Ones, while residually named as animal, are in fact cephalopodan, insect and other adamantly non-mammalian forms. Cthulhu is seen in bas-relief as a squid dragon, “an octopus, a dragon, and a human caricature… [whose] pulpy tentacled head surmounted a grotesque and scaly body with rudimentary wings” (Lovecraft, “The Call of Cthulhu,” hereafter TCC, 63). Dagon is a fish-man-god (Lovecraft, “Dagon” 16). The encounter between protagonists and their becoming-Ancient Ones reflects this threshold. Cthulhu lives a threshold consciousness, lying dead but dreaming. The geography of Cthulhu’s fallen cities of R’lyeh lies at the threshold of the mountains of madness, at immeasurable depths beneath the sea (apparently near New Zealand). Randolph Carter’s becoming is “human and non-human, vertebrate and invertebrate, animal and vegetable” (Lovecraft, TGSK 526), and the unnamed protagonist of The Shadow Over Innsmouth is a man-froglike-fish or fishlike-frog, “flopping, hopping, croaking, bleating” (Lovecraft, TSI 454). “Propagation by epidemic, by contagion, has nothing to do with filiation by heredity.… These combinations are neither genetic nor structural; they are interkingdoms” (Deleuze and Guattari, TP 241-2; sec. 10). In “The Shadow Over Innsmouth” the kingdom of immortal creatures of the sea arises to infect the citizens of Innsmouth with molecular intensities, merging land with sea and human with frog-fish-flesh. The narrator shares a family line with these hybrid worshippers of Dagon and Cthulhu, but genealogy produces a unique specificity of hybridity. He tells us that “them as turn into fish things an’ went into the water wouldn’t never die” (414).
     
    Mixed blood in this context clearly has more to do with disease and infection than with reproduction, while “reproduction” has to be understood not as a project of reproducing, but rather as the production, at each stage, of a unique generation of unrepeatable combinations. Hybrids, in science, are sterile and cannot reproduce, but like Cthulhu they also cease the need to reproduce because they become eternal. Houllebecq (problematically) reminds us that “most novelists consider it their duty to present an exhaustive picture of life” (61). In contrast to literature’s traditional compulsions to re-present endlessly, Lovecraft’s work and his monsters produce only singularities, thereby forcing readers to confront alterity and defamiliarization. What is at stake here is whether the reader chooses a liberation of ideology through this defamiliarization, or a stubbornly clings to powers of signification that maintain dominant subjectivity. Could we argue that minoritarian readers would, contra Houellebecq, find life in this liberation?
     
    Neither Carter nor the narrator of “Innsmouth” narrator enters into a desiring union as part of his transformation, but instead is propagated through hereditary disease (demonic reproduction) or geographical proximity to threshold kingdoms. Each relation between the protagonist and his seemingly inevitable fate as part of a family of singular hybrids forming a heterogeneous, seething, contagious collective ends with resignation, joy, liberation or an unqualified loss of perception. Lovecraft’s protagonists rarely prevail, they cease to be protagonists at all, and their fate is the packing-pacts of becomings. The population of the Innsmouth Order of Dagon pack are specific phyla which appear as unique entities due to their unpredictable combining of interkingdom coalescence. This is the Outsider that Deleuze and Guattari, following Lovecraft, describe as neither/both an individual nor/and a pack, which is to say as a “phenomenon of bordering” (TP 245; sec. 10). Bordering lines inflect at different and mobile angles. In Lovecraft’s “The Nameless City” (TNC), which makes the first reference to The Necronomicon, the unnamed narrator encounters half-transparent, chaotic devils, hybrid demons of crocodile-seal-man but “more often nothing of which either the naturalist or the palaeontologist ever heard.… But strangest of all were the heads, which presented a contour violating all known biological principles.… I thought of comparisons as varied as the cat, the bulldog, the mythic satyr, and the human being” (136). Eternal creatures lose the need for Oedipal or hierarchical structures because they no longer need familial or gender striation. Their condition as a pack is thus neither serial (based on equivalences demarcated through political, isomorphic binaries of gender, age or race) nor structural (based on arboreal hierarchy and genealogy). In addition, their immortality, like their genealogy, should be understood not as a chronology without end, but rather as time without duration, simultaneity including constant differentiation. The contemplation of this concept-state is often the catalyst for the protagonists’ madness, but only while they remain in the human world, with its modes of spatial disambiguation and unfurling temporality. We hear in TNC the much-cited couplet maxim of the Ancient Ones, also found in The Necronomicon, that “That which can eternal lie/And with strange aeons even death may die” (142).
     

    Gate 3. Inhuman Becomings

     
    The majoritarian, it could be argued, belongs to no category other than the particular species of the “human.” After becoming-woman, through which women must also pass, Deleuze and Guattari call to the human “becoming-animal.” The shift from being woman to becoming woman (a deeply problematic, precariously fetishistic concept for which Deleuze and Guattari have been maligned) is a movement from a category emergent only through majoritarian expression, as lacking and oppressed, to woman as a singularity or territory with no opposite. The very fact that Deleuze and Guattari posit woman as the first, surely horrific step for the majoritarian male to take in his relinquishing of power endows this politics of alterity with the mood of Lovecraft’s protagonists who, ultimately, fear becoming-nothing, a status to which minoritarians have long been relegated. The becoming-cosmic, however, shows that nothing is everything, just as many feminists, such as Irigaray in An Ethics of Sexual Difference, have argued that woman, in “lacking,” is both less than and more than one. From the definite politics of feminists of difference, we come to the larger paradigm of the human itself. While Lovecraft’s characters do not pass through a becoming-woman, they do leap to a becoming-animal that is neither human nor animal, and both. Insofar as the animal is nothing except the not human, becoming animal begins the ablation of the category of the human. As Lovecraft’s protagonists extend toward becomings that offer no recognisable elements, they can no longer be organised as hybrids of relations between two, whether animal/human or human/demon. Through abstract gods, this stage of becoming is able to erode entirely all residue of the human. Beyond the notion of the “post-human,” which suggests an “after,” Lovecraft’s becoming-inhuman is within so-called humans, immanently available, and indeed inevitable and compulsory. No longer hybrid with exo-kingdoms, the primary term “human” can no longer be described as becoming. The divisibility of becoming entities becomes increasingly difficult. This section explores the conception of relations of a-human or inhuman, non-differentiated, nebulous becomings as baroque. Lovecraft’s monsters are unto themselves not scary, the events not frightening, compared with facing the ultimate horror of losing subjectivity to the very molecular level of the human, the mammal, the invertebrate, the plant, the bacterial.
     
    In Lovecraft’s tales events are associated with phases of relation and production, not presented in increments of narrative evolution. For this reason I would extend Deleuze’s work on Leibniz and argue that both Deleuze and Guattari’s werewolves/vampires/demons and Lovecraft’s work deal with the baroque. Like the baroque, Lovecraft’s work consists not of collisions between forms but rather of acts of relations between substances, or, as Leibniz puts it, the power to act and be acted upon (81). The baroque is important for the politics of difference in my argument because Leibniz argues here that bodies depend on their affective relations with other bodies in order to define themselves. Techniques of subsumption and oppression through the reification of dominant identities amount to uneven relations without participation. Instead of perpetuating domination or subordination through refusal and extrication, attention to the affects and fluidity of bodies in proximity with and inflected through one another requires that our apprehension of those bodies negotiates the possibility of differing ourselves. For Leibniz, all bodies are modification or extension, existing as fluid aggregates, and their reality is not an essence within these bodies but rather, as Leibniz writes following Democritus, “they depend for their existence on opinion or custom” (69).
     
    Critics have accused Lovecraft of nihilism, pessimism (Lévy), paranoia (Carter) and, from an esoteric angle, qualities of negativity and poverty-stricken intangibility (Pasi, Hanegraaff), even if the critics have not necessarily presented these qualities as bad. More celebratory explorations have suggested that Lovecraft’s art allows encounters with the sublime (Ralickas). As a phenomenon of encountering an excess of signification that is no less material for being so, the sublime offers a jubilant reading of the ultimate dissipations that Lovecraft’s protagonists undergo. In direct reference to a politics of feminist alterity, Kristeva’s Desire in Language proposed the sublime as an integral element of the a-signifying systems encountered in becoming-woman. Lovecraft also has been utilised in queer theory and as a catalyst for activism (MacCormack, “Unnatural Alliances”), in illustration of Joshi’s point that his is a writing of function. Goodrich has explored Lovecraft as a mannerist, and has pointed to the plastic-artistry of his literary style. It is crucial to find joy in Lovecraft, as it is here we find liberation from dominant signifying systems. The question then becomes, “who benefits from maintaining these systems?” Reading Lovecraft as a baroque writer, we can find voluminous material (indeed all too material) becomings. The horror perhaps comes from the fact that these becomings are not metaphors; they are instead all too real and in fact invert metaphorisation, with no recourse to meaning. Far from disappearing or being consumed, Lovecraft’s characters are unable to escape, through death or victory, the reality of their metamorphoses. Leibniz states: “A corporeal substance can neither arise nor perish except by creation or annihilation… Consequently things which have souls do not arise or perish, but are only transformed” (92). Carter and Charles Dexter-Ward, among others, neither live nor die, and at best theirs is not a fear of transformation but of an irresistible “beckoning” (Lovecraft, TGSK 505). Whatever is annihilated is human. Indeed perhaps these stories are nihilistic for the human, always and only lacking or against only human life, the human understood as that which Leibniz’s ethics repudiates – an entity as a unified one. Becoming-inhuman is not death, “for no substance perishes, though it can become quite different” (Leibniz 43).
     
    Baroque transformation is bordering, infinitely and infinitesimally fractal, aggregate plurality, subdivision, “modification as extension” (Leibniz 68). The specificities of each of these qualities are not antagonistic, and unlike relations offer an ethics of difference that is crucial to minoritarian studies and becomings. The unnamed entity (probably Yog-Sothoth) that concludes “The Dunwich Horror” (DH) speaks half in English and half in imperceptible – and olfactory – utterances. It “has been split up into what it was originally made of, and can never exist again. It was an impossibility in a normal world. Only the least fraction was really matter in any sense we know” (Lovecraft, DH 151-2). The entity is called a “human blasphemy” (152), not because it is evil or aberrant, but because it could not be perceived and thus known as part of the “normal” world occupied by phantasies of human and other demarcated entities. Politically, minoritarians – women, queers, racial others and so forth – have been considered in this way, and in response have demanded a philosophy of re-negotiating signifying systems. Faith here is not belief in God but in the human and its associated qualities of singularity, reified subjectivity, and unified, homogenised expression of substance.
     
    Continental philosophy frequently emphasises that art first involves letting go of the category of the human. For Lyotard, art makes us become-inhuman (2). Deleuze states that desiring machines only occur between the non-human and the human (Desert Islands 243), and Deleuze and Guattari define art-affect as man’s [sic] non-human becoming (What is Philosophy? 172). For Guattari, the most important of the three ecologies of environment, social relations, and human subjectivity, is the rupture of human subjectivity through an entirely different logic (The Three Ecologies 28, 56). From less than human becomings – hybrid animal – to abstract hybrid becomings – demonic relations – baroque becomings now reach the inconceivable outside of all human thought – the unthinkable. Guattari claims that his third ecological register of aesthetic-ethics, the reterritorialization of subjectivity, is the most crucial, while Foucault shows that thought which is itself outside can, through art, offer access to an outside subjectivity, but within the world and art’s ecstasies.
     

    A thought that stands outside subjectivity, setting its limits as thought from without, articulating its end, making its dispersion shine forth, taking in only its invincible absence… regain[s] the space of its unfolding, the void serving as its site, the distance in which it is constituted and into which its immediate certainties slip the moment they are glimpsed.
     

    (Foucault 15-16)

     

    It is imperative to let go of the human in order to encounter and fold with art, which unfolds the self toward infinity and pure potentiality without genesis or destination. This unfolding is an ethical opening that sacrifices majoritarian access and expression to the powers of the human. Mrs. Gardner’s madness in Lovecraft’s “The Colour Out of Space” (TCOS) presents her as screaming “about things in the air which she could not describe. In her raving there was not a single specific noun, but only verbs and pronouns. Things moved and changed and fluttered, and ears tingled to impulses which were not wholly sounds” (250). The “monster” of TCOS is a quality of luminescence and bubbling of ooze that is threatening as affect and not as act. Like an encounter with art that appears to come from outside, the encounter with this entity resists the annexation of adjectives to nouns, and results in no more than vague fragments of descriptions of events, through what Deleuze and Guattari describe as a variety of sensation-compounds: vibration, the embrace or clinch, withdrawal, division, and distension – two elements drawn apart but together by the light, air, or void; they emphasise that “Affects are precisely these nonhuman becomings” (What is Philosophy? 168). For Lyotard, Foucault, Blanchot, and Rancière, art mandates letting go of the category of the human. In contradistinction to the assessment of Lovecraft as against life, perhaps we can celebrate him as a philosopher of alterity, even if he is, ironically, his own first victim (consider this alongside his ignoring women to a large extent and his xenophobia, both of which have been written on extensively). Of course such a celebration would be anchored by Joshi’s claim that Lovecraft’s work is about what we do with it: if Lovecraft’s work presents a political philosophy of alterity beyond authorial intent, it does so only in the way that it is utilised and not simply in what it says.

     
    Through becomings, “The Call of Cthulhu’s” Johansen and others are literally swallowed up, ingested into the Lovecraftian world. To be swallowed is to be ingested into the folds of the monster. The self becomes inherently part of the folds and foldings-in of these worlds, until all perception is enveloped within a plane of Lovecraftian monsters and hybrids. The folded self cannot become extricated from this plane, and instead becomes willingly infected by the contagion of the monstrous other planes, including those of other becomings such as woman or feminism. Thus we come to realise that Cthulhu is not a creature or form but purely a mode of (actually imperceptible) perception: “There were certain proportions or dimensions which I did not like” (Lovecraft, TNC 130); “Horrors of a form not to be surmised” (Lovecraft, “The Dream-Quest” 392). The baroque is infinite and indefinite becomings of form, and thus emphasizes the impossibility of apprehending anything except through aspect, turn, or intensity. Demons require the repudiation of humanity, and Deleuze and Guattari’s demonic bands first require getting rid of human classifications: “Lovecraft applies the term ‘Outsider’ to this thing or entity” (TP 245; sec. 10).
     
    In order to enter into this beyond-humanness we must act as sorcerers, which requires Deleuze and Guattari’s four stages of demonic pact-making. The first is the alliance with a demon, through which the human passes into the pack, which is the second phase. The third sees this pack create a borderland with another pack, which then allows the borderline to guide the future(s) of the human-animal collective pack intensities. The fourth stage is presumably the stage of ethics, creativity, and thought, as it involves the production of directions that most benefit each particle of each pack-pact, and always changes the micro- and macro- “things” within and between the borderline. The werewolf, demon, and the vampire, as not knowable but thinkable fabulations, are waves or bands and not figures or concepts – or, as in What is Philosophy?, they are pre-philosophical. Werewolves, demons, and vampires include elements similar to the human and to animal elements, but form strange, new, mobile, and what Deleuze and Guattari call unnatural participations (TP 242) and what Lovecraft perhaps would call “disturbing combinations” (TGSK 537). They are not uncanny, as they are not symbolic forms sewn together into demarcated half-half mythic monsters. According to a new grammar of becoming, it is not a cobbling together of two nouns, but rather the movement-combination-aspect of the familiar, or the verbing, that creates the hybrid: “But in the text itself it did indeed reek with wonder; for here was no script of any wholesome age, but the laboured strokes of mediaeval darkness, scarcely legible to the laymen who now strained over it, yet having combinations of symbols which seem vaguely familiar” (Lovecraft, “The Case of Charles Dexter Ward” 283).
     
    If we think the borderline as a plane of immanence, then the borderline “implies a sort of groping experimentation and its layout resorts to measures that are not very respectable, rational or reasonable. These measures belong to the order of dreams.… To think is always to follow the witch’s flight” (Deleuze and Guattari, What is Philosophy? 41). In “Dreams in the Witch-House” Brown Jenkin, the hybrid rat-human (nicely resonant with Deleuze and Guattari’s citation of the film Willard) and his witch-ally Keziah Mason seduce Walter Gilman toward “lines and curves that could be made to point out directions leading through the walls of space to other spaces beyond, and [she] had implied that such lines and curves were frequently used at certain midnight meetings” (306). The borderline is one dimension cut from a plane of consistency.
     

    Gate 4. A-Perception

     
    Lovecraft’s protagonists initially shift their modes of perception to dreams and memories that do not belong to their history or imagination. This already implies the suspension of any recognisable modes of apprehension, and compels us to read in a similar way. Dreams, memories and imagination are not opposed to reality but belong to different orders of perception that nonetheless effect alterations in subjectivity and show reality to be a quality. The question is not so much what we read in Lovecraft but how we read. Lovecraft’s is an impossible project of describing the indescribable, speaking about the unsayable and explicating events which are beyond our capacity to follow. His words are not complex, so that if both writer and reader lack words for the unsayable, and if they are open to art as outside and to the inhuman becomings that literature invokes, this lack is precisely the ethical point of creating new relations of production between art and reader that cannot be set down, structured, or understood as preceding the event of reading. The decision to open toward a revolution in perception is the point of becomings. Deleuze and Guattari describe a novel as populated by the multiple perceptions of the characters and the shadowy but ubiquitous perception of the writer. Lovecraft, however, knows neither his own perception nor those of his characters, because in his work perception itself is the character, content and narrative. Perception, in this world and in the palimpsest worlds within and outside of it, is an incandescent, fantastical reality. Examples of unbearable, wondrous perception of the present as ordinary/extraordinary are found in Lovecraft’s beloved Arthur Machen. In “A Fragment of Life,” within and beneath London there emerges an arcane, natural world, a “New Life” in which, along with “unheard-of joys, there are also new and unheard-of dangers” (Machen 98), and which thus exemplifies Deleuze and Guattari’s unheard of becomings.
     
    Lovecraft’s task becomes impossible in the final phases of the becomings he catalyses, when perception itself resists becomings. Between the a-human and thinking the pure plane of consistency in Lovecraftian becomings, a-perception navigates this impossible but nonetheless actual task, just as the becoming itself is increasingly difficult to negotiate. Recalling Deleuze and Guattari’s emphasis on abstraction as no less real, we can say that a-perception is the no less material experience of becoming beyond description or apprehension. A-perception is crucial for thinking outside established thought and acknowledging the reality and transgressive potential of what we cannot know but must nonetheless experience, just as the minoritarian is forced to experience oppression by virtue of remaining unknown and unknowable in a majoritarian economy. Indeed it is precisely because the potentiality of a-perceptive becomings cannot be deferred to knowledge or apprehended as concept-object, but instead is always within this real, material plane, that it is necessary for mobilizing subjectivity through art, which demands perceiving differently. It is no accident that these shifts of perception in Lovecraft’s work are the most difficult to read and the points at which the protagonists lose their minds or, properly speaking, their humanity and subjectivity. They, as we, must learn to perceive differently, and the “we” is the first casualty.
     
    Alliance through becomings and packing creates both communal or shared folds between – the threshold – and new folds within the singular self (an alternation of Deleuze’s habitus, which he borrows from Leibniz). This requires alteration in perceptions through alterations in being, the threshold of which perhaps we could describe, as Lovecraft does in “The Unnamable,” as a “hybrid nightmare” (232). “Every perception is hallucinatory because perception has no object… but from the haze of dust without objects the figures themselves raise up from the depths and fall back again” (Deleuze, The Fold 93-94). Peaslee loses his ability to distinguish between his dream existence and his terrestrial one and thus his ability to distinguish actuality from hallucination: “Indeed it seemed to the doctors that I lost interest in my proper personality as soon as I found the case of amnesia accepted as a natural thing” (Lovecraft, “The Unnamable” 468). He experiences perception as fragmentary and fractal, as a series of perspectival inflections of the fold (and therefore out of time, because linear time is created through micro and macro shifts rather than through a serialisation of acting objects). Joe Slater in Beyond the Wall of Sleep forsakes his becoming-Dagon for a pure imperceptible perception: “At this point the thought waves abruptly ceased and the pale eyes of the dreamer – or should I say dead man – commenced to gaze fishily” (Lovecraft, BWS 47).
     
    Along two trajectories, through their becomings and their entrance into the geoplanes of the Ancient Ones, Lovecraft’s protagonists transform gradually, not through their being or location but through their perception. Their becomings shift from alliances to being-apprehension-simultaneity with all particles, and so are beyond the need for space and time. “Memory and imagination shaped dim half pictures with uncertain outlines amidst the seething chaos, but Carter knew they were memory and imagination only” (Lovecraft, TGSK 517). To propose Lovecraft as a writer of the baroque is also to point to the chaos that is a key element of his renegotiation of non-Euclidean physics. Deleuze and Guattari likewise describe philosophy, science, and art as wanting to “tear open the firmament and plunge into chaos” (What is Philosophy? 202). Philosophy, according to them, gives us variations, science variables, and art varieties. As sorcerers of baroque demonology, Lovecraft and his protagonists begin with becoming and with seeing various forms of hybrid monsters. They then shift through variants of the metamorphic mobility of self and monster in action, and reach their pinnacle as actualised perceptions of virtual potentialities. Here, the protagonists shift their thinking from seeing and from being infected by the molecules of monster variants, toward infernal, seething forms, to aberrant angles of being and apprehending. This may also be the point at which Lovecraft himself shrugs off the fetters of gothic writing and creates the hybrid, folklore-physics systems through which becomings occur. “Non-Euclidean calculus and quantum physics are enough to stretch any brain; and when one mixes them with folklore… [Gilman] began to connect his mathematics with the fantastic legends of elder magic” (Lovecraft, DWH, 306).
     
    Lovecraft calls his blind, mad god Nyarlathotep the crawling chaos. Gilman fears alighting in the “spiral black vortices of that ultimate void of Chaos where reigns the mindless demon sultan Azathoth” (DWH, 343). Nyarlathotep and Azathoth, in addition to many of the other Ancient Ones (including the dead but dreaming Cthulhu), are blind, mindless and dead only when evaluated according to human modes of signifying perception and qualitative states. In Lovecraft’s rarely cited poetic work, Nyarlathotep’s “idiot chaos blows Earth’s dust away” (“Nyarlathotep” l. 14) even though “throngs pressed around, frantic for his commands” (“Nyarlathotep” 5). And then,
     

    Out in the mindless void the demon bore me
    Past the bright clusters of dimensioned space
    Til neither time nor matter stretched before me
    But only Chaos, without form or place.

    (“Azathoth” 1-4)

     

    The beautiful, brief poem Azathoth invokes dreaming, bat-things flopping, and monstrous chance-combinings. These abject blasphemers, beyond the cares of dominant systems and their heads, are sorcerers who betray their positions as heads of pack; “‘I am his messenger’, the demon said / and in contempt he struck his Master’s head” (“Azathoth” 13-14). Lovecraft’s moments of horror occur when discursive systems such as Azathoth’s powers (which have their own demonic, hybrid philosophy) or, (if read as desire), Deleuze and Guattari’s unnatural nuptials (TP 240) express a possible chance-combining of the three orders of chaos’ emergence that are described in What is Philosophy?

     

    Gate 5. From the Unspeakable to the Unsayable

     
    Lovecraft’s is a task of writing the un-writable. Like other “fantasy” writing, Lovecraft’s prose is often evaluated as simultaneously lacking in substance and hampered by melodramatic overuse of adjectives. He depicts the madness of TCOS‘s Mrs. Gardner by groping for affects, adjectives and pronouns without his language alighting on form, nouns, or entities apprehensible through human perception. Wilson, along with many other critics, claims many of his stories are “atrociously written” (4).
     
    Maligning Lovecraft for his florid and enflaming adjectives and for his non-existent narratives fails to address the indescribability of what he is compelled to describe – palimpsest worlds beyond apprehension, selves incapable of speech, becoming-polyvocal but not in any language distinguishable by humans, and existence outside time. In “The Unnamable,” in spite of Manton’s vague knowledge that
     

    the mind sometimes holds visions and sensations of far less geometrical, classifiable and workable nature, he believed himself justified in drawing an arbitrary line and ruling out of court all that cannot be experienced and understood by the average citizen. Besides, he was almost sure that nothing can be really “unnamable”. It didn’t sound sensible to him.
     

    (227)

     

    In his attempt to encounter these worlds, Lovecraft is compelled to use language that Deleuze and Guattari more sympathetically describe as “grandiose and simplified” (TP 251). In pursuit of thinking the unthinkable and perceiving the imperceptible, Lovecraft offers his literary art as writing the un-writable, which is to say as speaking the unsayable. Such language must be used in becoming-inhuman, because description or speech that interiorizes entities with genesis and destination, content and limits of possibility, is the language of knowledge and the limited syntax of experience. If we can speak we speak “as” subjects. Foucault claims that speech coming from the outside is a mode of desire because “one is attracted precisely to the extent that one is neglected” (31). As long as literature affirms and reifies the known, this mode of art denies us becomings. Speaking, hearing, and reading, as events of literary-affect, bring together a-perception, the fold, and becoming-inhuman. Encountering the outside involves the ecstasy of being neglected – of being present without being a recognisable presence – and this is precisely why Peaslee finds his body harassing when it coalesces his abstract consciousness with recognisable being.

     
    The ethical relation to becomings through literature are measurable to the extent that we gift ourselves to the outside. Perhaps our coming to Lovecraft can reflect our opening to the outside. Yes, Lovecraft’s are “horror” stories, but the question is “horror of what?” or more precisely: how does negotiating inhuman becomings cause horror affects and what jubilant becomings-states emerge simultaneously? While not wishing to vindicate Lovecraft’s prose style, I propose that his act of writing may indicate that he is a plane maker. Deleuze and Guattari define a plane thus:
     

    The plane can be a hidden principle, which makes visible what is seen and audible what is heard, etc., which at every instant causes the given to be given, in this or that state, at this or that moment. But the plane itself is not given. It is by nature hidden. It can only be inferred, induced, concluded from that to which it gives rise.… [The plane] always concerns the development of forms and the formation of subjects.
     

    (TP 265)

     

    The hidden principle, which for Lovecraft is his “cosmic” principle, is hidden not in the sense that it can be revealed. Its nature is hidden, and to speak of it produces a gate of the unsayable that is nonetheless written and spoken, and a gate of the incomprehensible encountered as a gate of the act of reading as an act of art. Lovecraft’s is a language from the outside, “a meticulous narration of experiences, encounters and improbable signs, speech about the invisible side of words.… fiction consists not in showing the invisible, but showing the extent to which the invisibility of the visible is invisible” (Foucault 25, 24). For Lovecraft the cosmos is a principle of organisation through which these intensities, forms, or what Deleuze and Guattari call haecceities emerge. The plane gives haecceities. Lovecraft’s stories become most abstract when he attempts to encounter the plane through the exquisitely minimal, imperceptible haecceities, but of course the plane cannot be encountered. Things emerge through the plane, but the plane does not exist unto itself. Deleuze and Guattari say of music that “there is a transcendent compositional principle that is not of the nature of sound, that is not ‘audible’ by itself or for itself. This opens the way for all possible interpretations” (TP 266). The horror of Lovecraft’s cosmos comes because “it” is not. Through access to the different organisational principles of the cosmos, his protagonists are faced with the truly voluminous and thus mind-shattering infinity of variations and immanent-interpretations (not reflections) of states of perception.

     
    The reduction from the perceptible though nonetheless horrific cosmos – a cosmos occupied by monsters – reaches its zenith when emergences are almost imperceptible and the self is part of those imperceptibilities. An example is silence as a vertiginous “sound”:
     

    For the first time Carter realised how terrific utter silence, mental and physical, may be. The earlier moments had never failed to contain some perceptible rhythm, if only the faint, cryptic pulse of the earth’s dimensional extension. But now the hush of the abyss seemed to fall upon everything.… But the moment of silence was broken – the surgings were speaking to him in a language that was not of physical sound or articulate words.
     

    (Lovecraft, TGSK 524)

     

    The cosmos is not the organising principle of sound. Instead, sound is one element of the real organising principle of Lovecraft’s cosmos, namely, a new principle of conditions of perception that constitute states of (if we can still call it thus) “existence.” The unsayable is expressed in the speech of Lovecraft’s monsters as the sounds of viscous bubblings, whirrings, chirpings, or the musicality of Eric Zann, whose “frantic playing had become a mechanical, unrecognisable orgy that no pen could ever suggest” (“The Music” 343). The visual, aural, sensorial and affective are non-differentiated and cannot be expressed. Lovecraft does not see this as a problem, however. His protagonists are horrified by what they cannot describe, not that they cannot describe it. Lovecraft compels an encounter with meaning that is not present but always to come, a waiting without arriving, so that the time of reading is one of delay without resolution. Just as he cannot speak what nonetheless demands to be expressed, so we cannot understand what is t being experienced hrough the event of reading, a voluminous void, an abstract materiality.

     
    Cthulhu does not hunt. Although s/he (Cthulhu’s gender is not specified) calls to the Antarctic explorers, a key element of the horrors of the Elder Gods and Ancient Ones is not that they pursue mankind but that they are disinterested in them. Blanchot claims that in pure literature the writer is haunted by an ineffable image or meaning, that literature has no relationship with anything as a preceding “before” and is thus incapable of being a work “about.” It is, rather, a Mare Tenebrarum (sea of darkness). The work is always the beyond of itself, labyrinthine, “this attraction that carries it out toward a point infinitely exterior [which] is the movement that carries it back toward the secret of itself” (Blanchot, Book 90). The secret of literature does not seek revelation. The question it asks cannot be answered: “It was from the poets and artists that the pertinent answers to the questions came, and I know that panic would have broken loose” (Lovecraft, TCC 68). It is a secret that constitutes the work. Along with his protagonists, we meander around Lovecraft, but his is a labyrinth with no centre. In his tales, investigation, corroboration and comparison are always frustrated. Each event of writing and speech is incomparable to anything and thus its own opening toward the beyond of itself. The stories are not narratives as they seek no end, the speech silent and unheard because it cannot reveal the solution to the secret of the unsayable. “We constantly pass from order-words to the ‘silent order of things’, as Foucault puts it, and vice-versa” (Deleuze and Guattari, TP 87). The stories must nonetheless be written and read. Deleuze and Guattari point out that content is neither described nor limited by expression, but is rather expanded by expression. Lovecraft’s language encounters the outside of material content as expression and encounters self as an expressive, thus unspeakable, unspeaking but always expressing entity.
     

    Gate 6. Beyond the Gates

     
    Folding of desire for monsters is an invaginating turn of the libidinal band “where a second glance showed concavity after the first showed convexity” (Lovecraft, TCC 94). Leviathan, the supreme demon of The Necronomicon, literally translates as dragon-serpent from the Hebrew and probably derives etymologically from “liwyah,” that which gathers itself into folds, twists, and turns, and recombines. When it is encountered, the squid-dragon Cthulhu is “a darkness with a positive quality… It moved anomalously in a diagonal way, so that all the rules of matter and perspective seemed upset” (Lovecraft, TCC 95). Pure colour from out of space or colour as phosphorescent intensity rather than hue; buzzing, whirring and recorded sounds which cannot be heard; and voluminous darkness are Lovecraft’s examples of matter that must be perceived alternately, in rudimentary resonance with Deleuze and Guattari’s becoming-colour, – music, and so forth. But while these offer lines of flight and alternate trajectories, what happens when the lines prevent perception through sensorial agitation? What happens when they instead cut along entirely different phyla, when physical and perceptive trajectories become gates? Peaslee’s “disturbances were not visual at all but concerned more abstract matters” (Lovecraft, TST 477). Can the protagonists be caught up without perception?
     
    Lovecraft describes worlds becoming-fold and folding this dimension to reassemble all perception. “Lovecraft’s hero encounters strange animals, but he finally reaches the ultimate regions of a Continuum inhabited by unnameable waves and unfindable particles” (Deleuze and Guattari, TP 248). After loving monsters, Lovecraft’s protagonists achieve a particle perception, a flattening out of all time and space where, instead of the perception of a fold being perspectival for each fold, perception becomes total and simultaneous. Cthulhu’s “nebulously recombining” eventually achieves “eldritch contradictions of all matter, force and cosmic order” (Lovecraft, TCC 99, 97). “Men think of time only because of what they call change, yet that too is an illusion. All that was and is and is to be exists simultaneously” (Lovecraft, TGSK 521). The base distortion of the horizon into no horizon apprehended through any familiar perception reconfigures all angles of perception. Those who cannot cope become the atrophied Body without Organs, while those who allow themselves to dissipate into their dream worlds scatter into particles – a schizo-madness. Bodies are more than fluid, becomings more than alliances. The self goes beyond being a point at its limit, as Leibniz claims, to becoming proliferated points that are not mingled with other powers but are simultaneous. Consciousness (external apprehension) and perception (internal apprehension) are, furthermore, not simultaneous but non-differentiated, as they are from the consciousness of other particle-entities or forces. The Elder Gods are able to apprehend the infinite past and future in a vague immanence, but this seems more like an eternal presence than like contraction – “all that was and is and is to be exists simultaneously” (Lovecraft, TGSK 531). At the same time, memories that constitute the past self are ablated and fears of possible futures disappear. Peaslee’s dreams unfold in non-sequential sequence. Perception is defined as texture, and entities as partly matter, partly something indescribable as matter. Being “wholly and horribly oriented” causes Peaslee great trauma until he finds himself “in [his] conical non-human body again” (Lovecraft, TST 542).
     
    As a demonic entity, “the Devil is a transporter” (Deleuze and Guattari, TP 253), and the gates through which The Elder Gods and Ancient Ones pass are powerful thresholds catalysing journeys, neither seeking nor sealing off, but present in immanent space and time. The power to act, to enter into relation, the effectuation of folding through relations of celerity, force and affectuation, is extended to a point of pure immanence, a trembling but not an atrophy. Demonic invocation, which traverses the fish-frog-winged-cephalopod, enters through the necronomic gates, doors which Deleuze and Guattari claim are a journey. Such journeying determines measure, like the political tactics of Spinozan mediative ethics, without need for referents but using symbols as variable signs constituted not by signifieds but by infinity. Like Gilman’s project of combining physics and mathematics with folklore and magick, these symbols are a mathematical language. Guattari’s languages of asemiosis in Soft Subversions – “like music, painting, mathematics” (149) – are separate from signifying systems born of capital, family, and church because “the [asemiotic] signifying script has not yet taken possession of the image” (151). Guattari poses a challenge here because asemiotic language is a language of liberation, not of Houellebecq’s nihilism, and it contradicts Houellebecq’s claim that Lovecraft was obsessed with the evils of the world which inspired his creation of evil interior worlds. That certain paradigms of modernity, especially, as Houellebecq points out, sex and capitalism, particularly horrified Lovecraft does however create connections and resonances with those systems Guattari maligns.
     
    In his tales and The Necronomicon Lovecraft’s system is its own hybrid of art, philosophy, and science, so that the symbols are varieties without examples, variables of a process and variants of chaos. The symbols of The Necronomicon are steps more than symbols, variations that range toward becoming-imperceptible through losing the need for symbols to be of anything. They are not exemplary; instead of referring to memories or to futures they refer to a loosening of form, place, state, and belonging. These symbols unlock a gate, “not indeed the Ultimate Gate, but one leading from Earth and time to that extension of Earth which is outside time, and from which in turn the Ultimate Gate leads fearsomely and perilously to the Last Void which is outside all earths and all time” (Lovecraft, TGSK 516-17). The Necronomic symbols extend beyond an incremental journey, creating a palimpsest (or a palimpsest, neither increasing nor decreasing but converging) which extends out toward the fifth, sixth and n dimensions. We can understand these dimensions, with the aid of a hint of which Carter receives, as a plane of consistency (Deleuze and Guattari, TP 251). In “Call of Cthulhu” “Johansen swears he was swallowed up by an angle… an angle which was acute but behaved as if it were obtuse” (Lovecraft 96). His (admittedly non-consensual) pact with the demon Cthulhu is a pact with the fourth order of sorcery, that of creating new formations of imperceptible plane-packs, but at the limit in Lovecraft, these formations are simultaneously everything and nothing – “abysses… by no means vacant but crowded” (Lovecraft, DWH 311).
     
    Cthulhu calls, but the Mad Arab gives us The Necronomicon to call to the Ancient Ones, evincing an irresistible fold of desire already mobilised, but seen through a confusion of forms and qualities – variants which create a desire “of the sensory, a being of sensation, on an anorganic plane of composition that is able to restore the infinite” (Deleuze and Guattari, What is Philosophy? 202-203). Michel Serres claims sense is the only constant when chaos is redeemed from being repetitive disorder to being a limit (146). Carter passes
     

    amidst [both through and around] backgrounds of other planets and systems and galaxies and cosmic continua; spores of eternal life drifting from world to world, universe to universe, yet all equally himself… His self had been annihilated and yet he – if indeed there could, in view of that utter nullity of individual existence, be such a thing as he – was equally aware of being in some inconceivable way a legion of selves.
     

    (Lovecraft, TTGSK, 526-527)

     

    The localism of the Carter-facet or Carter-fragment is a variety of desire that exploits the inevitable infinity of desire, but most enigmatically in Lovecraft, that exploits desire for the aberrant in the move toward becoming-infinite. This becoming is not immortality though. Just as Deleuze and Guattari affirm becoming has neither origin nor destination, nor even “an absence of an origin” (TP 293), so Carter’s becoming implies neither immortality nor lack of immortality. In this way Lovecraft’s protagonists move from becomings, to molecular perception, toward a state of pure existence-perception outside of both linearity (time) and aspectival apprehension (space), a multiple and infinite unification, becoming-gods as the Elder Gods, the pure “one.” Lovecraft desperately attempts to describe Carter’s infinity as terrestrial/non-terrestrial, living/dead, many headed, many tentacled, but he cannot describe it because it is neither perceivable nor conceivable. The best we can have is an encounter with the perception of the imperceptible: the non-binary that Deleuze and Guattari call the Dogon, and that Lovecraft might have called the post-Dagon egg.

     
    Deleuze and Guattari tell us that “minor authors are foreigners in their own tongue. If they are bastards, if they experience themselves as bastards, it is due not to a mixing or intermingling of languages but rather to a subtraction and variation of their own language achieved by stretching tensors through it” (TP 105). The difficulty in placing Lovecraft within one (or any) “appropriate” genre reflects his characters’ trauma at finding they are both bastards without human genealogy and progeny of collective, unseen, and a-genus monster gods. It can be argued that Lovecraft’s literary forefathers, just as his protagonists’ outer-dimensional ones, are at once alien to him and unconsciously influential (especially in the case of, for example, Machen). Deleuze and Guattari point out that minor literature can only be found in what cannot be perceived but which can be accessed and encountered within this language. Rosemary Jackson argues that Lovecraft’s project “makes explicit the problem of naming all that is ‘other’” (39), citing Lovecraft’s claim that “I am not even certain how I am communicating this message. While I know I am speaking, I have a vague impression that some strange and perhaps terrible mediation will be needed to bear what I say to the points where I wish to be heard” (qtd. in Jackson 39-40). Interestingly, Jackson places the literature of Blanchot and Lovecraft within the same argument, suggesting that Lovecraft could be considered a poststructural as well as a fantasy author. In minor literature the “problem” of naming the other catalyzes a disturbance in language which stretches, contracts and turns the tensors toward a minor literature, precisely because the other, so ubiquitous in continental philosophy, is the minoritarian. Minor literature can access the variables and distributions that are and are caused by the minoritarian “as a potential, creative and created, becoming” (Deleuze and Guattari, TP 106). Lovecraft pleads for the reception of his language as a mediation rather than as a description. Deleuze emphasises that mediation is the point where truth is insignificant in the face of relevance and necessity (Negotiations 130). He also writes that minority discourse is created by mediators (Negotiations 126), among which he includes both the writer and the reader, or precisely, the encounter and the pursuit.
     
    It may seem ambitious to suggest that Lovecraft could be useful for negotiating problems faced by feminism, postcolonialism, and minoritarian trajectories of desire. Just as Pelagia Goulimari attempts to rescue Deleuze and Guattari’s minoritarian politics from scathing criticism by certain corporealist feminists, so I suggest that the event of encounter with Lovecraft’s work is neither real nor fantastic, but is its own concrete, abstracting territoriality. Goulimari says that Deleuze and Guattari’s minoritarian politics might appear to be “totalising abstractions” that “ignore the concrete particularity of very different territorialities” (115). However, Goulimari argues that “Particularity manifests itself in action, in the various majoritarian and minoritarian processes at work within and between territories. Particularity itself becomes process and invention: invention of artificial territorialities and minoritarian becomings” (115). Lacking genesis and destination, family and familiarity, Lovecraft’s monsters are singular particularities, and each demands a mobile encounter that is unlike any other. Our encounters with Lovecraft’s works and worlds are frightening not because of their population but because of the ways we are forced to populate the vertiginous vectors upon which they launch the creative act of thinking through reading. Horror becomes ambiguous at best and trite at the worst; the political question is “of what are we afraid?” Becoming-minoritarian is frightening. The final element of becoming is the encounter with the imperceptible but nonetheless so terribly present, from which point we access the beyond-becoming, the absolute potential without any minoritarian destination, even though in becoming we know we will never arrive. Our encounter with Lovecraft’s cosmic horror requires the ethical turn that becoming requires, to be part of a community that is neither real nor perceptible but that irrefutably and (irresistibly – in reference to the crucial role desire plays in becoming) becomes our pack. Deleuze affirms that “whether they’re real or imaginary, animate or inanimate, you have to form your mediators… I need my mediators to express myself and they’d never express without me: you’re always working in a group, even when you seem to be on your own” (Negotiations 125). When our pack is defined by movement, quality, and the capacity to perceive their alterity, we are becoming-minoritarian. Lovecraft stretches this limit and finds therein both wonder and horror. In our encounter with this particular mediator, we express ourselves as limit-minoritarians; and through the terrifying creativity that Lovecraft’s work demands of its readers, we find an imminent opening out.
     

    Patricia MacCormack is Reader in English, Communication, Film and Media at Anglia Ruskin University, Cambridge. She is the author of articles and chapters on Continental Philosophy, especially Guattari, Serres, Irigaray, and Blanchot, posthuman theory, queer and perversion theory, animal rights, body modification and extreme horror film. Her work includes “Unnatural Alliances” (Deleuze and Queer Theory), “The Great Ephemeral Tattooed Skin” (Body and Society), “Necrosexuality” (Queering the Non-Human), “Inhuman Ecstasy” (Angelaki), “Becoming-Vulva” (New Formations), “Cinemasochism” (Afterimage) and “Vitalistic Feminethics” (Deleuze and Law). She is the author of Cinesexuality (Ashgate 2008) and co-editor of The Schizoanalysis of Cinema (Continuum 2008). She is currently writing on posthuman ethics.

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Alhazred, Abdul [H.P. Lovecraft]. The Necronomicon. London: Avon, 1995. Print.
    • Blanchot, Maurice. The Book to Come. Trans. Charlotte Mandell. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2003. Print.
    • ———. The Infinite Conversation. Trans. Susan Hanson. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993. Print.
    • Braidotti, Rosi. Nomadic Subjects. New York: Columbia UP, 1994. Print.
    • Burleson, Donald R. Lovecraft: Disturbing the Universe. Lexington: UP of Kentucky, 1990. Print.
    • Carter, Angela. “Lovecraft and Landscape.” The Necronomicon: The Book of Dead Names. Ed. George Hay. Jersey: Corgi, 1980. 171-182. Print.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Desert Islands and Other Texts. Trans. Mike Taormina. Los Angeles: Semiotext(e), 2004. Print.
    • ———. The Fold: Leibniz and the Baroque. Trans. Tom Conley. London: Athlone, 2001. Print.
    • ———. Negotiations. Trans. Martin Joughin. New York: Columbia UP, 1995. Print.
    • ———, and Félix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus. Trans. Brian Massumi. London: Athlone, 1987. Print.
    • ———. What is Philosophy? Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Graham Burchell. New York: Columbia UP, 1994. Print.
    • Foucault, Michel. “Maurice Blanchot: Thought from the Outside.” Trans. Brian Massumi. Foucault/Blanchot. New York: Zone Books, 1997. 7-60. Print.
    • Goodrich, Peter. “Mannerism and the Macabre in H.P. Lovecraft’s Dunsanian ‘Dream-Quest’.” Journal of the Fantastic in the Arts 15.1 (2004): 37-48. Print.
    • Goulimari, Pelagia. “A Minoritarian Feminism: Things to do with Deleuze and Guattari.” Hypatia 14.2 (1999): 97-120. Web. 14 Jan 2011.
    • Guattari, Félix. Soft Subversions. Trans. David L. Sweet and Chet Weiner. New York: Semiotext(e), 1996. Print.
    • ———. The Three Ecologies. Trans. Ian Pindar and Paul Sutton. London: Athlone, 2004. Print.
    • Hanegraaff, Wouter J. “Fiction in the Desert of the Real: Lovecraft’s Cthulhu Mythos.” Aries 7.1 (2007): 85-109. Print.
    • The Holy Bible: King James Version. Bartleby, 2000. 20 Jan. 2011. Web.
    • Houellebecq, Michel. H.P. Lovecraft: Against the World: Against Life. Trans. Dorna Khazeni. London: Weidenfeld and Nicholson, 2006. Print.
    • Irigaray, Luce. An Ethics of Sexual Difference. Trans. Carolyn Burke and Gillian C. Gill. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1993. Print.
    • Jackson, Rosemary. Fantasy: The Literature of Subversion. New York: Methuen, 1981. Print.
    • Joshi, S.T. “Introduction.” An Epicure in the Terrible: A Centennial Anthology of Essays in Honor of H.P Lovecraft. Eds. David E. Schulz and S.T. Joshi. Cranbury, NJ: Associated U Presses, 1991. 15-44. Print.
    • Kristeva, Julia. Desire in Language. Trans. Thomas Gora, Alice Jardine and Leon S. Roudiez. Oxford: Blackwell, 1980. Print.
    • Leibniz, Gottfried Wilhelm. Philosophical Writings. Trans. Mary Morris and G.H.R. Parkinson. Vermont: Everyman, 1995. Print.
    • Lévy, Maurice. Lovecraft: A Study in the Fantastic. Detroit: Wayne State UP, 1988. Print.
    • Lovecraft, H.P. “Azathoth.” The Ancient Track: The Complete Poetical Works of H.P. Lovecraft. San Francisco: Nightshade Books, 2001. 73. Print.
    • ———. “Beyond the Wall of Sleep.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 2. London: Grafton, 1989. 36-48. Print.
    • ———. “The Call of Cthulhu.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 3. London: Grafton, 1989. 61-98. Print.
    • ———. “The Case of Charles Dexter Ward.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 1. London: Voyager, 1999. 141-302. Print.
    • ———. “The Colour Out of Space.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 3. London; Grafton, 1989. 236-271. Print.
    • ———. “Dagon.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 2. London: Grafton, 1985. 11-17. Print.
    • ———. “The Dreams in the Witch-House.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 1. London: Voyager, 1999. 303-350. Print.
    • ———. “The Dream-Quest of Unknown Kadath.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 1. London: Voyager, 1999. 361-486. Print.
    • ———. “The Dunwich Horror.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 3. London: Grafton, 1989. 99-153. Print.
    • ———. “The Music of Eric Zann.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 3. London: Grafton, 1989. 335-345. Print.
    • ———. “The Nameless City.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 2. London: Grafton, 1985. 129-143. Print.
    • ———. “Nyarlathotep.” The Ancient Track: The Complete Poetical Works of H.P. Lovecraft. San Francisco: Nightshade Books, 2001. 72-73. Print.
    • ———. “The Shadow out of Time.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 3. London: Grafton, 1989. 464-544. Print.
    • ———. “The Shadow over Innsmouth.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 3. London: Grafton, 1989. 382-463. Print.
    • ———. Supernatural Horror in Literature. New York: Dover, 1973. Print.
    • ———. “Through the Gates of the Silver Key.” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 1. London: Voyager, 1999. Print.
    • ———. “The Unnamable” H.P. Lovecraft Omnibus 2. London: Grafton, 1985. 225-235. Print.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Inhuman. Trans. Geoffrey Bennington and Rachel Bowlby. Cambridge: Polity, 1991. Print.
    • MacCormack, Patricia. “Baroque Intensity: Lovecraft, LeFanu and The Fold.” Irish Journal of Gothic and Horror Studies 2 (March 2007). Web. 14 Jan 2011.
    • ———. “Unnatural Alliances.” Deleuze and Queer Theory. Eds. Chrysanthi Nigiani and Merl Storr. Edinburgh: Edinburgh UP, 2009. 134-149. Print.
    • Machen, Arthur. “A Fragment of Life.” The Novel of the White Powder and Other Stories of Horror and the Supernatural. London: Corgi, 1965. 27-104. Print.
    • Pasi, Marco. “Arthur Machen’s Panic Fears: Western Esotericism and the Irruption of Negative Epistemology.” Aries 7.1 (2007): 63-83. Web. 14 Jan 2011.
    • Ralickas, Vivian. “‘Cosmic Horror’ and the Question of the Sublime in Lovecraft.” Journal of the Fantastic in the Arts 18.3 (2007): 364-398. Print.
    • Rancière, Jacques. The Future of the Image. Trans. Gregory Elliot. London: Verso, 2007. Print.
    • Serres, Michel. The Birth of Physics. Trans. Jack Hawkes. Manchester: Clinamen, 2000. Print.
    • Siegel, Carol. Goth’s Dark Empire. Indianapolis: Indiana UP, 2005. Print.
    • Wilson, Colin. The Strength to Dream: Literature and Imagination. London: Abacus, 1961. Print.

     

  • Basic Instinct: A Response to Ramadanovic

    Judith Roof (bio)
    Rice University
    roof@rice.edu

     
    In his timely critique of revisionist kinship studies, Petar Ramadanovic identifies “taboo” as the sticking point where the potentially liberatory value of such discourses disappears. Ramadanovic sets out to rethink taboo, hypothesizing that the “function of the taboo” is to operate as “a fundamental rule that makes sexuality” and “can, of course, be filled with whatever incidental content is politically possible at a given time and place.” “Taboo,” he continues, “is the condition of culture.” As a “function,” taboo separates the “orders of nature and culture and make[s] each possible.” As that “which makes laws possible,” taboo’s “function is unconscious.” Arguing that contemporary theorists discount the role of the unconscious and rely upon cultural, content-oriented models in their rereadings of kinship, Ramadanovic forwards an understanding of taboo as a part of a “reciprocal” relation with culture wherein the concept of “nature” “is created by culture’s separation from it.” Nature, according to Ramadanovic, underwrites our instinctive organization of sexual relations with the others around us. As he expresses it: “we can correct the basic assumption of cultural construction theories to say that culture is not a cultural but, rather, a natural construction humans make instinctively. Our most natural behavior is to organize sexual relations with others around us and to do so by imposing certain rules.” At the foundation of culture, then, according to Ramadanovic, is not nature, but instinct—the instinct to construct the sexual rules that subtend the culture/nature split.
     
    In locating the impetus to construct sexual prohibitions as instinctive, Ramadanovic seems to be relinquishing any further notion of causation to the large, unwieldy, and ever-changing category of “instinct.” In so far as a notion of origin or first cause may not tell us anything anyway, Ramadanovic may be wise to jettison origins as a way out of the problem of how to alter cultural prohibitions in order to permit more diverse human sexual relations. But instead of rejecting causation completely, Ramadanovic produces an originary moebius consisting of the dynamic interplay of culture and nature, ending up at what humans “make instinctively.” Instinct, as usual, operates as a species of deity, absorbing uncertainty and providing a delusively specific “cause” when causal chains disappear. Instinct conveniently offers an expandable category associated with the “animal” as well as some “real” biological impetus into which human will, motivation, or any complex causality might disappear whenever our own inventiveness is exhausted—or whenever there is a programmatic need to locate behaviors, beliefs, formations, or organizations as somehow “natural,” and therefore proper, ineffable, and “real.”
     
    Even if humans have instincts, positioning instinct as the culture-inciting impetus of human social organization itself participates in the same culture/nature structure Ramadanovic so rightly critiques. If we read “nature” through terms that are always already cultural, and if taboo produces a nature/culture divide, then “instinct” itself is produced on the side of nature as a part of that process. Instinct is as much a contrivance of the nature/culture split as anything else. How, then, can instinct become a species of first cause, an unconscious untouched by the processes of taboo (or the source of taboo), so that it can urge towards the construction of order itself? Is Ramadanovic saying that humans have an instinct for culture? If this is the case, what happens to taboo? Is taboo an effect of this instinct? Humans may well be animals, but humans invented the category of instinct to account for behaviors and processes humans did not understand. Instinct is, if anything, a cultural idea.
     
    Ramadanovic’s essay raises an interesting possibility in its implicit comparison between unconscious culture-defining processes such as taboo, and the processes at work in the structuring of the subject. Culture is to nature as the conscious is to the unconscious in the subject; both are formed around a prohibition. If, as Ramadanovic suggests, theories of kinship and culture are also theories of the subject, then by this algebra the subjective unconscious becomes the impetus for the emergence of the function of taboo and perhaps the site from which we might understand instinct as operating. To push this point, Ramadanovic deploys Diana Fuss’s reading of Lacan’s theory of the subject as a “subject-position.” Having reduced Lacan’s complex theories of the subject to the notion of a “position,” Ramadanovic transforms positionality into a set of fields: sexuality, the unconscious (which he glosses as the field of relations to other subjects), and the ego (which he defines as Cartesian). The subject, then, is formed as such by the interplay of instinctive sexual material, the unconscious as constituted by subjective relations, and a cogito ego. This version of the subject nicely parallels the fields that play in Ramadanovic’s version of kinship, comprised by sexual instincts, culture as social organization, and the intellectual will by which the first two fields are occluded.
     
    Although it’s a neat idea to try to locate within the subject the processes that Ramadanovic identifies as operating in the dynamic transformations of nature and culture, it relies again upon an assumption that there is an instinctive urge to regulate sexual activity as an intrinsic part of every human subject. This may well be why he chooses to deploy a twenty-year-old, very partial gloss of Lacan’s theory of the subject instead of going straight to Lacan’s theories of the subject, particularly as the subject appears in Lacan’s famous “Schema L”—”The Schema of the intersubjective dialectic” from his “Seminar on the Purloined Letter,” reproduced again in “On the Possible Treatment of Psychosis” in Écrits. Schema L offers a dynamic model of the subject as the inmixing of culture (or Other) and subject, conscious and unconscious “relations and associations,” wherein the “unconscious is the Discourse of the Other” (193). One set of relations consists of the speaking subject (Ramadanovic’s “cogito”), whose structure is produced by its being “stretched over the four corners of the schema: namely, S, his ineffable, stupid existence, o, his objects, o’, his ego, that is, that which is reflected of his form in his objects, and O, the locus from which the question of his existence may be presented to him” (194). What operates in this Schema is the signifier and not necessarily only the question of position: “The L of the questioning of the subject in his existence has a combinatory structure that must not be confused with its spatial aspect. As such, it is the signifier itself that must be articulated in the Other, especially in its position as fourth term of the topology” (195).
     
    Lacan’s Schema L offers three terms that suggest the same categories Ramadanovic envisions as constituting the dynamic autopoeisis of culture/nature: “As support for this structure,” Lacan explains, “we find in it the three signifiers in which the Other may be identified in the Oedipus complex. They are sufficient to symbolize the significations of sexed reproduction, under the signifiers of relation, ‘love’ and ‘procreation’” (196). Although Ramadanovic might interpret the “Oedipus complex” as taboo itself, the terms constitute an inmixing of culture and nature around a prohibition. Instead of invoking instinct, however, Lacan notes that this kind of basic reality is unavailable to the subject: “The fourth term [“the questioning of the subject in his existence”] is given by the subject in his reality, foreclosed as such in the system, and entering into the play of the signifiers only in the mode of death, but becoming the true subject to the extent that this play of signifiers will make it signify” (196). Whatever the material “reality” of the subject in his questioning of his existence, that reality is only available as death. It does not operate as any sort of instinctive wellspring for the impetus to culture in the subject itself.
     
    I quote at length not because doing so can clarify Lacan’s thinking as reflected in Schema L, but because the Schema and its explanation re-present Ramadanovic’s formulation with two crucial differences. The first is that the subject is structured in relation to the signifier, i.e., to language, to that which is always already cultural, even if that signifier is itself bound up in questions of sexed reproduction. The second is that the system forecloses the “reality” of the subject, a reality one might easily equate with Ramadanovic’s formulation of an underlying instinct to produce regulatory structures for sexuality. This “reality” enters only as “the mode of death.” To say that “reality” is “foreclosed” means that whatever else there is of a subject’s “reality,” it is not there or available to the subject at all, even in the unconscious; it is non-operative. So although Lacan’s Schema L is topological and does seem to involve something that might be construed as “fields,” Ramadanovic’s model of kinship/culture/nature ghosts only three of the four terms: the speaking “cogito” subject (Je), Culture (O), and the unconscious Ego produced as the reflection of the Je’s objects. Although the subject asks about its existence, that question is already posed in relation to cultural effects of the signifier.
     
    In the end, Ramadanovic’s essay attempts to relocate the site from whence any culture/nature distinction derives, not only as a critique of those analyses of kinship taboos that want to alter content as a way to alter culture, but also as a reminder that there may be more mechanisms for investigation. Deriving culture from nature on the basis of taboo is analogous to (but not the same as) Lacan’s understanding of how a “cut” induces the unconscious in a subject (e.g. Four Fundamental Concepts 43). The analogy between the culture/nature dynamic and the dynamics of the subject enables Ramadanovic to relocate the source of taboo to an unconscious analogous to the structure of the subject and perhaps emanating from it. The subject, then, is reduced at least in part to a set of biological imperatives, one of which Ramadanovic hypothesizes is an instinctive urge towards sexual organization. If, as Ramadanovic insists, this organization has no specific content, the forms it takes must then depend upon what comes to the “unconscious” from the Other, or from culture itself. Taboo redefined, the problem of content remains the same. And the problem with relocating this into the subject’s unconscious “instinct” is that the subject itself, at least according to the Lacanian model Ramadanovic evokes, has no instinctive mechanism available to engender the organization he envisions. Instinct is merely a way of saying we don’t know.
     
    Judith Roof is the author of The Poetics of DNA (Minnesota 2007) and books on narrative and cultural theory, sexuality, and cinema. She is William Shakespeare Chair in English at Rice University.
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Lacan, Jacques. “On the Possible Treatment of Psychosis.” Écrits: A Selection. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Norton, 1977: 179-225. Print.
    • ———. The Four Fundamental Concepts of Psychoanalysis: The Seminar of Jacques Lacan Book XI. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Norton, 1998. Print.

     

  • The Non-Meaning of Incest or, How Natural Culture Is

    Petar Ramadanovic (bio)
    University of New Hampshire
    petarr@unh.edu

    Abstract
     
    Using the theory of kinship as an example, this essay argues that the dominant understanding of cultural construction is inadequate. The author argues that recent cultural theory lacks an account of the unconscious, that recent psychoanalytic thought lacks a theory of kinship, and that both are in fact necessary for a post-structuralist understanding of the proposition that all social norms are culturally constructed.

     

     
    Historically, the key terms of poststructuralist theory are the incest taboo and kinship defined on the basis of that taboo.1 They appeared in a groundbreaking formulation in The Elementary Structures of Kinship (1935), in which Claude Lévi-Strauss, building on Freud’s notion of the Oedipus complex, revolutionized the understanding of culture. As he argues, culture is not a collection of habits, rules, and rites, and a manifestation of a national being;2 rather, it is more like a beehive, a natural structure with a specific internal constitution that is organized around the incest taboo, itself defined as, on the one hand, a social norm created by man and, on the other hand, a universal trait that distinguishes our animal from our human nature. In his 1966 essay, “Structure, Sign, and Play,” Jacques Derrida objects to the restrictions of Lévi-Strauss’s theory, which stops short of decentering the Western understanding of culture insofar as structuralism replaces one organizing principle (collection, national essence) with another (taboo, kinship). For Derrida, at stake is the coherence of any cultural theory and its ability to fully explain the phenomenon it seeks to understand. Invigorated by Derrida’s intervention, scholars across the humanities have given his reproach particular applications. For instance, in an influential book titled A Critique of the Study of Kinship (1984), David Schneider argues that kinship has a limited applicability and cannot be used to understand non-Western cultural models. Schneider makes a case for an anthropology that would move from the search for a general theory of culture to documenting different ways of understanding how cultures work.
     
    Following this direction, poststructuralist theory of culture created more inclusive, more just ways of viewing social relations, as well as a more nuanced understanding that culture is a result of complex networks of relations, not biology, than the one offered in The Elementary Structures of Kinship. But in suggesting that there are no restrictions on social bonds other than those imposed by man, the poststructuralist theory of kinship has also come very close to doing away with itself as a theory, because it reduced culture to ideology. This lack of understanding of what determines the nature of culture—why it is heteronormative, for instance, or what that heteronormativity means exactly—can be attributed almost entirely to the rejection of Freud, which unfortunately accompanied the poststructuralist deconstruction of Lévi-Strauss’s now classical theory of kinship. Due to the purge of psychoanalysis, the unconscious has played, since Lévi-Strauss, at most a marginal role in new ways of understanding kinship, though poststructuralism—feminist poststructuralism, deconstruction, queer theory, etc.—has dealt almost exclusively with basic social relations, which is to say, with various forms of kinship.
     
    On the other hand, during the same period, poststructuralist psychoanalysis in the U.S. has also sought to redefine the doctrine in order to meet new ethical and political demands. As a result, we got works on psychoanalysis and feminism, psychoanalysis and homosexuality, many on psychoanalysis and the social, but we learned nearly nothing about kinship as such.3 So it seems our work is cut out for us: to bring together the main achievements of poststructuralism, namely, its resistance to heteronormativity, with the very basic structuralist claim defining the conditions that make any kind of normativity possible. At stake in such an inquiry is not a new notion of culture, but poststructuralism as such, because it cannot pretend to a theory of culture without accounting for that which makes cultures — and that is, from Freud’s and Lévi-Strauss’s perspectives, the unconscious.
     
    In this essay, I return to what may be, in the context of the theory of kinship, a minor point in Lévi-Strauss’s The Elementary Structures of Kinship—the way he sorts out the relation between nature and culture—in order to borrow his rather simple and elegant way of relating culture and the unconscious.4 I come to Lévi-Strauss after reading an article that represents the culmination of the dominant trend in the poststructuralist critique of kinship, Rey Chow’s “A Pain in the Neck, a Scene of ‘Incest,’ and Other Enigmas of an Allegorical Cinema.” The analysis of Chow’s article should show why poststructuralism needs to be revised so as to include the unconscious in its understanding of culture.
     

     

    The End of Kinship

     
    Schneider’s A Critique of the Study of Kinship was a groundbreaking attack on kinship theory, in which he suggests that, if presented without bias, the ethnographic evidence concerning family relations in some non-Western cultures does not fit kinship theory and cannot be explained by it.5 He goes so far as to suggest that there is no such thing as “kinship”—not in the sense of the universal model of the nuclear heterosexual family in which marriage is a social expression of a biological law. In a recent article, whose thesis grows out of Schneider’s critique and addresses gay marriage, Judith Butler (“Is Kinship Always Already Heterosexual?”) is more moderate. She does not dismiss the term “kinship” tout court as a product of theorists’ ethnocentric bias, but instead calls for its revision, based on the understanding, not unlike Schneider’s own, that kinship structures are not necessarily limited to one (Western) model, and that they have historically taken different forms that should be recognized as viable and legitimate social ties. Accordingly, in an open reference to Freud, and alluding to Lévi-Strauss, Butler offers a middle ground between a rejection of kinship theory and the too-rigid insistence—characteristic of ethnography and anthropology before the poststructuralist turn that began in the late 1960s—that the incest taboo is a condition of culture:
     

    If Oedipus is not the sine qua non of culture, that does not mean there is no place for Oedipus. It simply means that the complex that goes by that name may take a variety of cultural forms and that it will no longer be able to function as a normative condition of culture itself.… if Oedipus is interpreted broadly, as a name for the triangularity of desire, then the salient question becomes: what forms does that triangularity take? Must it presume heterosexuality? And what happens when we begin to understand Oedipus outside of the exchange of women and the presumption of heterosexual exchange?
     

    (38)

     

    With these questions Butler all but concludes that homosexual incest—and therefore the homosexual family——has finally become “thinkable” (Chow 125), which is the main claim of Rey Chow’s article, “A Pain in the Neck, a Scene of ‘Incest,’ and Other Enigmas of an Allegorical Cinema.” If the Oedipal triangle is to be broadened, Chow suggests here, Laius and Oedipus might not be antagonists. They may not have to meet in strife, fighting over Jocasta, but in bed, having sex with each other. Chow explains why it took so long for poststructuralism to take up homosexual incest:

     

    In order to charge that what has taken place [between a father and son who have had sex] is incest, one must imply that one acknowledges the reality of same-sex sex (in this case, sex between two males); yet once that acknowledgment is made, the normativity accorded to patriarchal heterosexuality would by necessity have to become relativized, as would the purportedly nontransgressible boundary between man and woman, parent and child, mother and son, father and son that derives its status from such heterosexuality. The charge that this is a scene of incest would thus already contain within it the crucial recognition that both the categories of the kinship family (upon which the norm of heterosexual marriage rests with its set relations of filiation) and the categories of heterosexuality (upon which the norm of the kinship family rests with its set mechanisms of biological reproduction) are unstable cultural inventions.
     

    (124)

     

    In this passage Chow builds on the fundamental assumption that in patriarchy, as Gayle Rubin says in her famous 1975 critique of Lévi-Strauss titled “The Traffic in Women,” “[a] prohibition against some heterosexual unions assumes a taboo against non-heterosexual unions” (180). The logic here is that the prohibition of incest is the de facto prohibition of homosexual relationships because the taboo organizes sexuality around reproductive relations that require opposite sexes. In defining sex as a relation between a man and a woman, the taboo implicitly denies the possibility of same-sex sex and suggests that, strictly speaking, there can be no sex between members of the same sex, at least not in the same sense that sex between a man and a woman counts a sex. This is because, as Rubin points out, even when sex is just sex, “what counts as sex … is culturally determined and obtained” (32), and our culture privileges “reproductive” relations over those which are merely erotic.

     
    The answer to the question of whether there is homosexual incest, in the traditional nomenclature, is hence a negative one. There is no homosexual incest, because the cultural and theoretical systems defined by the incest taboo do not even know the category of homosexual sex. And the reason that they do not recognize homosexual sex is, to repeat, that the latter is not reproductive. A relation based on homosexual sex cannot, according to this logic, serve as the foundation of a family and, beyond it, of a society. Such sex might be considered an abomination or, as in Plato’s Symposium, a kind of enjoyment and an expression of friendship, but it is not a relation that can generate offspring and serve as the foundation upon which a society can be built. Therefore, because it does not perform this basic social function, homosexual sex is not sex.
     
    The incest taboo, on this account, is the keystone——the non-transgressible boundary, in the terms Chow uses——that holds together the culture of the patriarchal heterosexual family and the entire Western universe built around it. Its primary purpose is to organize sex on reproductive relations, and to present a social role (being a parent) as if it were equal to the “natural” ability to procreate. Question the heterosexual normativity and the entire patriarchal naturalist system with all its divisions and hierarchies, is, in Chow’s reasoning, undermined. The possibility of homosexual incest, then, according to Chow, entails the recognition that homosexual sex exists as a form of social relation that may serve as the foundation for a family. But also——and perhaps more importantly——recognition of homosexual incest leads to an understanding that all of our social norms, including the difference between genders, the ban on sexual relations with one’s children, respect for elders, etc., are themselves contingent, socially made, and have nothing to do with biology or nature. They are all unstable cultural inventions.
     
    It is here, in this breakthrough critique of kinship, which insists that not some but all cultural norms are socially constructed, that we find the critique’s chief shortcoming, and the reason I want to revisit the current account of the taboo. If all cultural norms are socially constructed, they are not constructed in the same way, nor do they serve the edifice of culture in the same way or on the same level. It seems that for Chow, the taboo creates patriarchal social organization, and it also seems that the taboo could disappear, like other restrictive and discriminating rules that dictate heterosexuality. What this view obscures is that there is a significant difference between, on the one hand, the norms—foundational and unconscious norms—that make culture and, on the other hand, the cultural rules—patrilineality, heterosexuality, even the Oedipus complex, etc.—that are built on such norms. There is, in other words, a functional difference between that incest taboo that makes laws possible and the same taboo that is used, since Plato’s Laws, to shape sexual desire around “natural,” heterosexual predilections.6 Both are norms, but one’s function is unconscious, the other’s conscious, and therein lies the difference that cultural constructivism (of the kind presented in Chow’s, Butler’s, and Schneider’s work) has yet to grapple with.
     
    Butler, who relies on psychoanalysis more than Chow does, acknowledges the unconscious, that is to say, phantasmatic, importance of the taboo but then mentions that the Oedipus complex can take other than heterosexual forms, implying that the “triangularity of desire” may not need to be heterosexual, or that it may not be a precondition of culture, but might be an optional formation that a culture may, or may not, follow, because she would like to allow for a multiplicity of foundational norms. Butler’s chief example when she attempts to show an alternative to Western patrilineal norms is the now famous case of the Chinese Na, who do not have the institution of marriage. Instead, as Butler’s source, anthropologist Cai Hua, interprets it, the Na rely on “night escapes,” when young women who normally live with their brothers visit young men from other “families” for purposes of sexual reproduction. In the morning the women go back to their families, which will raise the child as theirs. The Na do not recognize either the nuclear family or a figure like the pater familias.
     
    What we begin to see here—in Chow’s equation of the incest taboo with an oppressive heterosexual norm, in Butler’s rather naïve reference to the Chinese Na culture as an exception to a rule posited by psychoanalysis—is that the critique of incest norms reduces the concept of the “triangularity of desire” to the “nuclear” family, indeed, to an Oedipus complex, which then leaves this critique with an overly narrow concept of the taboo (and, therefore, of culture as well). The nuclear heterosexual family is a recent, bourgeois invention of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, hardly a universal cultural formation. The “triangularity of desire,” however, has no necessary connection with the father-mother-child triangle with which it is regularly confused. According to Jacques Lacan, who developed this concept, it is the result of a prohibition. The third angle in the triangle is there to allow for the constitution of the subject, not simply to limit the access of the child to the mother and of the mother to the child. The father is only the most likely candidate in a traditional Western family for this function that is, in fact, unconscious and can be performed by any number of agents and agencies. Moreover, in Lacan’s theory of the triangularity of desire, sexuality, in terms of homosexual and heterosexual orientations, as well as gender are results of the triangulation, not its condition, as Butler and Chow after her assume when offering their views on how culture is made.
     

    The River

     
    Chow ends her essay by describing a new situation that emerges after a sexual relation between a father and a son is recognized as incest in Ming-liang Tsai’s movie The River (He liu, 1997). This recognition of father-son sex as incest, according to Chow, results in “the dissolution of the kinship system based on seniority and hierarchy” (135), and so patriarchy ends with a “dephallicized” father who loses his privileged position and becomes merely one among other family members:
     

    Rather than being a patriarch in control of his woman, his offspring, and his household, the old man is a forlorn figure who at one point became consigned to a small room in the apartment, a room that obviously is not the master bedroom. He eats his meals alone (no one cooks for him), sweeps the apartment floors, and irons his own clothes.… More appropriately speaking, the old man is now an anonymous member of a clandestine sexual economy, in which his body, like others’, is a token of exchange—his penis is just a penis—and in which his age, rather than giving him special status, only means that he will become increasingly undesirable. Insofar as the old man enters the culture of the san wennuan [bath house] as an agent of consensual sex transactions, he is, strictly speaking, no longer a “father” with his traditional privileges and entitlements, but a (mere) peer to his “son.”
     

    (135)

     

    If Chow’s reasoning is right, patriarchy is a structure of entitlements. It is like the web of protectionism in ex-socialist countries, with the exception that patriarchy is an oligarchy of men and the system in a country like the former-Yugoslavia was an oligarchy of those who were “connected.” But if, conversely, this is not the case, if patriarchy is not only a structure of preferences and entitlements, but also the structure of the subject—if, in other words, patriarchy is also an unconscious formation—then this account on what homosexual incest signifies is incorrect and Tsai’s The River leads to another interpretation of the norm that it relies on when representing father and son as sexual partners.

     
    Contrary to what Chow suggests, rather than marking the transgression of a traditional Western patriarchal model, the effect of the homosexual incest that makes the father become just another member of an economy, a mere peer to the son, represents simply patriarchy’s transformation from a feudal model, in which a man is “a patriarch in control of his woman, his offspring, and his household” to a bourgeois, twentieth-century model in which the patriarch gradually begins to play a supporting role. The River does not offer, as Chow thinks, a new economy beyond the Western Oedipal model, but rather registers the modern evolution of the head of the family towards a role more akin to that of an elder brother—think of compassionate conservatives in the U.S., for instance—which, in turn, supports new forms of the incest taboo. The function’s renewal and modernization is suggested already in the fact that in The River the character of the father is the only one of the family members not identified by name. He is, as for Lacan, merely the function, “Father,” not a fixed identity.
     
    Because this is simply a transformation of the Oedipal model, and not as Chow assumes an alternative to it, when father and son recognize each other as father and son in The River, they immediately turn away in silence. For good measure, the father then smacks the son upside the head, emphasizing thus how different their relation has become. The implication is that they can enjoy each other’s bodies for as long as their identities are secret to both. When the truth of the couple’s social roles is revealed, just as in Sophocles’s Oedipus Tyrannus, the knowledge reorganizes their entire universe and the sexual arena is immediately desexualized, which is to say, all feelings are immediately repressed. Just like The River‘s father, Oedipus too loses all of his privileges and entitlements, even his eyesight, after his crime is known.7
     
    About the taboo itself, we need to recall here that it has been separable from the heterosexual norm (as were the social roles of “mother” and “father,” “son” and “daughter,” “brother” and “sister”) since Classical Greece, when the Oedipus myth was tied to homosexuality. “Pederasty” is as close to Oedipus as his father Laius, who, as Lowell Edmunds writes in Oedipus: The Ancient Legend and Its Later Analogues, was commonly assumed to be the first human homosexual (7). This mythic invention of male homosexuality takes place around a sexual crime. The rape committed by Laius will be the reason for Oedipus’s curse and, therefore, the cause for his murder of his father.8 As Jean-Pierre Vernant retells the story in The Universe, the Gods, and Men, Labdacus, Laius’s father, rules Thebes only for a short period and dies when his son is only a year old. Nicteus and Lycus take the Theban throne, to be replaced eventually by the non-Thebans Amphion and Zethus. Laius, then a young man, is forced to live in exile and finds “refuge at Corinth with King Pelops, who generously extends him hospitality and keeps him close” (155). The future king of Thebes abuses the King’s hospitality when he falls in love with Pelops’s son Chrysippus, whom he forces to suicide. As Vernant writes, Laius “courts the boy assiduously, takes him around on his chariot, behaves as an older man toward a younger one—he teaches him to be a man; at the same time, though, he seeks an erotic relationship with him, and the king’s son refuses” (155).9 After Chrysippus’s suicide, which commentators have considered to be caused by Laius’s attempt to gain the boy’s affection by force, the boy’s father curses Laius: “[M]ay you never have a son; if you do, may you be destroyed by him” (Edmunds 7).
     
    This physical destruction of the father is repeated in a mutated version in The River in what Chow describes as a loss of entitlements. The demise is foreshadowed in the omnipresent symbol of destructive water that parallels the Theban plague: from Hsio Kang “playing” a corpse floating down a polluted river and getting a mysterious ailment from it, to the flood caused by a broken toilet. The destruction here, like the destruction of Oedipus, does not signify an end of a norm but the beginning of its renewal, resulting in the slightly different patriarchal universe defined, after Oedipus’s murder of his father, by among other things the repressed homosexual desire between the father and the son. The River is special in that it openly presents the latent Oedipal scenario, albeit for a short while, until recognition takes place.10 Then its father and son go back to the disregard that defined their relation before the transgression.
     
    More generally, Chow’s narrow notion of the incest taboo results not only in a failure to address systematically the norm beyond and besides the bourgeois version of patriarchy and a narrowly understood Oedipus complex, but also in an equally narrow critique of kinship theory. It is on these bases, and for this reason—because the theory underlying the critique of kinship, as we see, does not account for the fundamental function of the taboo—that a selective return to Lévi-Strauss’s The Elementary Structures of Kinship, which marks the very beginning of the structuralist understanding of the nature-culture relation, becomes a way forward toward an understanding into how cultural construction works.11
     

    Symbolic Structure

     
    In an age when most American households consist of one member or have no children, it may seem out of date to talk about kinship and family.12 The family and kinship relations, however, are first and foremost symbolic, not natural or even concrete structures. Viewed as such, during modern times, that is to say within last two hundred years, family has become more important, not less. This is because the society of which the ever-shrinking modern family is a basic unit, the nation-state, has itself become more like the family than the feudal kingdom could ever have been. Since the eighteenth century, the so-called father- or motherlands (and their institutions, like schools, hospitals, prisons) have assumed the family’s traditional attributes as well as some of the roles that a weakened and decentered familial structure could no longer support. If in contemporary society something we might call the content of the taboo has changed as well, this is because with the disintegration of the patriarchal family, the regulation of sexuality is more and more a matter of written laws and less and less of unwritten taboos and social mores. Thus, on the one hand, today there is a loosening of restrictions on private relations among consenting adults, going so far as to include the possibility of legalizing sexual relations between blood-relatives. As a result, various “new” rules have become thinkable, homosexual incest being only one among many.13 On the other hand, there is an ever more vigilant policing of families and of the relations resembling parent-child model including but not limited to caretaker/dependent, teacher/student, overseer/employee, et cetera. The new rules are accompanied with an extension of the period of special protection, namely, adolescence, to almost a decade beyond the age of physical sexual maturity.
     
    This does not mean that I entirely disagree with Chow’s critique of Lévi-Strauss’s kinship theory. Chow is right to insist on the contingency of cultural norms. She is right to claim that some Western patriarchal heterosexual norms are not applicable universally, across time and space. For instance, Lévi-Strauss’s notion of the exchange of women, which itself supposes that fatherhood defines a family (and therefore makes it possible for women to be “exchangeable” between families), is neither universal nor the only way to explain social ties. This familiar configuration is, indeed, an unstable cultural invention. Besides relations of “blood,” there are also many other kinds of bonds that connect people and form cultures, without necessarily revolving around or including the nuclear family, fathers, or the heterosexual norm. However, from these discoveries of other ways to understand what culture is it does not follow that the fundamental prohibition is on its way to “extinction” (Chow 133), or that “incest” is thinkable only as a vestige of “ethnocentrism,” in Chow’s repetition of David Schnieder’s most serious complaint (134). This is because the incest prohibition is not only a cultural norm. As a prohibition, it is also a function that makes culture possible. The taboo is the invention upon which the notion of culture (and therefore the notion of change, ethnocentrism, deconstruction, etc.) rests. By this I mean, as I try to demonstrate below, that the taboo is not only, or primarily, a particular rule banning sex within the nuclear family, it is a “taboo,” a fundamental rule that makes sexuality. The taboo can, of course, be filled with whatever incidental content is politically possible at a given time and place. Na women can be banned from having sex with their brothers just as Western men can be banned from having sex with their fathers and sons.
     
    In the U.S., as public morality becomes more accepting of different sexualities and the heterosexual norm gives way to different normativities, the incest taboo does not simply disappear. It shifts, as I suggested already. As a result, not only police, but doctors and teachers, our colleagues at work, and other professionals who have insight into our private lives are recruited in defense of the new taboo. The reason for this transformation, to repeat, is not that the incest taboo is weakening, but that culture is changing. As a part of this process, the taboo is recontextualized, and its content is adapted to fit the new constructions of reality without any alterations in its fundamental, unconscious function.
     
    In the following selective reading of Lévi-Strauss, I offer the basic theory of the prohibition as I try to explain in which sense the taboo is the condition of culture.
     

    Lévi-Strauss

     
    Lévi-Strauss begins his argument about the elementary structures of kinship by distinguishing between universal traits in human cultures, which are natural, and norms, which are culturally specific. He then identifies the prohibition of incest, calling it the one universal norm that “could not be ascribed accurately to either one or the other” category (25). This norm is natural in the sense that all cultures seem to adhere to it, and it is cultural because, obviously, it is a social norm defined by man. The meaning of this proposition hinges entirely on how we understand the latter part, that incest is a social norm made by man. There are, in short, two possibilities. One, used by Schneider and his poststructuralist followers, is to take Lévi-Strauss’s words to refer to customs created as a part of a more or less conscious process of defining rules and creating traditions. Lévi-Strauss himself sees the norm this way, but not only this way. For him, this semi-conscious process of definition and redefinition is only a secondary role the taboo—as a taboo—plays. Drawing on psychoanalysis, Lévi-Strauss first argues that the norm creates man as distinct from other animals. This is the fundamental function of the taboo whose mere existence signals that humans are creatures unlike other animals because they regulate their sexuality using norms. The taboo thus turns human sexual instinct into what Lacan calls drive—drive is different from instinct precisely because it is regulated by changeable rules.14
     
    For Schneider, in contrast to Lévi-Strauss, the incest taboo has merely conscious effects. Its content is known by all members of a community; otherwise, as Schneider reasons, it would not be a taboo. As he writes in an essay titled “The Meaning of Incest,” the taboo defines where our primary socialization unit ends and the secondary units begin. Its sole purpose is to separate the nuclear family from the domain of permitted sexual partners. As such, the taboo regulates the relations within the family, differentiates its generations, and limits the sexual rights of the father while, at the same time, shoring up his power. If, on this way of thinking, the taboo restricts his rights, on the other hand, it grounds the father’s privileged position in the collective interest of the family members by giving the children (and the mother) a stake in maintaining the hierarchy that protects them against the first (namely, sexual) violation. Because of the taboo, the father is seen as the protector of a certain order and the one who adequately represents it.
     
    For Chow, as for Schneider, such a nuclear family is a Western invention applicable only to certain civilizational and historical models. When these models are outlived, the taboo and the nuclear family no longer have the primary role and are giving way to other social norms and bonds. As a result, the father is becoming more like other members of the family. He is reduced from being the pater familias to being just a male member.
     
    For Lévi-Strauss, as we see in the introduction to The Elementary Structures of Kinship, the primary role of the taboo is not to organize social ties, but to define culture as such. He explains that sexuality gives the varying content to the taboo because the sexual instinct is our only social instinct—hunger, in contrast, does not require another human being to be felt or satisfied. He says, for instance, “if the regulation of relations between the sexes represents an overflow of culture into nature, in another way sexual life is one beginning of social life in nature, for the sexual is man’s only instinct requiring the stimulation of another person” (12). Understood this way, the incest prohibition is the fundamental social rule because human sexuality exists in a social mode, and whatever rule regulates the way people organize the social bonds that make them into subjects must also regulate the condition for the possibility of their becoming subjects. Thus, as Lévi-Strauss offers in his formula, the taboo is the norm that allows for the transformation of “nature” into culture. It separates the human from the animal state of our evolution, and sets our sexuality on a separate track from the biological instinct.
     
    The incest prohibition in the form of a ban on the father having sex with his daughter is only one possible content that can be attached to the fundamental taboo. The taboo as such neither has nor needs any content. It is differentiated as a function—its function being to separate the orders of nature and culture and make each possible. As Lévi-Strauss says, the taboo is that cultural norm “where nature transcends itself,” evolves into the self-legislating system we call culture, and allows the new order to superimpose itself over the old one (25). By “superimpose” Lévi-Strauss means that the new code is rewriting and reshaping the old one. Such culture is the realization of this animal’s nature, and this animal’s nature is manifested as a superimposition of its own constructs over, and as, its “nature.” The relationship between culture and the taboo, hence, does not go in one direction, as Schneider assumes. It is, rather, reciprocal. Culture constitutes the origin of the prohibition, and the prohibition provides the condition of possibility for culture’s differentiation from nature. Because these are reciprocal relations, there is no such thing as nature as such, there is only “nature,” which is created by culture’s separation from it. At the same time, there can be no such thing as “pure” cultural construction, because culture needs a source for itself, which it finds in the human nature.
     
    This distinction of nature from culture is a universal trait and because it is a universal trait all human cultures are organized around restrictions on sexual relations. Whether the ban includes the mother, as the first myth of psychoanalysis indicates, is less important than the fact that the norm is applied to sexuality. Legislating sexuality and building culture around sexual rules is, in Lévi-Strauss’s way of thinking, the most natural tendency of the human animal. And this is the simplest way to understand what the incest taboo and other taboos are: norms that bring together our social and our sexual beings. The understanding Lévi-Strauss thus reaches is that culture is “naturally” a sexual system, just as it is “naturally” a constructed social system.15
     
    Based on this understanding of the nature-culture relation, we can correct the basic assumption of cultural construction theories to say that culture is not a cultural but, rather, a natural construction humans make instinctively. Our most natural behavior is to organize sexual relations with others around us and to do so by imposing certain rules. Through this process of rewriting or substitution of nature with culture, “natural” roles become defined by custom. A female human becomes “mother,” a male “father,” where “father” and “mother” are both, and equally so, what Lévi-Strauss calls social relationships (30). Or, as the case may be, the female becomes a “father” as she assumes a specific function (itself defined by the history of its relations) within the social web.16 In such a constellation, because as a norm it is first defined through its function, the incest taboo can be assigned just about any content, even content that has no apparent relation to sex. The grounding function of the taboo, however, is always the same—it makes the regulation of sexuality and the organization of social structures into one and the same process.
     
    The fact that the function, not the content, is the primary definition of the taboo, implies also that the taboo can be broken without permanent damage to the group it defines. A transgression of the ban still confirms the basic function of the taboo, that sexuality is regulated and that society is organized based on sexual rules.
     
    This understanding of kinship has to part ways with Lévi-Strauss by the third chapter of The Elementary Structures of Kinship, where he turns his attention away from the fundamental principles and toward the different historical contents the taboo has had in organizing the nature/culture opposition—when he says, for instance, that “the incest prohibition expresses the transition from the natural fact of consanguinity to the cultural fact of alliance” (30). As Schneider notes, from this point on Lévi-Strauss operates with a reified notion of nature. Specifically, Lévi-Strauss assumes that (a) there is such a thing as a natural fact that was (b) at some point in time overcome in favor of a new, cultural organization. And so we can conclude that, in fact, in The Elementary Structures of Kinship there are two distinct theories involving the incest taboo. The philosophical one we followed above explains the origin of culture in the nature/culture opposition, thus demonstrating that cultural constructs have their bases in nature. The second is a naturalist theory. It concerns “marriage prohibitions” and is a variant of the theory of scarcity (32). This latter, ethnocentric theory (ethnocentric because it still thinks culture in terms of one, coherent system, not because it is Western) explains how human groups form kinships through the “exchange of women” and why exogamous marriage enhances the family’s survival chances. It is this “marriage prohibition” theory that, as Butler says (29), has been surpassed as a universal theory and is no longer seen as a norm-defining rule. The theory, however, is not wrong (when separated from Lévi-Strauss’s tendency to naturalize gender roles and sex), but remains one among others that can help explain how social bonds are formed.
     

    The Theory of the Subject

     
    What we thus take from Lévi-Strauss is a theory of the subject, which—paradoxically perhaps—the extant poststructuralist critique of kinship lacks. To be sure, neither Schneider nor Butler nor Chow would think of their work this way. They believe they have a theory of the subject contained in the assumption that the subject is a product of power relations and an ideological construct. Moreover, they believe that poststructuralism in general is a theory of the subject because for them its most basic goal is to show how subjects are produced. In Butler’s account in The Psychic Life of Power for instance, the unconscious is said to be a product of power relations. But for all the critique of ideology, neither Schneider nor Butler nor Chow can explain where this formative power, which is constitutive of the subject, of the unconscious, etc., comes from or what it is.
     
    The lack of a theory of the subject is the reason why the critique of kinship treats all cultural norms as constructed the same way—eating habits, choice of sexual partner, what have you. We can easily demonstrate that this is the case by turning again to the same Gayle Rubin quotation that Chow refers to, and which sums up the poststructuralist critique of Lévi-Strauss thus: “Hunger is hunger, but what counts as food is culturally determined and obtained.… Sex is sex, but what counts as sex is equally culturally determined and obtained” (qtd. in Chow 134). Rubin is correct that what counts as food is culturally determined, but neither hunger nor food form the subject the way sex does. Hunger and food play a role in subject formation in the sense that their cultural determination—what we consider to be food—becomes a part of the subjectivity of the subject. Sex is unlike food because it also has a fundamental role no other instinct has. This does not mean that rules of sexual behavior are not culturally constructed. They are, just as Rubin suggests. But cultural construction is itself defined by, and grounded in, our sexual nature. So it is more likely that what counts as culture is determined by sex than the other way round—that what counts as sex is, simply and only, decided by custom.
     
    We can illustrate the same kind of lack of the theory of the subject with another example, Diana Fuss’s influential version of deconstructive feminism, which builds on the same set of assumptions about culture present in Rubin’s, Butler’s, and Chow’s work. I choose Fuss (Essentially Speaking) here because she relies on Lacan’s theory of the subject and presents his account as compatible with Foucault’s, which is behind the extant critique of kinship. Briefly then, according to Fuss, Lacan shows that the subject is best understood as a subject-position:
     

    It is especially significant that throughout his work Lacan always speaks in terms of the place of the subject. His subversive rewriting of Descartes’s “I think, therefore I am” (cogito ergo sum) as “I think where I am not, therefore I am where I do not think” provides a good case in point (“The Agency of the Letter in the Unconscious or Reason since Freud” 1977, 166). The emphasis in Lacan’s anti-cogito falls on the “where”; the question “who is speaking” can only be answered by shifting the grounds of the question to “where am I speaking from?”

     

    Fuss then pushes the metaphor of place to its limit:

     

    But it is important to remember that the place of the subject is nonetheless, ultimately, unlocalizable; were we able to fix the whereabouts of the subject in a static field of determinism, then we would be back in the realm of ego psychology.

    (29-30)

     

    The subject, as Fuss tells us, is displaced from the proper place it had as the Cartesian autonomous self capable of observing itself fully. That it is displaced means that it does not get its identity from within itself but from relations with other subjects. The position of such a subject is not fixed, at least in the sense that we can never be certain which elements determine it and how, and which ones do not.

     
    The field of subject formation, however, is itself a function of another instance, not as unlocalizable and free-floating as Fuss implies. The subject-place is fixed in the sense that it is determined, in at least three ways. First, it is determined with respect to what this field is—a manifestation of human sexuality. Second, it is determined with respect to the instances that relate to one another in every subject-relation—namely the unconscious. And, third, it is determined with respect to phantasy—the ego continues to think of itself in terms of the same, continuous self of the Cartesian cogito.
     
    Fuss is right that, for Lacan, the subject is a function of the place and the place does not occupy a specific spatial location—the subject is an effect of the interactions between shifting networks. But these networks do not take just any form. They are, rather, structured following precise scenarios of human sexuality, and so are our cultural constructions. The relations within these networks are fixed to, and orientated by, the unconscious that relates every individual to the Other and to every other. Fuss’s theory—like Schneider’s, Butler’s, and Chow’s critiques of kinship—neglects these restrictions. The exclusion of these determinations gives her the illusion that subject positions are interchangeable, which in turn becomes the basis for her further argument about cultural construction, that the essence of feminism is politics and politics itself is a matter of ever-shifting coalitions.
     

    Conclusion

     
    Rey Chow’s article, “A Pain in the Neck, a Scene of ‘Incest,’ and Other Enigmas of an Allegorical Cinema” expresses a generally accepted poststructuralist view that the new forms of the incest prohibition are now, toward the end of the patriarchal epoch, becoming “thinkable” as we recognize the naturalist bias built into certain Western concepts, and as we consider other norms besides those that sustain the heterosexual nuclear family (125). Strictly speaking, this is the case only with conscious norms or, rather, with those norms we have made conscious. The unconscious structure of the subject, however, is as little, or as much, thinkable today as it was when Sophocles wrote Oedipus Tyrannus. This is not because we have not yet, to use an old phrase, penetrated the darkness, but more simply because we have not stopped being sexual-social beings.
     
    Derrida might be addressing this unconscious function that escapes us when he proposes in “Structure, Sign, and Play,” his essay on Lévi-Strauss and structuralism, that the origin of thought evades though even as philosophy is more capable of locating its origin:

    It could perhaps be said that the whole of philosophical conceptualization, systematically relating itself to the nature/culture opposition, is designed to leave in the domain of the unthinkable the very thing that makes conceptualization possible: the origin of the prohibition of incest.
     

    (254)

     

    Poststructuralism has made the taboo more thinkable by revealing its origin in patriarchal or heterosexual or ethnocentric notions of family, as Chow argues. But as poststructuralism reveals this origin of thought, as it deconstructs Western metaphysics, it must also acknowledge its own limitation. It has to recognize that it too leaves something in the domain of the unthinkable.

     
    David Schneider’s analysis of Yap culture in A Critique of the Study of Kinship is a case in point. Searching for a Yap self-representation different from the one his ethnocentric, Western methodology directed him to discover, Schneider forgets that the very notion of culture is what gives him the basis to distinguish between the Yap and the West in the first place, and sees relative differences between the systems as destabilizing the entire edifice of his scientific assumptions. He thus gets caught up in what Paul de Man identifies as revolving-door reading (“Autobiography as De-facement”)17 because he believes that he has applied too little deconstruction. As a result he tries ever harder.
     
    Subsequent critiques of kinship theory, like Butler’s and Chow’s, follow Schneider into this revolving-door of cultural constructivism where all norms appear the same, forgetting that their own work is predicated on the absolute difference between nature and culture. As a result, they do not know what to do with, or how to explain, the function that makes culture, the function that Lévi-Strauss saw in the incest taboo and before it in the unconscious.
     
    If we do not allow that there is a limit to what cultural construction can construct (and to what deconstruction can deconstruct), it is hard to see how our theories—psychoanalysis, deconstruction, anthropology, feminism, queer and postcolonial studies, or another of their hybrids—can approach culture and what appears to be a true heteronormativity, the one that has to do with the unconscious.
     

    Petar Ramadanovic is Associate Professor of English at the University of New Hampshire, Durham. He is the author of Forgetting Futures and numerous articles. The present essay is a part of his new project, a critique of post-structuralism.
     

    Notes

     

     

     

    This article is a result of my conversations with Catherine Peebles. I would also like to thank the Center for the Humanities at the University of New Hampshire for the fellowship that made it possible for me to write this article. I am in debt to Robin Hackett as well. Her comments on an early draft helped me shape the essay.

     
    1. Lévi-Strauss’s theory of kinship is an offshoot of thinking about kinship found in early anthropology, notably in the discussion of race in, among others, Kant and Blumenbach. See, for instance, Robert Bernasconi’s “Who Invented the Concept of Race?”

     

     
    2. For Franz Boas (The Mind of Primitive Man), “Culture may be defined as the totality of the mental and physical reactions and activities that characterize the behavior of individuals composing a social group collectively and individually in relations to their natural environment, to other groups, to members of the group itself and of each individual to himself. It also includes the products of these activities and their role in the life of the groups. The mere enumerations of these various aspects of life, however, does not constitute culture. It is more, for its elements are not independent, they have a structure” (159).

     

     
    3. Works like Judith Butler’s Antigone’s Claim: Kinship between Life and Death and Kelly Oliver’s “Strange Kinship: Heidegger and Merleau-Ponty on Animals” are among the important precedents, the former because of its contemporary interpretation of the classical model for family relations, thinking daughter’s ties in place of the father centered family common in psychoanalytic accounts, and the latter because it ventures into human-non-human relations, perusing the model–kinship–defined for human-human ties. Together the two suggest the extant trends in thinking about kinship.

     

     
    4. In a recent assessment of Lévi-Strauss’s work, titled “The Future of the Structural Theory of Kinship,” anthropologist Marcela Coelho de Souza argues that “the present relevance of Lévi-Strauss’s work on kinship” lies in its explanation of the relation between nature and culture. She goes on to identify the most productive way to understand this relation, the one she thinks Lévi-Strauss maintains throughout his long career: in purely structuralist terms, a dualism of exchangeable orders, not a binary opposition. On Coelho de Souza’s reading, the incest prohibition is not only a rule banning certain marriages, but also a rule that places affinity, or sexual relations, at the center of the social network. As the former, it is a social norm; as the latter, it is much like a natural given. My claim is somewhat similar to hers. I argue that the relation between nature and culture should be seen first as functional, allowing for the possibility of culture, which can then be manifested based on affinity, consanguinity, and other givens.

     

     
    5. Following this work, anthropology began to abandon the concept of the incest taboo as no longer useful. “Beyond the Taboo: Imagining Incest,” Anna Meigs’s and Kathleen Barlow’s 2002 overview of current notions of the incest taboo in ethnology and anthropology, gives a good sense of why these fields are moving beyond the term. For a brief history of sociological definitions of the incest taboo, see also Gregory C. Leavitt’s “Disappearance of the Incest Taboo.” Anthropology and ethnology, however, might be losing more than they gain by abandoning efforts to understand kinship.

     

     
    6. The state, says the Athenian in Laws, should
     

     

    follow in nature’s steps and enact that law which held good before the days of Laius, declaring that it is right to refrain from indulging in the same kind of intercourse with men and boys as with women, and adducing as evidence thereof the nature of wild beasts, and pointing out how male does not touch male for this purpose, since it is unnatural.
     

    (Plato 836c-d)

     
    Plato knows he can legislate sexual habits because, as he says, even people who know no laws obey the basic sexual social rule, namely the incest taboo (Plato 838a-b). This does not mean, however, as Chow assumes, that the incest prohibition itself contains the heterosexual norm. It means only that the taboo can be used to enforce such a norm to differentiate between “natural” and “abnormal” sexual behavior.

     
    7. The reading that Tsai’s The River invites is a self-conscious and deliberate commentary on Sophocles’s Oedipus and the long history of its interpretations. Chow, unfortunately, does not explain sufficiently her choice to bypass this reading and its history.

     

     
    8. In The Phoenician Women Euripides makes Jocasta say: “But the god replied: / ‘Lord of horse-rich Thebes, do not fling your seed / into the furrow, flouting the gods. If you make / a son you make your own murderer. Your whole line / will wade through blood’” (21).

     

     
    9. See also William Armstrong Percy, Pederasty and Pedagogy in Archaic Greece. Percy attributes first mention of Laius’s pederasty to Peisander of Camirus, a poet who lived in the seventh century BCE (41 and 56).

     

     
    10. Representation of the son’s desire for the father goes as far back as Ham’s inappropriate relationship with his father Noah (Genesis 9:18–27). See Ilona Nemesnyik Rashkow, Taboo or not Taboo (93), and Calum Carmichael, Law, Legend, and Incest in the Bible (16). As far as cinema history is concerned, Pier Paolo Pasolini’s Oedipus Rex (1967), which Pasolini regarded as his autobiography, comes readily to mind as The River‘s precursor.

     

     
    11. In her “Is Kinship Always Already Heterosexual?” Butler repeats the commonly accepted understanding that Lévi-Strauss’s view of kinship is “the negotiation of a patrilineal line through marriage ties” (15). She then proceeds to say that the views developed in The Elementary Structures of Kinship have been surpassed and that they are no longer held even by Lévi-Strauss (29). While this is indeed the case with some aspects of the theory of culture Lévi-Strauss laid out in The Elementary Structures of Kinship, the most radical aspects of his explanation of the relation between nature and culture still seem to be waiting for an audience.

     

     
    12. The U.S. Census Bureau shows that about 25% of American households have only one member. Households with no children make up an additional 30% (Census 11). The additional challenge to the traditional family is soon to come from genetic biology already capable of artificial creation of unique, not naturally occurring organisms. It, too, will challenge the traditional family as a natural unit, in the nineteenth-century sense of the term “nature”–but not as a symbolic unit.

     

     
    13. What I am trying to say here clashes with the idea propagated in, for instance, Yehudi Cohen’s 1978 “The Disappearance of the Incest Taboo” (Human Nature 1:72-78), which proposes that with the development of trade, the importance of the incest taboo will apply to fewer and fewer relatives. See also Michael Lindenberger’s “Should Incest Be Legal?,” a 2007 article in Time that examines the possibility of legalization of incest in the U.S. If my reasoning is correct, the incest taboo is not disappearing but is being transformed.

     

     
    14. This understanding of how animal human instinct relates to drive might offer a way to understand terms of kinship between humans and animals, which is, as I mentioned, one of kinship theory’s current frontiers.

     

     
    15. Carole Pateman comes to a similar conclusion in her critique of social contract theories when she suggests that the first social contract was between man and woman and concerned their sexual relations (The Sexual Contract). One major difference between Pateman and Lévi-Strauss is that the former sees the relationship between sexuality and the social as historical, while the latter considers it to be the condition for the possibility of history.

     

     
    16. Much like human animals, other mammals develop sexually within their family. They do not, however, develop sexually based on certain adaptable regulations whose content can change from time to time and place to place, but based on genetic imprint, whose alteration depends on selection.

     

     
    17. De Man’s term “revolving door” applies to Gerard Genette’s suggestion that a reading of Proust should not decide whether his novel is an autobiographical or fictional work and should remain within this undecidable tourniquet or whirligig (921). De Man’s point is that it is not possible to remain within an undecidable situation too long before a vertigo of sorts renders differences between the opposites moot (921). If we assume that all works of fiction are to some degree autobiographical, he says, we might as well say that none are. If we assume that all cultural norms are constructs, we might as well say that none are.

     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Bernasconi, Robert. “Who Invented the Concept of Race? Kant’s Role in the Enlightenment Construction of Race.” Race. Ed. Robert Bernasconi. Malden: Blackwell, 2001. 10-36. Print.
    • Boas, Franz. The Mind of a Primitive Man. Rev. ed. New York: Macmillan, 1938. Print.
    • Butler, Judith. Antigone’s Claim: Kinship Between Life and Death. New York: Columbia UP, 2000. Print.
    • ———. “Is Kinship Always Already Heterosexual?” differences 13 (Spring 2002): 14-44. Print.
    • ———. The Psychic Life of Power: Theories in Subjection. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1997. Print.
    • Carmichael, Calum. Law, Legend, and Incest in the Bible. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1997. Print.
    • Chow, Rey. “A Pain in the Neck, a Scene of ‘Incest,’ and Other Enigmas of an Allegorical Cinema.” CR: The New Centennial Review 4.1 (2004): 123-142. Print.
    • Coehlo de Souza, Marcela. “The Future of the Structural Theory of Kinship.” The Cambridge Companion to Levi-Strauss. Ed. Boris Wiseman. Cambridge: Cambridge UP 2009. 80-99. Print.
    • Cohen, Yehudi. “The Disappearance of the Incest Taboo.” Human Nature 1 (1975): 72-78. Print.
    • Critchley, Simon. The Ethics of Deconstruction: Derrida and Levinas. West Lafayette: Purdue UP, 1999. Print.
    • De Man, Paul. “Autobiography as De-Facement.” MLN 94.5 (Dec. 1979): 919-930. Print.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Structure, Sign, and Play.” The Structuralist Controversy: The Language of Criticism and the Science of Man. Ed. Richard Macksey and Eugenio Donato. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1970. 247-264. Print.
    • Edmunds, Lowell. Oedipus: The Ancient Legend and Its Later Analogues. Baltimore: John Hopkins UP, 1985. Print.
    • Euripides. The Phoenician Women. Trans. Peter Burian and Brian Swann. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1981. Print.
    • Fuss, Dianne. Essentially Speaking: Feminism, Nature, and Difference. New York: Routledge, 1989. Print.
    • Hua, Cai. A Society Without Fathers or Husbands: The Na of China. Trans. Asti Hustvedt. New York: Zone, 2001. Print.
    • Leavitt, Gregory. “Disappearance of the Incest Taboo: A Cross-Cultural Test of General Evolutionary Hypotheses.” American Anthropologist 91.1 (March 1989): 116-131. Print.
    • Lévi-Strauss, Claude. The Elementary Structures of Kinship. Trans. James Harle Bell et al. Boston: Beacon Press, 1969. Print.
    • Lindenberger, Michael. “Should Incest Be Legal?” Time 5 Apr. 2007. n. pag. Web. 12 Feb. 2011.
    • Meigs, Anna and Kathleen Barlow. “Beyond the Taboo: Imagining Incest.” American Anthropologist (2002) 104.1: 38-49. Print.
    • Oedipus Rex. Dir. Pier Paolo Pasolini. Perf. Silvana Mangano, Franco Citti, and Alida Valli. Arco Film, 1967. Film.
    • Oliver, Kelly. “Strange Kinship: Heidegger and Merleau-Ponty on Animals.” Epoché 13.1 (Fall 2008): 101-120. Print.
    • Pateman, Carol. The Sexual Contract. Palo Alto: Stanford UP, 1988. Print.
    • Percy, William Armstrong. Pederasty and Pedagogy in Archaic Greece. Chicago: U of Illinois P, 1998. Print.
    • Plato. Laws. Trans. A.E. Taylor. The Collected Dialogues of Plato. Ed. Edith Hamilton and Huntington Cairns. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2005. 1225-1516. Print.
    • Rashkow, Ilona Nemesnyik. Taboo or not Taboo: Sexuality and Family in the Hebrew Bible. Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2000. Print.
    • The River (He Liu). Dir. Tsai Ming Liang. Perf. Tien Miao, Kang-sheng Lee and Yi-Ching Lu. Wellspring Media, 1997. Film.
    • Rubin, Gayle. “The Traffic in Women: Notes on the ‘Political Economy’ of Sex.” The Second Wave: A Reader in Feminist Theory. Ed. Linda Nicholson. New York: Routledge, 1997. 27-62. Print.
    • Schneider, David M. A Critique of the Study of Kinship. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1984. Print.
    • ———. “The Meaning of Incest.” Journal of the Polynesian Society 85.2 (1976): 149-169. Print.
    • Vernant, Jean-Pierre. The Universe, the Gods, and Men: Ancient Greek Myths. Trans. Linda Asher. New York: HarperCollins, 2001. Print.

     

  • Sex Without Friction: the Limits of Multi-Mediated Human Subjectivity in Cheang Shu Lea’s Tech-Porn

    Jian Chen (bio)
    New York University
    Jian.Chen@nyu.edu

     
    Abstract
     
    Sex Without Friction focuses on Cheang Shu Lea’s science fiction porno I.K.U. (2000) as provocation to think through the limitations of social and cultural criticism that is premised on mediation. Directed by Taiwan-born digital nomad Cheang, multimedia film I.K.U. features a gender-morphing human clone, programmed to collect sexual experiences for the future mass production of sex simulation pills. I.K.U. positions viewers as spectators, users, and interceptors in the display and transmission of images and information as we follow the clone’s movements through a globally non-descript Tokyo in search of sexual data. The essay is organized into four sections or frames. The first section explores the debate on film’s lost specificity in digital media convergence. The second looks at the structure of feeling that shapes postmodern criticism on the dehumanizing aesthetics of postindustrial capitalism. Section three contrasts machinic forms of sexuality with liberal and anti-liberal conceptions of sexuality as an object and technology of social regulation. And the last section questions the presumed alignment between spectator and media apparatus in phenomenological and psychoanalytic approaches to film and video. Each section relies on the multimedia, machinic world of I.K.U. to bring into relief constraints on the notion of mediation under discussion—technological, critical, sexual, or spectatorial. The conclusion argues hyperbolically for the abandonment of reductive economies of cultural visibility aimed merely at rehabilitating the racially and sexually normative human.
     
     
     
    Scene from I.K.U. Human clone steps out into new world after opening activation scene. Depth perception is abandoned for surface cues.  © Eclectic DVD 2000.

     

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 1.

    Scene from I.K.U. Human clone steps out into new world after opening activation scene. Depth perception is abandoned for surface cues.

    © Eclectic DVD 2000.
     

     

    Perhaps we still have a memory of sex, rather as water ‘remembers’ molecules no matter how diluted. But that is the whole point: this is only a molecular memory, the corpuscular memory of an earlier life, and not a memory of forms or singularities … So what we are left with is the simple imprint of a faceless sexuality infinitely watered down in a broth of politics, media and communications, and eventually manifested in the viral explosion of AIDS.
     

    –Jean Baudrillard, The Transparency of Evil (1990)

     

    But I saw at once something elongated and pale floating very close to the ladder. Before I could form a guess a faint flash of phosphorescent light, which seemed to issue suddenly from the naked body of a man, flickered in the sleeping water … With a gasp I saw revealed to my stare a pair of feet, the long legs, a broad livid back immersed right up to the neck in a greenish cadaverous glow … A headless corpse!
     

    –Joseph Conrad, Secret Sharer (1910)

     
    Cheang Shu Lea’s multimedia film I.K.U. (2000) is a sex-fest set in a future populated by sexually activated human clones and their male and female johns. Beginning in 2019, these replicant humans, or I.K.U. Coders, traverse the urban architectures of Tokyo to gain sexual experience for the projected mass production of sex pills. I.K.U. pills promise all the pleasures of sex without the physical friction. While the film introduces the Genom Corporation as the mega-institution that has engineered the clones, I.K.U. Coders go about their sex work without the materialization of any entity masterminding their rovings. Outside scenes of activation and deactivation and commands that flash sporadically onscreen, they seem fully automated and autonomous. As viewers, we follow the Coders as they mutate into seven different feminine forms, moving from one sexual scenario to another in urban locales like a freeway overpass, strip club, or sushi bar. While each sex scene occurs against a different local backdrop with a new type of sexual pairing, every scene repeats a cycle. Each begins with the introduction of the morphing Coder at work on the set and ends with a mosaic display of the Coder’s identification data and the amount of data collected in the just transpired sexual coupling. The overriding aim of these cyclical sexual settings is the accumulation of enough orgasmic data to download for the production of I.K.U. pills. The final product, however, never materializes outside a brief animated fantasy showing a vending machine selling sex pills. The entire film is a dream-series without narrative chain. And the enjoyment of viewing lies in watching the assorted contours of each sex segment, always quantified towards a fantastical target but never reaching it.
     
    Cheang’s sci-fi porn feature is an unauthorized, unfaithful spin-off from Ridley Scott’s Blade Runner (1982). Blade Runner depicts a techno-saturated, nature-impoverished Los Angeles of 2019. The city’s hollows serve as hideouts for a group of genetically engineered human clones, called replicants, that return to Earth to confront their corporate makers after their expulsion from Earth. Rick Deckard (played by Harrison Ford) is brought out of retirement to resume his role as a police agent (blade runner) who hunts down human clones. While attempting to exterminate the mutinous band of clones, Deckard falls in love with a more technologically advanced replicant by the name of Rachel. Cheang’s I.K.U. takes off where Blade Runner concludes, giving full “sexual” expression to the unconsummated erotic relationship between (supposedly) human and clone. I.K.U. echoes themes apparent in other visual pieces in Cheang’s repertoire. Taiwan-born queer digital nomad Cheang Shu Lea is known for her locally embedded, yet geographically elusive, film projects and net installations set in or at the waysides of Tokyo, New York, Taipei, and Paris. Her other feature films Fresh Kill (1994) and LoveMe2030 (2005), along with her cyber-installations Brandon (1998-9) and Milk (2004), share an attentiveness to media facilitated, racially marked sexual intimacies. In I.K.U. and other works, new information technologies and bodily mutability become the interchangeable tools and signs for the transnational dominance of commodity culture, corporate rule, and state-military bureaucracy.
     

     
    Scene from I.K.U. The film in digital video markets the story of its own completion, providing a direct "exterior" interface with viewers. Alongside these onscreen displays, a partial story "within" the film unfolds in non-linear segments.  © Eclectic DVD 2000.

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 2.

     
    Scene from I.K.U. The film in digital video markets the story of its own completion, providing a direct “exterior” interface with viewers. Alongside these onscreen displays, a partial story “within” the film unfolds in non-linear segments.

    © Eclectic DVD 2000.

     

     

    Frame One: Tech-Porn

     
    While Cheang’s I.K.U. is a pornographic tribute to the sexually ambidextrous body, the film could be more accurately described as tech-porn. The film is as much a celebration of the transferability of content across different mediums, as it is a pronouncement of liberation from biologically assigned sex. Before the first scene, opening credits have already taken viewers through a multimedia blitz that includes electronic grids, a sliding panel that reveals a woman and man having frantic sex, and video game consoles describing the I.K.U. pill/chip, to be produced and sold in tune with individualized preferences for simulated sexual experiences. By the conclusion of the first scene, I.K.U. has severed and reworked its relationship to whatever remains of film as a favored medium.
     
    Cinema has been attributed with an enhanced capacity for realism, whether considering Hollywood narrative or its counterpoint in European auteurist film. The illusions of transparency and continuity in the Hollywood standard and what André Bazin identifies as “aesthetic ontology” in art house cinema all render the cinematic image a window into a re-imagined world.1 In opposition, Third Cinema refuses both the illusionism of Hollywood and the aesthetic preoccupations of European auteur cinema in favor of a militant, often pedagogical ultra-realism that highlights the ideological workings of commercial and alternative independent film.2 As a product of digital video, however, Cheang’s I.K.U. departs from realism altogether. At the closing of the first scene, the newly activated feminine I.K.U. Coder emerges as a superimposition of machine hologram and “live” human-clone body. Immediately following, an informational display identifying the version of the just activated Coder links viewers to a new scene. The images in the feature blend live components with computer generated imagery, making no claims to representation. And, geared towards the “net-surfing generation,” the images provide non-discrete segments that stream continuously through transitional links, rather than moving as a linear narrative through juxtaposed separate shots as in film montage.3
     
    The digital image in I.K.U. tests the limits of what can be understood as an image. If the photographic and film image have been conceived as a visual mediation of reality that provides a re-imagined relationship to real objects in the world, the image becomes a visible screen rather than a transparent window in Cheang’s film.4 In the first scene in the elevator, viewers do not only watch the sexual activation of the I.K.U. Coder by an I.K.U. Runner, an agent of the Genom Corporation (cited as producer of the human-clone Coder). The Runner also speaks to us through a screen that becomes visible at the moment it is spoken to/through. Rather than providing a reflection of the real, the image becomes a screen that displays and transmits. In the segment following the scene of activation, the transformation of the image into an instrument for viewing and communication becomes even more visible. A different permutation of the originally activated Coder receives a command onscreen:
     

    <your bio disk is now empty

    take the New Tokyo subway line>

     
    Sent on mission, the Coder, who is most accurately referenced by the pronoun “it,” gets on the subway and tests out its function through heavy petting with a subway passenger. It travels towards its destination, a strip club, where it receives the command to “dance. dance. dance.” At the club, the Coder has sex with a male john with other couplings happening all around. It racks up data points after it penetrates him and a female dancer with its morphed dildo-arm in a brief threesome. After the collection of orgasmic data, text flashes onscreen commending the Coder for a “good job” and directing it to the next location.
     
    As shown by messages onscreen, the Coder acts autonomously but does so under direction and command. It is an automated instrument that seeks out and collects sexual experiences. The Coder’s morphing and moving body is the focal point of the image for viewers. But it is also the screen that displays, stores, and transmits each sexual transaction as information. As viewers, we are placed at the intercepting point of the image-screen that is the Coder. We watch, receive, and send images and information. Shot and edited using digital media, Cheang’s I.K.U. attests to the media convergence enabled by the computer and the Internet. Anne Friedberg contends that the inter-permeation of cinematic, televisual, computer, and telephone mediums and displays offers a new visual episteme. And according to Lisa Nakamura, the transformation of the Internet from a textual to graphic base and its fusion with video and television has contributed to the incorporation of the Internet into everyday life in the “post-Internet” era. Cheang’s multimedia film exploits the non-representational, non-linear, streaming possibilities enabled by digitalization to create a cyber-world of mutating bodies, sexual scenes that loop back or link up with slight deviations, and a broader network that transmits, receives, and stores data. Beyond utilizing the technological capacities of digital media, I.K.U. incorporates the loss of media specificity into its partial storylines. Media machines including television sets, cell phones, military goggles, 3-D projections, video cameras, and surveillance cams appear as mere props for the smooth transfer of images and information.
     
    Cheang’s I.K.U. is a film in name only. It evokes film-like elements through story segments and images that provide something like content.5 But these semblances of film serve only to signal film’s demise with a digitally induced media convergence. The “death” of film at the hands of new media has initiated grieving for film’s lost specificity as a medium and disciplinary object.6 For instance, emphasizing existential and phenomenological approaches to media, Sobchack argues that electronic “presence” puts the lived-body in crisis (“Scene” 82). Bodily dimensions become mere “kinesthetic gestures describing and lighting on the surface of the screen” (81). Sobchack makes this claim based on a comparison to cinema’s ability to move beyond its technological “thing”-ness (referencing Heidegger) to present a representation of the objective world. The cinematic spectator experiences this presentation of a representation of the world semiotically as both subjective (spectator shares in presentation and representation of experience) and intentional (automated flow of experiences beyond control and containment). Electronic technology replaces cinema’s centered, subjective spatio-temporal relationship with the world with the dispersed, insubstantial transmission of world and self across a network.
     
    In contrast to Sobchack’s mournful perspective, Lev Manovich views new media as the realization of cinema’s full potential. Cinema’s dream of producing a universal language has been fulfilled by the computer’s ability to remake the spectator into a user. The computer user not only understands but also speaks the language of the medium. Also, computer generated imagery and spatial montage enable more fully autonomous representation, beyond human-centered perspective. Manovich identifies new media as the meeting of two separate historical trajectories: computing technologies, which deal with the calculation of numerical data; and media technologies, which enable the storage of images, image sequences, sound and text in different material forms. New media describes the computerization of modern media forms (cinema, photography, radio, television, print press) and the translation of their representational objects into numerical data, made accessible through computers for media distribution, exhibition, production, and storage. For example, binary code replaces the iconic language of cinema. Although new media redefines and supplants modern media technologies, it also activates a return to cinema’s origins, for instance in the return to the loop.7
     
    Sobchack and Manovich seem to offer alternating accounts of the impact of digital media on cinema. The former declares cinema’s death and the latter insists on cinema’s continuous recursion in new media. Yet, despite their different approaches, both media scholars emphasize the structural role of media technologies in producing, or even determining, a relationship between spectator-user and autonomous representations of reality. Sobchack expresses concern over the dematerializing and objectifying effects of digitalization on spectator subjectivity. And Manovich celebrates the heightened agency of the digital-media user in participating in a less human-centered rendering of reality. In both cases, media technologies are presumed to mediate the production of spectator and user as forms of subjectivity.8
     

     
    Scene from I.K.U. Feeling of connectivity offered in parallel speeds, spatial proximity, and shared image of outstretched hand, linking motorcycle to scene in van.  © Eclectic DVD 2000.

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 3.

    Scene from I.K.U. Feeling of connectivity offered in parallel speeds, spatial proximity, and shared image of outstretched hand, linking motorcycle to scene in van.

    © Eclectic DVD 2000.
     

     
    In contrast, I.K.U.’s multiple media forms exceed what can be understood through the idea of technological mediation. The multiple screen-images that permeate the world of I.K.U. seem to offer diverse interfaces between viewers and the film. Displays that look like game consoles, computer windows, and mini-cam views invite viewers to interact with the images and information that appear onscreen. But the interactivity promised by screen-images in I.K.U. give viewer-users the impression of having either too much control or too little. Viewer-users are positioned as both commanding and commanded as we intercept communications. Moreover, aside from giving the look and feel of interactivity, the interfaces are non-functional. The instantaneous speed and infinite connectivity of a hyperlink on the Internet finds expression in the parallel movements of a moving van, carrying a man and woman having sex, and a scooter, carrying two Coders (see Fig. 3 above). Scooter and van travel next to each other on a highway, with an occasional projected image from the van appearing on the motor-helmets of the Coders on scooter. The projected image looks like an icon-pointer. Kinesthetic movement between vehicles and the icon-pointer image offer game and net interfaces between viewer-users and the multimedia film. Yet, these multimedia displays never deliver any actual interaction between viewer-users and media. Realizing Sobchack’s fears, viewer-users, along with the data collected by I.K.U. Coders, are transmitted as additional feed into some mainframe that surveils, collects, stores, and sends information and images. Nevertheless, the subjection of representations of humans in the film and viewer-users to an elusive technological master-entity provokes neither utopian nor dystopian sentiment in I.K.U.
     

    Frame Two: Human Structure of Feeling

     
    In Scott’s Blade Runner, the closing scene in the elevator with Deckard and Rachel re-brackets the question that has driven the sentiment of the film throughout, namely the question of whether the ability to experience emotions confers human status to the corporate engineered replicants. In Cheang’s I.K.U., this question never emerges. Although the Coder shows signs of pleasure during sexual activation, these signs are clearly part of an activation sequence. The sequence includes being fed lines, like “Say ‘kiss me’” and “I want you,” that the Coder then repeats back to an agent programmer (I.K.U. Runner) of the Genom Corporation.
     
    The Coder’s instrumental status as the product of genetic engineering and intravenously fed codes challenges David Harvey’s reading of postmodern affect in Blade Runner. In The Condition of Postmodernity, Harvey states:
     

    Blade Runner is a science fiction parable in which postmodernist themes, set in a context of flexible accumulation and time-space compression, are explored with all the imaginary power that the cinema can command. The conflict is between people living on different time scales, and seeing and experiencing the world very differently as a result. The replicants have no real history, but can perhaps manufacture one; history for everyone has become reduced to the evidence of the photograph.… The depressing side of the film is precisely that, in the end, the difference between the replicant and the human becomes so unrecognizable that they can indeed fall in love (once both get on the same time scale).
     

    (313)

     

    As in many other cyberpunk science fiction films, Blade Runner introduces the ethical puzzle of dehumanization in the face of an ethereal capitalism that has imploded differences in space, time, and meaning in what Harvey calls “chaos of signs.” Technological advancement releases humans from the brute exploitation and error of human economic production and biological reproduction. Yet, the specter of exploitation and unpredictability returns with greater force with the unrestrained use of genetically engineered human clones. According to Harvey, in Blade Runner, the activities (manual, militia, sex, etc.) performed by the replicants come under question as forms of exploitation particularly when the replicants become humanized through the expression of feeling. In the case of Rachel, her longing for a family of origin and authentic human status gains Deckard’s sympathy and desire (313-4). Roy, leader of the replicant rebellion, narrates his experiences as an outsourced laborer with a mixture of anger and fascination. In Harvey’s reading of the film, the feelings of loss and longing conveyed by the replicants place them outside the speed of global capital and, however momentarily, on the same scale of time and space with humans.

     
    Even more than the “structure of feeling” Harvey attributes to the aesthetics of decay fragmenting the post-industrial city, the structure of feeling he identifies in the replicants enables a tracing of the “hidden organizing power” of the Tyrell Corporation’s techno-dictatorship. For Harvey, Rachel and Roy subject themselves to the Freudian symbolic order that constitutes human social relations in their longing to be fully human. Rachel submits to Deckard’s desire and Roy to his maker. In both instances, desire brings grids of power into visibility and clone closer to human. In the last count, however, what fuels Harvey’s attention to the replicant’s approximation of the human is the desire to see a structure of feeling reignited in the human subjects of the film. As the mastermind behind the Tyrell Corporation states, replicants are more human than humans. They display all the trappings of humanness when real humans have lost all connection to these trappings. As Harvey suggests, the replicants of Blade Runner serve as signs that should lead humans back to their own experience of exploitation and their own history within symbolic orders of production and reproduction. But instead of reading the clone as sign, the clone is taken as human and the difference between the two “becomes so unrecognizable that they … fall in love.” As a result, the conclusion of the film for Harvey is “sheer escapism,” shedding all possibility for the revolt and rescue of humanity (311-14).
     
    If Deckard has lost the ability to distinguish between human and clone, Harvey retains the ability to make this judgment. In a striking moment, Harvey steps outside the film to comment from the position of viewer on the film’s “depressing side” (313). In this move to mourn the loss of the human in the slide between human and replicant, Harvey preserves a structure of feeling external to the film. While the longing of the replicants remained essentially an empty structure that led them and, most importantly, humans nowhere, the melancholia of the critic as viewer maintains the hope of remembering and recuperating the shared origins of the human under the exploitative conditions of production and reproduction.
     
    A reframing of Blade Runner through Cheang’s I.K.U. asks if anything other than an empty structure of feeling and human copy ever existed. The Coder is a figure for pure expenditure. The very contours of its body conform to maximize each sexual experience for its johns and for the intercepting gaze of film viewers. Each segment features a different mutation of the first Coder programmed in the elevator. Despite the Coder’s absolute use, its facial and bodily gestures are disconnected from any sense of depth that could be read as human psychic structure. Like the various consoles that riddle each scene, the Coder’s expressions during and after sex are flat icons for consumption. No psychic or corporeal space rests outside instrumentalization, where human subjectivity can emerge, however compromised.
     
    The I.K.U. Coder’s affectless state of absolute use cannot be read as symptom. In Postmodernism, Or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism, Fredric Jameson proposes:
     

    Let us stress again the enormity of a transition which leaves behind it the desolation of Hopper’s buildings or the stark Midwest syntax of Sheeler’s forms, replacing them with the extraordinary surfaces of the photorealist cityscape, where even the automobile wrecks gleam with some new hallucinatory splendour. The exhilaration of these new surfaces is all the more paradoxical in that their essential content—the city itself—has deteriorated or disintegrated to a degree surely still inconceivable in the early years of the 20th century, let alone in the previous era. How urban squalor can be a delight to the eyes, when expressed in commodification, and how an unparalleled quantum leap in the alienation of daily life in the city can now be experienced in the form of a strange new hallucinatory exhilaration … Nor should the human figure be exempted from investigation, although it seems clear that for the new aesthetic the representation of space itself has come to be felt as incompatible with the representation of the body: a kind of aesthetic division of labour far more pronounced than in any of the earlier generic conceptions of landscape, and a most ominous symptom indeed.
     

    (76)

     

    For Jameson, even the squalor of urban architecture gleams with the collapse of depth that characterizes the object world and the subject within postmodernism. In contrast to the depth-based aesthetics of alienation in high modernism, postmodernism is experienced as a free-floating and impersonal euphoria. A hermeneutic relationship to artwork and a metaphysical conception of the self no longer hold when all is commodified into flat images without content. Drawing from a Lacanian account of schizophrenia, Jameson insists that the world becomes a shiny film comprised of floating signifiers, disconnected from one another and from the intentionality of any subject. These dislodged signifiers give rise to a “hallucinatory exhilaration.” Older divisions of labor derived from a grounded organization of space and the human body itself no longer apply. A new division of labor occurs in the fragmented aesthetic of the “emergent sensorium” that Jameson reads in its nascent state in Van Gogh’s high modernist painting (58-64).

     
    Yet, the depthless, floating signifiers of the postmodern world must be returned to a depth-model interpretation for Jameson. They are re-subjected to a symptomatic reading that traces the adamantly flat surfaces of the contemporary world back to what is Jameson’s primary analytic grounding—the economic world system of multinational capitalism. In the last instance, the hallucinatory euphoria of postmodernism must be squared with the “enormous and threatening, yet only dimly perceivable, other reality of economic and social institutions” (80, my emphasis). Reality creeps back in a second, less perceivable strata. This move, I would argue, is only made possible through driving a wedge between a euphoric aesthetic condition and a capitalist political economy imagined as anchored in the objective terms of production, or division of labor. Jameson essentially separates capitalist production from the slew of racial, gendered, classed imaginaries that enable the organization and extraction of labor, thereby reaestheticizing capital itself. Only by making this separation can Jameson continue to follow a tripartite order of capitalist development from market capitalism, to monopoly or imperialist capitalism, finally to multinational capitalism, in which “precapitalist” tributary organizations of capitalism are ultimately eliminated (78). Jameson’s own cultural schema of development from realism, to modernism, to postmodernism builds on this economic tripartite.9
     
    While critiques of postmodern discourse are now familiar, I am particularly interested in stressing the move to retrace the symbolic orders of production and reproduction through unfixed signifiers that purportedly exceed these symbolic orders. Ultimately, longing for Harvey and euphoria for Jameson become signposts for productivity—the quintessential sign for the human. These postmodern renderings of Marxist analysis continue to re-inscribe the priority of the human subject and the human’s singular corporeal form against its objectification within relations of production.10 In I.K.U., the pure expenditure of the Coder is neither a condition nor symptom that can be traced to a more concrete reality in anything resembling a political economy. It is questionable whether the Coder’s accumulation of sexual experiences can be called labor, if labor is considered an objective measure of the embodied social output invested into a commodity. Laboring social body and commodity object cannot be separated when the relationship between the two is not production, reproduction, or even enjoyment, but rather the collection of sexual experience. If production in I.K.U. cannot be thought as a primary moment or space of social initiation and human subjectivity, conscious or unconscious, then the presumed temporal and spatial divisions between production, distribution, and consumption as separate moments and stages in a capitalist political economy are made untenable.11
     

     
    Scene from I.K.U. Runner and Coder bound through the most minimal displays of agency and freedom in I.K.U.'s machinic world.  © Eclectic DVD 2000.

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 4.

    Scene from I.K.U. Runner and Coder bound through the most minimal displays of agency and freedom in I.K.U.’s machinic world.

    © Eclectic DVD 2000.
     

     

    Frame Three: Machine Sex-Sexuality

     
    The Coder of Cheang’s I.K.U. embodies the impossibility of a recuperated humanism in the face of technological dominance—a dominance expressed sexually. According to Michel Foucault, sexuality plays a pivotal role in translating sovereign authority to self-regulatory power in liberal democratic societies. For Foucault, sexuality becomes a mobile cultural object that aggregates and multiplies the fields of influence (political, scientific, and medical) that compose decentralized, liberal capitalist states. In The History of Sexuality, Foucault reads sex as “unique signifier” and “universal signified” that manages, enforces, and extends life at the macro-levels of society and species and at the micro-level of individual self. Sexuality as a pivotal target and mobilizer of knowledge and political mastery enables the redirection and transformation of the sovereign “right to kill” into the modern state’s “right to make live” the social body (Society). Echoing Foucault’s discussion of sexuality, sex as biological or phenotypical foundation and sexuality as internal truth of the self are conflated in Cheang’s I.K.U. Far from an expression of fact or intimacy, sex-sexuality is a mobile imaginary that mutates according to the external and interconnecting demands of an abstract network of authority that the Coder’s sexual roving connects up.
     
    Whereas Foucault retains the body (as mass and individual) and interiority as the residual and excessive effects of regulatory networks of modern power, Cheang’s I.K.U. does not offer reprieve from the commands issued by its multimedia network. Sexuality in I.K.U.’s world expresses the non-difference between sovereignty and autonomy. The Coder’s drive to seek out sexual experiences and its performed enjoyment of sex seem to express free will and desire. Moreover, its mobility across different spaces and its bodily flexibility give the impression of autonomy. Yet, as programmed human clone, all aspects of the Coder serve the function of data extraction and accumulation. Also, the Coder’s movements are not only tracked and surveilled by a network of media machines, but are also followed and watched by film viewers. Wendy Chun describes the constrained autonomy experienced in digital networks as “control-freedom,” a new formation of U.S. political power facilitated and exemplified by information technologies.12 Ultimately, the Coder’s autonomy comprises nothing more than machinic activities that give the most minimal outputs of liveliness: mobility and flexibility as individual freedom, connectivity as collectivity, extraction and accumulation as passionate experience. Rather than mourning the downfall of anthropomorphic life, I.K.U. seems to follow Alexander Galloway and Eugene Thacker in suggesting that human life as ontological “being” never existed outside minimal cues for “life,” including the barest signs of vitality at work in information technologies. And in I.K.U., the downgraded indicators of autonomous life are synonymous with command, reporting, monitoring, and surveillance by a multimedia network that exerts sovereign yet decentralized control.
     
    In I.K.U., sex as binary difference between male and female, secured through sexual object choice, becomes alternating binary code.13 With an arm that transforms into a dildo-pointer, the feminine Coder’s entire body surface, beyond what is considered proper sexual organs, mutates as a sexual extension. It is a shifting transgender configuration of code and image, without claims to essential sex or stable concrete body. As J. Jack Halberstam proposes in “Technotopias: Representing Transgender Bodies in Contemporary Art,” the transgender body retains its ambiguity and ambivalence, irreducible to the transsexual body. The Coder itself is a multimedia network, receiving and storing input from, as well as sending output to, multiple synced sources. As a counterpart, the masculine Runner who programs and de-activates the Coder occupies the outskirts of the network. “He” acts as a direct relay between an unseen authority, to whom/which he reports, and the Coder in action. While the Coder is a product of encoding, the Runner’s body seems to be made of flesh. The Runner’s transgenderism is expressed through an undecidable body morphology in which so-called primary physical symbols of sex are indistinguishable from secondary indicators for gender. A bulge in the pants, like facial hair, only gives a cue about gender identity, without becoming a master signifier for sex.
     

     
    Scene from I.K.U. Virus Tokyo Rose transmits an invitation to an audience member as she performs her "Net Glass Show."  © Eclectic DVD 2000.

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 5.

    Scene from I.K.U. Virus Tokyo Rose transmits an invitation to an audience member as she performs her “Net Glass Show.”

    © Eclectic DVD 2000.
     

     
    In contrast to Coder and Runner, the Tokyo Rose Virus seems retrograde in its sexual embodiment and activities. It takes stable female bodily form, without prosthetics, ambiguities, morphs, and blends. And its communication style is neither a network with multiple interfaces nor two-way relay, both of which operate through the distribution of technological authority. Instead, Tokyo Rose uses telepathic lure and projection to ensnare Coder and viewers. The segment featuring Tokyo Rose’s “Net Glass Show” opens with a view from above while a pink Tokyo spins in a net below, before the screen becomes visible as green grid with a target mark at center (see Fig. 5 above). The screen-grid hones in and out of the faces of Tokyo’s audience of suited men wearing 3-D goggles. Viewers get a two-part panoramic view of a pink image of Tokyo licking a dildo in its net, superimposed partially onto a green image of the goggled audience below. The view becomes visible as screen once again as the green grid targets an audience member, the only masculine I.K.U. Coder in the film. After a few spliced segments, the screen-grid refocuses on the masculine Coder as it licks its fingers. A text-box appears mid-screen-grid:
     

    “You are a special guest tonight
    Please come to the backstage
    Tokyo Rose”

     
    Pulled by the invitation, the masculine Coder (and viewers who lurk in this exchange) meets Tokyo Rose “backstage,” where they have sex among moving metal screen walls and an analogue telephone switchboard. When the Coder penetrates the Virus, its body disintegrates into scrambled codes, and it is deactivated and disconnected from the I.K.U. network. If the Coder is a free-roving instrument within a decentralized, commanding network and the Runner a relay between the network’s “inside” and “outside,” the Virus lodges itself in the network’s core and reveals the vulnerability and limitations of the network’s hardware. The Virus reveals the cables and circuit boards that comprise the otherwise disembodied notion of cyberspace.14 All three protagonists inhabit the ecosystem of the I.K.U. network. But only the Virus inserts tension into the system as a byproduct that infiltrates and hijacks the multimedia network towards non-productive dysfunction.15
     
    In Cheang’s I.K.U., sex-sexuality is synonymous with the barest operations of a machinic system. Without feeling, the film cancels out any claim to sexual subjectivity or “bodies and pleasures” reserved as yet-unintelligible potential for counter-hegemonic opposition.16 Identical to multimedia technologies in I.K.U., sex-sexuality in the film provides interfaces with connectivity, mobility, accumulation, control, and transmission without the possibility of actual interaction. Sex cannot mediate the relationship between individuals and between community and individual across public/private divides. In “Sex in Public,” Lauren Berlant and Michael Warner argue for the countercultural potential of queer public sex, where queer is taken to embody all sexual practices, including failed or queered heterosexual ones, that do not fit the privatized mold of heteronormative domesticity. For Berlant and Warner, the ephemeral intimacies of queer public sex critique and cathect the heteronormative lodging of sexuality as the essential property of personhood and the reproductive seed for normative family and national community. They propose:
     

    Queer and other insurgents have long striven, often dangerously or scandalously, to cultivate what good folks used to call criminal intimacies. We have developed relations and narratives that are only recognized as intimate in queer culture: girlfriends, gal pals, fuckbuddies, tricks. Queer culture has learned not only how to sexualize these and other relations, but also how to use them as a context for witnessing intense and personal affect while elaborating a public world of belonging and transformation. Making a queer world has required the development of kinds of intimacy that bear no necessary relation to domestic space, to kinship, to the couple form, to property, or to the nation. These intimacies do bear a necessary relation to a counterpublic—an indefinitely accessible world conscious of its subordinate relation.
     

    (199)

     

    Berlant and Warner argue that the fleeting material of queer intimacy is criminal in relationship to heteronormative forms of intimacy, which are secured discursively by narratives of sentiment and also materially by law, domestic architecture, and the zoning of work and politics as non-intimate realms (203). Criminal queer intimacies have affective impact and build collective ties, even a counterpublic, without the anchors amassed by heteronormative meta-culture.

     
    In the world of I.K.U., however, the public/private divide presumed by Berlant and Warner does not exist. If sex can no longer be considered host to any intimate material, subordinate or dominant, the publics associated with economic and political collectivities, exchanges, and spaces are also devoid of material. I.K.U.’s future envisions the local as a series of close-ups in which the signs of a specialized locale and sexual experience underway give viewers a sense of peering into an intimate, subterranean location. In one segment, a Coder runs through an empty underground garage where it encounters a male hustler orally servicing a male drug dealer inside a moving car. Getting in the car, the Coder and the two men drive past a touring white heterosexual couple, who demand better quality (non-I.K.U.) sex pills, and two ecstatic drag queens in an elevated parked convertible. All indicators point to a subcultural location, including the literal underground placement of the garage and references to informal economies of gay cruising, gay hustling, drug dealing, drag performance, and drug rolling.
     
    Yet, no local scene emerges as a dense site of cultural practices and intimacies, giving neither a microcosm of a larger social world nor an alternative world. Each location is an installation made up of markers for a generic setting, like the parking indicators on the walls, ceiling, and floor of the garage, and markers for encounters that appear intimate through intense expressions, gestures, and actions with only incidental meaning. The Coder runs with urgency, but without purpose, through the garage. The drug dealer drives in circles inside the garage without motive other than prolonging a blowjob, flimsy encounters with buyers (no money is ever exchanged), or a change in scenery. These signs for cultural and geographic specificity have no significance beyond providing surface cues for local scale. Cheang’s I.K.U. seems to suggest the ephemeral, inauthentic nature of expressions of geographic and cultural specificity in the face of a more generalized global drive towards the appearance of motility and exchange. Emphasizing the imbrication of local and transnational scales, Arjun Appadurai’s Fear of Small Numbers looks at the co-dependent relationship between the “cellular” organization of global capitalism and a “vertebrate” structure of nation-states in contributing to ethnic strife and terrorism.
     
    Without authentic delineation between private and public spaces and exchanges, the Habermasian private/public distinction appropriated and re-asserted by Berlant and Warner is moot. As illustrated in their analysis of a performance at a local gay bar featuring erotic vomiting, queer counterpublics rely on non-discursive contagious affect as a means of amassing a collective subculture. But this move from bodily performance to collectivity involves a bifurcation between audience and stage, set, or frame. It essentially redraws a boundary between internal subjectivity, even based in what eludes it, and something external that watches, or in the words of Berlant and Warner, something that “witness[es] intense and personal affect” (199).
     

     
    Scene from I.K.U. Viewers participate in an unidentified mainframe that pictures, quantifies, and extracts the sexual experiences accumulated by the Coder.  © Eclectic DVD 2000.

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 6.

    Scene from I.K.U. Viewers participate in an unidentified mainframe that pictures, quantifies, and extracts the sexual experiences accumulated by the Coder.

    © Eclectic DVD 2000.
     

     

    Frame Four: Viral Spectatorship

     
    Everything is given up to sight in I.K.U. From the moment of entry, the film bombards viewers with multiple screen-images of virtual landscapes, animated holograms, gaming consoles, military grids, and advertisement logos. The mutating Coder is captured from every angle as it moves through each sexual assignment. And even the experience of corporeality and feeling imagined as the most interior and as eluding faculties of sight—the penetrative orgasm—is pictured.
     
    Signaling the conclusion of a sexual experience, the Coder of the moment readies its arm, which morphs into a digitally animated dildo-penis. The dildo-arm thrusts into its male and/or female john/s anally or vaginally, as if the movement is out of its control. The viewer is then treated to a digitally animated view of the dildo-arm moving in and out of an internal scene. Although this interior scene follows a more distanced view of the Coder positioning itself to penetrate its johns, once the dildo-arms goes inside, the head of the dildo-arm faces the viewer rather than facing outward. The viewer peers into the scene of penetration as if s/he were already inside the space being penetrated and, ultimately, as if s/he her/himself were being penetrated. But, even with what might seem like the wildest realization of interiority visually captured, the penetrated interior appears as impenetrable surfaces on all sides, without depth. The viewer is fucked and flattened into a surface, while the Coder racks up data points. Essentially, the morphing Coder pierces the viewing screen and moves into the viewer’s side of the screen, making sure that s/he knows that s/he is on the receiving end of a shared plane.
     
    The flattening out of penetrative sex through its visualization parts with conceptions of vision based on epistemological and phenomenological models, including those attempting to return vision to the materiality of the corporeal senses, against its objectification. In Hard Core: Power, Pleasure, and the “Frenzy of the Visible,” Linda Williams differentiates her critique of the cinematic apparatus from Laura Mulvey’s reframing of the Freudian fetish and the apparatus theories of Christian Metz and Jean-Louis Baudry. Williams shifts the weight of analysis away from an oedipal structure of fetishization and the presumption of a structure of desire pre-inscribed in the subject. Instead of finding a purely psychic structure at the heart of the cinematic apparatus, Williams treats cinema as a visual technology and as a dense synapse of discourses on sexuality that produces visual “hard-core” knowledge and pleasure based on naturalized sexual difference. Cinema itself is hard-core at its inception in its desire to quantify bodily movement, as illustrated in Muybridge’s Animal Locomotion, and in its superfluity, which is coded as female. In the genre of hard-core pornography specifically, this primitive desire is narrativized as the urge to extract an involuntary confession of pleasure—the female orgasm—against the impossibility of its visual objective measure in a “frenzy of the visible.” While Williams reframes cinematic spectatorship as an interplay between a visual technological drive, conflated with male desire, and its female object of erotic surplus, Laura Marks’s “haptic visuality” attempts to overrun the optic tracking of cinematic visuality altogether. In Touch: Sensory Theory and Multisensory Media, Marks draws from the work of art historian Alois Riegl in contending that haptic visuality haunts optic visuality as an embodied organization of looking that emphasizes touch and kinesthetics over sight. Haptic looking builds an erotic intersubjective relation between a haptic image, which invites the viewer to dissolve her/his subjectivity in bodily contact, and a viewer that actively labors to constitute the haptic image from latency. In contrast to an optical image, which requires identification with figures depicted in abstract space, a haptic image brushes against the look of the viewer as a surface. For Marks, digital video in particular is the ideal medium for producing haptic images, with its signal-based image, low contrast ratio, openness to electronic and digital manipulation, and decay.
     
    Like Williams’s “frenzy of the visible,” then, Marks’s “haptic looking” exceeds the optical and psychic structure of spectatorship mapped in apparatus theories. Whereas Williams focuses on the dynamics of (over)animation and failure in wresting visual sexual truths, Marks emphasizes the collapse of depth perception into an intersubjective surface, or skin, between haptic viewer and haptic (digital) image. Although Marks’s phenomenologically valenced theorization adds the angle of “deliberate” haptic viewing, both Marks and Williams nevertheless coordinate visual technology, viewing subjectivity, and visual object (Williams) or image (Marks) into a synchronized bundle. For Williams, this bundle of vision moves like a well-oiled machine:
     

    The woman’s ability to fake the orgasm that the man can never fake (at least according to certain standards of evidence) seems to be at the root of all the genre’s attempts to solicit what it can never be sure of: the out-of-control confession of pleasure, a hard-core “frenzy of the visible.”
     
    The animating male fantasy of hard-core cinema might therefore be described as the (impossible) attempt to capture visually this frenzy of the visible in female body whose orgasmic excitement can never be objectively measured.
     

    (50)

     

    Cinematic technologies, cinematic viewing, and male fantasy continue to be conflated on the side of vision as the “animating male fantasy of hard-core cinema.” Moreover, Williams continues to rely on a dyadic structure of viewing that locks the triadic compression of viewing, technologies, and phallocentric fantasy to its animating object, the female body’s invisible orgasm.

    Although Marks’ haptic viewing seems to undo a dyadic structure of vision based on identification and objectification, haptic intersubjectivity continues to hold onto a dyadic-monadic joining of viewer and image-medium. Marks argues:
     

    Haptic images invite the viewer to dissolve his or her subjectivity in the close and bodily contact with the image. The oscillation between the two creates an erotic relationship, a shifting between distance and closeness. But haptic images have a particular erotic quality, one involving giving up visual control. The viewer is called on to fill in the gaps in the image, engage with the traces the image leaves. By interacting up close with an image, close enough that figure and ground commingle, the viewer gives up her own sense of separateness from the image.

    (13)

     

    Viewing binds together viewer, image, and viewing technology (video), which for Marks is indistinguishable from the haptic image.  
    For both Williams and Marks, then, apparatus theories serve not only as a point of departure and revision, but also as a lingering organizing principle that synchronizes visual medium, subjectivity (psychic and/or corporeal), and object/image.

    I.K.U.’s visual capturing of female and male orgasm does not compute with the dialectical framework presumed in Williams’s and Marks’s automation of vision. The film’s scenes of penetration, viewed from the interior, may seem to wrest for the viewer an invisible confession of fe/male pleasure, which is to also de-animate the dyad that comprises animating object and cinematic viewing. Yet, the scenes of penetration are anything but penetrative. The so-called interior is a virtual grid, and the Coder’s dildo-penis (itself already signaling the impossibility of the phallus) is also a surface, even as it penetrates. Orgasm, as the non-representable sublime of female interiority and of disavowed male corporeal interiority, becomes nothing more than a display of surfaces and the warped computerized sounds of orgasmic heat. Interiority itself is flattened and turned outward towards the viewer as yet another compulsory surface that hails the viewer as someone internal to the scene of penetration, or more accurately, as merely another surface among surfaces. Moreover, there is no one at the controls. The Coder’s penetrating arm, like the Coder itself, moves at the whim of some unidentifiable source that never materializes beyond trace elements like the Runner. The dyad between a desiring penetrative force, in alignment with vision, and interiority dispels into unsynchronized screen-surfaces at the caprice of an unverifiable sovereign.
     
    I.K.U.’s take on vision ultimately de-synchronizes the dual structure of racialized gender assumed in the dyadic binding of vision. For Williams, cinematic vision remains resolutely male, while its animating object of desire is female. In recommitting to this gender dyad, she fails to question the production of interiority itself as a sign of white femininity. I would push Williams’s notion of mutual animation further in proposing that the drive to make visible the feeling of interiority, sexualized as female pleasure, itself generates the corporeality and interiority of the white female body. White female corporeality, as an embodiment of interior feeling, materializes in the obsessive visualization of the female body, animated by an implanted interiority. White female embodiment, as corporealized interiority, emerges in this process wherein interior and exterior, feeling and body are mutually generated. Paired with the elusive bodily object of female interiority is a disembodied male visual drive, aligned with cinematic technology. White male corporeality, as technologically propelled desire, crystallizes alongside white female corporeal interiority in a heteronormative dyad.
     
    At first glance, Marks seems to evade this racial re-gendering of vision. But the orientation of the viewer towards the receptive (rather than projective) technologies of video draws from an erotic imaginary related to the maternal body. Drawing from psychoanalytically inflected theories of object-relations, Marks associates haptic visuality with the relationship between mother and infant and its oscillation between immersion and identification. The yielding, rather than commanding, “shared embodiment” or “caress” of haptic eroticism draws from what is imagined as the threshold corporeality of the mother. The maternal body occupies a close yet unattainable in-between space for the infant (and male lover), caught up in a play of unindividuated desire and loss. As in Williams, the deracinated, eroticized female body takes shape within a white racial imaginary that animates a male/female, masculine/feminine binary associated respectively with activity (even in surrender)/receptivity.
     
    With I.K.U., the Euro-American imaginary in which the female body and femininity constitute the threshold between visible and non-visible worlds becomes marked.17 The Coder and Virus Tokyo Rose appear through roving screens that promise nothing beyond the hyper-visibility to which everything has already been subjected, including the corporeal and psychic recesses of female and male bodies. The superimposed screen-images which picture Coder and Virus move autonomously without anchor in any identifiable visual technology aligned with the viewer. And the viewer her/himself is internalized within the film, folded into I.K.U. as another surface used, as another “it.” Or, as Mark Poster puts it, the binary distinction between subject and object dissipates.18 Vision is neither liminal membrane nor drive constituting object and subject of sight, even at the dissolve of these positions.
     
    Taken to extreme, Cheang’s I.K.U. eclipses the emphasis on visibility as a measure for cultural and political progress. As Rey Chow contends, visibility fails to redress marginalization when the conditions of possibility for visibility, as a form of and demand for knowledge, are not examined.19 In I.K.U., nothing exists outside of visibility as a totalizing imaginary premised on compulsory interfaces between screen-images without depth, propelled without internal or external source. In other words, there is no distinction between image and imaginary in I.K.U. The film, therefore, pushes towards a collapse of dialectic models of interpretation that continue to subtend cinematic, visual, and cultural critique. And it does so without the ambivalent possibilities and complicities indexed through affect, as that which constitutes and exceeds the visible image. I.K.U.’s compulsory imaginary, without pleasure or terror, hinges on the plasticity of the Asian feminine body.
     

     
    Scene from I.K.U. Coder takes Asian feminine form as an embodiment of technological instrumentalization.  © Eclectic DVD 2000.

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 7.

    Scene from I.K.U. Coder takes Asian feminine form as an embodiment of technological instrumentalization.

    © Eclectic DVD 2000.
     

     
    When viewed as provoking an encounter with the cultural fantasy of the Asian feminine body, Cheang’s I.K.U. reframes discourses on alternative (sometimes considered exemplary) formations of capitalism in the Asia-Pacific. Intervening in these discourses, Pheng Cheah, in “Chinese Cosmopolitanism in Two Senses and Postcolonial National Memory,” tracks the conflation of so-called Confucian-based cosmopolitan capitalism with Chinese diasporas as an effect of the incorporative tactics of globalization and Southeast Asian state regimes. In I.K.U., the objective categories of capital, technology, and nation-state are powered by the sexual extensions and morphing of the Coder’s racialized body. This cipher buttresses public discourses and ultimately determines these discourses as its constitutive matter—without materiality. I.K.U. refuses the division between cultural imagination, on one side, and economic and political discourses, on the other, and instead proposes something like economic and political imaginaries that produce exploitation, without traceable structural sources. Capital is the absolutely commodified, autonomous body of the Asian feminine Coder, commanded and programmed by an entity that never appears on scene. This overtaking of objective economic and political categories by a cultural imaginary has nothing to do with a new stage of capitalism. In I.K.U., there are no remnants of any past. The melding of cultural imaginary and political economic structures, of private and public, of pre-social and social exists without memory or possibility of change.
     

    Conclusion: Neither the Medium nor the Message

     
    My engagement with Cheang’s I.K.U. may appear to be a reckless razing of some of the conceptual grounds for prevalent approaches to cultural or social problematics. Yet, this piece attempts to shift the terms of critique towards a limit case in cultural and social strategies premised on the rational concept of mediation. The Coder denies the possibility of technological mediation by multimedia forms, and accompanying critical apparatuses (which operate themselves as technological modes), in producing and enhancing human subjectivity. And the Coder also rejects the notion of ideological mediation as a strategy for addressing the encoding of dominant social relations in multimedia content.20 This ideological version of mediation too often poses the possibility of rehabilitating normative subjectivity, especially in racial and sexual terms, through the rectifying labor of criticism or the appropriative pleasure of spectatorship. The Coder’s instrumental exploitation by a sovereign network is too asymmetrical a condition to be understood or countered through measured concepts of subjectivity, commodification, and labor. I.K.U. refuses the grounds of critical debate, when posed as the medium versus the message.21
     

     
    Scene from I.K.U. Identification displays for morphing I.K.U. Coder and Virus Tokyo Rose  © Eclectic DVD 2000.

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 8.

    Scene from I.K.U. Identification displays for morphing I.K.U. Coder and Virus Tokyo Rose

    © Eclectic DVD 2000.
     

     
    Protagonists of I.K.U. embody images of racial and gender flexibility, mutability, and mobility. Coded Asian feminine, both Coder and Virus are screen-images whose verbal and physical expressions read as displays and transmissions (see Fig. 8 above). The Coder speaks techno-jibberish that sounds Japanese, interspersed with techno-English acronyms like “ISDN.” And, although the Virus communicates without speaking, its identification display bears illegible encryptions that look like Thai, Japanese, or Chinese writing. Both Coder and Virus are technological bodies that morph and perform according to the demands of their programming (or anti-programming). As Laura Hyun Yi Kang proposes in Compositional Subjects: Enfiguring Asian/American Women, the spatial-temporal delineations of global capitalist development depends on the figuring of the undifferentiated category of Asian women, fixed within a retrograde past of capitalist progress as docile bodies, complementing all types of exploitative labor (from assembly to prostitution).
     

     
    Scene from I.K.U. Identification display for I.K.U. Runner.  © Eclectic DVD 2000.

    Click for larger view

    Fig. 9.

    Scene from I.K.U. Identification display for I.K.U. Runner.

    © Eclectic DVD 2000.
     

     
    As a complementary, yet differentiated entity in I.K.U., the Runner is coded black masculine, taking the form of mutated human flesh rather than mutating technology (see Fig. 9 above). While Coder and Virus are objects inhabiting the parameters of the network, the Runner operates just outside the network as a transmitter. The Runner’s intermediary position between internal network and external command is expressed through direct interaction with surveillance cams and an activation/deactivation tool resembling a gun. Also, in contrast to the incomprehensible, yet language-like communication of Coder and Virus, the Runner speaks clearly in what is identifiably American English. As suggested by Roderick Ferguson, the militarized re-masculinization of black masculinity, according to heteronormative and patriotic sexual, gender, and familial standards, became a U.S. state sponsored project in the effort to neutralize Civil Rights social agitation and growing contradictions in capitalist expansion.22
     
    Asian feminine Coder and Virus and black masculine Runner embody co-dependent racial prototypes. They provide minimal indicators of cultural specificity to enable generalization into racial form. The Coder’s Japanese-ness and the Virus’s Southeast or East Asian-ness connote the kinds of abstract ethnic and regional particularity that characterizes pan-Asian racialization as both always foreign and already assimilated in reference to American national identity. The Runner’s racial blackness serves as a transnationally recognizable, exportable sign for American multiculturalism, eliding the history of racism, apartheid, and enslavement that is part of the racialization of African diasporas. These racial modules operate through sexualization. Against the normative image of gender-differentiated sexual interiority attributed to racial whiteness, the Coder and Runner in particular are racially marked by their transgenderism and pansexuality. The Coder’s body is a gender-morphing surface that treats both male and female johns as undistinguished objects for penetration and sexual data extraction. The Runner’s body is corporeally undecided in its gender, and “his” sexual ventures extend beyond the feminine Coder he activates, to include a male hustler in an alternate ending to the film. Runner and Coder offer counterpoints to the binary system of gender that is tied to complimentary sexual object choice and at work in normative versions of heterosexuality and homosexuality.
     
    Together, I.K.U. Coder, Virus, and Runner seem to realize a utopian vision of a multicultural, gender flexible, sexually liberated world. Yet, in Cheang’s film, these racial, gender, and sexual markers for equality and freedom are not only constricted but subordinated by a sovereign network of multimedia technologies. All three protagonists, including the Runner who seems to occupy a position external to the network, function as part of the network’s totalizing system of image and data display, extraction, transmission, and storage. In I.K.U., representational technology and representational content are identical. They express machinic signs of autonomy—mobility, connectivity, and accumulation—which remain subjected to an unseen authority. Despite I.K.U.’s zero-grade utopia, the film never strikes a dystopian chord.23 Rather than calling for a rescue from negative imagery, I.K.U. engages in what Celine Parreñas Shimizu calls a “race-positive” sexual politics, which does not strive for normative status. At the same time, the film makes visible the sexual racial fantasies that fundamentally structure the project of cultural representation. Addressing the role of fantasy, Hortense Spillers describes the disfiguring translation of the captive African body into sensuous mathematical symbols, quantified for transport, sale, and purchase.24 And Trinh T. Minh-ha highlights the racialized fascination with East Asia underpinning the legacy of Saussurian semiotics.25
     
    Cheang’s I.K.U. hyperbolizes the limitations that accompany racial and sexual visibility within a reductive economy of cultural representation that values circulation and accumulation above all. Within the context of globally expanding liberal capitalism, the multimedia film compels viewers to embrace our objectification as machines exhibiting minimal vital signs. It pushes us to abandon our longing to rescue the human in us, if only to redirect us towards what might lie beyond the parameters of the merely imaginable.
     

    Jian Chen is Assistant Professor/Faculty Fellow in the Gallatin School of Individualized Study at New York University, under the auspices of the NYU Postdoctoral and Transition Program for Academic Diversity. Chen’s current research explores new demands made on cultural consumption, representation, and politics, by the transnational circulation of images of sexual, gender, and racial flexibility. Chen’s work brings into conversation the areas of queer and transgender critique; film, new media, and visual cultures; Asian diasporas; and comparative race studies.
     

    Notes

     
    1. On the persistence of the Hollywood standard, see Thomas and Vivian C. Sobchack; David Bordwell and Kristin Thompson; and André Bazin. For Bazin, the cinematic image provides a window into the metaphysical world.

     

     
    2. See Fernando Solanas and Octavio Gettino. Also, The Hour of the Furnaces [La hora de los hornos]. Dir. Fernando Solanas and Octavio Gettino. Grupo Cine Liberacion/Solanas Productions, 1968. Film.

     

     
    3. See description on the official website for Cheang Shu Lea’s I.K.U.: http://www.i-k-u.com.

     

     
    4. Against the declaration that the digital image severs ties to indexicality, Laura Mulvey suggests a return to the photographic index with the slowing down of film’s continuity and the dormancy of material, waiting to be noticed, with the advent of new media technologies.

     

     
    5. Friedberg suggests that new systems of circulation, transmission, and reception with the advent of the twenty-first century have made cinema an “originary visual system for a complexly diverse set of ‘postcinematic’ visualities’” (6).

     

     
    6. See Williams and Gledhill.

     

     
    7. Consider also Bolter and Grusin’s concept of “remediation,” which argues that each media form works through the translation, refashioning, and reforming of other media, rather than through supplanting old with new media.

     

     
    8. Raymond Williams identifies three current, conflicting uses of the term “mediation.” These uses can be described shorthand through the terms: conciliation; ideology or rationalization; and form.

     

     
    9. Although I will not elaborate here, it is important to mention Jameson’s use of a poem entitled “China” to build his case for the schizophrenic aesthetics of postmodernism. Although Jameson uses this poem to emphasize the layers of aesthetic abstraction that make any reference to a real “China” impossible, this moment suggests for me the centrality of the figure of China in making possible the foundational divide between matter and abstraction.

     

     
    10. In Marx’s Capital (Vol.1), labor is the unrecognized specter that effectively gives a commodity its exchange value. Its recognition as the crucial ingredient in a commodity’s value offers the possibility of reclaiming this objective value as subjective labor-power, or as abstract labor exerted by the subjective and collective agency of the laborer. In Marx, then, to identify labor is already to identify the core bodily commodity within the object commodity and ultimately the potential social agency that powers this bodily commodity. In his analysis of the transport-communication industry in Capital (Vol. 2), Marx also forecasts the absolute “death” or sublation of the commodity form, and thus its “memory” of capital’s predication in social subjectivity and the translation of value. Within this industry, the commodity produced (namely spatial movement itself) is instantaneously consumed, as production and circulation phases in the reproduction of capital are collapsed.
     
    My reading of Marx is informed by Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak’s resistance to the teleological threads within Marxist thinking, which would seem to offer socialism as only a reversal of capitalism by reading the social subjectivity within capital as irreducible, spectralized or virtualized trace and thus irretrievable through reversal. See A Critique of Postcolonial Reason and “Ghostwriting.”
     

    11. The simultaneity of circuits within capitalism’s overriding drive towards productivity is captured by Deleuze and Guattari’s tongue-and-cheek analysis of “bodies without organs” in Anti-Oedipus.

     
    12. Drawing from Foucault’s Discipline and Punish in particular, Chun argues for a shift from “disciplinary power operated through visible yet unverifiable apparatuses of power” to Gilles Deleuze’s notion of control societies, which function through the softer forces of modulation and codes. While liberty for Chun is linked to individual subjectivity tied to official institutions in disciplinary societies, freedom is linked to autonomy unbound to subjects and institutions in control societies.

     

     
    13. Siobhan Somerville maps the shift from the model of homosexual inversion in sexology to the notion of homosexuality as abnormal sexual object choice in the U.S. during the early 20th century.

     

     
    14. On the organic premise of the idea of “network,” see Wigley, “Network Fever.”

     

     
    15. Refer to Dibbell, “Viruses Are Good for You.”

     

     
    16. In the History of Sexuality Vol. 1, Foucault locates the possibility of a “counterattack” against the regulatory deployment of sexuality in “bodies and pleasures.”

     

     
    17. Maurice Merleau-Ponty’s painterly phenomenology of perception realigns the image with the body as an imaginary threshold between the visible and invisible. The image is not a copy. Rather, it is an inward tapestry of the real, hosting carnal traces of things in the external world. Although less pronounced, Merleau-Ponty’s carnalization of the portal of visibility also draws from the masculinization of looking outward and the materiality of the maternal body. Also refer to Gayle Salamon’s recent work for a compelling read of Merleau-Ponty, alongside Frantz Fanon, that queries the assumption that the inner core of the body, in retreat from the bodily surface, remains impermeable to social structures of race and gender.

     

     
    18. Poster refers to the inapplicability of the binary relationship between subject and object when humans are hooked into information machines.

     

     
    19. In particular, Chow derails the current conversation about Chinese cinema away from fascination about a shiny new object of vision towards an investigation of the fantasies (social and intimate) that generate visual production.

     

     
    20. On the limits of Althusserian conceptions of ideology and its revisions, see Stuart Hall, “The Problem of Ideology: Marxism Without Guarantees.”

     

     
    21. See McLuhan, “The Medium Is the Message.” On “mediumlessness,” see Negroponte.

     

     
    22. See Ferguson’s analysis of the U.S. Department of Labor’s Moynihan Report, released one year after the Civil Rights Act of 1964.

     

     
    23. Samir Amin calls the reduction of democracy to the law of value, governed by liberal capitalism, “low-intensity democracy” in The Liberal Virus.

     

     
    24. As Spillers suggests, the expropriative and spectacular transport of African subjects in the Middle Passage, at slave auctions, and in the repetitious disfigurements of captivity enable the accrual of the entangled discursive and economic concepts of modern sovereignty.

     

     
    25. Trinh reads Roland Barthes’s fascination with the empty or suspended signs of Japan and China as figures that re-confront Western discourse with its own imagined gaps: “We read the author reading Asia.… The unknown that [Barthes] confronts is neither Japan nor China but his own language, and through it, that of all the West” (220).
     

    Works Cited

       

     

    • Amin, Samir. The Liberal Virus: Permanent War and the Americanization of the World. Trans. James Membrez. New York: Monthly Review Press, 2004. Print.
    • Appadurai, Arjun. Fear of Small Numbers: An Essay on the Geography of Anger. Durham: Duke UP, 2006. Print.
    • Bazin, André. What Is Cinema? Volume 1. Trans. Hugh Gray. Berkeley: U California P, 2005.
    • Blade Runner. Dir. Ridley Scott. Warner Bros. Pictures, 1991. Warner Home Video, 2006. DVD.
    • Bolter, Jay and Richard Grusin. Remediation: Understanding New Media. Cambridge: MIT Press, 1999. Print.
    • Bordwell, David and Kristin Thompson. Film Art: An Introduction. 9th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2010. Print.
    • Cheah, Pheng. “Chinese Cosmompolitanism in Two Senses and Postcolonial National Memory.” Inhuman Conditions: On Cosmopolitanism and Human Rights. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2006. 120-142. Print.
    • Chow, Rey. Sentimental Fabulations, Contemporary Chinese Films: Attachment in the Age of Global Visibility. New York: Columbia UP, 2007. Print.
    • Chun, Wendy Hui Kyong. Control and Freedom: Power and Paranoia in the Age of Fiber Optics. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2006. Print.
    • Deleuze, Gilles and Félix Guattari. Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Robert Hurley, Mark Seem, and Helen R. Lane. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983. Print.
    • Dibbell, Julian. “Viruses Are Good for You.” New Media, Old Media: A History and Theory Reader. Eds. Wendy Hui Kyong Chun and Thomas Keenan. New York: Routledge, 2006. 219-232. Print.
    • Ferguson, Roderick. Aberrations in Black: Toward a Queer of Color Critique. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2004. Print.
    • Foucault, Michel. History of Sexuality, Volume 1: An Introduction. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: Vintage Books, 1985. Print.
    • ———. Society Must Be Defended: Lectures at the College de France, 1975-76. Trans. David Macey. New York: Picador, 2003. Print.
    • Friedberg, Anne. The Virtual Window: From Alberti to Microsoft. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2006. Print.
    • Galloway, Alexander and Eugene Thacker. The Exploit: A Theory of Networks. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2007. Print.
    • Halberstam, Judith. “Technotopias: Representing Transgender Bodies in Contemporary Art.” In a Queer Time & Place: Transgender Bodies, Subcultural Lives. New York: New York UP, 2005. 97-124. Print.
    • Hall, Stuart. “The Problem of Ideology: Marxism Without Guarantees.” Stuart Hall: Critical Dialogues in Cultural Studies. Eds. David Morley and Kuan-Hsing Chen. New York: Routledge, 1996. 24-45. Print.
    • Harvey, David. The Condition of Postmodernity: An Enquiry into the Origins of Cultural Change. Cambridge: Blackwell, 1990. Print.
    • The Hour of the Furnaces [La hora de los hornos]. Dir. Fernando Solanas and Octavio Gettino. Grupo Cine Liberacion/Solanas Productions, 1968. DVD.
    • I.K.U. Dir. Cheang Shu Lea. Eclectic DVD Distribution, 2000. DVD.
    • I.K.U.com. 2022. Uplink Co. 11 October 2009. <http://www.i-k-u.com/>. Web.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Postmodernism, Or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke UP, 1991. Print.
    • Kang, Laura Hyun Yi. Compositional Subjects: Enfiguring Asian/American Women. Durham: Duke UP, 2002. Print.
    • Manovich, Lev. The Language of New Media. Cambridge: The MIT Press, 2001. Print.
    • Marks, Laura. Touch: Sensory Theory and Multisensory Media. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2002. Print.
    • Marx, Karl. Capital: A Critique of Political Economy. Volume 1. Trans. Ben Fowkes. New York: Penguin Books, 1976. Print.
    • ———. Capital: A Critique of Political Economy. Volume 2. Trans. David Fernbach. New York: Penguin Books, 1978. Print.
    • McLuhan, Marshall. “The Medium Is the Message.” Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man. New York: Routledge, 1964.7-23. Print.
    • Merleau-Ponty, Maurice. “Eye and Mind.” The Primacy of Perception and Other Essays on Phenomenological Psychology, the Philosophy of Art, History and Politics. Evanston: Northwestern UP, 1964. 159-192. Print.
    • Minh-Ha, Trinh T. When the Moon Waxes Red: Representation, Gender and Cultural Politics. New York: Routledge, 1991. Print.
    • Mulvey, Laura. Death 24x a Second: Stillness and the Moving Image. London: Reaktion Books, 2006. Print.
    • Nakamura, Lisa. Digitalizing Race: Visual Cultures of the Internet. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2008. Print.
    • Negroponte, Nicholas. Being Digital. New York: Vintage Books, 1995. Print.
    • Parreñas Shimizu, Celine. Hypersexuality of Race: Performing Asian/American Women on Screen and Scene. Durham: Duke UP, 2007. Print.
    • Poster, Mark. Information Please: Culture and Politics in the Age of Digital Machines. Durham: Duke UP, 2006. Print.
    • Salamon, Gayle. “‘The Place Where Life Hides Away’: Merleau-Ponty, Fanon, and the Location of Bodily Being.” Differences 17.2 (2006): 96-112. Web.
    • Sobchack, Thomas and Vivian C. Sobchack. An Introduction to Film. Glenview: Longman, 1987. Print.
    • Sobchack, Vivian. “The Scene of the Screen: Envisioning Cinematic and Electronic Presence.” Carnal Thoughts: Embodiment and Moving Image Culture. Berkeley: U of California, 2004. 135-164. Print.
    • Solanas, Fernando and Octavio Gettino. “Towards a Third Cinema.” Film and Theory: An Anthology. Eds. Robert Stam and Toby Miller. Malden: Blackwell, 2000. 265-286. Print,
    • Somerville, Siobhan. Queering the Color Line: Race and the Invention of Homosexuality in American Culture. Durham: Duke UP, 2000. Print.
    • Spillers, Hortense J. “Mama’s Baby, Papa’s Maybe: An American Grammar Book.” Black, White, and in Color: Essays on American Literature and Culture. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2003. 203-229. Print.
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. A Critique of Postcolonial Reason: Toward a History of the Vanishing Present. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1999. Print.
    • ———. “Ghostwriting.” Diacritics 25.2 (Summer 1995): 65-84. Web.
    • Warner, Michael and Lauren Berlant. “Sex in Public.” Publics and Counterpublics. Michael Warner. New York: Zone Books, 2002. 65-124. Print.
    • Wigley, Mark. “Network Fever.” New Media, Old Media: A History and Theory Reader. Eds. Wendy Hui Kyong Chun and Thomas Keenan. New York: Routledge, 2006. 375-398. Print.
    • Williams, Linda. Hard Core: Power, Pleasure, and the “Frenzy of the Visible.” Berkeley: U of California P, 1989. Print.
    • Williams, Linda and Christine Gledhill, eds. Reinventing Film Studies. New York: Oxford UP, 2000. Print.
    • Williams, Raymond. “Mediation.” Keywords: a Vocabulary of Culture and Society. New York: Oxford UP, 1983. 188. Print.